UC-NRLF 


*B    3Db    7Mfl 


mil  i  i  i  i'i  1 1!  $/  '• 1 1 !  *  i  B 

JOHN  SWETT, 


I 


i  in  conducting 

wessons  in  Latin,  or  an  Intro- 
mit! Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar. 

~igned  for  the  younger  classes  of  Latin  students,  to 

Grammar  might,  at  first,  appear  too  formidable,  and  for 

y  period  of  life,  may  wish  to  acquire  an  accurate  knowledge 

t  principles  of  the  language.     The  work  is  complete  in  itself, 

•iig  the  prominent  rules^and  principles  of  the  Grammar,  with  easy 

mg  and  writing  lessons,  serving  to  illustrate  those  principles.     It  is 

so  furnished  with  numerous  grammatical  references,  and  a  dictionary 

of  the  Latin  wrords  and  phrases  occurring  in  the  lessons. 

Latin  Reader.  The  First  Part  of  Jacobs  and  Doring's 
Latin  Reader,  with  a  Dictionary  and  Notes;  adapted  to 
Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar. 

The  plan  of  this  edition  of  the  Latin  Reader,  which  was  in  a  great 
degree  new,  has  been  so  highly  approved,  as  to  lead  to  its  introduction, 
with  suitable  modifications,  into  all  the  subsequent  volumes  of  the  series. 
Instead  of  the  grammatical  notes  usually  found  in  works  of  this  kind, 
numerous  references  are  every  where  made  to  those  principles  of  the 
Grammar  which  serve  to  explain  the  peculiarities  of  form  or  construction 
which  occur  in  the  lessons.  The  application  of  these  principles  is  gen- 
erally left  to  the  sagacity  of  the  student,  and  by  this  means  a  wholesome 
exercise  of  his  faculties  is  fully  secured. 

Latill  Exercises;    adapted  to  Andrews   and  Stoddard's 

Latin  Grammar. 

The  exercises  contained  in  this  volume  are  designed  to  illustrate  the 
principles  of  the  Latin  Grammar  in  its  various  departments,  and  to  render 
their  application  easy  and  familiar  to  the  student.     The  plan  and  ariange 


NEW  SERIES  OF  LATIN  SCHOOL  BOOKS. 


CROCKER   &    BREWSTER, 

No.    47    WASHINGTON    STREET,    BOSTON, 

Publish  the  following  Books,   which   constitute  a  regular  series  of 

elementary  Latin  works  designed  for  the  use  of  Schools :  — 

Latin  Grammar.  A  Grammar  of  the  Latin  Language, 
for  the  Use  of  Schools  and  Colleges.  By  Professor  E.  A. 
Andrews  and  Professor  S.  Stoddard. 

This  Grammar  has  been  adopted  in  most  of  the  schools  and  colleges 
of  this  country.  It  is  distinguished  for  its  copiousness,  its  philosophical 
arrangement,  and  the  scientific  precision  of  its  rules  and  definitions. 

The  following  works  have  been  prepared  by  Professor  Andrews,  for 
the  purpose  of  completing  the  series,  of  which  the  Grammar  of  Andrews 
and  Stoddard  is  the  basis  :  — 

Questions    on    the    Grammar.       Questions    on 

Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar. 

This  little  volume  is  intended  to  aid  the  student  in  examining  himself 
in  regard  to  the  preparation  of  his  lessons,  and  the  teacher  in  conducting 
his  recitations. 

Latin  J>essons.  First  Lessons  in  Latin,  or  an  Intro- 
duction to  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar. 
This  volume  is  designed  for  the  younger  classes  of  Latin  students,  te 
whom  the  larger  Grammar  might,  at  first,  appear  too  formidable,  and  for 
all  who,  at  any  period  of  life,  may  wish  to  acquire  an  accurate  knowledge 
of  the  first  principles  of  the  language.  The  work  is  complete  in  itself, 
containing  the  prominent  rules^and  principles  of  the  Grammar,  with  easy 
reading  and  writing  lessons,  serving  to  illustrate  those  principles.  It  is 
also  furnished  with  numerous  grammatical  references,  and  a  dictionary 
of  the  Latin  words  and  phrases  occurring  in  the  lessons. 

lift  till  Reader.  The  First  Part  of  Jacobs  and  Doring's 
Latin  Reader,  with  a  Dictionary  and  Notes;  adapted  to 
Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar. 

The  plan  of  this  edition  of  the  Latin  Reader,  which  was  in  a  great 
degree  new,  has  been  so  highly  approved,  as  to  lead  to  its  introduction, 
with  suitable  modifications,  into  all  the  subsequent  volumes  of  the  series. 
Instead  of  the  grammatical  notes  usually  found  in  works  of  this  kind, 
numerous  references  are  every  where  made  to  those  principles  of  the 
Grammar  which  serve  to  explain  the  peculiarities  of  form  or  construction 
which  occur  in  the  lessons.  The  application  of  these  principles  is  gen- 
erally left  to  the  sagacity  of  the  student,  and  by  this  means  a  wholesome 
exercise  of  his  faculties  is  fully  secured. 

Latin  Exercises  5    adapted  to  Andrews   and  Stoddard's 

Latin  Grammar. 

The  exercises  contained  in  this  volume  are  designed  to  illustrate  the 
principles  of  the  Latin  Grammar  in  its  various  departments,  and  to  render 
their  application  easy  and  familiar  to  the  student.     The  plan  and  ariange 


New  Series   of  Latin  School  Books 


ment  of  the  work  are  such,  that,  under  the  direction  of  a  judicious 
teacher,  the  student  may  commence  the  use  of  it  almost  as  soon  as  he 
takes  up  his  grammar,  and  continue  it,  at  least  as  an  occasional  exercise, 
until  he  has  finished  his  preparatory  course.  It  is  intended  to  smooth 
his  way  to  original  composition  in  the  Latin  language,  both  in  prose  and 
in  verse. 

A  Key  to  L<atill  Exercises;  adapted  to  Andrews  and 
Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar. 

This  Key,  containing  all  the  lessons  in  the  Exercises  fully  corrected, 
is  intended  for  the  use  of  teachers  only. 

Viri  RomaB.  The  Viri  Romas  of  Lhomond,  adapted  to 
Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar ;  with  Notes  and  a 
copious  Dictionary. 

A  careful  perusal  of  this  book,  after  the  student  has  made  himself 
master  of  the  Reader,  will  constitute  a  good  preparation  for  reading  the 
easier  Latin  classics,  which,  without  some  such  intermediate  work,  are 
commonly  read  under  great  disadvantages.  It  will  at  the  same  time  ren- 
der him  familiar  with  the  principal  characters  and  most  prominent  events 
of  Roman  history. 

Caesar's  Commentaries  on  the  Gallic  War ;  with  a 

Dictionary  and  Notes. 

The  text  of  this  edition  of  Caesar's  Gallic  War  has  been  formed  by 
reference  to  the  best  modern  German  editions.  The  Notes  are  principally 
grammatical,  and  are  intended  to  afford  that  kind  and  degree  of  assistance 
which  the  student  may  be  supposed  to  need  at  his  first  introduction  to  a 
genuine  classic  author.  The  Dictionary,  which,  like  all  the  others  in  the 
series,  has  been  prepared  with  great  labor,  contains  not  only  the  usual 
significations  of  each  word,  and  its  derivation,  but  an  explanation  of  all 
those  phrases  which  might  otherwise  perplex  the  student. 

[The  above  work  is  nearly  completed,  and  will  soon  be  put  to  press.] 

Salllist.  Sallust's  History  of  the  War  against  Jugurtha, 
and  of  the  Conspiracy  of  Catiline  ;  with  a  Dictionary  and 
Notes. 

The  plan  of  this  edition  of  Sallust  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  preceding 
work.  The  text  of  Cortius  has,  in  many  instances,  been  exchanged  for 
that  of  Kritz  or  Gerlach,  and  its  orthography  is,  in  general,  conformed  to 
that  of  Pottier  and  of  Planche,  and  is,  consequently,  in  most  cases,  the 
same  as  is  found  in  school  editions  of  the  other  Latin  classics. 

Ovid.  Selections  from  the  Metamorphoses  and  Heroideg 
of  Ovid  ;  with  Notes,  Grammatical  References,  and  Exer- 
cises in  Scanning. 

These  Selections  are  designed  as  an  introduction  to  Latin  poetry. 
They  consist  of  the  most  interesting  fables  from  Ovid,  with  numerous 
brief  notes  explanatory  of  difficult  phrases,  of  obscure  historical  or  mytho- 
logical allusions,  and  especially  of  grammatical  difficulties.  To  these  are 
added  such  Exercises  in  Scanning  as  will  serve  fully  to  introduce  the 
Btudent  to  a  knowledge  of  the  structure  and  laws  of  hexameter  and 
pentameter  verse.  « 


New  Series  of  Latin  School  Books. 

Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  has  long  since  been  intro- 
duced into  the  Latin  School  of  the  City  of  Boston,  and  into  most 
of  the  other  principal  Classical  Schools  in  this  country.  It  is  adopted  by 
all  the  Colleges  in  New  England,  viz.,  Harvard,  Yale,  Dartmouth, 
Amherst,  Williams,  Bowdoin,  Waterville,  Middlebury,  Burling- 
ton, Brown  University  at  Providence,  Wesleyan  University  at  Mid- 
dletown,and  Washington  College  at  Hartford;  also  at  Hamilton  Col- 
lege, New  York,  New  York  University,  city  of  New  York,  Cincinnati 
College  and  Marietta  College,  Ohio,  Randolph  Macon  College, 
Virginia,  Mount  Hope  College,  near  Baltimore,  Maryland  Institute 
'of  Instruction  and  St.  Mary's  College,  Baltimore,  and  the  Univer- 
sities of  Michigan  and  Alabama;  and  has  been  highly  recommended 
by  Professors  Kingsley,  Woolsey,  Olmstead,  and  Gibbs,  of  Yale  College; 
Professor  Beck,  of  Harvard  College ;  President  Penney  and  Professor  North, 
of  Hamilton  College ;  Professor  Packard,  of  Bowdoin  College  ;  Professor 
Holland,  of  Washington  College ;  Professor  Fisk,  of  Amherst  College,  and 
by  Professor  Hackett,  of  Brown  University ;  —  also  by  Messrs.  Dillaway 
and  Gardner,  of  the  Boston  Latin  School ;  Rev.  Lyman  Colman,  of  the 
English  High  School,  Andover;  Hon.  John  Hall,  Principal  of  the  Elling- 
ton School,  Conn. ;  Mr.  Shaler,  Principal  of  the  Connecticut  Literary 
Institution,  at  Suffield  ;  Simeon  Hart,  Esq.,  Farmington,  Conn. ;  Pro- 
fessor Cogswell,  of  Round  Hill  School,  Northampton;  President  Shan- 
non, of  Louisiana  College,  and  by  various  periodicals. 

As  a  specimen  of  the  communications  received  from  the  above  sources, 
the  following  extracts  are  given  :  — 

It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  bear  my  'testimony  to  the  superior  merits  of  the 
Latin  Grammar  lately  edited  by  Professor  Andrews  and  Mr.  Stoddard.  I  express 
most  cheerfully,  unhesitatingly,  and  decidedly,  my  preference  of  this  Grammar 
to  that  of  Adam,  which  has,  for  so  long  a  time,  kept  almost  undisputed  sway 
in  our  schools.  —  Dr.  C.  Beck,  Professor  of  Latin  in  Harvard  University. 

I  know  of  no  grammar  published  in  this  country,  which  promises  to  answer  so 
well  the  purposes  of  elementary  classical  instruction,  and  shall  be  glad  to  see  it 
introduced  into  our  best  schools.  —  Mr.  Charles  K.  Dillaway,  Master  of  the 
Public  Latin  School,  Boston. 

Your  new  Latin  Grammar  appears  to  me  much  better  suited  to  the  use  of 
students  than  any  other  grammar  I  am  acquainted  with. — Professor  William 
M.  Holland,  Washington  College,  Hartford,  Conn. 

I  can  with  much  pleasure  say  that  your  Grammar  seems  to  me  much  better 
adapted  to  the  present  condition  and  wants  of  our  schools  than  any  one  with  which 
I  am  acquainted,  and  to  supply  that  which  has  long  been  wanted  —  a  good  Latin 
grammar  for  common  use.  —  Mr.  F.  Gardner,  one  of  the  Masters  Boston  Lat.  Sch.. 

The  Latin  Grammar  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard  is  deserving,  in  my  opinion,  of 
the  approbation  which  so  many  of  our  ablest  teachers  have  bestowed  upon  it. 
It  is  believed  that,  of  all  the  grammars  at  present  before  the  public,  this  has 
greatly  the  advantage,  in  regard  both  to  the  excellence  of  its  arrangement,  and 
the  accuracy  and  copiousness  of  its  information ;  and  it  is  earnestly  hoped  that 
its  merits  will  procure  for  it  that  general  favor  and  use  to  which  it  is  entitled. 
—  H.  B.  Hackett,  Professor  of  Languages  in  Brown  University. 

The  universal  favor  with  which  this  Grammar  is  received  was  not  unexpected. 
It  will  bear  a  thorough  and  discriminating  examination.  In  the  use  of  well- 
defined  and  expressive  terms,  especially  in  the  syntax,  we  know  of  no  Latin  or 
Greek  grammar  which  is  to  be  compared  to  this.  — Amer.  Quarterly  Register. 

The  Latin  Grammar  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard  I  consider  a  work  of  great 
merit.  I  have  found  in  it  several  principles  of  the  Latin  language  correctly  ex- 
plained which  I  had  myself  learned  from  a  twenty  years'  study  of  that  language, 
but  had  never  seen  illustrated  in  any  grammar.     Andrews's  First  Lessons  I  con* 

3 


New  Series  of  Latin  School  Books. 

aider  a  valuable  work  for  beginners,  and  in  the  sphere  which  it  is  designed  to 
occupy,  I  know  not  that  I  have  met  its  equal.  —  Rev.  James  Shannon,  President 
qf  College  of  Louisiana. 

These  works  will  furnish  a  series  of  elementary  publications  for  the  study  of 
Latin  altogether  in  advance  of  any  thing  which  has  hitherto  appeared,  either  in 
this  country  or  in  England.  —  American  Biblical  Repository. 

We  have  made  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  the  subject  both  of 
reference  and  recitation  daily  for  several  months,  and  I  cheerfully  and  decidedly 
bear  testimony  to  its  superior  excellence  to  any  manual  of  the  kind  with  which 
I  am  acquainted.  Every  part  bears  the  impress  of  a  careful  compiler.  The 
principles  of  syntax  are  happily  developed  in  the  rules,  whilst  those  relating  to 
the  moods  and  tenses  supply  an  important  deficiency  in  our  former  grammars. 
The  rules  of  prosody  are  also  clearly  and  fully  exhibited.  —  Rev.  Lyman  Cole- 
man, Principal  of  Burr  Seminary,  Manchester,  Vt. 

1  have  examined  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar,  and  regard  it  as 
superior  to  any  thing  of  the  kind  now  in  use.  It  is  what  has  long  been  needed, 
and  will  undoubtedly  be  welcomed  by  every  one  interested  in  the  philology  of 
the  Latin  language.  We  shall  hereafter  use  it  as  a  text-book  in  this  institution. 
—  Mr.  Wm.  H.  Shaler,  Principal  of  the  Connecticut  Lit.  Institution  at  Suffield. 

This  work  bears  evident  marks  of  great  care  and  skill,  and  ripe  and  accurate 
scholarship  in  the  authors.  It  excels  most  grammars  in  this  particular,  that, 
while  by  its  plainness  it  is  suited  to  the  necessities  of  most  beginners,  by  its 
fulness  and  detail  it  will  satisfy  the  inquiries  of  the  advanced  scholar,  and  will 
be  a  suitable  companion  at  all  stages  of  his  progress.  We  cordially  commend 
it  to  the  student  and  teacher.  — Biblical  Repository. 

Your  Grammar  is  what  I  expected  it  would  be  —  an  excellent  book,  and  just  the 
thing  which  was  needed.  We  cannot  hesitate  a  moment  in  laying  aside  the 
books  now  in  use,  and  introducing  this.  —  Rev.  J.  Penney,  D.  D.,  President  of 
Hamilton  College,  New  York. . 

Your  Grammar  bears  throughout  evidence  of  original  and  thorough  investiga- 
tion and  sound  criticism.  I  hope,  and  doubt  not,  it  will  be  adopted  in  our  schools 
and  colleges,  it  being,  in  my  apprehension,  so  far  as  simplicity  is  concerned,  on 
the  one  hand,  and  philosophical  views  and  sound  scholarship  on  the  other,  far 
preferable  to  other  grammars ;  a  work  at  the  same  time  highly  creditable  to  your- 
selves and  to  our  country.  —  Professor  A.  Packard,  Bowdoin  College,  Maine. 

This  Grammar  appears  to  me  to  be  accommodated  alike  to  the  wants  of  the 
new  beginner  and  the  experienced  scholar,  and,  as  such,  well  fitted  to  supply 
what  has  long  been  felt  to  be  a  great  desideratum  in  the  department  of  classical 
learning.  —  Professor  S.  North,  Hamilton  College,  New  York. 

From  such  an  examination  of  this  Grammar  as  1  have  been  able  to  give  it,  1 
do  not  hesitate  to  pronounce  it  superior  to  any  other  with  which  I  am  acquainted. 
I  have  never  seen,  any  where,  a  greater  amount  of  valuable  matter  compressed 
within  limits  equally  narrow.  —-Hon.  John  Hall,  Prin.  of  Ellington  School,  Conn. 

We  have  no  hesitation  in  pronouncing  this  Grammar  decidedly  superior  to 
any  now  in  use.  —  Boston  Recorder. 

I  am  ready  to  express  my  great  satisfaction  with  your  Grammar,  and  do  not 
hesitate  to  say,  that  1  am  better  pleased  with  such  portions  of  the  syntax  as  I 
have  perused,  than  with  the  corresponding  portions  in  any  other  grammar  with 
which  I  am  acquainted.  —  Professor  N.  W.  Fiskex  Amherst  College,  Mass. 

I  know  of  no  grammar  in  the  Latin  language  so  well  adapted  to  answer  the 
purpose  for  which  it  was  designed  as  this.  The  book  of  Questions  is  a  valuable 
attendant  of  the  Grammar.  —  Simeon  Hart,  Esq.,  Farmington,  Conn. 

This  Grammar  has  received  the  labor  of  years,  and  is  the  result  of  much  re- 
flection and  experience,  and  mature  scholarship.  As  such,  it  claims  the  atten- 
tion of  all  who  are  interested  in  the  promotion  of  sound  learning.  —  N.  Y.  Obs. 

This  Grammar  is  an  original  work,  Its  arrangement  is  philosophical,  and  its 
rules  clear  and  precise,  beyond  those  of  any  other  grammar  we  have  Been.-- 
Portland  Christian  Mirror. 

4 


GRAMMAR 


OF    THE 


LATIN    LANGUAGE; 


FOR    THE 


USE   OF    SCHOOLS    AND    COLLEGES. 


E.    A.    ANDREWS 

AND 

S.    STODDARD. 

fBlebent!)  HMtfott. 


BOSTON: 

PUBLISHED   BY    CROCKER   AND    BREWSTER, 

47  Washington  Street. 

For  sale  by  the  Booksellers  in  New  York,  Philadelphia, 

Baltimore,  and  other  Cities* 

1845. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1836, 

Bv  Crocker  and  Brewster, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Massachusetts. 


ATION  DEFT* 


STEREOTYPED  AT  THE 
BOSTON  TYPE  AND  STEREOTYPE  FOUNDRY. 


PREFACE. 


The  Grammar  here  presented  to  the  public  originated  in  i 
design,  formed  several  years  since,  of  preparing  a  new  edition 
of  Adam's  Latin  Grammar,  with  such  additions  and  corrections 
as  the  existing  state  of  classical  learning  plainly  demanded. 
We  had  not  proceeded  far  in  the  execution  of  this  purpose, 
before  we  were  impressed  with  the  conviction,  which  our  subse- 
quent researches  continually  confirmed,  that  the  defects  in  that 
manual  were  so  numerous,  and  of  so  fundamental  a  character, 
that  they  could  not  be  removed  without  a  radical  change  in  the 
plan  of  the  work. 

Since  the  first  publication  of  that  Grammar,  rapid  advances 
have  been  made  in  the  science  of  philology,  both  in  Great 
Britain  and  upon  the  continent  of  Europe.  In  the  mean  time, 
no  corresponding  change  has  been  made  in  that  work,  and, 
after  the  lapse  of  half  a  century,  it  still  continues,  in  its  origi- 
nal form,  to  occupy  its  place  in  most  of  the  public  and  private 
schools  in  this  country.  For  this  continuance  of  public  favor 
it  has  been  indebted,  partly  to  a  greater  fulness  of  detail  than 
was  found  in  the  small  grammars  which  it  has  superseded,  partly 
to  the  reluctance  so  commonly  felt  to  lay  aside  a  manual  with 
which  all  are  familiar ;  but,  principally,  to  the  acknowledged 
fact,  that  the  grammars  which  have  been  proposed  as  substitutes, 
not  excepting  even  those  translated  from  the  German,  though 
often  replete  with  philosophical  views  of  the  highest  interest, 
have  still  been  destitute  of  many  of  the  essential  requisites  of  a 
complete  introduction  to  the  Latin  language. 

Instead,  therefore,  of  prosecuting  our  original  purpose,  we  at 
length  determined  to  mould  our  materials  into  a  form  corre- 

541579 


IV  PREFACE. 

...  •         « 

sponding  with  the  a'clvaiioed  state  of  Latin  and  Greek  philology. 
fyh\)  ihisi  vWw","Jve  have  devoted  much  time  to  a  careful  exami- 
nation of  such  works* as  pro'mised  to  afford  us  the  most  material 
assistance.  From  every  source,  to  which  we  could  gain  access, 
we  have  drawn  whatever  principles  appeared  to  us  most  impor- 
tant. These  we  have  sometimes  expressed  in  the  words  of  the 
author  from  whom  they  were  derived  ;  but,  in  general,  we  have 
preferred  to  exhibit  them  in  our  own  language.  The  whole, 
with  the  exception  of  three  or  four  pages  only,  has  been  sent  to 
the  compositor  in  manuscript. 

The  limits  of  a  preface  will  allow  us  to  notice  but  a  few  of 
the  more  prominent  peculiarities  of  the  following  work. 

To  insure  a  correct  and  uniform  pronunciation  of  the  Latin 
language,  our  experience  had  satisfied  us,  that  rules  more  copi- 
ous and  exact  than  any  now  in  use  were  greatly  needed.  In 
presenting  the  rules  of  orthoepy  contained  in  this  Grammar,  it 
is  not  our  object  to  introduce  innovation,  but  to  produce  uni- 
formity. This  we  have  endeavored  to  effect  by  exhibiting,  in  as 
clear  a  light  as  possible,  the  principles  of  pronunciation  adopted 
in  the  schools  and  universities  of  England,  and  in  the  principal 
colleges  of  this  country.  If  these  rules  are  regarded,  the  stu- 
dent can  seldom  be  at  a  loss  respecting  the  pronunciation  of  any 
Latin  word. 

As  an  incorrect  pronunciation  may  generally  be  referred  to 
the  errors  into  which  the  student  is  permitted  to  fall  while  learn- 
ing the  paradigms  of  the  grammar,  we  have  endeavored  to  pre- 
vent the  possibility  of  mistake  in  these,  by  dividing  the  words 
according  to  their  pronunciation,  and  marking  the  accented 
syllable.  If  the  instructor  will  see  that  the  words  are  at  first 
pronounced  as  they  are  set  down  in  the  paradigms,  he  will  not 
afterwards  be  compelled  to  submit  to  the  mortifying  labor  of 
correcting  bad  habits,  when  they  have  become  nearly  inveterate. 
Wherever  a  Latin  word  is  introduced,  its  quantity  is  carefully 
marked,  except  in  those  cases  in  which  it  may  be  determined 
by  the  general  rules  in  the  thirteenth  section.  As  the  para- 
digms are  divided  and  accented,  it  may  not,  in  general,  be  expe- 


PREFACE.  T 

dient  for  the  student  to  learn  the  rules  of  pronunciation  at  his 
entrance  upon  the  study  of  the  Grammar.  It  will  be  sufficient 
for  him,  at  first,  to  understand  the  principles  of  accentuation  in 
the  fourteenth  and  fifteenth  sections.  The  remaining  rules  he 
can  gradually  acquire  as  he  proceeds  in  his  study  of  the  lan- 
guage. 

The  materials  for  the  subsequent  departments  of  the  Gram- 
mar have  been  drawn  from  various  sources,  most  of  which  need 
not  be  particularly  specified.  It  is  proper,  however,  that,  in  this 
place,  we  should,  once  for  all,  acknowledge  our  obligations  to 
the  Grammars  of  Scheller,  Zumpt,  and  Grant,  and  to  the  Dic- 
tionaries of  Gesner  and  Facciolatus. 

The  paradigms  of  Adam's  Grammar,  as  being  generally  known, 
have  been  retained,  excepting  a  few,  which  were  liable  to  valid 
objections.  Pcnna  was  rejected,  because,  in  the  sense  assigned 
to  it  of  a  pen,  it  is  totally  destitute  of  classical  authority.  In- 
stead of  this,  musa,  which  is  found  in  the  older  grammars,  has 
been  restored.  In  the  third  declension,  several  additional  exam- 
ples have  been  introduced. 

Under  adjectives,  the  different  kinds  of  comparison,  and  the 
mode  of  forming  each,  have  been  explained.  The  terminations 
of  the  comparative  and  superlative  are  referred,  like  every  other 
species  of  inflection,  to  the  root  of  the  word. 

In  treating  of  the  pronouns,  we  have  aimed  so  to  arrange  the 
several  classes,  as  to  exhibit  their  peculiar  characteristics  in  a 
clear  and  intelligible  manner. 

The  compounds  of  sum  are  given  in  connection  with  that 
verb.  In  the  second  conjugation,  moneo  has  been  substituted 
for  doceo,  as  the  latter  is  irregular  in  its  third  root.  In  the 
third  conjugation,  also,  rego  has  been  taken  instead  of  lego,  as 
the  latter  is  irregular  in  its  second  root,  and,  from  its  peculiar 
signification,  cannot  properly  be  used  in  the  first  and  second 
persons  of  the  passive  voice. 

In  every  conjugation  except  the  first,  the  active  and  passive 
voices  have  been  so  arranged  as  to  show  the  relation  of  their 
corresponding  tenses. 


VI  PREFACE. 

The  derivation  of  the  several  parts  of  the  verb  from  the  root 
is  exhibited  in  a  peculiar  manner,  and  such  as  we  have  found 
in  practice  to  render  the  varieties  of  termination,  both  in  regu- 
lar and  irregular  verbs,  peculiarly  easy  to  be  retained  in  memory. 
Every  part  of  the  verb  is  shown  to  be  naturally  derived,  either 
immediately  or  mediately,  from  its  primary  root.  The  mode  of 
forming  the  secondary  roots,  and  the  terminations  to  be  added 
to  them  and  to  the  primary  root  respectively,  in  order  to  form 
the  various  tenses,  are  fully  exhibited. 

In  each  conjugation,  those  verbs  whose  second  and  third  roots 
are  either  irregular  or  wanting,  are  arranged  alphabetically,  in 
order  to  render  a  reference  to  them  as  easy  as  possible. 

In  constructing  the  tables  of  verbs,  and  occasionally  in  other 
parts  of  etymology,  we  have  derived  essential  aid  from  Hickie's 
Grammar,  and  we  trust  that  the  information  resulting  from  his 
researches,  in  relation  to  the  parts  of  verbs  in  actual  use,  will 
be  esteemed  not  only  curious  but  important.  To  a  considerable 
extent,  we  have  verified  his  statements  by  our  own  investiga- 
tions ;  in  consequence  of  which,  however,  some  changes  have 
been  made  in  the  parts  of  certain  verbs  as  exhibited  by  him. 

The  rules  of  syntax  contained  in  this  work  result  directly 
from  the  analysis  of  propositions,  and  of  compound  sentences  ; 
and  for  this  reason  the  student  should  make  himself  perfectly 
familiar  with  the  sections  relating  to  subject  and  predicate,  and 
should  be  able  readily  to  analyze  sentences,  whether  simple 
or  compound,  and  to  explain  their  structure  and  connection. 
For  this  purpose,  it  is  generally  expedient  to  begin  with  simple 
English  sentences,  and  to  proceed  gradually  to  such  as  are  more 
complex.  When  in  some  degree  familiar  with  these,  he  will  be 
able  to  enter  upon  the  analysis  of  Latin  sentences.  This 
exercise  should  always  precede  the  more  minute  and  subsidiary 
labor  of  parsing.  If  the  latter  be  conducted,  as  it  often  is, 
independently  of  previous  analysis,  the  principal  advantage  to  be 
derived  from  the  study  of  language,  as  an  intellectual  exercise, 
will  inevitably  be  lost.  The  practice  which  we  would  respectfully 
recommend  is  that  which  we  have   presented  at  the  close  or 


PREFACE.  Vll 

Syntax  under  the  head  "  Analysis."  When  language  is  studied 
in  this  way,  it  ceases  to  be  a  tiresome  and  mechanical  employ- 
ment, and  not  only  affords  one  of  the  most  perfect  exercises  of 
the  intellectual  faculties,  but,  in  a  short  time,  becomes  a  most 
agreeable  recreation. 

In  the  syntax  of  this  Grammar,  it  is  hoped  that  nothing  essen- 
tial which  is  contained  in  larger  grammars,  has  been  omitted. 
Our  object  has  been  in  this,  as  in  other  parts  of  the  work,  to 
unite  the  comprehensive  views  and  philosophical  arrangement  of 
the  German  philologists  with  the  fulness  and  minuteness  of  the 
English  grammarians.  In  no  German  grammar  that  we  have 
seen,  is  the  language  well  adapted  to  the  capacity  of  the  younger 
classes  of  students,  or  such  as  to  be  conveniently  quoted  in  the 
recitation-room.  These  defects  we  have  endeavored  to  remedy, 
by  expressing  the  rules  of  syntax  in  as  simple  and  precise 
language  as  possible.  In  the  arrangement  of  the  syntax,  we 
have  followed  the  order  of  the  various  cases  and  moods,  so  that 
whatever  relates  to  each  subject  will  be  found  under  its  appro- 
priate head,  and  the  connection  of  different  subjects  is  pointed 
out  by  references  from  one  part  to  another.  In  the  distribution 
of  the  subordinate  parts,  we  have  endeavored  to  exhibit  in  the 
clearest  manner  their  mutual  relation  and  dependence. 

The  sections  relating  to  the  use  of  moods  have  received  par- 
ticular attention,  as  it  is  in  this  part,  perhaps,  more  than  in  any 
other,  that  the  common  grammars  are  deficient.  Upon  this 
subject,  in  addition  to  the  sources  before  enumerated,  we  have 
derived  important  aid  from  Carson's  treatise  on  the  relative,  and 
from  Crombie's  Gymnasium. 

The  foundation  of  the  prosody  which  is  here  presented,  is  to 
be  found  in  the  more  extended  treatises  of  Carey  and  Grant,  and 
in  that  contained  in  Rees's  Cyclopaedia.  From  various  other 
sources,  also,  occasional  assistance  has  been  derived ;  but  in 
this,  as  in  every  other  part  of  the  Grammar,  we  have  given 
to  the  materials  such  a  form  as  seemed  best  adapted  to  our 
purpose. 

Extended   discussions  of  grammatical    principles  we  have 


Vlll  PREFACE. 

every  where  omitted,  as  foreign  to  the  design  of  our  work,  but 
have  endeavored  to  present  the  results  of  such  discussions  in 
the  manner  most  likely  to  serve  the  practical  purposes  of  the 
student. 

A  prominent  object  in  the  composition  of  this  Grammar,  and 
one  which  we  have  endeavored  to  keep  constantly  before  our 
minds,  was  the  introduction  of  greater  precision  in  rules  and 
definitions,  than  is  usually  to  be  found  in  works  of  this  kind. 
To  this  feature  of  our  work  we  would  respectfully  invite  the 
reader's  attention.  It  will  be  found,  if  we  mistake  not,  that,  in 
the  language  of  many  of  the  grammars  in  common  use,  there 
is  such  inaccuracy,  as  well  as  indefiniteness,  that  many  parts,  if 
taken  independently  of  examples,  and  of  the  explanations  of 
the  teacher,  would  be  wholly  unintelligible.  This  is  especially 
the  case  in  the  rules  of  syntax.  Take,  for  example,  the  com- 
mon rule,  "  A  verb  agrees  with  its  nominative  in  number  and 
person."  Whether  the  nominative  intended  is  that  which,  in 
construction,  precedes,  or  that  which  follows,  the  verb,  or 
in  other  words,  whether  it  is  the  subject-nominative,  or  the 
predicate-nominative,  is  left  undetermined. 

So  in  the  rule,  "  One  substantive  governs  another  signifying 
a  different  thing  in  the  genitive,"  there  is  no  intimation  that  the 
two  substantives  have  any  relation  whatever  to  each  other  ;  it  is 
not  even  required  that  they  shall  stand  in  the  same  proposition. 
The  only  condition  is,  that  they  shall  signify  different  things. 
Any  one  substantive,  therefore,  governs  any  other  substantive 
in  the  genitive,  whenever  and  however  used,  and,  in  its  turn,  is 
governed  in  like  manner  by  that  other,  provided  they  signify 
different  things. 

In  like  manner  the  rule,  "  One  verb  governs  another  in  the 
infinitive,"  contains  no  limitation  or  restriction  of  any  kind. 
The  least  that  the  student  can  be  expected  to  infer  from  it 
is,  that  any  verb  may,  in  certain  circumstances,  govern  an 
infinitive  ;  and  this  inference  we  know  has  actually  been  made 
by  some  respectable  teachers.  One  who  has  formed  such  a 
conclusion  may  well  be  surprised  to  find  that  the  number  of 


PREFACE.  IX 

verbs  followed  by  the  infinitive  without  a  subject-accusative,  is 
very  small,  and  that  no  inconsiderable  portion  of  the  verbs  of 
the  language  cannot,  under  any  circumstances  whatever,  govern 
an  infinitive,  either  with  or  without  such  accusative. 

Rules  of  this  kind  appear  to  have  been  intended  not  to  lead 
the  student  to  a  knowledge  of  the  structure  of  the  language, 
but  to  be  repeated  by  him  after  the  construction  has  been  fully 
explained  by  his  teacher.  Of  themselves,  therefore,  they  may 
be  said  to  teach  nothing.  Similar  remarks  might  be  made 
respecting  a  very  large  proportion  of  the  common  rules  of 
syntax,  as  will  be  obvious  to  any  one  who  will  take  the  trouble 
of  subjecting  them  to  a  rigid  scrutiny.  As  the  object  of  syntax 
is  to  exhibit  the  relations  of  words  and  propositions,  no  rule 
can  be  considered  as  otherwise  than  imperfect,  which  leaves  the 
nature  and  even  the  existence  of  those  relations  wholly  inde* 
terminate.  An  active  verb,  for  example,  may,  in  general,  be 
followed  by  at  least  three  different  cases,  in  order  to  express 
what  are  sometimes  called  its  immediate  and  its  remote  objects, 
and  also  some  attendant  circumstance  of  time,  place,  instru- 
ment, &c.  To  say,  then,  that  "A  verb  signifying  actively 
governs  the  accusative,"  can  give  no  precise  information,  unless 
we  specify  which  of  its  relations  is  denoted  by  this  case. 

The  fault  to  which  we  have  now  alluded,  seems,  in  many 
cases,  to  have  arisen  from  an  excessive  desire  of  brevity,  and 
to  have  been  perpetuated  by  the  aversion  so  commonly  felt  to 
change  a  form  of  phraseology  to  which,  however  defective  in 
its  original,  custom  has  at  length  attached  a  definite  meaning. 
In  cases  of  this  kind,  we  have  not  scrupled  to  make  such 
changes,  both  in  rules  and  definitions,  as  the  nature  of  the  case 
seemed  to  us  to  demand  ;  but,  in  doing  this,  we  have  not  for- 
gotten the  importance  of  uniting  brevity  with  precision. 

In  regard  to  the  manner  in  which  this  work  was  composed, 
we  would  merely  remark,  that  the  labor  has  been  in  every  re- 
spect a  mutual  one.  The  hand  and  mind  of  each  have  been 
repeatedly  employed  upon  every  part,  until  it  has  at  length 
become   impossible  even   for  ourselves  to  recollect  the  share 


PREFACE. 


which  each  has  had  in  bringing  the  work  to  its  present  state. 
Of  each  and  every  part,  therefore,  it  may  be  safely  said  that 
we  are  the  joint  authors  ;  and  hence,  whatever  of  praise  or 
blame  may  attach  to  any  part,  must  be  shared  equally  by  each. 
In  commending  to  the  patronage  of  the  public  a  work  on 
which  so  large  a  portion  of  our  thoughts  has  been  for.  several 
years  employed,  we  will  not  pretend  indifference  to  its  fate.  It 
was  begun  under  a  conviction,  derived  from  the  experience  of 
many  years  in  teaching  the  ancient  languages,  that  a  Latin 
grammar,  different  in  many  respects  from  any  with  which  we 
were  acquainted,  was  greatly  needed  in  our  schools  and  colleges. 
Had  we  contemplated  the  amount  of  labor  which  its  execution 
would  impose  upon  us,  we  might  probably  have  shrunk  from 
the  attempt,  encumbered  as  we  were  with  other  employments. 
At  every  step,  however,  our  labor  has  been  cheered 'by  the 
greater  familiarity  which  we  have  acquired  with  the  best  of  the 
Roman  writers,  and  by  the  hope  that  the  result  might  be  of 
service  to  others  in  forming  an  acquaintance  with  the  same 
immortal  authors.  Should  the  verdict  of  an  enlightened  public 
decide,  that,  in  this  respect,  we  have  been  successful,  we  shall 
feel  ourselves  fully  recompensed  for  our  labor,  in  the  satisfac- 
tion of  having  contributed,  in  however  humble  a  degree,  to 
promote  the  cause  of  classical  literature,  and  consequently  of 
sound  learning,  among  our  countrymen. 

Boston,  April  8,  1836. 


0 


CONTENTS. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Division  of  letters 2 

Diphthongs 2 

Punctuation 2 

ORTHOEPY. 

Sounds  of  the  letters 3 

of  the  vowels 3 

of  the  diphthongs 4 

of  the  consonants 5 

Quantity  of  penultimate  and  final 

syllables 6 

Accentuation 7 

Division  of  words  into  syllables. .  8 

ETYMOLOGY.       • 

Nouns 10 

Gender 11 

Number 14 

Cases 14 

Declensions 14 

First  declension 16 

Greek  nouns 17 

Second  declension 18 

Greek  nouns 21 

Third  declension 21 

Rules  for  the  gender 24 

oblique  cases.  27 

Greek  nouns 36 

Fourth  declension 37 

Fifth  declension 38 

Declension  of  compound  nouns  39 

Irregular  nouns 39 

Variable  nouns 40 

Defective  nouns 41 

Redundant  nouns 47 

Derivation  of  nouns 49 

Composition  of  nouns 53 

Adjectives 54 

Adjectives  of  the  first  and  sec- 
ond declension 55 

Adjectives  of  the  Jhird  declen- 
sion  57 

Rules  for  the  oblique  cases.  60 

Irregular  adjectives 61 

Detective  adjectives 61 

Redundant  adjectives 62 

Numeral  adjectives 63 

Comparison  of  adjectives  ....  67 


Page. 

Irregular  comparison 69 

Defective  comparison 70 

Derivation  of  adjectives 72 

Composition  of  adjectives ....  74 

Pronouns 75 

Substantive  pronouns 76 

Adjective  pronouns 77 

Demonstrative  pronouns ...  77 

Intensive  pronouns 79 

Relative  pronouns 79 

Interrogative  pronouns  ....  80 

Indefinite  pronouns 82 

•      Possessive  pronouns 83 

Patrial  pronouns 83 

Verbs  83 

Moods 85 

Tenses 85 

Numbers 87 

Persons 87 

Participles,  gerunds,  and  su- 
pines   88 

Conjugation 89 

Table  of  terminations 91 

Sum 93 

First  conjugation 96 

Second  conjugation 102 

Third  conjugation 105 

Fourth  conjugation Ill 

Deponent  verbs 114 

Remarks  on  the  conjugations  116 
Periphrastic  conjugations...  117 
General  rules  of  conjugation  119 
Formation  of  second  and  third 

roots 126 

First  conjugation 120 

Second  conjugation 124 

Third  conjugation 126 

Fourtli  conjugation 133 

Irregular  verbs 135 

Defective  verbs 139 

Impersonal  verbs 141 

Redundant  verbs 143 

Derivation  of  verbs 146 

Composition  of  verbs 147 

Adverbs 149 

Derivation  of  adverbs 151 

Composition  of  adverbs 153 

-    Comparison  of  adverbs 154 

Prepositions 154 

Prepositions  in  composition  .  155 

• 


Xll 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 
Conjunctions 157 

Intjef  SECTIONS 159 


SYNTAX. 

Subject 

Predicate 

Sentences 

Apposition 

Adjectives 

Relatives 

Demonstratives,  <fcc 

Reflexives 

Nominative 

Subject-nominative  and  verb 

Predicate-nominative 

Genitive 

Genitive  after  nouns 

after  partitives. . . . 

after  adjectives  . . . 

after  verbs 

of  place 

after  particles 

Dative  

Dative  after  adjectives 

'  after  verbs 

after  particles 

Accusative 

Accusative  after  verbs 

after  prepositions 

of  time  and  space 

of  place 

after  adverbs  and 


interjections 

Subject-accusative 

Vocative 

Ablative 

Ablative  after  prepositions  . . 

after  certain  nouns, 

adjectives,  and  verbs 

of  cause,  &c 

of  price 

of  time 

of  place 

after  comparatives  . 

absolute  

Connection  of  tenses 

Indicative  mood 

Subjunctive  mood 

Protasis  and  apodosis 

Subjunctive  after  particles. . 

after  qui 

— in  indirect  ques- 


tions 


clauses 


in  intermediate 


ICO 
162 
163 
1G4 
166 
16!) 
172 
175 
176 
176 
181 
162 
182 
186 
188 
190 
194 
195 
195 
195 
197 
201 
202 
202 
207 
208 
209 

209 
210 
210 
211 
211 

212 
213 
217 
217 
218 
219 
222 
223 
225 
226 
228 
229 
232 

235 

235 


Page 

Imperative  mood 237 

Infinitive  mood 237 

Participles 243 

Gerunds  and  gerundives 245 

Supines 247 

Adverbs 249 

Conjunctions 250 

Arrangement 251 

Arrangement  of  words ." 251 

of  clauses 254 

Analysis 254 


PROSODY. 

Quantity 

General  rules 

Special  rules 

First  and  middle  syllables. 

Derivative  words 

Compound  words 

Increment  of  nouns. . . . 

Increment  of  verbs 

Penultimate  and  antepe- 
nultimate syllables. . . 

Final  syllables 

Versification 

Feet 

Metre 

Verses 

Figures  of  prosody 

Arsis  and  thesis 

Caesura 

Different  kinds  of  metre 

Dactylic  metre 

Anapaestic  metre 

Iambic  metre 

Trochaic  metre .•. 

Choriambic  metre 

Ionic  metre 

Compound  metres 

Combination  of  verses . , 

Horatian  metres 

Key  to  the  odes  of  Horace  . . 

APPENDIX. 

Grammatical  figures 298 

Tropes  and  figures  of  rhetoric  .   301 
Roman  mode  of  reckoning  time  301 


259 
259 
262 
262 
262 
263 
265 
268 

270 
275 

279 
279 
280 
281 

282 
284 
285 

286 
286 
288 
289 
290 
291 
292 
293 
293 
294 
296 


-money 


306 


Abbreviations 307 

Different  ages  of  Roman  litera- 
ture   308 

Writers  of  the  different  ages  . .  308 

INDEX 311 


LATIN    GRAMMAR. 


<§>  1.     Latin  Grammar  teaches  the  principles  of   the 
Latin  Language. 

These  relate, 

1.  To  its  written  characters; 

2.  To  its  pronunciation ; 

3.  To  the  classification  and  derivation  of  its  words ; 

4.  To  the  construction  of  its  sentences  ; 

5.  To  the  quantity  of  its  syllables,  and  its  versification. 

The  first  part  is  called  Orthography ;  the  second,  Orthoepy ; 
the  third,  Etymology;  the  fourth,  Syntax;  and  the  fifth,  Prosody. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 

§  2.  Orthography  treats  of  the  letters,  and  other  char- 
acters of  a  language,  and  the  proper  mode  of  spelling 
words. 

The  letters  of  the  Latin  language  are  twenty-four.  They 
have  the  same  names  as  the  corresponding  characters  in  Eng- 
lish. They  are  A,  a;  B,  b ;  C,  c;  D,  d;  E,  e;  F,  f;  G,  g; 
H,  h;  I,  i;  J,  j;  L,  1;  M,m;  N,  n ;  0,o;  P,  p;  a,  q;  B,,  r; 
S,  s;  T,  t;  U,u;  V,v;  X,  x;  Y,y;  Z,  z. 

J  and  j  were  anciently  but  one  character,  as  were  likewise  u  and  v. 

W  is  not  found  in  Latin  words,  and  the  same  is  true  of  k,  except  at  the 
beginning  of  a  few  words  whose  second  letter  is  a;  and,  even  in  these 
most  writers  make  use  of  c. 

Y  and  z  are  found  only  in  words  derived  from  the  Greek. 

H,  though  called  a  letter,  only  denotes  a  breathing,  or  aspiration. 


The  consonants  are 
divided  into 


2  DIPHTHONGS.— PUNCTUATION. 

DIVISION  OF  LETTERS. 
§  3.     Letters  are  divided  into  vowels  and  consonants. 

The  vowels  are a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  y, .  .  6 

'  Liquids, lt  m,  n,  r, 4 

r Labials,.  .  .p,  btffvt-\ 

Mutes,  <  Palatics,  .  .  c,  g,  q, ,;,>....  10 
'  Linguals, .  .  ttd,          J 

Hissing  letter,   .  .  .  .  s, 1 

Double  letters,  .  .  .  .  x,  z, 2 

w  Aspirate, .  .  A, 1 

24 

-3T  is  equivalent  to  cs  or  gs ;  z  to  fs  or  ds ;  and,  except  in 
compound  words,  the  double  letter  is  always  written,  instead 
of  the  letters  which  it  represents. 

Diphthongs. 
§  4.    Two  vowels,  in  immediate  succession,  in  the  same 
syllable,  are  called  a  diphthong. 

The  diphthongs  are  ae,  ai,  au,  ei,  eut  oe,  oi,  ua,  we,  ui,  uoy 
mm,  and  jr.     Ae  and  oe  are  frequently  written  together,  <b,  02. 

PUNCTUATION. 

*§>  O.  The  only  mark  of  punctuation  used  by  the  ancients  was  a  point, 
which  denoted  pauses  of  different  length,  according  as  it  was  placed  at  the 
top,  the  middle,  or  the  bottom  of  the  line.  The  moderns  use  the  same 
marks,  in  writing  and  printing  Latin,  as  in  their  own  languages,  and  as- 
sign to  them  the  same  power. 

The  following  marks,  also,  are  sometimes  found  in  Latin 
authors,  especially  in  elementary  works : — 

~  -  r  The  first  denotes  that  the  vowel  over  which  it  stands 
is  short ;  the  second,  that  it  is  long ;  the  third,  that  it  is 
doubtful. 

A  This  is  called  the  circumflex  accent.  It  denotes  a  con- 
traction, and  the  vowel  over  which  it  stands  is  always  long. 

1  This  is  the  grave  accent,  and  is  sometimes  written  over 
particles,  to  distinguish  them  from  other  words  containing  the 
same  letters  ;  as,  qudd,  because  ;  quod,  which. 

••  The  diaeresis  denotes  that  the  vowel  over  which  it  stands 
does  not  form  a  diphthong  with  the  preceding  vowel ;  as,  aer, 
the  air. 


ORTHOEPY. SOUNDS    OF    THE    VOWELS. 


ORTHOEPY. 

§  6.    Orthoepy  treats  of  the  right  pronunciation  of  words. 

The  ancient  pronunciation  of  the  Latin  language  being  in  a 
great  measure  lost,  the  learned,  in  modern  times,  have  applied  to 
it  those  principles  which  regulate  the  pronunciation  of  their  own 
languages ;  and  hence  has  arisen,  in  different  countries,  a  great 
diversity  of  practice. 

In  the  following  rules  for  dividing  and  pronouncing  the  words 
of  the  Latin  language,  we  have  endeavored  to  conform  to  Eng- 
lish analogy,  and  to  the  settled  principles  of  Latin  accent.  The 
basis  of  this  system  is  that  which  is  exhibited  by  Walker  in  his 
"  Pronunciation  of  Greek  and  Latin  Proper  Names."  To  pro- 
nounce correctly,  according  to  this  method,  a  knowledge  of  the 
following  particulars  is  requisite  : — 

1.  Of  the  sounds  of  the  letters  in  all  their  combinations. 

2.  Of  the  quantities  of  the  penultimate  and  final  syllables. 

3.  Of  the  place  of  the  accent,  both  primary  and  secondary. 

4.  Of  the  mode  of  dividing  words  into  syllables. 

OF  THE  SOUNDS  OF  THE  LETTERS. 
I.  Of  the  Vowels. 

§7.    1 .  An  accented  vowel,  at  the  end  of  a  syllable, 

has  always  its  long  English  sound  ;  as, 

pa'-ter,  de'-dit,  vi'-vus,  to'-tus,  tu'-ba,  Ty'-rus ;  in  which  the 
accented  vowels  are  pronounced  as  in  fatal,  metre,  vital, 
total,  tutor,  tyrant. 

E,  o,  and  u,  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable,  have 
nearly  the  same  sound  as  when  accented,  but  shorter  and 
more  obscure ;  as,  re'-te,  vo'-lo,  ad-u-o. 

A,  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable,  has  the  sound 
of  a  in  father,  or  in  ah ;  as,  mu'-sa,  e-pis'-to-la ;  pronounced 
mu'-sah,  &c. 

I,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  has  always  its  long  sound. 

So  also  in  the  first  syllable  of  a  word,  the  second  of  which  is 
accented,  when  either  the  i  stands  alone  before  a  consonant,  or 
ends  the  syllable  before  a  vowel ;  as,  i-do'-ne-us,  f-e'-bam% 
di-ur'-nus. 


4  SOUNDS    OF    THE    DIPHTHONGS. 

In  other  cases,  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable  not  final, 
it  has  an  obscure  sound,  like  short  e ;  as,  Fa'-bi-us,  phi-los'-d- 
phus  ;  pronounced  Fa'-bc-us,  &c. 

Remark  1.   The  final  i  of  tib'-i  and  sib'-i  also  sounds  like  short  « 
2.   Y  is  always  pronounced  like  i  in  the  same  situation. 

$8.  2.  When  a  syllable  ends  with  a  consonant,  its 
vowel  has  the  short  English  sound  ;  as, 

mag'-nus,  reg'-num,  Jin'-go,  hoc,  fus'-tis,  cyg'-nus,  in  which 
the  vowels  are  pronounced  as  in  magnet,  seldom,  finish,  copy, 
lustre,  symbol. 

Exception  1.  A,  when  it  follows  qu  in  an  accented  syllable, 
before  dr  and  rt,  has  the  same  sound  as  in  quadrant  and  quart ; 
as,  qua'-dro,  quad'-ra-gin'-ta,  quar'-tus. 

Exc.  2.  Es,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  is  pronounced  like  the 
English  word  ease ;  as,  ig'-nes,  au'-des. 

Exc.  3.  Os,  at  the  end  of  plural  cases,  is  pronounced  like  ose 
in  dose;  as,  nos,  il-los,  dom'-i-nos. 

Exc.  4.  Post  is  pronounced  like  the  same  word  in  English ; 
so  also  are  its  compounds ;  as,  post'-quam,  post'-e-a ;  but  not  its 
derivatives ;  as,  pos-tre'-mus. 

II.  Of  the  Diphthongs. 

<5>  9.  At  and  oe  are  pronounced  as  e  would  be  in  the  same 
situation  ;  as,  a'-tas,  as'-tas,  cat'-e-ra,  pce'-na,  ozs'-trum. 

Ai,  ei,  oi,  and  yi,  usually  have  the  vowels  pronounced  sepa- 
rately. When  they  are  accented,  and  followed  by  another  vowel, 
the  i  is  pronounced  like  initial  y,  and  the  vowel  before  it  has 
its  long  sound ;  as,  Maia,  Pompeius,  Troius,  Harpyia ;  pro- 
nounced Ma'-ya,  Pom-pe'-yus,  Tro'-yus,  Har-py'-ya. 

Ei,  when  a  diphthong,  and  not  followed  by  another  vowel,  is  pronounced 
like  long  i  ;  as  in  hei. 

Au,  when  a  diphthong,  is  pronounced  like  aw ;  as,  laus,  an'- 
rum,  pronounced  laws,  &c. 

In  the  termination  of  Greek  proper  names,  the  letters  au  are 
pronounced  separately  ;  as,  Men-e-ld'-us. 

Eu,  when  a  diphthong,  is  pronounced  like  long  u;  as,  heu, 
Or'-pheus. 

Ua,  ue,  ui,  uo,  uu,  when  diphthongs,  are  pronounced  like  wa, 
we,  &c. ;  as,  lin'-gua,  que'-ror,  sua'-de-o,  quo'-tus,  e'-quus.    The^r 


SOUNDS    OF    THE    CONSONANTS.  5 

are  always  diphthongs  after  q,  and  usually  after  g  and  s.     In 
su'-us,  ar'-gu-o,  and  some  other  words,  they  are  not  diphthongs. 
Ui  in  cut  and  huic  is  pronounced  like  long  t. 


+ 


III.  Of  the  Consonants. 


$  10.  The  consonants  have,  in  general,  the  same  power 
in  Latin  as  in  English  words. 

The  following  cases,  however,  require  particular  attention. 

c. 

C  has  the  sound  of  5  before  e,  i,  and  y,  and  the  diphthongs 
<z  and  oe, ;  as,  cc'-do,  Cce'-sar,  Cy'-rus.  In  other  situations,  it 
has  the  sound  of  k ;  as,  Ca'-to,  lac. 

Ch  has  always  the  sound  of  k;  as,  charta,  machina,  pro- 
nounced kar'-ta,  mak'-i-na. 

Exc.  C,  following  or  ending  an  accented  syllable,  before  i 
followed  by  a  vowel,  and  also  before  cu,  has  the  sound  of  sh; 
as,  socia,  caduceus,  pronounced  so'-she-a,  ca-du'-she-us. 

G. 

G  has  its  soft  sound,  like  j,  before  e,  i,  and  y,  and  the  diph- 
thongs <b  and  (B ;  as,  ge'-nus,  re-gi'-na.  In  other  situations,  it 
has  its  hard  sound,  as  in  bag,  go. 

Exc.  When  g}  in  an  accented  syllable,  comes  before  g  soft,  it  coalesces 
with  it  in  sound ;  as,  agger,  exaggiro,  pronounced  aj'-er,  &c. 


<5>  11.     S  has  its  hissing  sound,  as  in  so,  thus. 

Exc.  1.  S,  following  or  ending  an  accented  syllable,  before 
i  followed  by  a  vowel,  and  before  u  ending  a  syllable,  has  the 
sound  of  sh;  as,  Persia,  censui,  pronounced  Per'-she-a,  cen'-shu-i. 
But,  in  such  case,  5,  if  preceded  by  a  vowel,  has  the  sound  of  zh ; 
as,  Aspasia,  Mozsia,  posui,  pronounced  As-pa'-zhe-a,  Mce'-zhe-a, 
pozh'-u-i. 

Note.  In  compound  words,  whose  second  part  begins  with  su,  s  retains 
its  hissing  sound  ;  as,  in'-su-per. 

Exc.  2.  S,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  after  e,  at,  a.u,  b,  m,  n,  and  r, 
has  the  sound  of  z ;  as,  res,  ces,  laus,  trabs,  hi'-ems,  lens,  Mars. 

English  analogy  has  also  occasioned  the  s  in  C<B'-sar,c<B-su'-ra,vii'-ser, 
tnu'-sa,re-sid'-U'Um,cau'-$a,  ro'-sa,  and  their  derivatives,  and  in  some 
other  words,  to  take  the  sound  of  z.  C<es-a-re~'-a,vnd  the  oblique  cases  of 
Casar ^retain  the  hissing  sound. 

1  •  ^ 


6       QUANTITIES    OP    PENULTIMATE    AND    FINAL    SYLLABLES. 

T. 

§  12.  T,  following  or  ending  an  accented  syllable,  before* 
followed  by  a  vowel,  has  the  sound  of  sh ;  as,  ratio,  Sulpitius, 
pronounced  ra'-she-o,  Sul-pish'-e-us.  But  in  such  case,  t,  if 
preceded  by  s  or  x,  has  the  sound  of  ch  in  child;  as,  mixtio, 
Sallustius,  pronounced  mix'-che-o,  Sal-lus'-che-us. 

Exc.  Proper  names  in  tion,  and  old  infinitives  in  er,  preserve  the  hard 
sound  of  t ;  as,  Am-phic'-ty-on,  flec'-ti-er  for  flecti. 


X,  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  has  the  sound  of  z ;  at  the 
end,  that  of  ks ;  as  Xenophon,  axis,  pronounced  Zen'-o-phon, 
ak'-sis. 

Exc.  1.  In  words  beginning  with  ex,  followed  by  a  vowel  in 
an  accented  syllable,  x  has  the  sound  ofgz;  as,  examino,  exem- 
plum,  pronounced  eg-zam'-i-no,  eg-zem'-plum. 

Exc.  2.  X,  ending  an  accented  syllable,  before  i  followed  by 
a  vowel,  and  before  u  ending  a  syllable,  has  the  power  of  ksh ; 
as,  noxius,  pexui,  pronounced  nok'-she-us,  pck'-sJiu-i. 

Remark.  Ch  and  ph,  before  th,  in  the  beginning  of  a  word,  are  silent , 
as  Cldhonia,  Phthia,  pronounced  Tho'-ni-a,  Thi'-a.  Also  in  the  following 
combinations  of  consonants,  in  the  beginning  of  words  of  Greek  origin, 
the  first  letter  is  not  sounded  : — mne-mon'-i-ca,  gna'-vus,  tme'-sis,  Cle'-si- 
as,  Ptol-c-ma'-us,  psal':lo. 


OF  THE  QUANTITIES  OF  THE  PENULTIMATE  AND 
FINAL  SYLLABLES. 

$  1 3.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  the  relative  time  occu- 
pied in  pronouncing  it. 

A  short  syllable  requires,  in  pronunciation,  half  the  itime  of  a 
long  one. 

The  penultimate  syllable,  or  penult,  is  the  last  syllable  but  one. 
The  antepenult  is  the  last  syllable  but  two. 

The  quantities  of  syllables  are,  in  general,  to  be  learned  from 
the  "  Rules  of  Prosody  ;  "  but  the  following  very  general  rules 
may  be  here  inserted  : — 

A  vowel  before  another  vowel  is  short. 
Diphthongs,  not  beginning  with  u,  are  long. 
A  vowel  before  x,  z,j,  or  any  two  consonants,  except  a  mute 
and  liquid,  is  long,  by  position,  as  it  is  called. 


ACCENTUATION.  7 

A  vowel  before  a  mute  and  a  liquid  is  common,  i.  e.  either 
long  or  short. 

In  this  Grammar,  when  the  quantity  of  a  penult  is  determined  by  one 
of  the  preceding  rules,  it  is  not  marked ;  in  other  cases,  except  in  dis- 
syllables, the  proper  mark  is  written  over  its  vowel. 

To  pronounce  Latin  words  correctly,  it  is  necessary  to  ascertain  the 
quantities  of  their  last  two  syllables  only  ;  and  the  rules  for  the  quantities 
of  final  syllables  would  be  unnecessary,  but  for  the  occasional  addition  of 
enclitics.  As  these  are  generally  monosyllables,  and,  for  the  purpose  of 
accentuation,  are  considered  as  parts  of  the  words  to  which  they  are  an- 
nexed, they  cause  the  final  syllable  of  the  original  word  to  become  the 
penult  of  the  compound.  But  as  the  enclitics  begin  with  a  consonant, 
the  final  vowels  of  all  words  ending  with  a  consonant,  if  previously  short, 
are,  by  the  addition  of  an  enclitic,  made  long  by  position.  It  is  necessary, 
therefore,  to  learn  the  quantities  of  those  final  syllables  only  which  end 
with  a  vowel. 


OF  ACCENTUATION. 

§  14,  Accent  is  a  particular  stress  of  voice  upon  certain 
syllables  of  words. 

When  a  word  has  more  than  one  accent,  that  which  is  near- 
est to  the  termination  is  called  the  primary  or  principal  accent. 

The  secondary  accent  is  that  which  next  precedes  the 
primary. 

A  third  and  a  fourth  accent,  in  some  long  words,  precede 
the  secondary,  and  are  subject,  in  all  respects,  to  the  same 
rules. 

In  words  of  two  syllables,  the  penult  is  always  accented  ; 
as,  pa'-ter,  ma'-ter,  pen'-na. 

In  words  of  more  than  two  syllables,  if  the  penult  is  long, 
it  is  accented  ;  but  if  it  is  shorty  the  accent  is  on  the  ante- 
penult ;  as,  a-mi'-cus,  dom'-i-nus. 

Exc.  The  penult  of  vocatives,  from  proper  names  in  ius,  is 
accented,  even  when  it  is  short ;  as,  Vir-gil'-i. 

§  15.  If  the  penult  is  common,  the  accent,  in  prose,  is  upon 
the  antepenult ;  as,  vol'-u-cris,  phar'-e-tra,  ib'4-que :  but  geni- 
tives in  ius,  in  which  *  is  common,  accent  their  penult  in  prose  ; 
as,  u-ni'-us,  is-ti'-us. 

The  rules  for  the  accentuation  of  compound  and  simple  words 
are  the  same  ;  as,  se'^cum,  sub'~e-o. 

In  accentuation,  the  enclitics  que,  ne,  ve,  and  also  those 
which  are   annexed  to  pronouns,*  are  accounted  constituent 

*  These  are  te,  met,  pte,  ce,  cine,  and  dem;  as,  tute,  egdmet,  meapte,  hicce, 
hiccine,  idem. 


8  DIVISION    OP    WORDS. SIMPLE    WORDS. 

parts  of  the  words  to  which  they  are  subjoined ;  as,  i'-ta,  it'-d- 
que;  vi'-rum,  vi-rum'-que. 

If  only  two  syllables  precede  the  primary  accent,  the  secon- 
dary accent  is  on  the  first ;  as,  mod"-e-rd''tusf  tol"-e-rab'-l-lis. 

§  16.  If  three  or  four  syllables  stand  before  the  primary 
accent,  the  secondary  accent  is  placed,  sometimes  on  the  first, 
and  sometimes  on  the  second  syllable ;  as,  de-mon"-stra-ban'-tur, 
ad"-o-les-ccn'-ti-cu 

Some  words  which  have  only  four  syllables  before  the  pri- 
mary accent,  and  all  which  have  more  than  four,  have  three 
accents  ;  as,  mod'"-e-ra"-ti-o'-nisi  tof'-e-ra-biV'-i-o'-rem,  ex-er"'- 
ci-ta"-ti-6'-nis.  In  some  combinations  there  are  four  accents  ; 
as,  ez-er""-ci-ta'"-ti-07i"-i-bus'-que. 


RULES  FOR  THE    DIVISION  OF  WORDS  INTO 
SYLLABLES. 

§  1  4  •  The  only  purpose  of  the  following  rules  for  the  division  of 
words,  is,  to  lead  to  a  correct  pronunciation. 

When  liquids  are  mentioned,  I  and  r  only  are  intended. 

Words  of  one  syllable  are  called  monosyllables  ;  of  two,  dissyllables  ;  and 
of  more  than  two,  polysyllables. 

1.  Simple   Words, 
■    1.  In  every  word  there  are  as  many  syllables  as  there  are 
separate  vowels  and  diphthongs.     A  word,  therefore,  will  be 
divided    correctly,    when   its   consonants  are  united  with  the 
proper  vowels  and  diphthongs. 

§18.  2.  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  and  a  liquid,  coming 
between  the  vowels  of  the  penultimate  and  final  syllables,  must 
be  joined  to  the  latter ;  as,  pa'-ter,  a'-crisf  vol'-u-cris,  Hi-er'- 
o-clcs. 

Tib'-i  and  sib'-i  are  excepted. 

3.  Any  two  consonants,  except  a  mute  and  a  liquid,  coming 
between  the  penultimate  and  final  syllables,  are  separated ;  as, 
cor'-pus,  il'-lc,  ad-o-les'-cens. 

§  19.  4.  A  single  consonant,  either  before  or  after  the 
vowel  of  any  accented  syllable,  except  after  the  vowel  of  a  pe- 
nult, is  joined  to  the  accented  syllable  ;  as,  i-tin'-e-ra,  dom'-i-nm. 

5.  A  mute  and  a  liquid,  coming  before  the  vowel  of  an  ac- 
cented syllable,  are  joined  to  such  vowel ;  as,  a-gres'-tis,  la-tra'- 
tor,  Eu-phrd'-nor,  ller-a-cle'-a. 

Exc.  to  rules  2  and  5.     Gl  and  tl}  either  after  the  vowel  of  the  penult, 


DIVISION    OF    WORDS. COMPOUND    WORDS.  9 

or  before  the  vowel  of  an  accented  syllable,  are  separated ;  as,  JEg'-le, 
At' -las  ;  Ag-ld'-us,  At-lan'-tl-des. 

§  20.  6.  Any  two  consonants,  except  a  mute  and  a  liquid, 
coming  before  the  vowel  of  an  accented  syllable,  and  any  two 
consonants  whatever,  coming  after  such  vowel,  unless  it  is  the 
vowel  of  the  penult (2),  are  separated;  as,  ger-md'-nus,  for- 
mi'-do,  ca-ter'-va}  co-lum'-ba,  ref-lu-o. 

Exc.  to  rules  4  and  6.  (a.)  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  and 
a  liquid,  following  a,  e,  or  o,  in  an  accented  syllable,  and  fol- 
lowed by  two  vowels,  of  which  the  first  is  e  or  i,  must  be  joined 
to  the  latter;  as,  ra'-di-us,fa!-ci-o,  me'-di-us,  do'-ce-o,  ta'-di-um, 
hce'-re-o,  Mae'-si-a,  Sue'-vi-a,  pa'-tri-us ,  E-rc'-tri-a,  (E-no'-tri-a. 

Exc.  (6.)  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  and  a  liquid,  after 
«,  in  an  accented  syllable,  must  be  joined  to  the  vowel  which 
follows ;  as,  lu'-rt-dus,  au'-re-us,  Eu'-ry-tus>  sa-lu'-bri-tas,  Eu'~ 
crl-tus. 

Exc.  (c.)  If  the  second  of  two  consonants  coming  after  the  vowel  of  an 
accented  syllable  is  t  or  d,  they  are  often  united,  as  in  English,  when 
followed  by  u,  ending  a  syllable  not  final  j  as,  mortuus,  arduus,  pro- 
nounced mort'-yu-us,  ard'-yu-ics. 

§  21.  7.  If  three  consonants  come  between  the  vowels  of 
any  two  syllables,  the  last  two,  if  a  mute  and  a  liquid,  are  joined 
to  the  latter  syllable ;  otherwise,  the  last  only ;  as,  pis-tri'-na, 
fe-nes'-tra,  emp-to'-ris,  Lamp'-sa-cus. 

8.  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  and  a  liquid,  coming  be- 
tween the  vowels  of  two  unaccented  syllables,  must  be  joined  to 
the  latter;  as,  tol'-e-ra-bil'-i-us,  ad'-o-les-cen'-ti-a,  per"'-e-gri- 
na"-ti-6'-nis. 

9.  When  x,  with  no  other  consonant,  comes  between  two  vowels,  in 
writing  syllables,  it  is  united  to  the  former ;  but  in  pronouncing  them,  it  is 
divided  ;  as,  sax'-um,  ax-il'-la,  pronounced  sac'-sum,  ac-sil'-la. 

§  22.  10.  When  A  alone  comes  between  two  vowels,  it  is  joined  to 
the  latter  ;  but  if  it  follows  c,p,  or  t,  it  is  never  separated  from  them,  and 
is  not  considered  as  a  letter  j  as,  mi'-hif  tra'-hi-re,  mach'-l-na,  Pa'-phos, 
A'-thos. 

11.  Four  consonants  rarely  meet  in  words  uncompounded,  as  in  trans'- 
trum.  In  such  case,  two  of  them  are  a  mute  and  a  liquid,  and  these  are 
joined  to  the  latter  syllable. 

2.   Compound   Words. 

§23.  12.  A  compound  word  is  resolved  into  its  constituent 
parts,  if  the  former  part  ends  with  a  consonant ;  but  if  that  ends 
with  a  vowel,  the  compound  is  divided  like  a  simple  word ;  as, 
ab-es'-se,  in'-ers}  cir-cum'-a-go,  su'-p$r-est,  sub'-i-it>prtB-terJ-e-a; 
—def-e-ro,  dil'-4-go%  be-nev'-o-lus,  pras'-to. 


10  ETYMOLOGY. NOUNS. 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§  24.  Etymology  treats  of  the  different  classes  of 
words,  their  derivation,  and  various  inflections. 

The  different  classes,  into  which  words  are  divided,  are 
called  Parts  of  Speech. 

The  parts  of  speech  in  Latin  are  eight — Substantive  or 
Noun,  Adjective,  Pronoun,  Verb,  Adverb,  Preposition, 
Conjunction,  and  Interjection. 

The  first  four  are  inflected ;  the  last  four  are  not  inflected , 
except  that  some  adverbs  change  their  termination  to  express 
comparison. 

Substantives  and  adjectives  are  often  included  by  grammarians  under 
the  general  term  nouns  ;  but,  in  this  Grammar,  the  word  noun  is  used  as 
synonymous  with  substantive  only. 

§  25.  To  verbs  belong  Participles,  Gerunds,  and  Supines, 
which  partake  of  the  meaning  of  the  verb,  and  the  inflection 
of  the  noun. 

lnjlection,  in  Latin  grammar,  signifies  a  change  in  the  ter- 
mination of  a  word.  It  is  of  thre#  kinds — declension,  conjuga- 
tion, and  comparison. 

Nouns,  adjectives,  pronouns,  participles,  gerunds,  and  su- 
pines, are  declined ;  verbs  are  conjugated,  and  adjectives  and 
adverbs  are  compared. 

NOUNS. 

$  26.     A  substantive  or  noun  is  the  name  of  an  object. 

Nouns  are  either  proper,  common,  or  abstract. 

A  proper  noun  is  the  name  of  an  individual  object ;  as, 
Caisar ;  Roma,  Rome ;  TiUeris,  the  Tiber. 

A  common  noun  denotes  a  class  of  objects,  to  any  one 
of  which  it  is  equally  applicable  ;  as,  homo,  a  man ;  avis,  a 
bird ;  quercus,  an  oak  ;  lapis,  a  stone. 

A  common  noun,  when,  in  the  singular  number,  it  sig- 
nifies many,  is  called  a  collective  noun ;  as,  populus,  a  peo- 
ple ;  exercitus,  an  army. 


GENDER.  1 1 

An  abstract  noun  is  the  name  of  a  quality,  or  of  a  mode 
of  being  or  action ;  as,  bonitas,  goodness ;  gaudium,  joy ; 
festinatio,  haste. 

Abstract  nouns,  by  varying  their  meaning,  may  become  common 
Thus,  studium,  zeal,  a  state  of  the  mind,  is  an  abstract ;  when  it  signifies 
a  pursuit,  it  is  a  common  noun.  Proper  nouns  also  may  be  used  to  desig- 
nate a  class,  and  then  they  become  common  ;  as,  duodlcim  Ccesarcs,  the 
twelve  Cffisars.  The  infinitive  mood  is  often  substituted  for  an  abstract 
noun. 

To  nouns  belong  gender,  number,  and  case, 

GENDER. 

§  27.  Nouns  have  three  genders — masculine,  feminine, 
and  neuter. 

The  gender  of  Latin  nouns  is  either  natural  or  grammatical. 

Those  words  are  naturally  masculine  or  feminine,  which  are 
used  to  designate  the  sexes. 

Those  are  grammatically  masculine  or  feminine,  which, 
though  they  denote  objects  that  are  neither  male  nor  female, 
take  adjectives  of  the  form  appropriated  to  nouns  denoting  the 
sexes :  thus,  dominus,  a  lord,  is  naturally  masculine,  because  it 
denotes  a  male;  but  sermo,  speech,  is  grammatically  mascu- 
line, because  it  takes  an  adjective  of  that  form  which  is  an- 
nexed to  nouns  denoting  males. 

The  grammatical  gender  of  Latin  nouns  depends  either  on 
their  signification,  or  on  their  declension  and  termination. 
The  following  are  the  general  rules  of  gender,  in  reference  to 
signification.  Many  exceptions  to  them,  on  account  of  termi- 
nation, occur  :  these  will  be  specified  under  the  several  de- 
clensions. 

<§>  28.  Masculines.  1.  Names  and  appellations  of  all 
male  beings  are  masculine  ;  as,  Homerus,  Homer ;  pater,  a 
father ;  consul,  a  consul ;  equus,  a  horse. 

As  proper  names  usually  follow  the  gender  of  the  general 
name  under  which  they  are  comprehended  ;  hence, 

2.  Names  of  rivers,  winds,  and  months,  are  masculine, 
because  fluvius,  ventus,  and  mensis>are  masculine  ;  as,  Tib- 
eris,  the  Tiber ;  Aquilo,  the  north  wind ;  Aprilis,  April. 

3.  Names  of  mountains  are  sometimes  masculine,  because 
mons  is  masculine ;  as,  Othrys,  a  mountain  of  Thessaly ;  but 


12  COMMON  AND  DOUBTFUL  GENDER. 

they  usually  follow  the  gender  of  their  termination ;  as,  hie9 
Atlas,  hece  Ida,  hoc  Soracte. 

<$>  29,  Feminines.  1.  Names  and  appellations  of  all 
female  beings  are  feminine ;  as,  Helena,  Helen ;  mater,  a 
mother  ;  juvenca,  a  heifer. 

2.  Names  of  countries,  towns,  trees,  plants,  ships,  islands, 
poems,  and  gems,  are  feminine  ;  because  terra,  urbs,  arbor, 
planta,  navis,  fabula,  and  gemma,  are  feminine  ;  as, 

JEgyptus,  Egypt ;  Corinthus,  Corinth ;  pirus,  a  pear-tree  ; 
nardus,  spikenard  ;  Centaurus,  the  ship  Centaur ;  Samos,  the 
name  of  an  island ;  Eunuchus,  the  Eunuch,  a  comedy  of 
Terence ;  amcthystus,  an  amethyst. 

<§>  30.  Common  and  Doubtful  Gender.  Some  words  are 
either  masculine  or  feminine.  These,  if  they  denote  things 
animate,  are  said  to  be  of  the  common  gender  ;  if  things  inani- 
mate, of  the  doubtful  gender. 

Of  the  former  are  parens,  a  parent ;  bos,  an  ox  or  cow :  of 
the  latter,  finis,  an  end. 

The  following  nouns  are  of  the  common  gender  : — 

Adolescens,  a  youth.  Dux,  a  leader.  Parens,  a  parent. 

Aff Inis,  a  relation  by  Exul,  an  exile.    ,  Praes,  a  surety. 

marriage.  Hospes,  a  guest,  a  host.  Praeses,  a  president. 

Antistes,  a  chief  priest.  Hostis,  an  enemy.  Preesul,  a  chief  priest. 

Auctor,  an  author.  Infans,  an  infant.  Princeps,    a  prince    or 

Augur,  an  augur.  Interpres,  an  interpreter.  princess. 

Bos,  an  ox  or  cow.  Judex,  a  judge.  Sacerdos,     a   priest  or 

Canis,  a  dog.  Juvenis,  a  youth.  priestess. 

Civis,  a  citizen.  Miles,  a  soldier.  Satelles,  a  life-guard. 

Comes,  a  companion.  Munlceps,  a  burgess.  Sus,  a  swine. 

Conjux,  a  spouse.  Nemo,  nobody.  Testis,  a  witness. 

Consors,  a  consort.  Par,  a  peer.  Vates,  a  prophet. 

Con  viva,  a  guest.  Patruelis,  a  cousin-ger-  Verna,  a  slave. 

Custos,  a  keeper.  man.  Vindex,  an  avenger. 

The  following  hexameters  contain  nearly  all  the  above  nouns  : — 
Conjux,  atque  parens,  princeps,  patruelis,  et  infans, 
Affinis,  vindex,  judex,  dux,  miles,  et  hostis, 
Augur,  et  antistes,  juvlnis,  convlva,  sacerdos, 
Jtfurit-que-ceps,  vates,  adolescens,  civis,  et  auctor, 
Custos,  nemo,  comes,  testis,  sus,  bos-qae,  canis-que, 
Pro  consorte  tori  par,  prmsul,  verna,  satelles, 
Pros  jungas,  consors,  interpres,  et  exul,  et  hospes. 


*  To  distinguish  the  gender  of  Latin  nouns,  grammarians  write  hie  before  the 
masculine,  hcec  before  the  feminine,  and  hoc  before  the  neuter. 


EPICENE  S. NEUTERS.  13 

$  31.  When  nouns  of  the  common  gender  denote  males, 
they  take  a  masculine  adjective  ;  when  they  denote  females,  a 
feminine. 

The  following  are  either  masculine  or  feminine  in  sense,  but 
masculine  only  in  grammatical  construction  : — 

Artlfex,  an  artist.  Fur,  a  thief.  Obses,  a  hostage. 

Auspex,  a  soothsayer.      Heres,  an  heir.  Oplfex,  a  workman. 

Codes,  a  person  having  Homo,  a  man  or  woman.  Pedes,  a  footman. 

but  one  eye.  Index,  an  informer.  Pugil,  a  boxer. 

Eques,  a  horseman.  Latro,  a  robber.  Senex,  an  old  person. 

Exlex,  an  outlaw.  Liberi,  children. 

To  these  may  be  added  personal  appellatives  of  the  first  de- 
cle%d\on  ;  as,  advena,  a  stranger  ;  auriga,  a  charioteer ;  incola, 
an  inhabitant :  also  some  gentile  nouns  ;  as,  Persa,  a  Persian ; 
Areas,  an  Arcadian. 

§  32.  The  following,  though  masculine  or  feminine  in 
sense,  are  feminine  only  in  construction  : — 

Copies,  troops.  OpSrre,  laborers.  Vigiliro,  watchmen. 

Custodies,  guards.  Proles, 

Excubise,  sentinels.  Soboles, 


e-S'5  \  offspring 


Some  nouns,  signifying  persons,  are  neuter,  both  in  their 
termination  and  construction ;  as, 

Acroama,  a  jester.  Mancipium,  >     ^ 

Auxiha,  auxiliary  troops.  bervitium,    ) 

<§>  33.  Epicenes.  Names  of  animals  which  include  both 
sexes,  but  which  admit  of  an  adjective  of  one  gender  only,  are 
called  epicene.  Such  nouns  commonly  follow  the.  gender  of 
their  terminations.  Thus, passer,  a  sparrow,  mus,  a  mouse,  are 
masculine ;  aquila,  an  eagle,  vulpes,  a  fox,  are  feminine ; 
though  each  of  them  is  used  to  denote  both  sexes. 

This  class  includes  the  names  of  animals,  in  which  the  distinction  of 
sex  is  seldom  attended  to.  When  it  is  necessary  to  mark  the  sex,  mas 
or  femina  is  usually  added. 

§  34.  Neuters.  Nouns  which  are  neither  masculine 
nor  feminine,  are  said  to  be  of  the  neuter  gender ;  such 
are, 

1.  All  indeclinable  nouns;  as,  fas,  nefas,  nihil,  gummi, 
pondo. 

2.  Names  of  letters ;  as,  A,  B,  C,  &c. 

3.  Words  used  merely  as  such,  without  reference  to  their 
meaning  ;  as,  pater  est  dissylldbum  ;  pater  is  a  dissyllable. 

4.  AH  infinitives,  imperatives,  clauses  of  sentences,  adverbs, 

2 


14  NUMBER. CASES. DECLENSIONS. 

and  other  particles,  used  substantively  ;  as,  scire  tuum,  your 
knowledge ;  ultimum  vale,  the  last  farewell. 

Remark.  Words  derived  from  the  Greek  retain  the  same  gender 
which  they  have  in  that  language. 

NUMBER. 

$  35.  Latin  nouns  have  two  numbers, — the  singular  and 
the  plural, — which  are  distinguished  by  their  terminations. 

The  singular  number  denotes  one  object;  the  plural, 
more  than  one. 

CASES. 

$  36.  Many  of  the  relations  of  objects,  which,  in  English, 
are  denoted  by  prepositions,  are,  in  Latin,  expressed  by  a 
change  of  termination. 

Cases  are  those  terminations  of  nouns,  by  means  of 
which  their  relations  to  other  words  are  denoted.  Latin 
nouns  have  six  cases  ;  viz.  Nominative,  Genitive,  Dative, 
Accusative,  Vocative,  and  Ablative, 

But  though  there  is  this  number  of  cases,  no  noun  has  so 
many  different  terminations  in  "each  number. 

§  37.  The  nominative  indicates  the  relation  of  a  subject 
to  a  finite  verb. 

The  genitive  is  used  to  indicate  origin,  possession,  and  many 
other  relations,  which,  in  English,  are  denoted  by  the  preposi- 
tion of. 

The  dative  denotes  that  to  or  for  which  any  thing  is,  or  is 
done. 

The  accusative  is  either  the  object  of  an  active  verb,  or  of 
certain  prepositions,  or  the  subject  of  an  infinitive. 

The  vocative  is  the  form  appropriated  to  the  name  of  any 
object  which  is  addressed. 

The  ablative  denotes  privation,  and  many  other  relations, 
especially  those  which  are  usually  expressed  in  English  by  the 
prepositions  with,  from,  in,  or  by. 

All  the  cases,  except  the  nominative,  are  usually  called  ob- 
lique cases. 

DECLENSIONS. 

<5>  38.  The  change  of  termination,  by  which  the  different 
cases  and  numbers  of  nouns  are  expressed,  is  called  declension 


DECLENSIONS. TERMINATIONS. 


15 


There  are,  in  Latin,  five  different  modes  of  declining 
noons,  called  theirs*,  second,  third,  fourth,  and  fifth  de- 
clensions. These  may  be  distinguished  by  the  termination 
of  the  genitive  singular,  which,  in  the  first  declension,  ends 
in  a,  in  the  second  in  i,  in  the  third  in  is,  in  the  fourth  in 
us,  and  in  the  fifth  in  ei. 

<§»  39.  The  following  table  exhibits  a  comparative  view  of 
the  five  declensions. 


Terminations. 

Singular. 

1. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

V. 

M.        N. 

M.           N. 

M. 

N. 

Norn. 

a, 

us,er,  um, 

—           — 

us, 

u, 

es, 

Gen. 

ae, 

*> 

is, 

us, 

u, 

ei', 

Dat. 

ae, 

6, 

i» 

ui, 

u> 

ei, 

Ace. 

am, 

um, 

em,          — 

um, 

u, 

em, 

Voc. 

a> 

e,  er,  um, 

—           — 

us, 

u, 

es, 

Abl. 

ft, 

o, 

e,  or  i, 

u, 

e, 

Plural. 

Norn. 

ae, 

I,             a, 

es,        a,  ia, 

us, 

ua, 

es, 

Gen. 

arum, 

drum, 

um,  or  iuro, 

uum, 

erum, 

Dat. 

is, 

is, 

Ibus, 

ibus, 

or  iibus, 

ebus, 

Ace. 

as, 

os,          a, 

es,        a, ia, 

us, 

ua, 

es, 

Voc. 

33, 

i,             a, 

es,        a, ia, 

us, 

ua, 

es, 

Abl. 

is. 

is. 

ibus. 

ibus, 

or  iibus. 

ebus. 

Remarks. 

V  40.  1.  The  terminations  of  the  nominative,  in  the  third  declen- 
sion, are  very  numerous,  and  are  therefore  omitted  in  the  table. 

2.  The  accusative  singular  ends  always  in  m,  except  in  some 
neuters. 

8.  The  vocative  singular  is  like  the  nominative  in  all  Latin 
nouns,  except  those  in  ws  of  the  second  declension. 

4.  The  nominative  and  vocative  plural  end  always  alike. 

5.  The  genitive  plural  ends  always  in  um. 

6.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  end  always  alike  ; — in  the 
1st  and  2d  declensions,  in  is ;  in  the  3d,  4th,  and  5th,  in  bus. 


16 


FIRST    DECLENSION. EXCEPTIONS    IN    GENDER. 


7.  The  accusative  plural  ends  always  in  s,  except  in 
neuters. 

8.  Nouns  of  the  neuter  gender  have  the  accusative  and 
vocative  like  the  nominative,  in  both  numbers;  and  these 
cases,  in  the  plural,  end  always  in  a. 

9.  The  1st  and  5th  declensions  contain  no  nouns  of  the  neuter  gender, 
and  the  4th  and  5th  contain  no  proper  names. 

10.  Every  inflected  word  consists  of  two  parts — a  root,  and 
a  termination.  The  root  is  the  part  which  is  not  changed  by 
inflection.  The  termination  is  the  part  annexed  to  the  root. 
The  preceding  table  exhibits  terminations  only.  In  the  fifth 
declension,  the  e  of  the  final  syllable,  though  unchanged,  is 
considered  as  belonging  to  the  termination. 


FIRST  DECLENSION. 

$41.  Nouns  of  the  first  declension  end  in  a,  c,  as,  or 
es.  Those  in  a  and  e  are  feminine;  those  in  as  and 
es  are  masculine. 

Latin  nouns  of  this  declension  end  only  in  a,  and  are  thus 
declined : — 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 


Singular. 


Mu'-sa, 

mu'-sse, 

mu'-sae, 

mu'-sam, 

mu'-sa, 

mu'-sa, 


a  muse ; 

of  a  muse  ; 

to  a  muse ; 

a  muse ; 

O  muse ; 

with  a  muse. 

Plural. 
Nom.  mu'-sae, 

mu-sa'-rum, 

mu'-sis, 

mu'-sas, 

mu'-sae, 

mu'-sis, 


Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 


muses ; 
of  muses  ; 
to  muses  ; 

muses ; 

O  muses ; 

with  muses. 


In  like  manner  decline 


Au'-la,  a  hall. 
Cu'-ra,  care. 
Ga'-le-a,  a  helmet. 
In'-su-la,  an  island. 
Lit'-g-ra,  a  letter. 


Lus-cin'-i-a,  a  nightin- 
gale. 
Mach'-i-na,  a  machine. 
Pen'-na,  a  quill,  a  wing. 


Sa-git'-ta,  an  arrow. 
Stel'-la,  a  star. 
To'-ga,  a  gown. 
Vi'-a,  a  way. 


Exceptions  in  Gender. 


<§>  42.  1.  Appellatives  of  men,  and  names  of  rivers  in  a,  are 
masculine,  according  to  §  28,  1  and  2.  But  the  poets  have  used 
the  following  names  of  rivers  as  feminine:  Albula, Allia,  Dru- 
entia,  Garumna,  Matrona,  Musella.  Names  of  rivers  in  e  are 
also  feminine  ;  as,  Lethe. 


FIRST    DECLENSION. GREEK    NOUNS.  17 

Ossa  and  (Eta,  names  of  mountains,  are  masculine  or  fem- 
inine. 

2.  Hadria,  the  Adriatic  sea,  is  masculine.  Dama,  a  fallow 
deer,  and  talpa,  a  mole,  are  once  used  as  masculine  by  Virgil. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

«§>  43.  Genitive  singular.  1.  The  poets  sometimes  formed 
the  genitive  singular  in  ai ;  as,  aula,  a  hall ;  gen.  aulai. 

2.  Familia,  after  pater,  mater,  Jilius,  or  jUia,  usually  forms 
its  genitive  in  as ;  as,  mater-familias,  the  mistress  of  a  family ; 
gen.  matris-familias ;  nom.  plur.  matres-familias  or  familidrum. 
Some  other  words  anciently  formed  their  genitive  in  the  same 
manner.  • 

Genitive  plural.  The  genitive  plural  is  sometimes  contracted 
by  omitting  ar ;  as,  Ccelicolum,  for  Caclicolarum. 

Dative  and  Ablative  plural.  The  following  nouns  have^ 
generally  dbus  in  the  dative  and  ablative  plural,  to  distinguish 
them  from  the  same  cases  of  masculines  in  us  of  the  second 
declension : — 

Dea,  a  goddess.  Equa,  a  mare. 

Filia,  a  daughter.  Mula,  a  she  mule. 

The  use  of  a  similar  termination  in  anlma,  aslna,  domlna,  liberta,  nata, 
serva,  conserva,  and  socia,  rests  on  inferior  authority. 

Greek  Nouns. 

§  44.  Nouns  of  the  first  declension  in  e,  as,  'and  es,  and 
some  also  in  a,  are  Greek.  Greek  nouns  in  a  are  Reclined  like 
musa,  except  that  they  sometimes  have  an  in  the  accusative 
singular;  as,  Ossa;  ace.  Ossam,  or  Ossan. 

Greek  nouns  in  e,  as,  and  es,  are  thus  declined  in  the  singu- 
lar number : — 

JV.  Pe-nel'-o-pe,  JV.  iE-ng'-as,  JV.  An-chl'-ses, 

G.  Pe-nel'-6-pes,  G.  M-ne'-es,  G.  An-chi'-sae, 

D.  Pe-nel'-6-pae,  D.  JE-ne'-m,  D.  An-chl'-sa), 

Ac.  Pe-neP-6-pen,  Ac.  iE-ne'-am,  or  an,          Ac.  An-chi'-sen, 

V.  Pe-nel'-d-pe,  V.  iE-ne'-a,  V.  An-chi'-se, 

Ab.  Pe-nel'-S-pe.  Ah.  iE-ne'-a.  Ah.  An-chi'-se. 

$45.     In  like  manner  decline 

Al'-o-e,  aloes.  Ti-a'-ras,  a  turban. 

E-pit'-6-me,  an  abridgment.  Co-me'-tes,  a  comet. 

This'-be.  Dy-nas'-tes,  a  dynasty. 

Bo'-re-as,  the  north  wind.  Pri-am'-I-des,  a  son  of  Priam. 

Mi'-das.  Py-n'-tes,  a  hind  of  stone. 

Patronymics  in  des  have  sometimes  em  for  en  in  the  accusative  j  as, 
Priamldcm. 

2» 


18 


SECOND    DECLENSION. 


Greek  nouns  which  admit  of  a  plural,  are  declined  in  that  number  liko 
the  plural  ofmvsa. 

The  Latins  frequently  change  the  terminations  of  Greek  nouns  in  es 
and  e  into  a ;  as,  Strides,  Jitrida,  a  son  of  Atreus  ;  Pcrscs,  Pcrsa,  a 
Persian  ;  gcometres,  geometra,  a  geometrician ;  Circe,  Circa ;  epitome, 
epitdma ;  grammutlce,  grammatlca,  grammar;  rhctorlce,  rhetoftca,  ora- 
tory. 


SECOND  DECLENSION. 


Nouns  of  the  second  declension  end  in  er,  ir, 
on.     Those  ending  in  um  and  on  are  neuter  ;  the 


$46. 

us,  urn,  os, 

rest  are  masculine 

Nouns  in  er,  us,  and  um,  ara  thus  declined  : — 


N. 
G. 
D. 

Ac. 
V. 

Ab. 


A  lord. 
Dom'-I-nus, 
dom'-I-ni, 
dom'-i-no, 
dom'-i-num, 
dom'-I-ne, 
dom'-i-no. 


N.    dom'-T-ni, 
G.    dom-i-rrd'-rum, 
D.    dom'-I-nis, 
Ac.  dom'-i-nos, 
V.    dom'-i-ni, 
Ab.  dom'-i-nis. 


Singular. 
A  son-in-law. 
Ge'-ner, 
gen'-e-ri, 
gen'-e-ro, 
gen'-e-rum, 
ge'-ner, 
gen'-e-ro. 

Plural. 

gen'-e-ri, 

gen-e-ro'-rum, 

gen'-e-ris, 

gen'-e-ros, 

gen'-e-ri, 

gen'-e-ris. 


Afield. 

A'-ger, 

a'-gri, 

a'-gro, 

a'-grum, 

a'-ger, 

a'-gro. 


a'-gri, 

a-gro'-rum, 

a'-gris, 

a'-gros, 

a'-gri, 


A  kingdom. 
Reg'-njum, 
reg'-rfi, 
reg'-r  o, 
reg'-r  um, 
reg'-r  um, 
reg' 


'-rum, 


a'-gris. 


Like  dominus  decline 
A.n'-i-mus,  the  mind.        Fo'-cus,  a  hearth.  Nu'-mS-rus,  a  number 

Clyp'-e-us,  a  shield.  Gla'-di-us,  a  sword. 

Cor'-vus,  a  raven.  Lu'-cus,  a  grove. 


O-ce'-a-nus,  the  ocean. 
Tro'-chus,  a  top. 


§  47.     Some  nouns  in  er,  like  gener,  add  the  terminations 
to  the  nominative  singular,  as  a  root.     They  are  the  compounds 
ofgero  and  fero;  as,  armiger, -eri,  an  armor-bearer;  Lucifer, 
-eri,  the  morning  star  ;  and  the  following : — 
A-dul'-ter,  €ri,  an  adul-  I'-ber,  eri,  a  Spaniard.     So'-cer,  Sri,  afather-in- 

terer.  Li'-ber,  6ri,  Bacchus.  law. 

Cel'-tl-ber,  eri,  a  Celti-   Pu'-er,  en,  a  boy.  Ves'-per,  Sri,  the   even. 

berian.  ing. 

Mulclber,  Vulcan,  sometimes  has  this  form. 


SECOND    DECLENSION. EXCEPTIONS    IN    GENDER.       19 

§  48.  All  other  nouns  in  er  reject  the  c,  in  adding  the 
terminations,  and  are  declined  like  ager;  thus, 

A'-per,  a  wild  hoar.  Li'-ber,  a  book.  Al-ex-an'-der. 

Aus'-ter,  the  south  wind.        Ma-gis'-ter,  a  master.  Teu'-cer. 

Fa'-ber,  a  workman.  On'-a-ger,  a  wild  ass. 

Vir,  a  man,  and  its  compounds,  (the  only  nouns  in  ir})  are 
declined  like  gener. 

Like  rcgnum  decline 
An  -trum,  a  cave.  Ne-go'-ti-um,*  a  busi-    Pr»-sid'-i-um,  a  defence 

A'-tri-um,  a  hall.  ness.  Sax'-um,  a  rock. 

BelMum,  war.  Ni'-trum,  nitre.  ScepMrum,  a  sceptre. 

Ex-em'-plum,an  example. 

Exceptions  in  Gender. 
<§>  49.     1.  The  following  nouns  in  us  are  feminine  : — 

Abyssus,  a  bottomless  Carbasus,  a  sail.  Miltus,  vermilion. 

pit.  Dialectus,  a  dialect.  Pharus,  a  watch-tower. 

Alvus,  the  belly.  Domus,  a  hoiise.  Plinthus,   the  foot  of  a 

AntidOtus,  an  antidote.  Eremus,  a  desert.  pillar. 

Arctus,    the  Northern  Humus,  the  ground.  Vannus,  a  sieve. 

Bear.  Lecythus,  a  cruise. 

2.  Greek  nouns  in  pJithongus,  odus,  and  metros,  are  likewise 
feminine ;  as,  diphthongus,  a  diphthong;  synodus,  an  assembly ; 
diametros,  a  diameter. 

§  50.  3.  Names  of  countries,  towns,  trees,  plants,  &c.  are 
feminine,  according  to  §  29,  2. 

Yet  the  following  names  of  plants  are  masculine  : — 

Acanthus,  bears-foot.  Dumus,  a  thicket.  Raphanus,  a  radish. 

Asparagus,  asparagus.  Helleborus,  hellebore.  Rhamn us, black-thorn. 

Calamus,  a  reed.  Intybus,  endive.  Rubus,  a  bramble. 

Carduus,  a  thistle.  J  uncus,  a  bulrush.  Tribulus,  a  thistle. 

And  sometimes 

Amaracus,  marjoram.  CytTsus,  hadder. 

Cupressus,  cypress.  Lotos,  a  lote-tree. 

Names  of  trees  in  aster  are  also  masculine ;  as,  oleaster,  a 

wild  olive. 

The  following  names  of  gems  are  also  masculine  : — 

Beryllus,  a  beryl.  ChrysoprSsus,    chryso-  Pyropus,  pyrope. 

Carbunculus,  a  carbun-  prase.  Smaragdus,  an  emerald 

cle.  Opalus,  opal. 

Chrysolithus,  chryso- 
lite. 

*  Pronounced  ne-go' -she-um.    See  $  12. 


20  SECOND    DECLENSION. EXCEPTIONS. 

Names  of  trees  and  plants  in  um  are  generally  neuter 
These  names  of  countries  and  towns  are  masculine  :   Candpus, 
Pontus,  and  all  plurals  in  i.     Abydus  and  Lesbos  are  either 
masculine  or  feminine.     I  lion  is  either  neuter  or  feminine. 
Names  of  towns  ending  in  um,  or,  if  plural,  in  a,  are  neuter. 

$51.  4.  The  following  are  doubtful,  but  more  frequently 
masculine : — 

Balanus,  a  date.  Grossus,  a  green  fig.  Phasfilus,  a  little  ship. 

liarbltus,  a  harp.  Pamplnus,  a  vine-leaf. 

Jitdmus,  an  atom,  and  colus,  a  distaff,  are  doubtful,  but  more  frequently 
feminine. 

5.  Pelagus,  the  sea,  and  virus,  poison,  are  neuter. 
Vulgus,  the  common  people,  is  generally  neuter,   but  some- 
times masculine. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

«5>  52.  Genitive  singular.  When  the  genitive  singular  ends 
in  it,  the  poets  sometimes  contract  it  into  i ;  as,  ingeni,  for 
ingenii. 

Vocative  singular.  The  vocative  of  nouns  in  us  is  some- 
times like  the  nominative,  especially  in  poetry  ;  as,  jluvius, 
Latinus,  in  Virgil.     So,  audi  tu,  populus  ;  Liv. 

Proper  names  in  ius  omit  e  in  the  vocative ;  as,  Horatius, 
Hordti;    Virgilius,  Virgili. 

Filius,  a  son,  and  genius,  a  guardian  angel, .make  also  fili  and  geni. 
Other  nouns  in  ius,  including  patrials  and  possessives  derived  from  proper 
rames,  form  their  vocative  regularly  in  c;  as,  Delius,  Dclie;  Tirynthius, 
'Sirynthie;  Laertius,  Laertie. 

§  53.  Genitive  plural.  The  genitive  plural  of  some  words, 
especially  of  those  which  denote  money,  measure,  and  weight, 
is  commonly  formed  in  um,  instead  of  drum. 

Such  are  particularly  nurnmum,  sesterti&m,  denarium,  medimnum, 
jvgerum,  modium,  talentum.  The  same  form  occurs  in  other  words,  es- 
pecially in  poetry  ;  as,  de&m,  libitum,  Danaum,  &c. 

Deiis,  a  god,  is  thus  declined  : — 
ular.  Plural. 

■us,  N.    Di'-i,  Di,  or  De'-i, 

<i,  G.    De-d'-rum, 

\-o,  D.    Di'-is,  Dis,  or  De'-is, 

[-um,  Ac.  De'-os, 

V.     Di'-i,  Di,  or  De'-i, 
Ab.  Di'-is,  Dis,  or  De'-is. 
Jesus,  the  name*  of  the  Savior,  has  um  in  the  accusative,  and  u  in  all 
the  other  oblique  cases. 


Singular.  Plural. 

JV.  bar'-bi-ton,  bar'-bt-ta, 

G.  bar'-bl-ti,  bar'-bl-ton, 

D.  bar'-bi-to,  bar'-bi-tis, 

•  Ac.  bar'-bl-ton,  bar'-bi-ta, 

V.  bar'-bl-ton,  bar'-bi-ta, 

Ah.  bar'-M-to.  bar'-bi-tis. 


third  declension.  21 

Greek  Nouns. 
§54.  Os  and  on,  in  the  second  declension,  are  Greek 
terminations,  and  are  often  changed,  in  Latin,  into  us  and  urn; 
as,  Alpheos,  Alpheus ;  Hion,  Ilium.  Those  in  ros  are  gen- 
erally changed  into  er ;  as,  Alexandros,  Alexander ;  Teucros, 
Teucer. 

Greek  nouns  are  thus  declined  : — 

Barblton,  a  lyre. 

Singular. 

JV.  De'-los,      An-dro'-ge-os, 

G.  De'-li,        An-dro'-ge-o,  or  i, 

D.  De'-lo,        An-dro'-ge-o, 

Ac  De'-lon,      An-dro'-ge-o,  or  on, 

V.  De'-le,        An-dro'-ge-os, 

Ab.  De'-lo.        An-dro'-ge-o. 

Anciently,  some  nouns  in  os  had  the  genitive  in  u  ;  as,  Menandru.  Ter. 

Greek  proper  names  in  eus  are  generally  declined  like  domlnus,  except 

in  the  vocative,  which  ends  in  eu :  in  this  case,  and  sometimes  in  the 

genitive,  dative,  and  accusative,  they  retain  the  Greek  form,  and  are  of 
le  third  declension. 
Panthu  occurs  in  Virgil  as  the  vocative  of  Pantkus. 


THIRD  DECLENSION. 

§  55,  The  number  of  final  letters,  in  this  declension,  is 
eleven.  Four  are  vowels — a,  e,  i,  o ;  and  seven  are  conso- 
nants— c,  I,  n,  r,  5,  t,  x.  The  number  of  its  final  syllables 
exceeds  fifty. 

Mode  of  declining  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension. 

In  this  declension  the  oblique  cases  cannot  always  be  determined  from 
the  nominative,  nor,  on  the  other  hand,  the  nominative  from  the  oblique 
cases.  To  decline  a  word  properly,  in  this  declension,  it  is  necessary  to 
know  its  gender,  its  nominative  singular,  and  one  of  its  oblique  cases ; 
since  the  root  of  the  cases  is  not  always  found  entire  and  unchanged  in 
the  nominative.  The  case  usually  selected  for  this  purpose  is  the  geni- 
tive singular.  The  formation  of  the  accusative  singular,  and  of  the 
nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  plural,  depends  upon  the  gender: 
if  it  is  masculine  or  feminine,  these  cases  have  one  form ;  if  neuter,  another. 

$  OOi  The  student  should  first  fix 'well  in  his  memory  the  terminations 
of  one  of  these  forms.  He  should  next  learn  the  nominative  and  genitive 
singular  of  the  word  which  is  to  be  declined.  If  is  is  removed  from  the 
genitive,  the  remainder  will  always  be  the  root  of  the  oblique  cases,  and 
by  annexing  their  terminations  to  this  root,  the  word  is  declined  ;  thus, 
rupes,  genitive  (found  in  the  dictionary)  rupis,  root  rup,  dative  rupi,  &c.  • 
so  ars,  gen  artis,  root  art,  dat.  arti,  &c. ;  opus,  gen.  operis,  root  oper, 
dat.  operi,  &c. 

Where  two  forms  are  used  in  the  same  case,  recourse  must  be  had  to 
the  rules  for  the  different*cases,  §  79 — 85. 


22 


THIRD    DECLENSION. 


The  following   are   the  two  forms  of  termination    in   this 
declension : — 


Singular. 
Masc.  and  Fern.     Kent. 

N.  •  •■ 

G.  is,  is, 

D.  i,  i, 

Ac.  em,  or  im,       * 
V.  *  * 

Ab.     e,  or  i.     e,  or  i 


Plural 
Masc.  and  Fern. 
N.  es, 

G.  um,  or  ium, 
D.        Ibus, 
.4c.        es, 
F.  es, 

Ab.      Ibus. 


JYeut 
or  ia. 


The  asterisk  stands  for  the  nominative,  and 
which  are  like  it. 


um,  or  mm, 

ibus, 

a,  or  ia, 

a,  or  ia, 

ibus. 

for  those  cases 


§  57.  The  following  are  examples  of  the  most  common 
forms  of  nouns  of  this  declension,  declined  through  all  their 
cases. 


Honor,  honor;  masc. 

Singular.         Plural. 
N.  ho-nor,        ho-nd'-res, 
G.   ho-no'-ris,    ho-no'-rum, 
D.  ho-no'-ri,      ho-nor'-i-bus, 
Ac.  ho-nd'-rem,  ho-no'-res, 
V.    ho'-nor,        ho-no'-res, 
Ab.  ho-no'-re.     ho-nor'-i-bus. 

Rupes,  a  rock;  fern. 
Singular.         Plural. 


N.  ru'-pes, 
G.  ru'-pis, 
V.  ru'-pi, 
Ac.  ru  -pern, 
V.  ru'-pes, 
Ab.  ru'-pe. 


ru'-pes, 

ru'-pi-um, 

ru'-pi-bus, 

ru'-pes, 

ru'-pes, 

ru'-pi-bus. 


Ars,  art;  fern. 
Singular.         Plural. 


N.   ars, 
G.   ar'-tis, 
J),  ar'-ti, 
Ac.  ar'-tem, 
V.   ars, 
Ab.  ar'-te. 


ar'-tes, 
ar'-ti-um,* 
ar'-tl-bus, 
ar'-tes, 
ar'-tes, 
•  ar'-tl-bus. 


Sermo,  speech ;  masc. 
Singula?  Plural. 

N.   ser'-mo  ser-mo'-nes, 

G.   ser-md  -nis,    ser-mo'-num, 
D.   ser-m6  -ni,      ser-mon'-i-bus, 
Ac.  ser-mo'-nem,  ser-mo'-nes, 
V.   ser'-mo,  ser-mo'-nes, 

Ab.  ser-mo'-ne.      ser-mon'-I-bus. 

Turris,  a  tower;  fern. 


Singular. 
N.   tur'-ris, 
G.  tur'-ris, 
D.  tur'-ri, 
Ac.  tur'-rem, 
V.   tur'-ris, 


Plural. 
tur'-res, 
tur'-ri-um, 
tur'-ri-bus, 
tur'-res, 
tur'-res, 


Ab.  tur'-re,  or  ri.   tur'-ri-bus. 
Nox,  night ;  fern. 


Singular. 
N.   nox, 
G.   noc'-tis, 
D.   noc'-ti, 
Ac.  noc'-tem, 
V.   nox, 
Ab.  noc'-te. 


Plural. 
noc'-tes, 
noc'-ti-um,* 
noc'-tl-bus, 
noc'-tes, 
noc'-tes, 
noc'-ti-bus. 


*  Pronounced  ar'-she-um,  ncc'-s'ie-uwt.    See  $  12. 


THIRD    DECLENSION. 


23 


Miles,  a  soldier;  com.  gen. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.   mi'-les,  mil'-t-tes, 

G.  mil'-T-tis,  mil'-T-tum, 

D.  mil'-T-ti>  mi-lit'-T-bus, 

Ac.  mil'-T-tem,  mil'-T-tes, 

V.  mi'-les,  mil'-T-tes, 

Ab.  mil'-T-te.  mi-lit'-I-bus. 

Pater,  a  father ;  masc. 

Singular.  .     Plural. 
N.  pa'-ter,         pa'-tres, 
G.   pa'-tris,        pa'-trum, 
D.  pa'-tri,         pat'-rT-bus, 
Ac.  pa'-trem,      pa'-tres, 
V.  pa'-ter,         pa'-tres, 
Ab.  pa'-tre.         pat'-rt-bus. 

Sedile,  a  seat ;  neut. 

Singular.  Plural. 

i\£   se-di'-le,  se-dil-i-a, 

G.   se-dl'-lis,  se-dil'-i-um, 

D.  se-di'-Ii,  se-dil'-i-bus, 

Ac.  se-dl'-le,  se-dil'-i-a, 

V.   se-di'-le,  se-dil'-i-a, 

Ab.  se-di'-li.  se-dil'-I-bus. 

Carmen,  a  verse ;  neut. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  car'-men,     car'-ml-na, 
G.   car'-mi-nis,  car'-mi-num, 
D.  car'-mi-ni,   car-min'-i-bus, 
Ac.  car'-men,     car'-ml-na, 
V.   car'-men,     car'-mi-na, 
Ab.  car'-mt-ne.  car-min'-i-bus. 

Iter,  a  journey ;  neut. 
Singular.  Plural. 

N.   i'-ter,  i-tin'-e-ra, 

G.   i-tin'-e-ris,  i-tin'-e-rum, 

D.  i-tin'-e-ri,  it-i-ner'-T-bus, 

Ac.  i'-ter,  i-tin'-e-ra, 

V.  i'-ter,  i-tin'-e-ra, 

Ab.  i-tin'-e-re.  it-i-ner'-i-bus. 


Lapis,  a  stone ;  masc. 
Singular.  Plural. 

N.   la-pis,  lap'-i-des, 

G.   lap-I-dis,  lap'-T-dum, 

D.   lap'-T-di,  la-pid-I-bus, 
Ac.  lap'-i-dem,     lap'-i-des, 

V.    la'-pis,  lap'-T-des, 


r.      ta -piS, 

Ab.  lap -I-de. 


lap'-T-des, 
la-pid'-I-bus. 


Virgo,  a  virgin ;  fern. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.   vir'-go,  vir'-gt-nes, 

G.   vir'-gt-nis,  vir'-gi-num, 

D.  vir'-gl-ni,  vir-gin'-T-bus, 

Ac.  vir'-gi-nem,  vir'-gi-nes, 

V.   vir'-go,  vir'-gi-nes, 

Ab.  vir'-gi-ne.  vir-gin'-i-bus. 

Animal,  an  animal;  neut. 
Singular*  Plural. 

N.    an'-i-mal,  an-i-ma'-li-a, 

G.    an-i-ma'-lis,  an-i-ma'-li-um, 

D.   an-i-ma'-li,  an-i-mal'-i-bus, 

Ac.  an'-i-mal,  an-i-ma'-li-a, 

V.   an'-i-mal,  an-i-ma'-li-a, 

Ab.  an-i-ma'-li.  an-i-mal'-i-bus. 

Opus,  a  work;  neut. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.   o'-pus,  op'-e-ra, 

G.   op'-e-ris,  op'-e-rum, 

D.  op'-e-ri,  o-per'-i-bus, 

Ac.  o'-pus,  op'-e-ra, 

V.   o'-pus,  op'-e-ra, 

Ab.  op'-e-re.  o-per'-i-bus. 

Caput,  a  head ;  neut. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.    ca'-put,  cap'-T-ta, 

G.   cap'-T-tis,  cap'-T-tum, 

D.   cap-I-ti,  ca-pit'-T-bus, 

Ac.  ca'-put,  cap'-T-ta, 

V.    ca'-put,  cap'-T-ta, 

Ab.  cap  -i-te.  ca-pit'-T-bus. 


24 


THIRD    DECLENSION. GENDER. 


Poema,  a  poem ;  neut. 


Singular. 
N.   po-e'-ma, 
G.   po-em'-a-tis, 
D.  po-em'-a-ti, 
Ac.  po-e'-ma, 
V.   po-e'-ma, 
Ab.  po-em'-a-te. 


Plural. 
po-em'-a-ta, 
po-em'-a-tum, 

po-e-mat'-i-bus,  or  po-em'-a-tis, 
po-em'-a-ta, 
po-em'-a-ta, 
po-e-mat'-i-bus,  or  po-em'-a-tis. 


Rules  for  the  Gender  of  Nouns  of  the  Third 
Declension. 

§58.  Nouns  whose  gender  is  determined  by  their  signi- 
fication, according  to  the  general  rules,  §28 — 34,  are  not 
included  in  the  following  rules  and  exceptions. 


MASCULINES. 

Nouns  ending  in  o,  er,  or,  es  increasing  in  the  genitive, 
and  osy  are  masculine  ;  as, 

sermo,  speech  ;  dolor,  pain ;  jlos,  a  flower  ;  career,  a  prison  ; 
pes,  a  foot. 

Exceptions  in  O. 

§59.  1.  Nouns  in  io  are  feminine,  when  they  signify 
things  incorporeal ;  as,  ratio,  reason. 

2.  Nouns  in  do  and  go,  of  more  than  two  syllables,  are  femi- 
nine ;  as,  arundo,  a  reed  ;  imago,  an  image.  So  also  grando. 
hail.  But  comedo,  a  glutton;  unedo,  a  kind  of  fruit;  and 
harpdgo,  a  hook,  are  masculine. 

Margo,  the  brink  of  a  river,  is  either  masculine  or  feminine.  Cupido 
desire,  is  often  masculine  in  poetry,  but  in  prose  is  always  feminine. 

3.  Caro,  flesh,  and  Greek  nouns  in  o,  are  feminine  j  as,  echo,  an 
echo. 

Exceptions  in  ER. 

§  60.  1.  Tuber,  the  tuber-tree,  is  feminine ;  but  when  it  denotes 
the  fruit,  it  is  masculine.  Linter,  a  boat,  is  masculine  or  feminine  ;  siser 
a  carrot,  is  masculine  or  neuter. 

2.  The  following,  in  er,  are  neuter  : — 

Acer,  a  maple-tree.  Papaver,  a  poppy. 

Cadaver,  a  dead  body.  Piper,  pepper. 

Cicer,  a  vetch.  Siler,  an  osier. 

Iter,  a  journey.  Spinther,  a  clasp. 


Laser,  benzoin. 
Laver,  water-cresses. 


Suber,  a  cork-tree 


Tuber,  a  swelling. 
Uber,  a  teat. 
Ver,  the  spring. 
Verber,  a  scourge 
Zingiber,  ginger 


THIRD   DECLENSION. GENDER.  85 

\ 

Exceptions  in  OR. 

§61.  Arbor,  a  tree,  is  feminine  :  odor,  fine  wheat ;  eequor,  the  «•*  - 
marmor,  marble ;  and  cor,  the  heart,  are  neuter. 

Exceptions  in  ES  increasing  in  the  genitive, 
1.  The  following  are  feminine  : — 
Compes,  a  fetter.  Quies,  and  Requies,  rest.        Teges,  a  mat. 

Merces,  a  reward.  Inquies,  want  of  rest.  Tudes,  a  hammer. 

Merges,  a  sheaf  of  corn.      Seges,  growing  corn. 

2.  Mcs,  a  bird,  is  masculine  or  feminine.     JEs,  brass,  is  neuter. 

Exceptions  in  OS. 

Arbos,  a  tree ;  cos,  a  whetstone  j  dos,  a  dowry ;  and  eos,  the  morning, 
are  feminine :  os,  the  mouth,  and  os,  a  bone,  are  neuter ;  as  are  also  the 
Greek  words  chaos,  chaos  j  epos,  epic  poetry  j  and  melos,  melody. 

FEMININES. 

§  62.  Nouns  ending  in  as,  es  not  increasing  in  the 
genitive,  is,  ys,  s  preceded  by  a  consonant,  and  x,  are 
feminine;  as, 

cBtas,  age ;  nubes,  a  cloud  ;  avis,  a  bird  ;  chlamys,  a  cloak ; 
trabs,  a  beam  ;  pax,  peace. 

Exceptions  in  AS. 

1.  As,  a  piece  of  money,  or  any  thing  divisible  into  twelve  parts,  is 
masculine.  Greek  nouns  in  as,  antis,  are  also  masculine ;  as,  addmas, 
adamant. 

2.  Vas,  a  vessel,  and  Greek  nouns  in  as,  dtis,  are  neuter ;  as,  artocreas, 
a  pie ;  buciras,  a  species  of  herb. 

Exceptions  in  es  not  increasing  in  the  genitive, 

■  Acindces,  a  cimeter,  and  coles,  a  stalk,  are  masculine.  Palumbes,  a  wood 
pigeon,  and  vepres,  a  bramble,  are  masculine  or  feminine.  Cacoethes, 
hippomdnts,  nepenthes,  and  pandces,  Greek  words,  are  neuter 

\ 

Exceptions  in  IS. 

§  63.     1.  Latin  nouns  in  nis  are  masculine  or  doubtful. 

Masculine, 
Crinis,  hair.  lgma,Jire.  Panis,  bread. 

Masculine  or  Feminine, 
Amnis,  a  river.  Clunis,  the  haunch.  Funis,  a  rep* 

Cinia,  ashes.  Finis,  an  end. 

Fines  (plur.),  boundaries,  is  always  masculine. 
o 


■p 


26 


THIRD    DECLENSION. GENDER. 


2.  The  following  also  are  masculine  or  feminine  : — 

Corbis,  a  basket 
Fulvis,  dust. 
Scrobis,  a  ditch. 

3.  The  following  are  masculine  : — 


Anguis,  a  snake. 
Canalis,  a  conduit  pipe. 
Cenchris,  a  serjjent. 


Tigris,  a  tiger. 
Torquis,  a  chain. 


Ensis,  a  sword. 
Fascis,  a  bundle. 
Follis,  a  pair  of  bellows. 
Fustis,  a  club. 
Glis,  a  dormouse. 
Lapis,  a  stone. 
Mensis,  a  month. 
Mugllis,  a  mullet. 
Orbis,  a  circle. 
Piscis,  a  fish. 
Follis,  fine  flour. 


Postis,  a  post. 
Sanguis,  blood. 
Semissis,  a  .half  of  as. 
Sentis,  a  brier. 
Sodalis,  a  companion. 
Torris,  a  firebrand. 
Unguis,  a  nail. 
Vectis,  a  lever. 
Vermis,  a  worm. 
Vomis,  a  ploughshare . 


Axis,  an  axlctree. 
Aqualis,  a  water-pot. 
Ca\\\s,apath. 
Cassis,  a  net. 
Caulis,  or  )       ,  ,» 
Colis,         ^  stalk. 

Centussis,  a  compound 

of  as. 
Collis,  a  hill. 
Cossis,  a  worm. 
Cucumis,  a  cucumber. 
Decussis,  a  compound 

of  as. 

Exceptions  in  S  preceded  by  a  consonant. 

V  64.  1.  Dens,  a  tooth ;  fons,  a  fountain ;  mons,  a  mountain ;  and 
pons,  a  bridge,  are  masculine.  So  also  are  chalybs,  steel ;  ellops,  a  kind 
offish  ;  epops,  a  lapwing;  gnjps,  a  griffin  ;  hydrops,  the  dropsy  ;  merops, 
a  woodpecker ;  and  seps,  a  kind  of  serpent. 

2.  Some  nouns  in  ns,  originally  participles,  and  the  compounds  of  dens, 
which  are  properly  adjectives,  are  masculine  ;  as,  confiuens,  a  confluence ; 
ocddens,  the  west ;  oriens,  the  east ;  profluens,  a  stream ;  torrens,  a  tor- 
rent ;  bidens,  a  two-pronged  hoe ;  but  bidens,  a  sheep,  is  feminine.  To 
these  add  sextans,  quadrans,  triens,  dodrans,  dextans,  parts  of  as. 

3.    The  following  are  either  masculine  or  feminine  : — 

Adeps,  fatness.  Rudens,  a  cable.  Serpens,  a  serpent. 

Forceps,  pincers.  Scrobs,  a  ditch.  Stirps,  the  trunk  of  a  tree. 

Qrilmans,  an  animal,  is  feminine  or  neuter,  and  sometimes  masculine. 

Exceptions  in   X. 

§  6o.  1.  AX.  Corax,  a  raven  ;  cordax,  a  kind  of  dance ;  dropax,&n 
ointment ;  styrax,  a  kind  of  tree  ;  and  thorax,  a  breastplate,  are  masculine ; 
Umax,  a  snail,  is  masculine  or  feminine. 

2.  EX.  Nouns  in  ex  are  masculine,  except  lex,  a  law,  nex,  death,  and 
supellex,  furniture,  which  are  feminine,  and  atriplex,  golden-herb,  which 
is  neuter. 

Cortex,  bark ;  imbrex,  a  gutter-tile ;  obex,  a  bolt ;  rumex,  sorrel ;  and 
silcx,  a  flint,  are  either  masculine  or  feminine :  grex,  a  herd,  and  pumex, 
pumice-stone,  are  very  rarely  found  feminine. 

3.  IX.  Calix,  a  cup ;  fornix,  an  arch ;  phoenix,  a  kind  of  bird ;  and  spadix, 
a  palm-branch,  are  masculine. 

Perdix,  a  partridge,  and  varix,  a  swollen  vein,  are  masculine  or  feminine. 

4.  OX.  Box  and  esox,  names  of  marine  animals,  and  volvox,  a  vine 
fretter,  are  masculine. 

5.  UX.  Tradux,  a  vine-branch,  is  masculine. 


THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.  27 

6.  YX.  Bombyx,  a  silk-worm;  calyx,  the  bud  of  a  flower ;  coccyx,  a 
cuckoo ;  and  oryx,  a  wild  goat,  are  masculine.  Onyx  and  sardonyx, 
names  of  stones ;  also,  calx,  the  heel ;  lynx,  a  lynx,  and  sandyx,  a  kind 
of  color,  are  masculine  or  feminine. 

Note.     Calx,  lime,  and  bombyx,  when  it  signifies  silk,  are  feminine. 

7.  Quincunx,  septunx,  decunx,  deunx,  parts  of  as,  are  masculine. 

NEUTERS. 

§  66.  Nouns  ending  in  a,  e,  i,  c,  I,  n,  t,  ar,  ur,  and  us, 
are  neuter ;  as, 

diadema,  a  crown  ;  rete,  a  net ;  hydromeli,  mead  ;  lac,  milk  ; 
flumen,  a  river  ;  caput,  the  head  ;  calcar,  a  spur ;  guttur,  the 
throat,  and  pectus,  the  breast. 

Exceptions  in  L. 

Mugil,  a  mullet,  and  sol,  the  sun,  are  masculine.  Sal,  salt,  is  masculine 
or  neuter,  in  the  singular;  but,  in  the  plural,  it  signifies  witticisms, 
and  is  always  masculine. 

Exceptions  in  N. 

Nouns  in  n,  except  those  in  men,  are  masculine ;  as,  canon, 
a  rule. 

But  four  in  on  are  feminine — agdon,  a  nightingale ;  halcyon,  a  king- 
fisher ;  icon,  an  image ;  sindon,  fine  linen :  and  four  in  en  are  neuter — . 
gluten,  glue ;  inguen,  the  groin ;  pollen,  fine  flour ;  and  unguen,  ointment. 

Exceptions  in  AR  and  UR. 

§  67.  Furfur,  bran ;  solar,  a  trout ;  turtur,  a  turtle  dove  ;  and  vultur, 
a  vulture,  are  masculine.  Baccar  and  ro6wr,namesof  plants,  are  neuter.  §  29. 

Exceptions  in  US. 

Lepus,  a  hare ;  mus,  a  mouse ;  and  Greek  nouns  in  pus  (^ov?),  are  mas- 
culine ;  as,  tripus,  a  tripod ;  but  lagopus,  a  white  partridge,  is  feminine. 

Nouns  in  us,  having  litis,  or  udis,  in  the  genitive,  are  femi- 
nine ;  a,s,juventus,  youth ;  incus,  an  anvil. 

Pecus,  -udis,  a  brute  animal ;  tellus,  the  earth;  fraus,  fraud ;  and  laust 
praise,  are  feminine. 

Grus,  a  crane,  is  masculine  or  feminine. 


Rules  for  the  Oblique  Cases  of  Nouns  of  thb 
Third  Declension. 

GENITIVE    SINGULAR. 

A. 

§  68.     Nouns  in  a  form  their  genitive  in  dtis ;  as,  di-a-de'- 
ma,  di-a-dem'-Brtis,  a  crown ;  dog-ma,  dog-ma-tis,  an  opinion. 


26  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE. 

E. 

Nouns  in  c  change  e  into  is  ;  as,  re'-te,  re'-tis,  a  net ;  se~di'-le> 
se~di'-lis,  a  seat. 

I. 

Nouns  in  i  are  of  Greek  origin,  and  are  generally  indeclina- 
ble ;  but  hy~drom'-£-Iif  mead,  has  hyd-ro-mel~i-tis  in.  the  geni- 
tive. 

o. 

§  69.  Nouns  in  o  form  their  genitive  in  onis ;  as,  ser'-mo, 
ser-mo'-nis,  speech  ;  pa'-vo,  pa-vo'-nis,  a  peacock. 

Remark.  Patriate  in  o  have  dnis  ;  as,  MacSdo,-6nis;  except  EburOnes, 
Lacones,  Iones,  Nasamones,  Suessones. 

Exc.  1.  Nouns  in  do  and  go,  of  more  than  two  syllables, 
form  their  genitive  in  mis ;  as,  ctrrun'-do,  a-run'-dt-nis,  a  reed ; 
i-md'-go,  i-mag'-i-nis,  an  image. 

But  comedo,  a  glutton ;  unldo,  a  kind  of  fruit ;  and  harpago,  a  hook, 
have  Onis. 

Cardo,  a  hinge  ;  ordo,  order ;  grando,  hail ;  virgo,  a  virgin ;  and  margo, 
the  brink  of  a  river,  also  have  Inis  in  the  genitive. 

Exc.  2.  The  following,  also,  have  inis: — Apollo;  homo,  a  man;  nemo, 
nobody ;  and  turbo,  a  whirlwind. 

Caro,  flesh,  has,  by  syncope,  earnis.  Anio,  the  name  of  a  river,  ha» 
Anienis ;  Nerio,  the  wife  of  Mars,  Nerienis ;  from  the  old  nominatives, 
Anien,  Nerien. 

Exc.  3.  Some  Greek  nouns  in  o  form  their  genitive  in  us,  and  their 
other  cases  singular,  in  o;  as,  Dido,  gen.  Didiis,  dat.  Dido,  &c. ; 
Argo,  -Us;  but  they  are  sometimes  declined  regularly;  as,  Dido,  DidOnis 

§  70.  The  only  nouns  in  c  are  ha'-lec,  ha-U'-cis,  a  pickle, 
and  lac,  lac'-tis,  milk. 

L.  N.  R. 
Nouns  in  J,  n,  and  r,  form  their  genitive  by  adding  is ;  as, 
con'-sul,  con'-su-lis,  a  consul ;  ca'-non,  can'-o-nis,  a  rule  ;  ho'-nor, 
ho-nd'-ris,  honor. 

So,  An'-i-mal,  an-i-ma'-lis,  an  animal.  Cal'-car,  cal-ca'-ris,  a  spur 

Vi'-gil,  vig'-I-lis,  a  watchman.  Car'-cer,  car'-c6-ris,  a  prison. 

Ti'-tan,  Ti-ta'-nis,  Titan.  Gut'-tur,  gut'-tu-ris,  the  throat. 

Si'-ren,  si-re'-nis,  a  siren.  Mar'-tyr,  mar'-t^-ris,  a  martyr. 
Del'-phin,  Del-phl'-nis,  a  dolphin. 

Exceptions  in  L. 
Fel,  gall,  and  met,  honey,  double  I  before  is;  as,fdlis,  mellis. 


THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.  29 

Exceptions  in  M. 
$71.     1.  Neuters   in  en  form   their  genitive  in  inis;  as, 
jlu'-men, Jlu'-mi-nis,  a  river;  glu'-ten, glu'-ti~nis,  glue. 

The  following,  also,  form  their  genitive  in  inis : — oscen,  a  bird  which 
foreboded  by  singing ;  pecten,  a  comb ;  tibicen,  a  piper ;  and  lablccn,  a 
trumpeter.  /  . 

2.  Some  Greek  nouns  in  on  form  their  genitive  in  ontis  ;  as,  Laomidon, 
Laomedontis. 

Exceptions  in  R. 
1.  Nouns  in  tcr  drop  e  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  pa'-ter,  pa'-tris,  a 
father.     So  also  imber,  a  shower,  and  names  of  months  in  her ; 
as,  October,  Octobris. 
But  crater,  a  cup ;  soter,  a  savior ;  and  later,  a  tile,  retain  e  in  the  genitive. 

2.  Far,  corn,  has  f arris ;  hepar,  the  liver,  hepdtis;  iter,  a  journey, 
itiniris ;  Jupiter,  J  avis  ;  and  cor,  the  heart,  cordis. 

3.  These  four  in  ur  have  dris  in  the  genitive  : — ebur,  ivory ;  femur,  the 
thigh ;  jecur,  the  liver ;  robur,  strength. 

Jecur  has  also  jecindris,  and  jocindris. 

AS. 

§  72.  Nouns  in  as  form  their  genitive  in  dtis  ;  as,  ce'-tas, 
a-ta'-tis,  age  ;  pi'-e-tas,  pi-c~td'-tis,  piety. 

Exc.  1.  Jls  has  assis;  mas,  a  male,  maris;  vas,  a  surety,  vadis  ;  and 
ras,  a  vessel,  r?o«>.     .#re«s,  a  duck,  has  andtis. 

Exc.  2.  Greek  nouns  in  as  form  their  genitive  according  to  their 
gender ;  the  masculines  in  antis,  tho  feminines  in  ddis  or  ados,  and  the 
neuters  in  dtis  ;  as,  addmas,  -antis,  adamant ;  lampus,  -ddis,  a  iamp  ;  bud- 
ras,-dtis,  a  species  of  herb.  Areas,  an  Arcadian,  and  Nomas,  a  JNumidian, 
which  are  of  the  common  gender,  form  their  genitive  in  ddis.  Melas,  the 
name  of  a  river,  has  Mcldnis. 

ES. 

§  73.  Nouns  in  es  form  their  genitive  by  changing  es  into 
is, itis,  or  etis;  as,  ru'-pes,  ru'-pis,  a  rock;  mi'-les,  mil'-i-tis,  a 
soldier ;  se'-ges,  seg'-e-tis,  growing  corn. 

A  few  Greek  proper  names  in  es  (gen.  is)  sometimes  form  their  geni 
tive  in  i,  after  the  second  declension  ;  as,  Achilles,  -is,  or  -i. 

Those  which  make  itis  are, 
Ales,  a  bird.  Gurges,  a  whirlpool.        Poples,  the  ham. 

Ames,  a  fowler's  staff.      Hospes,  a  guest.  Satelles,  a  lifeguard. 

Antistes,  a  priest.  Limes,  a  limit.  Stipes,  the  stock  of  a  tree, 

Cespes,  a  turf.  Merges,  a  sheaf  of  corn.  Tennes,  an  olive  bough. 

Comes,  a  companion.       Miles,  a  soldier.  Trames,  a  path. 

Eques,  a  horseman.  Palmes,  a  vine-branch.     Tudes,  a  hammer,   [flier. 

Koines,  fuel.  Pedes,  a  footman.  Veles,  a  light  armed  sol- 

The  following  have  Itis : — abies,  a  fir-tree  j  aries,  a  ram ;  indlges,  a  man 
deified ;  intcrprcs,  an  interpreter ;  paries,  a  wall  j  seges,  growing  com , 
and  teges,  a  mat 


80 


THIHD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE. 


The  following  have  itis: — Cres,  a  Cretan ;  lebes,  a  caldron ;  magnes,  a 
loadstone ;  quies  and  requies,  rest }  and  tapes,  tapestry.  But  requies  is 
sometimes  of  the  fifth  declension. 

Some  Greek  proper  names  have  either  Itis  or  is  in  the  genitive ;  as, 
Chremes,  -itis,  or  -is.     Dares,  -itis,  or  -is. 

Exc.  1.     Obses,  a  hostage,  and  praises,  a  president,  have  idis. 

Exc.  2.  Heres,  an  heir,  and  merces,  a  reward,  have  edis ;  pes,  a  foot, 
and  its  compounds,  have  Idis. 

Exc.  3.  Ceres  has  Ceriris;  bes,  bessis;  and  pros,  a  surety,  pradis. 
JEs,  brass,  has  oris. 


IS. 

§  74.     Nouns  in  is  have  their  genitive  the  same  as  the 


nominative ; 
bird. 


as,    au'-nst   au'-ris,    the 


ear ;    a'-vis,    a'-vis, 


Exc.  1.    The  following  have  the  genitive  in  iris : — cinis,  ashes  ;  cucumis, 
a  cucumber :  pulvis,  dust ;  vomis,  a  ploughshare. 

Exc.  2.    The   following  have  idis: — capis,  a  cup;  cassis,  a  helmet; 
euspis,  the  point  of  a  spear;  lapis,  a  stone  ;  and  promulsis ,  metheglin. 

Exc.  3.     Two  have  Inis : — pollis,  fine  flour,  and  sanguis,  blood. 

Exc.  4.     Four  have  itis : — Dis,  Pluto ;  lis,  strife ;  Quiris,  a  Roman ;  and 
Samnis,  a  Samnite. 

Exc.  5.     Glis,  a  dormouse,  has  gliris. 

Greek  nouns  in  is  form  their  genitive, 


1.  in  is,  ios,  or  eos  ;  as, 
Basis,  the  foot  of  a  pillar. 
Heeresis,  heresy. 
Metropolis,  a  chief  city. 
Phrasis,  a  phrase. 
Phthisis,  a  consumption. 
Poesis,  poetry. 


2.  in  Idis,  or  idos;  as,        3.  in  inis;  as, 

iEgis,  a  shield.  Delphis. 

iEneis,  the  JEneid.  Eleusis 

Aspis,  an  asp.  Salamis. 

Ephemeris,  a  day-book, 

Iris,  the  rainbow.  4.  in  entis;  as, 

Nereis,  a  Nereid.  SimOis. 

Pyramis,  a  pyramid. 

Tigris,  a  tiger. 

Tyrannis,  tyranny. 
Tigris  has  sometimes  the  genitive  like  the  nominative. 
Charis,  one  of  the  graces,  has  itis. 

OS. 

$  75.     Nouns  in  os  form  their  genitive  in  oris  or  otis  ;  as, 
flos,jlo'-ris,  a  flower;  ne'-ypos,  ne~j>o'-tis,  a  grandchild. 
The  following  have  oris : — 

Flos,  a  flower.  Labos,  labor.  Os,  the  mouth. 

Glos,  a  husband's  sister.         Lepos,  wit.  Ros,  dew. 

Honos,  honor.  Mos,  a  custom. 

Arbos,  a  tree,  has  dris. 
The  following  have  Otis : — 

Cos,  a  whetstone.      Monoce'ros,  a  wrdcorn.        Nepos,  a  grandchild^ 

Dos,  a  dowry.  Rhinoceros,  a  rhinoceros.    Sacerdos,  a  priest. 


THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.  3! 

Exc.  1.  Custos,  a  keeper,  has  eustodis;  bos,  an  ox,  bovis;  and  os,  a 
bone,  ossis. 

Exc.  2.  Some  Greek  substantives  in  os  have  dis  in  the  genitive ;  as, 
keros,  a  hero ;  Minos  ;  Tros,  a  Trojan. 

US. 
$  76.     Nouns  in  K5  form  their  genitive  in  gris  or  oris  ;  as, 
ge!-nus,  gen'-e-ris,  a  kind  ;  tem'-pus,  tem'-p6-ris,  time. 
Those  which  make  dns  are, 
Corpus,  a  Jocty.  Lepus,  a  hare.  Pectus,  the  breast. 

Decus,  honor.  Littus,  a  shore.  Pignus,  a  pledge. 

DedScus,  disgrace.  Nemus,  a  grove.  Stercus,  dung. 

Facinus,  an  exploit.         Pecus,  cattle.  Tempus,  time. 

Faenus,  interest.  Penus,  provisions.  Tergus,  a  hide. 

Frigus,  cold. 
Exc.  1.    These  three  have  Hdis : — that*,  an  anvil;  palus,  a  morass; 
and  subscus,  a  dove-tail. 
Pecus,  a  brute  animal,  has  pecudis. 

Exc .  2.  These  five  have  Utis  t—juventus,  youth ;  solus,  safety ;  senectus, 
old  age ;  servUus,  slavery ;  virtus,  virtue. 

Exc.  3.  Monosyllables  in  us  have  Uris;  as,  crus,  the  leg ;  jus,  right ; 
mus,  a  mouse ;  pus,  matter ;  rus,  the  country ;  thus,  frankincense  ;  except 
grus,  a  crane,  and  sus,  a  swine,  which  have  gruis,  and  suis. 

Tellus,  the  earth,  has  teUaris  ;  and  Ligus  or  ur,  a  Ligurian,  has  Liguris. 
Exc.  4.     Fraus,  fraud,  and  laus,  praise,  have  fraudis,  laudis. 
Exc.  5.     Greek  nouns  in  pus  (novg)  have  ddis;  as,  tripus,  tripddis,  a 
tripod ;  (Edipus,  -ddis,  which  is  sometimes  of  the  second  declension. 

Exc.  6.  Some  Greek  names  of  cities  in  us  have  untis;  as,  Trapixus, 
Trapezuntis  ;  Opus,  -untis  ;  Pesslnus,  -untis. 

Exc.  7.  Nouns  ending  in  eus  are  all  proper  names,  and  have  their  gen- 
itive in  eos;  as,  Orpheus,  -eos.  But  these  nouns  are  found  also  in  the 
second  declension ;  as,  Orpheus,  -ei  or  -t. 

YS. 
§  77.   Nouns  in  ys  are  Greek,  and,  in  the  genitive,  some 
have  yis  or  yos,  some  ydis  or  ydos,  and  some  ynis  or  1/nos ;  as, 
che'-lys,  che'-ly-is  or  -os,  a  harp ;  Ca'-pys,  Ca'-py-is  or  -os,  chla'-myst 
chlam'-y-dis  or  -dos,  a  cloak ;  TroJ-chys,  Tra-chy'-nis  or  -nos. 

S  preceded  by  a  consonant* 

Nouns  in  5,  with  a  consonant  before  it,  form  their  genitive 
by  changing  s  into  is  or  tis ;  as,  trabs,  tra'-bis,  a  beam ;  hi'-ems, 
hi'-e-mis,  winter ;  pars,  par'-tis,  a  part ;  frons,  fron'-tis,  the 
forehead. 

Those  in  bs,  ms,  and  ps,  change  s  into  is ;  except  gryps,  a 
griffin,  which  has  gryphis. 

Remark.  Those  in  eps  also  change  « into  i;  as,  princeps,  principis,  a 
prince.    But  seps  has  sepis,  and  auceps,  aucupis. 

Those  in  Is,  ns,  and  r* ,  change  *  into  fit . 


32        THIRD    DECLENSION. DATIVE    AND    ACCUSATIVE. 

Exc.  1.     The  following  in  ns  change  s  into  dis  :—frons,  a  leaf;  glans, 
an  acorn  ;  jvg/ans,  a  walnut ;  Lens,  a  nit;  and  librlpens,  a  weigher. 
Exc.  2.     Tiryns,  a  Greek  proper  name,  has  Tirynthis  in  the  genitive. 

T. 

§  78.  Nouns  in  t  form  their  genitive  in  itis.  They  are, 
caput,  the  head,  gen.  cap'-i-tis ;  and  its  compounds,  occiput 
and  sinciput. 

X. 

Nouns  in  x  form  their  genitive  by  changing  x  into  cis  or  g"is ; 
as,  vox,  vo'-cis,  the  voice ;  con'-jux,  con'-ju-gis,  a  spouse. 

So,  for'-nax,  for-nd'-cis,  a  furnace ;  ca'-lix,  cal'-l-cis,  a  cup ;  cer'-vix, 
cer-cl'-cis,  the  neck. 

Those  which  make  gis  are,  conjux,  a  spouse  ;  grex,  a  flock ;  iez,  a  law } 
remcx,  -igis,  a  rower ;  rex,  a  king. 

Also  the  following : — 
All5brox,-5gis,an^Zo-   DumnSrix, -Tgis.  Phalanx,  -gis,  a  phalanx, 

brogian.  Eporedorix, -Igis.  Phryx,-gis,a  Phrygian. 

Ambiorix,  -igis.  Exlex,  -Sgis,  an  outlaw.  Sphinx,  -gis,  a  sphinx. 

Aquilex,  -egis,  a  spring  Frux,  -gis,  fruit.  Strix,  -gis,  a  screech-owl. 

hunter.  Iapyx,  -ygis>  the  north-  Styx,  -gis,  the  river  Styx. 

BitQrix,  -Igis,  a  Bituri-         west  toind.  Syrinx,  -gis,  Syrinx, 

gian.  Orgetorix,  -Igis.  Vercingetorix,  -Igis. 

Coccyx,  -ygis,  a  cuckoo.  Oryx,  -ygis,  a  wild  goat. 

Exc.  1.  Nouns  in  ex,  of  more  than  one  syllable,  form  their 
genitive  in  icis  ;  as,  pollex,  -icis,  the  thumb. 

Except  fcertlsex,  a  mower ;  narihex,  a  shrub ;  resex,  a  vine-branch ; 
vervex,  a  wether  ;  and  aquilex,  exlex,  and  remex. 

Exc.  2.  Supellex,  furniture,  has  supellectilis  ;  and  senex,  an  old  man,  has 
senis.     Nix,  snow,  has  nivis  ;  and  nox,  night,  noctis. 

Exc.  3.  Some  Greek  proper  names  in  ax  form  their  genitive  in  actis ; 
as,  Hylax,  actis.     So  Astydnax,  Bibrax,  Demonax. 

Exc.  4.  Onyx  and  sardonyx  have  ijchis  in  the  genitive;  as,  onyx, 
onychis. 

DATIVE    SINGULAR. 

$  *79.  The  dative  singular  ends  in  i;  as,  sermo,  dat.  scrmoni. 
Anciently  it  also  ended  in  e;  as,  morte  datus.  Varr.  apud 
Gell. 

ACCUSATIVE    SINGULAR. 

The  accusative  singular,  with  the  exception  of  neuters,  ends 
in  em.  Yet  some  Latin  words  in  is,  which  do  not  increase  in 
the  genitive,  have  im,  and  some  Greek  words  have  im,  in,  or  a. 

1.  Many  proper  names  in  is,  denoting  places,  rivers,  or  gods,  have  the 
accusative  singular  in  im:  as,  Hispalis,  Tibcris,  Jiniibis ;  so  also  JJIbis, 
A tin sis,  Baitis,  jJrdris,  Bilbilis,  Apis,  Osiris,  Syrtis,  &c.  These  some 
times,  also,  make  the  accusative  in  in  ;  as,  AWin. 


THIRD   DECLENSION. ACCUSATIVE.  66 

2.  The  following  also  have  the  accusative  in  im  : — 
Amussis,  a  mason's  rule.     Gummis,  gum.  Sitis,  thirst. 
Boris,  a  plough-tail.             Mephitis,  foul  air.        Tussis,  a  cough. 
Cannabis,  hemp.                   Ravis,  hoarseness.        Vis,  strength. 
Cucumis,  a  cucumber.         Sinapis,  mustard. 

3.  These  have  im,  and  sometimes  em — 

Aqualis,  a  water-pot.  Puppis,  the  stern.  Securis,  an  axs. 

Febris,  a  fever.  Restis,  a  rope.  Tunis,  a  tower. 
But  these  have  em,  and  rarely  im — 

Avis,  a  bird,  Navis,  a  ship.  Ratis,  a  raft. 

Clavis,  a  key.  Ovis,  a  sheep.  Sementis,  a  sowing. 

Lens,  a  lentil.  Pelvis,  a  basin.  Sentis,  a  brier. 

Messis,  a  harvest.  Prcesepis,  a  stall.  Strigllis,  a  curry-comb. 

Crates,  a  hurdle,  has  also  sometimes  cratim,  as  if  from  cratis. 
The  ancients  formed  the  accusative  of  some  other  nouns  in  im. 

Accusative  of  Greek  Nouns. 

$  80.  The  accusative  singular  of  Greek  nouns  sometimes 
retains  the  Greek  terminations  in  and  a,  but  often  ends,  as  in 
Latin,  in  em  or  im. 

I.  Greek  nouns,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  os,  impure,  that  is, 
with  a  consonant  going  before,  have  their  accusative  in  em  or  a;  as, 
lampa  *  (lamp&dis  or  dos),  lampddem,  or  lampdda;  chlamys,  ehlampdem, 
or  -pa  i. 

In  ike  manner  these  three,  which  have  is  pure  in  the  genitive — Tros, 
Trois,  Troem,  and  Troa,  a  Trojan  j  heros,  a  hero ;  and  Minos,  a  king  of 
Crete. 

Mr,  the  air ;  other,  the  sky ;  delphin,  a  dolphin  ;  and  potan,  a  hymn, 
have  usually  a ;  as,  aira,  cetMra,  delphlna,  paxLna.  Pan,  a  god,  has 
only  a. 

Exc.  1.  Masculines  in  is,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  os  impure, 
have  their  accusative  in  im  or  in;  sometimes  in  Idem;  as,  Paris,  Parldis 
or  Paridos  ;  Parim,  Parin  or  Paridem. 

Exc.  2.  Feminines  in  is,  increasing  impurely  in  the  genitive,  though 
they  usually  follow  the  rule,  have  sometimes  im  or  in;  as,  Elis,  Elldis  or 
Elldos,  Elidem  or  Elida,  seldom  Elim  or  Elin. 

So  Tigris,  signifying  a  river  or  a  beast,  has  tigrtdem  or  tigrim;  signify- 
ing a  beast,  it  has  tignn  also. 

II.  Greek  nouns  in  is  and  ys,  having  is  or  ospure  in  the  genitive,  form 
their  accusative  by  changing  the  *  of  the  nominative  into  morn,  as, 
metamorphosis,  -eos  or  -ios  ;  metamorphdsim,  or  -Osin,  a  change ;  Tethys, 
-yis  or  -yos,  Tethym  or  -yn. 

III.  Nouns  ending  in  the  diphthong  ens  have  the  accusative  in  ea  ;  as, 
Theseus,  Thesea;  Tydeus,  Tydea. 

Demosth&nes  and  Ganymides  have  sometimes  in  the  accusative  besides 
em,  the  termination  ea. 

IV.  Some  Greek  proper  names  in  es,  whose  genitive  is  in  is,  have  in 
Latin,  along  with  the  accusative  in  em,  the  termination  en,  as  if  of  the 


34       THIRD    DECLENSION. VOCATIVE    AND    ABLATIVE. 

first  declension;  as,  Achilles,  Achillea;  Xerxes ,  Xerxen;  Sophocles,  So- 
jilidrlr.n.  Some  also,  which  have  either  etis  or  is  in  the  genitive,  have, 
besides  it  cm,  eta,  or  em,  the  termination  en  ;  as,  Chremes,  Tholes. 


VOCATIVE   SINGULAR. 

$  81.     The  vocative  is  like  the  nominative. 

Many  Greek  nouns,  however,  particularly  proper  names,  drop  s  of  the 
nominative  to  form  the  vocative;  as,  Daphnis,  Daphni ;  Tethys,  Tethy; 
Melumpus,  Mclampu ;  Orpheus,  Orpheu.  Proper  names  in  es  (gen.  is) 
sometimes  have  their  vocative  in  e;  as,  Socrates,  Sccrate. 

ABLATIVE    SINGULAR. 

$  82,     The  ablative  singular  ends  in  e. 

Exc.  1.  Neuters  in  e,  al,  and  ar,  have  the  ablative  in  i;  as, 
sedile,  sedili ;  animal,  animdli;  calcar,  calcdri. 

But  names  of  towns  in  e,  and  the  following  neuters  in  ar,  have  e  in  the 
ablative  ;  viz.  bacchar,  an  herb  ;  far,  corn  ;  hepar,  the  liver ;  jubar,  a  sun- 
beam ;  nectar,  nectar ;  par,  a  pair ;  sal,  salt.  Mare,  the  sea,  has  either 
•  e  or  t. 

Exc.  2.  Nouns  which  have  im  or  in  in  the  accusative,  and 
names  of  months  in  er  or  is,  have  i  in  the  ablative  ;  as,  vis,  vim, 
vi ;  December,  Decembri ;  Aprilis,  Aprili. 

But  Bcetis,  cannabis,  and  tigris,  have  e  or  i. 

Exc.  3.  Nouns  which  have  em  or  im  in  the  accusative,  have 
their  ablative  in  e  or  i;  as,  turris,  turre  or  turri. 

But  restis,  and  Greek  nouns  which  have  idis  in  the  genitive,  have  e 
only  ,  as,  Parts,  -Idis,  -Ide. 

Exc.  4.  Adjectives  in  is,  used  as  nouns,  have  commonly  i 
in  the  ablative,  but  sometimes  e;  as,  familiaris,  a  friend; 
natdlis,  a  birth-day. 

When  such  adjectives  become  proper  names,  they  always  have  e;  as, 
Juvenal  is,  J  uvendle.  Also,  affinis,  a  relation,  has  generally  e;  as  have 
always  juvenis,  a  youth;  rudis,  a  rod;  and  volucris,  a  bird. 

Exc.  5.  The  following,  though  they  have  only  em  in  the  accusative, 
have  c  or  i  in  the  ablative,  but  oftener  e : — 

Amnis,  Finis,  Occiput,  Pugil,  Tridens, 

Anguis,  Fustis,  Orbis,  Rus,  Unguis, 

Civis,  ignis,  Pars,  Sors,  Vectis, 

Classis,  Imber,  Postis,  Supellex,  Vesper. 

Collis,  Mugllis, 

So  also  names  of  towns,  denoting  the  place  where  any  thing  is  said  to 
be,  or  to  be  done,  have  sometimes  the  ablative  in  i;  as,  Cartliaglni,  at 
Carthage  ;  and,  in  the  most  ancient  writers,  many  other  nouns  occur  with 
this  termination  in  the  ablative.     Canal  is  has  i  only. 

Exc.  G.  Nouns  in  ys,  which  have  yra  or  yn  in  the  accusative,  have 
their  ablative  in  ye  or  y  ;  as,  Atys,  Atye,  or  Aty. 


THIRD    DECLENSION. PLURAL    CASES.  35 

NOMINATIVE    PLURAL. 

§  83.  The  nominative  plural  of  masculines  and  feminines 
ends  in  es  ;  as,  sermones,  rupes ; — but  neuters  have  a,  and  those 
whose  ablative  singular  ends  in  t  have  ia ;  as,  caput ,  capita ; 
sedile,  sedilia. 

Some  Greek  neuters  have  e  ia  the  nominative  plural ;  as,  mclos  ;  nora 
plural,  melt. 

GENITIVE   PLURAL. 

The  genitive  plural  commonly  ends  in  um;  sometimes  in 
turn. 

1.  Nouns  which,  in  the  ablative  singular,  have  i  only,  or  e 
and  #,  make  the  genitive  plural  in  ium ;  as,  sedile,  sedili,  sedilium  ; 
turris,  turre  or  turri,  turrium. 

2.  Nouns  in  es  and  is,  which  do  not  increase  in  the  genitive 
singular,  have  ium ;  as,  nubes,  nubium;  hostis,  hostium ;  vis, 
viriurn. 

Exc.  Strues,  rates,  cants,  juvZnis,  mugUis,  yards,  strigVis,  have  um. 
Also  sedes  and  mens  is  sometimes,  and  apis  and  rulucris  generally,  have  um. 

3.  Monosyllables  ending  in  two  consonants  have  ium  in  the 
genitive  plural ;  as,  urbs,  urbium  ;  gens,  gentium ;  arx,  arcium. 

Exc.     Lynx  and  ops  (obsolete)  have  um. 

The  following,  also,  have  ium : — mas,  glis,  lis,  os  (ossis),faux,  nix,  nox, 
strix,  dos,  generally  fraus  and  mus,  and  sometimes  lar. 

4.  Nouns  of  two  or  more  syllables,  in  ns  or  rs,  and  names  of 
nations  in  as,  have  commonly  ium;  as,  cliens,  clientium ;  Arpi- 
nas,  Arpinatium. 

Other  nouns  in  as  have  sometimes  ium;  as,  cefas,  GtcLtium 
Penates  and  optimdtes  have  usually  ium. 

5.  The  following  have  ium : — caro,  Unter,  uter,  venter,  Samnis,  Quiris, 
and  usually  Insuber.     Fornax,  lar,  palus,  and  radix,  have  sometimes  ium. 

6.  Greek  nouns  have  generally  um  ;  as,  Thrax,  Thracum; — but  a  few, 
used  as  titles  of  books,  have  sometimes  6n  ;  as,  Epigramma,  epigrammd- 
tdn;  Metamorphosis,  -cdn. 

Remark  1.     Bos  has  bourn  in  the  genitive  plural. 

Remark  2.  Nouns  which  want  the  singular,  form  the  genitive  plural 
as  if  they  were  complete ;  as,  manes,  manium  ;  cwlltes,  cwlltum ;  as  if  trom 
munis  and  cades.  So  also  names  of  feasts  in  alia  ;  as,  Saturnalia,  Satur- 
nalium;  but  these  have  sometimes  drum  after  the  second  declension. 
Codltes  has  sometimes  caelituum. 

• 
DATIVE  AND  ABLATIVE  PLURAL. 

§  84.     The  dative  and  ablative  plural  end  in  ibus. 

Exc.  1.  Bos  has  bobus  and  bubus,  by  contraction  for  bovlbus  ;  sus  has 
subui  for  sulbus. 


36 


THIRD     DECLENSION. ACCUSATIVE    PLURAL. 


Exc.  2.  Greek  nouns  in  ma  have  the  dative  and  ablative  plural  more 
frequently  in  is  than  in  ibus;  as,  poema,  poemdtis,  or  poematlbus. 

The  poets  sometimes  form  the  dative  plural  of  Greek  nouns,  that  in- 
crease in  the  genitive,  in  si,  and,  before  a  vowel,  in  sin;  as,  kerois, 
keroldis,  heroisi,  or  herolsin. 

ACCUSATIVE  PLURAL. 

§  85.  The  accusative  plural  ends,  like  the  nominative,  in 
es,  a,  or  ia. 

Exc.  1.  Masculine  and  feminine  nouns  which  have  turn  in  the  geni- 
tive plural,  have  sometimes  in  the  accusative  plural  eis,  or  is,  instead 
of  es/  as,  partes,  gen.  partium,  ace.  partes,  parteis  or  partis. 

Exc.  2.  When  the  accusative  singular  of  nouns  not  neuter  ends  in  a, 
the  accusative  plural  ends  in  as;  as,  lampas,  lampada,  lampddas. 


Jupiter,  and  vis,  strength,  are  thus  declined: — 


Singular. 
N.   Ju'-pi-ter, 
G.  Jo'-vis, 
D.  Jo'-vi, 
Ac.  Jo'-vem, 
V.    Ju'-pi-ter, 
Ah.  Jo'-ve. 


Singular. 
N.  vis, 
G.  vis, 
D.  -. 
Ac.  vim, 
V.  vis, 
Ab.  vi. 


Plural. 
vi'-res, 
vir'-i-um, 
vir'-i-bus, 
vi'-res, 
vi'-res, 
vir'-i-bus. 


$  86.     The 

Greek  nouns  of 

Nom. 
Lampas, 

-ades, 
Heros, 

-oes, 
Chelys, 
Poesis, 

Achilles, 

Orpheus, 

Aer, 

Dido, 


following  table  exhibits  the  principal  forms  of 
the  third  declension : — 


S. 
PI. 
S. 
PI. 


Gen. 
( -adis, 
\  -ados, 

1 

Dat. 

-adi, 

-adum, 

-adibus, 

-ois, 

-6i, 

-oum, 

-oibus, 

<-yos, 

( -is,  -ios 
(    -eos, 
< -is, 
(-eos, 

\ 
\ 
1 

-eos, 

-ei, 

-eris, 
-us, 

-eri, 

Ace. 
( -adem, ) 

i-ada,  $ 

(-ades,  ) 

t-adas,  S 

<-6em,  ) 

I  -6a,  5 
c-oes, 
<-6  as, 

j-ym, 
<-yn, 

<-im, 
(-in, 
c-em, 
(-ea, 

-ea, 

-era, 

-o, 


Voc. 


•ades, 


-oes, 


-es, 


-eu, 
-er. 


Abl. 
-ade. 

-adibus. 

-6e. 

-oibus. 

-yeory 

-e. 

-ere. 
-o 


FOURTH    DECLENSION. 


37 


FOURTH    DECLENSION. 


§  87.  Nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  end  in  us  and  u. 
Those  in  us  are  masculine ;  those  in  u  are  neuter,  and 
indeclinable  in  the  singular  number. 

Nouns  of  this  declension  are  thus  declined  : — 


Fructus,  fruit. 
Singular.  Plural. 


N.  fruc'-tus, 
G.  fruc'-tus, 
D.  fruc'-tu-i,* 
Ac.  fruc'-tum, 
V.   fruc'-tus, 
Ab.  fruc'-tu. 


fruc'-tus, 

fruc'-tu-um,* 

fruc'-ti-bus, 

fruc'-tus, 

fruc'-tus, 

fruc'-ti-bus. 


Cornu,  a  horn. 
Singular.  Plural. 


N.  cor-nu, 
G.  cor'-nu, 
D.  cor'-nu, 
Ac.  cor'-nu, 
V.  cor'-nu, 
Ab.  cor'-nu. 


cor'-nu-a, 

cor'-nu-um, 

cor'-ru-bus, 

cor'-nu-a, 

cor'-nu-a, 

cor'-nl-bus. 


Can'-tus,  a  song. 
Cur'-rus,  a  chariot. 
Ex-er'-ci-tus,  an  army 


In  like  manner  decline 

Fluc'-tus,  a  xcave.         Se-na'-tus,  the  scnats. 


Luc'-tus,  griff. 
Mo'-tus,  motion. 


Ge'-lu,  ice. 
Ve'-ru,  a  spit. 


Exceptions  in  Gender. 

§  88.     1.  The  following  are  feminine  : — 
Acus,  a  needle.  Ficus,  a  Jig.  Porticus,  a  gallery. 

Domus,  a  house.  Manus,  a  hand.  Tribus,  a  tribe. 

The  plurals  quinqudtrus,  a  feast  of  Minerva,  and  idus,  the  ides,  are 
also  feminine. 

Penus,  a  store  of  provisions,  when  of  the  fourth  declension,  is  masculine 
or  feminine.  / 

Specus,  a  den,  is  very  rarely  feminine  or  neuter. 

2.  Some  personal  appellatives,  and  names  of  trees,  are  femi»  ^ 
nine  by  signification.     See  §  29,  1  and  2.  ,  ; -" 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

§89.     1.  Domus,  a  house,  is  partly  of  the  fourtJOleclension, 
and  partly  of  the  second.     It  is  thus  declined  :- 


Singular. 
JV.   Do'-mus, 
G.  do'-mus,  or  do'-mi, 
D.  dorn'-u-i,  or  do'-mo, 
Ac.  do'-mum, 
V.   do'-mus, 
Ab.  do'-mo. 


Plural.  £ 
do'-mus./    Jr         / 
dom'-u-$mjbr  do-mo'-rum, 
dom'-^busV 
do'-jihus^6r  do'-mos, 
do'-mu/, 
dom'-i-bus. 


- 


Pronounced/rurt'-yM-i,  or /rue1  ftshuJ,  &c.    $20.  Exc.  (c.\ 

77 


38  FIFTH    DECLENSION. 

Domtis,  in  the  genitive,  signifies,  of  a  house ;  domi  commonly  signifies, 
at  home.  The  ablative  domu  is  found  in  Plautus,  in  some  copies  of  Livy , 
and  in  ancient  inscriptions. 

Cornus,  a  cornel-tree ;  Jicus,  a  fig-tree ;  laurus,  a  laurel ;  and  myrtus  a 
myrtle,  are  sometimes  of  the  second  declension.  Penus  is  sometimes 
of  the  third. 

Some  nouns  in  u  have  also  forms  in  us  and  urn ;  as,  cornu,  cornus,  or 
eornum. 

Remark.  Nouns  of  this  declension  anciently  belonged  to  the  third, 
and  were  formed  by  contraction,  thus  : — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

A*.   Fructus, 

fructues,  -us, 

G.   fructuis,  -us, 

fructuum,  -um,    ' 

D.   fructui,  -u, 

fructulbus,  -ubus,  or  -Ibus, 

Ac.  fructuem,  -urn, 

fructues,  -us, 

V    fructus, 

fructues,  -us, 

Ab.  fructue,  -u. 

fructulbus,  -ubus,  or  -Ibus. 

2.  The  genitive  singular  in  is  is  sometimes  found  in  ancient  authors. 
A  genitive  in  i,  after  the  second  declension,  also  occurs;  as,  sendtus, 
sendti. 

3.  The  contracted  form  of  the  dative  in  u  is  not  often  used ;  yet  it 
sometimes  occurs,  especially  in  Cassar,  and  in  the  poets. 

4.  The  contracted  form  of  the  genitive  plural  in  ilm  rarely  occurs. 

5.  The  following  nouns  have  ubus  in  the  dative  and  ablative 
plural : — 

Acus,  a  needle.  Lacus,  a  lake.  Specus,  a  den. 

Arcus,  a  bow.  Partus,  a  birth.  Tribus,  a  tribe. 

Artus,  a  joint.  Pecu,  afiock. 

Genu,  a  knee ;  portus,  a  harbor ;  tonitrus,  thunder ;  and  veru,  a  spit, 
have  Xbus  or  iibus. 


FIFTH   DECLENSION. 

$  90.     Nouns  of  the  fifth  declension  end  in  cs,  and  are 
of  the  feminine  gender. 


They  are  thus  declined  • — 

Res,  a 

thing. 

Dies, 

a  day. 

Singular. 

Plural 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N.   res, 

res, 

N.   di'-es, 

di'-es^ 

G.   re'-i, 

re'-rum, 

G.   di-e'-i, 

di-e'-rum, 

D.  re'-i, 

re'-bus, 

D.  di-e'-i, 

di-e'-bus, 

Ac.  rem, 

res, 

Ac.  di'-em, 

di'-es, 

V.   res, 

res, 

V.  di'-es, 

di'-es, 

Ab.  re. 

re'-bus. 

Ab.M-e. 

di-e'-Dus 

compound  nouns. irregular  nouns.  39 

Exceptions  in  Gender. 

Dies,  a  day,  is  masculine  or  feminine  in  the  singular,  and 
always  masculine  in  the  plural ;  meridies,  mid-day,  is  mascu- 
line only. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

The  genitive  and  dative  singular  sometimes  end  in  e  ;  as,  die  for  diet. 
The  genitive  is  sometimes  also  Found  in  ii  and  cs  ;  as,  pernicies,  gen.  per- 
nicii  for pcmiciel ;  rabies,  gen.  rabies,  Lucr.     Plebes  has  plebel  or  pfebt. 

Remark  1.  There  are  only  fifty-seven  nouns  of  this  declension,  and 
of  these  only  two,  res  and  dies,  are  complete  in  the  plural.  Most  of  them 
want  the  genitive,  dative,  and  ablative  plural,  and  many  the  plural 
altogether. 

2.  All  nouns  of  this  declension  end  in  ies,  except  four— -fides,  faith ; 
res,  a  thing ;  spes,  hope  ;  and  plebes,  the  common  people  ; — and  all  nouns 
in  ies  are  of  this  declension,  except  abies,  aries,  paries,  and  quies,  which 
are  of  the  third  declension,  and  requies,  which  is  of  the  third  and  fifth. 

Declension  of  Compound  Nouns. 

§  91.  When  a  compound  noun  consists  of  two  nomina- 
tives, both  parts  are  declined;  but  when  one  part  is  a  nomina- 
tive, and  the  other  an  oblique  case,  the  nominative  only  is 
declined.  Of  the  former  kind  are  respubUca,  a  commonwealth, 
and  jusjurandum,  an  oath;  of  the  latter,  mater-familias,  a 
mistress  of  a  family. 

Singular.  Plural. 

JV.  res-pub'-li-ca,  res-pub'-li-cae, 

G.  re-i-pub'-ll-caa,  re-rum-pub-li-ca'-rum, 

D.  re-i-pub'-H-cae,  re-bus-pub'-U-cis, 

Ac.  rem-pub'-li-cam,  res-pub'-ll-cas, 

V.  res-pub'-li-ca,  res-pub'-li-cre, 


Ab.  re-pub'-ll-ca.  re-bus-pub'-ll-cis 

Singular.  Plural. 

JV.  jus-ju-ran'-dum,      ju-ra-ju-ran'-da, 


G.  ju-ris-ju-ran'-di, 

D.  ju-ri-ju-ran'-do, 

Ac.  jus-ju-ran'-dum,      ju-ra-ju-ran'-da, 

V.  jus-ju-ran'-dum,      ju-ra-ju-ran'-da. 

Ab.  ju-re-ju-ran'-do. 


Singular. 
JV.  ma-ter-fa-mil'-i-as, 
G.  ma-tris-fa-mil'-i-as, 
D.  ma-tri-fa-mil'-i-as, 
Ac.  ma-trem-fa-mil'-i-as, 
V.  ma-ter-fa-mil'-i-as, 
Ab.  ma-tre-fa-mil'-i-as,  &c. 


Note.    The  preceding  compounds  are  divided  and  pronounced  like  the 
simple  words  of  which  they  are  compounded. 


IRREGULAR  NOUNS. 

§  92.      Irregular  nouns   are  divided  into  three  classes — 
Variable,  Defective,  and  Redundant. 


40  VARIABLE    NOUNS. 

I.    VARIABLE  NOUNS. 

Nouns  are  variable  either  in  gender  or  declension,  or  in  both. 
Those  which  vary  in  gender  are  called  heterogeneous ;  those 
which  vary  in  declension  are  called  heteroclites. 

Heterogeneous  Nouns. 

1.  Masculine  in  the  singular,  and  neuter  in  the  plural ;  such 
are, 

Avernus,  Ismarus,  Mcenalus,  Tsenarus, 

Dindymus,  Massicus,  Pangseus,  Tartarus, 

Taygfitus. 
Plural,  Avtrna,  &c. 

2.  Masculine  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  or  neuter  in  the 
plural ;  as,  jocus,  a  jest ;  plur.  joci,  or  joca; — locus,  a  place  ; 
plur.  loci,  passages  in  books,  topics ;  loca,  places  ; — sestertius, 
a  sesterce ;   plur.  sestertii,  or  sestcrtia. 

3.  Feminine  in  the  singular,  and  neuter  in  the  plural ;  as, 
carbdsus,  a  sail ;  plur.  carbasa; — Itierosolyma,  -a,  Jerusalem; 
plur.  1/icrosolyma,  -drum; — margarita,  -a,  a  pearl;  plur.  mar- 
garita, -drum  ; — ostrea, -a,  an  oyster;  plur.  ostrea,  'drum; — 
Pcrgdmus;  plur.  Pcrgama. 

4.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  in  the  plural ;  as, 
cerium,  heaven ;  plur.  cadi ; — Elysium ;  plur.  Elysii ; — Argos  ; 
plur.  Argi. 

5.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  or  neuter  in  the 
plural  ;  as,  franum,  a  bridle;  plur.  f rani  oxfrana; — rastrum, 
a  rake;  plur.  rastri,  or  rastra; — pugillar,  a  writing  tablet; 
plur.  pugilldres,  or  pugillaria. 

f>.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  feminine  in  the  plural ;  as, 
epulum,  a  feast;  plur.  epulcs ; — balneum,  a  bath;  plur.  balnea, 
rarely  balnea; — nundinum,  a  market-day  ;  plur.  nundina,  a  fair. 

7.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  feminine  or  neuter  in  the 
plural ;  as,  labium,  a  lip  ;  plur.  labia,  and  labia. 

Heteroclites. 

<§>  93,  1.  Second  or  third  declension  in  the  singular,  and 
third  in  the  plural ;  as,  jugerum,  an  acre ;  gen.  jugeri,  or 
jugeris;  nbl.jugere;  plur.,  nom.,  and  ace.  jugera  ;  gen.  juge- 
rum ;  abl.  jugeris  and  jugcribus,  from  the  obsolete  jugus  or 
juger. 

2.  Third  declension  in  the  singular,  and  second  in  the  plural 


n  V.  V  E  CT I V  E    N  O  0  N  3 . 


41 


as,  vas,  a  vessel ;  plur.  vasa,  drum.     Ancile,  a  shield,  has  some- 
times ancilidrum,  in  the  genitive  plural. 

Note.  Variable  nouns  seem  anciently  to  have  been  redundant,  and  to 
have  retained  a  part  of  each  of  their  original  forms.  Thus,  rasa,  -drum, 
properly  comes  from  vasum,  -i,  but  the  latter,  together  with  the  plural  of 
vas,  vusis,  became  obsolete. 


II.    DEFECTIVE   NOUNS. 
§  94.     Nouns  are  defective  either  in  case  or  number. 

1.  Nouns  defective  in  case  may  want  either  one  or  more 
cases.     Some  are  altogether  indeclinable,  and  are  called  aptotes. 

Such  are  nouns  in  u  in  the  singular ;  as,  cornu,  a  horn :  most  nouns  in  i : 
foreign  words  :  semis,  a  half:  git,  a  seed:  cepe,  an  onion  :  the  singular  of 
mille,  a  thousand  :  words  put  for  nouns  ;  as,  vellc  suum,  for  sua  voluntas, 
his  own  inclination  :  and  names  of  the  letters  of  the  alphabet. 

A  noun  which  is  found  in  one  case  only,  is  called  a  Monop- 
tote  ;  if  found  in  two  cases,  a  Diptote  ;  if  in  three,  a  Triptote; 
if  in  four,  a  Tetraptote  ;  and  if  id  five,  a  Pcntaptote. 

The  following  list  contains  most  nouns  defective  in  case : — 

inhabitants 


AbactUs,  ace.  pi. ;  a  driving  away. 
Accltu,  all.  ;  a  calling  for. 
Admissu,  ail. ;  admission. 
Admonltu,  ail. ;  admonition. 
JEs,  not  used  in  gen.  pi. 
Affatu,  aid.  ;    an  addressing  ; — pi. 

affatus,  -Ibus. 
Algus,  nam. ;  algum,  ace. ;  algu,  or 

-o,  ail.  ;  cold. 
Ambage,  ahl. ;  a  winding  story; — 

pi.  ambages,  -Ibus. 
Amissum,  ace. ;  a  loss. 
Aplustre,  nom.  and  ace. ;  the  flag  of 

a  ship; — pi.  aplustria,  or  aplustra. 
Arbitratus,  nom.  ;  -um,  ace.  ;  -u, 

all. ;  judgment. 
Arcessltu,  ail.  ;  a  sending  for. 
Astu,  nom.,  ace. ;  a  city. 
Astus,  nom. ;  astu,  ail.  ;  craft ; — 

astus,  ace.  pi. 
Cacoethes,  nom.,  ace.  ;  an  evil  cus- 
tom;— cacoethe,    nom.  pi.;   -e, 

and  -es,  ace.  pi. 
Cetos,  ace.;  a  whale; — cete,  nom. 

and  ace.  pi. 
Chaos,  nom.,  ace. ;  chao,  ail.;  chaos  ; 

— but,  signifying  a  deity,  Chaon, 

ace.  [looking  around. 

Circumspectus,  nom.;  -um  ;  -u ;  a 
Coactu,  ail. ;  constraint. 

4» 


Crellte,  ai!.;  pi.  entire 
of  heaven. 

Commutatum,  ace. ;  an  alteration. 

Compedis,  gen.;    compede,  all.  ;  a 
fetter  ; — -^.compgdeSj-ium^Ibus. 

Concessu,  all.  ;  permission. 

Condiscipulatu,    ail. ;     companion- 
ship at  school. 

Cratim,  or  -em,  ace. ;  -e,  ahl. ;  a  hur- 
dle ; — pi.  crates,  -ium,  -Tbus. 

Daps,  nom.,   scarcely  used  ;  dapis, 
gen.  &c. ;  a  feast. 

Datu,  ahl.  ;  a  giving. 

Derisui,   dat.  ;  -um,  ace. ;  -u,  abl.  ; 
ridicule. 

Despicatui,  dat. ;  contempt. 

Dica,  nom.  ;    dicam,   ace. ;  a  legal 
process  ; — dicas,  ace.  pi. 

Dicis,  gen. ;    as,  dicis   gratia,  for 
form's  sake. 

Ditionis,  gen. ;  -i,  dat. ;  -em,  ace. ; 
-e,ahl.;  power. 

Diuj  abl.  ;  in  the  day  time. 

Divisui,  dat.  ;  a  dividing. 

Ebur,  ivory  ; — not  used  in  the  gen., 
dat.,  and  abl.  pi. 

Efrlagitatu,  ail. ;  importunity. 

Ejectus,  nom.;  a  throwing  out. 

Epos,  ace. ;  an  epic  poem. 

Ergo,  ail. ;  for  the  sake. 


42 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


Evectus,  nom.  ;  a  conveyance. 

Fsex,  dregs,  wants  g en.  pi. 

Far,  corn,  not    used   in    the    gen.} 

dot.,  and  aid.  pi. 
Fas,  nam.,  ace.  ;  right. 
Fauce,  abl.  ;  the  throat; — pi.  fauces, 

-Ibus. 
Fax,  a.  torch,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Femlnis, gen.  ;  -\,dat.;  -e,ahl.  ;  the 

thigh  ; — pi.  femina,  -Ibus. 
Flietu,  abl.  ;  a  striking. 
Foris,  nom.   and  gen. ;   -em,   ace. ; 

-e,  abl.;  a  door  ; — pi.  fores,  -Ibus. 
Fors,  nom.;  -tis,  gen.;   -tern,  ace.; 

-te,  aid.  ;  chance. 
Frustratui,  aid.  ;  a  deceiving. 
Frux,  fruit,  nom.,  scarcely  used ; — 

frugis,  gen.,  &c. 
Gausape,  nom.,  ace,  abl.;  a  rough 

garment ; — gausapa,  ace.  pi. 
Glos,  nom.,  voc. ;  a  husband's  sister. 
Grates,  ace.  pi.;  —  gratlbus,   abl.; 

thanks. 
Hiems,   winter,   not  used   in  gen., 

dat.,  and  abl.  pi. 
Hippornanes,  nom. 
Hir,  nom.  and  ace.  ;   the  palm  of  the 

hand. 
Hortatu,    abl. ;    an   exhorting; — pi. 

hortatlbus. 
Impetis.  gen.  ;  -e,  abl.;  a  shock; — pi. 

impetibus. 
Inconsultu,  abl.  ;   without  advice. 
Incltas,  or  -a,  ace.  pi.  ;  as,  ad  incltas 

redactus,  reduced  to  a  strait. 
Indultu,  abl.  ;  indulgence. 
Inferice,  nom..  pi. ;  -as,  ace.  ;  sacrifices 

to  the  dead. 
Inficias, acc.pl.;   a  denial;  as,  ire 

inficias,  to  deny. 
Fngratiis,    abl.    pi.  ;   against    one's 

will. 
Injussu,  abl.  ;  without  leave. 
Inquies,  nmn. ;  disquiet. 
Jnstar,  nom.,  ace.  ;  a  likeness. 
Interdiu,  abl.  •  in  the  day  time. 
Jnvitatu,  abl. ;  an  invitation. 
Jovis,  nom..,  rarely  used  ; — pi.  Joves. 
Irrisui,   dot.;  -um,  ace;    -u,   abl.; 

derision. 
Juggris,  gen. ;  -e,  abl. ;  an  acre ; — pi. 

jugera,  -um,  -Ibus. 
Jussu.  abl.  ;  command. 
Labes.  a  spot,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Lucu,  aid,. ;  light. 
Ludiiicatui,  dot  ;  a  mockery. 


Lux,  light,  wants  the  gen.  pi. 
Mandatu,  aid. ;  a  command. 
Mane,  nom.,  ace.  ;   mane,  or  -i,  abl. , 

morning. 
Mel,  honey,  not  used  in  gen.,  dut., 

and  aid.  pi. 
Melos,  ace;  melody; — mele,  nom.t 

ace.  pi. 
Metus,  fear,  not  used  in  gen.,  dat.f 

and  abl.  pi. 
Missu,  abl. ;  despatch; — pi.  missus, 

-Ibus. 
Monitu,  abl. ;  admonition; — pi.  mon- 

Itus. 
Natu,  abl.;  by  birth. 
Nauci,  gen.  ;  as,  res  nauci,  a  thing 

of  no  value. 
Nefas,  nom.,  ace.  ;  wickedness. 
Nemo,  nobody,  wants  the  voc.  and 

the  pi. 
Nepenthes,  nom..  ;  an  herb. 
Nex,  death,  wants  the  voc.  ; — neces, 

nom.,  ace.  pi. 
Nihil,  or  nihllum,  nom.  and  ace.  ; 

-i,gen.;  -o,abl.;  nothing. 
Noctu,  abl.  ;  by  night. 
Nuptui,   dat.  ;  -um,  ace;  -u,  abl. ; 

marriage. 
Obex,  nom.;   -Icem,  ace;  -Ice,  or 

-jlce,  abl. ;   a   bolt ; — pi.  oblces, 

-jicibus. 
Objectum,  ace  ;  -u,  abl.  ;    an  inter- 

position  ; — pi.  objectus. 
Obtentui,  dat.  ;  -u,  abl.  ;  a  pretext. 
Opis,  gen.  ;  opem,  ace  ;  ope,  abl.  ; 

help  ; — pi.  entire. 
Oppositu,  abl. ;   an   opposing; — pi. 

opposltus. 
Opus,  nom.,  ace  ;  need. 
Os,  the  mouth,  wants  the  gen.  pi. 
Panacea,  nom.  ;  an  herb. 
Pax,  peace,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Peccatu,  abl. ;  sinning. 
Pecudis,  gen.  ;  -i,  dat. ;  -em,  ace. ; 

-e,  abl.  ; — pL  entire. 
Pelage,  nom.,  ace  pi.  of  pelagus; 

the  sea. 
Permissu,  abl. ;  permission. 
Piscatus,  nom.  ;  -i,  gen.  ;  -um,  ace  ; 

-u,  abl.  ;  a  fishing. 
Yix,  pitch,  wants  gen  pi. 
Pondo,  abl.  ;  in  weight. 
Preci,  dat. ;    -em,   ace;    -e,  abl. 

prayer; — pi.  entire. 
Procerem,  ace  ;  a  peer  ; — pi.  entire. 
Proles,  offspring,  wants  gen.  pi. 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


43 


Thus,  not  used  in  the  gen.,  dat.t  and 

abl.  pi. 
Veprein,  ace. ;  -e,  abl. ;  a  brier  ; — pi. 

entire. 
Verbcris,  gen.  ;  -e,  aid.  ;  a  stripe  ; — 

/;/.  verbera,  -uni,  -ibus. 
Vesper,  num. ;    -e  or  -i,   abl.  ;   the 

evening. 
Vespera,    nom.;    -am,  ace.;    -£ra, 

aid.  ;  the  evening. 
Vespgrus,  nom. ;  -o,  dat. ;  -urn,  ace. ; 

-o,  abl.  ;  the  evening. 
Vicis,  gen.;  -i,  dat.;  -em,  ace.;  -e, 

aid.  ;  change  ; — pi.  entire,  except 

gen. 
Virus,  nom.  ;  -i,  gen. ;  -us,  ace. ;  -o, 

abl.;  poison. 
Vis,  nom.  ;  vis,  gen. ;  vim,  ace. ;  vi, 

abl.  ;  strength  ; — pi.  vires,  -ium, 

&c. 
Viscus,  nom. ;  -ens,  gen. ;  -ere,  abl. ; 

an  internal  organ,  pi.  viscera,  &c. 
Vocatu,  abl.;   a  calling; — vocatus, 

ace.  pi. 
Volupe,  or  volup',  nom.,  ace. ;  pleas- 

ure. 

To  these  may  be  added  nouns  of  the  fifth  declension,  which  either 
want  the  plural,  as  most  of  them  are  abstract  nouns,  or  have  in  that  num- 
ber only  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative.  Res  and  dies,  how- 
ever, have  the  plural  entire. 

For  the  use  of  the  vocative,  also,  of  many  words,  no  classical  authority 
can  be  found. 

$  95.  2.  Nouns  defective  in  number,  want  either  the  plural 
or  the  singular. 

(a.)  Many  nouns  want  the  plural  from  the  nature  of  the  things 
which  they  express.  Such  are  names  of  persons,  most  names 
of  places  (except  those  which  have  only  the  plural),  the  names 
of  virtues,  vices,  arts,  herbs,  metals,  minerals,  liquors,  and  corn, 
most  abstract  nouns,  and  many  others. 

The  following  list  contains  most  other  nouns  which  want  the 
plural,  and  also  some,  marked  p,  which  are  included  in  the 
above  classes,  but  are  sometimes  used  in  the  plural. 


Relatu,  abl. ;  a  relation. 
Rcpetundarum,  gen.  pi.;    -is,  all.; 

extortion. 
Rogatu,  abl. ;  a  request. 
Rus,  the  country,  wants  gen.,  dot., 

and  abl.  pi. 
Satias,  nom. ;  -atem,  ace. ;  -ate,  abl. ; 

satiety. 
Secus,  nom.,  ace. ;  sex. 
Situs,  nom.  ;  -um,  ace. ;   -u,  abl. ; 

situation  ; — situs,  nom.  and  ace. 

pi. ;  -Tbus,  abl. 
Situs,  nom.;  -us,  gen.;  -um,  ace; 

-u,  abl.  ;  rust  ; — situs,  ace.  pi. 
Soboles,  offspring,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Sol,  the  sun,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Sordis,  gen.  ;    -em,  ace.  ;  -e,  abl.  ; 

filth  ; — pi.  sordes,  -ium,  &c. 
Spontis,  gen.  ;  -e,  abl.  ;  of  one's  own 

accord. 
Suppetiae,  nom.  pi. ;  -as,  ace. ;  sup- 
plies. 
Tabum,  nom.;   -i,   gen.;   -o,  abl. ; 

gore. 
Tempe,  nom.,  ace.,  voc.  pi. ;   a  vale 

in  Thessaly. 


Aconltum,  tcolfsbane,  p. 
Adorea,  corn. 
ACr,  the  air,  p. 
^s,  brass,  money,  p. 
./Ether,  the  sky. 
iEvum,  an  age,  p. 
Album,  an  album. 
Allium,  garlic,  p. 
Amicilia.,  friendship,  p. 


Argilla,  white  clay. 
Avena,  oats,  p. 
Balsamum,  balsam,  p. 
Balaustium,   the  floioer 

of  a  pomegranate. 
Barathrum,  a  gulf. 
Callum,     hardness    of 

shin,  p 
Calor,  heat,  p. 


Carduus,  a  thistle. 

Ca.ro,  flesh,  p. 

Cera,  wax,  p. 

Cestus,  the  girdle  of 
Venus. 

Cicuta,  hemlock,  p. 

Coenum,  mud. 

Conlajrium,  a  conta- 
gion, p. 


44 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


Crocum,  saffron. 

Crocus,  saffron,  p. 

Cruor,  blood,  p. 

Cutis,  the  skin,  p. 

Dilucalum,  the  dawn. 

Ebur,  ivory,  p. 

Electrum,  amber,  p. 

Far,  corn,  p. 

Fel,  gall. 

Fervor,  heat,  p. 

Fides,  faith. 

Fimus,  dung. 

Fug*,  flight,  p. 

Fumus,  smoke,  p. 

Furor,  madness,  p. 

Galla,  an  oak  apple. 

Gelu,  frost. 

Glarea,  gravel. 

Gloria,  glory,  p. 

Glastum,  woad. 

Gluten,  or 

Glutlnum,  glue. 

Gypsum,  white  plaster. 

Hepar.  the  liver. 

Hesperus,  the  evening 
star. 

Hilum,  the  black  speck 
of  a  bean. 

Hordeum,  barley,  p. 

Humus,  the  ground. 

Indoles,  the  disposition. 

Ira,  anger,  p. 

Jubar,  a  sunbeam. 

ins,  justice,  law,  p. 

Justitium,  a  law  vaca- 
tion. 

Lcetitia,  joy,  p. 

Languor,  faintness,  p. 

Lardum,  bacon,  p. 

Latex,  liquor,  p. 


Letum,  death. 

Lignum,  wood,  p. 

Li m us,  mud. 

Liquor,  liquor,  p. 

Lues,  a  plague. 

Lutum,  clay. 

Lux,  light,  p. 

Macellum,  theshambles. 

Mane,  the  morning. 

Marmor,  marble,  p. 

Mel,  honey,  p. 

Meridies,  mid-day. 

Mors,  death,  p. 

Munditia,  neatness,  p. 

Mundus,  female  orna- 
ments. 

Muscus,  moss. 

Nectar,  nectar. 

Nemo,  no  man. 

Nequitia,  wickedness,  p. 

Nihil,  nil,  nihilum,  no- 
thing. 

Nitrum,  nitre. 

Oblivio,  forgetfulness ,  p. 

Omasum,  fat  tripe. 

Opium,  opium. 

Palea,  chaff,  p. 

Pax,  peace,  p. 

Penum,  and 

Penus,  provisions. 

Piper,  pepper. 

Pix,  pitch,  p. 

Pontus,  the  sea. 

Prolubium,  desire. 

Pubes,  the  youth. 

Pulvis,  dust,  p. 

Purpura,  purple,  p. 

Quies,  rest,  p. 

Ros,  dew,  p. 

Rubor,  redness,  p. 


Sabfllo,  gravel. 
Sabulum,  sand. 
Sal     (neut.),     salt;  — 

(masc),  p. 
Salum,  the  sea. 
Salus,  safety. 
Sol,  the  sun,  a  day,  p 
Sanguis,  blood. 
ScrupQlum,  a  scruple.p. 
Senium,  old  age. 
Siler,  an  osier. 
Sinapi,  mustard. 
Siser,  a  carrot,  p. 
Sitis,  thirst. 
Sopor,  sleep,  p. 
Specimen,  an  example. 
Spuma,  foam,  p. 
Sulphur,  sulphur,  p. 
Supellex,  furniture. 
Tabes,  a  consumption. 
Tabum,  gore. 
Tellus,the  earth. 
Terror,  terror,  p. 
Thymum,  thyme,  p. 
Tribulus,  a  thistle,  p. 
Tristitia,  sadness,  p. 
Ver,  spring. 
Verbena,  vervain,  p. 
Vespera,  the  evening. 
Veternum,  and 
Veternus,  lethargy. 
Vigor,  strcjigth,  p. 
Vinum,  wine,  p. 
Virus,  poison. 
Viscum,  and 
Viscus,  birdlime. 
Vitrum,  woad. 
Vulgus,     the     common 

people. 
Zingiber,  ginger. 


§  96.  (b.)  The  names  of  festivals  and  games,  and  several 
names  of  places  and  books,  want  the  singular ;  as,  Baccha- 
nalia, a  festival  of  Bacchus;  Olympia,  the  Olympic  games; 
Bucolica,  a  book  of  pastorals  ;  and  the  following  names  of 
places  : — 


Acroceraunia,  Ecbatana, 

Amyclte,  Esquili®, 

Artaxata,  Fundi, 

Athense,  Gabii, 

Baiae,  Gades, 
Ceraunia, 


Gemoniffi  seals,  Susa, 

Locri,  SyracUsce, 

Parisii,  Thermop^li 

Philippi,  Veii, 

Puteoli,  Venetiae 


Those  in  i  more  properly  signify  the  people. 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


45 


The  following  list  contains  most  other  nouns  which  want  the 


singular,  and  also  some,  marked 
that  number : — 


which  are  rarely  used  in 


Acta,  acts. 

Adversaria,  a  memo- 
randum-book. 

iEstlva,  sc.  castra,  sum- 
mer quarters. 

Alpes,  the  Alps,  s. 

Annales,  annals,  s. 

Antae,  doorposts,  s. 

Antes,  fore  ranks. 

Antiae,  a  forelock. 

Aplnae,  trifles. 

Argutiae,  witticisms,  s. 

Arma,  arms. 

Artus,  the  joints,  s. 

Bellaria,  siceetmeats. 

Bigae,  a  two-horse  char- 
iot, s. 

Braccce,  breeches. 

Branchiae,  the  gills  of  a 
fish. 

Brevia,  shallow  places. 

Calendae,  Calends. 

Cancelli,  balustrades. 

Cani,  gray  hairs. 

Casses,  a  hunter's  net,  s. 

Caulae,  sheep-folds. 

Celeres,  light  horse. 

Ccelltes,  the  gods,  s. 

Cibaria,  victuals. 

Clitellas,  panniers. 

Codicilli,  writings. 

Crepundia,  bawb'.es. 

Cunabula,  and 

Cunae,  a  cradle. 

Cyclades,  the  Cycladian 
islands,  s. 

Decimae,  tithes,  s. 

Dirae,  the  Furies,  s. 

Divitiae,  riches. 

Drutdes,  the  Druids. 

Dryades,  the  Dryads,  s. 

Epulae,  a  banquet,  s. 

Eumenides,  the  Fu- 
ries, s. 

Excubiae,  watches. 

Exequiae,  funeral  rites. 

Exta,  entrails. 

Exuviae,  spoils. 

Facetiae,  pleasant  say- 
ings, s. 


Ferine,  holidays. 

Fides,  a  stringed  in- 
strument, s. 

Flabra,  blasts. 

Fraga,  strawberries,  s. 

Fraces,  the  lees  of  oil. 

Gemini,  twins.,  s. 

Genae,  cheeks,  s. 

Gerrae,  trifles. 

Grates,  thanks. 

Habenae,  reins,  s. 

Hyades,  the  Hyadcs,  s. 

Hyberna,  sc.  castra, 
winter  quarters. 

Idus,  the  ides  ofamonth. 

Ilia,  the  flank. 

Incunabula,  a  cradle. 

Indutiae,  a  truce. 

Induviae,  clothes. 

Ineptiae,  silly  wit,  s. 

Inferi,  the  gods  below. 

lnferiae,  sacrifices  to  the 
dead. 

Insecta,  insects. 

lnsidiae,  snares. 

J usta,  funeral  rites. 

Lactes,  small  entrails. 

Lamenta,  lamentations. 

Lapicidinae,  a  stone- 
quarry. 

Late  brtfi ,  lurking  places, 
s. 

Laurlces,  young  rabbits. 

Lautia,  presents  to  for- 
eign ambassadors. 

Lemfires,  hobgoblins. 

Lendes,  nits. 

Liberi,  children,  s. 

Luegres,  a  tribe  of  the 
Romans. 

Magalia,  cottages. 

MajGres,  ancestors,  s. 

Manes,  the  shades,  a. 

Manubiae,  spoils  of  war. 

Mapalia,  huts,  s. 

Minaciae,  and 

Minae,  threats. 

MinGres,  successors. 

Mcenia,  the  walls  of  a 
city. 


Multitia,  garmentsfine- 

ly  wrought. 
Munia,  oflices. 
Naiades,     fountain 

nymphs,  s. 
Nares,  the  nostrils,  s. 
Natales,  parentage. 
Nates,  the  luiuncltrs,  s. 
Noma?,  corroding  soresf 

s. 
Nonae,  the  nones  of  a 

month. 
Nugae,  trifles. 
Nundlnae,    a   fair,     a 

mart. 
Nuptiae,  a  marriage. 
Ob  1  i  v  ia  forgctfulncss ,  a 
OfFucice,  cheats,  s. 
Optii nates,  nobles,  s. 
Pandectae,  pandects. 
Palearia,  the  dewlap,  a. 
Parietinae,  old  walls. 
Partes,  a  party. 
Pascua,  pastures,  s. 
Penates,      household 

gods,  s. 
Phalerae,  trappings,  a. 
Philtra,  lose  potions. 
Pleiades,      the      seven 

stars,  a. 
Posleri,  posterity. 
Pnebia.  an  amulet. 
Praecordia,     the     parts 

about  the  heart. 
Primitioe,  first  fruits. 
Proceres,  nobles,  s. 
Pugillaria,  or  -ares,   a 

note-book,  s. 
Quadrigae,  a  four  horse 

chariot,  s. 
Qui  rites,     citizens    of 

Rome,  a. 
Quisquiliae,  refuse. 
Reliquiae,  a  remainder^ 

s. 
Salebrae,  rugged  places, 

s. 
Sallnae,  a  salt  pit. 
Scalae,  a  ladder,  s. 
Scatebree,  a  spring}  a. 


46 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


Scopae,  a  broom. 
Scruta,  old  clothes. 
Sentes,  thorns,  s. 
Sponsalia,  espousals. 
Stativa,   sc.    castra,    a 

pitched  camp. 
Superi,  the  gods  above. 
Talaria,  winged  shoes. 


Tenebrae,  darkness. 
Tesqua,  rough  places. 
Thermae,  hot  baths. 
Tormina,  colic  pains. 
Transtra,  seats  for  row- 
ers, s. 
Tricae,  trifles,  toys. 


Utensilia,  utensils. 
Valvae,  folding  doors. 
Vepres,  brambles,  s. 
Vergiliae,  the  seven  stars. 
Vindiciae,   a    claim    of 

liberty. 
Virgulta,  bushes. 


§  97.     The  following  differ  in  meaning   in   the  different 
numbers : — 


.32des,  -is,  a  temple. 

iEdes,  -ium,  a  house. 

Auxilium,  aid. 

Auxifia,     auxiliary 
troops. 

Bonum,  a  good  thing. 

Bona,  property. 

Career,  a  prison. 

Carceres,  a  goal. 

Castrum,  a  castle. 

Castra,  a  camp. 

Comitium,  a  part  of  the 
Roman  forum. 

Comitia,    an    assembly 
for  election. 

Cupedia,  -a?,  delicacy. 

Cupediae,  -arum,  and 

Cupedia,  -orum,  dain- 
ties. 

Copia,  plenty. 

Copies,  forces. 

Facultas,  ability. 

Facultates,  wealth. 


Fala,  a  trick. 
False,  scaffolding. 
Fastus,  -vis,  pride. 
Fastus,  -uum,  and 
Fasti,  -orum, a  calendar. 
Finis,  an  end. 
Fines,  boundaries. 
Fortuna,  Fortune. 
Fortunae,  tcealth. 
Furfur,  bran. 
Furfures,  dandruff. 
Gr atia,  favor. 
Gratis,  thanks. 
Impedimentum,  a  hin- 

derance. 
Impedimenta,  baggage. 
Litera,   a  letter   of  the 

alphabet. 
Literae,  an  epistle. 
Lustrum,  a  space  of  Jive 

years. 
Lustra,    dens  of  wild 

beasts. 


Mos,  custom. 

Mores,  manners. 

Opis,  gen.  help. 

Opes,  -um,  power, 
wealth. 

Opera,  labor. 

Operae,  workmen. 

Plaga,  a  climate. 

Plagae,  nets,  toils. 

Principium,  a  begin- 
ning. 

Principia,  the  general's 
quarters. 

Rostrum,  a  beak. 

Rostra,  a  pulpit  or  tri- 
bunal. 

Rus,  the  country. 

Rura,  fields. 

Sal,  salt. 

Sales,  witticisms. 

Torus,  a  bed,  a  cord. 

Tori,  brawny  muscles. 


$98. 

singular : — 
Alta,  the  sea. 
Animi,  courage. 
Aurae,  the  air. 
Carina?,  a  keel. 
Cervices,  the  neck. 
Colla,  the  neck. 
Comae,  the  hair. 
Connubia,  marriage. 
Corda,  the  heart. 
Corpora,  a  body. 
Crepuscula,  twilight. 
Currus,  a  chariot. 
Exilia,  banishment. 
Frigora,  cold. 
Gaudia,  joy. 
Gramlna,  grass. 


The  following  plurals  are  sometimes  used  for  the 


Guttura,  the  throat. 
Hymensei,  marriage. 
Jejunia,  fasting. 
Ignes,  love. 
Ingulna,  the  groin. 
Jubae,  a  mane. 
Limina,  a  threshold. 
Litora,  a  shore. 
Mensae,    a    service    or 

course  of  dishes. 
Nasniae,  a  funeral  dirge. 
Numlna,  the  divinity. 
Odia,  hatred. 
Ora,     the    mouth,    the 

countenance. 
Orae,  confines. 


Ortus,  a  rising,  the  east. 
Otia,  ease,  leisure. 
Pectora,  the  breast. 
Rictus,  the  jaws. 
Robora,  oak,  strength. 
Silentia,  silence. 
Sinus,   the   breast  of  a 

Roman  garment. 
Taedae,  a  torch. 
Tempora,  time. 
Thalami,  marriage,  or 

marriage-bed.  • 
Thura,  frankincense. 
Tori,  a  bed,  a  couch. 
Viae,  a  journey. 
Vultus,  the  countenance 


REDUNDANT    NOUNS. 


III.    REDUNDANT   NOUNS. 

§  99,  Nouns  are  redundant  either  in  termination,  in 
declension,  in  gender,  or  in  two  or  more  of  these  respects. 

1.  In  termination:  (a.)  of  the  nominative;  as,  arbor,  and 
arbos,  a  tree  :  (6.)  of  the  oblique  cases;  as,tigris;  gen.  tigris, 
or  -idis ;  a  tiger. 

2.  In  declension ;  as,  laurus ;  gen.  -i,  or  -us  ;  a  laurel. 

3.  In  gender ;  as,  vulgus,  masc.  or  neut. ;  the  common 
people. 

4.  In  termination  and  declension  ;  as,  senecta,  -a,  and  senec- 
tus,  -utis  ;  old  age. 

5.  In  termination  and  gender ;  as,  pilcus,  masc,  and  pileum, 
neut. ;  a  hat. 

6.  In  declension  and  gender;  as,  penus,  -us,  masc,  and 
penus,  -oris,  neut. ;  a  store  of  provisions. 

7.  In  termination,  declension,  and  gender ;  as,  mcnda,  -<e, 
fern.,  and  mendum,  -I,  neut. ;  a  fault. 

The  following  list  contains  most  Redundant  Nouns  of  the 
above  classes  : — 

Abusio,  and  -us,  -us,  an  abuse.  Barbaria,  and  -ies,  barbarism. 

Acinus,  and  -urn,  a  grape-stone.  Barbltus,  and  -on,  a  harp. 

Adagium,  and  -io,  a  proverb.  Batillus,  and  -um,  afire  shovel. 

Admonitio,  and  -us,  -lis,  an  advising.  Blanditia,  and  -ies,  flattery. 

jEthra,  and  iEther,  the  clear  sky.  Buccina,  and  -um,  a  trumpet. 

Affectio,  and  -us,  -us,  affection.  Bura,  and  -is,  a  plough-tail. 

Agamemno,  and  -on,  Jigamcmnon.  Buxus,  and  -um,  the  box-tree. 

Alabaster,  -tri,  and  -trum,  an  alabas-  Calamister,  -tri,  and  -trum,  a  crisp- 

ter  box.  ing-pin. 

Alimonia,  and  -um,  aliment.  Callus,  and  -um,  hardness  of  the  skin. 

Alluvio,  and  -es,  a  flood.  Cancer,  -tri,  or  -iris,  a  crab. 

Alvearium,  and  -are,  a  bee-hive.  Canitia,  and  -ies,  hoariness. 

Amaracus,  and -am,  sweet  marjoram.  Capus,  and  Capo,  a  capon. 

Anfractum,  and  -us,  -us,  a  winding.  Casslda,  and  Cassis,  a  helmet. 

Angiportum,  and  -us,  -us,  a  narrow  Catlnus,  and  -um,  a  platter. 

way.  Cepa,  and  -e,  an  onion. 

Antidotus,  and  -um,  an  antidote.  Chirographus,  and  -um,  a  hand  writ' 
Aranea,  and  -us,  a  spider.  ing. 

Arar,  and  -aris,  the  river  Arar.  Cingula,  -us,  and  -um,  a  girdle. 

Arbor,  and  -os,  a  tree.  Clypeus,  and  -um,  a  shield. 

Architectus,  and  -on,  an  architect.  Cochlearium,  -ar,  and  -are,  a  spoon. 

Attagena,  and  -gen,  a  woodcock.  Colluvio,  and  -ies,  filth. 

Avantia,  and  -ies,  avarice.  Commentarius,  and  -um,  a  journal. 

Augmentum,  and  -men,  increase.  Compages,  and  -o,  a  joining. 

Baccar,  and  -aris,  a  kind  of  herb.  Conatum,  and  -us,  -us,  an  attempt. 

Bacillus,  and  -um,  a  staff.  Concinnltas,  and  -tudo,  neatness. 

Balteus,  and  -um,  a  belt.  Consortium,  and  -io,  partnership. 


43 


REDUNDANT    NOUNS. 


Contagium,  -io,  and  -es,  contact. 
Corn  us,  -*,  or  -us,  a  cornel-tree. 
Costus,  and  -urn,  a  kind  of  shrub. 
Crocus,  and  -um,  saffron. 
Crvstallus,  and  -um,  crystal. 
Cubitus,  and  -um,  a  cubit. 
Cupiditas,  and  -pido,  desire. 
Cupressus, -i,  or  -us,  a  cyjtr  ess-tree 
CiiU'us,  and  -um,  a  leathern  bag. 
Delicja,  and  -um,  a  delight. 
Deiplunus,  and  Delphin,  a  dolphin. 
Desidia,  and  -es,  sloth. 
Dictamnus,  and  -um,  dittany. 
Diluvium,  and  -ies,  a  deluge. 
Domus,  -i,  or  -us,  a  house. 
Dorsus,  and  -um,  the  back. 
Duritia,  and  -ies,  hardness. 
Ebfinus,  and  -um,  ebony. 
Effigia,  and  -ies,  an  image. 
Elegeia,  and  -us,  an  elegy. 
Elephantus,  and  -phas,  an  elephant. 
Esseda,  and  -um,  a  chariot. 
Evander,  -dri,  and  -drus,  Evander. 
Eventum,  and  -us,  -us,  an  event. 
Exemplar,  and  -are,  a  copy. 
Ficus,  -i,  or  -us,  a  jig-tree. 
Fimus,  and  -um,  dung. 
Fretum,  and  -us,  -us,  a  strait. 
Fulgetra,  and  -um,  lightning. 
Galerus,  and  -um,  a  hat. 
Ganea,    and   -um,  a  subterraneous 

room. 
Gibba,  -us,  and  -ex,  -f.ri,  a  bunch. 
Glomus,  -i,  or  -iris,  aball  of  thread. 
Glutlnum,  and  -ten,  glue. 
Gobius,  and  -io,  a  gudgeon. 
Gruis,  and.  Grus,  a  crane. 
Hebdomada,  and  -mas,  a  week. 
Helleborus,  and  -um,  hellebore. 
Honor,  and  -os,  honor. 
Hyssopus,  and  -um,  hyssop. 
Ilios,  and  -on,  Troy. 
Incestum,  and  -us,  -us,  incest. 
Intubus,  and  -um,  endive. 
Jugulus,  and  -um,  the  throat. 
Juventa,  -us,  and  -as,  youth. 
Labor,  and  -os,  labor. 
Lacerta,  and  -us,  a  lizard. 
Laurus,  -i,  or  -us,  a  laurel. 
Eepor,  and  -os,  wit. 
Libraria,  and  -um,  a  book-case. 
Ligur,  and  -us,  -uris,  a  Ligurian. 
Lupinus,  and  -um,  a  lupine. 
Lu.xuria,  and  -ies,  luxury. 
Moeander,  -dri,  and  -drua,  Maiunder. 


Materia,  and  -ies,  materials. 
Medimnus,  and  -um,  a  measure. 
Menda,  and  -um,  a  fault. 
Milliarium,  and  -are,  a  mile. 
Modius,  and  -um,  a  measure. 
Mollitia,  and  -ies,  softness. 
Momentum,  and  -men,  motion. 
Mugil,  and  -His,  a  mullet. 
Mulclber,  -Sri,  or  -eris,  Vulcan. 
Mulctra,  and  -um,  a  milk-pail. 
Munditia,  and  -ies,  neatness. 
Muria,  and  -ies,  brine  or  pickle. 
Myrtus,  -i,  or  -us,  a  myrtle. 
Nardus,  and  -um,  spikenard. 
Nasus,  and  -um,  the  nose. 
Necessltas,  and  -udo,  necessity. 
Nequitia,  and  -ies,  wickedness. 
Notitia,  and  -ies,  knoiolcdge. 
Oblivium,  and  -io,  forgetfulness. 
Obsidium,  and  -io,  a  siege. 
CEdipus,  -i,  or  -6dis,  (Edipus. 
Orpheus,  -ei,  or  -eos,  Orpheus. 
Palatus,  and  -um,  the  palate. 
Palumba,  -es,  and  -us,  -its,  a  pigeon. 
Papyrus,  and  -um,  papyrus. 
Paupertas,  and  -ies,  poverty. 
Pavus,  and  -o,  a  peacock. 
Penus,   -dris,  or  -lis,  and   Penum, 

provisions. 
Peplus,  and  -um,  a  veil. 
Perseus,  -ei,  or  -eos,  Perseus. 
PileUs,  and  -um,  a  hat. 
Pinus,  -i,  or  -us,  a  pine-tree. 
Pistrlna,  and  -um,  a  bake-house. 
Planitia,  and  -ies,  a  plain. 
Plato,  and  -on,  Plato. 
Plebs,  and  Plebes,  -ei,  the  common 

people. 
Postulatum,  and  -io,  a  request. 
Praesepes,  -is,  and  -e,  a  stable. 
Prcetextum,  and  -us,  -us,  a  pretext. 
Prosapia,  and  -ies,  Uncage. 
Rapa,  and  -um,  a  turnip. 
Requies,  -etis,  or  -ei',  rest. 
Rete,  and  -is,  a  net. 
Reticulus,  and  -um,  a  small  net. 
Rictum,  and  -us,  -us,  the  mouth. 
Ruscus,  and  -um,  butcher's  broom. 
Saevitia,  and  -ies,  cruelty. 
Sagus,  and  -um,  a  soldier's  cloak 
Sanguis,  and  -guen,  blood. 
Satrapes,  and  Satraps,  a  satrap. 
Scabritia,  and  -ies,  roughness. 
Scobis,  and  Scobs,  sawdust. 
Scorpius,  and  -io,  a  scorpion. 


DERIVATION    OF    NOUNS.  49 

Scrobis,  and  Scrobs,  a  ditch.  Tabus,  and  -um,  gore. 

Segmentum,  and  -men,  a  piece.  Tapetum,  -6te,  and  -es,  tapestry 

Segnitia,  and  -ies,  sloth.  Tenerltas,  and  -tudo,  softness. 

Senecta,  and  -us,  old  age.  Tiara,  and  -as,  a  turban. 

Sensum,  and  -us,  -us,  sense.  Tignus,  and  -um,  a  plank. 

Sequester,  -tri,  or  -tris,  an.  umpire.  Tigris,  -is,  or  -idis,  a  tiger. 

Sesama,  and  -um,  sesame.  Titanus,  and  Titan,  Titan. 

Sibilus,  and  -um,  a  hissing.  Tonitruum,  and  -true,  thunder. 

Sinapi,  and  -is,  mustard.  Torale,  and  -al,  a  bed  covering. 

Sinus,  and  -um,  a  milk-pail.  Trabes,  and  Trabs,  a  6«»re. 

Sparus,  and  -um,  a  spmr.  Tribula,  and  -um,  a  threshing  ma- 
Spurcitia,  and  -ies,  Jilthiness.  chine. 

Squalitudo,  and  Squalor,  Jilthiness.  Vespera,  -pgrus,  and  -per,  the  even- 
Stramentum,  and  -men,  straw.  ing. 

Suffimentum,  and  -men,  a  perfume.  Vinaceus,  and  -um,  a  grape-stone. 

Suggestus,  and  -um,  a  pulpit.  Viscus,  and  -um,  birdlime. 

Supparus,  an</  -um,  a  veil.  Vulgus,  masc.  and  neut.,  the  common 
Supplicium,   and   -icatio,  a  suppli-  people, 

cation. 

To  these  may  be  added  some  other  verbals  in  us  and  io,  and  Greek 
nouns  in  o  and  on;  as,  Dio  and  Dion;  also  some  Greek  nouns  in  es  and 
e,  which  have  Latin  forms  in  a  ;  as,  Atrldes  and  Atrlda.     See  §  45. 

Some  proper  names  of  places  also  are  redundant  in  number ;  as,  Argos 
and  Argi  ;  Curna  and  Cuma  ;  Fidena  and  Fidente  ;  Thebe  and  Thebai. 

The  different  forms  of  most  words  in  the  above  list  are  not  equally 
common,  and  some  are  rarely  used,  or  only  in  particular  cases. 


DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS. 

§  100.  Nouns  are  derived  from  other  nouns,  from  adjec- 
tives, and  from  verbs. 

I.  From  nouns  are  derived  the  following  classes  : — 

1.  A  patronymic  is  the  name  of  a  person,  derived  from  that 

of  his  father  or  other  ancestor,  or  of  the  founder  of  his  nation. 
Patronymics  are  properly  Greek  nouns,  and  have  been  borrowed  from 

that  language  by  the  Latin  poets. 

Most  masculine  patronymics  end  in  ides ;  as,  Priamides,  a 
son  of  Priam ;  RomuUdce,  the  Romans,  from  their  first  king, 
Romulus.  Those  from  nouns  in  cus  usually  contract  eidcs  into 
ides ;  as,  Atrides,  from  Atreus.  Those  from  nouns  in  as  and 
es,  of  the  first  declension,  end  in  ddes  ;  as,  AZneades,  from 
JEneas ;  but  some,  from  nouns  of  this  and  of  other  declensions, 
end  in  iades ;  as,  Anchisiadcs,  from  Anchises  ,  Abantiades,  from 
Abas. 

To  masculine  patronymics  in  ides,  eides,  ades,  and  iades, 
correspond  feminines  in  id,  cis,  as,  and  ias;  as,  Tynddris,  the 
daughter  of  Tynddrus ;  Nereis,  the  daughter  of  Nereus  ;  Thcs- 
tiasy  the  daughter  of  Thcstius ;  Mttias,  the  daughter  of  AZetcs 


50  DERIVATION    OF    NOUNS. 

A  feminine  in  ine  is  also  found ;  as,  Nerine,  from  Nereus. 

Patronymics  in  des  and  ne  are  of  the  first  declension  j  those  in  is  and  as, 
of  the  third. 

2.  A  patriot  or  gentile  noun  is  derived  from  the  name  of  a 
country,  and  denotes  an  inhabitant  of  that  country ;  as,  Tros,  a 
Trojan  man ;  Troas,  a  Trojan  woman ;  Macedo,  a  Macedo- 
nian ;  SamniSy  a  Samnite ;  from  Troja,  Macedonia,  and  Sam- 
nium. 

Most  patrials  are  properly  adjectives,  relating  to  a  noun  understood ; 
as,  homo,  civis,  &c. 

3.  A  diminutive  signifies  a  small  thing  of  the  kind  denoted 
by  the  primitive. 

Diminutives  generally  end  in  7ms,  la,  or  lum,  according  as  the 
primitive  is  masculine,  feminine,  or  neuter.  These  terminations 
are  usually  added  either  to  the  nominative  or  to  the  root  of  the 
primitive :  commonly  u  or  cu  is  inserted  before  them ;  as,  ado- 
lescentulus,  a  very  young  man,  from  adolescens,  a  youth ;  arula, 
a  little  altar,  from  ara;  scutulum,  a  little  shield,  from  scutum; 
fraterculus,  muliercula,  opusculum,  hqmf rater,  mulier,  and  opus. 

In  some,  6  is  inserted  instead  of  u;  a.s,Jilidlus,  from  Jilius. 

A  few  diminutives  end  in  leus ;  as,  equuleus,  from  equus,  a 
horse. 

Sometimes  the  root  of  the  primitive  is  variously  modified ; 
as,  homunculus,  asellus,  libellus,  from  homo,  asinus,  and  liber. 

Some  diminutives  differ  in  gender  from  their  primitives ;  as, 
ranunculus,  scamillus,  from  rana  and  scamnum. 

4.  Amplificatives  are  personal  appellations,  denoting  an  ex- 
cess  of  what  is  expressed  by  their  primitives ;  as,  capito,  one 
who  has  a  large  head,  from  caput,  the  head;  naso,  one  who  has 
a  large  nose,  from  nasus,  the  nose. 

5.  The  termination  ium  or  itium,  added  to  the  root  of  a  noun, 
indicates  an  assemblage  of  the  individuals  denoted  by  the  prim- 
itive, or  their  office  or  employment;  as,  collegium,  an  assembly 
of  colleagues  ;  servitium,  a  collection  of  servants  ;  sacerdotium, 
the  priesthood ;  ministerium,  a  ministry  ;  from  collega,  servus, 
sacerdos,  and  minister. 

6.  The  termination  imonium  is  added  to  the  root  of  a  few 
nouns,  denoting  that  which  gives  to  the  primitives  their  char- 
acter ;  as,  testimonium,  testimony ;  vadimonium,  obligation ; 
from  testis  and  vas  (vadis). 

7.  The  termination  etum,  added  to  the  root  of  names  of 
plants,  denotes  a  place  where  they  grow  in  abundance;  as, 
quercetum,  lauretum,  from  qucrcus,  an  oak,  and  laurus,  a  laurel. 


DERIVATION    OjP    NOUNS.  51 

But  some  are  irregular  ;   as,  arbustum,  salictum;  from  arbos,  a 
tree,  and  salix,  a  willow. 

8.  The  termination  arium,  added  to  the  root  of  a  noun,  de- 
notes the  place  where  the  things  signified  by  the  primitive  are 
kept;  as,  aviarium, plantarium ;  from  avis,  a  bird,  and planta, 
a  plant. 

9.  The  termination  He,  also,  added  to  the  root  of  words  de- 
noting animals,  marks  the  place  where  they  are  kept ;  as,  bo- 
vile,  caprile,  ovile ;  from  bos,  an  ox,  caper,  a  goat,  and  ovis,  a 
sheep. 

This  and  the  preceding  class  are  properly  neuter  adjectives. 

<§>  101.  II.  From  adjectives  are  derived  the  following  forms 
of  abstract  nouns.     See  §  26. 

1.  The  terminations  itas,  ia,  itudo,  and  edo,  are  added  to 
the  root  of  the  primitive  ;  as,  cupiditas,  desire ;  audacia,  bold- 
ness ;  magnitudo,  greatness ;  albedo,  whiteness ;  from  cupidus, 
audax,  magnus,  and  albus. 

So  atrocltas,  crudditas,  from  air  ox  and  crudelis  ;  concordia,perjidiat  from 
concors  and  perfldus  ;  similitudo,  longitude,  from  simllis  and  Umgus;  dul- 
cedo,  pinguedo,  from  dvlcis  and pinguis. 

When  the  root  ends  in  i,  the  abstract  is  formed  in  etas  ;  as, 
pietas,  piety  ;  anxietas,  anxiety ;  from  plus  and  anxius. 

Libertas,  liberty,  is  contracted  from  liberitas ;  and  difficultas, 
difficulty,  from  difficiUtas. 

A  few  abstracts  are  formed  in  itus  or  tus,  instead  of  itas ;  as, 
servitus,  slavery  ;  juvenilis,  youth  ;  from  servus  and  juvenis. 

Instead  of  ia,  some  adjectives  in  us  add  itia,  or  ities,  to  the 
root ;  as,  avaritia,  avarice ;  justitia,  justice  ;  from  avdrus  and 
Justus ; — durities,  hardness ;  scevities,  cruelty ;  from  durus  and 

SCBVUS. 

Consuetudo,  custom,  and  mansuetudo,  mildness,  omit  it  in  the 
termination,  as  their  root  ends  in  t. 

2.  A  few  adjectives  form  abstracts  in  imonia ;  as,  acrimonia, 
tartness  ;  sanctimonia,  sanctity  ;  from  acer  and  sanctus. 

Abstracts  are  sometimes  formed  from  the  same  adjective  with 
different  terminations  ;  as,  claritas  and  claritudo,  from  clarus. 

Adjectives,  as  distinguished  from  the  abstracts  which  are 
formed  from  them,  are  called  concretes. 

$  102.  III.  Nouns  derived  from  verbs  are  called  verbal 
nouns. 

The  following  are  the  principal  classes  : — 

1.  The  termination  or,  added  to  the  first  root  of  a  verb,  espe- 


52  DERIVATION    OF     NOUNS. 

cially  of  a  neuter  verb,  denotes  the  action  or  state  of  the  verb 
abstractly;  as,  amor,  love;  favor,  favor;  mceror,  grief;  splen- 
dor, brightness  ;  from  amo,faveo,  mcereo,  and  splendco. 

2.  From  many  verbs  abstracts  are  formed  by  adding  turn  to 
the  first  root ;  as,  colloquium,  a  conference ;  gaudium,  joy  ;  ex- 
ordium, a  beginning ;  from  colloquor,  gaudeo,  and  exordior. 

Some  words  of  this  class  are  formed  by  changing  final  u,  in 
the  third  root  of  the  verb,  into  ium ;  as,  exitium,  destruction ; 
solatium,  consolation ;  from  exeo  (exitu)  and  solor  (soldtu). 

3.  Some  verbals  are  formed  by  adding  Ha,  imonia,  or  imonium, 
to  the  first  root  of  the  verb  ;  as,  loquela,  speech ;  querela,  a  com- 
plaint;  suadela,  persuasion;  from  loquor,  queror,  and  suadeo ; 
— alimonia  and  alimonium,  nutriment,  from  alo; — querimonia, 
a  complaint,  from  queror. 

4.  The  termination  mentum,  added  to  the  first  root  of  the 
verb,  generally  with  a  connecting  vowel,  denotes  a  means  for 
the  performance  of  the  action  of  the  verb  ;  as,  documentum,  a 
means  of  teaching  ;  from  docco.  So  hlandimentum,  experimen- 
turn,  ornamentum,  from  blandior,  experior,  and  orno. 

The  termination  men  has  sometimes  a  similar  signification ; 
as,  tegmcn,  a  covering  ;  from  tego. 

Some  words  of  this  class  have  no  primitive  verb  in  use;  as, 
atramentum,  capillamentum,  &-c. 

5.  The  terminations  ulum,  bulum,  and  culum,  added  to  the 
first  root  of  a  verb,  the  two  last  with  a  connecting  vowel,  denote 
a  means  or  instrument ;  as,  cingulum,  a  girdle  ;  jaculum,  a  jave- 
lin ;  vchiculum,  a  vehicle  ;  venabulum,  a  hunting-spear ;  from 
citigo,  jacio,  veho,  and  venor. 

Some  words  of  this  kind  are  formed  from  nouns  ;  as,  acetab- 
ulum, a  vinegar  cruet ;  thuribulum,  a  censer ;  from  acetum  and 
thus. 

6.  Nouns  formed  by  changing  final  u,  in  the  third  root  of  the 
verb,  into  or  and  rix,  denote  respectively  the  male  and  female 
agent  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  verb;  as,  adjiitor,  adjiitrix, 
an  assistant;  fautor,  fautrix,  a  favorer  ;  victor,  victrix,  a  con- 
queror ;  from  adjuvo  (adjutu),faveo  (fautu),  vinco  (victu). 

The  feminine  form  is  less  common  than  the  masculine. 

Some  nouns  in  tor  are  formed  immediately  from  other  nouns ; 
as,  viator,  a  traveller  ;  janitor,  a  door-keeper ;  from  via  and 
janua. 

7.  Many  abstract  nouns  are  formed  by  changing  final  u,  in 
the  third  root  of  a  verb,  into  to  and  us ;  as,  actio,  an  action 


COMPOSITION    OF    NOUNS.  53 

cautio,  caution ;  lectio,  reading ;  from  ago  (actu),  caveo  (cau- 
tu),  lego  (lectu) ; — cantus,  singing;  visus,  sight;  usus,  use; 
from  cano  (cantu),  video  (visu),  utor  (usu). 

Nouns  of  both  forms,  and  of  the  same  signification,  are  fre- 
quently derived  from  the  same  verb ;  as,  concursio  and  concur- 
sus,  a  running  together ;  motio  and  motus,  &c. 

The  termination  ra,  added  to  the  third  root  of  a  verb,  some- 
times has  the  same  signification  as  io  and  us,  and  sometimes 
denotes  the  result  of  an  action  ;  as,  positura,  position ;  vinctu- 
ra,  a  binding  together;  from^orao  (positu),  and  vincio  (vinctu) ; 
— conjectura,  a  conjecture ;  pictura,  a  picture ;  from  conjicio 
(conjectu)  and  pingo  (pictu). 

One  of  the  forms  in  io,  us,  and  ura,  is  generally  used  to  the  exclusion 
of  the  others,  and  when  two  or  more  are  found,  they  are  usually  employ- 
ed in  somewhat  different  senses. 

8.  The  termination  orium,  added  to  the  third  root  of  a  verb, 
after  u  is  removed,  denotes  the  place  where  the  action  of  the 
verb  is  performed ;  as,  auditorium,  a  lecture-room  ;  conditorium, 
a  repository ;  from  audio  and  condo. 


COMPOSITION    OF   NOUNS. 

<§>  103.     Compound  nouns  are  formed  variously  : — 

1.  Of  two  nouns;  as,  rupicapra,  a  wild  goat,  of  rupes  and 
capra.  In  some  words,  compounded  of  two  nouns,  the  former 
is  a  genitive  ;  as,  senatusconsultum,  a  decree  of  the  senate ;  ju- 
risconsultus,  a  lawyer.  In  others,  both  part3  are  declined ;  as, 
respublica,  jusjurandum.     See  §  91. 

2.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb ;  as,  artifex,  an  artist,  of  ars  and 
facio ;  jidicen,  a  harper,  of  Jidis  and  cano;  agricola,  a  hus- 
bandman, of  ager  and  colo ;  patricida,  a  patricide,  of  pater  and 
cado. 

3.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun;  as,  aquinoctium,  the  equinox, 
of  aiquus  and  nox  ;  millepeda,  a  millepede,  ofmille  and  pes. 

In  duumvir,  triumvir,  decemvir,  centumvir,  the  numeral  adjec- 
tive is  in  the  genitive  plural. 

Remark.  When  the  former  part  of  the  compound  is  a  noun 
or  an  adjective,  it  usually  ends  in  i.  If  the  second  word  begins 
with  a  vowel,  an  elision  takes  place;  as,  quinquennium,  of  quiit- 
que  and  annus. 

4.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun  ;  as,  nefas,  wickedness ;  nemo, 
nobody  ;  oine,fas,  and  homo. 

5.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun  ;  as,  incuria,  wan*  of  care,  of 

5* 


54  DECLENSION    OP    ADJECTIVES. 

in  and  cura.  So  intervallum,  the  space  between  the  ramparts; 
pr&cordia,  the  vitals ;  proverbium,  a  proverb  ;  subsellium,  a  seat ; 
superficies,  a  surface. 

When  the  former  part  is  a  preposition,  its  final  consonant  is 
sometimes  changed,  to  adapt  it  to  that  which  follows  it :  as, 
immortalitas,  imprudentia. 


ADJECTIVES. 

<§>  104.  An  adjective  is  a  word  which  qualifies  or  limits 
the  meaning  of  a  substantive. 

Adjectives  may  be  divided,  according  to  their  signification, 
into  various  classes  ;  as  denoting, 

1.  Quality  ;  as,  bonus,  good  ;  albus,  white. 

2.  Quantity  ;  as,  magnus,  great ;  totus,  the  whole. 

3.  Matter ;  as,  abiegnus,  made  of  fir ;  aureus,  golden. 

4.  Time  ;  as,  annuus,  yearly  ;  hesternus,  of  yesterday. 

5.  Place ;  as,  altus,  high ;  vicinus,  near. 

6.  Relation ;  as,  amicus,  friendly ;  aptus,  fit. 

7.  Number;  as,  unus,  one;  secundus,  second.  These  are 
called  nwnerals. 

8.  Possession ;  as,  herilis,  a  master's ;  paternu*.  of  z.  tamer. 
These  are  called  possessives. 

9.  Country ;  as,  Romdnus,  Roman ;  Arplnas,  of  Arplnum. 
These  are  called  patrials. 

10.  Part ;  as,  ullus,  any  one;  alter,  another.  These  are  call- 
ed partitives. 

11.  Interrogation;  as,  quantus,  how  great?  qualis,  of  what 
kind  1  These  are  called  interrogatives  ;  when  not  used  inter- 
rogatively, they  are  called  indefinites. 

12.  Diminution  ;  as,  parvulus,  from  parvus,  small ;  misellus, 
from  miser,  miserable.     These  are  called  diminutives. 

13.  Amplification;  as,  vinosus  and  vinolentus,  much  given 
to  wine  ;  auritus,  having  long  ears  These  are  called  amplifi- 
catives. 

DECLENSION  OF  A'UECTIVES. 

§105.  Adjectives  are  declined  ike  substantives,  and  are 
either  of  tho  first  and  second  declensv  a,  or  of  the  third  only. 


ADJECTIVES FIRST    AND    SECOND    DECLENSION.         55 


ADJECTIVES   OF    THE    FIRST   AND   SECOND 
DECLENSION. 

The  masculine  of  adjectives  that  belong  to  the  first  and  second 
declension,  ends  either  in  us  or  cr.  Those  in  us  change  us  into 
a  for  the  feminine,  and  into  urn  for  the  neuter.  Those  in  cr 
add  a  for  the  feminine,  and  um  for  the  neuter.  The  masculine 
in  us  is  declined  like  dominus;  that  in  cr  like  gener,  or  agcr; 
the  feminine  always  like  musa ;  and  the  neuter  like  regnum. 

Remark.  One  adjective,  satur,  -iira,  -tirum,  full,  ends  in  ur,  and  the 
masculine  is  declined  like  gener. 

1.  Bonus,  good. 

Singular. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N.      bo'-nus,  bo'-na,  bo'-num, 

G.      bo'-ni,  bo'-nae,  bo'-ni, 

D.      bo'-no,  bo'-nae,  bo'-no, 

Ac.     bo'-num,  bo'-nam,  bo'-num, 

V.       bo'-ne,  bo'-na,  bo'-num, 

Ah.     bo'-no.  bo'-na.  bo'-no. 

Plural. 

N.  bo'-ni,  bo'-nae,  bo'-na, 

G.  bo-no'-rum,  bo-na'-rum,     bo-no -rum, 

D.  bo'-nis,  bo'-nis,  bo'-nis, 

Ac.  bo'-nos,  bo'-nas,  bo'-na, 

V.  bo'-ni,  bo'-nae,  bo'-na, 

Ah.  bo'-nis.  bo'-nis.  bo'-nis. 

In  like  manner  decline 

Al'-tus,  high.  Fi'-dus,  faithful.  Lon'-gus,  Jong. 

A-va'-rus,  covetous.         Im'-pro-bus,  wicked.        ¥\e'-nns,  full. 
Be-nig'-nus,  kind.  In-i'-quus,  unjust.  Tac'-I-tus,  silent. 

Like  bonus  are  also  declined  all  participles  in  us 

2.  Tener,  tender. 

Singular. 
Masc.  Fem.  Neut. 

N.     te'-ner,  ten'-e-ra,  ten'-e-rum, 

G.     ten'-e-ri,  ten'-c-rse,  ten'-e-ri, 

D.     ten'-e-ro,  ten'-c-rae,  ten'-e-ro, 

Ac.   ten'-e-rum,  ten'-e-ram,  ten'-e-rum, 

V.     te'-ner,  ten-e-ra,  ten'-e-rum, 

Ab.   ten'-e-ro.  ten'-e-ra.  ten'-e-ro. 


56 


ADJECTIVES FIRST    AND    SECOND    DECLENSION. 


N. 

G. 

D. 

Ac. 

V. 

Ab. 


ten-e-n, 

ten-e-ro'-rum, 

ten-e-ris, 

ten'-e-ros, 

ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-ris. 


Plural 
ten'-e-rce, 
ten-e-ra'-rum, 
ten'-e-ris, 
ten'-e-ras, 
ten'-e-rae, 
ten'-e-ris. 


ten'-e-ra, 

ten-e-ro'-rum, 

ten'-e-ris, 

ten-e-ra, 

ten'-e-ra, 

ten'-e-ris. 


In  like  manner  are  declined 
As'-per,  rough.         Gib'-ber,  crook-backed.      Mi'-ser,  wretched. 
Ex' -ter,  foreign.       La'-ce r,  torn.  Pros'-per,  prosperous, 

Li'-ber,  free.  Sa'-tur,  full. 

So  also  seirilfer,  and  the  compounds  of  gero  and  fero;  as,  laritget, 
bearing  wool ;  oplfer,  bringing  help. 

'    Note.      Exter  is  scarcely  used   in   the   nominative  singular   mascu 
line. 

»§>  106-     The  other  adjectives  in  er  (except  alter)  drop  the 
t  in  declension. 

Piger,  slothful. 


Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

pi'-ger, 

pi'-gra, 

pi'-grum. 

G. 

pi'-gri, 

pi'-grae, 

pi'-g", 

D. 

pi'-gro,  - 

pi'-gra?, 

pi'-gro, 

Ac. 

pi'-grum, 

pi'-grarn, 

pi'-grum, 

V. 

pi'-ger, 

pi'-gra, 

pi'-grum, 

Ab. 

pi'-gro. 

pi'-gra. 
Plural. 

pi'-gro. 

N. 

pi'-gri, 

pi'-grae, 

pi'-gra, 

G. 

pi-gro'-rum,      pi-gra'-rum, 

pi-gro'-rum. 

D. 

pi'-gris, 

pi'-gris, 

pi'-gris, 

Ac. 

pi'-gros, 

pi'-gras, 

pi'-gra, 

V. 

pi'-gri, 

pi'-grp, 

pi'-gra, 

Ab. 

pi'-gris. 

pi'-gris. 

pi'-gris. 

In  like  manner  decline 

.flS'-ger,  sick. 

Ma'-cer,  lean. 

Sca'-ber,  rough. 
Si-nis'-ter,  left. 

A'-ter,  black. 

Ni'-ger,  black. 

Cre1 '-ber ',  frequent. 

Pul'-cher,/air. 

Te'-ter,  foul. 

Gla'-ber,  smooth. 

Ru'-ber,  red. 

Va'-fer,  crafty 

In'-t6-ger, 

entire. 

Sa'-cer,  sacred. 

Dexter,  right,  has  -tra,  -trum,  or  -lira,  -tirum. 


ADJECTIVES THIR.>    DECLENSION.  57 

§  107.  Six  adjectives  in  us,  and  three  in  er,  have  their 
genitive  singular  in  ius,  and  the  dative  in  «V  in  &fl  tne  genders  : — 
Alius,  another.         Totus,  whole.  Alter,  -tfira,  -terum,  the  other. 

Nullus,  no  one.        Ullus,  any.  Uter,  -tra,  -trum,  which  of  the  two. 

Solus,  alone.  Unus,  one.  Neuter,  -tra,  -trum,  neither. 

To  these  may  be  added  the  other  compounds  of  uter, — namely,  uterque, 
each ;  utcrcuin/jue,  utcrlXbet,  and  utervis,  which  of  the  two  you  please  ;  gen. 
vtriusque,  &c. ; — also,  alteruter,  one  of  two ;  gen.  alter utrius,  and  sometimes 
alterius  utrius ;  dat.  alterutri.     So  altcruterque. 


Example. 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

JVetrf. 

N. 

u'-nus, 

u'-na, 

u'-num, 

G. 

u-ni'-us,* 

f         u-ni'-us, 

u-ni'-us, 

D. 

u'-ni, 

u'-ni, 

u'-ni, 

Ac. 

u'-num, 

u'-nam, 

u'-num, 

V. 

u'-ne, 

u'-na, 

u'-num, 

Ab. 

u'-no. 

u'-na. 

u'-no. 

The  plural  is  regular,  like  that  of  bonus. 

Remark  1.  Alius  has  aliud  in  the  nominative  singular  neuter,  and 
in  the  genitive  alius,  contracted  for  aliius. 

2.  Some  of  these  adjectives,  in  ancient  authors,  form  their  genitive  and 
dative  regularly,  like  bonus,  tener,  or  piger. 

ADJECTIVES    OF  THE  THIRD    DECLENSION. 

§  1 08.  Some  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  have  three 
terminations  in  the  nominative  singular  ;  some  two  ;  and  others 
only  one. 

I.  Those  of  three  terminations  end  in  er,  masc. ;  is,  fem. ; 
and  e,  ueut. ;  and  are  thus  declined  : — 


Acer,  sharp. 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

JSTeut. 

N. 

a'-cer, 

a'-cris, 

a'-cre, 

G. 

a'-cris, 

a'-cris, 

a'-cris, 

D. 

a'-cri, 

a'-cri, 

a'-cri, 

Ac. 

a'-crem 

a'-crem, 

a'-cre, 

V. 

a'-cer* 

a'-cris, 

a'-cre, 

Ab. 

a'-cri. 

a'-cri. 

a'-cri. 

♦See 

$15. 

58 


ADJECTIVES- 

—THIRD    DECLENSION. 

Plural. 

N. 

a'-cres, 

a'-cres, 

a'-cri-a, 

G. 
D. 

a'-ori-um, 
ac'-ri-bus, 

a'-cri-um, 
ac'-ri-bus, 

a'-cri-um, 
ac'-ri-bus, 

Ac. 

a'-cres, 

a'-cres, 

a'-cri-a, 

V. 

Ab. 

a'-cres, 
ac'-ri-bus. 

a'-cres, 
ac'-ri-bus. 

a'-cri-a, 
ac'-ri-bus. 

In  like  manner  are  declined  the  following  only : — 
Al'-a-cer,  cheerful.  Pa-lus'-ter,  marshy.        Sil-ves'-ter,  woody. 

Cam-pes'-ter,  of  a  plain.   Pe-des'-ter,  on  foot.        Ter-res'-ter,  terrestrial. 
Cel'-Z-bet,  famous.  Sa-lu'-ber,  wholesome.    Vol'-u-cer,  winged. 

E-ques'-ter,  equestrian. 

Celer,  swift,  has  celiris,  cellre;  gen.  celiris,  &c. 

Remark  1.  The  nominative  singular  masculine  sometimes  ends  in 
is,  like  the  feminine ;  as,  saluber,  or  salubris. 

%  VolQcer  has  um  in  the  genitive  plural.     See  §  114. 

§  109.  II.  Adjectives  of  two  terminations  end  in  is  for  the 
masculine  and  feminine,  and  e  for  the  neuter,  except  compar- 
atives, which  end  in  or  and  us. 

Those  in  is,  e,  are  thus  declined  : — 

Mitis,  mild. 
Singular.  Plural. 

M.fyF.  Jf.  M.fyF.  JV. 

N.    mi'-tis,         mi'-te,  N.    mi'-tes,  mit'-i-a,* 

G.    mi'-tis,         mi'-tis,  G.    mit'-i-um,*    mit'-i-um, 

D.    mi'-ti,  mi'-ti,  D.    mit'-I-bus,     mit'-I-bus, 

Ac.  mi'-tem,       mi'-te,  Ac.  mi'-tes,  mit'-i-a, 

V.    mi'-tis,         mi'-te,  V.     mi'-tes,  mit'-i-a, 

Ab.  mi'-ti.  mi'-ti.  Ab.  mit'-i-bus.     mit'-I-bus. 

In  like  manner  decline 
Ag'-T-lis,  active.  Dul'-cis,  sweet.  In-col'-u-mis,  safe. 

Bre'-vis,  short.  For'-tis,  brave.  Mi-rab'-i-lis,  wonderful. 

Cru-de'-lis,  cruel.  Gra'-vis,  heavy.  Om'-nis,  all. 

Tres,  three,  is  declined  like  the  plural  of  mitis. 

§  110.  All  comparatives  except  plus,  more,  are  thus  de- 
clined : — 

Mitior,*  milder. 

Singular. 

M.  fy  F.  JV. 

N.      mit'-i-or,  mit'-i-us, 

G.      mit-i-6'-ris,  mit-i-6'-ris, 

D.      mit-i-o'-ri,  mit-i-o'-ri, 

Ac.     mit-i-o'-rem,  mit'-i-us, 

V.       mit'-i-or,  mit'-i-us, 

Ab.     mit-i-6'-re,  or  ri.  mit-i-6'-re,  or  ri. 
*  Pronounced  mish''e-um,  &c.    See  $  12. 


ADJECTIVES THIRD    DECLENSION.  59 

Plural 
M.  if  F.  JV. 

N.      mit-i-d'-res,  mit-i-o'-ra, 

G.      mit-i-6'-rum,  mit-i-o'-rum, 

D.      mit-i-or'-I-bus,  mit-i-or'-I-bus, 

Ac.     mit-i-6'-res,  mit-i-o'-ra, 

V.       mit-i-6-res,  mit-i-o'-ra, 

Ab.     mit-i-or'-I-bus.  mit-i-or'-I-bus. 

In  like  manner  decline 

Al'-ti-or,  higher.  Fe-lic'-i-or,  happier.       Pru-den'-ti-or,  more  pro- 

Bre'-vi-or,  shorter.  For'-  ti-or,  braver.  -dent. 

Cru-de'-li-or,  more  cruel.    Gra'-vi-or,  heavier.         U -be' -xi-ot,  more  fertile. 

Dul'-ci-or,  sweeter. 

Plus,  more, 
Singular. 

JV. 
JV.  plus, 
G.    plu'-ris, 


D. 

Ac.    plus, 


is  thus  declined 

— 

Plural. 

M.  if  F. 

JV.     plu'-res, 
G.     plu'-ri-um, 
D.    plu'-ri-bus, 
Ac.   plu'-res, 

Ab.  plu'-ri-bus. 

JV. 
plu'-ra,  rarely  pluria 
plu'-ri-um, 
plu'-ri-bus, 
plu'-ra, 

plu'-ri-bus. 

Ab. 

So, in  the  plural  number  only }complures,  a  great  many. 

§  1 1 1 .  III.  Other  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  have 
but  one  termination  in  the  nominative  singular  for  all  genders, 
and  they  all  increase  in  the  genitive.* 


They  are  thus  declined  : — 

Felix,  happy. 

Singular. 

M.ZfF. 

JV. 

N. 

fe'-lix, 

fe'-lix, 

G. 

fe-li'-cis, 

fe-li'-cis, 

D. 

fe-li'-ci, 

fe-li'-ci, 

Ac. 

fe-ll'-cem, 

fe'-lix, 

V. 

fe'-lix, 

fe'-lix, 

Ab. 

fe-li'-ce,  or  ci. 

Plural. 

fe-H'-ce,  or  ci. 

N. 

fe-li'-ces, 

fe-lic'-i-a,t 

G. 

fe-lic'-i-um,t 

fe-lic'-i-um, 

D. 

fe-lic'-I-bus, 

fe-lic'-i-bus, 

Ac. 

fe-li'-ces, 

fe-Iic'-i-a, 

V. 

fe-li'-ces, 

fe-lic'-i-a, 

Ab. 

fe-lic'-i-bus. 

fe-lic'-I-bus. 

*  Senex,  seyiis,  old,  had  anciently  seriicis  or  sengcis. 

f  Pronounced  fe-lish'-e-um,  &c.    See  $§  10,  Exc,  and  7. 


CO  ADJECTIVES OBLIQUE  CASES. 


Praesens,  present. 

Singular. 

M.tf  F. 

7f. 

N. 

prae'-sens, 

prae'-sens, 

G. 

prae-sen'-tis, 

prae-sen'-tis, 

D. 

prae-sen'-ti, 

prae-sen'-ti, 

Ac. 

pra>sen'-tem, 

prae'-sens, 

V. 

prae'-sens, 

prae'-sens, 

Ab. 

prae-sen'-te,  or  ti. 
Plural 

prae-sen'-te,  or  ti 

N. 

prae-sen'-tes, 

prae-sen'-ti-a,* 

G. 

prae-sen'-ti-um, 

prae-sen'-ti-um, 

D. 

prae-sen'-ti-bus, 

prae-sen'-ti-bus, 

Ac. 

prae-sen'-tes, 

prae-sen'-ti-a, 

V. 

prae-sen'-tes, 

prae-sen'-ti-a, 

Ab. 

prae-sen'-ti-bus. 

prae-sen'-ti-bus. 

In  like  manner  decline 

Au'-dax,  -acis,  hold.  Par'-ti-ceps,  -Tpis,  par-  Sos'-pes,  -Itis,  safe, 

Com'-po3,-6tis,  master  of.  ticipant.  Sup'-plex,  -Icis,  sup- 

Fe'-rox,  -ocis,  fierce.  Prse'-pes,  -6tis,  swift.  pliant. 

In'-gens,  -tis,  huge.  So'-lers,  -tis,  shrewd. 

All  present  participles  are  declined  like  prasens. 

Rules  for  the  Oblique  Cases  of  Adjectives  of  the 
Third  Declension. 

GENITIVE    SINGULAR. 

§112.     Most  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  form  their 
genitive  singular  like  nouns  of  the  same  termination. 

The  following  may  here  be  specified  : — 
Of  those  in  es, 

Some  have  ctis  ;  as,  hebcs,  dull ;  perpes,  perpetual ;  prapes,  swift ;  and 
teres,  slender  ; — (Locuples,  rich,  has  ctis;) — 

Some  itis  ;   as,  dives,  rich ;  sospes,  safe  ;   and  superstes,  surviving  ; — 

Some  Idis  ;  as,  deses,  slothful ;  and  reses,  sluggish.  [beris. 

Pipes,  two-footed,  and  tripes,  three-footed,  have  pBdis.  Pubes,  has  vu- 
Compos,  master  of,  and  impos,  unable,  have  otis. 
Pernor,  lasting  all  night,  has  noctis. 

Calebs,  unmarried,  has  ibis ;  intercus,  intercutaneous,  utis. 
Those  in  ceps,  compounds  of  caput,  have  cipltis;  as,  anceps,  doubtful; 
praiceps,  headlong. 

Those  in  cors,  compounds  of  cor,  have  cordis ;  as,  concors,  agreeing. 

*  Pronounced  pre-sen'-she-a,  &c. 


IRREGULAR    ADJECTIVES.  61 


ABLATIVE    SINGULAR. 


$113,  1.  Adjectives  of  the  third  declension,  of  two  or 
three  terminations,  except  comparatives  in  or,  have  always  i  in 
the  ablative. 

2.  Comparatives,  and  participles  in  ns  used  as  participles, 
have  rather  e  than  i ;  and  such  participles  in  the  ablative  abso- 
lute have  always  e. 

3.  Adjectives  of  one  termination  have  e  or  i  in  the  ablative. 

NOMINATIVE   AND   GENITIVE  PLURAL. 

The  neuter  of  the  nominative  plural  ends  in  ia,  and  the  gen- 
itive plural  in  turn ;  but  comparatives  in  or,  with  vetus,  old,  and 
uber,  fertile,  have  a  and  um. 

Exceptions  in  the  Ablative  Singular  and  Genitive  Plural. 

$  114.  1.  The  following  adjectives  have  e  in  the  ablative 
singular,  and  um  in  the  genitive  plural : — 

Bicoppor,  two-bodied.  Impflbes,  beardless.  Sospes,  safe. 

Bipes,  tico-footcd.  Juvenis,  young.  Superstes,  surviving. 

Caelcbs,  unmarried.  Paupe/,  poor.  Tricorpor,  three-bodied. 

Compos,  master  of.  Princeps,  chief.  Tricuspis,  three-forked. 

Discolor,  particolored.  Puber,  or  -es,  full-grown.  Tripes,  three-footed. 

Impos,  unable.  Senex,  old. 

2.  The  following,  which  have  e  or  f  in  the  ablative  singular, 
have  um  in  the  genitive  plural : — 

Ales,  winged.  Dives,  rich.  Quadriiplex,  fourfold. 

Artlfex,  skilful.  Degener,  degenerate.  Supplex,  sttppliant. 

Cicur,  tame.  Impar,  unequal.  Triceps,  three-headed. 

Compar,  equal.  Inops,  poor.  Vigil,  icatchful. 

Dispar,  unequal.  Praepes,  swift. 

To  these  may  be  added  locupl.es,  rich ;  sons,  guilty ;  and  insons,  inno- 
cent ;  which  have  um  or  ium  in  the  genitive  plural.  Volucer,  winged, 
though  its  ablative  is  in  i,  has  um  in  the  genitive  plural. 

3.  Memor,  mindful ;  immgrnor,  unmindful ;  par,  equal ;  and  uber,  fertile, 
have  i  only  in  the  ablative;  but  all,  except  par,  have  um  in  the  genitive 
plural. 

Note.  The  accusative  plural  of  adjectives  of  the  third  declension, 
as  of  nouns,  sometimes  ends  in  eis  or  is,  instead  of  es.     See  §  85. 

IRREGULAR   ADJECTIVES. 
§   115.     Some  adjectives  are  defective,  others  redundant. 

DEFECTIVE    ADJECTIVES. 

1    Many  adjectives,  denoting  personal  qualities  or  attributes. 
want  the  neuter  gender,  unless  when  occasionally  joined   to  a 
neuter  substantive  used  figuratively.     Such  are  the  following  ■ — 
6 


62 


REDUNDANT    ADJECTIVES. 


Bicorpor,  Deggner,  Inops,  Memor,  Redux,  Supplex, 

Bipes,  Dives,  Insons,  Pauper,  Senex,  Tricorpor, 

Caelebs,  Impos,  Invitus,  Particeps,        Sons,  Vigil. 

Consors,  Impubes,  Juvenis,  Princeps,         Sospes, 

Compos,  Industrius,  Locuples,  Puber,  or  -es,  Superstes, 

Viotrix  and  vltrix  are  feminine  in  the  singular,  seldom  neuter ;  in  the 
plural,  they  are  feminine  and  neuter.  Such  verbals  partake  of  the  nature 
of  substantives  and  adjectives.  They  correspond  to  masculines  in  tor. 
See  §  102,  6. 

2.  The  following  want  the  genitive  plural,  and  are  rarely 
used  in  the  neuter  gender  : — 

Concdlor,  deses,  hebes,  perpes,  reses,  teres,  versicolor. 

3.  Some  adjectives  are  wholly  indeclinable. 

Such  are  frugi,  temperate ;  nequam,  worthless  ;  sat  or  satis,  sufficient; 
semis,  half;  the  plurals  aliquot,  tot,  quot,  totidem,  quotquot ;  and  the  cardi- 
nal numbers  from  quatuor  to  centum  inclusive,  and  also  mille. 

4.  The  following  adjectives  are  used  only  in  certain  cases : — 
Billcem,  ace. ;  dovbly-tissued. 
Cetgra,  ceterum,  the  rest,  wants  the 

nom.  sing.  masc. 


Decemplicem,  ace. ;  tenfold. 
Exspes,  nom. ;  hopeless. 


— pi.  plures,  -a,  nom.,  ace. ;  -ium, 
gen. ;  Ibus,  dot.,  abl.     §  110. 

Potis,  nom.  sing,  and  pi.,  all  gen- 
ders; able. 

Pote,  nom.  sing., for  potest ;  possible. 


Inquies, nom.; -etem, ace. ;  -ete,  abl. ;  Septempllcis, gen. ;  -ce,  abl. ;  seven- 
restless,  fold. 

Mactus,  and  macte,  nom.;  macte,  Siremps,  nom.;  sirempse,  abl.;  a- 
acc. ;      increased; — macti,     and  Hke. 

mactae,  nom.  pi.  Tantundem,  nom.,  ace. ;   tantldem, 

Necesse,  and  necessum,  nom.,  ace;  gen. ;  so  much. 

necessary.  Trilicem,  ace;   trebly-tissued;  tri- 

Plus,  nom.,  ace. ;  pluris,  gen. ;  more ;  llces,  ace.  pi. 


REDUNDANT    ADJECTIVES. 

§  116.     The  following  adjectives  are  redundant  in  termi- 
nation and  declension.     Those  marked  r  are  more  rarely  used. 

Opulens,  and  -lentus,  rich. 
Precox,  -coquis,  and  -coquus,  early 

ripe. 
Procllvis,  and  -us,  r,  inclined  down 

wards. 
Quadrijugis,  and  -us,  four-yoked. 
Semianlmis,  and  -us,  half-alive. 
Semiermis,  and  -us,  half-armed. 
Semisomnis,  and  -us,  lialf-asleep. 
Singularis,  and  -ius,  single. 
Subllmis,  and  -us,  r,  high. 
Unanlmis,  r,  and  -us,  unanimous. 
Violens,  r,  and  -lentus,  violent. 


Accllvis,  and  -us,  r,  ascending. 
Auxiliaris,  and  -ius,  auxiliary. 
Bijugis,  and  -us,  two-yoked. 
Declivis,anrf  -us,  r,  descending. 
Exanlmis,  and  -us,  r,  lifeless. 
Hilaris,  and  -us,  cheerful. 
Imbecillis,  r,  and  -us,  weak.      [less. 
Impubes,  and  -is,  -is  or  -iris,  beard- 
Inermis,  and  -us,  unarmed. 
Infrenis,  and  -us,  unbridled. 
Inquiss,  and  -etus,  restless. 
Jocularis,  and  -ius,  r,  laughable. 
Multijuges,  r,  and  -i    (plur.),  many- 
yoked. 

To  the  above  may  be  added  some  adjectives  in  er  and  is ;  as,  salQaer  and 
Wis,  ecltber  and  -Iris 


NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 


63 


NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 


$  117.      Numeral   adjectives   are  divided   into   three 
principal  classes — Cardinal,  Ordinal,  and  Distributive. 

I.  Cardinal  numbers  are  those  which  answer  the  question 
'  How  many?'     They  are, 


Unus, 

Duo, 

Tres, 

Quatuor, 

Quinque, 

Sex, 

Septem, 

Octo, 

Novem, 

Decern, 

Undecim, 

Duodecim, 

Tredecim, 

Quatuordecim, 

Quindecim, 

Sedecim,  or  sexdecim, 

Septendecim, 

Octodecim, 

Novendecim, 

Viginti, 

Viginti  unus,  or     > 

unus  et  viginti,  ) 
Viginti  duo,  or         > 

duo  et  viginti,  &c.  ) 
Triginta, 
Quadraginta, 
Quinquaginta, 
Sexaginta, 
Septuaginta, 
Octoginta, 
Nonaginta, 
Centura, 
Centum  unus,  or 

centum  et  unus,  &c 
Ducenti,  -bb,  -a, 
Trecenti, 
Quadringenti, 
Quingenti, 
Sexcenti, 
Septingenti, 
Octingenti, 
Nongenti, 
Mille, 


J 


one. 

two. 

three. 

four. 

Jive. 

six. 

seven. 

eight. 

nine. 

ten. 

eleven. 

twelve. 

thirteen. 

fourteen. 

fifteen. 

sixteen. 

seventeen. 

eighteen. 

nineteen. 

tioentij. 

twenty-one. 

twenty-two. 

thirty, 
forty. 

fifty- 
sixty, 
seventy, 
eighty, 
ninety, 
a  hundred. 

a  hundred  and  one. 

two  hundred, 
three  hundred, 
four  hundred, 
five  hundred, 
six  hundred, 
seven  hundred. 
eiglU  hundred, 
nine  hundred, 
a  thousand. 


I. 

II. 

III. 

IIII.  or  IV. 

V. 

VI. 

VII. 

VI11. 

Villi,  or  IX. 

X. 

XI. 

XII. 

X11I. 

XIII1.  or  XIV 

XV. 

XVI. 

XVII. 

XVIil. 

XVI111.  or  XIX. 

XX. 

XXI. 

XXII. 

XXX. 

XXXX.  or  XL. 

L. 

LX. 

LXX. 

LXXX 

LXXXX.  or  XC. 

C. 

CI. 

CC. 

CCC. 

CCCC. 

10,  or  D. 

IOC,  or  DC. 

IOCC,  or  DCC. 

IOCCC,  or  DCCC. 

IOCCCC,  or  DCCCC. 

CIO,  or  M. 


64  NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 

D  biS;  "  }  **  ****  CIOCIO,  or  MM. 

•  Quinque  millia,  or  >  -      lt            ,                            x^^ 

quinquies  mille,  \  ^Ve  *«*!**•                            KX>- 

Decern  millia,  or )  ,,            ,                          -»*«.lj«. 

decies  mille,     \  ten  thousand.                       CCIOO. 

QrqqZi"^1mlue, }  JW»  «—  1000. 

"tSS;"]  «. /omd^euW.         CCC1O0O. 

Remarks. 

§118.  1.  The  first  three  cardinal  numbers  are  declined; 
those  from  four  to  a  hundred  inclusive  are  indeclinable ;  those 
denoting  hundreds  are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus. 

For  the  declension  of  unus  and  tres,  see  §§  107  and  109. 

Duo  is  thus  declined  : — 


M. 

F. 

JV. 

JV.    du'-o, 

du'-oe, 

du'-O, 

G.    du-o'-rum, 

du-a'-rum, 

du-o'-rum, 

D.     du-o'-bus, 

du-a'-bus, 

du-o'-bus, 

Ac.    du'-os,  or  du'-o, 

du'-as, 

du'-o, 

V.      du'-o, 

du'-ee, 

du'-o, 

Ab.    du-o'-bus. 

du-a'-bus. 

du-o'-bus. 

Dudrum,  dudrum,  are    often    contracted   into  duum,  especially  when 

joined  with  miUium. 

Jlmbo,  both,  is  declined  like  duo. 

2.  The  cardinal  numbers,  except  unus  and  mille,  are  used  in 
the  plural  only. 

The  plural  of  unus  is  used  with  nouns  which  have  no  singular,  or 
whose  singular  has  a  different  sense  from  the  plural ;  as,  una  castra,  one 
camp  :  unit  aides,  one  house.  So  also  with  nouns  denoting  several  things 
considered  as  one  whole  ;  as,  una  vostimcnta,  one  suit  of  clothes. 

3.  Thirteen,  sixteen,  seventeen,  and  eighteen,  are  often  expressed  by 
two  numbers  united  by  et;  thus,  decern  et  tres,  decern  et  sex,  decern  et  sep- 
tcm,  decern  et  octo  ;  in  which  the  larger  number  usually  precedes. 

From  twenty  to  a  hundred,  the  smaller  number  with  et  is  put  first,  or 
the  larger  generally  without  et;  us,  unus  et  vigintl,  or  viginti  unus.  Above 
one  hundred,  the  larger  precedes,  with  or  without  et;  as.  centum  et  unus, 
or  centum  unus  ;  trecenti  sexaginta  sex,  or  trecenti  et  sexaginta  sex.  Et  is 
never  twice  used. 

4.  For  eighteen,  twenty-eight,  &c .,  and  for  nineteen,  twenty-nine,  &c. 
(excepting  sixty-eight  and  sixty-nine),  a  subtractive  expression  is  more 
frequent  than  the  additive  form  ;  as,  duodeviginti,  two  from  twenty  ;  un- 
deriginti,  one  from  twenty  ;  duodetriginta,  undetriginta,  &e.  Neither  un 
(unus)  nor  duo  can  be  declined  in  these  expressions. 

5.  The  poets  sometimes  make  use  of  numeral  adverbs  in  expressing 
small  cardinal  numbers ;  as,  bis  sex,  for  duodecim  ;  bis  centum  for  ducenti 


NUMERAL.    ADJECTIVES.  65 

Numbers  above  a  hundred  thousand  are  always  expressed  in  this  way  ; 
as,  decies  centum  millia ;  but  the  cardinal  numbers  after  the  adverbs  are 
sometimes  omitted  j  as,  decies  centena,  i.  e.  millia ;  decies,  i.  e.  centum 
millia. 

6.  Mille  is  used  either  as  a  substantive  or  an  adjective. 

When  taken  substantively,  it  is  indeclinable  in  the  singular  number, 
and,  in  the  plural,  has  millia,  millium,  milllbus,  &c. ;  as,  mille  homlnum,  a 
thousand  men  j  duo  millia  homlnum,  two  thousand  men,  &c.  When 
mille  is  declined  in  the  plural,  the  things  numbered  are  put  in  the  geni- 
tive, as  in  the  preceding  examples,  unless  a  declined  numeral  comes 
between ;  as,  habuit  tria  millia  treccntos  milltes. 

As  an  adjective,  mille  is  plural  only,  and  indeclinable  ;  as,  mille  homines, 
a  thousand  men ;  bis  mille  hominibus,  with  two  thousand  men. 

7.  Capitals  were  used  by  the  Romans  to  mark  numbers.  The  let- 
ters employed  for  this  purpose  were  C.  I.  L.  V.  X.,  which  are,  there- 
fore, called  Numeral  Letters.  I.  denotes  one;  V .five;  X.  ten;  L.  fifty;  and 
C.  a  hundred.  By  the  various  combinations  of  these  five  letters,  all  the 
different  numbers  are  expressed. 

The  repetition  of  a  numeral  letter  repeats  its  value.  Thus,  II.  signi- 
fies two;  III.  three;  XX.  twenty  ;  XXX.  thirty ;  CC.  two  hundred,  &c. 
But  V.  and  L.  are  never  repeated. 

When  a  letter  of  a  less  value  is  placed  before  a  letter  of  a  greater,  the 
less  takes  away  what  it  stands  for  from  the  greater  j  but  being  placed 
after,  it  adds  what  it  stands  for  to  the  greater  j  thus, 

IV.   Four.  V.  Five.  VI.    Six. 

IX.   Nine.  X.  Ten.  XI.   Eleven. 

XL.  Forty.  L.  Fifty.  LX.  Sixty. 

XC.  Ninety.  C.  A  hundred.  CX.  A  hundred  and  ten. 

A  thousand  was  marked  thus,  CIO,  which,  in  later  times,  was  contracted 
into  M.     Five  hundred  is  marked  thus,  10,  or,  by  contraction,  D. 

The  annexing  of  O  to  10  makes  its  value  ten  times  greater ;  thus,  100 
marks  five  thousand  ;  and  1000,  fifty  thousand. 

The  prefixing  of  C,  together  with  the  annexing  ofO,  to  the  number 
CIO,  makes  its  value  ten  times  greater ;  thus,  CCIOO  denotes  ten  thou- 
sand ;  and  CCCIOOO,  a  hundred  thousand.  The  Romans,  according 
to  Pliny,  proceeded  no  further  in  this  method  of  notation.  If  they  had 
occasion  to  express  a  larger  number,  they  did  it  bv  repetition ;  thus, 
CCCIOOO,  CCCIOOO,  signified  two  hundred  thousand,  &c. 

We  sometimes  find  thousands  expressed  by  a  straight  line  drawn  over 
the  top  of  the  numeral  letters.  Thus,  Hi.  denotes  three  thousand ;  X., 
ten  thousand. 

<§>  1 1 9.  II.  Ordinal  numbers  are  such  as  denote  order  or 
rank.  They  all  end  in  us,  and  are  declined  like  bonus ;  as, 
primus,  first ;  secundus,  second. 

III.  Distributive  numbers  are  those  which  indicate  an  equal 
division  among  several  persons  or  things  ;  as,  singuli,  one  by 
one,  or  each  ;  bini,  two  by  two,  or  two  to  each,  &c.  They  are 
declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus,  except  that  they  usually  have 
um  for  orum  in  the  genitive  plural. 

The  following   table  contains  the  ordinal  and  distributive 
numbers,  and  the  corresponding  numeral  adverbs  :- 
6* 


66 


NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 

20. 

21. 
22. 

30. 

40. 

50. 

CO. 

70. 

80. 

90. 
100. 
200. 
300. 

400. 

500. 
600. 
700. 
800. 
900. 


Ordinal. 

Primus,  first 

Secundus,  second,  &c. 

Tertius. 

Quartus. 

Quintus. 

Sextus. 

Septimus. 

Octavus. 

Nonus. 

Declmus. 

Undeclmus. 

Duodeclmus. 

Tertius  declmus. 

Quartus  declmus. 

Quintus  declmus. 

Sextus  declmus. 

Septimus  declmus. 

Octavus  declmus. 

Nonus  declmus. 

Viceslmus,  or  ) 
vigesimus.   $ 

Viceslmus  primus. 

Viceslmus  secundus. 
C  Triceslmus,  or  ) 
I      trigeslmus.    ) 

Quadrageslmus. 

Quinquageslmus. 

Sexagesimus. 

Septuagesimus. 

Octogeslmus. 

Nonageslmus. 

Centeslmus. 

Dueenteslmus. 

Trecentesimus. 

Quadringenteslmus.   ) 

Quingentesimus. 

Sexcentesimus. 

Septingenteslmus. 

Octingente^Tmus. 

Nongenteslmus. 


Distributive. 

Singuli. 

Bin! 

Terni,  or  trini 

Quaterni. 

Quini. 

Seni. 

Septeni. 

Octoni. 

Noveni. 

Deni. 

Undeni. 

Duodeni. 

Terni  deni. 

Quaterni  deni. 

Quini  deni. 

Seni  deni. 

Septeni  deni 

Octoni  deni. 

Noveni  deni. 

Viceni. 

Viceni  singuli. 
Viceni  bim. 


1000.     Milleslmus. 
2000.    Bis  millesimus. 


Triceni. 

Quadrageni. 

Quinquageni. 

Sexageni. 

Septuageni. 

Octogeni. 

Nonageni. 

Centeni. 

Duceni. 

Treceni,  or  trecenteni. 

Quadringeni,  or     ) 

quadringenteni.  ) 
Quingeni. 

Sexceni,  or  sexcentgni. 
Septingeni. 
Octingeni. 
Nonageni. 
Milleni,  or  > 

singula  millia.  ) 
Bis  milleni,  or 


bina  millia 


'■} 


Numeral  Adverbs 

Semel,  once. 

Bis,  twice. 

Ter,  thrice. 

Quater.  four times. 

Quinquies,  &c. 

Sexies. 

Septies. 

Octies. 

Novie?. . 

Decies. 

Undecies. 

Duodecies. 

Terdecies. 

Quaterdecies. 

Quindecies. 

Sedecies. 

Decies  et  septies. 

Duodevicies. 

Undevicies. 

Vicies. 

Semel  et  vicies. 
Bis  et  vicies,  &c 

Tricies. 

Quadragies. 

Quinquagies. 

Sexagies. 

Septuagies. 

Octogies. 

Nonagies. 

Centies. 

Ducenlies. 

Trecenties. 

Quadringenties. 

Quingenties. 

Sexcenties. 

Septingenties. 

Octingenties. 

Noningenties. 

Millies. 
Bis  millies. 


Remarks. 

<§>  1  20.  1 .  Instead  of  primus,  prior  is  used,  if  two  only  are  spoken 
of.     Alter  is  often  used  for  secundus. 

2.  From  thirteen  to  nineteen,  the  smaller  number  is  usually  put  first 
without  ct ;  as,  tertius  declmus ; — sometimes  the  larger,  with  or  without  et , 
as,  declmus  et  tertius,  or  declmus  tertius. 

Twenty-first,  thirty-first,  &c.,  are  often  expressed  by  units  et  vicesimus 


ADJECTIVES. COMPARISON.  67 

unus  et  tricestmus,  &c.;  and  twenty-second,  &c.,by  duo,  or  alter  et  vicesl- 
mus, &c.,  in  which  duo  is  not  changed.  Jn  the  other  compound  numbers, 
the  larger  precedes  without  et,  or  the  smaller  with  et ;  as,  viceslmus  quur- 
tus,  or  quartus  et  viceslmus. 

For  eighteenth,  &c.,  to  fifty-eighth,  and  for  nineteenth,  &c,  to  fifty- 
ninth,  duodeviceslmus,  &c.,  and  undevicesimus,  &c,  are  often  used. 

3.  In  the  distributives,  eighteen,  thirty-eight,  forty-eight,  and  nineteen 
and  twenty-nine,  are  often  expressed  by  duodevicini,  &c.,  and  undevicinit 
&c. 

4.  Distributives  are  sometimes  used  by  the  poets  for  cardinal  numbers ; 
as,  bina  spicula,  two  darts.  So  likewise  in  prose,  with  nouns  that  want  the 
singular  ;  as,  bineenuptue,  two  weddings. 

The  singular  of  some  distributives  is  used  in  the  sense  of  a  multiplica- 
tive ;  as,  Linus,  twofold.     So  ternus,  quinus,  septfnus. 

5.  For  twenty-eight  times  and  thirty-nine  times,  duodetricies  and  unde- 
quadragies  are  found. 

§121.  To  the  preceding  classes  maybe  added  the  fol- 
lowing : — 

1.  Multiplicatives,  which  denote  how  many  fold.  They  all 
end  inplex,  and  are  declined  like  felix;  as, 

Simplex,  single.  Quadruples,  fourfold. 

Duplex,  twofold,  or  double.  QuincQplex, fivefold. 

Triplex,  threefold.  Centtiplex,  a  hundredfold. 

2.  Proportionals,  which  denote  how  many  times  one  thing  is 
greater  than  another ;  as,  duplus,  twice  as  great ;  triplus,  quad- 
riiplus,  octuplus,  decuplus.     They  are  declined  like  bonus. 

3.  Temporals,  which  denote  time ;  as,  bimus,  two  years  old  ; 
trimus,  three  years  old  ;  quadrimus,  &c.  Also,  biennis,  of  two 
years'  continuance;  quadriennis,  quinquennis,  &,c.  So  bimestrist 
of  two  months'  continuance;  trimestris,  &-c. 

4.  Those  which  denote  how  many  parts  a  thing  contains;  as, 
binarius,  of  two  parts  ;  ternarius,  &lc. 

5.  Interrogatives ;  as,  quot,  how  many  1  quotus,  of  what  num- 
ber 1  quoteni,  how  many  each  1  quoties,  how  many  times  ?  Their 
correlatives  are,  tot,  tottdem,  so  many ;  aliquot,  some ;  which, 
with  quot ,  are  indeclinable ;  toties,  so  often ;  aliquotiest  several 
times. 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  122.  Adjectives  may  be  divided  into  two  classes — those 
which  denote  a  variable,  and  those  which  denote  an  invariable, 
quality  or  limitation. 

Thus,  bonus,  good,  altus,  high,  and  opdeus,  dark,  denote  variable  attri- 
butes ;  but  emeus,  brazen,  triplex,  threefold,  and  diurutis,  daily,  do  not 
admit  of  different  degrees  in  their  signification. 


68  ADJECTIVES. COMPARISON. 

The  relations  of  inferiority,  equality,  or  superiority,  which 
different  objects  bear  to- each  other,  in  regard  to  variable  quali- 
ties, are  expressed  in  Latin  in  different  ways. 

Inferiority  may  be  denoted  by  prefixing  to  an  adjective  the 
adverbs  minus,  less,  and  minime,  least ;  as,  jucundus,  pleasant ; 
minus  jucundus,  less  pleasant ;  minime  jucundus,  least  pleasant. 

A  small  degree  of  a  quality  is  indicated  by  sub  prefixed  to 
an  adjective  '3  as,  dijficilis,  difficult ;  subdifficilis,  somewhat 
difficult. 

Equality  may  be  denoted  by  tarn  followed  by  qudm;  ceque 
followed  by  ac,  &c. ;  as,  hebes  ceque  ac  pecus,  as  stupid  as  a 
brute. 

§  123.  The  relation  of  superiority,  to  which  alone  the 
name  of  comparison  is  commonly  applied,  is  denoted  either  by 
prefixing  to  an  adjective  certain  adverbs  or  prepositions,  or  by 
peculiar  terminations.  Various  degrees  of  superiority  are  de- 
noted with  different  degrees  of  precision,  by  the  prepositions 
per  and  prce  prefixed  to  adjectives,  and  by  different  adverbs,  and 
other  qualifying  clauses.  The  terminational  comparison,  and 
its  equivalent  form,  expressed  by  the  adverbs  magis,  more,  and 
maxinie,  most,  prefixed  to  the  adjective,  denote  not  a  precise, 
but  only  a  relative,  degree  of  superiority. 

That  form  of  an  adjective  which  simply  denotes  a  quality, 
without  reference  to  other  degrees  of  the  same  quality,  is 
called  the  positive  degree  ;  as,  alius,  high ;  mitis,  mild. 

The  degrees  of  relative  superiority  are  two — the  com- 
parative and  the  superlative. 

The  comparative  denotes  that  the  quality  belongs  to  one 
of  two  objects,  or  sets  of  objects,  in  a  greater  degree  than  to 
the  other ;  as,  altior,  higher  ;  mitior,  milder. 

The  superlative  denotes  that  the  quality  belongs  to  one 
object,  or  set  of  objects,  in  a  greater  degree  than  to  any  of 
the  rest ;  as,  altissimus,  highest ;  mitissimus,  mildest. 

Remarks. 

1 .  The  comparative  is  also  used  to  denote  that,  at  different  times,  or  in 
different  circumstances,  a  quality  belongs  to  the  same  object  in  different 
degrees ;  as,  est  sapientior  quam  olim  fuit,  he  is  wiser  than  he  was  for- 
merly. 

2.  The  comparative  sometimes  expresses  the  proportion  between  two 
qualities  of  the  same  object ;  as,  est  doctior  quam.  sapientior,  he  is  more 
(earned  than  wise  ;  that  is,  his  learning  is  greater  than  his  wisdom. 


ADJECTIVES. IRREGULAR    COMPARISON. 


69 


Masc       Fern.      Neut 

$124.     The  termination al  )      . 
y  i    .  >     tor.  tor.        %us  ; 

comparative  ends  in  J  ■  ■ 

the  terminational  superlative  in  issimus,  issima,  issimum. 

These  terminations  are  added  to  the  root  of  the  positive ;  as, 
altus,    alt'ior,    aftissimus;     high,    higher,    highest. 
niifis,    mitior,   mt'iisslmus;     mild,    milder,    mildest. 

felixt  gen.felicis,felicior,felicissimus;  happy,  happier,  happiest. 

In  like  manner  compare 

Arc'-tus,  strait.  Car-rus,  dear.  Cle'-mens,  gen.  -tis,  merciful. 

Ca'-pax,  capacious.     Cru-de'-lis,  cruel.     In'-ers,  gen.  -tis,  sluggish.     §  23. 


IRREGULAR   COMPARISON. 

§  125.  1.  Adjectives  in  er  form  their  superlative  by  adding 
rimus  to  that  termination ;  as,  acer,  active ;  gen.  acris ;  compar- 
ative, acrior;  superlative,  acerrimus. 

In  like  manner  pauper,  pauperflmus.  Vetus  has  a  similar  superlative, 
veterrlmus,  as  if  from  veter. 

2.  Seven  adjectives  in  lis  form  their  superlative  by  adding 
to  the  root : — 


FacTlis, 

Difficilis, 

Gracilis, 

Humilis, 

Imbecillis, 

Simllis, 

Dissimllis, 


facilior, 

difficilior, 

gracilior, 

humilior, 

imbecillior, 

simiiior, 

dissimilior, 


facillimus, 

difficilllmus, 

gracilllmus, 

numillimus, 

imbecilllmus, 

similllmus, 

dissimilllmus, 


easy. 

difficult. 

slender. 

low. 

weak. 

like. 

unlike. 


3.    Five  adjectives  in  flats  derive  their  comparatives  and 
superlatives  from  obsolete  adjectives  in  ens : — 


Beneflcus, 

Honorificus, 

Magnificus, 

MunifTcus, 

Maleflcus, 


beneficentior, 
honorificentior, 
magnificentior, 
munificentior, 


beneficentissimus, 

honorificentissimus, 

magnificentisslmus, 

munificentisslmus, 

maleficentisslmus, 


beneficent. 

honorable. 

sjdendid. 

liberal. 

hurtful. 


Adjectives  in  dicens  and volens  form  their  comparatives  and  superlatives 
regularly ;  but  instead  of  those  positives,  forms  in  dicus  and  volus  are 
more  common ;  as, 

Benevolens,  or  benevolus,   benevolentior,  benevolentisslmus,  benevolent. 

4.  These  five  have  regular  comparatives,  but  irregular  super- 
latives : — 

Dexter,  dexterior,         dextfmus,  right. 

Extera,  (fern.)     exterior,  extlmus,  or  extremus,        outward. 


i    70 


ADJECTIVES. DEFECTIVE    COMPARISON. 


Postera,  {fern.)     posterior, 
Infer  us,  inferior, 

Superus,  superior, 


postremus,  or  postumus,        hind. 
inf  Imus,  or  imus,  low. 

supremus,  or  summus,  high. 

The  nominative  singular  of  posllra  does  not  occur  in  the  masculine, 
and  that  of  extira  wants  good  authority. 

5.  The  folio  wing  are  very  irregular  in  comparison  : — 

Bonus,        melior,         optimus,  good,      letter,        lest. 

Mai  us, 

Magnus, 

Parvus, 

Multus, 

Multa, 

Multum, 

Nequam, 

Frugi, 

All  these  form  their  comparatives  and  superlatives  from  obsolete  adjec- 
tives, except  magnus,  whose  regular  forms  are  contracted. 

DEFECTIVE   COMPARISON. 
$  126.     1.  Seven  adjectives  want  the  positive  :— 


melior, 
pejor, 
major, 
minor, 

optimus, 
pessimus, 
maximus, 
minimus, 
plurimus,    } 
plurima,     > 
plurimum, ) 
nequissimus, 
frugal  issimus, 

much,     more, 

worthless, 
frugal. 

plus,* 

nequior, 

frugalior, 

greatest, 
least. 

most 


Citerior,  citlmus,  nearer. 
Deterior,  deterrimus,  worse. 
Interior,  intlmus,  inner. 
Ocior,  ocissimus,  swifter. 


Prior,  primus,  former. 
Propior,  proximus,  nearer. 
Ulterior,  ultimus,  jfaTtAer. 


2.  Eight  want  the  terminational  comparative  : — 

Consultus,  consultissimus,  skilful.       Par,  parissimus,  equal. 
Falsus,  falsisslmus,  false.  Persuasus,   persuasisslmum     (neu- 

Inclvtus,  inclytissimus,  renowned.  ter),  persuaded. 

Jnvictus,  invictisslmus,  invincible.      ^Sacer,  sacerrimus,  sacred. 
Mentus,  meritissimus  (rarely  used), 
deserving. 

3.  Eight  have  very  rarely  the  terminational  comparative  : — 


Aprlcus,  apricissimus,  sunny. 
Bellus,  hellisslmus,</wie. 
Comis,  comissimus,  courteous. 
Diversus,  diversissimus,  different. 


Fidus,  fidissimus,  faithful. 
Invltus,  invitissimus,  unwilling. 
Novus,  novisslmus,  new. 
Vetus,  veterrimus,  old. 


4.  The  following  want  the  terminational  superlative  : — 


Adolescens,   adolescentior, )  vouna. 
Juvenis,  junior,  )  ™     ■ ' 

Alacer,  alacrior,  active. 
Coecus,  ccecior,  blind. 
Diuturnus,  diuturnior,  lasting 
Jejunus,  je junior,  fasting. 
Infinltus,  infinitior,  unlimited. 


Ingens,  ingentior,  great. 
Licens,  licentior,  extravagant. 
Longinquus,  longinquior,  distant. 
Oplmus,  opimior,  rich. 
Proelivis,  proclivior,  >  inclined 
Pronus,  pronior,         )  downwards 
sequior,  worse. 


See  $110. 


ADJECTIVES. COMPARISON.  7  I 

Propinquus,  propinquior,  neighbor-  Senex,  senior,  old. 

ing.  Silvester,  or  silvestris,  silvestrior 
Salutaris,  salutarior,  salutary.  woody. 

Satis,  sufficient ;  satins,  preferable.  Sinister,  sinisterior,  left. 

Satur,  &dX\xnox,  full.  Supinus,  supinior,  lying  on  the  hack. 

The  superlative  of  juvgnis  and  adolescens  is  supplied  by  minimus  natu, 
youngest ;  and  that  of  senex  by  maztmus  natu,  oldest.  The  comparatives 
minor  natu  and  major  natu  sometimes  also  occur. 

Most  adjectives  also  in  ilis,  dlis,  and  bllis,  and  many  in  anus,  wis,  and 
inquus,  have  no  terminational  superlative. 

5.  Many  adjectives  have  no  terminational  comparative  or  su- 
perlative.    Such  are, 

(a.)  Adjectives  in  bundus,  imus,  inus,  orus,  most  in  ivus,  and  those  in 
us  after  a  vowel  (except  quus).  Yet  assiduus,  egregius,  eriguus,  pius, 
slrenuus,  and  vacuus,  are  sometimes  compared  by  change  of  termination. 

(b.)  The  following — almus,  calvus,  canus,  cicur,  claudus,  degSner,  ddirus 
dispar,  egenus,  impar,  invidus,  lacer,  memor,  mirus,  pradltus,  pracox,  ru- 
dis,  salvus,  sospes,  vulgaris,  and  some  others. 

<§>  127.  The  comparative  and  superlative  may  also  be 
formed  by  prefixing  to  the  positive  the  adverbs  magis,  more,  and 
maxime,  most;  as,  idoneus,  fit;  magis  idoneus,  maxime  idoneus. 

Valde,  imprimis,  apprime,  admodum,  &c.,  and  the  prepositions 
prce  and  per,  and  sometimes  perquam,  prefixed  to  an  adjective, 
denote  a  high  degree  of  the  quality. 

The  force  of  the  comparative  is  increased  by  prefixing  etiam, 
even,  or  yet ;  and  that  of  both  comparative  and  superlative,  by 
prefixing  longe,  or  multo,  much,  far ;  as,  lunge  nobilissimus, 
longe  melior  ;  iter  multo  facilius ,  multd  maxima  pars. 

Quam  before  the  superlative  renders  it  more  emphatic ;  as, 
qudm  doctissimus,  extremely  learned ;  quam  celerrime,  as  speedily 
as  possible. 

All  adjectives  whose  signification  admits  of  different  degrees, 
if  they  have  no  terminational  comparison,  may  be  compared  by 
means  of"  adverbs. 

Instead  of  the  comparative  and  superlative  degrees,  the  posi- 
tive, with  the  prepositions  prce,  ante,  prater,  or  supra,  is  some- 
times used;  as,  prm  nobis  bcatus  (Cic),  happier  than  we;  ante 
alias  pulchritudine  insignis  (Liv.),  most  beautiful.  Sometimes 
the  preposition  is  used  in  connection  with  the  superlative ;  as, 
ante  alios  pulchcrnmus  omnes  (Virg.) 

Among  adjectives  which  denote  an  invariable  quality  or 
limitation,  and  which,  therefore,  cannot  be  compared,  are  those 
denoting  matter,  time,  number,  possession,  country,  part,  inter- 
rogation ;  also  compounds  ofjugum,  somnus,  gcro,  and  J era,  and 
many  others. 


72  ADJECTIVES. DERIVATION. 


DERIVATION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  1 28.  Derivative  adjectives  are  formed  chiefly  from 
nouns,  from  other  adjectives,  and  from  verbs. 

I.  Those  derived  from  nouns  and  adjectives  are  called 
denominatives.     The  following  are  the  principal  classes : — 

1.  The  termination  eus,  added  to  the  root,  denotes  the  ma- 
terial of  which  a  thing  is  made ;  as,  aureus,  golden  ;  argenteus, 
of  silver ;  ligneus,  wooden  ;  vitreus,  of  glass ;  from  aurum, 
argentum,  &c. 

The  termination  inus  has  sometimes  the  same  meaning  ;  as, 
adamantlnus,  of  adamant ;  cedrinus,  of  cedar ;  from  adamas 
and  cedrus. 

The  termination  eiis  is  found  only  in  possessives  of  Greek 
origin ;  as,  Achilleus,  of  Achilles ;  Sophocleus,  &-c. 

2.  The  terminations  dlis,  dris,  His,  atilis,  icius,  icus,  ius,  and 
inus,  denote  belonging  or  relating  to ;  as,  capiidlis,  relating  to 
the  life  ;  from  caput. 

So  comitidlis,  regalis ;  Apollinaris,  consuldris,  popularis  ;  civllis,  hostilis, 
juvenilis;  aquatllis,fluviattlis;  trilmnicius,pairicius ;  belllcus,civlcus,  Ger- 
manlcus  ;  accvsatorius,  imperatorius,  reg'ius  ;  caninus,  equlnns,  fcrinus  ; 
from  comitla,  rex,  Apollo,  consul,  populus,  civis,  &c. 

The  termination  His  sometimes  expresses  character ;  as, 
hostilis,  hostile ;  puerllis,  boyish  ;  from  hostis  and  puer. 

3.  The  termination  arius  generally  denotes  profession  or  oc- 
cupation ;  as,  argentarius,  a  silversmith  ;  from  argentum ; — 
coriarius,  statuarius;  from  corium  and  statua.  When  added  to 
numeral  adjectives,  it  denotes  how  many  parts  a  thing  con- 
tains.    See  §  121,  4. 

Some  of  this  class  are  properly  substantives. 

4.  The  terminations  osus  and  lentus  denote  abundance,  ful- 
ness; as,  dnimosus,  full  of  courage ;  fraudulentus ,  given  to  fraud ; 
from  animus  and  fraus.  So  lapidosus,  vinosus,  turbulentus, 
violentus.  Before  lentus,  a  connecting  vowel  is  inserted,  which 
is  commonly  u. 

Adjectives  of  this  class  are  called  amplificatives.     See  §  104, 13. 

5.  From  adjectives  are  formed  diminutives  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  from  nouns ;  as,  dulciculus,  sweetish ;  duriusculus,  some- 
what hard  ;  from  dulcis  and  durus.  So  lentulus,  misellus,  par- 
vulus,  &c.     See  §  100,  3,  and  §  104,  12. 

6.  From  the  names  of  places,  and  especially  of  towns,  are 
derived  adjectives  in  ensis,  inus,  as,  and  anus,  denoting  of  or 
belonging  to  such  places. 


ADJECTIVES. DERIVATION.  73 

Thus  from  Athena,  is  formed  Atheniensis,  Athenian ;  from  Canute,  Caw 
ncnsis.     In  like  manner,  from  castra  and  circvs  come  castrensis,  circensis. 

Those  in  inus  are  formed  from  names  of  places  ending  in  ia  and  ivm; 
Bs,Aricta,Aricinus;  Caudium,  Cawilnus ;  Capitolium,  C'tpitalinus ;  Ultima, 
Latinus.  Some  names  of  towns,  of  Greek  origin,  with  other  terminations, 
also  form  adjectives  in  inus  ;  as,  Tarentum,  lurentinus. 

Most  of  those  in  as  are  formed  from  nouns  in  um  ;  some  from  nouns  in 
a  ;  as,  Arplnum,  Arpinas  ;   Capena,  Capenas. 

Those  in  anus  are  formed  from  names  of  towns  of  the  first  declension, 
or  from  certain  common  nouns;  as,  Alba,  Albdnus  ;  Roma,  Romdnus; 
Cunue,  Cumdnus  ;  Thebai,  Tktbdnus  ;—fons,  fontdnus ;  mvns,  muntdnus  ; 
urbs,  urbdnus. 

Adjectives  with  the  termination  anus  are  also  formed  from 
names  of  men  ;  as,  Sulla,  Sulldnus;  Tullius,  Tullianus. 

Names  of  towns  in  polis  form  adjectives  in  politanus ;  as, 
Neapolis,  Neapolitanus. 

Greek  names  of  towns  generally  form  adjectives  in  ius;  as, 
Rhodus,  Rhudius;  Lacedaanon,  Lacedcemonius ; — but  those  in 
a  form  them  in  aus ;  as,  Larissa,  Larissaus ;  Smyrna,  Smyr- 
narns. 

7.  A  large  class  of  derivative  adjectives,  though  formed  from 
nouns,  have  the  terminations  of  perfect  participles.  They 
generally  signify  wearing  or  furnished  with  ;  as, 

afdtus,  winged  ;  barbdtus,  bearded  ;  galedtus,  helmeted  ;  auritus,  long- 
eared  ;  turritus,  turreted ;  cornutus,  horned ;  from  ala,  barba,  galea, 
amis,  &c. 

<§>  129.  II.  Adjectives  derived  from  verbs  are  called  verbal 
adjectives.     Such  are  the  following  classes  : — 

1.  The  termination  bundus,  added  to  the  first  root  of  the 
verb,  with  a  connecting  vowel,  which  is  commonly  that  of  the 
verb,  has  the  general  meaning  of  the  present  participle ;  as, 

errabundus,  moribundus,  from  erro,  morior,  and  equivalent  to  errans, 
moriens.  In  many  the  meaning  is  somewhat  strengthened  ;  as,  gratula- 
bundus,  full  of  congratulations  ;    lacrimabundus,  weeping  profusely. 

Most  verbals  in  bundus  are  from  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  a  few 
from  those  of  the  third,  and  but  one  from  the  second  and  fourth  re- 
spectively. 

Some  verbal  adjectives  in  cundus  have  a  similar  sense ;  as,  rubicundus, 
verecundus,  from  rubco  and  vereor. 

2.  The  termination  idus,  added  to  the  root,  especially  of 
neuter  verbs,  denotes  the  quality  or  state  expressed  by  the 
verb  ;  as, 

algldus,  cold ;  catidus,  warm  ;  madtdus,  moist ;  rapldus,  rapid  j  from 
algco,  caleo,  madeo,  rapio. 

3.  The  termination  bilis,  added  to  the  root  of  a  verb,  with 
its  connecting  vowel,  denotes  passively,  capability,  or  desert ;  as, 

amabllis,  worthy  to  be  loved  ;  credlbilis,  deserving  credit ;  placabilis,  easy 
to  be  appeased ;  from  amo}  credo,  placo. 
7 


14  ADJECTIVES. COM/1  USlTiOK. 

In  adjectives  of  this  form,  derived  from  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  . 
the  connecting  vowel  is  i ;  sometimes  also  in  those  from  verbs  of  the  second 
conjugation,  *  is  used  instead  of  e ;  as,  korribUis,  terfibilis,  from  korreo 
and  terreo. 

This  termination  is  sometimes  added  to  the  third  root,  with  a  change  of 
u  into  i;  a.s,flexibllis,  coctibilis,  sensiMlis,  from  flecto  (Jlexu),  &c. 

4.  The  termination  ilis,  added  either  to  the  first  root  of  a 
verb,  or  to  the  third  root,  after  u  is  removed,  has  usually  a  pas- 
sive, but  sometimes  an  active  sense ;  as; 

agllis,  active  ;  flexllis,  easy  to  be  bent ;  ducttlis,  ductile  ;  sufilis,  sewed ; 
coctilis,  baked  ;  fertUis,  fertile  ;  from  ago,  &c. 

5.  The  termination  icius  or  itius,  added  to  the  third  root  of 
the  verb,  after  u  is  removed,  has  a  passive  sense,  as  Jictitius, 
feigned  ;  conductitius,  to  be  hired ;  supposititius,  substituted, 
from  Jingo  (Jictu),  &,c. 

6.  The  termination  ax,  added  to  the  root  of  a  verb,  denotes  an 
inclination,  often  one  that  is  faulty ;  as,  audax,  audacious ;  lo- 
qnax,  talkative  ;  rapax,  rapacious  ;  from  audco,  loquor,  rapio. 

<§>  130.  HI.  Adjectives  derived  from  participles,  and  re- 
taining their  form,  are  called  participials ;  as,  amans,  fond 
of;  doctus,  learned. 

IV.  Some  adjectives  are  derived  from  adverbs,  and  are  called 
adverbials  ;  as,  crastinus,  of  to-morrow  ;  hodiernus,  of  this  day  ; 
from  eras  and  hodie. 

V.  Some  adjectives  are  derived  from  prepositions,  and  may 
be  called  prepositional^ ;  as,  contrarius,  contrary,  from  contra ; 
posterus,  subsequent,  from  post. 


COMPOSITION    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

§  131.     Compound  adjectives  are  formed  variously  : — 

1.  Of  two  nouns;  as,  capripcs,  goat-footed — of  caper  and 
pes  ;  ignicomus,  having  fiery  hair — of  ignis  and  coma. 

2.  Of  a  noun  and  an  adjective  ;  as,  noctivagus,  wandering  in 
the  night — of  nox  and  vagus. 

3.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb ;  as,  corniger,  bearing  horns — of 
cornu  and  gero ;  letifcr,  bringing  death— of  letum  and  fero. 
So  carnivorus,  causidicus,  ignivomus,  lucifugus,  parttceps. 

4.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun  ;  as,  aqucevus,  of  the  same 
age — of  aquus  and  avum ;  celcripes,  swift-footed — of  celer  and 
pes.  So  centimanus,  decennis,  magnanimus,  misertcors,  unan- 
tmis. 

5.  Of  two  adjectives ;  as,  centumgeminus,  having  a  hun 
dred  arms ;  multicavus,  having  many  cavities. 


PRONOUNS.  75 

6.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  verb ;  as,  brcviloquens,  speaking 
>riefly — of  brevis  and  loquor;  magnificus,  magnificent — of  mag- 
/tus  and  facio. 

*"  Of  an  adjective  and  a  termination ;  as,  qualiscunque, 
quotcunque,  uterque. 

Remark.  When  the  former  part  of  the  compound  is  a  noun 
or  adjective,  it  usually  ends  in  *.  If  the  second  word  begins 
with  a  vowel,  an  elision  takes  place ;  as,  mag?ianir»  s — of  mag- 
»*;s  and  animus. 

8.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun ;  as,  bicorpor,  two-bodied — of  6/5 
and  corpus. 

9.  Of  an  adverb  and  an  adjective ;  as,  malefidus,  unfaith- 
ful ;  malesdnus,  insane. 

10.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  verb ;  as,  beneficus,  beneficent — of 
bene  a.ndfacio;  malevolus,  malevolent — of  male  and  volo. 

11.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun  ;  as,  aniens,  mad — of  a  and 
mens.     So  consors,  decolor,  deformis,  implumis,  inermis. 

12.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adjective  ;  as,  concdvus,  con- 
cave ;  infidus,  unfaithful.  So  improvidus,  percdrus,  pradives, 
subalbidus. 

13.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  verb ;  as,  continuus,  continual — of 
con  and  teneo;  inscius,  ignorant — of  in  and  scio.  So  pracipuus, 
promiscuus,  superstes. 

Remark.  When  the  former  part  is  a  preposition,  its  final  consonant  is 
sometimes  changed,  to  adapt  it  to  that  which  follows  it ;  as,  imprudcns — 
of  in  and  prudens. 

PRONOUNS. 

§  132,     A  pronoun  is  a  word  which  supplies  the  place 

Ci  a  noun. 

There  are  eighteen  simple  pronouns : — 

Ego,  /.  Hie,  this  or  he.  Suus,  his,  hers,  its,  &c. 

Tu,  thou.  Is,  that  or  he.  Cujus  ?  whose  ? 

Sui,  of  himself,  &c.  Quis  ?  who  ?  Noster,  our. 

Ille,  that  or  he.  Qui,  who.  Vester,  your. 

Ipse,  himself.  Meus,  my.  Nostras,  of  our  country 

Iste,  that  or  he.  Tuus,  thy.  Cujas  ?  of  what  country  7 

Three  of  these — ego,  tu,  and  sui — are  substantives  ;  the  re- 
maining fifteen,  and  all  the  compound  pronouns,  are  adjectives. 

Ego  and  tu  arc  a  species  of  appellatives  of  general  application.  Ego  is 
used  by  a  speaker,  to  designate  himself;  tu,  to  designate  the  person  vvhom 
he  addresses.     Ego  :s  of  the  first  person,  tu  of  the  second. 


76  SUBSTANTIVE    PRONOUNS. 

Sui  is  also  a  general  appellative,  of  the  third  person,  and  has  always  a 
reflexive  signification.  The  oblique  cases  of  ego  and  tu  are  also  used  re- 
fiexively,  when  the  subject  of  the  proposition  is  of  the  first  or  second 
person. 

The  remaining  pronouns  are  adjectives,  as  they  serve  to  limit  the  mean- 
ing of  substantives ;  and  they  are  pronouns,  because,  like  substantive 
pronouns,  they  may  designate  any  object  in  certain  situations  or  circum- 
stances. 

Mats,  tuus,  suus,  noster,  vester,  and  nostras,  have  the  same  extent  of  sig- 
nification as  the  substantive  pronouns  from  which  they  are  derived,  and  are 
equivalent  to  the  genitive  cases  of  those  pronouns. 

Pronouns,  like  substantives  and  adjectives,  are  declined  ;  but 
they  all  want  the  vocative,  except  tu,  meus,  noster,  and  nostras. 
Sui  also,  from  the  nature  of  its  signification,  wants  the  nomina- 
tive in  both  numbers. 

The  substantive  pronouns  take  the  gender  of  the  objects  which 
they  denote.  The  adjective  pronouns,  like  adjectives,  have 
three  genders. 

SUBSTANTIVE    PRONOUNS. 

$  133.     The  substantive  pronouns  are  thus  declined : — 
Singular. 

N.  e'-go,  /.  tu,  thou. 

O.  ««->,  of  me.         M,  of  tU,  {  T^*|*f '  *~ 

D.  mi -hi,  to  me.  tib'-i,*  to  thee.  sibf-i*  to  himself  ,&c. 

Ac.  me,  me.  te,  thee.  se,  himself,  &c. 

\r.    tu,  O  thou.  ■ . 

Ab.  me,  with  me.  te,  with  thee.  se,  with  himself,  &c. 

Plural. 
N.  nos,  wc.  vos,  ye  or  you.  

^  tnos'-trum  >   r       ves'-trum  or  )„/•„,„,        ,.     r  .7         7 
G.\  .     .  \ofus.  ,.  ■      >  of  you.   su'-i,  of  themselves 

I  or  nos'-tn,  S  J  ves'-tn,     S  J 

D.  no'-bis,  to  us.  vo'-bis,  to  you.  sib'-i,  to  ihemselves. 

Ac.  nos,  us.  vos,  you.  se,  themselves. 

V. vos,  O  ye  or  you.  

Ab.  no'-bis,  with  us.  vo'-bis,  with  you.  se,  with  themselves. 

Remarks. 

1.  Mild  is  very  rarely  contracted  into  mi.    So  mzV  for  mikine,  Pers. 

2.  The  syllable  met  is  sometimes  annexed  to  the  substantive  pronouns, 
in  an  intensive  sense,  either  with  or  without  ipse  ;  as,  egdmet,  I  myself  j 

■  See  $  18,  2. 


ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS. 


77 


mihimct  ipsi,  for  myself.  It  is  not  annexed,  however,  to  the  genitives  plural, 
nor  to  tu  in  the  nominal"  Te  or  vocative.  In  these  cases  of  tu,  tute  01 
tutgmet  is  used.  In  the  aco-sative  and  ablative,  tete  in  the  singular,  and 
sesc  in  both  numbers,  are  employed  intensively.  Mejjte,  med,  and  ted,  for 
me  and  te,  and  tis  for  tui,  occur  in  the  comic  writers. 

3.  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  contracted  from  nostrorum,  nustrdrum,  and 
vestrorum,  vestraruvi. 

4.  The  preposition  cum  is  affixed  to  the  ablatives  of  these  pronouns  in 
both  numbers ;  as,  mecum,  nobiscum,  &c. 


ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS. 

§  134.     Adjective  pronouns  may  be  divided  into  the 
following  classes  : — demonstrative,  intensive,  relative,  inter" 
rogative,  indefinite,  possessive,  and  patrial. 
Note.     Some  pronouns  belong  to  two  of  these  classes. 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

Demonstrative  pronouns  are  such  as  specify  what  object 
is  meant. 

They  are  iUe,  iste,  hie,  and  is,  and  their  compounds,  1 3d  are 
thus  declined : — 


Singular. 

M.             F.  JV. 

N.    il'-le,  il'-la,  il'-lud, 

G.    il-li'-us,*  il-li'-us,  il-li'-us, 

D.    il'-li,  il'-li,  il'-li, 

Ac.  il'-lum,  il'-lam,  il'-lud, 

Ah.  il'-lo.  il'-la.  il'-lo. 


Plural. 

M.  F.  M 

il'-li,  il'-lae,  il'-la, 

il-16'-rum,  il-la'-rum,  il-lo'-rum, 


il'-lis, 
il'-los, 


il'-lis. 


il'-las, 

il'-lis.         il'-lis. 
Iste  is  declined  like  tile. 
Singular. 


il'-lis, 
il'-la, 

il'-lis. 


M.  F.  M 

N.    hie,  haec,  hoc, 

G.    hu'-jus,  hu'-jus,  hu'-jus, 

D.    huic,t  huic,  huic, 

Ac.  hunc,  hanc,  hoc, 


Ah.  hoc. 


hac. 


hoc. 


Plural. 
M.  F.  JY. 

hi,  hae,  haec, 

ho'-rum,     ha'-rum,  ho'-rum, 

his,  his,  his, 

hos,  has,  haec, 


his. 


his. 


his. 


*  See  $  15. 

7» 


t  Pronounced  hike.    See  $  9. 


73 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


Singular. 

Plural 

M        F        M 

M.                 F. 

M 

N. 

is,         e'-a,      id, 

i'-i,                e'-ie, 

e'-a, 

G. 

e'-jus,  e'-jus,  e'-jus, 

e-6'-rum,       e-a'-rum, 

e-6'-rum, 

D. 

e'-i,      e'-i,      e'-i, 

i'-is  or  e'-is,  i'-is  or  e'-is, 

i'-is  or  e'-is 

Ac. 
V. 

Ah 

e'-um,  e'-am,  id, 

e'-os,             e'-as, 

e'-a, 

e'-o.      e'-a      e'-o. 

i'-is  or  e'-is.  i'-is  or  e'-is. 

i'-is  or  e'-is. 

Remarks. 

1.  Instead  of  Me,  ollus  was  anciently  used;  whence  olli  in  Virgil.  Rla, 
fern.,  for  illius  and  Mi,  is  found  in  Lucretius  and  Cato,  as  also  hecc  for  ha 
in  Plautus  and  Terence.  Eii  for  ei,  im  for  eum,  and  ibus  and  iibus  for  Us 
occur  in  Plautus  ;  and  ece,  fem.,  for  ei  and  edbvs  for  iis,  in  Cato. 

2.  From  ecce,  lo!  and  the  accusative  of  Me,  iste,  and  is,  are  formed  ec«7- 
iuwi,  eccillam,  eccillud,  eccum,  eccam,  <fcc.,  in  both  numbers.  EccMum  is 
sometimes  contracted  into  ellum.     Ecca,  nom.  fem.,  also  occurs. 

3.  Istic  and  Mic  are  compounded  of  iste  hie,  and  iZZe  /tic.  The  former 
sometimes  retains  the  aspirate,  as  isildc.  They  are  more  emphatic  than  Me 
and  iste. 

Istic  is  thus  declined  : — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

M. 

F.                    jt 

M. 

F.           jf. 

JV.  ist'-ic, 

ist'-sec,      ist'-oc,  or  ist'-uc, 

Ac.  5 

ist'-eec. 

Ac.  ist'-unc, 

ist'-anc,     ist'-oc,  or  ist'-uc. 

Ah.  ist'-oc. 

ist'-ac.        ist'-oc. 

Mic  is  declined  in  the  same  manner. 

4.  Ce,  intensive,  is  sometimes  added  to  the  several  cases  of  hie,  and 
rarely  to  some  cases  of  the  other  demonstrative  pronouns ;  as,  hujusce, 
husce,  husce,  hisce  ;  Mace,  istdce,  ejusce,  istacce,  Usee.  When  lit,  interroga- 
tive, is  also  annexed,  ce  becomes  ei ;  as,  luecclne,Iioscine,hisclne;  istucclne, 
istacclne,  istosclne  ;  Mlccine,  Manccine. 

5.  To  the  genitives  singular  of  the  demonstrative  and  relative  pronouns, 
modi,  the  genitive  of  modus,  is  often  annexed,  either  with  or  without  an 
intervening  particle ;  as,  hujusmddi,  or  hujuscemddi,  of  this  sort ;  cujus- 
wddi,  &.c. 

6.  Dcm  is  annexed  to  is,  forming  idem,  the  same,  which  is 
thus  declined  : — 

Singular. 


M. 

F. 

JV. 

JV. 

i'-dem, 

e'-a-dem, 

i'-dem, 

G. 

e-jus  -dem, 

e-jus'-dem, 

e-jus'-dem, 

D. 

e-I'-dem, 

e-I'-dem, 

e-i'-dem, 

Ac. 

e-un'-dem, 

e-an'-dem, 

i'-dem, 

V. 

Ah. 

e-o'-dem. 

e-a'-dem. 

e-o'-dem. 

INTENSIVE    AND    RELATIVE    PRONOUNS.  79 

Plural. 

m.  f.  jr. 

JV.      i-I'-dem,  e-ae'-dem,  e'-fi-dem, 

Q.      e-o-run'-dem,  e-a-run'-dem,  e-o-run'-dem, 

jy    C  e-is'-dem,  or  >  C  e-is'-dem,  or  >  C  e-is'-dem,  or 

*    \      i-is'-dem,  )  (      i-is'-dem,    )  (      i-is'-dem, 

Ac.     e-os'-dem,  e-as'-dem,  e'-a-dem, 

jti    C  e-is'-dem,  or  )      C  e-is'-dem,  or  )       C  e-is'-dem,  or 
(     i-is'-dem.  $      I     i-is'-dem.   5       \     i-is'-dem. 

Note.    In  compound  pronouns,  m  before  d  is  changed  into  n  ;  as,  cun- 
dem,  &c. 

INTENSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

§  1 35.     Intensive  pronouns  are  such  as  serve  to  render 
an  object  emphatic. 

To  this  class   belong   ipse,   and   the   intensive  compounds 
already  mentioned.     §§  133,  2,  and  134,  4. 

Ipse  is  thus  declined  : — 

Singular.  Plural. 

M.  F.  JV.  M.  F.  JV. 

N.   ip'-se,     ip'-sa,     ip'-sum, 
G.   ip-si'-us,  ip-si'-us,  ip-sl'-us, 
D.  ip'-si,      ip'-si,      ip'-si, 
Ac.  ip'-sum,  ip'-sam,  ip'-sum, 

V. 

Ah.  ip'-so.      ip'-sa.      ip'-so. 


ip'-si,  ip'-sae,        ip'-sa, 

ip-sd'-rum,  ip-sa'-rum,  ip-so'-rum, 
ip'-sis,        ip'-sis,        ip'-sis, 
ip'-sos,        ip'-sas,       ip'-sa, 


ip'-sis.         ip'-sis.        ip'-sis. 


Remarks. 

1.  Ipse  is  commonly  subjoined  to  nouns  or  pronouns  ;  as,  Jupiter  ipse, 
tu  ipse,  Jupiter  himself,  &c. 

2.  A  nominative  ipsus,  and  a  superlative  ipsissimus,  his  very  self,  are 
found  in  comic  writers. 

3.  The  compounds  eapse,  eampse,  and  reapse,  are  contracted  for  ed  ipsd, 
cam  ipsam,  and  re  ipsd. 


RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

<5>  136.  Relative  pronouns  are  such  as  relate  to  a  pre- 
ceding noun. 

They  are  qui,  who,  and  the  compounds  quicunque  and  quis- 
quis,  whoever. 

In  a  general  sense,  the  demonstrative  pronouns  are  often  relatives  ;  but 
the  name  is  commonly  appropriated  to  those  above  specified.    They  serve 


80  INTERROGATIVE     PRONOUNS 

to  introduce  a  proposition,  limiting  or  explaining  a  preceding  noun,  to  which 
they  relate,  and  which  is  called  the  antecedent. 


Qui  is  thus  declined  : — 


Singular. 

M.            F. 

JV. 

N. 

qui,          qure, 

quod, 

O. 

cu'-jus,   cu'-jus, 

cu'-jus, 

J). 

cui,*       cui, 

cui, 

Ac. 

quern,     quam, 

quod, 

V. 

ilA.quo.         qua.         quo. 


Plural. 
M.  F.  AT. 

qui,  quae,  quae, 

quo'-rum,   qua'-rum,  quo'-rum, 

qui'-bus,     qui'-bus,  qui'-bus, 

quos,  quas,  quae, 


qui'-bus.      qui'-bus.     qui'-bus. 


Remarks. 


1.  Qui  is  sometimes  used  for  the  ablative  singular,  in  all  genders,  and 
rarely  for  the  ablative  plural.  To  the  ablatives  quo,  qud,  and  qui,  cum  is 
sometimes  annexed ;  but  it  is  usually  placed  before  the  ablative  plural. 

2.  Queis  and  quis  are  sometimes  used  in  the  dative  and  ablative  plural 
for  quibus.     Cujus  and  cui  were  anciently  written  quojus  and  quoi. 

Quicunque,  or  quicumque,  is  declined  like  qui. 
Qui  is  sometimes  separated  from  cunque,  by  the  interposition  of  one  or 
more  words. 

Quisquis  is  thus  declined  : — 

Singular.  Plural. 

M.  F.  JV.  M. 

JV.    quis'-quis,         quis'-quis,  quid'-quid,     I     JY.  qui'-qui, 

Ac.  quem'-quem, quid'-quid,  D.  qui-bus'-qui-bus. 

Ab.  quo'-quo.  qua'-qua.  quo'-quo.        I 

Note.  Quicquid  is  sometimes  used  for  quidquid.  Quiqui  for  quisquis 
occurs  in  Plautus. 


INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

$  137.     Interrogative  pronouns  are  such  as  serve  to 
inquire  which  of  a  number  of  objects  is  intended. 
They  are 


^ufs"        A  who?  what?        Ecquis?  )  Cujus ?  whose 7 

guisnam  .  )  Eequisnam  ?  V  is  any  one  ?       Cujas  ?  of  what 

5*U1 '       ?     >  tchich  ?  what  ?     Numquis  ?      )  country  ? 

1.   Quis  is  commonly  used  substantively  ;    qui,  adjectively. 
Qui  is  declined  like  qui  the  relative. 

*  Pronounced  ki..     See  $  9. 


INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


81 


Quis  is  thus  declined  : — 
Singular. 
M.  F.  .V. 

AT.     quis,        quae,         quid, 
G.    cu'-jus,    cu'-jus,    cu'-jus, 
D.    cui,         cui,  cui, 

Ac.  quern,      quam,      quid, 

Ah.  quo.         qua.  quo. 


Plural 
M.  F.  M 

qui,  quae,  qute, 

quo'-rum,    qua'-rum,  quo'-rum, 

qui'-bus,      qui'-bus,  qui'-bus, 

quos,  quas,  quae, 


qui'-bus.      qui'-bus.     qui'-bus. 


Remarks  on  quis  and  qui. 

(a.)  Quis  is  sometimes  used  by  comic  writers  in  the  feminine,  and  even 
in  the  neuter.  So  also  quisnam ,  quisque  and  quis  quam  occur  as  feminine. 

(b.)  Qui  is  used  for  the  ablative  of  quis  and  qui,  in  all  genders,  as  it  is  foi 
that  of  the  relative  qui. 

(c.)  Quis  and  qui  have  sometimes  the  signification  of  indefinite  pronouns 
(some  one,  any  one),  especially  after  ec,  si,  ne,  nisi,  num.,  quo,  quanta,  and 
quum.    They  are  also  occasionally  used  in  the  sense  of  qualis  ?  what  sort  ? 

2.  The  compounds  quisnam  and  quinam  have  the  signification 
and  declension  of  quis  and  qui  respectively. 

3.  Ecquis  and  numquis,  or  nunquis,  are  declined  and  used 
like  quis. 

But  ecqua  is  sometimes  found  in  the  nominative  singular  feminine ;  and 
the  neuter  plural  of  nunquis  is  nunqua. 

Ecqui  and  nunrpii  also  occur,  declined  like  the  interrogative  qui,  and, 
like  that,  used  adjectively. 

4.  Ecquisnam  is  declined  like  ecquis ;  but  it  is  found  only  in 
the  singular  ; — in  the  nominative  in  all  genders,  and  in  the  abla- 
tive masculine. 

5.  Cujus  is  also  defective: — 


Jtf. 
JV.   cu'-jus, 
Ac.  cu'-jum, 
Ab.  


Singular. 

F. 

cu'-ja, 
cu'-jam, 


JV. 


Plural. 
F. 

JV.     CU-JSB, 

Ac.  cu'-jas. 


6.  Cujas  is  declined  like  an  adjective  of  one  termination ; 
cujas,  cujdtis.  It  is  found  in  the  genitive  and  accusative  sin- 
gular, and  the  nominative  plural. 

Note.  The  interrogative  pronouns  are  sometimes  used,  in  dependent 
clauses,  when  there  is  no  question.  They  are  then  called  indefinites  ;  as, 
nescio  quis  sit,  I  know  not  who  he  is.  Qui,  in  this  sense,  is  found  for 
quis  ;  as,  qui  sit  aplrit,  he  discloses  who  he  is. 


82 


INDEFINITE     PRONOUNS. 


INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS 


§  138.  Indefinite  pronouns  are  such  as  denote  an  ob- 
ject, in  a  general  manner,  without  indicating  a  particular 
individual.     They  are 

Allquis,  some  one.        Quisquam,  anyone.  Quidam, a  certain  one 

Siquis,  if  any.              Quispiam,  some  one.  Quillbet,  )  any  one  you 

Nequis,  lest  any.          Unusquisque,  each.  Quivis,     y      "please. 
Quisque,  every  one. 

1.  Aliquis  is  thus  declined  : — 

Singular. 

M.                        F.  A*. 

JV.       al'-i-quis,               al'-i-qua,  al'-i-quod,  or  quid, 

G.      al-i-cu'-jus,           al-i-cu'-jus,  al-i-cu'-jus, 

D.      al'-i-cui,               al'-i-cui,  al'-i-cui, 

Ac.     al'-I-quem,           al'-I-quam,  al'-I-quod,  or  quid, 


al'-i-quo. 

al'-i-qua. 
Plural. 

al'-I-quo. 

M. 

al'-I-qui, 
al-i-quo'-rum, 
a-liq'-ui-bus,  * 
al'-i-quos, 

F. 

al'-i-quae, 
al-i-qua'-rum, 
a-liq'-ui-bus, 
al'-i-quas, 

JV. 
al'-I-qua, 
al-i-quo'-rum, 
a-liq'-ui-bus, 
al'-i-qua, 

JV. 
G. 
D. 
Ac. 
V. 
Ab.     a-liq'-ui-bus.        a-liq'-ui-bus.        a-liq'-ui-bus. 

2.  Siquis  and  nequis  are  declined  in  the  same  manner. 

But  they  sometimes  have  qua.  in  the  nominative  singular  feminine. 

Allqui,  siqui,  and  nequi,  are  found  for  aliquis,  &c.,  and  the  ablatives  allqui 
and  siqui  also  occur. 

Allquid,  siquid,  and  nequid,  like  quid,  are  used  substantively ;  attquod, 
&c.,  like  quod,  are  used  adjectively. 

3.  Quisque,  quisquam,  and  quispiam,  are  declined  like  quis. 
But  in  the  neuter  singular,  quisque  has  quodque,  quidque,  or  quicque ; 

quisquam  has  quidquam  or  quicquam ;  and  quispiam  has  quodpiam,  quid- 
piam,  or  quippiam. 

Quisquam  wants  the  plural,  and  quispiam  is  scarcely  used  in  that  num- 
ber, except  in  the  nominative  feminine,  quapiam. 

4.  Unusquisque  is  compounded  of  unus  and  quisque,  and  both 
words  are  declined. 

Thus  unusquisque,  uniuscujusque,  unicuique,  unumquemque,  Sec.  The 
neuter  is  unumquodque,  or  unumquidque.     It  has  no  plural. 

5.  Quidam,  quilibet,  and  quivis,  are  declined  like  qui,  except 
that  they  have  quod,  or  quid,  in  the  neuter. 

Quidam  has  usually  n  before  d  in  the  accusative  singular  and  genitive 
plural;  as,  quendam,  quorundam,  &c. 

*  Pronounced  a-lik'-we-bus.    See  $$  9,  ana  19, 4. 


VERBS. 


POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS. 


S3 


$  1 39.  The  possessive  are  derived  from  the  substantive 
pronouns,  and  from  quis,  and  designate  something  belong- 
ing to  their  primitives. 

They  are  mens,  tuus,  suits,  noster,  vester,  and  citjus.  Meus, 
tuus,  and  suus,  are  declined  like  bonus.  (§  105.)  Mcus  has  in 
the  vocative  singular  masculine  mi,  and  very  rarely  mens. 

Cujus  is  also  declined  like  bonus ;  but  it  is  defective.  See 
§  137,  5. 

Noster  and  vaster  are  declined  like  piger.     See  §  106. 

Remarks. 

1.  The  termination  pte  intensive  is  sometimes  annexed  to  the  ablative 
singular  of  the  possessive  pronouns ;  as,  suopte  pondSre,  by  its  own  weight ', 
ruapte  manu,  by  his  own  hand. 

2.  Suus,  like  its  primitive  sui,  has  always  a  reflexive  signification.  These 
pronouns  are  hence  called  reflexive.  Meus,  tuus,  noster,  and  vester,  are  also 
used  reflexively,  when  the  subject  of  the  proposition  is  of  the  first  or 
second  person.     See  §  132. 

PATRIAL   PRONOUNS. 

These  are  nostras  and  cujas.  See  §  137,  6.  They  are  de- 
clined like  adjectives  of  one  termination  ;  as,  nostras,  nostrdtis. 


VERBS. 

§  140.  A  verb  is  a  word  by  which  something  is  af- 
firmed of  a  person  or  thing. 

That  of  which  any  thing  is  affirmed  is  called  the  subject 
of  the  verb. 

A  verb  either  expresses  an  action  or  state  ;  as,  puer  legit,  the 
boy  reads ;  virtus  lauddtur,  virtue  is  praised ;  equus  currit,  the 
horse  runs  ;  aqua  calet,  the  water  is  warm  ; — or  it  connects  an 
attribute  with  a  subject ;  as,  terra  est  rotunda,  the  earth  is  round. 

All  verbs  belong  to  the  former  of  these  classes,  except  sum,  I  am,  the 
most  common  use  of  which  is,  to  connect  an  attribute  with  a  subject. 
When  so  used,  it  is  called  a  copula. 

§  141.     Verbs  are  either  active  or  neuter. 

I.  An  active  verb  expresses  such  an  action  as  requires 
the  addition  of  an  object  to  complete  the  sense  ;  as,  amo  te3 
I  love  thee ;  sequitur  consulem,  he  follows  the  consul. 

Most  active  verbs  may  express  action  in  two  ways,  and,  for 


84  .  VERBS. 

this  purpose,  have  two  forms,  which  are  called  the  active  and 
passive  voices. 

1.  A  verb  in  the  active  voice  represents  the  agent  as  acting 
upon  some  person  or  thing,  called  the  object ;  as,  puer  legit 
librum,  the  boy  is  reading  a  book. 

2.  A  verb  in  the  passive  voice  represents  the  object  as  being 
acted  upon  by  the  agent ;  as,  liber  legitur  a  puero,  a  book  is 
-ead  by  the  boy. 

Remark.  By  comparing  the  two  preceding  examples,  it  will  be  seen 
that  they  have  the  same  meaning.  The  passive  voice  may  thus  be  sub- 
stituted at  pleasure  for  the  active,  by  making  the  object  of  the  active  the 
subject  of  the  passive,  and  placing  the  subject  of  the  active  in  the  ablative 
case,  with  or  without  the  preposition  a  or  ah,  according  as  it  is  a  voluntary 
or  involuntary  agent.  The  active  form  is  used  to  direct  the  attention 
especially  to  the  agent  as  acting ;  the  passive,  chiefly  to  exhibit  the  object 
as  acted  upon.  In  the  one  case  the  object,  in  the  other  the  agent,  is  fre- 
quently omitted,  and  left  indefinite ;  as,  puer  legit,  the  boy  is  reading,  i.  e. 
librum,  lite'ras,  &c,  a  book,  a  letter,  &c. ;  virtus  lauddtur,  virtue  is  praised, 
i.  e.  ab  hominlbus,  by  men. 

The  two  voices  are  distinguished  from  each  other  by  peculiar 
terminations. 

§  142.  II.  A  neuter  verb  expresses  such  an  action  or 
state,  as  does  not  require  the  addition  of  an  object  to  com- 
plete the  sense ;  as,  equus  currity  the  horse  runs  ;  ego  sedeo, 
I  sit. 

Many  verbs,  in  Latin,  are  considered  as  neuter,  which  are  usually 
translated  by  an  active  verb  in  English.  Thus  indulgeo,  I  indulge,  noceo, 
I  hurt,  pareo,  I  obey,  are  reckoned  among  neuter  verbs.  In  strictness, 
such  verbs  denote  rather  a  state  than  an  action,  and  their  sense  would  be  more 
exactly  expressed  by  the  verb  to  be  with  an  adjective  ;  as,  "  I  am  indul- 
gent, 1  am  hurtful,"  &c.  Some  verbs  in  Latin,  which  do  not  usually  take 
an  object  after  them,  are  yet  active,  since  the  object  is  omitted  by  an  ellip- 
sis. Thus  credo  properly  signifies  to  intrust,  and,  in  this  sense,  admits  an 
object;  as,  credo  tibi  salutem  meant,  I  intrust  my  safety  to  you  ;  but  it 
usually  means  to  believe  ;  as,  crede  mild,  believe  me. 

Remark  1.  Neute*  verbs  have,  in  general,  only  the  form  of 
the  active  voice.  They  are,  however,  sometimes  used  imper- 
sonally in  the  passive  voice. 

2.  The  neuter  verbs  audeo,  I  dare,  fido,  I  trust,  gaudeo,  I  rejoice,  and 
soleo,  I  am  wont,  have  the  passive  form  in  the  perfect  and  its  cognate 
tenses  ;  as,  ausus  sum,  I  dared.     These  verbs  are  called  neuter  passives. 

3.  The  neuter  verbs  vapulo,  I  am  beaten,  and  veneo,  I  am  sold,  have  an 
active  form,  but  a  passive  meaning,  and  are  called  neutral  passives. 

4.  Some  verbs,  both  active  and  neuter,  have  only  the  form 
of  the  passive  voice.  These  are  called  deponent  verbs,  from  de- 
pono,  to  lay  aside,  as  having  laid  aside  their  active  form,  and 
their  passive  signification ;  as,  sequor,  I  follow ;  morior,  I  die. 

Note.     Verbs  are  sometimes  said  to  be  transitive  and  intransitive,  rather 


VERBS.- 

than  active  and  neuter.     The  former  terms  are  more  significant,  but  the 
latter  are  more  commonly  used,  and  have  the  same  meaning. 

To  verbs,  besides  voices,  belong  moods,  tenses,  numbers, 
and  persons 

MOODS. 

$  143.  Moods  are  forms  of  the  verb,  denoting  the 
manner  of  the  action  or  state  expressed  by  the  verb.  There 
are  in  Latin  four  moods — the  indicative,  the  subjunctive,  the 
imperative,  and  the  infinitive. 

1.  The  indicative  mood  is  that  form  of  the  verb  which 
is  used  in  independent  and  absolute  assertions ;  as,  amo,  I 
love ;  amabo,  I  shall  love. 

2.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  that  form  of  the  verb  which 
is  used  to  express  an  action  or  state  simply  as  conceived 
by  the  mind ;  as,  si  me  obsecret,  redlbo ;  if  he  entreat  me, 
I  will  return. 

3.  The  imperative  mood  is  that  form  of  the  verb  which 
is  used  in  commanding,  exhorting,  or  entreating;  as,  ama, 
love  thou. 

4.  The  infinitive  mood  is  that  form  of  the  verb  which 
is  used  to  denote  an  action  or  state  indefinitely,  without 
limiting  it  to  any  person  or  thing  as  its  subject ;  as,  amdre, 
to  love. 

TENSES. 

§  144.  Tenses  are  forms  of  the  verb,  denoting  the 
times  of  the  action  or  state  expressed  by  the  verb. 

1.  Time  admits  of  a  threefold  division,  into  present,  past,  and 
future ;  and,  in  each  of  these  times,  an  action  may  be  repre- 
sented either  as  going  on,  or  as  completed.  From  these  two 
divisions  arise  the  six  tenses  of  a  Latin  verb,  each  of  which  is 
distinguished  by  its  peculiar  terminations. 

2.  They  are  called  the  present,  imperfect,  future,  perfect, 
pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  tenses. 

Present  C    action    }  amo,  I  love,  or  am  loving ;  Present  tense. 
Fast       <  not  com-  >  amabam,  I  was  loving ;  Imperfect  tense. 
Future  (  pletedj   }  amabo,  I  shall  love,  or  be  loving ;  Future  tense. 

Present  C    action  }  amavi,  I  have  loved  ;  Perfect  tense. 

Past       <     com-  >  amariram,  I  had  loved ;  Pluperfect  tense. 

Future  (  pleted ;  )  amavtro,  I  shall  have  loved  ;  Future  perfect  tense. 

8 


86 


VERBS.— TENSES. 


3.  There  is  the  same  number  of  tenses  in  the  passive  voice 
in  which  actions  not  completed  are  represented  by  simple  forms 
of  the  verb,  and  those  which  are  completed  by  compound  forms. 

Present  C    action    }  amor,  I  am  loved ;  Present  tense. 
Past       <  not  com-  >  amdbar,  I  was  loved  ;  Imperfect  tense. 
Future  (  pleted ;   }  amdbor,  I  shall  be  loved ;  Future  tense. 

Present  C  action  }  amdtus  sum,  or  fui,  I  have  been  loved ;  Perfect  tense. 
Past  <  com-  >  amdtus  eram,  or fuBram,  I  had  been  loved  ;  Pluperfect. 
Future  (  pleted  ;  )  amdtus ero,  ovfuero,!  shall  have  been  loved;  Future 

[Perfect. 

<§>  145.  I.  The  present  tense  represents  an  action  as 
now  going  on,  and  not  completed ;  as,  amo,  I  love,  or  am 
loving. 

I.  Any  existing  custom,  or  general  truth,  may  be  expressed 
by  this  tense  ;  as,  apudParthos,  signum  datur  tympano ;  among 
the  Parthians,  the  signal  is  given  by  a  drum. 

2.  The  present  tense  may  also  denote  an  action  which  has  existed  for 
some  time,  and  which  still  exists  ;  as,  tot  annos  bella  gero  ;  for  so  many 
years  I  have  waged,  and  am  still  waging  war. 

3.  The  present  tense  is  sometimes  used  to  describe  past  actions,  in  order 
to  give  animation  to  discourse ;  as,  desiliunt  ex  equis,  provolant  in  primum  ; 
they  dismount,  they  fly  forward  to  the  front. 

II.  The  imperfect  tense  represents  an  action  as  going  on 
at  some  past  time,  but  not  then  completed ;  as,  amabam,  I 
was  loving. 

1.  The  imperfect  sometimes  denotes  repeated  or  customary 
past  action  ;  as,  legebam,  I  was  wont  to  read. 

2.  It  may  also  denote  an  action  which  had  existed  for  some  time,  and 
which  was  still  existing  at  a  certain  past  time ;  as,  audicbat  jamdudum 
verba  ;  he  had  long  heard,  and  was  still  hearing  the  words. 

3.  This  tense  is  sometimes  used  for  the  present,  in  letters,  with  refer- 
ence to  the  time  of  their  being  read ;  as,  expectdbam,  I  was  expecting, 
(when.  I  wrote). 

4.  The  imperfect  also  sometimes  denotes  intention  or  preparation  to  act 
at  some  past  time ;  as,  olim  cum  dabam,  formerly  when  I  was  ready  to 
give. 

III.  The  future  tense  denotes  that  an  action  will  be  going 
on  hereafter,  without  reference  to  its  completion ;  as,  amabo, 
I  shall  love  or  be  loving. 

IV.  The  perfect  tense  represents  an  action  either  as  just 
completed,  or  as  completed  in  some  indefinite  past  time  , 
as,  amaviy  I  have  loved,  or  I  loved. 

In  the  former  sense,  it  is  called  the  perfect  definite ;  in  the  lat- 
ter, which  is  more  common,  it  is  called  the  perfect  indefinite. 


VERBS. NUMBERS  J  PERSONS.  87 

V*.  The  pluperfect  tense  represents  a  past  action  as  com- 
pleted, at  or  before  the  time  of  some  other  past  action  or 
event;  as,  liticras  scripseram,  antequam  nuncius  venit ;  I 
had  written  the  letter,  before  the  messenger  arrived. 

VI.  The  future  perfect  tense  denotes  that  an  action  will 
be  completed,  at  or  before  the  time  of  some  other  future 
action  or  event ;  as,  cum  coen  avero,  proficiscar ;  when  I  shall 
have  supped,  I  will  go. 

This  tense  is  often,  but  improperly,  called  the  future  subjunctive.  It  has 
the  signification  of  the  indicative  mood,  and  corresponds  to  the  second  fu- 
ture in  English. 

Note.  The  present,  imperfect,  and  future  tenses  passive,  in  English, 
do  not  express  the  exact  sense  of  those  tenses  in  Latin,  as  denoting  an  ac- 
tion which  is,  was,  or  will  be,  going  on  at  a  certain  time.  Thus  laudor 
signifies,  not  "  I  am  praised,"  but  "  I  am  in  the  act  of  being  praised,"  or, 
if  such  an  expression  is  admissible,  "  I  am  being  praised." 

Remark  1.  The  six  tenses  above  enumerated  are  found  only 
in  the  indicative  mood. 

2.  The  subjunctive  mood  has  the  present  and  past,  but  no 
future  tenses. 

The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mood  have  less  definiteness  of  meaning, 
in  regard  to  time,  than  those  of  the  indicative.  Thus  the  present  and  per- 
fect, besides  their  common  signs,  may  or  can,  may  have  or  can  have,  must, 
in  certain  connections,  be  translated  by  might,  could,  would,  or  should ; 
might  have,  could  have,  &c.  The  tenses  of  this  mood  must  often,  also,  be 
translated  by  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indicative.  For  a  more  full 
account  of  the  signification  of  the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mood, 
see  §  260. 

3.  The  imperative  mood  has  but  one  tense,  which  is  called 
the  present,  but  which,  from  its  nature,  has  a  reference  to  the 
future. 

'4.  The  infinitive  mood  has  three  tenses — the  present,  perfect, 
and  future  ;  the  first  of  which  denotes  an  incomp!ete,the  second 
a   completed    action,  and  the  last  an  action  to  be  performed. 

NUMBERS. 

§  146.  Numbers  are  forms  of  the  verb,  denoting  the 
unity  or  plurality  of  its  subject.  Verbs,  like  nouns,  have 
two  numbers^the  singular  and  the  plural. 

PERSONS. 

<§>  147.  Persons  are  forms  of  the  verb,  appropriated  to 
the  different  persons  of  the  subject,  and  accordingly  called 
the  first,  second,  and  third  persons. 


88         VERBS. PARTICIPLES,    GERUNDS,    AND    SUPINES. 

1.  As  the  imperative  mood  expresses  the  action  which  a  second 
or  third  person  is  required  to  perform,  it  has  terminations  cor- 
responding to  those  persons  only. 

2.  The  signification  of  the  infinitive  mood  not  being  limited  to 
any  subject,  it  admits  no  change  to  express  either  number  or 
person. 

3.  The  following  are  the  terminations  of  the  different  persons 
of  each  number,  in  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  moods  in  both 
voices : — 


Active. 

Passive. 

Person.        1.        2. 

3. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

Singular.   —         s, 

t; 

r, 

ris, 

tur ; 

Plural,      mus,     tis, 

nt. 

mur, 

mini, 

ntur. 

These  may  be  called  personal  terminations. 

Remark  1.  The  first  person  singular,  in  the  active  voice,  ends  either  in 
m  or  in  a  vowel. 

2.  The  perfect  indicative  active  is  irregular  in  the  second  person  singu- 
lar, and  in  one  of  the  forms  of  the  third  person  plural. 

3.  The  passive  form  above  given  applies  to  the  simple  tenses  only. 

4.  The  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  are  seldom  expressed 
in  Latin  as  subjects  of  a  finite  verb,  the  several  persons  being  sufficiently 
distinguished  by  the  terminations  of  the  verb. 


PARTICIPLES,   GERUNDS,  AND  SUPINES. 

§  148.  1.  A  participle  is  a  word  derived  from  a  verb, 
and  partaking  of  its  meaning,  but  having  the  form  of  an 
adjective. 

Like  a  verb,  it  has  different  voices  and  tenses ;  like  an  adjec- 
tive, it  has  declension*  and  gender;  and  like  both,  it  has  two 
numbers. 

Active  verbs  have  usually  four  participles — two  in  the  active 
voice,  a  present  and  a  future;  as,  amans,  loving;  amaturus,  about 
to  love  ; — and  two  in  the  passive  voice,  a  perfect  and  a  future ; 
as,  amdtus,  loved,  or  having  been  loved ;  amandus,  to  be  loved. 

Neuter  verbs  have  usually  only  the  participles  of  the  active 
voice. 

Deponent  verbs,  both  active  and  neuter,  may  have  the  partici- 
ples of  both  voices. 

2.  Gerunds  are  verbal  nouns,  used  only  in  the  oblique  cases, 
and  expressing  the  action  or  state  of  the  verb.     Like  other  ab- 

*  See  U  105  and  111. 


VERBS. CONJUGATION.  89 

stract  nouns,  they  are  found  only  in  the  singular  number ;  as, 
amandi,  of  loving,  &c. 

3.  Supines  also  are  verbal  nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  in 
the  accusative  and  ablative  singular ;  as,  amdtum,  to  love  ;  amdtu) 
to  be  loved.  The  supine  in  um  is  called  the  former  supine  ;  that 
in  u,  the  latter.  The  former  is  commonly  used  in  an  active,  the 
latter  in  a  passive  sense. 


CONJUGATION. 


t 


§  149.  The  conjugation  of  a  verb  is  the  regular  forma- 
tion and  arrangement  of  its  several  parts,  according  to  their 
voices,  moods,  tenses,  numbers,  and  persons. 

There  are  four  conjugations,  which  are  characterized  by 
the  vowel  before  re  in  the  present  of  the  infinitive  active. 
In  the  first  conjugation,  it  is  a  long ; 

In  the  second, e  long ; 

In  the  third, e  short; 

In  the  fourth, t  long. 

Note.  Do,  dare,  to  give,  and  such  of  its  compounds  as  are  of  the  first 
conjugation,  have  d  short  before  re. 

<§>  150.  A  verb  consists  of  two  parts — the  root,  and  the 
verbal  termination. 

1.  The  root  of  a  verb  consists  of  those  letters  which  are  not 
changed  by  inflection ;  as,  am  in  amo,  sundbam,  hmaverim, 
zmatus.     This  may  be  called  the  general  root. 

2.  There  are  also  three  special  roots,  from  which,  by  the  ad- 
dition of  certain  terminations,  all  the  parts  of  the  verb  are 
readily  formed.  The  first  of  these  roots  is  found  in  the  present 
of  the  indicative,  and  is  the  same  as  the  general  root ;  the  sec- 
ond is  found  in  the  perfect ;  and  the  third  in  the  supine,  or  per- 
fect participle. 

3.  In  regular  verbs  of  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjuga- 
tions, the  second  root  is  formed  by  adding,  respectively,  dv,  ev, 
and  Iv,  to  the  general  root;  and  the  third  root  by  a  similar  ad- 
dition of  dtu,  etu,  and  itu. 

Many  verbs,  however,  in  these  three  conjugations,  form  their 
second  and  third  roots  irregularly,  as  do  almost  all  in  the  sec- 
ond, a  great  part  adding  u  and  itu,  instead  of  ev  and  etu. 

4.  In  the  third  conjugation,  the  second  root  either  is  the 
same  as  the  first,  or  is  formed  from  it  by  adding  s ;  the  third 
root  is  formed  by  adding  tu.     See  §  171. 

8* 


90  VERBS. CONJUGATION. 

Note.  In  the  second  and  fourth  conjugations,  e  and  i  before  o  are 
considered  as  belonging  not  to  the  root,  but  to  the  termination.  In  verbs 
whose  second  or  third  roots  are  formed  irregularly,  the  general  root  often 
undergoes  some  change  in  the  parts  derived  from  them. 

5.  The  vowel  which  unites  the  general  root  with  the  remain- 
ing letters  of  the  verb,  is  called  the  connecting  vowel.  Each 
conjugation,  except  the  third,  is,  in  a  great  degree,  distinguished 
by  a  peculiar  connecting  vowel,  which  is  the  same  as  character- 
izes the  infinitives.     See  §  149. 

In  the  third  conjugation,  the  connecting  vowel  is  generally  c  or  t.  In 
the  second  and  fourth  conjugations,  and  in  verbs  in  io  of  the  third,  a  sec- 
ond connecting  vowel  is  sometimes  added  to  that  which  characterizes  the 
conjugation  ;  as,  a  in  doceani,  u  in  capiunt,  &c. 

In  verbs  whose  second  and  third  roots  are  formed  irregularly,  the  con- 
necting vowel  often  disappears,  or  is  changed  in  the  parts  derived  from 
those  roots ;  but  it  is  almost  always  found  in  the  parts  derived  from  the 
"rst  root. 


firs 

X 


§  151.  1.  From  the  first  root  are  derived,  in  each  voice, 
the  present,  imperfect,  and  future  indicative ;  the  present  and 
imperfect  subjunctive,  the  imperative,  and  the  present  infinitive. 
From  this  root  are  derived  also  the  present  participle,  the  gerund, 
and  the  future  participle  passive. 

2.  From  the  second  root  are  derived,  in  the  active  voice,  the 
perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  indicative;  the  perfect 
and  pluperfect  subjunctive,  and  the  perfect  infinitive. 

3.  From  the  third  root  are  derived,  in  the  active  voice,  the 
supine  in  um,  and  the  future  participle,  the  latter  of  which,  with 
the  verb  esse,  constitutes  the  future  infinitive. 

From  this  root  are  derived,  in  the  passive  voice,  the  supine  in 
u,  and  the  perfect  participle,  from  the  latter  of  which,  with  the 
verb  sum,  are  formed  all  the  tenses  which  in  the  active  are  de- 
rived from  the  second  root.  The  future  infinitive  passive  is 
formed  from  the  supine  in  um,  and  iri,  the  present  infinitive 
passive  of  the  verb  eo,  to  go. 

4.  The  present  and  perfect  indicative,  the  supine  in  um*  and 
the  present  infinitive,  are  called  the  principal  parts  of  the  verb, 
because  from  the  first  three  the  several  roots  are  ascertained, 
and  from  the  last,  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  conjugation. 
In  the  passive  voice,  the  principal  parts  are  the  present  indica- 
tive and  infinitive,  and  the  perfect  participle. 

$  152.  The  following  table  exhibits  a  connected  view  of  the 
verbal  terminations,  in  all  the  conjugations.  By  annexing  these 
to  the  several  roots,  all  the  parts  of  a  verb  may  be  formed. 

*  As  the  supine  in  um  is  wanting  in  most  verbs,  the  third  root  must  often  be  detei>- 
mined  from  the  perfect  participle,  or  the  future  participle  active. 


VERBS. TERMINATIONS. 


91 


C    iu    u    Sj 
.9  9  || 


«-.    «-    U    3 

3335 

s  s  s  § 

rt   0/   a*  .3. 


5133 

s  2  =  9 

a  J  f.J 


<U   o    n  ■■! 


,S  C  a 


1 

o 

<*  8 
18 


5  Isle's 


3   fa    fa   fa 

22S2 
2  1  S  S 


•  a  3  «  h 

«3333 


s  e  C  ,2 

E  £  s-1 

a  a  rt  S 

?  V  V    • 

c  c  c  £ 

33   B  73   2 

e  s  s  a 

w  «  «3  3 


£S5'3 


ssli 


S  S  S  g* 

rt  «i  w  m 
I     I     I     I 


Q 
O 

>5 

o 

O 

S 

■« 

« 

*Q 

> 

1 

5 

d    en 


?  °"<        n  «  go   n 
*C  "C  'C  *C 

>rt  i<u  >o  ■— 


»-.    o    «-. 

o  o  o. 


■I  «"i  <fl  a 

,Q,fi,£a  "5 

llff 

o  ©  5  © 


fa  fa  ...  ••" 

5  2  IT  fa 
?  ¥«?■* 

33  sg 

rt   o  o .2. 
4   4   44 

*u  >o  .2"C 


s  * 

55 


J7  xn  .«  ■«  .3J      a    <s  io   rt  . 
g     '     •     •     •     g     »     •     • 


g 

p    W 

&  9 
ft  3 

E 

q 


.  §  S  §  § 

HE6gg 


cotS 


Iflii 


£.2.2 


•uoquS 
-nCuoj 


p  s  s  2 

s  s  s| 

5JSJS| 
*?  V  V  i 


oT  w"  oT  2 
S  3  «*  2 


«3    K    >4)  .— 
I      I      I      • 


C   S3     .  j 

irt  .<u  a>  .a 


S  s 


§   2 

s  s 


^3  ^3  *»  S 


W3    ■«    0)  .3. 


O    O 

rfs  -a 


a"S 


E  5  s 


p  c  2  § 


fill 


89  *C  2-C 

10)    Ol   «o  .S 

iTlf 


0)0    0 


a  .a 


H 

•-»  d( 

n  w 

D 

o   o   rt  .2 


§gS3 

E  b 


is 


oT  1  oT  2 

tt>   I   eS  .2 


£f  1  E"  | 

4>    4>    CSI  .3 


92 


VERBS. TERMINATIONS. 


G    G    Oi 
«-     L*     U 

tci  \<u  *a 


ESSE 

<U    2>    <D   aj 


i««rr 


VERBS. SUM.  93 

In  analyzing  a  verb,  the  voice,  person,  and  number,  are  ascertained  by  the 
personal  terminations.  See  §  147,  3.  The  conjugation,  mood,  and  tense, 
are,  in  general,  determined  by  the  letter  or  letters  which  intervene  between 
the  root  of  the  verb  and  those  terminations.  Thus  in  amabdmus,  mus  de- 
notes that  the  verb  is  of  the  active  voice,  plural  number,  and  first  person ; 
ba  denotes  that  it  is  of  the  indicative  mood,  imperfect  tense  j  and  the  con- 
necting vowel  a  determines  it  to  be  of  the  first  conjugation.  So  in  ama- 
remXni,  mini  denotes  the  passive  voice,  plural  number,  and  second  person ; 
re,  the  subjunctive  mood,  imperfect  tense ;  and  a,  as  before,  the  first  conju- 
gation. 

Sometimes,  the  part  between  the  root  of  the  verb  and  the  personal  ter- 
mination, does  not  precisely  determine  the  conjugation,  mood,  and  tense, 
but  only  within  certain  limits.  In  such  cases,  the  conjugation  may  be 
learned,  by  finding  the  present  tense  in  the  dictionary,  and  if  two  forms 
are  alike  in  the  same  conjugation,  they  can  only  be  distinguished  by  the 
sense.  Thus  amemus  and  docemus  have  the  same  termination ;  but,  as 
amo  is  of  the  first,  and  doceo  of  the  second  conjugation,  the  former  is  de- 
termined to  be  the  subjunctive,  the  latter  the  indicative,  present.  Regar 
may  be  either  future  indicative,  or  present  subjunctive — reglmus  either 
present  or  perfect  indicative. 

§  1*53.  Sum,  I  am,  is  called  an  auxiliary  verb,  because  it 
is  used,  in  conjunction  with  participles,  to  supply  the  want  of 
simple  forms  in  other  verbs.  From  its  denoting  existence,  it 
is  sometimes  called  the  substantive  verb.  It  is  very  irregular 
in  those  parts  which,  in  other  verbs,  are  formed  from  the  first 
root.  Its  imperfect  and  future  tenses  seem  to  have  been 
formed  from  the  second  root  of  some  now  obsolete  verb,  and 
to  have  been,  not,  as  now,  an  imperfect  and  future,  but  a  plu- 
perfect and  future  perfect.     It  is  thus  conjugated : — 


PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

■ 

Pres.  Indie. 
Sum, 

Pres.  Injin.      Perf.  Indie. 
es'-se,               fu'-i, 

FuL  Part. 
fu-tu'-rus. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 
Present  Tense. 

Singular.  Plural, 

g  C  1.  sum,  I  am,  su'-mus,  we  are, 

£  <  2.  es,  thou  art,*  es'-tis,  ye\  are, 

{£  C  3.  est,  he  is  ;  sunt,  they  are. 

Imperfect. 

1 .  e'-ram,  7  was,  e-ra'-mus,  we  were, 

2.  e'-ras,  thou  wast,  e-ra'-tis,  ye  were, 

3.  e'-rat,  he  was  ;  e'-rant,  they  were. 

*  In  the  second  person  singular  in  English,  the  plural  form  you  is  commonly  used, 
except  in  solemn  discourse  ;  as,  tu  es,  you  are. 

t  The  plural  pronoun  of  the  second  persou  is  either  ye  or  you. 


94 


VERBS. SUM. 


Future,     shall,  or  will. 


1.  e'-ro,  1  shall  be, 

2.  e'-ris,  thou  wilt  be, 

3.  e'-rit,  he  will  be  ; 


er'-i-mus,  we  shall  be, 
er'-I-tis,  ye  will  be, 
e'-runt,  they  will  be. 


Perfect,     have  been,  or  was. 


1.  fu'-i,  J  have  been, 

2.  fu-is'-ti,  thou  hast  been, 

3.  fu'-it,  he  has  been ; 


fu'-i-mus,  we  have  been, 
fu-is'-tis,  ye  have  been, 
fu-e'-runt  or  -re,  they  have  been. 


Pluperfect. 


1.  fV-e-ram,  I  had  been, 

2.  fu'-S-ras,  thou  hadst  been, 

3.  fu'-6-rat,  he  had  been  ; 


fu-e-ra/-mus,  we  had  been, 
fu-e-ra'-tis,  ye  had  been, 
fu'-e-rant,  they  had  been. 


Future  Perfect,     shall  or  will  have. 


1.  ru'-fi-ro,  /  shall  have  been, 

2.  fu'-g-ris,  thou  wilt  have  been, 
3  fu'-g-rit,  he  will  have  been  ; 


fu-er'-i-mus,  we  shall  have  been. 
fu-er/-i-tis,  ye  will  have  been, 
fu'-e-rint,  they  will  have  been. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 
Present,     may,  or  can. 


1.  sim,  I  may  be, 

2.  sis,  tfvou  mavst  be, 

3.  sit,  he  may  be ; 


si'-mus,  we  may  be, 
si'-tis,  ye  may  be, 
sint,  they  may  be. 


Imperfect,     might,  could,  would,  or  should. 

es-se'-mus,  we  would  be, 
es-se'-tis,  ye  would  be, 
cs'-sent,  they  would  be. 


1.  es/-sem,  J  would  be, 

2.  es'-ses,  thou  wouldst  be, 

3.  es'-set,  he  would  be ; 


Perfect. 


1.  fu'-€-rim,  I  may  have  been,  fu-er'-i-mus,  we  may  have  been, 

2.  fu'-e-ris,  thou  mayst  have  been,    fu-er'-i-tis,  ye  may  have  been, 

3.  fu'-6-rit,  he  may  have  been  ;  fu'-e-rint,  they  may  have  been. 

Pluperfect,     might,  could,  would,  or  should  have, 

1.  fu-is'-sem,  /  would  have  been,      fu-is-se'-mus,  we  would  have  been, 

2.  fu-is'-ses,  thou  wouldst  have  been,  fu-is-se'-tis,  ye  would  have  been, 

3.  fu-is'-set,  he  would  have  been ;     fu-is'-sent,  they  would  have  been. 


VERBS. SUM.  95 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

2.  es,  or  es'-to,  be  thou,  es'-te,  or  es-to'-te,  be  ye, 

3.  es'-to,  let  him  be ;  sun'-to,  let  them  be, 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Present,  es'-se,  to  be. 

Perfect    fu-is'-se,  to  have  been. 

Future,    fu-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to  be  about  to  be. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Future,    fu-tu'-rus,  about  to  be. 

Remarks. 

§  154.  1.  A  present  participle  ens  seems  to  have  been  anciently 
used,  and  is  now  found  in  the  compounds  absens,  prcesens,  and  potens. 

2.  The  perfect/ia,  and  its  derivative  tenses,  are  formed  from  an  obsolete 
fuo,  whence  come  also  the  participle  futurus,  and  an  old  subjunctive 
present  fuam,fuas,fuat; , ,fuant. 

3.  From  jfao  are  also  derived  the  following  : — 


Subj.  imperf.  fo'-rem,  fo'-res,  fo'-ret;  , ,  fo'-rent. 

Inf.pres.         fo'-re. 

These  forms  seem  to  have  been  contracted  from  fuerern, 
&c,  and  fuere.  For  em  is  equivalent  in  meaning  to  essem,  but 
fore  has,  in  most  cases,  acquired  a  future  signification,  equiva- 
lent to  futurus  esse. 

4.  Siem,  sies,  siet,  for  sim,  sis,  sit,  are  found  in  ancient  writers,  as  are 
also  escit  for  erit,  escunt  for  erunt,  and  fuvlrint  for  fulrint. 

5.  Like  sum  are  conjugated  its  compounds,  except  possum ; 
but  prosum  has  d  after  pro,  when  the  simple  verb  begins  with 
e;  as, 

Ind.pres.      pro'-sum,  prod'-es,  prod'-est,  &c. 
imperf.  prod'-e-ram,  prod'-e-ras,  &c. 

6.  Possum  is  compounded  of  potis,  able,  and  sum.  They 
are  sometimes  written  separately,  and  then  potis  is  the  same  in 
all  genders  and  numbers.  In  composition,  is  is  omitted  in 
potis,  and  t,  as  in  other  cases,  coming  before  5,  is  changed  into 
5.  In  the  infinitive,  and  imperfect  subjunctive,  es  of  the  simple 
verb  h  dropped,  and  f  at  the  beginning  of  the  second  root. 
In  evrry  other  respect,  possum  is  conjugated  like  sum,  wher- 
ever k  is  found;  but  the  imperative,  and  parts  derived  from  the 
third  root,  are  wanting. 


96 


VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATION,    ACTIVE. 


Pres.  Ind. 
Pos'-sum, 


Pres.  Inf. 
pos'-se, 


Per/.  Ind. 
pot'-u-i, 


INDICATIVE. 


I  can,  or  I  am  able. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres.      pos'-sim,  &c. 
Jmpcrf.  pos'-sem,  &c. 
Perf.       pot-u'-g-rim,  &c. 
Plup.      pot-u-is'-sem,  &c. 

INFINITIVE. 
Pres.  pos'-se. 
Perf.  pot-u-is;-se. 

The  following  forms  are  also  found  ; — potessim  and  possiem,  &c,  for 
vossim,  &c. ;  potesse  for  posse;  potestur  for  potest;  and  possitur  for  pus sit 


Pres  $  *  Pos  "sum>  Pot'-esi  pot'-est , 

*  /  P.  pos'-sa-mus,  pot-es'-tis,  pos;-sunt. 
Imperf.      pof-6-ram,  &c. 
Fut.  pot'-6-ro,  &c. 

Perf.  pot'-u-i,  &c. 

Plup.         pot-u'-6-ram,  &c 
Fut.  perf.  pot-u'-S-ro,  &c. 


§155.     FIRST    CONJUGATION. 


ACTIVE    VOICE. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind. 
A'-mo, 


Pres.  Inf. 
a-ma'-re, 


Perf.  Ind. 
a-ma'-vi, 


Supine. 
a-ma'-tum 


Plur. 


Plur 


Plur. 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 
Present. 


a'-mo, 

I  love, 

a'-mas, 

thou  lovestt 

a'-mat, 

he  loves ; 

a-ma'-mus, 

we  love, 

a-ma'-tis, 

ye  love, 

a'-mant, 

they  love. 

Imperfect. 

a-ma'-bam, 

I  was  loving, 

a-ma'-bas, 

thou  wast  loving, 

a-ma'-bat, 

he  was  loving  ; 

am-a-ba'-mus, 

ice  were  loving, 

am-a-ba'-tis, 

ye  were  loving, 

a-ma'-bant, 

they  were  loving. 

Future. 

shall,  oi 

'  will. 

a-ma'-bo, 

I  shall  love, 

a-ma'-bis, 

thou  wilt  love, 

a-ma'-bit, 

he  will  love  ; 

a-mab'-i-mus, 

we  shall  love, 

a-mab'-I-tis, 

ye  joill  love, 

a-ma/-bunt, 

they  will  love. 

TERES. FIRST    CONJUGATION,    ACTIVE.  97 

Perfect,     loved,  or  have  loved, 

a-ma'-vi,  I  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-ti,  thou  hast  loved, 

a-ma'-vit,  he  has  loved; 

Plur.   a-mav'-i-mus,  we  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-tis,  ye  have  loved, 

am-a-ve'-runt  or  -re,  they  have  loved. 

Pluperfect. 

Sing,   a-mav'-e-ram,  /  had  loved, 

a-mav'-e-ras,  thou  hadst  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rat,  he  had  loved; 

Plur    am-a-ve-ra  -mus,  we  had  loved, 

am-a-ve-ra'-tis,  ye  had  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rant,  they  had  loved. 

Future  Perfect,     shall  or  will  have. 

Sing,   a-mav'-e-ro,  J  shall  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-ris,  thou  wilt  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rit,  he  will  have  loved; 

Plur.   am-a-ver'-i-mus,  we  shall  have  loved, 

am-a-ver'-i-tis,  ye  will  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rint,  they  will  have  loved. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Present,  may,  or  can. 

Sing,   a'-mem,  I  may  love, 

a'-mes,  thou  mayst  love, 

a'-met,  he  may  love  ; 

Plur.    a-me'-mus,  we  may  love, 

a-me'-tis,  ye  may  love, 

a'-ment,  they  may  love. 

Imperfect,     might,  could,  would,  or  should. 

Sing,   a-ma'-rem,  I  would  love, 

a-ma'-res,  thou  wouldst  love, 

a-ma'-ret,  he  would  love ; 

Plur.   ain-a-re'-mus,  we  would  love, 

am-a-re'-tis,  ye  would  love, 

a-ma'-rent,  they  would  love. 
9 


98  VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATION,    ACTIVE. 

Perfect. 

Sing,    a-mav'-e-rim,  I  may  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-ris,  thou  mayst  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rit,  he  may  have  loved; 

Plur.    am-a-ver'-i-mus,  we  may  have  loved, 

am-a-ver'-i-tis,  ye  may  have  loved, 

,  a-mav'-e-rint,  they  may  have  loved. 

Pluperfect,     might,  could,  would,  or  should  hcve. 

Sing,   am-a-vis'-sem,  1"  would  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-ses,  thou  wouldst  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-set,  he  would  have  loved; 

Plur.    am-a-vis-se'-mus,  we  would  have  Uvea, 

am-a-vis-se'-tis,  ye  would  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-sent,  they  would  have  loved 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

Sing,    a'-ma,  or  a-ma'-to,  love  thou, 

a-ma'-to,  let  him  love; 

Plur.   a-ma'-te,  or  am-a-to'-te,  love  ye, 

a-man'-to,  let  them  love. 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Present,  a-ma'-re,  to  love. 

Perfect,  am-a-vis'-se,  to  have  loved. 

Future,    am-a-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to  be  about  to  love 


PARTICIPLES. 

Present,  a'-mans, 
Future,    am-a-tu'-rus, 

loving, 
about  to  love. 

GERUND. 

G.     a-man'-di, 
D.     a-man'-do, 
Ac.    a-man'-dum, 
Ab.    a-man'-do,     _ 

of  loving, 

to  or  for  loving, 

loving, 

by  loving. 

SUPINE. 

Former,   a-ma'-tum, 

to  love 

VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATION,    PASSIVE. 


99 


§156. 


PASSIVE    VOICE, 

PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 


Pres.  Indie.       Pres.  Infin.        Perf.  Part. 


A'-mor, 


a-ma-ri, 


a-ma'-tus. 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 


Present. 


Sing,   a'-mor, 

a-ma'-ris  or  -re, 

a-ma'-tur, 
Plur.  a-ma'-mur, 

a-mam'-i-ni, 

a-man'-tur, 


Imperfect. 


Plur. 


a-ma'-bar, 

am-a-ba'-ris  or  -re, 

am-a-ba'-tur, 

am~a-ba'-mur, 

am-a-bam'-i-ni, 

am-a-ban'-tur, 


I  am  loved, 
thou  art  loved, 
he  is  loved; 
we  are  loved, 
ye  are  loved, 
they  are  loved. 


I  was  loved, 
thou  wast  loved, 
he  was  loved; 
we  were  loved, 
ye  were  loved, 
they  were  loved. 


Future,     shall  or  will  be. 


Plur. 


a-ma'-bor, 

a-mab'-e-ris  or  -re, 

a-mab'-i-tur, 

a-mab'-i-mur, 

am-a-bim'-i-ni, 

am-a-bun'-tur, 


J  shall  be  loved, 
thou  wilt  be  loved, 
he  will  be  loved; 
we  shall  be  loved, 
ye  will  be  loved, 
they  will  be  loved. 


Perfect,     have  been,  or  was. 


Sing,  a-ma'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 
a-ma'-tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 
a-ma'-tus  est  or  fu'-it, 

Plur.  a-ma'-ti  su'-mus  or  fu'-i-mus, 
a-ma'-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
a-ma'-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re, 


I  have  been  loved, 
thou  hast  been  loved, 
he  has  been  loved  ; 
we  have  been  loved, 
ye  have  been  loved, 
they  have  been  laved. 


100  VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATION,    PASSIVE. 

Pluperfect. 

S.  a-ma'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram,  /  had  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras,  thou  hadst  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat,  he  had  been  loved; 

P.  a-ma'-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-mus,  we  had  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis,  ye  had  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  e -rant  or  fu'-e-rant,  they  had  been  loved. 

Future  Perfect,     shall  have  been. 

S.  a-ma'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro,  I  shall  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris,  thou  wilt  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit,  he  will  have  been  loved  ; 

P.  a-ma'-ti  er'4-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus,  we  shall  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  er'-t-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis,  ye  will  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint,  they  will  have  been  loved. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Present,     may  or  can  be. 

Sing,  a'-mer,  J  may  be  loved, 

a-me'-ris  or  -re,  thou  mayst  be  loved, 

a-me'-tur,  he  may  be  loved ; 

Plur.  a-me'-mur,  we  may  be  loved, 

a-mem'-I-ni,  ye  may  be  loved, 

a-men'-tur,  they  may  be  loved. 

Imperfect,     might,  could,  would,  or  should  fa. 

a-ma'-rer,  J  would  be  loved, 

am-a-re'-ris  or  -re,  thou  wouldst  be  love*^ 

am-a-re'-tur,  he  toould  be  loved; 

Plur.  am-a-re'-mur,  we  would  be  loved, 

am-a-rem'-i-ni,  ye  would  be  loved, 

am-a-ren'-tur,  they  would  be  loved. 

Perfect. 

S.  a-ma'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim,  I  may  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-ris,  thou  mayst  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit,  he  may  have  been  loved; 

P.  a-ma'-ti  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus,  we  may  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  si'-tis  or  fu-er'-I-tis,  ye  may  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  sint  or  fu'-e-rint,  they  may  have  been  loved 


VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATION^  PA93IF&, 


101 


Pluperfect,     might,  could,  would,  or  should  have  been, 

S.  a-ma'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem,  I  would  have 

a-ma'-tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses,  thou  wouldst  have 

a-ma'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set,  he  would  have 

P.  a-ma'-ti  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus,  we  would  have 

a-ma'-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis,  ye  would  have 

a-ma'-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent,  they  would  have 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

Sing,   a-ma'-re,  or  a-ma'-tor,  be  thou  loved, 

a-ma'-tor,  let  him  be  loved; 

Plur.  a-mam'-i-ni,  be  ye  loved, 

a-man'-tor,  let  them  be  loved. 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Present,  a-ma'-ri,  to  be  loved. 

Perfect,  a-ma'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se,       to  have  been  loved. 
Future,  a-ma'-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about  to  be  loved. 

PARTICIPLES. 


Perfect,  a-ma'-tus, 
Future,   a-man'-dus, 


loved,  or  having  been  loved, 
to  be  loved. 


SUPINE. 
Latter,  a-ma'-tu, 


to  be  loved. 


Formation  of  the  Tenses. 


From  the  first  root,  am,  are 
derived 


Active. 

Passive 

lnd.  pres. 

amo, 

amor, 

imperf. 

amdbam, 

amdbar. 

•—•/*. 

amdbo, 

nmdbor, 

Subj.  pres. 

amm, 

amer, 

— —  imperf.  amdrem, 

amdrer, 

Imperat. 

ama, 

amdre, 

Inf.  pres. 

amdre, 

amdri, 

Part.  pres. 

fut. 

Gerund. 

amans, 

amandiu 

a.mandi. 

9» 


From  the  second  root, 
amav,  are  derived 


lnd.  per/. 

plup. 

fut.  per/. 

Subj.  per/. 

plup. 

Inf.  per/. 

From  the  third  root, 
Inf.  fut.     amatiirw*  esse 
Part.  fut.  amaturus, 
— -  yerf 

Form.  Sup.  amatuwi. 


Active. 

amavi, 

amav£ram, 

amaviro, 

amav  trim, 

amavissem, 

amavisse, 


From  the  third 

root,  amatu,  are 
derived 
Passive. 

amatu*  sum,  See. 

amatu*  eram,  Sec. 

amatu*  ero,  &c. 

amatu*  si  in,  Sec. 

amatu*  essem,  See. 

amatu*  esse,  See. 

amatum  iri, 

amatu*, 

l.at.  Sup.  amata. 


102 


,  VEttES.-r- • SCOQND    CONJUGATION. 


§  157.     SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


ACTIVE    VOICE.  PASSIVE    VOICE. 

PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind.  Mo'-ne-o, 

Pres.  Inf.  mo-ne'-re, 

Perf  Ind.  mon'-u-i, 

Supine.  mon'-I-tum. 


Pres.  Ind.  mo'-ne-or, 
Pres.  Inf.  mo-ne'-ri, 
Perf.  Part,    mon'-i-tus. 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 


Present. 


I  advise. 

Sing,  mo'-ne-o, 
mo'-nes, 
mo'-net ; 

Plur.  mo-ne'-mus, 
mo-ne'-tis, 
mo'-nent. 


I  was  advising. 

S.  mo-ne'-bam, 
mo-ne'-bas, 
mo-ne'-bat ; 

P.  mon-e-ba'-mus, 
mon-e-ba'-tis, 
mo-ne'-bant. 


/  shall  or  will  advise. 

S.  mo-ne'-bo, 

mo-ne'-bis, 

mo-ne'-bit; 
P.  mo-neb'-I-mus, 

mo-neb'-i-tis, 

mo-ne'-bunt. 


lam  advised. 

Sing,  mo'-ne-or, 

mo-ne'-ris  or  -re, 
mo-ne'-tur ; 

Plur.  mo-ne'-mur, 
mo-nem'-I-ni, 
mo-nen'-tur. 


Imperfect. 


I  was  advised. 

S.  mo-ne'-bar, 

mon-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 
mon-e-bd'-tur ; 

P.  mon-e-ba'-mur, 
mon-e-bam'-I-ni, 
mon-e-bau'-tur. 


Future. 


I  shall  or  will  be  advised* 

S.  mo-ne'-bor, 

mo-neb'-e-ris  or  -re 

mo-neb'-I-tur  ; 
P.  mo-neb'-I-mur, 

mon-e-bim'-i-ni, 

mon-e-bun'-tur. 


VERBS. SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


103 


ACTIVE 


PASSIVE 


Perfect. 


I  advised,  or  have  advised, 
&  mon'-u-i, 
mon-u-is'-ti, 
mon'-u-it ; 
P.  mo-nu'-T-mus, 
mon-u-is'-tis, 
mon-u-e'-runt  or  -re. 


1  was  or  have  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-T-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 
mon'-i-tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 
mon'-i-tus  est  or  fu'-it ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  su'-mus  or  fu'-I-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
mon -i-ti  sunt,  fu-e -runt  or  -re. 


J  had  advised. 

S.  mo-nu'-e-ram, 
mo-nu'-e-ras, 
mo-nu'-e-rat ; 

P.  mon-u-e-ra'-mus, 
mon-u-e-ra'-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rant. 


Pluperfect. 

I  had  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-i-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-c-rat ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-j^'-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis>, 
mon'-i-ti  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant. 


Future  Perfect. 


J  shall  have  advised. 

S.  mo-nu'-e-ro, 
mo-nu'-e-ris, 
mo-nu'-e-rit  ; 

P.  mon-u-er'-i-mus, 
mon-u-er'-I-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rint. 


J  shall  have  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-T-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-rit  or  fu -e-rit ; 

P.  mon'-I-ti  er'-i-mu s  or  fu-er'-i-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
mon -I-ti  e'-runt  or  fu -e-rint. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 


Present. 


I  may  or  can  advise. 

S.  mo'-ne-am, 
mo'-ne-as, 
mo'-ne-at ; 

P.  mo-ne-a'-mus, 
mo-ne-a'-tis, 
mo'-ne-ant 


I  may  or  can  be  advised. 

S.  mo-ne-ar, 

mo-ne-a-ris  or  -re, 

mo-ne-a'-tur ; 
P.  mo-ne-a'-mur, 

mo-ne-am'-I-ni, 

mo-ne-an'-tur. 


104 


VERBS. SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


ACTIVE. 

/  might,  could,  would, 
should  advise, 
8.  mo-ne'-rem, 
mo-ne'-res, 
mo-ne'-ret ; 
P.  mon-e-re'-mus, 
mon-e-re'-tis, 
mo-ne'-rent. 


PASSIVE. 


/  may  have  advised. 

S.  mo-nu'-e-rim, 
mo-nu'-e-ris, 
mo-nu'-e-rit ; 

P.  mon-u-er'-i-mus, 
mon-u-er'-i-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rint. 


Imight,  could,  would,  or 
should  have  advised. 

S.  mon-u-is'-sem, 
mon-u-is'-ses, 
mon-u-is'-set ; 

P.  mon-u-is-se'-mus, 
mon-u-is-se'-tis, 
mon-u-is'-sent. 


Imperfect. 

or         Imight,  could,  would,  or 
should  be  advised. 
S.  mo-ne'-rer, 

mon-e-re  -ris  or  -re, 
mon-e-re'-tur ; 
P.  mon-e-re'-mur,    . 
mon-e-rem'-i-iii, 
mon-e-ren'-tur. 

Perfect. 

I  may  have  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-i-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim, 
mon'-i-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-ris, 
mon'-i-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-i«mus, 
mon'-i-ti  si'-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  sint  or  fu'-e-rint. 

Pluperfect. 
Imight,  could,  would,  or  should 
have  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-i-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
mon'-I-tuw  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
mon'-i-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is -set ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se  -mus, 
mon'-i-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


advise  thou. 
S.  mo'-ne,  or  mo-ne'-to, 

mo-ne'-to ; 
P.  mo-ne'-te,  or  mon-e-to'-te, 

mo-nen'-to. 


be  thou  advised^ 
S   mo-ne'-re,  or  mo-ne'-tor, 

mo-ne'-tor ; 
P.  mo-nem'-I-ni, 

mo-nen'-tor. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  mo-ne'-re,  to  advise. 

Perf.  mon-u-is'-se,  to  have  ad- 
vised. 

Put.  mon-i-tQ'-rus  es'-se,  to  be 
about  to  advise. 


Pres.  mo-ne'-ri,  to  be  advised. 
Perf.  mon'-I-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'- 

se,  to  have  been  advised. 
Fut.    mon'-I-tum    i'-ri,    to    be 

about  to  be  advised 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


105 


ACTIVE 


PARTICIPLES. 


PASSIVE. 


Pres.  mo'-nens,  advising. 
Put.    mon-i-tu'-rus,    about  to 
advise. 


Perf.  mon'-T-tus,  advised. 
Put,    mo-nen'-dus,  to  be  ad- 
vised. 


GERUND. 
G.    mo-nen'-di,  of  advising, 
D.   mo-nen'-do,  &c. 
Ac.  mo-nen-dum, 
Ab.  mo-nen'do.      , 

SUPINES. 
Former,  mon'-i-tum,  to  advise.  \  Latter.  mon'-I-tu,  to  be  advised. 


From  the  first  root,  mon}  are 
derived, 

Passive. 


Active. 

Ind.  pres.        moneo,  moneor, 

<  imperf.    monebam,  monebar, 

fut.          monebo,  monibor, 

Subj.  pres.     moneam,  monear, 

•  imperf.  monirem,  monger, 

lmperat.          mone,  monere, 

Inf.  pres.        monire,  moueri, 

Part.  pres.     monens, 

— —  Jut.  monendus. 

Gerund.  moaendi. 


Formation  of  the  Tenses. 

From  the  second     From  the  third  root, 
root,  monu,  are 
derived, 

Active. 
Ind.  per/.         monut. 


monltu,  are 
derived, 
Passive. 
monltus  sum,  &.C. 
plup.         monueram,  man  flu.?  enun,  dec. 
•  fut.  per/,  monu£ro,      ni  on  ft  us  ero,  &.C. 
Subj.  per/.       monu£rz/n,   man  ft  us  sim,  ice. 
— — —  plup.      monuissem,  monftus  essem,  dee. 
In/,  per/.          monuisse,     monftus  esse,  «Stc. 

From  the  third  root, 
In/./ut.      moni turns  esse,        monltum  iri, 
Part. /id.  moniturus, 

■   per/.  monltu*, 

Form.  Sup.  monltum.        Lot.  Sup.  monRa. 


§158.     THIRD  CONJUGATION. 
PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind.  Re'-go, 

Pres.  Inf.  reg'-e-re, 

Perf.  Ind.  rex'-i, 

Supine.  rec'-tum. 


Pres.  Ind.      re'-gor, 
Pres.  Inf.       re'-gi, 
Perf.  Part,   rec'-tus. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


I  rule. 

Sing,  re'-go, 
re'-gis, 
re'-git ; 

Plur.  reg'-i-mus, 
reg'-i-tis, 
re'-gunt. 


I  am  ruled. 
re'-gor, 
reg'-e-ris  or  -re, 


Plur. 


reg'-T-tur  ; 
reg'-t-mur, 
re-gim'-i-ni, 
re-gun'-tur. 


toe 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


ACTIVE. 

I  was  ruling, 
S.  re-ge'-bam, 

re-ge'-bas, 

re-ge'-bat ; 
P.  reg-e-ba'-mus, 

reg-e-ba'-tis, 

re-ge'-bant. 

/  shall  or  will  rule. 
S.  re'-gam, 

re'-ges, 

re'-get ; 
P.  re-ge'-mus, 

re-ge'-tis, 

re'-gent. 

/  ruled  or  have  ruled, 

S.  rex'-i, 

rex-is'-ti, 

rex'-it ; 
P.  rex'-I-mus, 

rex-is'-tis, 

rex-e'-runt  or  -re. 


1  had  ruled, 
8.  rex'-e-ram, 
rex'-e-ras, 
rex'-e-rat ; 
P.  rex-e-ra'-mus, 
rex-e-ra'-tis, 
rex'-e-rant. 


Imperfect. 


PASSIVE!. 


Future. 


I  was  ruled, 
S.  re-ge'-bar, 

reg-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 

reg-e-ba'-tur ; 
P.  reg-e-ba'-mur, 

reg-e-bam'-i-ni, 

reg-e-ban'-tui. 


I  shall  or  will  be  ruled 
S.  re'-gar, 

re-ge'-ris  or  -re, 
re-ge'-tur ; 
P,  re-ge'-mur, 
re-gem'-i-ni, 
re-gen'-tur. 

Perfect. 

I  was  or  have  been  ruled. 
S.  rec'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 
rec'-tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 
rec'-tus  est  or  fu'-it ; 
P.  rec'-ti  su'-mus  or  fu'-i-mus, 
rec'-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
rec'-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re. 

Pluperfect. 

J  had  been  ruled. 
S.  rec'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
rec'-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
rec'-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat ; 
P.  rec'-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra-mus, 
rec'-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis, 
rec'-ti  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant. 


/  shall  have  ruled, 
S.  rex'-e-ro, 

rex'-e-ris, 

rex'-e-rit ; 
P.  rex-er'-i-mus, 

rex-er'-i-tis, 

rex'-fc-rint. 


Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  have  been  ruled, 

S.  rec'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, 
rec'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris, 
rec'-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 

P.  rec'-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus, 
rec'-ti  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
rec'-ti  e' -runt  or  fu'-e-rint. 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


107 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


I  may  or  can  rule. 
8.  re'-gara, 
re'-gas, 
re'-gat  ; 
P.  re-ga'-mus, 
re-ga'-tis, 
re'-gant. 


I  may  or  can  be  ruled. 
8.  re'-gar, 

re-ga'-ris  or  -re, 

re-ga'-tur ; 
P.  re-ga'-mur, 

re-gam'-i-ni, 

re-gan'-tur. 


Imperfect 

/  might,  could,  would,  or 

should  rule. 

8.  reg'-e-rem, 

reg'-e-res, 

reg'-e-ret ; 

P.  reg-e-re'-mus, 

reg-e-re'-tis, 

reg'-e-rent. 


I  might,  could,  would,  or 

should  be  ruled. 
8.  reg'-e-rer, 

reg-e-re'-ris  or  -re, 

reg-e-re'-tur ; 
P.  reg-e-re'-mur, 

reg-e-rem'-i-ni, 

reg-e-ren'-tur. 


I  may  have  ruled. 

8.  rex'-e-rim, 
rex'-e-ris, 
rex'-e-rit ; 

P.  rex-er'-i-mus, 
rex-er'-i-tis, 
rex'-e-rint. 


Perfect.  » 

I  may  have  been  ruled. 
S.  rec'-tus  sim   or  fu'-e-rim, 
rec'-tus   sis   or  fu'-e-ris, 
rec'-tus   sit   or  fu'-e-rit; 
P.  rec'-ti  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus, 
rec'-ti  si'-tis  or   fu-er'-i-tis, 
rec'-ti  sint   or   fu'-e-rint. 


I  might,  could,  would,  or 
should  have  ruled. 
S.  rex-is'-sem, 

rex-is'-ses, 

rex-is'-set ; 
P.  rex-is-se'-mus, 

rex-is-se'-tis, 

rex-is'-sent. 


Pluperfect. 

I  might,  could,  would,  or  should 
have  been  ruled. 

8.  rec'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
rec  -tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
rec'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set ; 

P.  rec'-ti  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
rec'-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis, 
rec'-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent. 


108  VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION 

ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


rule  thou. 
S.  re'-ge,  or  reg'-I-to, 

reg'-I-to ; 
P.  reg'-T-te,  or  reg-i-to'-te, 

re-gun'-to. 


be  thou  ruled. 

S.  reg'-e-re,  or  reg'-I-to?, 

reg'-T-tor ; 
P.  re-gim'-i-ni, 

re-gun'-tor. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Prts.  reg'-e-re,  to  rule. 
PerJ.  rex-is'-se,  to  have  ruled. 
Fut.    rec-tu'-rus  es'-se,   to   be 
about  to  rule. 


Pres.  re'-gi,  to  be  ruled. 
Perf.  rec'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se, 

to  have  been  ruled. 
Fut.    rec'-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about 

to  be  ruled. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  re'-gens,  ruling.  I  Pcrf.  rec'-tus,  ruled. 

Put.   rec-tu'-rus,  about  to  rule.  I  Put.    re-gen'-dus,  to  be  ruled. 

GERUND. 

G.   re-gen-di,  of  ruling, 
D.  re-gen'-do,  &.c. 
Ac.  re-gen'-dum, 
Ab.  re-gen'-do. 

SUPINES. 
Former,  rec'-tum,  to  rule.      \     Latter,  rec'-tu,  to  be  ruled. 


Formation  of  the  Tenses. 


From  the  first  root,  rcg,  are 


derived, 


Passive. 
,gor, 


Active 

hid.  pres.  rego, 

imperf.  regebam,     regibar, 

——  fut.  regam,        regar, 

Subf.  pres.  regam,        regar, 

imperf.  regtrem,      regZrer, 

Imperat.  rege,  regire, 

Inf.  pres.  regire,        regi, 

Part.  pres.  tegens, 

— —  fut  regendus. 

Gerund  regendi. 


From  the  second  root,  From  the  third 

rex,  are  derived,  root,  rectu,  are 
derived, 
Active.  Passive. 

Ind.  perf.         rexi,  rectus  sum,  See. 

— —  plup.         rexiram,  rectus  eram,  &e. 

—  fut.  perf.   rexiro,  rectus  ero,  &c. 
Subj.  perf.        rexirim,  rectus  sim,  &.c. 

■  plup.       rexissem,  rectus  essem,  Slc. 

Inf.  perf.  xexisse.  rectus  esse,  Ste. 

From  the  third  root, 
Inf.  fut.     recturus  esse,  rectum  iri, 
Part.  fut.  recturus, 

perf.  rectus. 

Form.  Sup.  rectum.  Lot.  Sup.  recta. 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION.  109 

ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

$  159.  PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind.  Ca'-pi-o,  to  take, 
Pres.  Inf.  cap'-e-re, 
Perf.  Ind.  ce  -pi, 
Supine.       cap'-tum. 


Pres.  Ind.     ca'-pi-or,  to  be 

taken, 
Pres.  Inf.     ca'-pi, 
Perf.  Part,  cap -tus. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


S.  ca'-pi-o, 
ca'-pis, 
ca'-pit ; 

P.  cap'-i-mus, 
cap'-i-tis, 
ca'-pi-unt. 


S.  ca'-pi-or, 

cap'-e-ris  or  -re, 

cap'-i-tur ; 
P.  cap'-i-mur, 

ca-pim'-i-ni, 

ca-pi-un'-tur. 


Imperfect. 


S.  ca-pi-e'-bam, 
ca-pi-e'-bas, 
ca-pi-e'-bat ; 

P.  ca-pi-e-ba'-mus, 
ca-pi-e-ba'-tis, 
ca-pi-e'-bant. 


Future. 


S. 


ca'-pi-am, 

ca'-pi-es, 

ca'-pi-et ; 

ca-pi-e'-mus, 

ca-pi-e'-tis, 

ca'-pi-ent. 


S.  ca-pi-e'-bar, 

ca-pi-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 
ca-pi-e-ba'-tur ; 

P.  ca-pi-e-ba'-mur, 
ca-pi-e-bam'-I-ni, 
ca-pi-e-ban'-tur. 


S.  ca'-pi-ar, 

ca-pi-e'-ris  or  -re. 

ca-pi-e'-tur ; 
P  ca-pi-e'-mur, 

ca-pi-em'-i-ni, 

ca-pi-en'-tur. 


The  parts  formed  from  the  second  and  third  roots  being  en- 
tirely regular,  only  a  synopsis  of  them  is  given. 


Perf. 
Plup. 

Fut.  perf.  cep'-e-ro. 
10 


ce-pi. 
cep'-e-ram. 


Perf.         cap'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i. 
Plup.         cap'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e«ram 
Fut.  perf.  cap'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro. 


110 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


S.  ca'-pi-am 
ca'-pi-as, 
ca'-pi-at ; 

P.  ca-pi-a'-mus, 
ca-pi-a'-tis, 
ca'-pi-ant. 


S.  cap'-e-rem, 
cap'-e-res, 
cap^e-ret ; 

P.  cap-e-re'-mus, 
cap-e-re'-tis, 
cap'-e-rent. 


S.  ca'-pi-ar, 

ca-pi-a'-ris  or  -re, 

ca-pi-a'-tur  j 
P.  ca-pi-a'-mur, 

ca-pi-am'-i-ni, 

ca-pi-an'-tur. 


Imperfect. 


S.  cap'-e-rer, 

cap-e-re'-ris  or  -re, 
cap-e-re'-tur  ; 

P.  cap-e-re'-mur, 
cap-e-rem'-i-ni, 
cap-e-ren'-tur. 


Ptrf.  cep'-e-rim. 
Plup.  ce-pis'-sem. 


Perf.  cap'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim. 
Plup.  cap'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is-sem. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


8.  ca'-pe,  or  cap'-T-to, 

cap'-T-to ; 
P.  cap'-I-te,  or  cap-i-to'-te, 

ca-pi-un'-to. 


S.  cap'-e-re,  or  cap'-i-tor, 

cap'-T-tor ; 
P.  ca-pim'-T-ni, 

ca-pi-un'-tor. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  cap'-e-re. 
Perf.  ce-pis'-se. 
Fut.    cap-tu'-rus  es'-se. 


Pres.  ca'-pi. 

Perf.  cap'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'- 

Put.    cap'-tum  i'-ri. 


Pres.  ca'-pi-ens. 
Put.    cap-tu'-rus, 


PARTICIPLES. 

Perf.  cap'-tus. 
Put.    ca-pi-en'-dus. 


GERUND. 
G.  ca-pi-en'-di,  &c.        | 

SUPINES. 
For>ner.  cap-turn.  \  Latter,  cap'-tu 


VERBS. FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

ACTIVE.  PASSIVE 


111 


$160.     FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind.  Au'-di-o, 
Pres.  Inf.  au-di'-re, 
Perf  Ind.  au-di'-vi, 
au-di'-tum. 


Pres.  Ind.  au'-di-or, 
Pres  Inf.  au-di'-ri, 
Perf.  Part,  au-di'-tus. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


I  hear. 

S.  au'-di-o, 
au-dis, 
au'-dit ; 

P.  au-dl'-mus, 
au-di'-tis, 
au'-di-unt. 


Present. 


I  am  heard. 
S.  au'-di-or, 

au-di'-ris  or  -re, 

au-di -tur  ; 
P.  au-di -mur, 

au-di  nr-i-ni, 

au-di-un'-tur. 


I  was  hearing. 


S. 


Imperfect. 


au-di-e'-bam, 

au-di-e'-bas, 

au-di-e'-bat ; 

au-di-e-ba'-mus, 

au-di-e-ba'-tis, 

au-di-e'-bant. 


I  was  heard. 

S.  au-di-e'-bar, 

au-di-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 
au-di-e-ba'-tur ; 

P.  au-di-e-ba'-mur, 
au-di-e-bam'-I-ni, 
au-di-e-ban'-tur. 


Future. 
I  shall  or  will  hear.  I  shall  or  ivill  be  heard 


S.   au-di- am, 
au'-di-es, 
au'-di-et; 

P.  au-di-e'-mus, 
au-di-e'-tis, 
au'-di-ent. 


S.  au'-di-ar, 

au-di-e'-ris  or  -re, 

au-di-e'-tur; 
P.  au-di-e'-mur, 

au-di-em'-t-ni, 

au-di-en'-tur. 


112 


VERBS. FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


ACTIVE. 


J"  heard  or  have  heard. 

8.  au-di'-vi, 

au-di-vis'-ti, 

au-di'-vit ; 
P.  au-div'-T-mus, 

au-di-vis'-tis, 

au-di-ve'-runt  or  -re. 


PASSIVE. 


Perfect. 


1  had  heard. 

S.  au-div'-e-ram, 
au-div'-e-ras, 
au-div'-e-rat ; 

P.  au-di-ve-ra'-mus, 
au-di-ve-ra'-tis, 
au-div-e-rant. 


I  shall  have  heard. 

S.  au-div'-e-ro, 
au-div'-e-ris, 
au-div'-e-rit ; 

P.  au-di-ver'-I-mus, 
au-di-ver'-I-tis, 
au-div'-e-rint. 


I  have  been  or  was  heard 

S.  au-di'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 
au-di'-tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 
au-di'-tus  est  or  fu'-it ; 

P.  au-di'-ti  su'-mus  or  fu'-J-mus, 
au-di'-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
au-di'-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re. 


Pluperfect. 

I  had  been  heard. 

S.   au-di'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
au-di'-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
au-di'-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat ; 

P.  au-di'-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-mus, 
au-dl-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis, 
au-di'-ti  e -rant  or  fu'-e-rant. 

Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  have  been  heard. 

S.  au-di'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, 
au-di'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris, 
au-di  -tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 

P.  au-di'-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-i-musy 
au-di'-ti  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
au-di'-ti  e'-runtor  fu'-e-rint. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
Present. 


1  may  or  can  hear. 

S.   au'-di-am, 
au'-di-as, 
au'-di-at ; 

P.  au-di-a'-mus, 
au-di-a'-tis, 
au'-di-ant. 


I  may  or  can  be  heard. 
S.   au'-di-ar, 

au-di-a'-ris  or  -re, 

au-di-a'-tur ; 
P.  au-di-a'-mur, 

au-di-am'-i-ni, 

au-di-an'-tur. 


VERBS. FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


113 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE 


Imperfect. 


J  might,  could,  would,  or 
should  hear. 
S.  au-dr-rem, 
au-di'-res, 
au-di'-ret ; 
P.  au-di-re'-mus, 
au-di-re'-tis, 
au-dF-rent. 


might,   could,   would,  or 
should  be  heard. 


S. 


au-dl'-rer, 

au-di-re'-ris  or  • 

au-di-re'-tur; 

au-di-re'-mur, 

au-di-rem'-i-ni, 

au-di-ren'-tur. 


re, 


I  may  have  heard. 

8.  au-div'-e-rim, 
au-di  v'-e-ris, 
au-div'-e-rit  ; 

P.  au-di-ver'-i-mus, 
au-di-ver'-i-tis, 
au-div'-e-rint. 


Perfect. 

I  may  have  been  heard. 

S.  au-di'-tus  sim   or   fu'-e-rim, 
au-di'-tus   sis    or  fu'-e-ris, 
au-di'-tus   sit   or  fu'-e-rit ; 

P.  au-di'-ti  si'-mus   or  fu-er'-t-mus, 
au-di'-ti  si'-tis   or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
au-dl'-ti    sint   or  fu'-e-rint. 


1  might,  could,  would, 
or  should  have  heard. 
S.  au-di-vis'-sem, 
au-di-vis'-ses, 
au-di-vis'-set ; 
P,  au-di-vis-se'-mus, 
au-di-vis-se'-tis, 
au-di-vis'-sent. 


Pluperfect. 

Imight,  could,  would,  or  should 
have  been  heard. 
8.  au-di -tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
au-di'-tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
au-di'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set ; 
P.  au-dl'-ti  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
au-di'-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis, 
au-dl'-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


hear  thou. 
8.  au'-rti,  or  au-di'-to, 

au-di'-to ; 
P.  au-dl'-te,  or  au-di-to'-tc, 
au-di-un'-to. 
10  ♦ 


be  thou  heard. 
8.  au-di'-re,  or  au-di'-tor, 

au-di'-tor ; 
P.  au-di m'-T-ni, 

au-di-un'-tor. 


U4  VERBS. FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 


Pres.  au-di'-re,  to  hear. 
Perf.  au-di-vis'-se,     to     have 

heard. 
Put.    au-di-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to  be 

about  to  hear. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  au-di'-ri,  to  be  heard. 
Perf.  au-dl'-tus  es'-se  or  fu  is'- 

se,  to  have  been  heard. 
Put.    au-di'-tum  i'-ri,     to     be 

about  to  be  hoard. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  au'-di-ens,  hearing.  \Perf  au-di'-tus,  heard. 

Put.  au-di-tu'-rus,  about  tohear.iPut.    au-di-en'-dus,  to  be  heard. 


GERUND. 

G.    au-di-en'-di,  of  hearing, 
D.    au-di-en'-do,  &c. 
Ac.  au-di-en'-dum, 
Ab.  au-di-en'-do, 

SUPINES. 
Former,  au-di'-tum,  to  hear.   \  Latter,  au-dl'-tu,  to  be  heard. 


Formation  of  the  Tenses. 


From  the  first  root,  aud,  are 
derived, 


lnd.  pres. 
—  imperf. 

fut. 

Subj.  pres. 
—  imperf. 
Imperat. 
Inf.  pres. 
Part.  pres. 

fut. 

Gerund. 


Active. 

Passive. 

audio, 

audior, 

audieb,am 

,  audiibar, 

audiam, 

auttiar, 

auch'am, 

audiar, 

audirem, 

au  direr, 

audi, 

audzre, 

audire, 

audirz, 

auch'ms, 

audiendus 

audiendi. 


From  the  second  root, 
audiv,  are  derived, 

Active, 
lnd.  perf.         audivz, 

plup.         audi  v£ram, 

— —  fut.  perf.  audi  ve~ro, 
SubJ.  perf.       audiv^rim, 

plup.       audWissem, 

Inf.  perf.  audivi**e. 

From  the  third  root, 
Inf. fut.       auditurw*  esse, 
Part.  fut.    audi  tu rus, 

perf. 

Form.  Sup.  auditum. 


From   tlie    third 
root,  auditu,  are 

derived, 

Passive. 
auditu*  sum,  &c. 
auditu*  eram,  &c. 
auditu*  ero,  Sec. 
auditu*  sim,  &c. 
auditu*  essem,  &c. 
auditu*  esse,  &  c.   f 

,  auditum  iri, 

auditu*. 
Lot.  Sup.  audita. 


DEPONENT  VERBS. 

§  161.  Deponent  verbs  are  conjugated  like  the  passive 
voice,  and  have  also  all  the  participles  and  participial  forma- 
tions of  the  active  voice.     Neuter  deponent  verbs,  however, 


DEPONENT    VERBS.  115 

want  the  future  passive  participle,  except  that  the  neuter  in 
dum  is  sometimes  used  impersonally. 

The  following  is  an  example  of  an  active  deponent  verb  of 
the  first  conjugation  : — 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 
Mi'-ror,  mi-ra'-ri,  mi-ra'-tus,  to  admire, 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  mi'-ror,  mi-ra'-ris,  &c.  J  admire,  &c. 

Imperf.  mi-ra'-bar,  &c.  I  was  admiring, 

Fut.  mi-ra'-bor,  J  shall  admire. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i,  J  have  admired. 

Plup.  mi-ra'-tus  e -ram  or  fu'-e-ram,  I had  admired. 

Put.  perf.  mi-ra'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro,        I  shall  have  admired, 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.      mi'-rer,  mi-re'-ris,  &c.  I  may  admire,  &.c. 

Imperf.  mi-ra'-rer,  /  would  admire. 

Perf.      mi-ra'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim,  /  may  have  admired. 

Plup,     mi-ra'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem,  I  would  have  admired, 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD, 
mi-ra'-re,  or  mi-ra'-tor,  admire  thou,  &c. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  mi-ra'-ri,  to  admire. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tus  esse  or  fu-is'-se,  to  have  admired. 

Put.  act.  mir-a-tii  -rus  es'-se,  _  to  be  about  to  admire. 

Put.  pass,  mi-ra'-tum  i'-ri,       ~  to  be  about  to  be  admired. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  mi'-rans,  admiring. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tus,  having  admired. 

Put.  act.  mir-a-tu'-rus,  about  to  admire. 

Fut.  pass,  mi-ran'-dus,  to  be  admired. 

GERUND. 
G.  mi-ran'-di,  of  admiring,  &c. 

SUPINES. 
Former,  mi-ra'-tum,  to  admire.  — Latter,  mi-ra'-tu,  to  be  admired 


116        verbs. remarks  on  the  conjugations. 

Remarks  on  the  Conjugations. 
Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  First  Root, 

V  *  62«  1.  A  few  words  in  the  present  subjunctive  of  the  first  ana 
third  conjugations,  in  the  earlier  writers,  end  in  im;  as,  edim  for  cdam, 
duim  for  dem  (from  an  old  form  duo),  creduim  and  perduim  for  credam  and 
perdum.  This  was  retained  as  the  regular  form  in  sirn  and  velim,  from 
sum  and  voLo,  and  in  their  compounds. 

2.  The  imperfect  indicative  in  the  fourth  conjugation,  sometimes,  espe 
cially  in  the  more  ancient  writers,  ends  in  ibam  and  ibar,  for  iebam  and 
itbur,  and  the  future  in  ibo  and  ibor,  for  iam  and  iar  ;  as,  vestlbam,  larglbar, 
for  vestiebam,  largiebar  ;  scibo,  opperlbor,  for  sciam,  opperiur. 

3.  The  termination  re,  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  passive 
voice,  is  rare  in  the  present,  but  common  in  the  other  simple  tenses. 

4.  The  imperatives  of  dico,  duo,  facio,  and  fe.ro,  are  usually  written  die, 
due,  fac,  and  fer  ;  in  like  manner  their  compounds,  except  those  com- 
pounds of  facio  which  change  a  into  i.     Scio  has  not  sci,  but  scito. 

5.  In  the  second  person  of  the  imperative  passive,  an  ancient  form  in 
Triluo  in  the  singular,  and  minor  in  the  plural,  is  very  rarely  found ;  as, 
f amino  for  fare,  progredimlnor  for  progredimlni. 

6.  The  syllable  er  was  often  addec  to  the  present  infinitive  passive  by 
the  early  poets ;  as,  amarier  for  amdri,  dicier  for  did. 

Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  Second  Root. 

7.  When  the  second  root  ends  in  v,  a  contraction  often  occurs  in  the 
tenses  formed  from  it,  by  omitting  v,  with  the  first  vowel  of  the  termina- 
tion, when  followed,  in  the  fourth  conjugation,  by  s,  and  in  the  other 
conjugations,  by  s  or  r;  as,  audissem  for  audivissem,  amdsti  for  amav'xsti, 
impldrunt  for  impleverunt,  ndram  and  ndsse  for  nov&ram  and  novisse. 

When  the  second  root  ends  in  iv,  v  alone  is  often  omitted ;  as,  audiSro 
for  audivlro  ;  audiisse  for  audivisse. 

When  this  root  ends  in  s  or  x,  the  syllables  is,  iss,  and  sis,  are 
sometimes  omitted  in  the  termination  of  tenses  derived  from  it ;  as,  evasti 
for  evasisti,  extinxti  for  extinxisti,  divisse  for  divisisse;  extinxem  for  extinx- 
issem,  surrexe  for  surrexisse  ;  accestis  for  accessistis,  justi  for  jussisti.  So 
faxem  for  (facsissem,)  fecissem. 

8.  In  the  third  person  plural  of  the  perfect  indicative  active,  the  form  in 
Ire  is  less  common  than  that  in  ervnt,  especially  in  prose. 

9.  Ancient  forms  of  a  future  perfect  in  so,  and  a  perfect  subjunctive  in 
sim,  sometimes  occur.  They  may,  in  general,  be  formed  by  adding  these 
terminations  to  the  second  root  of  the  verb  ;  as,  recepso,  emissim.  But 
when  the  root  ends  in  x,  and  frequently  when  it  ends  in  s,  only  o  and  im 
are  added ;  as,  jusso,  dixis.  V,  at  the  end  of  the  root,  is  changed  into  s  ; 
as,  levasso,  locassim.  U,  at  the  end  of  the  root,  is  changed  into  esso  ;  as, 
habesso.  Sometimes  the  vowel  of  the  present  is  retained  in  these  forms, 
though  changed  in  the  other  parts  derived  from  the  second  root;  as, 
capso,  faxo  (facso),faxim  {facsim). 

Note.  Faxo  and  faxim  sometimes  have  the  meaning  of  the  future 
tense. 


VERBS. REMARKS  ON  THE  CONJUGATIONS.     117 

10.  A  future  infinitive  in  sire,  is  also  sometimes  found,  which  is  formed 
by  adding  that  termination  to  the  second  root,  changing,  as  before,  v  into  s; 
as,  impetrassire  for  impetraturus  esse. 

Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  Third  Root. 

11.  The  supine  in  um,  though  called  one  of  the  principal  parts  of  the 
verb,  belongs  in  fact  to  very  few  verbs,  the  whole  number  which  have  su- 
pines not  amounting  to  three  hundred.  The  part  called  in  dictionaries  the 
supine  in  um  must  therefore,  in  most  cases,  be  considered  as  the  neuter 
gender  of  the  perfect  participle. 

12.  In  the  compound  tenses  of  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  moods, 
the  participle  is  always  in  the  nominative  case,  but  it  is  used  in  both  num. 
bers,  and  in  all  genders,  to  correspond  with  the  number  and  gender  of  the 
subject  of  the  verb  ;  as,  amdtus,  -a,  -um,  est ;  amdti,  -«,  -a,  sunt,  &c. 

Fui,  fugram,  fuirim,  and  fuissemf  are  seldom  used  in  the  compound 
tenses  of  deponent  verbs,  and  not  so  often  as  sum,  &c.,  in  those  of  other 
verbs,  but  they  express  more  emphatically  than  the  latter  the  completion 
of  the  action. 

13.  The  participles  in  the  perfect  and  future  infinitive,  are  used  only  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative-,  but  in  all  genders  and  in  both  numbers ;  as, 
amdtus,  -a,  -um,  esse  or  fuisse;  amdtum,  -am,  -um,  esse  or  fuisse  ;  amdti,  -a, 
-a,  esse  or  fuisse;  amdtos,  -as,  -a,  esse  or  fuisse;  and  so  of  the  others. 

But  these  participles  in  this  combination  with  esse,  are  sometimes  used 
as  indeclinable ;  as,  cohortes  ad  me  missum  facias.  Cic. 


Periphrastic  Conjugations. 

14.  The  participle  in  rus,  joined  to  the  tenses  of  the  verb  sum, 
denotes  intention,  or  being  upon  the  point  of  doing  something. 
Hence  arises  what  is  called  the  periphrastic  conjugation. 

INDICATIVE. 

amaturus  sum,  I  am  about  to  love. 

amaturus  erain,  /  was  about  to  love. 

amaturus  ero,  /  shall  be  about  to  love. 

amaturus  fui,  J  was  or  have  been  about  to  lave, 

amaturus  fueram,  I  had  been  about  to  love. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

amaturus  sim,  I  may  be  about  to  love. 

amaturus  essem,  I  would  be  about  to  love. 

amaturus  fuerim,  J  may  have  been  about  to  love. 

amaturus  fuissem,  I  would  have  been  about  to  love. 

INFINITIVE. 

amaturus  esse,  to  be  about  to  love. 

amaturus  fuisse,        to  have  been  about  to  love 


118  VERBS. REMARKS    ON    THE    CONJUGATIONS. 

FuZro  is  not  found  joined  with  the  participle  in  rus. 

15.  The  participle  in  dus,  with  the  verb  sum,  expresses  neces- 
sity or  propriety ;  as,  amandus  sum,  I  must  be  loved,  or  deserve 
to  be  loved.  With  the  various  moods  and  tenses  of  sum,  it  forms 
a  second  periphrastic  conjugation ; — thus  : 


amandus  sum, 
amandus  eram, 
amandus  ero, 
amandus  fui, 
amandus  fueram, 
amandus  fuero. 


amandus  sim, 
amandus  essem, 
amandus  fuerim, 
amandus  fuissem, 
amandus  esse, 
amandus  fuisse. 


Participles. 


16.  Neuter  verbs,  as  they  want  the  passive  voice,  have  usually  only  the 
participles  of  the  active.  Some  of  them,  however,  have  perfect  participles, 
of  which  a  part  are  to  be  translated  passively,  others  by  past  participles  of 
English  neuter  verbs.  Such  are  adultus,  cessdtus,  clamdtus,  coalitus ,  con- 
cretus,  defectus,  dejlagrdtus,  emersus,  errdtus,  interitus,  obltus,  occdsus,  pla- 
cXtus,  redunddtus,  regndtus,  requietus,  suddtus,  suetus,  triumphdtus,  ulutdtus, 
vigildtus. 

The  following  perfect  participles,  from  verbs  which  are  sometimes  active, 
are  also  translated  by  active  participles  : — cozndtus,  having  supped  ;  potus 
having  drunk ;  pransus,  having  dined ;  and  sometimes  jurdtus,  having 
sworn. 

Some  neuter  verbs,  also,  have  future  passive  participles  ;  as,  dormiendus, 
errandus,  regnandus,  vigilandus,  &c. 

Note.  Most  passive  participles  of  neuter  verbs  are  indicated  in  the  lists 
which  follow. 

For  the  active  meaning  of  osus  and  its  compounds,  see  §  183,  1. 

17.  The  perfect  participles  of  some  deponent  verbs  have  both  an  active 
and  a  passive  sense  ;  as,  adeptus  libertdtem,  having  obtained  liberty,  or 
adeptd  libertdte,  liberty  having  been  obtained. 

So  abomindtus,  comitdtus,  commentdtus,  complexus,  confessus,  contestdtus, 
dctestdtus,  digndtus,  dimensus,  emensus,  ementitus,  emeritus,  expertus,  exse- 
crdtus,  interpretdtus,  largitus,  mackindtus,  meditdtus,  meredtus,  metdtus, 
oblitus,  orsus,  pactus,  partitus,  perfunctus,  pollicltus,  testdtus,  venerdtus, 
ultus. 

IS.  The  participles  of  neuter  passive  verbs  have  the  signification  of  the 
active  voice  ;  as,  gavlsus,  having  rejoiced.     (See  in  lists.) 

But  ausus  is  used  both  in  an  active  and  passive  sense  ;  as,  ausi  omnes 
immdne  nefas,  ausoque  potlti.  Virg. 

19.  The  genitive  plural  of  participles  in  rus  is  not  used,  except  that  of 
futurus. 

20.  In  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations,  the  future  passive  participle 
Bometimes  ends  in  undus,  especially  when  i  precedes.  Potior  has  usually 
potiundvs.  In  these  conjugations  the  gerund  also  has  sometimes  undi,  &c. 

21.  Many  present  and  perfect  participles  are  compounded  with  in,  sig- 


VERBS. RULES  OF  CONJUGATION.         119 

nifying  not,  whose  verbs  do  not  admit  of  such  composition  ;  they  thus  be- 
come adjectives  ;  as,  insciens,  ignorant ;  irnpardtus,  unprepared. 

22.  Participles,  when  they  do  not  express  distinctions  of  time,  become 
adjectives,  and  as  such  are  compared  ;  as,  amans,  loving  ;  amantwr,  avian 
tisslmus.  In  some  instances,  they  become  substantives ;  as,  prcefectus,  a 
commander. 

Note.  Many  words  derived  from  substantives,  with  the  terminations 
of  participles,  dtus,  itus,  and  utus,  are  yet  adjectives ;  as,  alatus,  winged  • 
turrltus,  turreted,  &c.     See  §  128,  7. 


General  Rules  of  Conjugation. 

§  163.  1.  Verbs  which  have  a  in  the  first  root  have  it 
also  in  the  third,  though  it  be  changed  in  the  second  ;  as,  fa- 
ao,  factum  ;  habeo,  habttum. 

2.  The  connecting  vowel  is  often  omitted  in  the  second  root, 
and  in  such  cases,  if  v  follows,  it  is  changed  into  u.  This 
happens  in  most  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation. 

Remark.  Some  verbs  prefix  to  the  second  root  their  initial 
consonant,  with  the  vowel  which  follows  it,  or  with  e ;  as,  curro, 
cucurri ;  fallo,fefelli ;  cano,  cecini ;  parco,  peperci.  This  prefix 
is  called  a  reduplication.  The  verbs  in  which  it  is  found  will 
be  specified  hereafter.     See  §§  165, 168  and  171,  Exc.  1,  (b.) 

3.  Verbs  which  want  the  second  root  want  also  the  third. 

4.  Compound  verbs  form  their  second  and  third  roots  like- the 
simple  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived ;  as,  audio,  audivi, 
audiium;   exaudio,  exaudivi,  exauditum. 

Some  compound  verbs,  however,  are  defective,  whose  simples  are  com- 
plete, and  some  are  complete,  whose  simples  are  defective. 

Exc.  1.  Compound  verbs  omit  the  reduplication;  but  the 
compounds  of  do,  sto,  disco,  posco,  and  some  of  those  of  curro, 
retain  it 

Exc.  2.  Verbs  which,  in  composition,  change  a  into  e  in  the 
first  root,  (see  §  189,  2,)  retain  e  in  the  second  and  third  roots 
of  the  compound ;  as,  scando,  scandi,  scansum ;  descendo  de- 
scendi,  descensum. 

Exc.  3.  When  a,  a,  or  e,  in  the  first  root  of  the  simple  verb, 
is  changed  in  the  compound  into  i,  the  same  is  retained  in  the 
second  and  third  roots,  in  case  the  third  root  of  the  simple  is  a 
trisyllable;  as,  habco,  habui,  habttum  ;  prohibeo, prohibui, pro- 
hibitum. 

But  if  the  third  root  is  a  dissyllable,  the  second  root  of  the 
compound  has  usually  the  same  vowel  as  that  of  the  simple, 


120 


VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.     [1  CONJ. 


but  sometimes  changes  e  into  i,  and  the  third  root  has  e ;  as, 
facio,  feci,  factum  ;  conficio,  confeci,  confectum  ;  tcneo,  tenui, 
tent  urn  ;   retineo,  retinui,  retentum. 

Note.     The  compounds  of  cado,  ago,  frango,  pango,  and  tango,  retain 
a,  and  those  of  salio  retain  u,  in  the  third  root. 

Exc.  4.  Compounds  of  pario,  and  some  of  do  and  cubo,  are  of  different 
conjugations  from  their  simple  verbs. 

A  few  other  exceptions  will  be  noticed  in  the  following  lists. 


Formation  of  Second  and  Third  Roots. 


FIRST   CONJUGATION. 

§  164.  In  regular  verbs  of  this  conjugation,  the  second 
root  ends  in  dv,  and  the  third  in  dtu;  as,  amo,  amavz,  amatum. 
The  following  list  contains  such  regular  verbs  of  this  conjuga- 
tion as  are  of  most  frequent  occurrence. 

Note.  In  this  and  the  subsequent  lists,  those  verbs  which  are  marked 
*  are  said  to  have  no  perfect  participle ;  those  marked  t  to  have  no  pres- 
ent participle.  A  dash  ( — )  after  the  present,  denotes  that  there  is  no  sec- 
ond root.  The  participles  in  rus  and  dus,  and  the  supines  in  um  and  u 
which  are  in  use,  are  indicated  respectively  by  the  letters  v.,  d.,  m.,  and  a. 
Ahundo,  for  example,  has  no  perfect  participle,  no  supine,  no  participle  in 
dus  ;  but  it  has  a  present  participle,  and  a  participle  in  rus. 

In  the  lists  of  irregular  verbs,  those  compounds  only  are  given,  whose 
conjugation  differs  from  that  of  their  simples. 

When  p.  is  subjoined  to  a  deponent  verb,  it  denotes  that  some  of  the 
parts  which  have  commonly  an  active  meaning,  are  used  either  actively  and 
passively,  or  passively  alone.  Such  verbs  are  by  some  grammarians  call- 
ed common. 


*Abundo,  r.  to  overflow. 

Accuso,  m.  r.  d.  to  ac- 
cuse. 

t  Adumbro,  to  delineate. 

iEdiflco.  r.  d.  to  build. 

TEquo,  r.  d.  to  level. 

iEstlmo,  r.  d.  to  va7ue. 

*Ambulo,m.  d.  to  walk. 

Amo,  r.  d.  to  love. 

tAmplio,  d.  to  enlarge. 

Appello,  d.  to  call. 

Apto,  d.  to  fit. 

Aro,  r.  d.  to  plough. 

*tAusculto,  to  listen. 

"tAutumo,  to  suppose. 

tBasio,  — , d.  to  kiss. 

*Bello,  m.  r.  d.  to  wage 
war. 

tBeo,  to  bless. 

"*Boo,  to  bellow. 


tBrevio,  to  shorten. 

f  Ca;co,  to  blind. 

tCaelo,  to  carve. 

fCalceo,  d.  to  shoe. 

*tCalcitro,  to  kick. 

Canto,  m.  to  sing. 

Capto,  m.  r.  d.  tosieze. 

tCastlgo,  m.  d.to  chas- 
tise. 

Celebro,  d.  to  celebrate. 

Celo,  d.  to  conceal. 

Cesso,  d.  to  cease. 

Certo,  r.  d.  to  strive. 

Clamo,  to  shout. 

CogTto,  d.  to  think. 

Comparo,  d.  to  compare. 

Concilio,  r.  d.  to  recon- 
cile. 

Considero,  r.  d.  to  con- 
sider. 


Cremo,  d.  to  burn. 
concremo,  r. 

tCreo,  r.  d.  to  create. 

Crucio,  d.  to  torment. 

Culpo,  r.  d.  to  blame. 

tCuneo,  d.  to  wedge. 

Curo,  r.  d.  to  care. 

Damno,  m.  r.  d.  to  con- 
demn. 

Decoro,  d.  to  adorn. 

*tDelineo,  to  delineate. 

Desidero,    r.  d.  to  de- 
sire. 

Destino,  d.  to  design. 

Dico,  m.  r.  d.  to  dedi 
cate. 

Dicto,  to  dictate. 

tDolo,  to  hew. 

Dono,  r.  d.  to  bestow. 

Dupllco,  r.  d.  to  double 


I  CONJ.]        VERBS. -^SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


121 


Duro,  r.  to  harden. 

1  Effigio,  to  portray. 

Equlto,  to  ride. 

tEnucleo,  to  explain. 

Erro,  to  wander. 

ExistimOjU.r.d.  to  think. 

Exploro,  m.  d.  to  search. 

Exulo,  m.  r.  to  be  ban- 
ished. 

Fabrico,  d.  to  frame. 

tFatlgo,  r.  d.  to  weary. 

Festlno,  r.  to  hasten. 

Firmo,r.d.£o  strengthen. 

Flagito,m.d.  to  demand. 

*Flagro,  r.  to  be  on  fire. 
conflagro,  r. 
deflagro. 

Flo,  d.  to  blow. 

Formo,  r.  d.  to  form. 

Foro,  d.  to  bore. 

tFraeno,  to  bridle. 

tFraudo,  d.  to  defraud. 

tFrio,  — ,  to  crumble. 

Fugo,  r.  d.  to   put  to 
flight. 

tFundo,  r.  to  found. 

tFurio,  — ,  to  madden. 

t  Galeo,  — ,  to  put  on  a 
helmet. 

Gesto,  d.  to  bear. 

Glacio,  — ,  to  congeal. 

Gravo,    d.    to    weigh 
down. 

Gusto,  d.  to  taste. 

Hablto,  m.  d.  to  dwell. 

*Halo,  — ,  to  breathe. 

Hiemo,  m.  to  winter. 

*Hio,  d.  to  gape. 

tHumo,  r.  d.  to  bury. 

Jacto,  r.  d.  to  throw. 

Ignoro,  r.  d.  to  be  igno- 
rant. 

ImpSro,  r.  d.   to   com- 
mand. 

tlmpetro,  r.  d.  to  obtain. 

Inchoo,  r.  to  begin. 

tlndago,  r.  d.  to   trace 
out. 

Indico,  m.  r.  d.  to  show. 

tlnebrio,  — ,  to  inebri- 
ate. 

Initio,  to  initiate. 

InquTno,  to  pollute. 

lnstauro,  d.  to  renew. 

Intro,  r.  d.  to  enter. 

Invito,  d.  to  invite. 

Irrlto,  r.  d.  to  irritate. 
11 


Itero,  u.  d.  to  do  again 
Judico,  r.  d.  to  judge. 
Jugo,  d.  to  couple. 
Jugulo,  m.  d.  to  butcher. 
Juro,  d.  to  swear. 
Labcro,  r.  d.  to  labor. 
Lacero,  d.  to  tear. 
*Lacto,  to  suckle. 
tLanio,  d.  to  butcher. 
Latro,  to  bark. 
Laudo,  r.  d.  to  praise. 
Laxo,  d.  to  loose. 
tLego,  to  depute. 
Levo,  r.  d.  to  lighten. 
LibSro,  r.  d.  to  free. 
Libo,  d.  to  pour  out. 
Ligo,  to  bind. 
tLiquo,  d.  to  melt. 
Lito,  to  appease. 
Loco,  r.  d.  to  place. 
Lustro,  d.  to  survey. 
Luxurio,  to  abound. 
Macto,  d.  to  slay. 
Maculo,  to  stain. 
Mando,r.d.*o  command. 
Manduco,  to  chew. 
*Mano,  to  flow. 
Maturo,  d.  to  ripen. 
Memoro,  u.  d.  to  tell. 
*Meo,  to  go. 
*Migro,u.  r.  d.  to  depart. 
*MilIto,  m.  r.  to  serve  in 

war. 
tMinio,  d.  to  paint  red. 
Ministro,  d.  to  serve. 
Mitlgo,  d.  to  pacify. 
Monstro,  r.  to  show. 

tdemonstro,  d. 
Muto,  r.  d.  to  change. 
Narro,  r.  d.  to  tell. 
Nato,  m.  r.  to  swim. 
tNavigo,  r.  d.  to  sail. 
Navo,  r.  d.  to  perform. 
*Nauseo,  to  loathe. 
Nego,  m.  r.  d.  to  deny. 
*No,  to  sioim. 
Nomino,  r.  d.  to  name. 
Noto,  d.  to  mark. 
Novo,  r.  d.  to  renew. 
Nudo,  d.  to  make  bare. 
Nuncupo,  r.  d.  to  name. 
Nuntio,  m.  r.  to  tell. 

renuntio,  d. 
*Nuto,  r.  to  nod. 
Obsecro,  r.  d.  to  beseech 
Obtrunco,  r.  to  kill. 
Ongro,  r.  d.  to  load 


Opto,  d.  to  wish. 

tOrbo,  r.  to  deprive. 

Orno,  r.  d.  to  adorn 

Oro,  m.  r.  d.  to  beg. 

Paco,  d.  to  subdue. 

Paro,  r.  d.  to  prepare. 

Patro,  r.  d.  to  perform. 

*Pecco,  r.  d.  to  sin. 

tPio,  d.  to  propitiate. 

Placo,  r.  d.  to  appease. 

Ploro,  m.  d.  to  bewail. 

Porto,  u.  r.  d.  to  carry 

Postulo,  m.  r.  d.  to  de- 
mand. 

Privo,  d.  to  deprive. 

Probo,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  ap- 
prove. 
comprobo,  m. 

Profllgo,  d.  to  rout. 

Propero,  d.  to  hasten. 

*tPropIno,  to  drink  to. 

Propitio,  d.  to  appease. 

Pugno,  r.  d.  to  fight. 

Pulso,  d.  to  beat. 

Purgo,  u.r.  d.  to  cleanse. 

Puto,  d.  to  think. 

Quasso,  dr  to  shake. 

Radio,  to  emit  rays. 

Rapto,  d.  to  drag. 

Recupero,  m.  r.  d.  to 
recover. 

RecQso,  r.  d.  to  refuse 

Redundo,  to  overflow. 

Regno,  r.  d.  to  rule. 

tRepudio,  r.  d.  to  reject. 

Resgro,  d.  to  unlock. 

*tRetalio,  — ,  to  retali- 
ate. 

Rigo,  to  water. 

Rogo,  m.  r.  d.  to  ask. 

Roto,  to  whirl. 

Sacrifico,m.to  sacrifice 

Sacro,  d.  to  consecrate. 

tSaglno,  d.  to  fatten. 

Salto,  r.  to  dance. 

Salato,  m.  r.  d.  to  saluU 

Sano,  r.  d.  to  heal. 

Satio,  to  satiate. 

tSaturo,  to  fill. 

Saucio,  d.  to  wound. 

*Secundo,  to  prosper. 

Sedo,  m.  d.  to  allay. 

Servo,  r.  d.  to  keep. 

*tSibilo,  to  hiss 

Sicco,  d.  to  dry. 

Signo,  r.  d.  to  mark  out. 
assigno,  m. 


122 


VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.   fl  CONJ. 


Simulo,  r.  d.  to  pretend. 

Socio,  d.  to  associate. 

*Somnio,  to  dream. 

Specto,  m.  r.  d.  to  be- 
hold. 

Spero,  r.  d.  to  hope. 

*Spiro,  to  breathe. 
consplro. 
exspiro,  r. 
susplro,  d. 

Spolio,  ni.  d.  to  rob. 

Spumo,  to  foam. 

Stillo,  to  drop. 

Stimulo,  to  goad. 

Stipo,  to  stuff. 

Sudo,  to  sweat. 

Surlbco,  to  strangle. 

Sugillo,  d.  to  taunt. 

Supgro,  r.  d.   to  over- 
come. 

Suppedito,  to  afford. 


*Supplico,  m.  to   sup- 
plicate. 

*Susurro,  to  whisper. 

Tardo,  to  delay. 

Taxo,  d.  to  rate. 

Temgro,  d.  to  defile. 

Tempero,  r.  d.  to  tem- 
per. 
obtempgro,  r.  to  obey. 

Tento,  m.  r.  d.  to  try. 

Terebro,  to  bore. 

Termino,  r.  d.  to  limit. 

Titdbo,  to  stagger. 

Tolero,  u.  r.  d.  to  bear. 

Tracto,  u.  d.  to  handle. 

*tTripudio,  to  dance. 

Triumpho,    r.     to    tri- 
umph. 

Trucldo,  r.  d.  to  kill. 

Turbo,  d.  to  disturb. 

*Vaco,  to  be  at  leisure. 


*Vapulo,  m.    d.  to   be 

beaten. 
Vario,  to  diversify. 
Vasto,  d.  to  lay  waste 
Vellico,  to  pluck. 
Verbgro,  r.  d.  to  beat. 
* Vestlgo,  to  search  for 
Vexo,  d.  to  tease. 
Vibro,  d.  to  brandish. 
Vigllo,  d.  to  watch. 
Violo,  m.  r.  d.  to  vii 

late. 
Vitio,  d.  to  vitiate. 
Vito,  u.  d.  to  shun. 
Ululo,  to  hoiol. 
Umbro,  r.  to  shade. 
Voco,  r.  d.  to  call. 
*Volo,  to  fly. 
Voro,  r.  to  devour. 
Vulgo,  r.  d.  to  publish. 
Vulngro,  d.  to  wound. 


§  165.     The  following  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  are 
irregular  or  defective  in  their  second  and  third  roots  : — 

"Crepo,  crepui,  to  make  a  noise.  dimlco,  -avi  or  -ui,  r.  (-atdrus). 

*discrgpo,  -ui  or  -avi.  *emico,  -ui,  r.  (-aturus). 

increpo,  -ui  or  -avi,  -itum.  or  atura,      *intermico,  — . 

*fpercrgpo, — .  *promico, — ,  d. 

*trecrgpo,  — .  Neco,  necavi  or  necui,  necatum,  r.  d. 

*Cubo,  cubui,  cubltum  (sup.)}  to  re-  to  kill. 


dine. 

incubo,  -ui  or  -avi,  d. 
Those  compounds  of  cubo  which  take 
ra  before  b,  are  of  the  third  con- 
jugation. 
Do,  dedi,  datum,  m.  r.  d.  to  give. 
So  circumdo,  pessumdo,  satisdo, 
and  venumdo ;  the  other  com- 
pounds of  do  are  of  the  third 
conjugation. 
Domo,  domui,  domitum,  r.d.  to  tame. 
Frico,  fricui,  frictum  or  fricatum, 
d.  to  rub. 
confrico,  — ,  -atum. 
infrico,  — ,  -atum. 
Juvo,  juvi,  jutum,  r.  d.,  also  juvatQ- 
rus,  to  help. 
So  adjuvo,  -juvi,  -jutum,  m.  r.  d. 
*Labo,  — ,  to  totter. 
Lavo,  lavi,  lava  turn,  lautum  or  lo- 
tum ;  (sup.)  lautum  or  lava- 
tum,  lavaturus,  d.  to  wash. 
Lavo  is  also  sometimes  of  the 
third  conjugation. 
•Mico,  micui,  to  glitter. 


eneco,   -avi  or    -ui,    -atum,  or 

-turn,  d. 
tinterneco,  — ,  -atum. 
*tNexo,  — ,  to  tie. 
Plico, — ,  plica  turn,  to  fold. 
duplico,  -avi,  -atum,  r.  d. 
multiplTco  and  repllco  have  -avi, 

-atum. 
*suppl!co,  -avi,  m.  r. 
applico,  -avi  or  -ui,  -atum   or 

-itum,  -itarus.     So  impllco. 
complico,  -ui,  -itum  or  -atum. 
expllco,  -avi  or  -ui,  -atum   or 
-itum,  r.  r. 
Poto,  potavi,  potatum  or  potum,  r.  r. 
m.  m.  d.  to  drink. 
tepoto,  -avi,  -um. 
*perpoto,  -avi. 
Seco,  secui,  sectum,   secatttrus,  d 
to  cut. 
*circumsgco,  — . 
*intersSco,  — ,  d. 
^persgco,  -ui 


prseseco,  -ui, 
resgco,  d. 


-turn  or  -atum.     So 


1  CONJ.]    VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


123 


'Sono,  sonui,  -aturus,  d.  to  sound. 
*consono,  -ui.     So  ex-,  in-,  per-, 

prae-sono. 
*res6no,  -avi. 
*assdno,  — .     So  circumsono  and 

dissono. 
*Sto,  steti,  staturus,  to  stand. 

*antesto,  -steti.     So   circumsto, 

intersto,  supersto. 
*consto,    -stiti,    -staturus.       So 

exto,  insto,  obsto,  persto. 


*praesto,  -stiti,  -statQrus,  d. 

*adsto,  -stiti,  -stiturus. 

*prosto,  -stlti.     So  resto. 

*disto, — .     So  substo. 
*Tono,  tonui,  to  thunder.      So  cir- 
cumtono. 

attono,  -ui,  -Ttum. 

intono,  -ui,  -atum. 

*retono,  — . 
Veto,  vetui,or  avi,vetitum,£o forbid. 


§  166.     All  deponent  verbs,  of  the  first  conjugation,  are 
regular,  and  are  conjugated  like  miror ;  as, 

Abominor,  d.  to  abhor. 
Adulor,  d.  to  flatter : 
.flSmulor,  d.  to  rival. 
*AprIcor,  to  bask  in  the 

sun. 
Arbitror,  r.  d.  to  think. 


Aspernor,  d.  p.  to  de- 
spise. 

Aucupor,  r.  p.  to  hunt 
after. 

Auxilior,  p.  to  help. 

Aversor,  d.  to  dislike. 

Calumnior,  to  calumni- 
ate. 

Causor,  to  allege. 

*Comissor,  m.  to  revel. 

Com!  tor,  p.   to  accom- 
pany. 

Concionor,£o  harangue. 

*Confabulor,  m.  to  dis- 
course. 

Conor,  d.  to  endeavor. 

tConspicor,  to  see. 

Contemplor,    d.  p.    to 
view. 

Criminor,  m.   p.    to 
blame. 

Cunctor,  d.  p.  to  delay. 


*Frumentor,  m.  to  for- 
age. 

Furor,  m.  to  steal. 

Glorior,  r.  d.  to  boast. 

Gratulor,  m.  d.  to  con- 
gratulate. 


Hortor,  d.  to  encourage. 

Imitor,  u.  r.  d.  to  imi- 
tate. 

Indignor,  d.  to  disdain. 

Infitior,  d.  to  deny. 

Insector,  to  pursue. 

Insidior,  r.  d.  to  lie  in 
wait. 

Jaculor,  p.  to  dart. 

Jocor,  to  jest. 

La?tor,  r.  d.  p.  to  rejoice. 

Lamentor,  d.  p.  to  be- 


Opsonor,  m.  to  cater. 

tOtior,  to  be  at  leisure. 

Pabulor,  m.  d.  to  graze. 

Palor,  to  wander. 

Percontor,m.  to  inquire. 

Periclttor,  d.  p.  to  try. 

tPiscor,  m.  to  fish. 

Populor,  r.  d.  p.  to  lay 
waste. 

Prsedor,  m.  to  plunder. 

Prcelior,  to  fight. 

Precor,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to 
pray. 

Recordor,  d.  to  remem- 
ber. 

Rimor,  d.  to  search. 

Rixor,  to  scold. 

*Rust!cor,  to  live  in  the 
country. 

Sciscltor,  m.  p.  to  in- 
quire. 
Scitor,  m.  to  ask. 


wail. 
*tLignor,  m.  to  gather 

Luctor,  d.  to  wrestle. 

Medicor,  r.  d.  p.  to  heal.     Scrutor,  p.  to  search. 
Medltor,  p.  to  meditate.     Solor,  d.  to  comfort, 
Mercor,  m.  r.  d.  p.  to     Spatior,  to  walk  < 

buy. 
Minor,  to  threaten. 
Miror,  u.  r.  d.  to  admire. 


Deprecor,  m.  r.  d.  p.  to     Misgror,  d.  to  pity. 


Moderor,  u.  d.  to  rule. 
Modulor,  d.  p.  to  mod 

ulate. 
Moror,  r.  d.  to  delay. 
tMutuor,  p.  to  borrow. 
Negotior,  r.  to  traffic. 
*tNugor,  to  trifle. 
Obtestor,  p.  to  beseech. 
OpSror,  to  work. 
f Ferior,  r.  to  keep  lioli-     Opinor,  u.  r.  d.  to  think.     Versor,  to  be  employed, 
day.  Opitiilor,  m.  to  help.  Vocifgror,  to  bawl. 


deprecate. 
*tDigladior,  to  fence. 
Dignor,  d.  p.   to  think 

worthy. 
Domlnor,  to  rule. 
Epulor,  r.  d.  to  feast. 
"Famulor,  m.  to  wait  on. 
Fatur,  (defect.)  u.  d.  to 

speak.  See  §  183,  6. 


Spatior,  to  walk  about. 

Speculor,  m.  r.  d.  to 
view. 

tStipQlor,  p.  to  stipu- 
late. 

tSuavior,  d.  to  kiss. 

Susplcor,  to  suspect. 

Testor,  d.  p.  to  witness. 
So  detestor. 

Tutor,  d.  to  defend. 

Vagor,  to  wander. 

Vengror,  d.  p.  to  wor- 
ship. 

Venor,  m.  to  hunt. 


124 


VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS.         [2  CONJ. 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 

§  167.  Verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  end  in  to.  The 
second  and  third  roots,  instead  of  lv  and  etu%  commonly  end  in 
u  and  Itu;  as,  moneo,  monm,  monitum. 

The  following  list  contains  most  verbs  so  conjugated,  and 
also  some  which  want  the  second  and  third  roots  : — 


*Aceo,  to  be  sour. 
*Albeo,  — ,  to  be  white. 
Areeo,  d.  to  drive  away. 

coerceo,  d.   to    re- 
strain. 

exerceo,  d.  to  exer- 
cise. 
*Areo,  to  be  dry. 
*Aveo,  — ,  to  covet. 
*Caleo,  r.  to  be  warm. 
"Calleo,  — ,  to  be  hard. 

•percalleo,  to    be 
hardened. 
*Calveo,  — ,  to  be  bald. 
*Candeo,  to  be  white. 
*Caneo,  to  be  hoary. 
*Careo,  r.  d.  to  want. 
*Ceveo,  — ,  to  fawn. 
*Clareo,  to  be  bright. 
*Clueo,  — ,  to  be  famous. 
•Denseo,  — ,  to  thicken. 
*Diribeo,  — ,  to  distri- 
bute. 
*Doleo,  r.  d.  to  grieve. 
*Egeo,  r.  to  want. 
*Emineo,  to  rise  above. 
*Flacceo,  to  wither. 
*Flaveo, — ,to  be  yellow. 
*Floreo,  to  flourish. 
•Foeteo,  — ,  to  be  fetid. 
*Frigeo,  — ,  to  be  cold. 
•Frondeo,  — ,  to  bear 

leaves. 
Habeo,  r.  d.  to  have. 

So  ad-,  ex-,  pro-hi- 
beo. 

cohibeo,  d.  to    re- 
strain. 


inhibeo,d.  to  hinder. 

*tperhibeo,  d.  to  re- 
port. 

tposthabeo,  to  post- 
pone. 

pnebeo,  r.  d.  to  af- 
ford. 

debeo,  r.  d.  to  owe. 
*Hebeo,  — ,  to  be  dull. 
*Horreo,  d.  to  be  rough. 
*Humeo,  — ,  to  be  moist. 
*Jaceo,  r.  to  lie. 
*Lacteo,  — ,  to  suck. 
*Langueo,  to  languish. 
*Lateo,  to  lie  hid. 
*Lenteo,  — ,  to  be  slow. 
*Liceo,  to  be  valued. 
*Liveo,  — ,  to  be  livid. 
*Maceo,  — ,  to  be  lean. 
*Madeo,  to  be  wet. 
Mereo,  r  to  deserve. 

tcommereo,   to  de- 
serve. 

tdemereo,  d.  to  earn. 

temereo,  to  merit. 

*tpermereo,  to  serve 
in  war. 

promereo,  to  deserve. 
*Mcereo,  — ,  to  grieve. 
Moneo,  r.  d.  to  advise. 

admoneo,  m.  r.  d.  to 
admonish. 

commoneo,  to  warn. 

prremoneo,  to  fore- 
warn. 
*Muceo,    — ,    to    be 

mouldy. 
*Nigreo,  to  be  black. 


*Niteo,  to  shine. 

Noceo,  m.  r.  to  hurt. 

*01eo,  to  smell. 

*Palleo,  to  be  pale. 

*Pareo,  m.  r.  d.  to  obey. 

*Pateo,  to  be  open. 

Placeo,  to  please. 

*Polleo,  — ,  to  be  able. 

*Puteo,  to  be  nauseous. 

*Putreo,  to  be  putrid. 

*Renideo,  — ,  to  glitter. 

*Rigeo,  to  be  stiff. 

*Rubeo,  to  be  red. 

*Scateo,  — ,  to  overflow 

*Sileo,  d.  to  be  silent. 

*Sordeo,  to  be  filthy. 

*Splendeo,  — ,  to  shim 

*Squaleo,  to  be  foul. 

*Strideo,  — ,  to  creak. 

*Studeo,  d.  to  study. 

*Stupeo,  to  be  amazed 

Taceo,  r.  d.  to  be  silen*. 

*Tepeo,  to  be  warm. 

Terreo,  d.  to  terrify. 
So  deterreo,  to  detei 
tabsterreo,  to  deter. 
tconterreo, }      to 
texterreo,    >frighi 
tperterreo,  }      en. 

*Timeo,  d.  to  fear. 

*Torpeo,  to  be  torpid. 

*Tumeo,  to  swell. 

*Valeo,  r.  to  be  able. 

*  Vegeo, — ,  to  be  strong 

*Vieo,  — ,  to  bind. 

*Vigeo,  to  be  strong. 

*Vireo,  to  be  green. 

*Uveo,  — ,  to  be  moist. 


§  168.  The  following  list  contains  those  verbs  of  the  sec- 
ond conjugation  which  do  not  form  their  second  and  third  roots 
in  u  and  itu,  including  those  which  form  them  regularly  in  ev 
and  itu. 

Note.  Some  verbs  of  this  conjugation  are  irregular  in  the  second  and 
third  roots,  in  consequence  of  imitating  the  common  forms  of  the  third 
conjugation. 


2  CONJ.]   VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


125 


Aboleo,  -evi,  -itum,  r.  d.  to  efface. 

"Algeo,  alsi,  to  be  cold. 

Ardeo,  arsi,  arsum,  r.  to  burn. 

Audeo,  ausus  sum,  r.  d  to  dare. 

Augeo,  auxi,  auctum,  r.  d.  to  in- 
crease. 

Caveo,  cavi,  cautum,  m.  d.  to  be- 
ware. 

Censeo,  censui,  censum,  d.  to  think. 
recenseo,  -ui,  -um  or  -Itum. 
*percenseo,  -ui. 
*succenseo,  -ui,  d. 

Cieo,  civi,  citum,  to  excite.  The  per- 
fect civi  seems  to  come  from  cio, 
of  the  fourth  conjugation. 

Compleo,  -evi,  -etum,  to  fill.  So 
the  other  compounds  of  pleo. 

*Conniveo,  -nivi,  to  wink  at. 

Deleo,  -evi,  -etum,  d.  to  blot  out. 

Doceo,  docui,  doctum,  d.  to  teach. 

*Faveo,  favi,  fauturus,  to  favor. 

*Ferveo,  ferbui,  to  boil.  It  is  some- 
times of  the  third  conjugation. 

Fleo,  ilevi,  fletum,  r.  d.  to  weep. 

Foveo,  fovi,  fotum,  d.  to  cherish. 

Frendeo,  — ,  fressum  or  fresum,  to 
gnash. 

*Fulgeo,  fulsi,  to  shine. 

Fulgo,  of  the  third  conjugation, 
is  also  in  use. 

Gaudeo,  gavlsus  sum,  r.  to  rejoice. 

#Hrereo,  haesi,  hssurus,  to  stick. 

Indulgeo,  indulsi,  indultum,  r.  d.  to 
indulge. 

Jubeo,  jussi,  jussum,  r.  to  order. 

*Luceo,  luxi,  to  shine. 

polluceo,  -luxi,  -luctum. 

*Lugeo,  luxi,  d.  to  mourn. 

*Maneo,  mansi,  mansuni,  m.  r.  d.  to 
remain. 


Misceo,  miscui,  mistum  or  mixtum, 

misturus,  d.  to  mix. 
Mordeo,  momordi,  morsum,   d.  to 

bite. 
Moveo,  movi,  motum,  r.  d.  to  move. 
Mulceo,  mulsi,  mulsum,  d.  to  soothe 
*Mulgeo,  mulsi  or  mulxi,  to  milk. 
Neo,  nevi,  netum,  to  spin. 
*Paveo,  pavi,  d.  to  fear. 
*Pendeo,  pependi,  to  hang. 

propendeo,  — ,  propensum. 
Pleo,  (obsolete.)     See  compleo. 
Prandeo,  prandi,  pransum,  r.  to  dine. 
Rideo,  risi,  risum,  m.  r.  d.  to  laugh. 
*Sedeo,  sedi,  sessum,  m.  r.  to  sit. 

The  compounds  change  e  into  i. 

*dissideo,  -sedi.     So  prresideo. 
*Seneo,  senui,  to  be  old. 
Soleo,  solltus  sum  or  solui,  to  be  ac- 
customed. 
*Sorbeo,  sorbui,  to  suck  in. 

*absorbeo,  -sorbui  or  -sorpsi. 
Spondeo,    spopondi,    sponsum,    to 

promise. 
Suadeo,  suasi,  suasum,  r.d.  to  advise. 
Teneo,  tenui,  tentum,  r.  d.  to  hold. 

The  compounds  change  e  into  i. 

*attineo,  -tinui.     So  pertineo. 
Tergeo,  tersi,  tersum,  to  wipe. 

Tergo,  of  the  third  conjugation, 
is  also  in  use. 
Tondeo,  — ,  tonsum,  to  shear.     The 

compounds  have  the  perfect  tondi. 
Torque©,  torsi,  tortum,  d.  to  twist. 
Torreo,  torrui,  tostum,  to  roast. 
*Turgeo,  tursi,  to  swell. 
*Urgeo  or  urgueo,  ursi,  d.  to  urge. 
Video,  vidi,  visum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  see 
Vovtfo,  vovi,  votuin,  d.  to  vow. 


§  169.      Impersonal  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation. 


Decet,  decuit,  it  becomes. 

Libel,    libuit    or   libitum    est,    it 


Licet,  licuit  or  lie! turn  est,  it  is  law- 
ful. 

Liquet,  liquit,  it  is  clear. 

Misfiret,  miseruit  or  miseritum  est, 
it  pities. 

Oportet,  oportuit,  it  behoves. 

Note.     Lubet,  &c,  are  sometimes 
the  comic  writers. 

11  • 


Piget,    piguit    or    pigitumest,  d.it 

grieves. 
Pcenitet,  pcenituit,  pceniturus,  d.  it 

repents. 
Pudet,   puduit  or  pudltum  est,  d.  it 

shames. 
Tffidet,    ta'duit    or  ttesum   est,   it 

wearies. 

So  pertasdet. 

written  for  libet,  &c.,  especially  in 


126       VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.    [3  CONJ. 

§  1 70.     Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation. 

Fateor,  fassus,  r.  d.  to  confess.  *Medeor,  d.  to  cure. 

The  compounds  change  a  into  i.  Mereor,  merltus,  to  deserve. 

confiteor,  confessus,  d.  p    to  ac-  Misereor,  miserltus  or  misertus,  to 

knoioledge.  pity. 

*tdiffiteor,  to  deny.  Polliceor,  pollicitus,  p.  to  promise. 

profiteor,  professus,  d.  p.  to  de-  Reor,  ratus,  to  think. 

dare.  Tueor,  tultus,  d.  p.  to  protect. 

Liceor,  licltus,  to  bid  a  price.  Vereor,  verltus,  d.  to  fear. 


THIRD    CONJUGATION. 

§  171.  In  the  third  conjugation,  when  the  first  root  ends 
with  a  consonant,  the  second  root  is  formed  by  adding  5  ;  when 
it  ends  with  a  vowel,  the  first  and  second  roots  are  the  same : 
the  third  root  is  formed  by  adding  tu ;  as,  carpo,  carps?,  carp- 
tum ;  arguo,  argm,  argutum. 

In  annexing  s  and  tu,  certain  changes  occur  in  the  final  consonant  of 
the  root : — 

1.  C,  g,  h,  and  qu,  at  the  end  of  the  root,  form  with  s  the  double  letter 
x  in  the  2d  root ;  in  the  3d  root,  c  remains,  and  the  others  are  changed 
into  c  before  tu;  as,  rego  (regsi),  rexi,  rectum;  vcho,  vexi,  vectum , 
coquo,  coxi,  coctum. 

Note.  lnfluo,fluxi}  and  struo,  sti-uxi,  h  seems  to  have  been  lost  in  the 
root  of  the  verb. 

2.  B  is  changed  into  p  before  s  and  tu;  as,  scribo,  scripsi,  scriptum. 

3.  D  and  t,  before  s,  are  either  dropped,  or  changed  into  s  ;  as,  claudo, 
elausi  ;  cedo,  cessi.  After  m,  p  is  sometimes  inserted  before  s  ;  as,  sumo, 
sumpsi. 

Some  other  consonants  are  dropped,  or  changed  into  s,  in  certain  verbs. 

Exc.  1.  Many  verbs  whose  first  root  ends  in  a  consonant,  do  not  add  s 
to  form  the  second  root. 

(a.)  Of  these,  some  have  the  second  root  the  same  as  the  first ;  as, 
Bibo,         Excudo,       Ico,  Mando,  Scabo,  Solvo,         Verro, 

Edo,  Fodio,  Lambo,      Prehendo,     Scando,        Strido,        Verto, 

Emo,         Fugio,  Lego,         Psallo,  Sido,  Tollo,  Volvo; 

to  which  add  the  compounds  of  the  obsolete  cando,fendo,  and  nuo. 

(b.)  Some  make  a  change  in  the  first  root.  Of  these,  some  change  a 
vowel,  some  drop  a  consonant,  some  prefix  a  reduplication,  others  admi* 
two  or  more  of  these  changes  j  as, 

Ago,        Facio,  Frango,  Jacio,  Rumpo,      Scindo, 

Capio,      Findo,         Fundo,  Linquo,         Sisto,  Vinco. 

Those  which  have  a  reduplication  are 

Cado,  Curro,  Parco,  Pendo,  Tango, 

Caedo,  Disco,  Pario,  Posco,  Tendo, 

Cano,  Fallo,  Pello,  Pungo,  Tundo. 


3  CONJ.]    VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


127 


Exc.  2.    Some  add  u  to  the  root  of  the  verb ;  as, 
Alo,  Consulo,        Gerao,  Rapio,  Tremo, 

Colo,  Depso,  Geno,  (obs.)        Strepo,         Volo, 

Compesco,         Fremo,  Molo,  Texo,  Vomo. 

Meto  and  pono  add  su,  with  a  change  in  the  root. 

Exc.  3.    The  following  add  iv: — 

Arcesso,       Cupio,         Lacesso,  ,    Rudo, 

Capesso,       Incesso,      Peto,  Qusero,  with  a  change  of  r  into  8. 

Exc.  4.  The  following  add  v,  with  a  change  in  the  root;  those  in  sco 
dropping  sc : — 

Cresco,        Pasco,  Scisco,  Lino,         Sino,  Sterno, 

Nosco,  Quiesco,        Cerno,  Sero,  Sperno,         Tero. 

Exc.  5.  The  3d  roots  of  verbs  whose  root  ends  in  d  or  t,  add  su,  in 
stead  of  tu, ,  to  the  root,  either  dropping  those  letters,  or  changing  them 
into  s;  as,  claudo,  clausum;  defendo,  dtfensum;  cedo,  cessum.  But  the 
compounds  of  do  add  Uu. 

The  following,  also,  add  su,  with  a  change  of  the  root : — 

Excello,  Fallo,  Pello,  Spargo,  Verro. 

Percello,  Mergo,  Premo,  Velio, 

Exc.  6.     The  following  add  tu,  with  a  change  of  the  root: — 
Cerno,      Fingo,         Gero,  Sero,      Sperno,       Stringo,     Uro, 

Colo,        Frango,      Rumpo,      Sisto,      Sterno,        Tero,         Vinco; 

to  which  add  those  in  sco,  with  the  2d  root  in  v  ;  these  drop  sc  before  tu, 

except  pasco,  which  drops  c  only. 

Exc.  7.     The  following  have  Uu : — 

Bibo,  Molo,  Pono,  with  a  change  of  n  into  8. 

Geno,  (obs.)  Vomo, 

The  following  have  Uu : — 

Arcesso,  Cupio,  Peto, 

Facesso,  Lacesso,  Qusero,  with  a  change  of  r  into  s. 

Some  other  irregularities  occur  in  this  conjugation. 

$  172.  The  following  list  contains  both  the  regular  and 
irregular  formations  of  the  second  and  third  roots  in  the  third 
conjugation : — 

Acuo,  acui,  acutum,  d.  to  sharpen.  *Batuo,  batui,  d.  to  beat. 

Ago,  egi,  actum,  r.  d.  to  drive.  Bibo,  bibi,  bibitum,  d.  to  drink. 

So  circumago,  cogo,  and  perago.  *Cado,  cecldi,  casurus,  to  fall.    The 

*ambigo,  — ,  to  doubt.    So  satago.  compounds  change  a  into  i, 

The  other  compounds  change  and  drop  the  reduplication. 

a  into  i.     See  §  189.  2.  occldo,  -cldi,  -casum,  r.  to  set. 

*prodigo,  -Sgi,  to  squander.  Credo,  cecldi,  cresum,  r.  d.  to  cut. 
Alo,  alui,   alltum  or  altum,  d.  to  The  compounds   change   re   into 

nourish.  I,   and  drop    the    reduplica- 

•Ango,  anxi,  to  strangle.  tion. 

Arguo,  argui,  argutum,  d.  to  convict.  From  candeo,  of  the  second  con- 

Arcesso,  -cessivi,  -cessitum,  r.  d.  to  jugation,  is  formed 

call  for.  accendo,  -cendi,  -censura,  d.  to 


128 


VERBS.— SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.    [3  CONJ. 


kindle.       So   the  other  com- 
pounds. 
*Cano,  ceclni,  d.  to  sing.     The  com- 
pounds change  a  into  i. 
*condno,    -cinui.       So   occlno, 

praeclno. 
"acclno, — .  So  incino,  intercino, 
succino,  reclno. 
*Capesso,  -Ivi,  r.  d.  to  undertake. 
Capio,  cepi,  captum,  r.  d.  to  take. 
The  compounds  change  a  into  i. 
Carpo,  carpsi,  carptura,  d.  to  pluck. 

The  compounds  cliange  a  into  e. 
Cedo,cessi,  cessum,  r.  to  yield. 
Cello,  {obsolete.) 

excello,  -cellui,  -celsum,  to  excel. 
*antecello,  — ,     Sopraecello,  re- 
cello, 
percello,  -culi,  -culsum,  to  strike. 
Cerno,  crevi,  cretum,  d.  to  decree. 
Cerno,  to  see,  has  no  second  or 
third  root. 
Cingo,  cinxi,  cinctum,  d.  to  gird. 
*Clango,  — ,  to  clang. 
Claudo,  clausi,  clausum,  r.  d.  to  shut. 
The  compounds  change  au  into  u. 
*tClepo,  clepsi,  or  clepi,  to  steal. 
Colo,  colui,  cultum,  d.  to  till. 

tocculo,  -cului,  -cultum,d.  to  hide. 
Como,  corapsi,  comptum,  to  deck. 
*Compesco,  -pescui,  to  restrain. 
Consulo,  -sului,  -sultum,  m.  r.  d.  to 

consult. 
Coquo,  coxi,  coctum,  m.  d.  to  cook. 
Credo,  credldi,  credltum,  r.  d.  to  be- 
lieve. 
"Cresco,  crevi,  to  grow. 

concresco,  -crevi,  -cretum. 
Cubo  is  of  tip  first  conjugation. 
*accumbo,   -cubui,  to  lie  down. 
So  the  other  compounds  which 
*Cudo,  — ,  to  forge.  [insert  m. 

excudo,-cudi,-cusum,  d.  to  stamp. 
Cupio,  cuplvi,  cupltum,  d.  to  desire. 
*Curro,  cucurri,  cursurus,  to  run. 
Concurro,  circumcurro,  succur- 
ro,  and  transcurro,  drop  the 
reduplication ;  the  other  com- 
pounds sometimes  drop,  and 
sometimes  retain  it. 
decurro,  decurri,  decursum. 
*Dego,  degi,  d.  to  live,     [take  away. 
Demo,  dempsi,  demptum,  r.  d.  to 
TDepso,  depsui,  depstum,  to  knead. 
Dico,  dixi,  dictum,  u.  r.  d.  to  say. 
*Disco,  didlci,  discitarus,  d.  to  learn. 


"Dispesco,  — ,  to  separate. 

Divldo,  divisijdivisum,  r.d.  to  divide. 

Do  is  of  the  first  conjugation. 

abdo,  -dldi,  -dltum,  d.  to  hide.   So 

condo,  indo. 
addo,  -dldi,  -dltum,  r.  d.  to  add. 
So  dedo,  edo,  prodo,  reddo, 
trado,  vendo. 
tdido,  -dldi,  -dltum,  to  divide.    So 

abdo,  subdo. 
perdo,  -dldi,  -dltum,  va.  r.  d.  to 
destroy. 
Duco,  duxi,  ductum,m.r.  d.  to  lead. 
Edo,  edi,  esum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  eat. 
Exuo,  exui,  exutum,  d.  to  strip  off. 
Emo,  emi,  emptum,  r.  d.  to  buy. 
Facesso,  -cessi,  -cessltum,  to  execute 
Facio,  feci,  factum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  do. 
Compounded  with  a  preposition, 
it  changes  a  into  i,  and  has  a 
regular  jtassive.     Compound- 
ed with  other  words,  it  retains 
a  when  of  this   conjugation, 
and  has  the  passive,  fio,  fac- 
tus.     See  §  180. 
Fallo,  fefelli,  falsum,  d.  to  deceive. 

*refello,  -felli,  d.  to  refute. 
Fendo,  {obsolete.) 

defendo,  -fendi,  -fensum,  m.  u.  r. 

d.  to  defend. 
offendo,  -fendi,  -fensum,   d.  to 
offend. 
Fero,  tuli,  latum,  r.  d.  to  bear.     See 
§  179.  A  perfect  tetuli  is  rare. 
*suffero,  — . 
Fido,  — ,  fisus,  to  trust.  See  §  162, 18. 
confldo,confisus  sum  or  confidi, 

to  rely  on. 
diffido,  difflsus  sum,  to  distrust. 
Figo,  fixi,  fixum,  r.  to  fix. 
Findo,  fidi,  fissum,  d.  to  cleave. 
Fingo,  finxi,  fictum,  d.  to  feign. 
Flecto,  flexi,  flexum,  r.  d.  to  bend. 
*Fligo,  flixi,  to  dash.     So  confllgo. 
afiilgo,  -flixi,  -flictum,  to  afflict 

So  infllgo. 
profllgo  is  of  the  first  conjugation. 
Fluo,  fluxi,  fluxum,  r.  tofloio. 
Fodio,  fodi,  fossum,  d.  to  dig. 
Frango,  fregi,  fractum,  r.  d.  to  break. 

The  compounds  change  a  into  I. 
*Fremo,  fremui,  d.  to  roar. 
Frendo,  — ,  fresum  or  fressum,  to 

gnash. 
Frigo,  frixi,  frictum  or  frixum,  to 
roast. 


3    CONJ.]        VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


129 


*Fugio,  fugi,  fugiturus,  d.  to  flee. 
Fundo,  fudi,  fusum,  r.  d.  to  pour 
*Furo,  — ,  to  rage. 
*Gemo,  gemui,  d.  to  groan. 
Gigno,  (obsolete  geno,)  genui,  geni- 

tum,  r.  d.  to  beget. 
*Glisco,  — ,  to  grow. 
*Glubo,  — ,  to  peel. 

deglubo,  — ,  -gluptum. 
Gruo,  (obsolete.)  [ingruo. 

*congruo,  -grui,  to  agree.     So 
Gero,  gessi,  gestum,  r.  d.  to  bear. 
Jacio,  jeci,  jactum,  d.  to  cast.      The 

compounds  change  a  into  i. 
Ico,  ici,  ictura,  r.  to  strike. 
Imbuo,  imbui,  imbutum,  d.  to  imbue. 
"Incesso,  -cesslvi,  to  attack. 
tlnduo,  indui,  indatum,  to  put  on. 
Jungojunxi,  junctum,  r.  d.  to  join. 
Lacesso,  -cesslvi,  -cessltum,  r.  d.  to 

provoke. 
Lacioj   (obsolete.)      The  compounds 
change  a  into  i. 

allicio,  -lexi,  -lectum,  d.  to  allure. 
So  illicio,  pellicio. 

elicio,-licui,-licItum,  to  draw  out. 
Laedo,  lassi,  lajsum,  m.  r.  to  hurt.  The 

compounds  change  sb  into  i. 
*Lambo,  Iambi,  to  lick. 
Jjego,  legi,  lectum,  r.  d.  to  read.  So 
allego,  perlggo,  praelggo,  relg- 
go,  sublego,  and  translego; 
the  other  compounds  change  e 
into  i. 

dillgo,  -lexi,  -lectum,  to  love. 

intelllgo,  -lexi,  -lectum,  u.  r.  d.  to 
understand. 

negligo,  -lexi,  -lectum,  r.  d.  to 
neglect. 
Lingo,  — ,  linctum,  d.  to  lick. 

*delingo,  — . 
Lino,  livi  or  levi,  litum,  d.  to  daub. 
*\Linquo,  liqui,  d.  to  leave. 

relinquo,  -liqui,  -lictum,  r.  d. 

delinquo,    -liqui,    -lictum.       So 
derelinquo. 
Ludo,  lusi,  lusum,  m.  r.  to  play. 
*Luo,  lui,  luiturus,  d.  to  atone. 

abluo,  -lui,  -latum,  r.  d. 

diluo,  -lui,  -latum,  d.     So  eluo. 
Mando,  mandi,  mansuia,  d.  to  chew. 
Mergo,  mersi,  mersum,  r.  d.  to  dip. 
Meto,  messui,  messum,  d.  to  reap. 
Metuo,  metui,  metatum,  d.  to  fear. 
*Mingo,  minxi,  mictum,   (sup.)   to 

make  water. 
Minuo,  minui,  mmatum,  d.  to  lessen. 


Mitto,  misi,  missum,  r.  d.  to  send. 
Molo,  molui,  molltum,  to  grind. 
Mungo,  (obsolete.) 

emungo,  -munxi,  -munctum,  to 
toipe. 
Necto,  nexi,  nexum,  d.  to  knit. 

innecto,    -nexui,    -nexum.       So 
annecto,  connecto. 
Nosco,  novi,  notum,  d  to  learn. 
agnosco,    -novi,    -nltum,    d.    to 

recognize. 
cognosco,  -novi,  -nltum,  u.  r.  d. 

to  know. 
*dignosco,  — .     So  prse nosco. 
ignosco,    -novi,    -notum,    d.    to 
pardon.  [m.  r.  to  marry. 

Nubo,  nupsi,  or  nupta  sum,  nuptum, 
Nuo,  (obsolete.) 

*abnuo,  -nui,  -nuiturus,  d.  to  re- 
fuse. 
*annuo,  -nui.     So  innuo,  renuo. 
Pando,  — ,  passum   or  pansum,  to 
open.     So  expando. 
dispando,  — ,  -pansum. 
Pago,  (obs.)  peplgi,  pactum,  to  bar- 
gain. 
Pango,  panxi,  pactum,  panctQrus,  d. 
to  drive  in. 
compingo,  -pggi,  -pactum.      So 

impingo. 
*oppango,  -pggi. 

*depango,  — .     So  repango,  sup- 
pingo. 
*Parco,  peperci  or  parsi,  parsarus, 

to  spare. 
Pario,  pepgri,  partum,  pariturus,  d. 
to  bring  forth.     The  compounds 
are  of  the  fourth  conjugation. 
Pasco,  pavi,  pastum,  m.  r.  d.  to  feed. 
Pecto,  — ,  pexum,  d.  to  comb. 
Pello,  pepttli,   pulsum,  d.  to  drive. 
The  compounds  drop  the  redupli- 
cation. 
Pendo,  pependi,  pensum,  r.  to  weigh. 
The  compounds  drop  the  redupli- 
cation. 
Peto,petIvi,  petltum,  m.u.r.  d.  to  ask. 
Pingo,  pinxi,  pictum,  to  paint. 
Pinso,  pinsi,  pinsltum,  pinsum  or 

pistum,  to  grind. 
*Plango,  planxi,   planctQrus,  to  la- 
ment. 
Plaudo,  plausi,  plausum,  d.  to  ap- 
plaud.   So  applaudo.     The  other 
compounds  change  au  into  o. 
Plecto,  — ,  plexum,  d.  to  twine. 
*Pluo,  plui  or  pluvi,  to  rain. 


130 


VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.    [3  CONJ. 


Pono,  posui,  positum,  r.  d.  to  place. 
Pono,  and  its  compounds,  ancient- 
ly had  poslvi  in  the  perfect. 
*Posco,  poposci,  d.  to  demand. 
Prehendo,  >    ,.  .   .       .. 

Prendo,      $  'dl>  "sum>  x'  d'  to  seize' 
Premo,pressi,pressum,  r.  d.  to  press. 

The  compounds  change  e  into  i. 
Promo,  prompsi,  promptum,  r.  d.  to 

bring  out. 
*Psallo,  psalli,  to  play  on  an  instru- 
ment. 
Pungo,  pupugi,  punctura,  to  prick. 
compungo,     -punxi,    -punctum. 

So  dispungo,  expungo. 
interpungo,  — ,  -punctum. 
*repungo,  — . 
QutBro,  quajslvi,  quaesltum,  m.  r.  d. 
to  seek.     The  compounds  change 
as  into  i. 
Quatio,  — ,  quassum,  to  shake.     The 
compounds   change    qua  into 
cu;  as, 
concutio,  -cussi,  -cussum,  d. 
discutio,  -cussi,  -cussum,  r.  d. 
Quiesco,  quievi,  quietum,r.  d.  to  rest. 
Rado,  rasi,  rasum,  d.  to  shave. 
Rapio,  rapui,  raptum,  r.  d.  to  snatch. 
The  compounds  change  a  in- 
to i. 
diripio,  -ripui,  -reptum,  m.  r.  So 
eripio  and  preeripio. 
Rego,  rexi,  rectum,  r.  d.  to  rule. 
TJie  compounds  change  e  in- 
to i. 
*pergo  (for  perrigo),  perrexi,  r. 

to  go  forward. 
surgo  (for  surrigo),surrexi,  sur- 
rectum,  r.  d.  to  rise. 
*Repo,  repsi,  to  creep. 
Rodo,  rosi,  rosum,  r.  to  gnaw. 

ab-,  ar-,  e-,  ob-,  prse-rodo,  want 
the  perfect. 
*Rudo,  rudlvi,  to  bray. 
Rumpo,  rupi,  ruptum,  r.  d.  to  break. 
Ruo,  rui,  rutum,  ruiturus,  to  fall. 
diruo,  -rui,  -rutum,  d.    So  obruo. 
*corruo,  -rui.     So  irruo. 
*Sapio,  sapivi,to  be  wise.     T7ie  com- 
pounds change  a  into  i. 
resipio,  -siplvi  or  -sipui. 
*tScabo,  scabi,  to  scratch. 
Scalpo,    scalpsi,    scalptum,   to   en- 
grave. 
*Scando,  — ,  d.  to  climb.     TJie  com- 
pounds change  a  into  e ;  as, 
ascendo,  ascendi,  ascensum,  r.  d. 


Scindo,  scidi,  scissum,  d.  to  cut. 
Scisco,  scivi,  scitum,  d.  to  ordain. 
Scribo,   scripsi,   scriptum,   r.  d.    to 

write. 
Sculpo, sculpsi, sculptum,  d.  to  carve. 
Sero,  sevi,  satum,  r.  d.  to  sow. 

consgro,  -sevi,  -situm.     So  insS- 

ro,  r. 
Sero,  — ,  sertum,  to  knit.     Its  com- 
pounds have  serui ;  as, 

assero,  -serui,  -sertum,  r.  d. 
*Serpo,  serpsi,  to  creep. 
*Sido,  sidi,  to  settle.    Its  compounds 

have  generally  sedi,  sessum,/row 

sedeo. 
*Sino,  sivi,  siturus,  to  permit. 

deslnp,  deslvi,  desltum,  r. 
Sisto,  stiti,  statum,  to  stop. 

*absisto,  -stiti.     So  the  other  com- 
pounds; but  circumsisto  wants 
the  perfect. 
Solvo,  solvi,  solutum,  r.d.  to  loose. 
Spargo,   sparsi,    sparsum,   r.   d.    to 

spread.     The  compounds  change 

a  into  e. 
Specio,  (obsolete.)     The  compounds 
change  e  into  i ;  as, 

aspicio,  aspexi,  aspectum,  d.  to 
look  at. 

inspicio,  inspexi,  inspectum,  r.  d. 
Sperno,  sprevi,  spretum,d.  to  despise. 
*tSpuo,  spui,  to  spit. 

*respuo,  respui,  d. 
Statuo,  statui,  statu  turn,  d.  to  place 

The  compounds  change  a  vnto  i. 
Sterno,  stravi,  stratum,  d.  to  strew. 
*Sternuo,  sternui,  to  sneeze. 
*Sterto,  — ,  to  snore. 

*tdesterto,  destertui. 
*Stinguo,  — ,  to  extinguish. 

distinguo,    distinxi,   distinctum. 
So  extinguo,  r.  d. 
*Strepo,  strepui,  to  make  a  noise. 
*Strido,  stridi,  to  creak. 
Stringo,  strinxi,  strictum,  r.  d.  to  tie 

hard. 
Struo,  struxi,  structum,  d.  to  buUcl. 
Sugo,  suxi,  suctum,  to  suck. 
Sumo,sumpsi,sumpturn,  r.  d.  to  take. 
Suo,  — ,  sutum,  d.  to  sew.  So  consuo, 
dissuo. 

insuo,  -sui,  sutum 

*assuo,  — . 
Tango,  tettgi,  tactum,  r.  d.  to  touch. 
Tlie  compounds  change  a  into 
i,  and  drop  the  reduplication. 

contingo,  contlgi,  contactum.  r 


3  CONJ.]   VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


131 


Tego,  texi,  tectum,  r.  d.  to  cover. 
*Temno,  — ,  d.  to  despise. 

contemno,  -tempsi,  -temptum,  d. 
Tendo,  tetendi,  tensura  or  tentum,  to 
stretch.     The  compounds  drop 
the  reduplication;  as, 
extendo,  -tendi,  -tensum  or  -ten- 
tum.    So  in-,  os-  and  re-ten- 
do. 
detendo  has  tensum.      The  other 
compounds  have  tentum. 
*tTergo,  tersi,  tersum,  to  wipe.   Ter- 
geo,  of  the  second  conjugation,  has 
the  same  second  and  third  roots. 
Tero,  trivi,  tritum,  d.  to  rub. 
Texo,  texui,  textum,  d.  to  weave. 
Tingo  or  tinguo,  tinxi,  tinctum,  r 

to  tinge. 
*Tollo,  tolli,  d.  to  raise. 

sustollo,  sustuli,  sublatum,  r. 

take  away. 
*attollo,  — .     So  extollo. 
Traho,  traxi,  tractum,  r.  d.  to  draw. 
*Tremo,  tremui,  d.  to  tremble. 
Tribuo,    tribui,  tributum,   r.   d.   to 

ascribe. 
Trudo,  trusi,  trusum,  to  thrust. 


d. 


to 


Tundo,  tutudi,  tunsum  or  tusum,  to 
beat.     The   compounds  drop   the 
reduplication,   and   have  tusum. 
Yet  detunsum,  obtunsum,   and 
retunsum,  are  also  found. 
Ungo,  unxi,  unctum,  d.  to  anoint. 
Uro,  ussi,  ustum,  d.  to  burn. 
*Vado, — ,togo.  So supervado.    The 
other  compounds  have  vasi;  as, 
*evado,  evasi,  r.     So   pervado ; 
also  invado,  r.  d. 
Veho,  vexi,  vectum,  r.  to  carry. 
Velio,  velli  or  vulsi,  vulsum, d. to  jmll. 
So  avello,  d.,  divello,  evello,  d., 

revello. 
The  other  compounds  have  velli 
only,  except  intejvello,  which 
has  vulsi. 
*Vergo,  versi,  to  incline. 
Verro,  —  versum,  d.  to  brush. 
Verto,  verti,  versum,  r.  d.  to  turn. 
Vinco,  vici,  victum,  r.  d.  to  conquer. 
*Viso,  — ,d.to  visit. 
*Vivo,  vixi,  victurus,  d.  to  live. 
Volvo,  volvi,  volutum,  d.  to  roll. 
Vomo,  vomui,  vomltum,  r.  d,  to 
%     vomit. 


Inceptive  Verbs. 

§  173.  Inceptive  verbs  in  general  want  the  third  root, 
and  their  second  root,  when  used,  is  the  same  as  that  of  their 
primitives.  Of  those  derived  from  nouns  and  adjectives,  some 
want  the  perfect,  and  some  form  it  by  adding  ui  to  the  root  of 
the  primitive.     See  §  187,  II.  2. 

In  the  following  list,  those  verbs  to  which  s  is  added,  have  a  simple  verb 
in  use  from  which  they  are  formed : — 

*Acesco,  acui,  s.  to  grow  sour. 

*iEgresco,  to  grow  sick. 

*Albesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  white. 

"Alesco,  — ,  s.  to  groio. 

coalesco,  -alui,  -all turn,  to  grow 
together. 

"Ardesco,  arsi,  s.  to  take  fire. 

*Aresco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  dry. 

*exaresco,  -arui.      So  inaresco, 
peraresco. 

*Augesco,  auxi,  s.  to  increase. 

*Calesco,  calui,  s.  to  grow  warm. 

*Calvesco,  — ,  s.  to  become  bald. 

"Candesco,  candui,  s.  to  grow  white. 
Canesco,  canui,  s.  to  become   hoa- 
ry. 


*Claresco,  clarui,  s.  to  become  bright. 

*Condormisco,  -dormlvi,  s.  to  go  to 
sleep. 

*Conticesco,  -ticui,  to  become  silent. 

*Crebresco,  -crebui  and  crebrui,  to 
increase. 

*Crudeseo,  crudui,  to  become  raw. 

*Ditesco,  — ,  to  grow  rich. 

*Dulcesco,  — ,  to  grow  sweet. 

*Duresco,  durui,  to  grow  hard. 

*Evilesco,  evilui,  to  become  worth- 
less. 

*Extimesco,  -timui,  to  be  afraid. 

*Fatisco,  — ,  to  gape. 

*Flaccesco,  flaccui,  s.  to  grovf 
weak. 


132 


VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.   [3  CONJ 


*Fervesco,  ferbui,  s.  to  grow  warm. 

"Floresco,  florui,  s.  to  begin  to  flour- 
ish. 

"Fracesco,  fracui,  to  grow  mouldy. 

"Frigesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  cold. 

*perfrigesco,    -frixi.       So    refri- 


*Frondesco, — ,  s.  to  put  forth  leaves. 

*Fruticesco,  — ,  to  put  forth  fruit. 

*Gelasco,  — ,  s.  to  freeze. 

*congelasco,  -avi,  s.  to  congeal. 

*Gemisco,  — ,  s.  to  groan. 

*Gemmasco,  — ,  to  bud. 

*Generasco,  — ,  s.  to  be  produced. 

*Grandesco,  — ,  to  grow  large. 

*Gravesco,  — ,  to  groxo  heavy. 

*Haeresco,  ha?si,  s.  to  adhere. 

*Hebesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  dull. 

*Horresco,  horrui,  s.  to  grow  rough. 

*Humesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  moist. 

*Ignesco,  — ,  to  take  fire. 

*Indolesco,  -dolui,  d.  to  be  grieved. 

*Insolesco,  — ,  to  become  haughty. 

*Integrasco,  — ,  to  be  renewed. 

*Juvenesco,  — ,  to  grow  young. 

*Languesco,  langui,  s.  to  grow  lan- 
guid. * 

*Lapidesco,  — ,  to  become  stone. 

*Latesco,  — ,  to  groxo  broad. 

"Latesco,  latui,  to  be  concealed.  8.  So 
delitesco,  -litui ;  oblitesco,  -litui. 

*Lentesco,  — ,  to  become  soft. 

*Liquesco,  — ,  s.  to  become  liquid. 
*deliquesco,  -licui. 

*Lucesco,  luxi,  s.  to  grow  light. 

*Lutesco,  — ,  s.  to  become  muddy. 

*Macesco,  — ,  s.  >  .  , 

"Macresco,-,    $«>  grow  lean. 
*remacresco,  -macrui. 

*Madesco,  madui,  s.  to  groxo  moist. 

*Marcesco,  marcui,  s.  to  pine  away. 

*Maturesco,  maturui,  to  ripen. 

*Miseresco,  miserui,  s.  to  pity. 

"Mitesco,  — ,  to  grow  mild,. 

*Mollesco,  — ,  to  grow  soft. 

*Mutesco,  — ,  to  become  silent. 
*obmutesco,  obmutui.       v 

*Nigresco,  nigrui,  s.  to  groxo  black. 

*Nitesco,  nitui,  s.  to  grow  bright. 

*Notesco,  notui,  to  become  known. 

*Obbrutesco,  — ,  to  become  brutish. 

*Obcallesco,   -callui,  to  become  cal- 
lous. 

*Obdormisco,   -dormlvi,  s.   to  fall 
asleep. 

**Obsurdesco,  -surdui,  to  grow  deaf. 

*01esco,  {scarcely  used.) 


abolesco,   -olevi,  -olitum,   s.  t6 
cease. 

adolesco,    -olevi,   -ultum,  8.    to 
grow  up. 

exolesco,  -olevi,  -oletum,  to  grow 
old.     So  obsolesco. 

*inolesco,  -olevi,  d.  to  increase. 
*Pallesco,  pallui,  a.  to  grow  pale. 
*Patesco,  patui,  s.  to  be  open. 
*Pavesco,  pavi,  s.  to  grow  fearful. 
*Pertimesco,     -timui,     d.    to  fear 

greatly. 
*Pinguesco,  — ,  to  grow  fat. 
*Pubesco,  — ,  to  come  to  maturity. 
*Puerasco,  — ,  to  become  a  boy. 
*Putesco,  putui,  s.     )  to  become  pu- 
*Putresco,  putrui,  s.  5  trid. 

*Raresco,  — ,  to  become  thin. 
*Rigesco,  rigui,  s.  to  grow  cold. 
*Rubesco,  rubui,  s.  to  grow  red. 

*erubesco,  -rubui,  d. 
*Resipisco,  -sipui,  s.  to  recover  wis- 
dom. 
*Sanesco,  — ,  to  become  sound. 

*consanesco,  -sanui. 
"Senesco,  senui,  e.d.to  grow  old  So 

consenesco. 
*Sentisco,  sensi,  s.  to  perceive. 
*Siccesco,  — ,  to  become  dry. 
*Silesco,  silui,  s.  to  grow  silent. 
*Solidesco,  — ,  to  become  solid. 
*Sordesco,  sordui,  s.  to  become  filthy. 
*Splendesco,  splendui,  s.  to  become 

bright. 
*Spumesco,  — ,  to  foam. 
*Sterilesco,  — ,  to  become  barren. 
*Stupesco,   stupui,   s.    to  be  aston- 
ished. 
Suesco,  suevi,  suetum,  s.  to  become 

accustomed. 
*Tabesco,  tabui,  s.  to  waste  away. 
*Teneresco  and    -asco,    to    become 

tender. 
"Tepesco,  tepui,  s.  to  grow  xcarm. 
*Torpesco,  torpui,  s.  to  groxo  torpid. 
*Tremisco,  tremui,   s.   to   begin   to 

tremble. 
*Tumesco,  tumui,  s.  to  be  inflated. 
*Turgesco,  tursi,  s.  to  swell. 
*Valesco,  valui,  s.  to  become  strong. 
*Vanesco,  — ,  to  vanish. 

*evanesco,  evanui. 
*Veterasco,  veteravi,  to  grow  old. 
*Viresco,  virui,  s.  to  grow  green. 
*Vivesco,  vixi,  s  to  come  to  life. 

*revivisco,  -vixi. 
*Uvesco,  — ,  to  become  moist. 


4  CONJ.]   VERBS SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


133 


§  174.     Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation, 


Apiscor,  aptus,   to  get.      TTie  com- 
pounds change  a  into  i. 

adipiscor,  adeptus.  So  indipiscor. 
Expergiscor,  experrectus,  to  awake. 
Fruor,  fruitus  or  fructus,  fruiturus, 

d.  to  enjoy. 
Fungor,  functus,  r.  d.  to  perform. 
Gradior,  gressus,  to  proceed.      The 
compounds  change  a  into  e ; 
as, 

aggredior,  aggressus,  to  attack. 
*Irascor,  to  be  angry. 
Labor,  lapsus,  r.  to  fall. 
*  Liquor,  to  melt,  flow. 
Loquor,  locutus,  r.  d.  to  speak. 
Miniscor,  (obsolete.) 

comrainiscor,  commentus,  p.  to 
invent. 

*reminiscor,  to  remember. 
Morior,  (mori,  rarely  moriri,)  mor- 

tuus,  moriturus,  d.  to  die. 
Nanciscor,  nactus  or  nanctus,  to  ob- 
tain. 


nasciturus,  u.  to  fa 

born. 
Nitor,   nixus  or  nisus,  nisurus,  to 

lean  upon. 
Obliviscor,  oblltus,  d.  to  forget 
Paciscor,    pactus,    d.     to    bargain. 

Compound  depeciscor. 
Patior,  passus,  r.  d.  to  suffer. 

perpetior,  -pessus. 

From  plecto,  to  twine, 

amplector,    amplexus,    d.  p, 
embrace. 

complector,  complexus,  p. 
circumplector. 
Proficiscor,  profectus,  r.  to  depart. 
Queror,   questus,  m.  u.  d.   to   com- 
plain. 
*Ringor,  to  grin. 
Sequor,  secutus,  r.  d.  to  follow. 
Tuor,  tutus,  to  protect. 
*Vescor,  d.  to  eat. 
Ulciscor,  ultus,  m.  d.  p.  to  avenge. 
Utor,  usus,  r.  d.  to  use. 


to 


So 


Note.  Devertor,  preevertor,  revertor,  compounds  of  verto,  are  used  as 
deponents  in  the  present  and  imperfect  tenses ;  revertor  also,  sometimes, 
in  the  perfect. 


FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

$  175.  Verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation  regularly  form 
their  second  root  in  iv,  and  the  third  in  itu ;  as,  audio,  audivt, 
audituw. 

The  following  list  contains  most  regular  verbs  of  this  conju- 
gation : — 

Munio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  fortify. 
Mutio,  -Ivi,  to  mutter. 
Nutrio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d-  to  nourish. 
Partio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  to  divide. 
Polio,  -Ivi,  d.  to  polish. 
Punio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  punish. 
Redimio,  -Ivi,  to  rrnwn. 
Sarrio,  -Ivi,  d.  to  weed. 
Scio,  -ivi,  u.  r.  to  know. 
Servio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  m.  r.  d.  to  serve 
Sopio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  lull  asleep. 
StabiliOj  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  establish. 
Tinnio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  to  tinkle. 
Vestio,  Ivi  or  -ii,  to  clothe 


Audio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  hear. 
*Cio,  civi,  to  excite. 
Condio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  season. 
Custodio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  keep. 
*Dormio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  m.  r.  d.  to  sleep. 
Erudio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  instruct. 
Expedio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  disentangle. 
Finio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  finish. 
*Gestio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  desire. 
Impedio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  entangle. 
Insanio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  be  mad. 
Irretio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  ensnare. 
Lenio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  mitigate 
Mollio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  soften. 
*Mugio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  bellow. 


134 


VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.   [4  CONJ 


$  176.  The  following  list  contains  those  verbs  of  the 
fourth  conjugation  which  form  their  second  and  third  roots 
irregularly,  and  those  which  want  either  or  both  of  them : — 


Amicio,  — ,  amictum,  d.  to  clothe. 

*Balbutio,  — ,  to  stammer. 

Bullio,  — ,  to  boil. 

*Cjecutio,  — ,  to  be  dim-sighted. 

*Cambio,  — ,  to  exchange. 

*Dementio,  — ,  to  be  mad. 

Eifutio.  — ,  to  speak  foolishly. 

Eo,  ivi  or  ii,  itum,  r.d.to  go.  The  com- 
pounds have  only  ii  in  the  perfect, 
except  obeo,  preeeo,  and  subeo, 
lohich  have  Ivi  or  ii.  All  the 
compounds  want  the  supine  and 
perfect  participles,  except  adeo, 
ambio,ineo,  obeo,  prretereo, sub- 
eo, **4  transeo. 

Farcio,  farsi,  farctum,  to  cram. 

Fastidio,  -ii,  -Itum,  d.  to  disdain. 

*Ferio,  — ,  d.  to  strike. 

*Ferocio,  — ,  to  be  fierce. 

Fulcio,  fulsi,  fultum,  d.  to  prop. 

*Gannio,  — ,  to  yelp. 

*Glocio,  — -,  to  cluck. 

*Glutio,  glutii,  to  swalloic. 

*Grunmo,  grunnii,  to  grunt. 

Hauno,  hausi,  haustum,  hausturus, 
hausurus,  d.  to  draw. 

*Hinnio,  — ,  to  neigh. 

*Ineptio,  — ,  to  trifle. 

*Lascivio,  lascivii,  to  he  xoanton. 

*Ligurio,  ligurii,  to  feed  delicately. 

*Lippio,  — ,  r.  to  be  blear-eyed. 

*Obedio,  obedii,  r.  to  obey. 

Pario  is  of  the  third  conjugation, 
but  its  compounds  are  of  the 
fourth. 


aperio,  aperui,  apertum,  x.  d.  to 
open.     So  operio,  d. 

comperio,  compfiri,  compertura, 
to  find  out.     So  reperio,  r.  d. 
Pavio,  — ,  to  beat. 
*Prurio,  — ,  to  itch. 
*Queo,  quivi  or  quii,  to  be  able.     So 

nequeo. 
*Rugio,  — ,  to  roar. 
Snevio,  srevii,  r.  to  rage. 
*Sagio,  — ,  to  foresee. 
*Salio,  salui  or  salii,  to  leap.      The 
compounds  change  a  into  i. 

*absilio,  — .     So  circumsilio. 

*assilio,  -ui.     So  dissilio,  insilio. 

*desilio,  -ui  or  -ii.     So  exsilio,  re- 
silio,  subsilio. 

*transilio,  -ui  or  -Ivi,  d.     So  pro- 
silio. 
Sancio,  sanxi,  sancltum  or  sanctum, 

d.  to  ratify. 
Sarcio,  sarsi,  sartum,  d.  to  patch. 
*Scaturio,  — ,  to  gush  out. 
Sentio,  sensi,  sensum,  r.  to  feci. 
Sepelio,  sepellvi  or  -ii,  sepultum,  r. 

d.  to  bury. 
Sepio,  sepsi,  septum, d.  to  hedge  in. 
*Singultio,  — ,  to  sob. 
*Sitio,  sitii,  to  thirst. 
Sumo,  -ii,  -Itum,  d.xto  fumigate. 
*Tussio,  — ,  to  cough. 
*Vagio,  vagii,  to  cry. 
*tVeneo,  venii,  r.  to  be  sold. 
Venio,  veni,  ventum,  r.  to  come. 
Vincio,  vinxi,  vinctum,  r.  d.  to  bind. 


Note.  Desiderative  verbs  want  both  the  second  and  third  roots,  ex- 
cept these  three  ; — esurio,  -ivi,  r.  to  desire  to  eat ;  *nupturio,  -ivi,  to  desire 
to  marry ;  *parturio,  -ivi,  to  be  in  travail.     See  §  187,  II.  3. 


•§>  177.     Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation. 


Assentior,  assensus,  r.  d.  p.  to  assent. 
Blandior,  blandltus,  to  flatter. 
Experior,  expertus,  r.  d.  to  try. 
Largior,  largitus,  p.  to  lavish. 
Mentior,  mentitus,  r.  to  lie. 
Metior,  mensus,  d.  to  measure. 
Molior,  molitus,  d.  to  move  a  m.ass. 


Opperior,  oppertus  or  opperltus,  d. 

to  wait  for. 
Ordior,  orsus,  d.  p.  to  begin. 
Orior,  ortus,  oritQrus,  d.  to  spring  up. 

Except  in  the  present  infinitive, 

this  verb  seems  to  be  of  the  third 

conjugation. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS.  135 

Partior,  partltus,  d.  to  divide.  subjunctive  are  sometimes  of  the 

Potior,  potitus,  r.  d.  to  obtain.     The  third  conjugation  in  the  poets, 

present  indicative  and  imperfect     Sorticr,  sortltus,  r.  to  cast  lots. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

§  178.  Irregular  verbs  are  such  as  deviate  from  the 
common  forms  in  some  of  the  parts  derived  from  the  first 
root. 

They  are  sum,  volo,fcro,  edoyjio,  eo,  and  their  compounds. 

Sum  and  its  compounds  have  already  been  conjugated.  See  §  153.  In 
the  conjugation  of  the  rest,  the  parts  which  are  irregular  are  fully 
exhibited,  and  a  synopsis  of  the  other  parts  is,  in  general,  given.  Some 
parts  of  volo  and  its  compounds  are  wanting. 

1.  Volo  is  irregular  only  in  the  present  indicative  and  infini- 
tive, and  in  the  present  and  imperfect  subjunctive. 

It  is  made  irregular  partly  by  syncope,  and  partly  by  a  change  in  the 
vowel  of  the  root.  In  the  present  infinitive  and  imperfect  subjunctive, 
after  e  was  dropped,  r  was  changed  into  I. 

Pres.  Indie.      Pres.  Infin.      Per/.  Indie. 

Vo'-lo,  vel'-le,  vol'-u-i,      to  be  willing^  to  wish. 

INDICATIVE. 
Pres.  S.  vo'-lo,  vis,  vult ;  '       Per/.        vol'-u-i. 

P.  vol'-u-mus,  vul'-tis,  vo'-lunt  Plup.       vo-lu'-6-ram 

Imperf.     vo-le'-bam.  Fut.  per/,  vo-lu'-fi-ro. 

Fut.         vo'-lam. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres.     S.  ve'-lim,  ve'-lis,  ve'-lit ;  Per/,  vo-lu'-e-rim. 

P.  ve-li'-mus,  ve-li'-tis,  veMint  Plup.  vol-u-is'-Sem. 

Imperf  S.  vel'-lem,  vel'-les,  vel'-let ; 

P.  vel-le'-mus,  vel-le'-tis,  vel'-lent. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.  vel'-le.  Pres.  voMens. 

Perf.  vol-u-is'-se. 

Note  Volt  and  voltis,  for  vult  and  vultis,  are  found  in  Plautus  and 
other  ancient  authors. 

2.  Nolo  is  compounded  of  non  and  volo.  Non  drops  its 
final  n,  and  volo  its.  v,  and  the  vowels  (o  o)  are  contracted  into  o 


136  IRREGULAR   VERBS 

Pres.  Indie.      Pres.  Infin.      Per/.  Indie. 
NoMo,  nol'-le,  nol'-u-i,        to  be  unwitting. 

INDICATIVE. 
Pres.  S.  noMo,  non'-vis,  non'-vult ;  Per/.        nol'-u-L 

P.  nol'-u-mus,  non-vul'-tis,  noMunt.         Plup.       no-lu'-fi-ram. 
Itnperf.     no-le'-bam.  Fut.  per/,  no-lu'-S-ro 

Put.         no'-lam. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres.     S.  noMim,  no'-lis,  no'-lit ;  Per/.  no-lu'-€-rim. 

P.  no-li'-mus,  no-lf-tis,  no'-lint.  Plup.  nol-u-is'-sem. 

hnperf.  S.  nol'-lem,  nol'-les,  nol'-let ; 

P.  nol-lg'-mus,  nol-le'-tis,  nol'-lent 

IMPERATIVE. 
S.  2.  noMi,  or  no-li'-to ;  P.  2.  no-li'-te,  or  nol-i-to'-te 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.  nol'-le.  Pres.  no'-lens. 

Per/,  nol-u-is'-se. 

Note.     Ki  vis  and  nevolt,  for  nonvis  and  nonvult,  occur  in  Plautus. 

3.  Malo  is  compounded  ofmagis  and  volo.  In  composition 
magis  drops  its  final  syllable,  and  volo  its  v.  The  vowels  (a  6) 
are  then  contracted  into  a. 

Pres.  Indie.      Pres.  Infin.      Perf.  Indie. 

Ma'-lo,  mal'-le,  mal'-u-i,        to  be  more  willing. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.   S.  ma'-lo,  ma'- vis,  ma'-vult ;  Perf        mal'-u-L 

P.  mal'-u-mus,  ma-vul'-tis,  ma'-lunt.       Plup.       ma-lu'-6-ram 

Imperf.     ma-le'-bam.  Put  perf.  ma-lu'-e-ro. 

Put.  ma'-lam. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.    S.  ma'-lim,  ma' -lis,  ma'-lit ;  Perf.   ma-lu'-e-rim. 

P.  ma-li'-mus,  ma-li'-tis,  ma'-lint.  Plup.  mal-u-is'-sem. 

Imperf.  S.  mal'-lem,  mal'-les,  mal'-let ; 

P.  mal-le'-mus,  mal-le'-tis,  mal'-lent 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  mal'-le.  Perf.  mal-u-is'-se. 

Note.  Mavdlo,  mavdlam,  mavtlim,  and  mavellem,  for  malo,  malam 
Ac.,  occur  in  Plautus. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


137 


§  179.  Fero  is  irregular  in  two  respects: — 1.  its  second 
and  third  roots  are  not  derived  from  the  first : — 2.  in  the 
present  infinitive  active,  and  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  and 
certain  parts  of  the  present  indicative  and  imperative,  of  both 
voices,  the  connecting  vowel  is  omitted.  In  the  present  infini- 
tive passive,  r  is  doubled. 


ACTIVE    VOICE. 

Pres.  Indie.  Fe'-ro,  (to  bear.) 
Pres.  Infin.   fer'-re, 
Perf.  Indie,   tu'-li, 


Su 


pine. 


la'-tum. 


PASSIVE    VOICE. 

Pres.  Indie,  fe'-ror,  (to  be  borne.) 
Pre».  Infin.  fer'-ri, 
Perf.  Part,  la'-tus. 


INDICATIVE. 

Pres.    S.  fe'-ro, 

Pres.     S.  fe'-ror, 

fers, 

fer'-ris  or  -re, 

fert; 

fer'-tur ; 

P.  fer'-I-mus, 

P.   fer'-i-mur, 

fer'-tis, 

fe-rim'-I-ni, 

fe'-runt. 

fe-run'-tur. 

Imperf.     fe-re'-bam. 

Imperf.       fe-re'-bar. 

Fut.          fe'-ram. 

Fut.            fe'-rar. 

Perf.        tu'-li. 

Perf.           la'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i. 

Plup.        t.u'-lS-ram. 

Plup.          la'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-fi-ram. 

Fut.  perf.  tu'-le-ro. 

Fut .  perf.  la'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-6-ro. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.       fe'-ram. 

Pres.      fe'-rar.                              * 

Imperf  fer'-rem. 

Imperf.  fer'-rer. 

Perf.       tu'-le"-rim. 

Perf.       la'-tus  sim  or  fu'-6-rim. 

Plup.      tu-lis'-sem. 

Plup.      la'-tus  es  -sem  or  fu-is'sein 

IMPERATIVE. 

5.  fer,  or  fer'-to, 

S.  fer'-re,  or  fer'-tor, 

fer'-to ; 

fer'-tor , 

P.  fer'-te,  or  fer-to'-te, 

P.  fe-rim'-I-ni, 

fe-run'-to. 

fe-run'-tor. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  fer'-re. 

Pres.  fer'-ri. 

Perf.  tu-lis'-se. 

Perf.  la'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se. 

Fut.    la-tu'-rua  es'-se. 

Fut.     la'-tuin  i'-ri. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.   fe'-rens. 

Perf   la'-tus. 

Fut.     la-tu'-rus. 

Fut.     fe-ren'-dus. 

GERUND. 

fe-ren'-di,  &c. 

1 

SUI 

>INES. 

Former,   la'-tum. 


Latter,  la'-tu. 


$  180.     Fio  has  the  meaning  of  the  passive  voice,  though 
the  parts  formed  from  the  first  root,  except  the  present  infinitive 
12* 


138  IRREGULAR   VERBS. 

and  the  participle  in  dus,  have  the  terminations  of  the  active 
In  its  other  parts,  it  has  passive  terminations.  It  is  used  as 
the  passive  voice  of  facto,  which  has  no  regular  passive. 

Pres.  Indie     Pres.  Infin.      Per/.  Part. 

Fi'-o,  fi'-fi-ri,  fac'-tus,        to  be  made  or  to  become. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  fi'-o,  fis,  fit ;  Per/.        fac'-tus  sum  or  fiY-i. 

P.  fi'-mus,  fi'-tis,  fi'-unt  Plup.       fac'-tus  e'-ram  or  fii'-e-ram. 

Imperf.     fi-e'-bam.  JPut.perf.  fac'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-€-ro. 
FuL          fi'-am. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.   fi'-am.  Plup.  fac'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is/- 

Imp.     fi'-e-rem.  sem. 

Per/,   fac'-tus  sim  or  fu'-6-rim. 

IMPERATIVE.  INFINITIVE. 

S.  fi  or  fi'-to,  fi'-to  ;  Pres.  fi'-e-ri. 

P.  fi'-te  or  fi-to'-te,  fi-un'-to.         Per/,  fac'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se. 

Fid.    fac'-tum  i'-ri. 

PARTICIPLES.  SUPINE. 

Per/,  fac'-tus.  Latter,  fac'-tu. 

Put.    fa-ci-en'-dus. 

Note.  The  compounds  of  facio  which  retain  a,  have  also  Jio  in  the 
passive ;  as,  calefacio,  to  warm ;  passive,  caleflo  ;  but  those  which  change 
a  into  |  form  the  passive  regularly.  Yet  conkt,  defit,  and  infit.  occur 
See  §  183, 12, 13, 14. 

§  181.  Edo,  to  eat,  is  a  regular  verb  of  the  third  con- 
jugation ;  but  in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  imperative,  and 
Infinitive  moods,  and  in  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive, 
it  resembles,  in  some  of  its  persons,  the  same  tenses  of  sum : — 
Thus, 

fnd.  pres.  ,     ,     est ;        ,  >, * 

Subj.  imperf.     ,     es'-ses,  es'-set ;  es-se'-mus, , . 

Imperat.  [**$ ;  eB'-te,         . 

Inf.  pres.  es'-se. 

Ind.  pres.  pass. ,     ,  es'-tur. 

Note.     In  the  present  subjunctive,  edim,  edis,  &c,  are  found,  for  tdam, 
edas,  &c. 
In  the  compounds  of  edo,  also,  forms  resembling  those  of  sum  occur. 

$  182»  Eo  is  irregular  in  the  parts  which,  in  other  verbs, 
are  formed  from  the  first  root,  except  the  imperfect  subjunctive, 


DEFECTIVE    VERBS.  139 

and  the  present  infinitive.  In  these,  and  in  the  parts  formed 
from  the  second  and  third  roots,  it  is  a  regular  verb  of  the 
fourth  conjugation. 

Note.    Eo  has  no  first  root,  and  the  parts  usually  derived  from  that 
root,  consist,  in  this  verb,  of  terminations  only. 

Pres.  Indie.      Prts.  In/in.      Per/.  Iridic.       Per/.  Part. 

E'-o,  i'-re,  i'-vi,  i'-tum,         to  go. 

INDICATIVE. 
Pres.     S.  e>-o,is,  it;  Fut.    SL  i'-bo,  i'-bis,  i'-bit ; 

P.  i'-mus,  i'-tis,  e/-unt  P.  iV-i-mus,  ib'-l-tis,  i'-bunt 

Imperf.  S.  i'-bam,  i'-bas,  i'-bat ;       Per/.       i'-vi. 

P.  i-ba'-mus,    i-ba'-tis,       Plup.       iv'-fi-ram. 
i'-bant.  Fut.perf.  iv'-e-ro. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres.     S.  e'-am,  e'-as,  e'-at ;  Per/.   iv'-S-rim. 

P.  e-a'-mus,  e-a'-tis,  e'-ant  Plup.  i-vis'-sem. 

Imperf.  S.  i'-rem,  i'-res,  i'-ret ; 

P.  i-re'-mus,  i-re'-tis,  i'-rent. 

IMPERATIVE.  INFINITIVE. 

S.  i  or  i'-to,  i'-to  ;  Pres.  i'-re. 

P.  i'-te  or  i-to'-te,  e-un'-to.  Per/,  i-vis'-se. 

Fut.    i-tu'-rus  es'-se. 

PARTICIPLES.  GERUND. 

Pres.  i'-ens,  (gen.  e-un'-tis.)  e-ur/-di,  &c. 

Fut.     i-tu'-rus. 

Remarks. 

1.  lam,  ies,  iet,  are  sometimes  found  in  the  future.  Istis,  issem,  and  isse, 
are  formed  by  contraction  for  ivistis,  ioissem,  and  ivisse.     See  §  162,  7. 

2.  In  the  passive  voice  are  found  the  infinitive  iri,  and  the  third  persons 
singular  itur,  ibdtur,  ibltur,  itum  est,  &c. ;  eatur,  iretur,  &c,  which  are  used 
impersonally. 

3.  The  compounds  of  eo,  including  veneo,  are  conjugated  like  the  sim- 
ple verb,  but  most  of  them  have  ii  in  the  perfect  rather  than  ivi.  (See 
§  176.)  A&eo,  ineo,  preeterev,  subeo,  and  transeo,  being  used  actively,  are 
found  in  the  passive  voice.  Inietur  occurs  as  a  future  passive  of  ineo. 
Ambio  is  regular,  like  audio. 

Quco  and  nequeo  are  conjugated  like  eo,  but  they  want  the  imperative 
mood  and  the  gerund,  and  their  participles  rarely  occur. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 

<§»  183.     Defective  verbs  are  those  which  are  not  used 
in  certain  tenses,  numbers,  or  persons. 


* 


w  10  DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 

There  are  many  verbs  which  are  not  found  in  all  the  tenses,  number* 
and  persons,  exhibited  in  the  paradigms.  Some,  not  originally  defective, 
are  considered  so,  because  they  do  not  occur  in  the  classics  now  extant. 
Others  are  in  their  nature  defective.  Thus,  the  first  and  second  persons 
of  many  verbs  in  the  passive  voice  must  be  wanting,  from  the  nature  of 
their  signification. 

The  following  list  contains  such  verbs  as  are  remarkable  for 
wanting  many  of  their  parts  : — 
1    Odi,  I  hate.  7.  Qmeso,  I  pray.  12.  Confit, it  is  done. 

2.  Ccepi,  /  have  begun.        8.  Ave,    >i,„i  13.  Defit,  it  is  want ing. 

3.  Memlni,  1  remember.       9.  Salve,)        *  14.  lnfit,  he  begins. 

4.  Aio,         >  r  10.  Apage,  begone.  15.  Ovat,  he  rejoices. 

5.  Inquam,  )     SU^'  «•  Cedo,  tell,  or  give 

6.  Fari,  to  speak.  me. 

1.  Odi,  cce.pi,  and  memlni,  are  used  chiefly  in  the  perfect  and 
in  the  other  parts  formed  from  the  second  root,  and  are  thence 
called  preteritive  verbs  : — Thus, 

Ind.  perf.  o'-di  or  o'-sus  sum  ;  plup.  od'-g-ram;  fut.  perf  od'-g-ro. 
Subj.  perf.  od'-e-rim ;  plup.  o-dis'-sem.        Inf.  perf.  o-dis'-se. 
Part.  fut.  o-su'-rus;  perf.  o'-sus. 
Note.    Exosus  and  perosus,  like  osus,  are  used  actively.     Odivit,  for 
od.it,  occurs  in  Cicero. 

2.  IsD.perf.  coe'-pi ;  plup.  ccep'-g-ram ;  fut.  perf.  coep'-e-ro. 

Subj.  perf.  coep'-g-rim;  plup.  coe-pis'-sem.         Inf.  perf.  coe-pis'-se. 

Pakt.  fut .  coep-tu'-rus ;  perf  coep'-tus. 
Note.     In  Plautus  are  found  a  present,  ccepio,  present  subjunctive, 
ecepiam,  and  infinitive  ccepgre.     Before  an  infinitive  passive,  carptum  est, 
&c.,  rather  than  carpi,  &c.,  are  commonly  used. 

3.  Ind.  perf  mem'-i-ni;  plup.  me-min'-e-ram  ;  fut.  perf.  me-min'-g-ro. 
Subj.  perf.  me-min'-g-rim ;    plup.   mein-i-nis'-sera. 

Inf.  perf.  mem-i-nis'-se. 

Imperat.  2pers.  me-men'-to,  mem-en-to'-te. 
Note.     Odi  and  memlni  have,  in  the  perfect,  the  sense  of  the  present, 
and,  in  the  pluperfect  and  future  perfect,  the  sense  of  the  imperfect  and 
future.     In  this  respect,  novi,  I  know,  the  perfect  ofnosco,  to  learn,  agrees 
with  odi  and  memlni. 

4.  Ind.  pre#.   ai'-o,*  a'-is,t  a'-it ;  — — , (  ai'-unt.* 

imp.   ai-e'-bam,  ai-e'-bas,  ai-e'-bat ;  ,  ai-e-ba'-tis,  ai-e'-bant. 

Subj. //res. ,  ai'-as,  ai'-at;  , ,  ai'-ant. 

Imperat.     a'-i.        Part.  pres.  ai'-ens. 

5.  Ind.  pres.   in'-quam  or  in'-qui-o,in'-quis,in'-quit}in'-qui-mus,  in'-qul- 

tis,  in'-qui-unt. 

■     imp.  , ,  in-qui-g'-bat ;  , , . 

fut.     ,  in'-qui-es,  in'-qui-et  j  , , . 

perf.   ,  in-quis'-ti,  in'-quit ;  , , . 

Subj.  pres. , ,  in'-qui-at ;  , , . 

Imperat.     in'-que,  in'-qui-to. 

*  Pronounced  a  -yo,  x'-yunt,  <5tc.   See  §9.  f  ais  with  ne  is  contracted  to  awi*. 


IMPERSONAL    VERBS.  141 

6.  Ind.  pres. , ,  fa'-tur  ;  fut.  fa'-bor, ,  fab'-I-tur. 

Imperat.  fa'-re.       Part.  pres.  fans  ;  perf.  fa'-tus  ;  fut.  fan'-dus. 
Infin.  pres.  fa'-ri.     Gerund, gen.  fan'-di ;  abl.  fan'-do.    Supine,  fa'-tu. 

In  like  manner  the  compounds  affdri,  effdri,  and  profari. 

7.  Ind.  pres.  quae'-so, ,  quae'-sit;  quses'-u-mus, , . 

Inf.  pres.  quses'-g-re. 

8.  Imperat.  a'-ve,  a-ve'-to ;  a-ve'-te.        Inf.  a-vfi'-re. 

9.  Ind.  pres.  sal'-ve-o.  fut.  sal-ve'-bis.        Inf.  pres.  sal-vfi'-re. 
Imperat.  sal'-ve,  sal-vg'-to ;  sal-ve'-te. 

10.  Imperat.  ap'-a-ge. 

11.  Imperat.  sing,  and  plur.  ce'-do;  pi.  cet'-te  for  ced'-I-te. 

12.  Ind.  pres.  con'-fit;  fut.  con-fl'-et. 

Sub j.  pres.  con-ff'-at ;  imperf.  con-fi'-S-ret.         Inf.  pres.  con-fi'-S-ri. 

13.  Ind.  pres.  de'-fit ;  pi.  de-f  I'-unt.        Subj.  pres.  de-fl'-at. 
Inf.  pres.  de-fi'-g-ri. 

14.  Is d.  pres.  in'-fit;  pi.  in-fl'-unt. 

15.  Ind.  pres.  o'-vat.         Subj.  pres.  o'-vet;  imperf.  o-va'-ret. 
Part.  pres.  o'-vans ;  perf.  o-va'-tus.         Gerund,  o-van'-di. 

Remark  1.  Among  defective  verbs  are  sometimes,  also,  included  the 
following- — Forem,  fores,  &c,  fore,  (see  §154,3.)  Ausim,  ausit;  ausint. 
Faxo  a.na  faxim,f axis,  faxit,faxlmus,  fuxitis,  faxint.  Fazem.  The  form 
in  »  is  an  old  future  perfect ;  that  in  im  a  perfect,  and  that  in  em  a  plu- 
perfect, subjunctive.     See  §  162,  9. 

2.  In  the  present  tense,  the  first  person  singular,  furo,  to  be  mad,  and 
dor  and  der,  from  do,  to  give,  are  not  used. 

3.  A  few  words,  sometimes  classed  with  defectives,  are  formed  by  con- 
traction from  a  verb  and  the  conjunction  si;  as,  sis  for  si  vis,  sultis  for  si 
vultis,  sodes  for  si  audes. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

§  184.  Impersonal  verbs  are  those  which  are  used  only 
in  the  third  person  singular,  and  do  not  admit  of  a  per- 
sonal subject. 

1.  Their  English  is  generally  preceded  by  the  pronoun  it, 
especially  in  the  active  voice  ;  as,  delectat,  it  delights ;  decet,  it 
becomes ;  contingit,  it  happens ;  evenit,  it  happens ;  scribitur, 
it  is  written,  &c. 

They  are  thus  conjugated  : — 

2d  Conj. 
Inn.  Pres.         delectat,  decet, 

deegbat, 
decebit, 
decuit, 
decuerat, 
Fut.  perf.  delectaverit.       decuerit. 


1st  Conj. 

Pres. 

delectat, 

Imp. 

delectabat, 

Fut.    " 

delectabit, 

Perf. 

delectavit, 

Plup. 

delectaverat, 

3d  Conj. 

4th  Conj. 

contingit, 

evenit, 

contingebat, 

eveniebat, 

continget, 

eveniet, 

contigit, 

evenit, 

contigerat, 

evene'rat, 

contigerit. 

evenent. 

142 


IMPER30NAL    VERBS. 


1st  Conj. 

2d  Conj. 

3d  Conj. 

4th  Conj. 

Sub 

.  Pres. 

delectet, 

deceat, 

contingat, 

eveniat, 

Imp. 

delectaret, 

deceret, 

continggret, 

evenlret, 

Per/. 

delectaverit, 

decuent, 

contigerit, 

evenerit, 

Plup. 

delectavisset. 

decuisset. 

contigisset. 

evenisset. 

Inf. 

Prcs. 

delectare, 

decere, 

contingere, 

e  venire, 

Per/. 

delectavisse. 

decuisse. 

contigisse. 

evenisse. 

2.  As  the  passive  voice  of  an  active  verb  may  be  substituted 
for  the  active,  (see  §  141,  Rem.)  so  that  of  a  neuter  verb  may 
be  used  in  the  third  person  singular,  instead  of  the  active  form, 
the  personal  subject  of  the  latter  being  put  in  the  ablative  with 
the  preposition  a  or  ab ;  as,  faveo  tibi,  I  favor  thee,  or  favetur 
tibi  a  me,  thou  art  favored  by  me. 


Prcs. 

pugnatur, 

Imp. 

pugnabatur, 

Fut. 

pugnabitur, 

Per/. 

pugnatum   est 

or  fuit, 

Plup.  pugnatum    erat 

or  fuerat, 

Fut.p.  pugnatum    erit 

or  merit. 

Pres. 

pugnetur, 

i?p-. 

pugnaretur, 

Ptrf. 

pugnatum  sit  or 
fuent, 

Plup.  pugnatum  esset 

or  fuisset. 

Prcs. 

pugnari, 

Perf. 

pugnatum   esse 

or  fuisse, 

Fut. 

pugnatum  iri. 

Indicative 

Mood. 

favetur, 

currltur, 

venltur, 

favebatur, 

currebatur, 

veniebatur, 

favebitur, 

curretur, 

venietur, 

fautum  est  or 

cursum  est  or 

ventum  est  or 

fuit, 

fuit, 

fuit, 

fautum  erat  or 

cursum   erat 

ventum  erat  or 

fuerat, 

or  fugrat, 

fuerat, 

fautum  erit  or 

cursum  erit  or 

ventum  erit  ot 

fuent. 

merit. 

merit. 

Subjunctive  Mood. 

faveatur, 

curratur, 

veniatur, 

faveretur, 

curreretur, 

veniretur, 

fautum  sit  or 

cursum  sit  or 

ventum  sit  or 

merit, 

merit, 

merit, 

fautum  esset 

cursum    esset 

ventum    esset 

or  fuisset. 

or  fuisset. 

or  fuisset. 

Infinitive  Mood. 

faveri, 

curri, 

veniri, 

fautum    esse 

cursum  esse 

ventum  esse  or 

or  fuisse, 

or  fuisse, 

fuisse, 

fautum  iri. 

cursum  iri. 

ventum  iri. 

In  like  manner  the  neuter  gender  of  the  participle  in  dus, 
formed  from  neuter  verbs,  is  used  impersonally  with  est,  &c, 
in  the  periphrastic  conjugation  ;  as,  moriendum  est  omnibus,  all 
must  die.     See  §  162,  15. 


Remarks. 

1.  Grammarians  usually  reckon  only  ten  real  impersonal  verbs,  all  ol 
which  are  of  the  second  conjugation.  (See  §  169.)  There  seems,  how 
ever,  to  be  no  good  reason  for  distinguishing  those  from  other  impersonal 
verbs.  The  following  are  such  other  verbs  as  are  most  commonlv  used 
impersonally : —  4 


REDl  NDANT    VERBS.  l43 

(a.)  In  the  firfrt  conjugation ; — 

Constat,  it  is  evidint.         Spectat,  it  concerns.  Certatur,  it  is  contend- 
Juvat,  it  delights.               Stat,  it  is  resolved.  ed. 

Prsestat,  it  is  better.  Vacat,  there  is  leisure.  Peccatur,  a  fault  is 

Restat,  it  remains.  committed. 

.  (b.)  In  the  second  conjugation  ; — 

Apparet,  it  appears.  Solet,  it  is  usual. 

Attlnet,  it  belongs  to.         Nocet,  it  is  hurtful.  Fletur,  there  is  weep- 
Debet,  it  ought.                   Patet,  it  is  plain.  ing. 

Displicet,  it  displeases.      Pertinet,  it  pertains.  Persuadetur.       (See 
Dolet,  it  grieves.                Placet,  it  pleases.  above,  2.) 

(c.)  In  the  third  conjugation  ; — 
Accldit,  it  happens.  Creditur,  it  is  believed.      Mittitur,  it  is  sent. 

Incipit,  it  begins.  Desinltur,  there  is  an     Scribitur,  it  is  icritien. 

Sufflcit,  it  suffices.  end. 

(d  )  In  the  fourth  conjugation  ; — 

ConvSnit,  it  is  agreed  on.  Aperltur,  it  is  opened. 

ExpSdit,  it  is  expedient.  Sentltur,  it  is  meant. 

(e.)  Among  irregular  verbs  ; — 

Abeundum  est,  it  is  ne-      Fit,  it  happens.  Prodest,  it  avails. 

cessarrj  to  depart.  Interest,  it  concerns.  Refert,  it  concerns. 

Aditur.  ( See  above,  2.)       Obest,  it  is  hurtful.  SupSrest,  it  remains. 

(/.)  To  these  may  be  added  verbs  signifying  the  state  of  the  weather,  or 
the  opera  dons  of  nature  ;  as, 

FulgQrat,  it  lightens.  Lapidat,  it  rains  stones.      Regelat,  it  thaws. 

Fulminat,  it  tftunders.       Lucescit,  it  grows  light.      Tonat,  it  thunders. 
Gflat,  it  freezes.  Ningit,  it  snows.  Vesperascit,    it    ap- 

(jrandinat,  it  hails.  Pluit,  it  rains.  proaches  evening. 

2.  Impersonal  verbs,  not  being  used  in  the  imperative,  take  the  sub- 
junctive in  its  stead  ;  a*,  delectet,  let  it  delight.  In  the  passive  voice,  their 
perfect  participles  are  used  only  in  the  neuter. 

3.  Most  of  the  impersonal  verbs  want  participles,  gerunds  and  supines 
but  pcenltet  has  a  present  participle,  futures  in  rus  ana  dus,  and  the  gerund. 
Pudet  and  piget  have  also  the  gerund  and  future  passive  participle. 

4.  Most  of  the  above  verbs  are  also  used  personally,  but  frequently  in  a 
somewhat  different  sense ;  as,  ut  TibSris  inter  eos  et  pons  inter esset,  so 
that  the  Tiber  and  bridge  were  between  them. 


REDUNDANT   VERBS. 

§  185.     Redundant  verbs  are  those  which  have  differ- 
ent forms  to  express  the  same  sense. 

Verbs  may  be  redundant  in  termination ;    as,  fabrico  and 
fabricor,  to  frame ; — in  conjugation  ;  as,  lavo,  -are,  and  lavo, 
-ere,  to  wash ; — or  in  certain  tenses  ;  as,  odi  and  osits  sum, 
hate. 


144 


REDUNDANT    VERBS. 


1.  The  following  deponent  verbs,  besides  their  passive  form, 
have  an  active  in  o,  of  the  same  meaning.  The  latter,  how- 
ever, is,  in  general,  rarely  used. 


Adalor,  to  flatter. 
Altercor,  to  dispute. 
Amplexor,  to  embrace. 
Assentior,  to  assent. 
AucQpor,  to  hunt  after. 
Augiiror,  to  foretell. 
Cachinnor,    to     laugh 

aloud. 
Com! tor,  to  accompany. 


Cunctor,  to  delay. 
Depascor,  to  feed  upon. 
Elucubror,  to  elaborate. 
Fabricor,  to  frame. 
Frustror,  to  disappoint. 
Fruticor,  to  sprout. 
Impertior,  to  impart. 
Lachrjrmor,  to  weep. 
Ludif  Icor,  to  ridicule. 


Medtcor,  to  heal. 
Mereor,  to  deserve. 
Metor,  to  measure. 
Palpor,  to  caress. 
Populor,  to  lay  waste. 
Ruminor,  to  ruminate 
Velificor,  to  set  sail. 
Vociferor,  to  bawl. 
Urinor,  to  dive. 


2.  The  following  verbs  are  redundant  in  conjugation: — 


excite. 


Cieo,  -fire,    >  . 
Cio,'-lre,rJto 
Denso,  -are,      >      to 
Denseo,-ere,r.  >  thicken. 
Ferveo,  -ere,    >    to 
Fervo,  -ere,  r.  j  boil. 
Fodio,  -ere, 


Fulgeo,  -ere 
Fulgo,  -Sre 
Lavo,  -are,     )  . 


rj 


to  Strideo,  -ere,  )     to 

shine.        Strido,  -ere,    $  creak. 


Tueor,  -eri, 


Fodio,  -Ire,  r. 


to  dig. 


Those  marked   r.   ar 
rarely  used. 


Lavo,  -ere, 
Lino,  -ere,      )      to 
Linio,  -ire,  r.  5  anoint. 
Scateo,  -ere,   )       to 
Scato,  -ere,  r.  )  abound. 

Morior,  orior,  and  potior,  also,  are  redundant  in  conjugation  in  certain 
parts.     See  in  lists  §  §  174  and  177. 

<§>  186»  1.  Some  verbs,  also,  are  spelled  alike,  or  nearly 
alike,  but  differ  in  conjugation,  quantity,  pronunciation,  ox 
signification,  or  in  two  or  more  of  these  respects. 

Such  are  the  following  : — 
to  abdi 


-are, 


-gre,  to  refuse. 
-ere,   to   hap- 

-Sre,    to    cut 


Abdico, 

cate. 
Abdico, 
Accido, 

pen. 
Accido, 

short. 
Addo,  -ere,  to  add. 
Adeo,  -ire,  to  go  to. 
Aggero,   -are,  to  heap 

up. 
Aggero,  -ere,  to  heap 

upon. 
Allego,  -are,  to  depute. 
Allego,  -ere,  to  choose. 
Appello,  -are,  to  call. 
Appello,  -ere,   to  drive 

to. 
Cado,  -ere,  to  fall. 
Caedo,  -ere,  to  cut. 
Cedo,  -ere,  to  yield. 
Caleo,  -ere,  to  be  hot. 
Calleo,  -ere,  to  be  hard. 
Cano,  -ere.  to  sing. 


Caneo,  -ere,  to  be  white. 

Careo,  -ere,  to  want. 

Caro,  -Sre,  to  card  wool. 

Celo,  -are,  to  conceal. 

Cselo,  -are,  to  carve. 

Censeo,  -ere,  to  think. 

Sentio,  -Ire,  to  feel. 

Claudo,  -ere,  to  shut. 

Claudo,  -ere,  to  be  lame. 

CollTgo,    -are,    to     tie 
together. 

Colllgo,  -ere,  to  collect. 

Colo,  -are,  to  strain. 

Colo,  -ere,  to  cultivate. 

Compello,  -are,  to  ac- 
cost. 

Coropello,  -ere,  to  force. 

Concldo,  -ere,  to  chop 
off. 

Concldo,  -ere,  to  fall. 

Conscendo,    -ere,    to 
climl). 

Conscindo, -ere    to  cut 
in  pieces. 


Consterno,  -are,  to  ter- 

rify. 
Consterno,     -ere,      to 

strew  over. 
DecTdo,   -ere,    to  fa. 

down. 
Decldo,  -6re,  to  cut  off 
Decipio,-ere,  to  deceive 
Desipio,  -ere,  to  dote. 
Deligo,  -are,  to  tie  up 
Dellgo,  -ere,  to  choose. 
Dillgo,  -ere,  to  love. 
Dlco,  -ere,  to  say. 
Dlco,  -are,  to  dedicate. 
£do,  -ere,  to  eat. 
Edo,  -ere,  to  publish. 
Educo,  -are,  to  educate. 
Educo,  -ere,   to   draw 

out. 
Effero,   -are,  to    make 

wild. 
Effero,  -re,  to  carry  out 
Excldo,  -ere,  to  fall  out 
Excldo,  -ere,  to  cut  off 


REDUNDANT    VERBS. 


145 


Feno,  -Ire,  to  strike. 

Fero,  -re,  to  bear. 

Ferior,  -ari,  to  keep  hol- 
iday. 

Frigeo,  -ere,  to  be  cold. 

Frigo,  -ere,  to  fry. 

Fugo,  -are,  to  put  to 
flight. 

Fugio,  -6" re,  to  fly 

Fundo,  -are,  to  found. 

Fundo,  -gre,  to  pour  out. 

Incido.  -ere,  tofallinto. 

Incido,  -ere,  to  cut. 

Indico,  -are,  to  show. 

Indlco,  -gre,  to  pro- 
claim. . 

Inficio,  -ere,  to  infect. 

Infitior,  -ari,  to  deny. 

Intercldo,  -ere,  to  hap- 
pen. 

Intercldo,  -ere,  to  cut 
asunder. 

Jaceo,  -ere,  to  lie  down. 

Jacio,  -gre,  to  throw. 

Labo,  -are,  to  totter. 

Labor,  -i,  to  glide. 

Lacto,  -are,  to  suckle. 

Lacto,  -are,  to  deceive. 

Lego,  -are,  to  send. 

Lggo,  -6re,  to  read. 

Liceo,  -ere,  to  be  lawful. 

Liceor,  -eri,  to  bid  for. 

Liquo,  -are,  to  melt.' 

Liqueo,  -ere,  to  be  man- 
ifest. 

Liquor,  -i,  to  melt. 

Mano,  -are,  to  flow. 


Maneo,  -ere,  to  stay. 

Mando,  -are,  to  command. 

Mando,  -ere,  to  eat. 

Meto,  -ere,  to  reap. 

Metor,  -ari,  to  measure. 

Metior,  -Iri,  to  measure. 

Metuo,  -gre,  to  fear. 

Miseror,  -ari,  to  pity. 

Misgreor,  -eri,  to  pity. 

Moror,  -ari,  to  delay. 

Morior,  -i,  to  die. 

Niteo,  -ere,  to  glitter. 

Nitor,  -i,  to  strive. 

Obsgro,  -are,  to  lock  up. 

Obsero,  -ere,  to  sow. 

Occido,  -ere,  to  fall. 

Occldo,  -ere,  to  kill. 

Operio,  -ere,  to  cover. 

Operor,  -ari,  to  work. 

Opperior,  -Iri,  to  icait 
for. 

Pando,  -are,  to  bend. 

Pando,  -fire,  to  open. 

Paro,  -are,  to  prepare. 

Pareo,  -ere,  to  appear. 

Parior  -ere,  to  bring 
forth. 

Pario,  -are,  to  balance. 

Pendeo,  -ere,  to  hang. 

Pendo,  -gre,  to  weigli. 

Percolo,  -are,  to  filter. 

Percolo,  -ere,  to  adorn. 

Permaneo,  -ere,  to  re- 
main. 

Permano,  -are,  to  flow 
over. 

Precdico,  -fire,  toj>ub!i,sh. 


Praedlco,  -gre,  to  fore 

tell. 
Prodo,  -ere,  to  betray. 
Prodeo,    -Ire,    to  com* 

forth. 
Recedo,  -fire,  to  retire. 
Recido,    -gre,    to  faU 

back. 
Recido,  -gre,  to  cut  off. 
Reddo,  -ere,  to  restore. 
Redeo,  -Ire,  to  return. 
Refgro,    -re,    to   bring 

back. 
Referio,  -Ire,  to  strike 

back. 
Relego,  -are,  to  remove. 
Relego,   -ere,    to    read 

over. 
Sedo,  -are,  to  allay. 
Se"deo,  -ere,  to  sit. 
Sido,  -ere,  to  sink. 
Sero,  -ere,  to  sow. 
Sero,  -ere,  to  knit. 
Succi'do,    -6re,  to  fall 

down. 
Succldo,    -gre,    to   cut 

down. 
Vado,  -ere,  to  go. 
Vador,  -ari,  to  give  bail. 
Veneo,  -Ire,  to  be  sold. 
Venio,  -Ire,  to  come. 
Venor,  -ari,  to  hunt. 
Vincio,  -Ire,  to  bind. 
Vmco,  -gre,  to  conquer. 
Volo,  -are,  to  fly. 
Volo,  velle,  to  be  vrill- 

iner. 


2.  Different  verbs  have  sometimes  the  same  perfect ;  as, 


Aceo,  acui,  to  be  sour. 
Acuo,  acui,  to  sharpen. 
Cresco,  crevi,  to  grow. 
Cerno,  crevi,  to  decree. 
Fulgeo,  fulsi,  to  shine. 
Fulcio,  fulsi,  to  prop. 


Luceo,  luxi,  to  shine. 
Lugeo,  luxi,  to  mourn. 
Mulceo,      mulsi,      to 

soothe. 
Mulgeo,  rnulsi,  to  milk. 
Paveo,  pavi,  to  fear. 


Pasco,  pavi,  to  feed. 
Pendeo,     pependi,     to 

hang. 
Pendo,      pependi,      to 

weirrk. 


To  these  add  some  of  the  compounds  of  sto  and  sisto. 

3.  Different  verbs  have  sometimes,  also,  the  same  supine  or 
perfect  participle  ;  as, 


Frico,  frictum,  to  rub. 
Frigo,  frictum,  to  roast. 
Maneo,  mansum,  to  remain. 
Mando,  mansum,  to  chew. 
Pango,  pactum,  to  drive  in. 
Paciscor,  pactus,  to  bargain. 

13 


Pando,  passum,  to  open. 
Patior,  passus,  to  suffer. 
Teneo,  tentum,  to  hold. 
Tendo,  tentum,  to  stretch. 
Verro,  versum,  to  brush. 
Verto,  versum,  to  turn 


146  DERIVATION    OF    VERBS. 

DERIVATION  OF  VERBS. 

$  187.  Verbs  are  derived  either  from  nouns,  adjectives,  or 
other  verbs 

I.  Verbs  derived  from  nouns  or  adjectives  are  called 
denominatives. 

1.  Those  which  are  active  are  generally  of  the  first  conjuga- 
tion ;  those  which  are  neuter  of  the  second.  They  are  usually 
formed  by  adding  o  or  eo  to  the  root ;  as, 

Actives  from  Nouns.  Neuters  from  Nouns. 

Armo,  to  arm,  (arma.)  Floreo,  to  bloom,  (flos.) 

Fraudo,  to  defraud,  (fraus.)  Frondeo,  to  produce  leaves,  (frons.) 

NomTno,  to  name,  (nomen.)  Luceo,  to  shine,  (lux.) 

Numero,  to  number,  (numerus.)  Vireo,  to  flourish,  (vis.) 

From  Adjectives. 
Albo,  to  whiten,  (albus.)  Albeo,  to  be  white,  (albus.) 

Celebro,  to  celebrate,  (celgber.)  '  Calveo,  to  be  bald,  (calvus.) 

Libero,  to  free,  (liber.)  Flaveo,  to  be  yellow,  (flavua.) 

Sometimes  a  preposition  is  prefixed  in  forming  the  deriva- 
tive ;  as, 

Coacervo,  to   heap   together,  (acer-      Extirpo,  to  extirpate,  (stirps.) 

vus.)  Illaqueo,  to  insnare,  (laqueus.) 

Excavo,  to  excavate,  (cavus.) 

2.  Many  deponents  of  the  first  conjugation,  derived  from  nouns,  express 
the  exercise  of  the  character,  office,  &c.  denoted  by  the  primitive  ;  as, 
architcctor,  to  build  ;  comltor,  to  accompany  ;  furor,  to  steal ;  from  archi- 
tect's, comes,  and  fur. 

3.  Such  as  denote  resemblance  or  imitation  are  called  imitatives ;  as, 
(ornicor,  to  imitate  a  crow,  from  comix  ;  Grmcor,  to  imitate  the  Greeks. 
Some  of  these  end  in  isso  ;  as,  patrisso,  to  imitate  a  father. 

II.  Verbs  derived  from  other  verbs  are  either  frequcntatives, 
incentives,  desideratives,  diminutives,  or  intensives. 

1.  Frequentativcs  express  the  frequent  repetition  of  the 
action  denoted  by  the  primitive. 

They  are  all  of  the  first  conjugation,  and  are  formed  from  the 
third  root.  In  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  atu  is  changed 
into  ito,  rarely  into  o ;  as,  clamo,  to  cry,  (clamatu,)  clamito, 
to  cry  frequently;  no,  to  swim,  (natu,)  nato.  In  verbs  of  the 
other  three  conjugations,  u  is  changed  into  o,  rarely  into  ito ; 
rro,  to  run,  (cursu,)  curso>  or  cursito,  to  run  frequently. 

Some  are  derived  from  the  present,  or  perhaps  from  an  obsolete  third 
root )  as,  ago,  (agitu,)  aglto  ;  cogo,  coglto. 


COMPOSITION    OF    VERBS,  147 

Some  frequentatives  are  deponent ;  as,  minltor,  from  minor  (mindtu) 
versor,  from  verto  (versu).     So  sector,  loqultor,  from  sequor  and  loquor. 

Verbs  of  this  class  do  not  always  express  frequency  of  action,  but  have 
sometimes  nearly  the  same  meaning  as  their  primitives. 

2.  Inceptives,  or  inchoatives,  mark  the  beginning,  or  increased 
degree  of  the  action  or  state  expressed  by  the  primitive. 

They  all  end  in  sco,  and  are  formed  by  adding  that  termina- 
tion to  the  root  of  the  primitive,  with  its  connecting  vowel, 
which,  in  the  third  conjugation,  is  i;  as,  caleo,  to  be  hot; 
calcsco,  to  grow  hot. 

So  labo,  tabasco  ;  ingSmo,  ingemisco ;  obdormio,  obdormisco.  Hi  sco  is 
contracted  for  hiasco,  from  hio. 

Most  inceptives  are  formed  from  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation. 

Some  inceptives  are  formed  from  nouns  and  adjectives,  by  adding  asco 
or  esco  to  the  root ;  as,  puerasco,  from  puer  ;  juvenesco,  from  jnvgnis. 

Some  inceptives  have  the  same  meaning  as  their  primitives ;  as,  adha- 
resco. 

Note.  Inceptives  are  all  neuter,  and  of  the  third  conjugation.  See  §  173. 
■  Some  verbs  in  sco  which  are  not  inceptives  are  active  j  as,  disco,  posco. 

3.  Desideratives  express  a  desire  of  doing  the  act  denoted  by 
the  primitive. 

They  are  formed  from  the  third  root,  by  shortening  the  final 
w,  and  adding  rio ;  as,  coeno,  to  sup,  (coendtu,)  camaturio,  to 
desire  to  sup. 

Desideratives  are  all  of  the  fourth  conjugation.     See  §  176,  Notk. 
Verbs  in  urio,  having  u  long,  are  not  desideratives ;  as,  prurio,  dtcHrio. 

4.  Diminutives  denote  a  feeble  or  trifling  action.  They  are 
formed  by  adding  illo  to  the  root  of  the  primitive ;  as,  eantillo, 
to  sing  a  little — from  canto. 

They  are  few  in  number,  and  are  all  of  the  first  conjugation. 

5.  Intensives  denote  eager  action.  They  are  usually  formed 
by  adding  esso  or  isso  to  the  root  of  the  primitive;  as,  Jacesso, 
to  act  earnestly — from  facio. 

So  capesso,  arccsso,  from  capio  and  arceo.  Concupisco,  to  desire  greatly, 
is  also  an  intensive. 


COMPOSITION  OF  VERBS. 

§  188.     Verbs  are  compounded  variously  : — 

1.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb;  as,  cedifico,  belligero,  lucrifacio. 

2.  Of  an  adjective  and   a  verb;  as,  amptifico,  multiplico, 
Mipendo. 

3.  Of  two  verbs;  as,  calefacio,  madefacio,  patefacio. 

4.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  verb  ;  as,  benefacio,  malcdico,  saiago 
nolo 


Carpo, 

Farcio, 

Jacto, 

Pario, 

Patro, 

"  Spargo, 

Damno, 

Fatiscor, 

Lac  to, 

Partio, 

Sacro, 

Tracto. 

Fallo, 

Gradior, 

Mando, 

Patior, 

Scando, 

148  COMPOSITION    OF    VERBS. 

5.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  verb  ;  as,  addiico,  cxcolo,  prodo, 
subrepo,  discerno,  sejungo. 

6.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun  ;  as,  pcrnocto,  irretio. 

<§>  189.  In  composition,  certain  changes  often  occur  in  the 
radical  letters  of  the  simple  verb. 

1.  The  following  simple  verbs  in  composition  change  a  into  e : 

Arceo, 

Candeo, 

Capto, 

Exc.  A  is  retained  in  amando,  pramando,  desacro,  and  retracto ;  prce.- 
damno  and  pertracto  sometimes  also  occur.  A  is  also  changed  into  e  in 
depeciscor  from  paciscor,  occcnto  from  canto,  and  anhelo  from  Iialo  ;  com- 
perco  also  is  found. 

2.  The  following  change  a,  cc,  and  c ,  into  * : 

Ago,  Capio,  Habeo,  Pango,  Rego,  Statuo, 

Apiscor,  Egeo,  Jacio,  Placeo,  f  Salio,  {to  leap,)  Taceo, 

Cado,  Emo,  Lacio,  Premo,  Sapio,  Tango, 

Caedo,  Fateor,  Lasdo,  Qusero,  Sedeo,  Teneo. 

Cano,  Frango,  Lateo,  Rapio,  Specio, 

Exc.  A  is  retained  in  circumdgo,  perago,  satago  ;  antehabco,  posthabeo; 
depango,  repango  ;  complaceo  ana  perplaceo.  Occano  and  recano  also  some- 
times occur.  E  is  retained  in  coemo,  circumsedco,  and  supersedeo.  Ante 
eapio  and  anticipo  are  both  used ;  so  also  are  superjacio  and  superjicio. 

Cogo  and  dego  are  formed,  by  contraction,  from  con,  de,  and  ago  ;  demo, 
promo,  and  sumo,  from  de,  pro,  sub,  and  emo  ;  prmbeo,  and  perhaps  debeo, 
from  pro.,  de,  and  habeo  ;  per  go  and  surgo,  from  per,  svb,  and  rego. 

Note  1.  Facio,  compounded  with  a  preposition,  changes  a  into  i;  as, 
officio.  Some  compounds  of  facio  with  nouns  and  adjectives,  change  a 
into  t,  and  also  drop  i  before  o,  and  are  of  the  first  conjugation ;  as,  signi- 
fico,  lcetiflco,magniflco.  Specio  forms  some  compounds  in  the  same  man- 
aer ;  as,  consplcor  and  susplcor. 

Note  2.  Lego,  compounded  with  con,  de,  di,  e,  inter,  nee,  and  se,  changes 
«  into  i;  as,  colllgo,  negligo,  &c. ;  but  with  ad,  pra,  per,  re,  sub,  and  trans, 
h  retains  e  ;  as,  allggo. 

Note  3.  Calco  and  salto,  in  composition,  change  a  into  u;  as,  inculco, 
insulto.  Plaudo  changes  au  into  o  ;  as,  explodo;  except  applaudo.  Audio 
changes  aw  into  e  in  obedio.  Causo,  claudo,  and  quatio,  drop  a  ;  as,  accuso, 
recludo,  percutio.    Juro  changes  u  into  e  in  dejero  and  pejgro 

Note  4.  The  simple  verbs  with  which  the  following  are 
compounded  are  not  used  : — 

Defendo,  Impedio,  Confuto,  Instlgo,  Conniveo, 

Offendo,  Imbuo,  Refuto,  Impleo,  Percello, 

Experior,  Compello,  (-are,)  Ingruo,  Compleo,  Induo,        and  some 

Expedio,  Appello,  (-are,)  Congruo,  Renideo,  Exuo,  others. 

For  the  changes  produced  in  prepositions  by  composition  with  verba 
see  §  196,  I. 


ADVERBS. 


149 


PARTICLES. 

§  190.  The  parts  of  speech  which  are  not  inflected,  are 
called  by  the  general  name  of  particles.  They  are  adverbs 
prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  interjections.  A  word  may 
sometimes  belong  to  two  or  more  of  these  classes,  according  to 
its  connection. 


ADVERBS. 

An  adverb  is  a  particle  used  to  modify  or  limit  the  mean- 
ing of  a  verb,  an  adjective,  or  another  adverb ;  as,  bene  et 
sapienter  dixit,  he  spoke  well  and  wisely ;  egregie  fidelist 
remarkably  faithful ;  valde  bene,  very  well. 

Remark.  The  modifications  of  adjective3  and  verbs  which  are  effected 
by  adverbs,  may  also  generally  be  made  by  means  of  the  oblique  cases  of 
nouns  and  adjectives ;  and  many  modifications  may  be  denoted  by  these, 
for  expressing  which  no  adverbs  are  in  use.  In  general,  those  modifica- 
tions which  are  most  common  are  expressed  by  adverbs.  Thus,  for  cum 
sapientid,  sapienter  is  used;  Ale,  for  in  hoc  loco;  bend,  for  in  bono  mo  do  ; 
nunc,  for  hoc  tempore,  &c. 

Adverbs  are  divided  into  various  classes,  according  to  the 
nature  of  the  modification  denoted  by  them;  as  adverbs  of 
place,  time,  manner,  6lc. 

$191.  The  following  lists  contain  a  great  part  of  the  more 
common  adverbs,  except  those  which  are  formed,  with  certain 
regular  terminations,  from  nouns,  adjectives,  and  participles. 
These  will  be  noticed  subsequently. 

I.  Adverbs  of  Place  and  Order. 


Alia,  by  another  way. 

Alibi,  elsewhere. 

Alicubi,  somewhere. 

Alicunde,  from  some 
place. 

Alio,  to  another  place. 

Allquo,  to  some  place. 

Aliunde,  from  else- 
where. 

Dehinc,  henceforth. 

Deinceps,  successively. 

Deinde,  after  tliat. 

Denlque,  fin  ally. 

Denuo,  again. 

Deorsum,  downward. 

Dextrorsum,  towards 
the  rig  lit. 

Ea,  that  way. 

13* 


E6,  to  that  place. 
Eodem,  to    the    same 

place. 
Exinde,  after  that. 
Foras,  out  of  doors. 
Foris,  without. 
Hac,  this  way. 
Hie,  here. 
Hinc,  hence. 
Hue,  hither. 
Horsum,  hitherward. 
Ibi,  there.  [place. 

Ibidem,  in   the   same 
Iliac,  that  way. 
Ulic,  there. 
11  line,  thence. 
Illorsum,  thitherward. 
1116,  thitlier. 


Illuc,  thither. 
Inde,  then,  thevce. 
Indldem,  from  the  same 

place. 
Intrd,  )     .,, . 

IntrorsumJ^"1' 
Intus,  within. 
Istac,  that  way. 
Istic,  there. 
Istinc,  thence. 

\lttuc,}thither- 
Necubi,  lest  any  where. 
Neutro,  neither  way. 
Nusqnam,  no  where. 
Forro,  moreover. 
Prorsum,  forward. 
Qua  ?  by  which  way  7 


150 


ADVERBS. 


Sinistrorsum,  towards 
the  left. 


Quo  ?  ichithcr  7 

Quorsum?  whitherward?  ttie  lejt. 

Retro,  }  Sursum,  upward. 

Retrorsum,  >  backward       Ubi  ?  where  7 
Rursum,      ) 
Sicubi,  if  any  where. 
Sicunde,   if  from   any 
place. 

Remark  1.     Most  adverbs  of  place  which  answer  the  ques 
tions  where  ?   whence  ?    whither  ?    by  which  way  1    and  whith- 
ertoard?  have  a  mutual  relation  and  resemblance  : — Thus, 


Ubi  que,  every  where. 
Ubivis,  any  where. 
Unde  ?  whence  7 
Undlque  ,from  all  sides. 


}}sPiam'  ]  any  where. 
Usquam, )      y 

Utrinque,  on  both  sides 

Utro  ?  which  way  7 

Utrobi  ?  in  which  place  7 

Utroblque,    in    loth 

places. 

Utroque,  each  way. 


Ubi? 
Hie, 

Illic, 
Istic, 

Ibi, 

Ibidem, 

Alibi, 

Alicubi, 

Unde  ? 

Hinc, 

Illinc, 

Istinc, 

Inde, 

Indidem, 

Aliunde, 

Alicunde, 

Quo? 

Hue, 

Illuc, 

Istuc, 

E6, 

Eodem, 

Alio, 

Aliquo, 

Qua? 

Hac, 

Iliac, 

Istac, 

Ea, 

Eadem, 

Alia, 

Alfqua, 

Quorsum  ? 
Horsum, 
Illorsum, 
Istorsum, 

t 

Aliorsum, 
Aliquoversum. 

Rem.  2.  Hlc,  hinc,  hue,  refer  to  the  place  of  the  speaker  ; 
istic,  istinc,  istuc,  to  the  place  of  the  person  addressed;  and 
illic,  illinc,  illuc,  to  that  of  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of. 

II.  Adverbs  of  Time. 


Aliquando,  sometimes. 
Aliquoties,    several 

times. 
Bis,  (see  §  119,)  twice. 
Cras,  to-morrow. 
Cum,  when. 
Deraura,  at  length. 
Diu,  long. 
Dudum,  heretofore. 
Heri,  yesterday. 
Hodie,  to-day. 
Identldeir,  now  and 

then. 
Illico,  immediately. 
Interdum,  sometimes. 
Interim,  in  the  mean 

time. 
ItSrum,  again. 
Jam,  now. 
Jamdiu,        >  , 
JamdudumJ^fl^ 


Jamjam,  presently. 

Jamprldem,  long  since. 

Mox,  immediately. 

Nondum,  not  yet. 

Nonnunquam,  some- 
times. 

Nudius   tertius,   three 
days  ago. 

Nunc,  noio. 

Nunquam,  never. 

Nuper,  lately. 

Olim,  formerly. 

Parumper,  a  little  while. 

Perendie,    two  days 
hence. 

Postridie,  the  day  after. 

Pridem,  heretofore. 

Pridie,  the  day  before. 

Protlnus,  instantly. 

Quamdiu  ?  how  long  ? 

Quando  ?  when  7 


Quater,/our  times. 

Quondam ,  formerly. 

Quotidie,  daily. 

Quoties  ?  how  often  7 

Raro,  seldom. 

Rursus,  again. 

Srepe,  often. 

Semel,  once. 

Semper,  always. 

Statim,  immediately. 

Subinde,wott>  and  then, 

frequently. 

Tamdiu,  so  long. 

Tandem,  at  length. 

Ter,  thrice. 

Toties,  so  often. 

Turn,  )  ., 
q.„'  [then. 
I  unc,  y 

Vicissim,  by  turns. 

Unquam,  ever. 


Rem.  3.  Some  adverbs  are  used  to  denote  either  place,  time,  or  order, 
according  to  the  connection  : — Thus, 

Ubi  may  signify  either  where  or  when ;  inde,  from  that  place  or  time ; 
hactenus,  hitherto,  in  regard  to  place  or  time. 

Rem.  4.  The  interrogative  adverbs,  like  the  interrogative  pronouns, 
are  often  used  indefinitely ;  as,  nescio  ubi  sit,  I  know  not  where  he  is 
(See  §  137,  Note.)     They  are  made  general  by  adding  vis,  libet,  or  que; 


DERIVATION    OF    ADVERBS. 


151 


as,  ubivis,  ubique,  every  where  ;  undclibet,  from  every  where.  The  ter- 
mination cunque  is  equivalent  to  the  English  soever  ;  as,  ubicunque,  where- 
soever. The  repetition  of  an  adverb  has  sometimes  the  same  effect  j  as, 
quoqud,  whithersoever ;  ubiubi,  wheresoever. 


III.  Adverbs  of 

Ade6,  so,  to  such  a  pass 
AdmSdum,  very  muck. 
Aliter,  otherwise. 
An?  whether? 
Ceu,  as,  like  as. 
Cur?  why? 
Duntaxat,  only,  at  least 
Etiam,  truly,  yes. 
Fere,  almost. 
Ferine,  almost,  nearly. 
Fortasse,  perhaps. 
Frustra,  in  vain. 
Gratis,  freely. 
Haud,  not. 
Immo,  yes,  truly. 
Ita,  so. 

Itidem,  in  like  manner 
Juxta,  alike. 
Magis,  more. 
Modo,  only. 
Nae,  verily. 
Ne,  not. 

Nedum,  much  less. 
Nempe,  to  icit,  truly. 
Nequaquam,  >  by  no 


5  ma 


Neutlquam,   y  means 
Nimlrum,  certainly. 
Nimis,  too  much. 


Manner,  Quality,  &,c. 

Nimium,  too  much. 

Non,  not. 

Num  ?  whether  ? 

Omnino,  altogether,  only. 

Palam,  openly. 

Parlter,  equally. 

Parum,  little. 

Paula  tim,  by  degrees. 

Paulo,     >     ,.„, 

PaulumJ"^ 

Paene  ^  almost. 

Pemtus,  within,  wholly. 

Perquam,  very  much. 

Plerumque,  for  the 
most  part. 

Potius,  rather. 

Praesertim,  especially. 

Profecto,  truly. 

Prope,  almost,  near. 

Prope  modum,  almost. 

Prorsus,  wholly. 

Quarn,  as. 

Quamobrem,  ichere- 
fore. 

Quare?  why?  where- 
fore? 

Quasi,  as  if,  almost.^ 

Quemadmodum,  as. 


Quomodo?  how?   in 

what  manner  ? 
Sane,  truly. 
Satis,  enough. 
Satius,  rather. 
Scilicet,  truly. 
Sec  us,  otherwise. 
Seorsum,  separately. 
Sic,  so. 
Sicut,   ) 
SicutiJ"5' 
Sigillatim,  one  by  one. 
Simul,  together. 
Solum,  only. 
Tarn,  so. 
Tanquam,  as  if. 
Tantum,  >      , 

Tantumn.odoJ07^ 
Una,  together. 
Ut,  as. 
Uti,  as. 

Utique, therefore,  verily. 
Utpote,  as,  inasmuch  as. 
V aide,  very  much. 
Velut,  >        ,.; 
Ve\Qti,las>hkeas' 
Videlicet,  certainly. 
Vix,  scarcely. 


Rem.  5.  Adverbs  denoting  quality,  manner,  &c,  are  sometimes  di- 
vided into  those  of,  1.  Quality;  as,  bent,  mate.  2.  Certainty;  as,  certh, 
plane.  3.  Contingence;  as,  forte.  4.  Negation;  as,  haud,  non.  5.  Prohi 
bition ;  as,  ne.  6.  Swearing ;  as,  hercle.  7.  Explaining ;  as,  videlicet, 
utpdte.  8.  Separation ;  as,  seorsum.  9.  Joining  together ;  as,  simul, 
una.  10.  Interrogation;  as,  cur?  quart?  11.  Quantity  or  degree;  as, 
satis,  aded.  12.  Excess;  as,  valde,  maximt.  13.  Defect;  as,  parum, 
pome.  14.  Preference;  as,  potiks,  satius.  15. » Likeness ;  as,  ita,  sic. 
16.  Unlikeness;   as,  aliter.     17.  Exclusion;  as,  tantum,  solum. 


DERIVATION   OF  ADVERBS. 

§  192.     Adverbs  are  derived  from  nouns,  adjectives,  pro- 
nouns, and  participles. 

I.  From  nouns. 

1.  Of  these  a  few  end  in  im,  and  denote  manner ;  as, 
gregdtim,  in  herds  ;  membrdtim,  limb  by  limb;  partim,  by  parts;  vicis* 
tim,  by  turns;  from  grex,  membrum,  pars,  and  vicis. 


152  DERIVATION    OF    ADVERBS. 

2.  Some  end  in  itus,  and  denote  manner  or  origin ;  as, 
cadltus,  from   heaven ;   fundUus,  from  the  bottom ;    radicXtus,  by  the 

roots;  from  caelum, fundus,  and  radix. 

3.  Some  are  ablative  cases  of  nouns  used  adverbially ;  as, 
modd,  only ;  vulgd,  commonly. 

II.  From  adjectives. 

1.  Those  which  are  derived  from  adjectives  of  the  first  and 
second  declension,  are  generally  formed  by  adding  e  to  the  root  ; 
as, 

agrd,  scarcely ;  alt£,  high  ;  liblre,  freely  ;  longt,  far ;  misert,  miserably ; 
plenk,  fully ;  from  ager,  altus,  liber,  longus,  miser,  and  plenus.  Bent,  well, 
is  from  bonus,  or  an  older  form  benus. 

A  few  end  in  iter,  itus,  and  im  ;  as, 

navlter,  actively;  aliter,  otherwise;  antiquitus,  anciently;  divinltus, 
divinely ;  privdtim,  privately  ;  singuldtim,  severally ;  from  navus,  alius, 
antiquus,  divlnus,  privdtus,  and  singuli. 

Some  adverbs  are  formed  with  two  or  more  of  the  above  terminations 
with  the  same  meaning ;  as,  duri  and  dutltcr,  harshly  :  so  caulk,  and  cau- 
tim  ;  humane* ,  humanlter,  and  kumanitus  ;  publlce  and  publicltus. 

2.  Adjectives  of  the  third  declension  form  adverbs  by  adding 
iter  to  the  root,  except  when  it  ends  in  t,  in  which  case  er  only 
is  added  ;  as, 

acrlter,  sharply  ;  feliciter,  happily  ;  turplter,  basely ; — eleganter,  ele- 
gantly ;  prudenter,  prudently  ;  from  acer,  felix,  turpis,  elegans,  and  pru- 
dens. 

From  omnis  is  formed  omnlno. 

3.  From  the  cardinal  numerals  are  formed  numeral  adverbs 
in  ies ;  as, 

quinquies,  decies,  from  quinque  and  decern.  So  toties  and  quoties,  from 
to*  and  quot.     See  §  119. 

4.  Some  adverbs  are  merely  certain  cases  of  adjectives. 
Such  are, 

(a.)  Ablatives  in  o  or  a  ;  as,  citd,  quickly ;  continud,  immediately ;  falsd, 
falsely  ;  rectd,  straight  on  ;  und,  together.  In  like  manner,  repentd,  sud- 
denly, from  repcns.  ' 

(b.)  Nominatives  or  accusatives  neuter,  in  the  singular,  and  sometimea 
in  the  plural ;  as,  solum,  only  ;  perfldiim,  perfidiously  ;  sublimk,  on  high; 
facilb,  easily;  multa,  much  ;  tristia,  sadly. 

(c.)  From  some  adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declension,  chiefly 
ordinal  adjectives,  forms  both  in  um  and  o  are  used;  as,  primitm  and 
prima,  first ;  postrtmkm  and  postremo,  finally. 

Note  1.  These  adverbs  are  properly  adjectives  agreeing  with  some 
noun  understood,  either  definite,  as,  rectd,  sc.  vid,  or  indefinite.  Those 
in  o  are  the  most  numerous.     The  plural  forms  occur  chiefly  in  poetry. 

Note  2.  Some  adjectives,  from  the  nature  of  their  signification,  have 
no  corresponding  adverbs.  Of  some  others,  also,  none  occur  in  the 
classics. 


COMPOSITION    OF    ADVERBS.  153 

III.  From  the  adjective  pronouns  are  derived  adverbs  of 
place,  Slc.     (See  §  191,  Rem.  1.) 

The  ablative  in  o  is  used  to  denote  a  place  whither,  instead  of  the  accu- 
sative with  a  preposition  ;  as,  ed  for  ad  cum  locum  ;  and  the  ablative  in  a, 
to  denote  by  or  through  a  place ;  as,  hac  ;  vid  or  parte  being  understood. 

IV.  From  participles  are  derived  adverbs  denoting  manner. 
Those  from  present  participles  are  formed  by  adding  cr  to  the 
root ;  those  from  perfects  by  adding  e,  and  sometimes  im ;  as, 

amantcr,  lovingly  ;  propcranter,  hastily  ;  from  arnans  and  proptrans  ; — 
doctt,  learnedly ;  orndth,  elegantly;  raptim,  by  rapine ;  strictim,  closely  ; 
from  doctus,  orndtus,  raptus,  and  strictus. 

The  ablative  in  o  of  some  perfect  participles,  like  that  of  adjectives, 
is  used  adverbially  ;  as,  auspicdto,  auspiciously  ;  consultd,  designedly. 

Note.  A  few  adverbs  are  derived  from  prepositions;  as,  clanculumf 
privately  ;  from  clam  ; — suldus,  beneath  ;  from  sub. 


COMPOSITION   OF   ADVERBS. 

<§>  193.      Adverbs  are  compounded  variously: — 

1.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun ;  as,  postridie,  magnoplre,  summopire, 
multimodis,  quotannis — of  posiiro  die,  magno  opSre,  summo  oplre,  rnultis 
modis,  quot  annis. 

2.  Of  a  pronoun  and  a  noun ;  as,  hodie,  quark ,  quomddd — of  hoc  die, 
qud  re,  &c. 

3.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun ;  as,  nudius,  sapcnume'ro — of  nunc  dies, 
&c. 

4.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun ;  as,  comlnus,  eminus,  illico,  obviam, 
postm&do,  propediem — of  con,  e,  and  manus  ;  in  and  loco  ;  oh  and  viam,  &c. 

5.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  pronoun;  as,  alio qui,  ceteroqui — of alius,  ceterus, 
and  qui. 

6.  Of  a  pronoun  and  an  adverb  ;  as,  aliquandiu,  alicuhi — of  aliquis,  diu, 
and  uhi  ;  nequdquam — of  ne  and  quisquam. 

7.  Of  two  verbs  ;  as,  Meet,  scilicet,  videlicet — of  ire,  scire,  viderc,  and 
licet.  , 

8.  Of  a  verb  and  an  adverb  ;  as,  quolihet,  ublvis,  undelibet.  So  dein- 
ceps — from  dein  and  capio. 

9.  Of  a  participle  with  various  parts  of  speech;  as,  deorsum,  dextrorsum, 
horsum,  retrorsum,  sursum — of  de,  dexter,  hie,  retro,  super,  and  vorsus  or 
versus. 

10.  Of  two  adverbs ;  as,  jamdudum,  quousque,  sicut. 

11.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adjective;  as,  denuo,  imprimis — of  de  novo, 
in  primis. 

12.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  pronoun ;  as,  quapropter,  postea,  interea,  prce- 
terea — of  propter  qua,  post  ea,  &c. 

13.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adverb ;  as,  ahhinc,  adhuc,  derepente,  per- 
sape. 


154  COMPARISON    OF    ADVERBS. PREPOSITIONS. 

14.  Of  two   or   three   prepositions ;    as,   ins&per,  prottnus,  inde,  dein, 
deinde,  perinde. 

15.  Of  a  conjunction  and  an  adverb     as,  necubi,  sictibi — of  ne,  si,  and 
alicubi. 

16.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  termination  scarcely  used  except  in  composition; 
as,  ibidem,  parumper,  quandocunque,  ubique,  utcunque. 

17.  Of  three  different  parts  of  speech ;    as,  forsitan — of  fors,  sit,  an  ; 
quemadmddum,  quamobrem,  &c. 


COMPARISON    OF    ADVERBS. 

<§>  194.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  with  the  termina- 
tions e  and  tcr,  and  most  of  those  in  o,  are  compared  like  their 
primitives.  The  comparative,  like  the  neuter  comparative  of 
the  adjective,  ends  in  ius;  the  superlative  is  formed  from  the 
superlative  of  the  adjective  by  changing  us  into  e ;  as, 

durb,  duriiis,  durisslmt  ;  factU,facilius,facilllmt;  acrlter,  acriiis,  accr- 
flmt  ;  rard,  rarius,  rarisslmt. 

Some  adverbs  have  superlatives  in  o  or  urn, ;  as,  meritissimd,  plurlmum, 
primd  or  primum,  potisslmum. 

If  the  comparison  of  the  adjective  is  irregular  or  defective, 
that  of  the  adverb  is  so  likewise ;  as, 

bent,  melius,  opVlmh  ;  malt,  pejus,  pesslmt  ;  pariim-,  minus ,  mirilmb  ; 
multd  or  multiim,  plus,  pluflmum  ;  — ,  prlus,  primd  or  primum  ;  — ,  ociiis, 
ocisslmt  ;  merltd,  — ,  meritissimd  ;  satis,  satiiis,  — .  Magis,  maxlmb, 
(from  magnus,)  has  no  positive;  nuper,  nuperflmt,  has  no  comparative. 

Diu  and  sape,  though  not  derived  from  adjectives,  are  yet  compared ; — 
diu,  diutius,  diutissfme ;  sape,  sajrius,  sapisslme.  A  comparative  tempe- 
rius,  from  temperi  or  temp6ri,  also  sometimes  occurs. 

Adverbs,  like  adjectives,  are  sometimes  compared  by  prefix- 
ing magis  and  maxime ;  as,  magis  aperte,  maxtme  accommodate. 


PREPOSITIONS. 

§  195.  A  preposition  is  a  particle  which  expresses  the 
relation  between  a  noun  or  pronoun  and  some  preceding 
word. 

Twenty-six  prepositions  have  an  accusative  after  them  : — 

Ad,  to,  at,  for,  before.  Circa,     >  around,  Erga,  towards, opposite 

Adversus,   )  against,  Circum, )      about.  Extra,  without,  beyond 

Adversum,  )  towards.  Circlter,  about,  near.  besides. 

Ante,  before.  Cis,     )  on  this  side,  Infra,  under,  beneath. 

Apud,  at,  with,  among,  Citra,  5      without.  Inter,  between,  among, 

before.  Contra,  against,  opposite.         at,  in  time  of. 


PREPOSITIONS    IK    COMPOSITION.  155 

Intra,  within.  Post,   after,    since,  be-  Secundum,    according 
Juxta,  near.                              hind.  to,  along,    next    to, 

Ob,  for,  on  account  of,  Prreter,  beyond,  except,  for. 

before.  m  contrary  to,  before.  Supra,  above. 

Penes,  in  the  power  of.  Prope,  nigh,  by,  beside.  Trans,  over,  beyond. 

Per,  through, by,  during.  Propter,  for,  on  account  Ultra,  beyond. 
Pone,  behind.                             of,  near. 

Eleven  prepositions  have  an  ablative  after  them  : — 

A,    }  Cum,  with.  Prae,  before,  for,  on  ac- 

Ab,  C  from,  by,  after.  De,    of,    concerning,  count  of,  in  compar- 

Abs,)                                         from,  after,  for.  isonof. 

Absque,  without,    but  E,    }from,  of,  out  of,  Pro,  for,  before,  corisid- 

for.  Ex,  J        by,  for,  since.  ering,  according  to. 

Coram,  before,  in  pres-  Palam,  before,  with  the  Sine,  without. 

ence  of.                                 knowledge  of.  Tenus,  as  far  as,  up  to. 

Five  prepositions  take  after  them  sometimes  an  accusative, 
and  sometimes  an  ablative : — 

In,  in,  into.     Sub,  under,  near.     Super,  above.      Subter,  under,  beneath. 

Clam,  without  the  knowledge  of. 

Remark  1.  Prepositions  are  so  called,  because  they  are  generally 
placed  before  the  noun  or  pronoun  whose  relation  they  express.  They 
sometimes,  however,  stand  after  it. 

Rem.  2.  A  is  used  only  before  consonants ;  ab  before  vowels,  and 
sometimes  before  consonants ;  abs  before  q  and  t. 

E  is  prefixed  only  to  consonants,  ex  both  to  vowels  and  consonants. 

Rem.  3.  Versus,  towards,  and  usque,  as  far  as,  which  by  some  are 
considered  prepositions,  seem  to  be  more  properly  classed  with  adverbs. 
Palam  also  is  commonly  an  adverb.  Secus,  in  the  sense  of  by,  along, 
wants  good  authority." 

PREPOSITIONS  IN  COMPOSITION. 

$196.  Prepositions  are  compounded  with  various  parts  of 
speech.  In  composition,  they  may  be  considered  either  in 
reference  to  their  form,  or  their  force. 

I.  Prepositions  in  composition  sometimes  retain  their  final 
consonants,  and  sometimes  change  them,  to  adapt  them  to  the 
sounds  of  the  initial  consonants  of  the  words  with  which  they 
are  compounded.  In  some  words,  both  forms  are  in  use  ;  in 
others,  the  final  consonant  or  consonants  are  omitted. 

1.  A,  in  composition,  is  used  only  before  to  and  v ;  as,  amoveo,  avello. 
Ab  is  used  before  vowels,  and  before  d,f,  h,j,  I,  n,  r,  and  s;  as,  abjuro, 
abrdgo,  &c.  Abs  occurs  only  before  c,  q,  and  t;  as,  abscondo,  absque, 
abstineo.  In  asporto,  b  is  dropped  ;  in  auftro  and  aufugio,  it  is  changed 
into  u. 

2.  Ad  often  changes  d  into  c,  f,  g,  I,  n,  p,  r,  s,  t,  before  those  letters 
respectively ;  as,  accedo,  affiro,  aggredior,  allego,  annltor,  appdno,  arflgo 
assiquor,  attollo.     D  is  usually  omitted  before  s  followed  by  a  consonant 


156  PREPOSITIONS    IN    COM  POSITION. 

and    before  gn ;  as,  aspergo,  aspicio,  agnosco,  agndtus.     Before  q,   d  is 
changed  into  c  ;  as,  acquiro. 

3.  Circiim  usually  omits  m  before  a  vowel ;  as,  circueo,  circultus.  It 
■ometimes  changes  m  into  n  before  d  ;  as,  circundo. 

4.  Cum  (in  composition,  com)  retains  m  before  b,  m,  p ;  as,  comblbo, 
committo,  compono :  before  I,  n,  r,  its  m  is  changed  into  those  letters 
respectively ;  as,  coltlgo,  connxtor,  corripio  :  before  other  consonants,  it 
becomes  » ;  as,  conduco,  conjungo,  &c.  Before  a  vowel,  gn  or  h,  m  is 
commonly  omitted;  as,  cogo,  coopto,  cogo  (com  ago),  cognosco,  cohablto ; 
but  it  is  sometimes  retained ;  as,  comldo,  comes,  comltor.  In  comburo,  b 
is  inserted. 

5.  Ex  is  prefixed  to  vowels,  and  to  c,  h,  p,  q,  s,  t ;  as,  ezco,  ezigo,  ex- 
curro,  ezhibeo,  expedio,  &c.  Before  /,  x  is  changed  into  /;  as,  effi.ro  : 
before  s}  it  is  often  omitted  ;  as,  exgquor.  E  is  prefixed  to  the  other  con- 
sonants ;  as,  cbibo,  edico,  &c.  These,  with  the  exception  of  n  and  r,  are 
also  very  rarely  preceded  by  ex  ;  as,  exmovco.  P  is  sometimes  preceded 
by  e  ;  as,  epoto. 

C.  In,  before  b,  m,  p,  changes  n  into  m  ;  as,  imbuo,  immitto,  impono  : 
before  I  and  r,  it  changes  n  into  those  letters  respectively ;  as,  illigo, 
irretio :  before  gn,  n  is  omitted ;  as,  ignarus.  In  some  compounds,  in 
retains  d  before  a  vowel,  from  an  ancient  form  indu  ;  as,  inddgo,  indigeo, 
indolesco. 

7.  Ob  changes  b  into  c,  f,  g,  p,  before  those  letters  respectively ;  as, 
occurro,  officio,  ogganio,  oppUo.     In  omitto,  b  is  dropped. 

8.  Per  changes  r  into  I  in  pellicio  and  pelluceo. 

9.  Pro  sometimes  takes  d  before  a  vowel;  as, prodco, prodesse. 

10.  Sub  sometimes  changes  b  into  c,  f,  g,  m,  p,  r,  before  those  letters 
respectively  ;  as,  succedo,  svff&ro,  suggero,  summoveo,  supplico,  surripio. 
Before  c,  p,  and  t,  b  is  sometimes  changed  into  s ;  as,  suscipio,  suspendo, 
sustollo  :  it  is  omitted  before  s,  followed  by  a  consonant ;  as,  suspicio. 

11.  Trans  omits  s  before  s  ;  as,  transcendo  :  before  other  consonants,  it 
often  omits  ns ;  as,  trajicio,  tramitto,  trano,  &c. 

The  following  words  are  called  inseparable  prepositions, 
because  they  are  found  only  in  composition  : — 

Amb,  around,  about.  lied  or  re,  again,  back.  Ve,  not. 

Dis  or  di,  asunder.  Se,  apart,  aside. 

12.  Amb  before  a  vowel  is  unchanged ;  as,  ambarvalis,  ambio,ambustus  : 
before  consonants,  b  is  omitted,  and  m,  except  before  p,  is  changed  into  n  ; 
as,  anfractus,  anquxro,  amputo. 

IS.  Dis  is  prefixed  to  words  beginning  with  c.p,  q,  s,  t;  as,  discutio, 
disjtono,  disquiro,  dissero,  distendo  :  before  /,  s  is  changed  into  //  as, 
diffcro  :  in  dirivw,  s  becomes  r.  Di  is  prefixed  to  the  other  consonants, 
and  to  s  when  followed  by  a  consonant ;  as,  diduco,  dimitlo,  distinguo, 
dispicio.  But  both  dis  and  di  are  used  before  j  and  r  ;  as,  disjungo,  diju- 
(tlco,  disrumpo  or  dirumpo. 

14.  Red  is  used  before  a  vowel  or  h ;  re  before  a  consonant;  a.s,rcddmo, 
rrdco,  redhibeo,  rcdlgo,  redoleo,  redundo  ; — rejicio,  repono,  rcvertor.  But 
red  is  used  before  do  ;  as,  reddo. 

1"».  Se  and  xt  are  prefixed  without  change ;  as,  scce~do,  securus  ;  vegran- 

4h.  rrr-  TR, 


CONJUNCTIONS.  157 

«§>  197.  II.  Prepositions  in  composition  usually  add  their 
own  signification  to  that  of  the  word  with  which  they  are 
united ;  but  sometimes  they  give  to  the  compound  a  meaning 
different  from  that  of  its  simples,  as  in  the  following  exam- 
ples : — 

1.  A,  with  a  noun,  sometimes  denotes  privation  ;  as,  amens,  mad. 

2.  Ad  is  sometimes  intensive ;  as,  adamo,  to  love  greatly ;  adbibo,  to 
drink  much. 

3.  De  often  signifies  downward;  as;  descendo,  to  descend;  decldo,  to 
fall  down.  It  is  sometimes  intensive ;  as,  dedmo,  to  love  greatly ;  de- 
mlror,  &c.  Sometimes  it  denotes  privation;  as,  despero,  to  despair; 
dcmens,  mad ;  decolor,  discolored. 

4.  Dis  is  sometimes  intensive ;  as,  discupio,  to  desire  greatly ;  and 
sometimes  negative  ;  as,  dissimllis,  unlike. 

5.  E  and  ex  are  sometimes  intensive  ;  as,  exoro,  to  beg  earnestly ;  ex- 
audio,  to  hear  perfectly.  Sometimes  they  denote  privation ;  as,  cxsanguis, 
bloodless ;  exspes,  hopeless. 

6.  In,  with  adjectives,  generally  denotes  negation ;  as,  infldus,  unfaithful ; 
indignus,  unworthy.  In  some  compounds,  it  has  contrary  significations, 
according  as  they  are  participles  or  adjectives ;  as,  invocdtus,  called  upon 
or  not  called  upon ;  immvtdtus,  changed  or  unchanged,  &c. 

7.  Ob  sometimes  denotes  around;  as,  obeo,  to  go  around;  sometimes 
against ;  as,  oppono,  to  oppose ;  obsto,  to  withstand. 

8.  Per,  with  adjectives,  is  commonly  intensive  ;  a.s,percdrus,  very  dear; 

?erfacllis,  very  easy.     With  quam,  it  is  strongly  intensive  ;  as,  perquam 
revlter,  with  exceeding  brevity.     In  perfidus,  perfidious, per  is  negative. 

9.  Proz,  with  adjectives,  is  intensive ;  as,  pradarus,  very  clear ;  pra- 
vattdus,  very  strong. 

10.  Pro  sometimes  denotes  forth ;  as,  produco,  to  bring  forth ;  prold- 
quor,  to  speak  out. 

11.  Red  is  sometimes  intensive  ;  as,  redundo,  to  overflow :  sometimes  it 
is  negative;  as,  retego,  to  uncover;  recludo,  to  unlock. 

12.  Se,  with  adjectives,  denotes  privation ;  as,  secUrus,  without  care. 

13.  Sub  often  diminishes  the  meaning ;  as,  subrideo,  to  smile ;  subdidcis, 
sweetish ;  subtristis,  somewhat  sad.  It  sometimes  denotes  motion  up- 
wards ;  as,  subrlgo,  to  raise  up.  *» 

14.  Ve,  with  adjectives,  denotes  privation ;  as,  vcsdnus,  unsound ; 
vecors,  foolish. 

Remark.  Prepositions  in  composition  seem  often  to  add  nothing  to  the 
signification  otiU-»  words  with  which  they  are  compounded. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

^  198.     A  conjunction  is  a  particle  which   connects 
words  or  propositions. 
14 


153 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


The  most  usual  conjunctions  are, 


Ac,  and,  as,  than. 
An,  whether. 
Anne,  whether. 
Annon,  whether  or  not. 
At,  ast,  but. 
Atque,  and,  as,  than. 
Atqui,  but. 
Attamen,  yet. 
Aut,  either,  or. 
Autem,  but. 
Ceterum,  but,  however. 
Cum,  quum,  since. 
Cum.. .turn,  both.. .and. 
Dum,  provided,  while. 
Dummodo,  so  that. 
Enim,/or. 
Equldem,  indeed. 
Ergo,  titer ef ore. 
Et,  and. 

Et...et,  both.. .and. 
Etiam,  also. 
Etiamsi,  although. 
Etsi,  though. 
Idcirco,  therefore. 


Ideo,  therefore. 
Igltur,  therefore. 
Itaque,  therefore. 
Licet,  though. 
Modo,  provided. 
Nam,  namque,/or. 
Ne,  lest. 
-Ne,  whether. 
Nee,  neither,  nor. 
Nee . .  .neque ,  neither. .  .nor. 
Necne,  or  not. 
Neque,  neither,  nor. 
Neu,  neither,  nor,  and  not. 
Neu...neve,  neither... nor. 

K*\,}unless' 
Num,  whether. 
Quamvis,  although. 
Quan  do,       quandoqul- 
dem,  whereas,  since. 
Quanquam,  although. 
-Que. ..-que,  both.. .and. 
Quia,  because. 
Quin,  but  that. 


Quippe,  because. 

Quo,  in  order  that. 

Quod,  because. 

Quoniam,  since. 

Quoque,  also. 

Sed,  but. 

Seu  or  sive,  or. 

Seu...sive,  whether. ..or 

Si,  if. 

Sin,  but  if. 

Siquldem,  if  indeed, 
since. 

Tamen,  however. 

Tametsi,  although. 

Turn.. .turn,  both.. .and. 

Ut,  that. 

Uti,  that,  to  the  end  that. 

Utrum,  whether. 

-Ve,  either,  or. 

Vel,  either,  or. 

Verb,  truly. 

Verum,  but. 

Veruntamen,  notwith- 
standing. 


Conjunctions,  according  to  their  different  significations,  may 
be  divided  into  the  following  classes  : — 

1.  Copulatives,  or  such  as  connect  things  that  are  to  be  considered 
jointly  ;  as,  ac,  atque,  et,  etiam,  que,  quoque,  and  the  negative  nee  or 
neque. 

2.  Disjunctives,  or  such  as  connect  things  that  are  to  be  considered 
separately  ;  as,  aut,  seu,  sive,  ve,  vel,  and  the  negative  neve  or  neu. 

3.  Concessives,  or  such  as  express  a  concession;  as,  etsi,  etiamsi, 
tametsi,  licet,  quanquam,  quamvis. 

4.  Adversatives,  or  such  as  express  opposition ;  as,  at,  atqui,  autem, 
cetlrum,  sed,  tamen,  attamen,  veruntamen,  verb,  verum. 

5.  Causals,  or  such  as  express  a  cause  or  reason;  as,  enim,  etfnim, 
nam,  namque,  quando,  quandoquldem,  quia,  quippe,  quod,  quoniam,  quum 
or  cum,  siquldem. 

6.  Illatives,  or  such  as  express  an  inference  ;  as,  ergo,  idcirco,  idcof 
igltur,  itaque,  proinde,  quapropter,  quart,  quamobrem,  quocirca. 

7.  Finals,  or  such  as  denote  a  purpose,  object,  or  result ;  as,  ne,  quint 
qud,  quominus,  ut,  uti. 

8  Conditionals,  or  such  as  express  a  condition;  as,  si,  sin,  nisi  or  nit 
dummddo,  or  separately  either  dum  or  modd. 

9.  Suspensives,  or  such  as  express  doubt;  as,  an,  anne,  annon,  -««, 
necne,  num,  utrum. 

Remark  1.  Ac  rarely  stands  before  vowels  or  h;  atque  chiefly  before 
vowels,  but  also  before  consonants. 


INTERJECTIONS.  159 

Rem.  2.  The  conjunctions  -ne,  -que,  -ve,  are  not  used  alone,  but  are 
always  annexed  to  some  other  word.     They  are  called  enclitics. 

Rem.  3.  Some  words  here  classed  with  conjunctions  are  also  used  as 
adverbs,  and  many  classed  as  adverbs  are  likewise  conjunctions ;  that  is, 
they  at  the  same  time  qualify  verbs,  &c.,  and  connect  propositions ;  as, 
Ccetlris  in  rebus,  cum  venit  calamltas,  turn  detrimentum  accipltur  ;  In  other 
concerns,  when  misfortune  comes,  then  damage  is  received. 

Rem.  4.  Conjunctions,  like  adverbs,  are  variously  compounded  with 
other  parts  of  speech,  and  with  each  other;  as,  alque,  idcirco,  ideot 
namque. 

In  some,  compounded  of  an  adverb  and  a  conjunction,  each  of  the  sim- 
ples retains  its  meaning,  and  properly  belongs  to  its  own  class ;  as,  etiam 
(etjam),  and  now ;  itaque,  and  so;  neque  or  wee,  and  not. 


INTERJECTIONS. 

§  199.     An  interjection  is  a  particle  used  in  exclama- 
tion, and  expressing  some  emotion  of  the  mind. 
The  most  usual  interjections  are, 

Ah!  ah!  alas!  Euge  !  well  done!  Io !  huzza! 

Atat !  ha  !  indeed  !  Evax  !  >  ,  ,  O  !  oh  ! 

Au  !  hush  !  whist !  Evoe  !  $  auzza '  Oh !   oh  !  alas  ! 

Ecce  !  Io  !  behold  !  Ha  !  ha !  he  !   ha !  ha  !  Ohe  !  ho  !  hold  ! 

Ehem  !  0  strange  !  Hei !  wo  !  alas  !  Oi !  hoy  !  alas  ! 

Eheu  !  alas  !  Hem  !  ho  !  hold !  how  !  Papse  !  0  strange ! 

Eho  !  ehodum  !  soho  !  Io  !  bravo  !  Proh  !  oh  !  alas  ! 

Eja  !  on  !  Heu  !  too  !  alas  !  St !  hush  ! 

En!  Io!  behold!  Heus  !  ho  there !  mark  !  V®  !  wo! 

Eu  !  bravo  !  Hui !  away  !  ho  !  Vah  !  ha  !  alas!  bravo! 

Remark  1.  An  interjection  sometimes  denotes  several  different  emo- 
tions.    Thus,  vah  is  used  to  express  wonder,  grief,  joy,  and  anger. 

Rem.  2.  Other  parts  of  speech  may  sometimes  be  regarded  as  inter- 
jections; aa,paz!  be  still  !  Soindignum,infandum1mise'rumirniserabilei 
nefas,  when  used  as  expressions  of  grief  or  horror. 


160 


SYNTAX. 


SYNTAX. 

§  200.  Syntax  treats  of  the  construction  of  proposi- 
tions, their  connection  and  dependence. 

A  proposition  consists  of  a  subject  and  a  predicate. 

The  subject  of  a  proposition  is  that  of  which  something 
is  affirmed. 

The  predicate  expresses  that  which  is  affirmed  of  the 
subject. 

Thus,  Equus  currit,  The  horse  runs.  Here  equus  is  the 
subject,  and  currit  is  the  predicate. 

Note.  The  word  affirm,  as  used  by  grammarians,  must  be  understood 
to  include  all  the  various  significations  of  the  verb,  as  expressed  in  the 


different  moods 


SUBJECT. 


§  201.     I.  The  subject  is  either  grammatical  or  logical. 

The  grammatical  subject  is  either  a  noun,  or  some  word 
standing  for  a  noun.  The  logical  subject  consists  of  the  gram- 
matical subject,  with  its  various  modifications. 

Thus,  Conscientia  bene  actae  vitae  est  jucundisslma,  The  consciousness  of 
a  well-spent  life  is  very  pleasant.  Here  conscientia  is  the  grammatical, 
and  conscientia  bend  acta  vita  the  logical,  subject. 

Note.  If  the  grammatical  subject  is  not  modified,  it  is  the  same  as  the 
logical  subject. 

II.  The  subject  is  also  either  simple  or  compound. 

A  simple  subject  is  a  single  noun  or  word  standing  for  a  noun, 
either  alone  or  variously  modified ;  as, 

Vita  brevis  est,  Life  is  short.  Longissima  hominis  vita  brevis  est,  The 
longest  life  of  man  is  short.     Fugaces  labuntur  anni. 

A  compound  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  simple  subjects, 
to  which  one  predicate  belongs ;  as, 

Luna  et  stellae  fulgebant,  The  moon  and  stars  were  shining.  Grammatice 
ac  musice  juncta  fuerunt,  Grammar  and  music  were  united. 

Remark.  Words  are  said  to  modify  or  limit  others,  when 
they  serve  to  explain,  describe,  enlarge,  restrict,  or  otherwise 
qualify  their  meaning. 


SYNTAX. SUBJECT.  161 


Modified  Subject. 

III.  A  grammatical  subject  may  be  modified  or  limited  in 
different  ways : — 

1.  By  a  noun  in  the  same  case,  annexed  to  it  for  the  sake  of 
explanation  or  description  ;  as, 

Nos  consules  desumus,  We  consuls  are  remiss.  Mucins  augur  multa 
narrdvit,  Mucius  the  augur  related  many  things. 

2.  By  the  oblique  case  of  a  noun  or  pronoun  to  which  the 
subject  has  some  relation  ;  as, 

Jimo*  multitudlnis  commovetur,  The  love  of  the  multitude  is  excited 
De  victoria  Caesaris  fama  perfertur,  A  report  of  the  victory  of  Ccesai 
is  brought. 

3.  By  an  adjective,  adjective  pronoun,  or  participle  ;  as, 

Fugit  invida  aztas,  Envious  time  flies.  Ducit  agmtna  PenthesiUa  fureni 
Penthesilea  raging  leads  on  her  troops. 

4.  By  the  relative  qui  and  the  words  connected  with  it ;  as, 
Leve  Jit  quod  bene  fertur  onus,  The  burden  which  is  well  borne  become* 

light.      Literal,  quas  scripsisti,  acceptai  sunt. 

Remark  1.  A  noun  or  pronoun,  in  any  case,  may  be  modi- 
fied in  either  of  the  ways  above  mentioned. 

Rem.  2.  An  adjective  modifying  a  noun  may  itself  be 
modified : — 

(1.)  By  an  adverb;  as, 

Erat  expectatio  valde  magna,  There  was  very  great  expectation. 

(2.)  By  a  noun  in  an  oblique  case;  as, 

Major  pietate,  Superior  in  piety.  Contentions  cupldus,  Fond  of  conten 
tion. 

(3.)  By  a  relative  or  other  dependent  clause  ;  as, 
Videtur,  qui  imperet,  dignus  ;  He  seems  worthy  to  command. 
(4.)  By  an  infinitive  mood,  a  gerund,  or  a  supine ;  as, 
Insuetus  vera  audire,  Unused  to  hear  the  truth.     Promptus  ad  agendum, 
Ready  to  act.     Mirablle  dictu,  Wonderful  to  be  spoken. 

Rem.  3.  A  participle  may  be  modified  like  a  verb.  See 
§  202,  III. 

Rem.  4.     An  adverb  may  be  modified : — 

(1.)  By  another  adverb;  as, 

Magis  aperth,  More  openly.    Valde  zehementer,  Very  vehemently. 

(2.)  By  a  noun,  pronoun,  or  adjective,  in  an  oblique  case ;  as, 

Congruenter  natures,  Agreeably  to  nature.    Optlmt  omnium,  Best  of  all. 

Rem.  5.  A  preposition  may  be  modified  by  an  adverb,  or  by 
a  noun  in  an  oblique  case;  as, 

Longe  ultra,  Far  beyond.  Multd  ante  npctem,  Long  before  night. 
Sexennio  post  Veios  caplos. 

H* 


162  SYNTAX. 


•PKEDICATE. 


Rem.  6.  A  modified  grammatical  subject,  considered  as  one 
complex  idea,  may  itself  be  modified ;  as, 

Omnia  tua  consilia,  Ml  thy  counsels.  Here  omnia  modifies,  not  consilia, 
but  the  complex  idea  tua  consilia.     So  Omnia  tua  prava  consilia. 

IV.  1.  An  infinitive,  either  alone  or  with  the  words  connected 
with  it,  and  also  an  entire  clause,  may  be  the  logical  subject  of 
a  proposition ;  as, 

Mentlri  est  turpe,  To  lie  is  base.  Virtus  est  vitium  fuggre,  To  shun  vice 
is  a  virtue.     E  cash  descendit,  "  Nosce  te  ipsum."    JEquum  est  ut  hoc  facias. 

In  such  cases,  the  verb,  or,  if  that  be  esse,  the  verb  with  its 
predicate  noun  or  adjective,  may  be  considered  as  the  gram- 
matical subject ;  as, 

Oratorem  irasci  non  decet.     Non  satis  est,  pulchra  esse  po&mdta. 

2.  In  consequence  of  the  various  modifications  of  the  gram- 
matical subject  of  a  proposition,  the  logical  subject  may  be 
greatly  extended. 

3.  The  noun  or  pronoun  which  is  the  subject  of  a  proposition, 
is  put  in  the  nominative  case,  except  that,  when  the  verb  of  the 
predicate  is  an  infinitive  mood,  it  is  put  in  the  accusative. 

Note.  In  the  following  pages,  when  the  term  subject  alone  is  used, 
the  grammatical  subject  is  intended. 


PREDICATE. 

<§>  202.  I.  The  predicate,  like  the  subject,  is  either  gram- 
matical or  logical. 

The  grammatical  predicate  is  either  a  verb  alone,  or  the  cop- 
ula sum  with  a  noun  or  adjective.  The  logical  predicate  con- 
sists of  the  grammatical  predicate  with  its  various  modifications. 

Thus,  Scipio  fudit  Annibalis  copias,  Scipio  routed  the  forces  of  Hanni 
bal.  Here  fudit  is  the  grammatical,  and  fudit  Jlnnibdlis  copias  the  logical, 
predicate.     Romulus  Romanse  condltor  urbis  erat. 

Note.  If  the  grammatical  predicate  is  not  modified,  it  is  the  same  as 
the  logical  predicate. 

II.  The  predicate  also,  like  the  subject,  is  either  simple  oi 
compound. 

A  simple  predicate  is  one  which  contains  a  single  finite* 
verb;  as, 

Brevis  est  voluptas,  Pleasure  is  brief.  Mors  venit,  Death  comes. 
Mors  requo  pulsat  pede  pauperum  tabernas,  regumque  turres. 

A  compound  predicate  consists  of  two  or  more  simple  predi* 
cites  belonging  to  the  same  subject ;  as, 

Probitas  laudatur  et  alget,  Honesty  is  praised  and  neglected. 

*  A  verb  in  any  mood  except  the  infinitive,  Is  called  a  finite  verb. 


SYNTAX. SENTENCES.  163 

Modified  Predicate. 

III.  A  grammatical  predicate  may  be  modified  or  limited  in 
different  ways : — 

1.  By  a  noun  or  adjective  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject. 
This  occurs  after  certain  neuter  verbs,  and  verbs  passive  of 
naming,  calling,  &c.  (see  §  210,  Rem.  3) ;  as, 

Jncedo  reglna,  I  walk  queen.    Aristldes  Justus  est  appelldtus. 

2.  By  a  noun  in  an  oblique  case  ;  as, 

Deus  regit  mundum,  God  rules  the  world.  Ago  tibi  gratias.  Ex  volun- 
tate  fecit.     Spe  vivimus.     Venit  ad  urbem. 

3.  By  adverbs  ;  as, 

Saepe  venit,  lie  often  came.     Litlra  facile  discuntur. 

4.  By  an  infinitive  mood  ;  as, 

Cupit  discere,  He  desires  to  learn.     Probari  volunt. 

Rem.  1.  An  infinitive  may  be  modified  like  the  verb  of  a 
predicate. 

Rem.  2.  All  other  words  used  to  modify  verbs,  may  them- 
selves also  be  modified  in  the  ways  mentioned  under  the  article 
Modified  Subject,  §  201,  III. 

SENTENCES. 

§  203,  1.  A  sentence  may  consist  either  of  one  proposi- 
tion, or  of  two  or  more  propositions  connected  together. 

A  sentence  consisting  of  one  proposition  is  called  a  simple 
sentence. 

A  sentence  consisting  of  two  or  more  propositions,  is  called  a 
compound  sentence,  and  the  propositions  of  which  it  is  com- 
posed are  called  members,  or  clauses. 

2.  The  members  of  a  compound  sentence  are  either  inde- 
pendent or  dependent. 

An  independent  clause  is  one  which  makes  complete  sense 
by  itself.  A  dependent  clause  is  one  which  makes  complete 
sense  only  in  connection  with  another  clause. 


Thus,  Phocion  fuit  perjjetud  pauper,  cum  dUissimus  esse  posset;  Phocion 
was  always  poor,  though  he  might  have  been  very  rich.  Here  the  former 
clause  is  independent,  the  latter  dependent. 

3.  That  member  of  a  compound  sentence  on  which  the  other 
members  depend,  is  called  the  leading  clause;  its  subject,  the 
leading  subject ;  and  its  verb,  the  leading  verb. 


164  SYNTAX. APPOSITION. 

The  leading  verb  is  usually  either  in  the  indicative  or  imper- 
ative mood,  but  sometimes  in  the  subjunctive. 

4.  The  members  of  a  compound  sentence  may  be  connected 
by  relative  words,  conjunctions,  or  adverbs. 

An  infinitive  with  its  subject  may  be  united  with  another 
clause  without  a  connective. 

5.  Instead  of  a  dependent  clause  connected  by  a  conjunction, 
a  noun  and  participle,  or  two  nouns,  sometimes  stand  as  an 
abridged  proposition  ;  as, 

Bello  confecto,  discessit,  i.  e.  quum  helium  confectum  esset,  discessit; 
The  war  being  finished,  or  when  the  war  was  finished,  he  departed.  Ml 
dcsperandum,  Teucro  duce.  Hor. 

6.  Agreement  is  the  correspondence  of  one  word  with  another 
in  gender,  number,  case,  or  person. 

7.  A  word  is  said  to  govern  another,  when  it  requires  it  to  be 
put  in  a  certain  case  or  mood. 

8.  A  word  is  said  to  depend  on  another,  when  its  case,  gen- 
der, number,  mood,  tense,  or  person,  is  determined  by  that  word. 

9.  A  word  is  said  to  follow  another,  when  it  depends  upon  it 
in  construction,  whatever  may  be  its  position  in  the  proposition. 


APPOSITION. 

§  204.  A  noun,  annexed  to  another  noun  or  to  a  pro- 
noun, and  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the 
same  case ;  as, 

Roma  urbs,  The  city  Rome.  JVos  consults,  We  consuls.  So  Apud 
Heroddtum,  patrera  Jiistoriee,  sunt  innumerablles  fabulce  ;  In  Herodotus,  the 
father  of  history,  &c.  Cic.  LapXdes  sillces,  flint  stones.  Liv.  Fans  cui 
nomen  Arethusa  est.   Cic. 

Remark  1.  A  noun,  thus  annexed  to  another,  is  said  to  be  in  apposi- 
tion with  it.  It  is  generally  added  for  the  sake  of  explanation  or  descrip- 
tion ;  sometimes  it  denotes  character  or  purpose  ;  as,  Ejus  fugcc  comitem 
me  adjunxi,  I  added  myself,  as  a  companion  of  his  flight.  Both  nouns 
must  belong  to  the  same  part  of  the  sentence,  either  subject  or  predicate. 
In  cases  of  apposition,  there  seems  to  be  an  ellipsis  of  the  ancient  participle 
ens,  being  ;  qui  est,  who  is ;  qui  vocdtur,  who  is  called  ;  or  the  like. 

Rem.  2.  If  the  annexed  noun  has  a  form  of  the  same  gender  as  the 
other  noun,  it  takes  that  form;  as,  Usus  magister  egregius.  Plin.  Philoso- 
phia  magistra  vitte.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  annexed  noun  sometimes  differs  from  the  other  in  gender, 
as,  Duo  fulmlna  belli,  Scipiddus ;  The  Scipios,  two  thunderbolts  in  war 
(Cic.) ; — sometimes  in  number ;  as,  Tulliola,  deliciae  nostra  (Cic.)  ; — and 
sometimes  in  both  ;  as,  JVate,  meet  vires.  Virg. 

Rem.  4.     The  substantive  pronoun  is  sometimes   omitted   before  the 


SYNTAX. APPOSITION.  i65 

word  in  apposition  with  it;  as,  Consul  dixi,  sc.  ego  ;  (I)  the  consul  said. 
Hoc  tibi  juventus  Romano,  indicimus  helium,  sc.  nos ;  (We)  the  Roman 
youth,  &c.  Liv. 

Rem.  5.  A  noun  in  apposition  to  two  or  more  nouns,  is  usually  put  in 
the  plural;  as,  M.  Antonius,  C.  Cassius,  tribuni  plebis ;  M.  Antony,  C. 
Cassius,  tribunes  of  the  people.  Caes. 

So  when  the  nouns  are  connected  by  cum,  the  annexed  noun  taking  the 
case  of  the  former ;  as,  Diccearchum  verb  cum  Aristoxeno,  doctos  sank,  hom- 
ines, omittdmus.  Cic. 

If  the  nouns  are  proper  names  of  different  genders,  a  masculine  is  an- 
nexed rather  than  a  feminine,  when  both  forms  exist ;  as,  Ad  Ptolemmim 
Cleopatramque  reges  legdti  missi.  Liv. 

Rem.  6.  The  annexed  noun  is  sometimes  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Urbs 
Patavii ;  The  city  of  Patavium.  Virg.  Amnis  Eridani.  Id.  Arbor  fici. 
Cic.     Nomen  Mercurii  est  mihi.  Plaut. 

Rem.  7.  The  name  of  a  town  in  the  genitive  occurs  with  an  ablat've 
in  apposition  with  it;  as,.  Corinthi  Achaia  urbe  ;  At  Corinth,  a  city  of 
Achaia.  Tac.     See  §  §  221  and  254,  Rem.  3. 

Rem.  8.  A  proper  name,  after  nomen  or  cognomen,  with  a  verb  followed 
by  a  dative,  is  sometimes  put  in  apposition  with  the  dative,  rather  than 
with  nomen  or  cognomen ;  as,  Nomen  Arcturo  Mi  mihi,  I  have  the  name 
Arcturus.  Plaut.  Cui  nunc  cognomen  Iulo  addltur.  Virg.  Cui  Egerio 
indttum  nomen.  Liv. 

Rem.  9.  A  clause  may  supply  the  place  of  one  of  the  nouns ;  as,  Cogltet 
oratorem  institui — rem  arduam  ;  Let  him  reflect  that  an  orator  is  training — 
a  difficult  thing.  Quinct. 

Rem.  10.  Sometimes  the  former  nc  in  denotes  a  whole,  and  its  parts 
are  expressed  by  the  nouns  in  appositioi  with  it ;  as,  Onerarim,  pars  max- 
ima ad  JEgimurum, — alias  adversus  urbem  ipsam  deldta  sunt ;  The  ships  of 
burden  were  carried,  the  greatest  part,  to  ./Egimurus, — others  opposite 
to  the  city  itself.  Liv.  Pictores  et  poeta  suum  quisque  opus  a  vulgo  con- 
siderdri  vult.  Cic.  In  the  following  example,  quisque  is  in  the  nomina- 
tive, though  the  word  with  which  it  is  in  apposition  is  in  the  ablative  : — 
Multis  sibi  quisque  imperium  petenttbus.  Sail. 

To  this  rule  may  be  subjoined  that  which  relates  to  the  agreement  of 
interrogative  and  responsive  words. 

Rem.  11.  The  principal  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  answer  to 
a  question,  must  be  in  the  same  case  with  the  corresponding  in- 
terrogative word ;  as, 

Quis  herus  est  tibi  ?  Amphitruo,  sc.  est.  Who  is  your  master  ?  Amphit- 
ruo  (is.)  Plaut.  Quid  quceris?  Librum,  sc.  quaro.  What  are  you 
looking  for  ?  A  book.  Quota  hord  venisti?  Sexta.  At  what  hour  did  you 
come  ?  At  the  sixth. 

Note  1.  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  a  substantive  pronoun,  the  corre- 
sponding possessive  pronoun  is  often  \ised,  agreeing  with  its  noun  ;  as, 
Cujus  est  liber  ?  Meus,  (not  Mei.)  (See  §  211,  Rem.  3.)  So  cujum  for  gen. 
cujus  ;  Cujum  pccus  ?  an  Melibcei  ?  Non  ;  veriim  JEgonis.  Virg. 

Note  2.  Sometimes  the  rules  of  syntax  require  the  responsive  to  be 
in  a  different  case  from  that  of  the  interrogative;  as,  Quanti  emisti? 
Viginti  minis.  Damnatasne  es  furti ?  Imd  alio  crimlne.  See  6  §  252 
and  217. 


166  SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES. 

ADJECTIVES. 

$  205.  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles, 
agree  with  their  nouns,  in  gender,  number,  and  case ;  as, 

Bonus  vir,  A  good  man.  Bonos  viros,  Good  men. 

Benigna  mater,  A  kind  mother.         Vance,  leges,  Useless  laws. 
Triste  helium,  A  sad  war.  Minacia  verba,  Threatening  words. 

Spe  amissd,  Hope  being  lost.  Hac  res,  This  thing. 

Note  1 .  An  adjective,  participle,  or  pronoun,  may  either  modify  a  noun, 
or,  with  the  verb  sum,  constitute  a  predicate.  The  rule  for  their  agree- 
ment, in  both  cases,  is,  in  general,  the  same. 

Note  2.  In  the  following  remarks,  the  word  adjective  is  to  be  consid- 
ered as  including  participles  and  adjective  pronouns,  unless  the  contrary 
is  intimated. 

Remark  1.  An  adjective  also  agrees  with  a  substantive  pronoun, 
taking  its  gender  from  that  of  the  noun  for  which  the  pronoun  stands ; 
as,  Ipse  capellas  veger  ago,  sc.  ego,Melibaius  ;  (I)  myself,  sick,  am  driving 
my  goats.  Virg.  Ut  se  totum  ei  tradlret.  Nep.  0  me  misirum  (spoken 
by  a  man),  mislram  me  (by  a  woman).  So  salvi  sumus,  salvce  sumus,  sc. 
no5,  masculine  or  feminine. 

In  general  propositions  which  include  both  sexes,  the  pronouns  are 
considered  masculine ;  as,  Nos  fruges  consumere  nati.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  An  adjective,  belonging  to  two  or  more  nouns,  is 
put  in  the  plural ;  as, 

Lupus  et  agnus  ski  compulsi,  /  wolf  and  a  lamb,  constrained  by  thirst. 
Phaed. 

When  the  nouns  are  of  different  genders, 

(1.)  If  they  denote  living  things,  the  adjective  is  masculine 
rather  than  feminine  ;  as, 

Pater  mihi  et  mater  mortui  sunt,  My  father  and  mother  are  dead.  Ter. 

(2.)  If  they  denote  things  without  life,  the  adjective  is  gene- 
rally neuter  ;  as, 

His  genus,  atas,  eloquentia  prope  aequalia  fuere;  Their  family,  age,  and 
eloquence,  were  nearly  equal.  Sail.  Regna,  imperia,  nobilitdtcs,  honorcs, 
divitice  in  casu  sita  sunt .  Cic.  Huic  bella,  rapince,  discordia  civllis,  grata 
fuere.  Sail.  Ariima  atque  animus,  quamvis  integra  recens  in  corpus  eunt. 
Lucr. 

Note.  When  nouns  denoting  things  without  life  are  of  the  same  gen- 
der (either  masculine  or  feminine),  but  of  different  numbers,  the  adjective 
is  sometimes  neuter ;  as,  Crceso  et  vita  et  patrimonii  partes,  et  urbs  Barce 
concessa  sunt.    Just. 

(3.)  If  one  of  the  nouns  denotes  an  animate,  and  another  an 
inanimate  thing,  the  adjective  is  sometimes  neuter,  and  some- 
times it  takes  the  gender  of  that  which  has  life ;  as, 

JVaves  et  captlvos  qua?  ad  Chium  capta  erant,  The  ships  and  captives 
which  were  taken  at  Chios.  Liv.  Numid&  atque  signa  militaria  obscurati 
tunt.   Sail. 


SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES.  167 

Exc.  to  Rem.  2.  The  adjective  often  agrees  with  the  nearest 
noun,  and  is  understood  with  the  rest ;  as,v 

Sociis  et  rege  recepto,  Our  companions  and  king  being  recovered.  Virg. 
Cognltum  est,  salutem,  lib£ros,famam,  fortunas  esse  carissimas.    Cic. 

Note.  A  noun  in  the  singular,  followed  by  an  ablative  with  cum,  has 
sometimes  a  plural  adjective  ;  as,  Filiam  cumfilio  accitos.  Liv.  Ria  cum 
Lauso  de  Numitore  sati.    Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  An  adjective  qualifying  a  collective  noun,  is  often 
put  in  the  plural,  taking  the  gender  of  the  individuals  which  the 
noun  denotes ;  as, 

Pars  certdre  parati,  A  part  prepared  to  contend.  Virg.  Pars  per 
agros  dilapsi,  ....  suam  quisque  spem  exsequentes.  Liv.  Supplex  turba 
erant  sine  vindlce  tuti.  Ovid.  This  construction  always  occurs  when  the 
collective  noun  is  the  subject  of  a  plural  verb. 

Sometimes,  though  rarely,  an  adjective  in  the  singular  takes  the  gender 
of  the  individuals;  as,  Pars  arduus  aids  pulverulentus  equisfurit.  Virg 

Some  other  nouns  have  an  adjective  of  a  different  gender  from  their 
own,  referring  to  the  words  which  they  include ;  as,  Latium  Capudque 
agro  mulctati ;  Latium  and  Capua  were  deprived  of  their  land.  Liv. 
Capita  conjurationis  virgis  caesi.  Id. 

Rem  4.  Two  adjectives  in  the  singular  are  sometimes  joined  to  a  plu- 
ral noun ;  as,  Maria  Tyrrhenum  atque  Adriaticum,  The  Tuscan  and 
Adriatic  seas.  Liv.  In  comic  writers,  an  adjective  or  participle  in  the 
singular  is  sometimes  used  with  a  plural  pronoun ;  as,  Nobis  prcesente. 
Plaut.     Jib sente  nobis.   Ter. 

Rem.  5.  A  participle  which  should  regularly  agree  with  the  subject  of 
a  proposition,  when  placed  after  the  noun  of  the  predicate,  sometimes 
takes  the  gender  and  number  of  the  latter ;  as,  Non  omnis  error  stultitia 
c^dicenda;  Not  every  error  is  to  be  called  folly.  Cic.  Gens  universa 
Veniti  appellati.   Liv. 

Rem.  6.  When  the  subject  of  an  infinitive  is  omitted  after  a  dative  of 
the  same  signification,  an  adjective  in  the  predicate,  belonging  to  that  sub- 
ject, is  sometimes  put  in  the  dative  ;  as,  Mihi  negligenti  esse  non  licuit, 
i.  e.  me  negiigentem  esse  mihi  non  licuit.  Cic.  Da  mihi  justo  sanctojwe 
videri.  Hor.  A  noun  is  sometimes  expressed  with  the  adjective ;  as, 
Vobis  neccsse  est  fortlbus  esse  viris.  Liv.  The  adjective  often  agrees  with 
the  omitted  subject ;  as,  Exp&dit  bonas  esse  vobis,  sc.  vos.  Ter.  Si  civi 
Romano  licet  esse  Gaditanum.  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  (1.)  An  adjective  is  often  used  alone,  especially  in 
the  plural,  the  noun,  with  which  it  agrees,  being  understood  ;  as, 

Boni  sunt  rari,  sc.  homines  ;  Good  (men)  are  rare.  Casar  suos  misit, 
sc.  milltes ;  Caesar  sent  his  (soldiers).  Dextra,  sc.  manus ;  The  right 
(hand).  Pinguisque  ferlnse,  sc.  carnis.  Jmmortdles,  sc.  Dii.  Jlmantium, 
sc.  homlnum.  Ilium  indignanti  simllem,  similemque  minanti  aspicercs,  sc. 
homlni.  Virg.  Tibi  primas  defe.ro,  sc.  partes.  Cic.  Resplce  proiterltum, 
sc.  tempus,  which  is  often  omitted.  Cognovi  ex  meorum  omnium  Uteris, 
sc.  amicorum.  Cic.  So  patrial  adjectives ;  as,  Missi  ad  Farthum  Arme- 
niumque  legdti,  sc.  regem. 

Note  1.  The  noun  to  be  supplied  with  masculine  adjectives  is  commonly 
homines,  but  when  they  are  possessives,  it  is  oftener  amlci,  milltes,  cives. 

Note  2.  The  noun  to  be  supplied  is  often  contained  in  a  preceding 
clatise. 


168  SYNTAX. ADJECTIVE?. 

(2.)  Neuter  adjectives  are  very  often  used  alone,  referring 
not  to  nouns  omitted,  but  to  objects  conceived  or  exhibited  as 
indefinite;  as, 

Triste  lupus  stabulis ;  The  wolf,  a  grievous  (thing)  to  the  folds.  Virg. 
Labor  omnia  vincit;  Labor  overcomes  all  (obstacles).  Id.  Turpe  ducet 
cedire  pari.  Quinct.  Vacdre  culpa  est  suave.  Qusb  cum  ita  sint.  Cic. 
Pedlbus  per  mutua  nexis.   Virg. 

Note.  In  most  instances  of  this  kind,  the  word  thing,  in  English,  may 
be  supplied.  Many  grammarians  suppose  that  negotium  is  understood ; 
but  that  word  seems  not  to  admit  such  a  sense. 

(3.)  Adjectives  used  without  nouns  often  have  adjectives  agreeing  with 
them ;  as,  Mia  omnia,  All  other  (tilings).  Plin.  Familidris  meus.  Cic. 
Iniquus  noster.  Id.  Justa  funebria.  Liv.  Jovis  omnia  plena.  Virg. 
See  §  201,  III.  Rem.  6. 

Rem.  8.  Imperatives,  infinitives,  adverbs,  clauses,  and  words  consid- 
ered merely  as  such,  may  be  used  substantively,  and  take  a  neuter  adjec- 
tive; as,  Supremum  vale  dixit,  He  pronounced  a  last  farewell.  Ovid. 
Velle  suum  cuique  est.  Pers.  Cras  istud  quando  venit  7  Mart.  Excepto 
quod  non  simul  esses,  cetlra  lotus.  Hor. 

Rem.  9.  Adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  instead  of  agreeing  with 
their  nouns,  are  sometimes  put  in  the  neuter  gender,  with  a  partitive 
signification,  and  their  nouns  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Multum  temporis,  for 
multum  tempus ;  much  time.  Id  ret,  for  ea  res;  that  thing.  So  plus 
eloquentice,  the  other  form  not  being  admissible  with  plus.  (See  §  110.) 
Neuter  adjectives  are  used  in  like  manner  in  the  plural ;  as,  Vana  rerum, 
for  vance  res.  Hor.  Pleraque  humandrum  rerum.  Sail.  But  in  some  such 
examples,  the  adjective  seems  to  be  used  as  noticed  in  Rem.  7,  (2.) ;  as, 
Acuta  belli.  Hor.     Telluris  operta.  Virg. 

The  adjectives  thus  used  in  the  singular,  for  the  most  part,  signify 
quantity.     See  §  212,  Rem.  3,  Note  1. 

Rem.  10.  A  neuter  adjective  is  sometimes  used  adverbially  in  the 
nominative  or  accusative,  both  singular  and  plural ;  as,  Magnum  stridens. 
Virg.  Arma  horrendum  sonuere.  Id.  Multa  deos  venerdti  sunt.  Cic. 
See  §  192,  II.  4,  (b.) 

Rem.  11.  A  noun  is  sometimes  used  as  an  adjective;  as,  Incola  turba 
vocant.  Ovid.     Nemo  miles  Romdnus.  Liv. 

An  adverb  is  also  sometimes  used  as  an  adjective ;  as,  Heri  semper 
lenitas,  for  sempiterna.  Ter. 

Rem.  12.  An  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun,  used  partitively,  stands 
alone,  and  commonly  takes  the  gender  of  the  genitive  plural,  which 
depends  upon  it;  but  when  it  is  preceded  by  a  noun  of  a  different 
gender,  to  which  it  refers,  it  usually  takes  that  gender,  but  sometimes 
that  of  the  genitive ;  as,  Elephanto  belludrum  nulla  est  prudentior,  No 
beast  is  wiser  than  the  elephant.  Cic.  Indus,  qui  est  omnium  fluminum 
maximus.  Cic.  Velocissimum  omnium  animalium  est  delphinus.  Plin. 
See  §  212,  Rem.  2. 

When  a  collective  noun  follows  in  the  genitive  singular,  the  adjective 
takes  the  gender  of  the  individuals  which  compose  it;  as,  Vir  fortissmius 
nostra  civitdtis,  The  bravest  man  of  our  state.  Cic.     Maximus  stirpis.  Liv. 

Rem.  13.  When  a  possessive  pronoun  is  used  instead  of  the  genitive  of 
Its  primitive  ^see  §  211,  Rem.  3.),  an  adjective  agreeing  with  that  genitive  is 
sometimes  ioined  with  such  possessive  ;  as,  Solius  meum  peccatum  corrtgi 


SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  J     RELATIVES.  169 

non  potest,  The  fault  of  me  alone  cannot  be  corrected.  Cic.  Noster 
duorum  eventus.  Liv.  Mea  scripta  timentis.  Hor.  Tuum  ipsius  studi- 
um.   Cic.     Id  maxlme  quemque  decet,  quod  est  cujusque  suummaxime.  Id. 

Sometimes  a  noun  in  the  genitive  is  expressed,  in  apposition  with  the 
substantive  pronoun  for  which  the  possessive  stands ;  as,  Pectus  tuum, 
hominis  simplicis.  Cic. 

Rem.  14.  An  adjective,  properly  belonging  to  the  genitive,  is  some- 
times made  to  agree  with  the  noun  on  which  the  genitive  depends, 
and  vice  versd  ;  as,  JEdificationis  tuae  consilium  for  tuum,  Your  design  of 
building.  Cic.  Accvsantes  violati  hospitii  fozdus,  for  violdtum.  Liv.  Ad 
majora  initio,  rerum  ducentibus  fatis,  for  majorum.  Id.  lis  nominlbus 
civitdtum,  quibus  ex  civitatibus,  &c.  for  edrum  civitdtum.    Cses. 

Rem.  15.  An  adjective  agreeing  with  a  noun  is  sometimes  used,  in- 
stead of  an  adverb  qualifying  a  verb,  especially  in  poetry  ;  as,  Ecce  venit 
Telamon  properus ;  Lo,  Telamon  comes  in  haste.  Ovid.  Losti  pacem 
ogitabamusyi'or  late.  Sail.     JEnCas  se  matutinus  agebat,  for  mane.    Virg. 

So  nulhis  is  used  for  omnlno  non ;  as,  Memini  tametsi  nullus  moneas, 
Though  you  do  not  suggest  it.  Ter.  Prior,  primus,  propior,  proxlmus, 
solus,  unus,  uitimus,  and  some  others,  are  used  instead  of  their  neuters, 
adverbially;  as,  Priori  Remo  augurium  venisse  fertur .  Liv.  This  is  some- 
times done,  for  want  of  an  adverb  of  appropriate  meaning ;  as,  Pronus 
cecidit.  Ovid.     Frequentes  convenerant.  Sail. 

In  such  expressions,  tu,  in  the  nominative,  sometimes  takes  an  adjec- 
tive in  the  vocative,  and  vice  versd;  as,  Sic  vcnias  hodierne.  Tibull. 
Salve,  primus  omnium  parens  p atrial  appellate.    BJ£n. 

Rem.  16.  When  several  adjectives,  each  independently  of  the  other 
qualify  a  noun,  if  they  precede  it,  they  are  almost  always  connected  by  one 
or  more  conjunctions  ;  as,  Multd  et  varid  et  copiosd  orutione.  Cic.  If  they 
follow  it,  the  conjunction  is  sometimes  expressed,  and  sometimes  omitted  , 
as,  Vir  altus  et  excellens.  Cic.     Actio,  varia,  vehimens,  plena  veritdtis.  Id. 

But  when  one  of  the  adjectives  qualifies  the  noun,  and  another  the 
complex  idea  formed  by  the  first  with  the  noun  the  conjunction  is  always 
omitted  ;  as,  Periculosissimum  civile  bellum,  A  most  dangerous  civil 
war.  Cic.  Malam  domestlcam  discipllnam.  Id.  So  with  three  or  more 
adjectives ;  Externos  multos  claros  viros  i  nomindrem.  Cic.  See  S  201 
III.,  Rem.  C. 

Rem.  17.  The  adjectives  primus,  medius,  ultimus,  eztremus, 
intimus,  infimus,  imus,  summus,  supremus,  reUquus,  and  cetera, 
often  signify  the  first  part,  the  middle  part,  &c.  of  a  thing  ;  as, 

Media  nox,  The  middle  of  the  night.  Summa  arbor,  The  highest  part  of 
a  tree.  Supremos  montes,  The  tops  of  the  mountains.  But  these  adjec- 
tives frequently  occur  without  this  signification  ;  as,  Ab  extremo  complexu, 
From  the  last  embrace.  Cic.     Jnflmo  loco,  Of  the  lowest  rank.  Id. 

Rem.  18.  The  participle  of  the  compound  tenses  of  neuter  verbs,  used 
in  the  passive  voice,  is  neuter ;  as,  Ventum  est.  Cic.  Itum  est  in  viscira 
terra.   Ovid. 

RELATIVES. 

§  £06.  Rem.  19.  Relatives  agree  with  their  antece- 
dents in  gender  and  number,  but  their  case  depends  on  the 
construction  of  the  clause  to  which  they  belong ;  as, 

Puer  qui  legit,  The  boy  who  reads.    Arflmal  quod  currit,  The  animal 
15 


170        SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  ;  RELATIVES. 

which  runs.  LitSree  quas  dedi,  The  letter  which  I  gave.  Non  sum  qualis 
eram,  I  am  not  such  as  I  was.  So  Dcus  cujus  munire  vivimus,  cui  nulhis 
est  simllis,  quem  collmus,  a  quo  facta  sunt  omnia,  est  ccternus.  Addictus 
Hermippo,  et  ab  hoc  ductus  est.     Aqullo,  quantus/raw^if  illces.  Hor. 

Note.  This  rule  includes  all  adjectives,  participles,  and  adjective  pro- 
nouns which  relate  to  a  noun  in  a  preceding  clause.  Its  more  common 
application,  however,  is  to  the  construction  of  the  relative  qui. 

The  relative  may  be  considered  as  placed  between  two  cases 
of  the  same  noun,  either  expressed  or  understood,  with  the  for- 
mer of  which  it  agrees  in  gender  and  number,  and  with  the  lat- 
ter in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

(1.)  Sometimes  both  nouns  are  expressed  ;  as, 

Erant  omnlno  duo  itinera,  quibus  itineribus  domo  exlre  possent ;  There 

were   only  two   routes,  by  which   routes  they  could  leave  home.    Cobs. 

Crudelisslmo  bello,  quale  bellum  nulla  unquam  barbaria  gessit.  Cic. 

(2.)  Usually  the  antecedent  only  is  expressed  ;  as, 
Animum  rege,  qui,  nisi  paret,  imperat ;    Govern  your  passions,  which 
rule  unless  they  obey.  Hor.    Tantce  multitudes,  quantam  capit  nrbs  nostra, 
concursus  est  ad  me /actus.  Cic.     Quot  capitum  vivunt,  totidem  studiOrum 
millia.  Hor. 

(3.)  Sometimes  the  latter  noun  only  is  expressed,  generally 
when  the  relative  clause  precedes  that  of  the  antecedent ;  as, 

Quibus  de  rebus  ad  me  scripsisti,  coram  videblmus  ;  In  regard  to  the 
things  of  which  you  wrote  to  me,  we  will  consider  when  we  meet.  Cic. 
In  quem  primum  egressi  sunt  locum,  Troja  vocdtur.  Liy.  Quanta  vi  expl"- 
tunt,  tantd  defendunt.  Qualesipe  visus  eram  vidisse  viros,  ex  ordlne  tales 
aspicio.  Ovid. 

To  this  head  may  be  referred  such  examples  as  the  following : — Qui  meus 
amor  in  te  est,  i.  e.  pro  meo  amdre  qui  in  te  est ;  Such  is  my  love  for  you. 
Cic.     Qua  tua  est  virtus,  cxpugndbis,  i.  e.  pro  tua  virtiite,  &c. 

(a.)  The  place  of  the  antecedent  is  sometimes  supplied  by  a  demonstra- 
tive pronoun,  especially  when  the  cases  are  different;  as,  Ad  quas  res 
aptisslmi  erimus,  in  iis  jjotisslmum  claborablmus.  Cic. 

(b.)  Sometimes  the  latter  noun  only  is  expressed,  even  when  the  relative 
clause  does  not  precede  ;  as,  Quis  non  malarum  quas  amor  curas  habet, 
hoc  inter  obliciscltur  ?  Hor. 

(4.)  Sometimes  neither  noun  is  expressed ;  this  happens 
especially  when  the  antecedent  is  designedly  left  indefinite,  or 
when  it  is  a  substantive  pronoun ;  as, 

Qui  bene  latuit,  bene  vixit,  sc.  homo  ;  (He)  who  has  well  escaped  notice, 
has  lived  well.  Ovid.  Sunt  quos  curriculo  pulverem  Olympicum  col- 
legisse.  juvat,  sc.  homines;  There  are  whom  it  delights,  &c.  Hor.  Non 
habco  quod  te  accusem,  sc.  id  propter  quod.  Cic.  Non  solum  sapiens 
vtae~ris  qui  hinc  absis,  sed  etiam  bedtus,  sc.  tu.   Cic. 

(5.)  The  relative  is  sometimes  either  entirely  omitted  ;  as,  Urbs  antlqua 
fuit ;  Tyrii  tenuere  coldni,  sc.  quum  or  earn;  There  was  an  ancient  city 
(which)  Tyri an  colonists  possessed  (Virg.);  or,  if  once  expressed,  is  after 
wards  omitted,  even  when,  if  supplied,  its  case  would  be  different ;  as 
.  Bacchus  cum  peditlbt/s,  quos  Jil/us  ejus  adduxcrat,  neque  in  priore  pugnd 
Oiljuitant,  Romdnos  itwddunt,  for  et  qui  non  in  priore,  &x>.  Sail. 


SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  J    RELATIVES.  171 

(6.)  (a.)  The  relative  sometimes  takes  the  case  of  the  antecedent,  in- 
stead of  its  own  proper  case ;  as,  Cum  scribus  et  illiquid  agas  eorum,  quo- 
rum consuesti,  for  quie.  Cic.  Raptim  quibus  quisque  potSrat  eldtis,  exibant, 
for  Us,  qiue  quisque  efferre  poterat,  eldtis.  Liv. 

(b.)  The  antecedent  likewise  sometimes  takes  the  case  of  the  relative ; 
as,  Urbem,  quam  statuo  vestra  est,  for  urbs.  Virg.  Naucratem,  quern  con- 
venire  volui,  in  navi  non  erat.  Plaut.  Sed  istum,  quern  queeris,  ego 
sum.   Id. 

These  constructions  are  said  to  occur  by  attraction. 

(7.)  An  adjective,  which  properly  belongs  to  the  antecedent,  is  some- 
times placed  in  the  relative  clause,  and  agrees  with  the  relative  ;  as,  Inter 
jucus,  quos  incondltos  jaciunt,  for  jocos  incondltos,  quos,  &c. ;  Amidst  the 
rude  jests  which  they  utter.  Liv.  Verbis,  quae  magna  volant.  Virg.  Ca- 
lore,  quern  multum  habet.  Cic. 

This  is  the  common  position  of  the  adjective,  when  it  is  a  numeral,  a 
comparative,  or  a  superlative  ;  as,  Nocte  quam  in  terris  ultimam  egit ,  The 
last  night  which  he  spent  upon  earth.  JEsculapius,  qui  primus  vulnus  ob- 
liguvisse  dicitur.  Cic.  Consiliis  pare,  qua?  nunc  pulcherrima  JYautes  dot 
senior.  Virg.  Some  instances  occur  in  which  an  adjective  belonging  to 
the  relative  clause, is  placed  in  that  of  the  antecedent;  as,  Cum  venissent 
ad  vada  Volaterrana,  quae  nominantur.    Cic. 

(8.)  When  to  the  relative  is  joined  a  noun,  explanatory  of  the 
antecedent,  but  of  a  different  gender  or  number,  the  relative 
agrees  with  that  noun  ;  as, 

Santdnes  non  longk  a  Tolosatiumjinibus  absunt,  qua?  ci  vitas  est  in  provin- 
cial, The  Santones  are  not  far  distant  from  the  borders  of  the  Tolosates, 
which  state  is  in  the  province.  Caes.  Ante  comitia,  quod  tempus  hand  longe) 
ahlrat.  Sail. 

(9.)  If  the  relative  refers  to  one  of  two  nouns,  denoting  the 
same  object,  but  of  different  genders,  it  agrees  with  either  ;  as, 

Flumen  est  Arar  quod  in  Rhoddnum  injluit.  Cres.  Adjlumen  Qxumper- 
ventum  est,  qui  turbldus  semper  est.  Curt. 

(10.)  When,  in  a  relative  clause  containing  the  verb  sum  or  a 
verb  of  naming,  esteeming,  &c,  a  noun  occurs  of  a  different 
gender  from  the  antecedent,  the  relative  agrees  with  either ;  as, 

Naturce  vultus  quern  dixe~re  Chaos,  The  appearance  of  nature  which  they 
called  chaos.  Ovid.  Genus  homlnum  quod  Helotes  vocdtur.  Nep.  Animal, 
quem  vocdmus  hominem ;  The  animal  whom  we  call  man.  Cic.  Locus  in 
carcere,  quod  Tullianum  appelldtur.  Sail.  Pecunidrum  conquisitio ;  eos 
esse  belli  civllis  nervos  dictltans  Mucidnus.  Tac. 

(11.)  The  relative  sometimes  agrees  with  a  noun,  either  equi- 
valent in  sense  to  the  antecedent,  or  only  implied  in  the  preced- 
ing clause ;  as, 

Abundantia  edrum  rerum  quae  mortdles  prima  putant,  An  abundance  of 
those  things  which  mortals  esteem  most  important.  Sail.  Quartum 
genus  est  sank  varium  et  mistum  ....  qui  jamprldem  premuntur.  Cic.  Con- 
jura,verc  pauci  contra  rempubllcam,  de  qua  (sc.  conjuratione),  quam  hrevis- 
slmb  potgro  dicam.  Sail.  Daret  ut  ratenis  fatdle  monstrum,  quss,  &c,  sc. 
Cleopatra.  Hor.  JYbra  diffi.dent.iA  futuri  qua?  imperavisset.  Sail.  Si  tem- 
pus est  ulla m  quae  multa  sunt.  Cic. 


172        SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  ;    DEMONSTRATIVES,    &C. 

(12.)  The  antecedent  is  sometimes  implied  in  a  possessive  pronoun ;  as, 
Omnes  lauddre  fortunas  meas,  qui  natum  tali  ingenio  prcedltum  haberem  ■ 
sc.  mei ;  All  were  extolling  my  fortune,  who  had  a  son  endowed  with 
such  a  disposition.  Ter.  Nostrum  consilium  laudandum  est,  qui  meos 
civcs  servis  armdtis  objlci  noluerim.  Cic. 

(13.)  Sometimes  the  antecedent  is  a  proposition,  and  then  the  relative 
is  commonly  neuter ;  as,  Postremd,  quod  difficillimum  inter  mortdles,  glorid 
invidiam  vicisti ;  Finally,  you  have  overcome  envy  with  glory,  which, 
among  men,  is  very  difficult.  Sail.  Equldem  exspectdbam  jam  tuas  lite ras, 
idque  cum  multis.  Cic. 

Jn  such  instances,  id  is  sometimes  placed  before  the  relative  pronoun, 
referring  to  the  idea  in  the  antecedent  clause ;  as,  Sive,  id  quod  constat, 
Platonis  studiosus  audiendi  fuit.  Cic.  Diem  consumi  volebant,  id  quod 
fecerunt.  Id. 

Sometimes  a  relative  referring  to  a  clause,  agrees  with  a  noun  following; 
as,  Idem  velle  atque  nolle,  ea  demum  firma  amicitia  est.  Sail. 

(14.)  Quod,  relating  to  a  preceding  statement,  and  serving  the  purpose 
of  transition,  is  often  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  after  a  period. 
It  is  thus  used  especially  before  si  and  nisi,  and  sometimes  before  utlnam, 
ut,  ne,  ubi,  cum,  contra,  and  nunc  ;  as,  Quod  si  mundum  efficere  potest  con- 
cursus  atomorum,  cur  portxcum,  cur  templum,  cur  domum,  cur  urbem  non 
potest  ?  In  regard  to  which,  if  the  concourse  of  atoms  can  produce  a  world, 
why,  &c.  Cic.  Quod  te  per  genium  obsecro,  vita  me  redde  priori.  Hor. 
Quod  utinam  ilium,  cujus  impio  facinore  in  has  miserias  projectus  sum, 
eddem  haic  simulantcm  videam.  Sail. 

Quod,  in  such  examples,  seems  to  be  an  accusative,  with  propter  or  ad 
understood. 

(15.)  If  the  relative  refers  to  two  or  more  nouns  of  different  genders, 
its  gender  will  be  determined  by  Rem.  2 ;  as,  Mnus  et  Semirdmis,  qui 
Babylona  condidirant  ;  Ninus  and  Semiramis,  who  had  founded  Babylon. 
Veil.  Crebro  fundli  et  tibicine,  quae  sibi  sumpserat.  Cic.  Ex  summd 
UetitiA  et  lascivid,  quae  diuturna  quies  pepererat.  Sail. 

(16.)  The  relative  adjectives  quot,  quantus,  quails,  are  construed  like  the 
relative  qui.  They  have  generally,  in  the  antecedent  clause,  the  corre 
sponding  words,  tot,  tantus,  talis ;  but  these  are  often  omitted. 

(17.)  Qui,  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  is  often  translated  like  a  de- 
monstrative ;  as,  Quae  ciim  ita  sint,  Since  these  (things)  are  so.  Cic. 


DEMONSTRATIVES,    INDEFINITES,    &c. 

<§>  207.  Rem.  20.  The  adjective  pronouns  often  agree  with  a 
noun  expressed,  instead  of  another  noun  understood ;  as,  JVcc  solos 
tangit  Atridas  iste  dolor,  Nor  does  that  grief  (i.  e.  grief  on  that  account) 
affect  the  sons  of  Atreus  alone.  Virg. 

Rem.  21.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  are  sometimes  used  where  a 
corresponding  word  in  English  is  unnecessary  ;  as,  Quern  neque  fides,  neque 
jusjurandum,  neque  ilium  misericordia,  repressit ;  Whom  neither  fidelity, 
nor  an  oath,  nor  pity,  has  restrained.  Ter. 

Rem.  22.  The  neuters  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns  are  sometimes 
used  in  apposition  with  a  dependent  clause  ;  as,  Hoc  tibi  persuadeas  vellm, 
me  nihil  ojnisisse;  I  wish  you  to  be  persuaded  of  this — that  I  have  omitted 
nothing. 

Rem.  23.  Hie  refers  to  what  is  near,  tile  to  what  is  remote.  Hence, 
«f  two  things  mentioned  before,  hie  commonly  refers  to  the  latter,  ille  tc 


SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  ,    DEMONSTRATIVES,    &C.        173 

the  former ;  as,  Ignavia  corpus  hebltat,  labor  Jirmat;  ilia  maturam  senectu- 
tem,  hie  langam  adolescentiam  reddit :  Sloth  enervates  the  body,  labor 
strengthens  it ;  the  former  produces  premature  old  age,  the  latter  protract- 
ed youth.  Cels. 

Yet  this  rule  is  not  always  observed  ;  as,  Sic  deus  et  virgo  est ;  hie  spe 
celer,  ilia  timore.  Ovid.  Sometimes  hic.hic  are  used  instead  of  hic.iue. 
So  ille...ille  sometimes  denote  "  the  one. ..the  other." 

When  more  than  two  persons  or  things  are  spoken  of,  Me  refers  to  the 
most  remote,  iste  to  a  nearer,  and  hie  to  the  nearest  object.  Hence,  in  let- 
ters, hie  and  its  derivatives  are  used  of  the  writer ;  iste  and  its  derivatives 
of  the  person  addressed;  ille,  &c,  of  some  other  person  or  thing.  See 
§  191,  Rem.  2. 

Rem.  24.  Me  is  used  to  denote  that  which  is  of  general  notoriety  ;  as, 
Magna  ill!  Mexandro  similllmus,  Very  like  Alexander  the  Great.  Veil. 
Medea  ilia.  Cic.  Ille  is  sometimes  translated  this ;  as,  Unutn  Mud  dico, 
This  only  I  say.  Cic. 

Rem.  25.  Iste  often  denotes  contempt;  as,  Impediebantur  ed  lege,  quam 
idem  iste  tuUrat....\he  same  wretch.  Cic.  Sometimes,  on  the  contrary,  it 
means  so  great ;  as,  Cum  ista  sis  auctoritate,  Since  you  are  of  so  great 
authority.  Cic. 

Rem.  26.  Is  does  not,  like  hie,  ille,  and  iste,  denote  the  place  or  order  of 
the  object  to  which  it  relates,  but  refers  to  something  already  mentioned 
or  to  be  defined  by  the  relative  qui.  Hie,  is,  or  ille,  may  be  used  in  this  way 
before  the  relative,  but  only  hie  or  is  after  it ;  as,  Qui  docet,  is  discit,  or  hie 
discit,  but  not  ille  discit,  unless  some  individual  is  referred  to. 

Is  has  sometimes  the  sense  of  talis,  such  ;  as,  Neque  enim  tu  is  es,  qui 
quid  sis  nescias  ;  Nor  are  you  such  a  person  as  to  be  ignorant  what  you 
are.  Cic. 

Is  with  et  or  que  is  emphatic, equivalent  to  the  English  "and  that  too;" 
as,  Priodtas  causas,  et  eas  tenues  aglmus  ;  We  manage  private  causes,  and 
those  unimportant.  Cic.  Erant  in  Torqudto  plurimce  liUraz  nee  eae  vulgd- 
res.  Id. 

Rem.  27.  Idem,  as  denoting  a  subject  which  stands  in  equal  relations  to 
two  different  predicates,  often  supplies  the  place  of  item  or  etiam,  also,  or  of 
tarnen,  yet,  if  the  things  are  apparently  inconsistent;  as,  Muslci,  qui  erant 
quondam  iidem  poetm  ;  Musicians,  who  formerly  were  poets  also.  Cic. 
Euphrates  et  Tigris  magno  aqudrum  divortio  iter  percurrunt ;  iidem  (and 
yet)  pauldtim  in  arctius  cogunt. 

Idem  is  sometimes  repeated  in  the  sense  of  "  at  once,"  denoting  the 
union  of  qualities  which  might  be  thought  incompatible  ;  as,  Fuere  quidam 
qui  iidem  ornate  iidem  versiite'  dicZrent,  There  have  been  some  who  could 
speak  at  once  elegantly  and  artfully.  Cic. 

**  The  same  as"  is  variously  expressed  in  Latin,  by  idem  with  qui,  ac  or 
atque,  quasi  or  ut ;  as,  Verres  idem  est  qui  fuit  semper,  Verres  is  the  same 
as  he  has  always  been.  Cic.  Vita  est  eadern  ac  fuit.  Liv.  Disputalionem 
exponlmus  iisdem/ere  verbis  ut  actum  est.  Cic. 

Rem.  28.  Ipse,  when  used  with  the  substantive  pronouns,  sometimes 
agrees  with  them;  but,  when  they  are  reflexive,  and  in  an  oblique  case,  it 
commonly  agrees  with  the  subject  of  the  proposition ;  as,  Again  per  me  ipse, 
1  will  do  it  myself.  Cic.  Medici  ipsi  se  curare  -non  possunt.  Sulpic.  Se 
ipsos  omnes  naturd  dillgunt. 

Ipse  is  sometimes  used  as  reflexive  without  sui  ;  as,  Omnes  boni,  quan- 
tum- in  ipsis/ui*,  Ccesdrem  occiderunt.  Cic. 

Ipse,  with  nouns  denoting  time  or  number,  expresses  exactness ;  as, 

15* 


174       SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  ;    DEMONSTRATIVES,  &C. 

Cum  ipsis  nonis  Sextllis,  Exactly  on  the  fifth  of  August.  Cic.  Triginta 
dies  erant  ipsi,  Thirty  whole  days  had  elapsed.  Id. 

Rem.  29.  The  relative  quicunque  is  sometimes  used  as  equivalent  to 
omnis  or  quivis  ;  as,  Qua  sandri  poterunt  quacunque  ratione  sandbo,  What 
can  be  cured  1  will  cure  by  every  possible  means.  Cic.  Yet  possum  is 
rather  to  be  supplied  ; — "  in  whatever  way  I  can."  So  quisquis  is  occa- 
sionally used,  not  as  a  relative,  but  as  an  indefinite  pronoun. 

Rem.  30.  AUquis  and  quispiam  are  particular,  corresponding  to  the 
English  some  one  ;  as,  HeredUas  est  pecunia,  quce  morte  alicujus  ad  quem- 
piam  verve-nit  jure  ;  An  inheritance  is  property  which,  at  the  death  of  some 
one,  falls  to  some  (other)  one  by  law.  Cic.  Multi  sine  doctrlnd  all  quid 
omnium  generum  et  artium  consequuntur.  Jd. 

Rem.  31.  Quisquam,  any  one,  and  ullus,  any,  are  universal :  they  are 
used  in  propositions  which  involve  a  universal  negative,  or  which  express 
an  interrogation  with  a  negative  force,  or  a  condition  (usually  with  si  or 
quasi) ;  also,  after  comparatives,  after  the  adverb  viz,  and  the  preposition 
sine ;  as,  Neque  ex  castris  Catilxnce  quisquam  omnium  disccsserat,  Nor  had 
any  one  departed  from  the  camp  of  Catiline.  Sail.  Nee  ullo  casu  potest 
contingere,  ut  ulla  intermissio  fiat  officii.  Cic.  An  quisquam  potest  sine 
perturbatione  mentis  irasci  ?  Id.  Tetrior  hie  tyr annus  Syracusdnis  fuit, 
qudm  quisquam  superidrum.   Id.      Vix  quidquam  spei  est.  Sen. 

Ullus  is  properly  an  adjective,  but  it  may  be  used,  like  any  other  adjec- 
tive, with  a  noun  understood.  Quisqxiam  is  commonly  used  without  a  noun, 
except  it  is  a  word  denoting  a  person  ;  as,  Cuiquam  civi,  To  any  citizen. 
Cujusquam  oratdris  eloquentiam.  Nemo  is  often  used  for  nullus  ;  as,  nemo 
pictor,  nemo  adaleseens,  and  even  homo  nemo.  Cic. 

Rem.  32.  Alius,  like  ullus,  though  properly  an  adjective,  is  sometimes 
used  like  a  pronoun.  It  is  often  repeated,  or  joined  with  an  adverb  deriv- 
ed from  it,  in  the  same  proposition,  which  may  be  translated  by  two  sepa- 
rate propositions,  commencing  respectively  with  "  one. ...another ;"  as, 
Aliud  aliis  videtur  optimum,  One  thing  seems  ber.t  to  one,  another  to  ano- 
ther. Cic.  Aliis  aliunde  pericfilum  est,  Dange/  threatens  one  from  one 
source,  another  from  another ;  or,  Danger  threatens  different  persons  from 
different  sources.  Ter.  Diomjsium  aliter  cum  aliis  de  nobis  loevtum  audie- 
bam.  Cic. 

Alter  is  commonly  used  when  two  persons  are  spoken  of;  as,  Uterque 
numerus  alter  altera  de  causd  habetur.  Cic. 

Alius,  repeated  in  different  propositions,  is  also  translated  "  one. ...an- 
other ;"  as,  Aliud  agitur,  aliud  simulator,  One  thing  is  done,  another  pre- 
tended. Cic. 

Rem.  33.  Quidam  differs  from  aliquis  by  implying  that  a  person  or 
thing,  though  indefinitely  described,  is  definitely  known ;  as,  Quidam  de 
eollegis  nostris,  A  certain  one  of  our  colleagues.  Cic.  Scis  me  quodam 
tempore  Metapontum  venisse  tecum.  Id. 

Quidam  is  sometimes  used  for  some,  as  opposed  to  the  whole,  or  to 
others  ;  as,  Excesserunt  urbe  quidam,  alii  mortem  sibi  consciverunt ;  Some 
departed  from  the  city,  others  destroyed  themselves.  Liv.  Hence  it  is 
used  as  a  limitation  ;  as,  Milvo  est  quoddam  bellum  naturdle  cum  corvo, .... 
a  kind  of  warfare.  Cic. 

Rem.  34.  Quivis  and  qtiittbet,  any  one  you  please,  are  universal ;  as, 
Omnia  sunt  ejvsmodi  quivis  ut  perspicere  possit,  All  are  of  such  a  nature 
that  any  one  can  perceive.  Cic.  Hie  apud  majorcs  nostros  adkibebdtur 
peritus,  nunc  quilibet.  Id.  A  negative  joined  with  them  denies  only  the 
universality  which  they  imply  ;  as,  Non  cuivis  komini  contingit  adlre  Co 


SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  \    REFLEXIVES.        175 

rinthum,  i.  e.  not  to  every  man  without  distinction.  Hor.  Cuiquam  would 
have  made  the  negation  universal. 

Rem.  35.  Quisque  signifies  each,  every  one,  and  generally  stands  with- 
out a  noun  ;  as,  Quod  cuique  obtlgit,  id  quisque  teneat ;  Let  each  one  keep 
what  has  fallen  to  each.  Cic. 

It  is  often  used  with  two  superlatives ;  as,  Optimum  quidque  rarisslmum 
est,  The  best  things  are  the  rarest.  Cic.  Ut  quisque  optlme  dicit ,  ita 
maxime  dicendi  difficultdtem  timet.  Id. 

With  primus,  it  denotes  the  first  possible  ;  as,  Primo  quoque  tempore, 
As  soon  as  possible.  Cic. 

Rem.  36.  The  possessives  meus,  tuus,  noster,  vester,  and  suus,  are  joined 
to  nouns,  to  indicate  an  action  or  possession  of  the  persons  denoted  by 
their  primitives ;  as,  Tutus  amor  meus  est  tibi,  My  love  is  secure  to  you. 
Ovid.     Tuam  vicem  dolere  soleo.  Cic. 

But  these  pronouns  are  sometimes  used  when  the  persons  to  which 
they  refer  are  the  objects  of  an  action,  feeling,  &c. ;  as,  Nam  neque  tua 
negligentid,  neque  odio  id  fecit  tuo,  For  he  did  it  neither  through  neglect 
nor  hatred  of  you.  Ter.  See  §  211,  Rem.  3. 

These  pronouns,  as  reflexives,  are  often  omitted ;  as,  Quo  revertar  ?  in 
patriam  ?  sc.  meam ;  Whither  shall  1  return  ?  to  (my)  country  ?  Ovid 
De-x.tr 6.  munlra  porrexit,  sc.  sud.  Id. 

REFLEXIVES. 

<§>  208.  Rem.  37.  Sui  and  suus  properly  refer  to  the  sub- 
ject of  the  proposition  in  which  they  stand;  as, 

Oppidani  f acinus  in  se  ac  suosf adum  consciscunt,  The  citizens  decide 
on  a  foul  crime  against  themselves  and  their  friends.  Liv. 

They  continue  to  be  used  in  successive  clauses,  if  the  subject  remains 
the  same ;  as,  Ipse  se  quisque  dillgit,  non  ut  allquam  a  se  ipse  mercedem 
exlgat  caritdtis  sua?,  sed  qudd  per  se  sibi  quisque  carus  est.  Cic. 

(1.)  In  dependent  clauses,  in  which  the  subject  does  not  remain  the 
same,  the  reflexives  commonly  refer  to  the  leading  subject,  when  the 
thoughts,  language,  purposes,  &,c,  of  that  subject  are  stated;  as,  Ariovis- 
tus  praidicdvit,  non  sese  Gallis,  sed  GalLos  sibi  belium  intulisse;  Ariovistus 
declared  that  he  had  not  made  war  upon  the  Gauls,  but  the  Gauls  upon 
him.  Caes.  Homcrum  Colophonii  civem  esse  dicunt  suum,  The  Colopho- 
nians  say  that  Homer  is  their  citizen.  Cic.  Tyrannus  petivit  ut  se  ad 
amicitiam  tertium  ascribercnt.  Id. 

(2.)  If,  however,  the  leading  subject,  whose  thoughts,  &c,  are  expressed, 
is  indefinite,  the  reflexives  relate  to  the  subject  of  a  dependent  clause  ;  as, 
Medeam  predicant  (sc.  homines)  in  fugd  fratris  sui  membra  iniislocis, 
qud  se  parens  persequeretur,  dissipavisse.  Cic.  Ipsum  regem  tradunt 
operatum  his  sacris  se  abdidisse.  Liv. 

(3.)  When  the  leading  verb  is  in  the  passive  voice,  the  reflexive  often 
refers  not  to  its  subject,  but  to  that  which  would  be  its  subject  in  the 
active  voice  ;  as,  A  Casdre  invltor  ut  sim  sibi  legdtus,  i.  e.  Cmsar  me  in- 
vitat  ;  I  am  invited  by  Caesar  to  become  his  lieutenant.  Cic. 

So  when  the  subject  is  a  thing  without  life,  the  reflexive  may  relate  to 
some  other  word  in  the  sentence,  which  denotes  a  thing  with  life  ;  as. 
Canum  tarn  fida  custodia  quid  signiflcat  aliud,  nisi  se  ad  homlnum  com- 
mo  dilates  esse  generdtos?  Cic. 

(4.)  Instead  of  sui  and  suus,  whether  referring  to  a  leading  or  a  subor- 


1 76  S  VNTAX. H  UMIN  AT  I VE . 

dinate  subject,  ipse  is  sometimes  used,  to  avoid  ambiguity  from  the  simi- 
larity of  both  numbers  of  sui,  and  to  mark  more  emphatically  than  suits, 
the  person  to  which  it  relates  ;  as,  Juguitha  legdtos  misit  qui  ipsi  liberisque 
vitam  petlrent,  Jugurtha  sent  ambassadors  to  ask  life  for  himself  and 
his  children.  Sail.  Ea  vwlestisslmi  ferre  homines  debent,  qua  ipsorum 
culpd  contractu  sunt. 

(5.)  In  the  plural  number,  with  inter,  se  only  is  used,  if  the  person  or 
thing  referred  to  is  in  the  nominative  or  accusative ;  se  or  ipse,  if  in  any 
other  case  ;  as,  Fratres  inter  se  cum  forma,  turn  morlbus  similes ;  Brothers 
resembling  each  other  both  in  person  and  character.  Cic.  Feras  inter 
sese  conciliat  natura.  Cic.  Incldunt  allquu  a  doctis  etiam  inter  ipsos 
mutud  reprehensa.  Quinct. 

(G.)  When  reference  is  made  not  to  the  subject  of  the  proposition,  but  to 
some  other  person  or  thing,  hie,  is,  or  iile,  is  generally  used,  except  in  the 
cases  above  specified ;  as,  Themistocles  scrvum  ad  Xerxem  misit,  ut  ei  nun- 
tidret,  suis  verbis,  adversarios  ejus  in  fugd  esse ;  Themistocles  sent  his 
servant  to  Xerxes,  to  inform  him  (Xerxes),  in  his  (Themistocles')  name, 
that  his  (Xerxes'),  enemies  were  upon  the  point  of  flight.  Nep.  But 
when  no  ambiguity  would  arise,  and  especially  when  the  verb  is  of  the 
first  or  second  person,  sui  and  suus  sometimes  take  the  place  of  the  de- 
monstrative pronouns  ;  as,  Suam  rem  sibi  salvam  sistam,  I  will  restore  his 
property  entire  to  him.  Plaut. 

On  the  contrary,  the  demonstratives  are  sometimes  used  for  the  reflex- 
ives ;  as,  Helvetii  persuddent  Raurdcis,  ut  una  emu  iis  proficiacautur  ;  The 
Helvetii  persuade  the  Rauraci  to  go  with  them.  Csss.  In  some  instances, 
a  reflexive  and  a  demonstrative  are  used  in  reference  to  the  same  person ; 
as,  Ita  se  gessit  (sc.  Ligarius)  ut  ei  pacem  esse  cxpedirct.  Cic.  Sometimes 
the  reflexives  refer  to  different  subjects  in  the  same  sentence  ;  as,  Ariovis- 
tus  respondit,  nemlnem  Becum  sine  sua  pernicie  cuidendissc  (Cajs.) ;  where 
se  refers  to  Ariovistus,  and  sud  to  nemlnem. 

(7.)  Suus  often  refers  to  a  word  in  the  predicate  of  a  sentence,  and  is 
then  usually  placed  after  it;  as,  Hunc  cives  sui  ex  vrbe  ejtcerunt,  Him  his 
citizens  banished  from  the  city.  Cic.  Titurius  quum  procul  Ambiorigem, 
suos  cohortantem,  conspexisset.  Cses. 

Suus,  and  not  hujus,  &c,  is  used  when  a  noun  is  omitted  ;  as,  Octavium, 
quern  sui  (sc.  amici)  Casdrem  salutdbant ;  Octavius,  whom  his  followers 
saluted  as  Cassar. 

Suus  is  also  commonly  used  when  two  nouns  are  coupled  by  cum,  but 
not  when  they  are  connected  by  a  conjunction ;  as,  Ptolemwus  arnicos 
Demetrii  cum  suis  rebus  dimlsit;  Ptolemy  dismissed  the  friends  of  Deme- 
trius with  their  effects.  Just. 

(8.)  Suus  sometimes  denotes  fit,  favorable  ;  as,  Sunt  et  sua  dona  par  end, 
There  are  likewise  for  my  father  suitable  presents.  Virg.  Alphenus  utebd- 
tur  populo  sank,  suo.  Cic.  Sometimes  it  signifies  peculiar  ;  as,  Molles  sua 
thura  Saban,  sc.  mittunt,  i.  e.  the  frankincense  for  which  their  country  was 
famous.  Virg. 


NOMINATIVE. 
SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE    AND    VERB. 

§  209.     A  verb  agrees  with  its  subject-nominative,  in 
number  and  person ;  as, 


SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE.  177 

Ego  lego,  I  read.  Nos  legimus,  We  read. 

Tu  scribis,  Thou  writest.  Vos  scribUis,  You  write. 

Equus  currit,  The  horse  runs.  Equi  currunt,  Horses  run. 

Remark  1.  The  nominatives  ego,  tu,  nos,  vos,  are  seldom 
expressed,  the  termination  of  the  verb  sufficiently  marking  the 
person  ;  as,  cupio,  I  desire ;  vivis,  thou  livest ;  habemus,  we 
have.     See  §  147,  3. 

But  when  emphasis  or  distinction  is  intended,  they  are  expressed ;  as, 
Ego  reges  ejeci,  vos  tyrannos  introducitis  ;  I  banished  kings,  you  introduce 
tyrants.  Auct.  ad  Her.  Nos,  nos,  dico  aperte,  consules  desumus.  Cic. 
Tu  es  patronus,  tu  pater.  Ter. 

Rem.  2.  The  nominative  of  the  third  person  is  often  omit- 
ted : — 

(1.)  When  it  has  been  expressed  in  a  preceding  proposi- 
tion : — 

(a.)  As  nominative  ;  as,  Mosa  prqfluit  ex  monte  Voslgo,  et  in  oce&num 
influit  (CaBs.)  j  or  (b.)  in  an  oblique  case ;  as,  Cursofem  miserunt,  ut  id 
nuntidret,  sc.  cursor.  Nep. 

(2.)  When  it  is  a  person  or  thing  mncftived  or  exhibited  as 
indefinite. 

Thus  homines  is  often  omitted  before  aiunt,  dicunt,  ferunt,  &c. ;  as,  Ut 
aiunt,  As  they  say.  Cic.  Maxlme  admirantur  eum,  qui  pecunid  non  move- 
tur.  Id. 

This  omission  of  the  nominative  is  common  in  the  clause  preceding  a 
relative  ;  as,  Qui  Bavium  non  odit,  amet  tua  carmlna,  Mcevi,  sc.  homo  ;  May 
(he)  who  hates  not  Bavius,  like  your  verses,  Maevius.  Virg.  Vastdtur  agri 
quad  inter  urbem  ac  Fidenas  est,  sc.  id  spatium.  Liv.  Sunt  quos  juvat....sc. 
homines  ;  There  are  (those)  whom  it  delights.  Hor.  Est  qui  nee  vetiris 
pocula  Masstci  spernit,  sc.  homo.  Hor.  Here  sunt  quos  and  est  qui  are 
equivalent  to  quidam,  allquis,  or  allqui.  So,  Est  quod  gaudeas,  There  is 
(reason)  why  you  should  rejoice.  Cic.  Neque  er at  cur  fuller e  vellent.  Ovid. 
Est  ubi  id  valeat.  Cic.  Est,  cum  non  est  satius,  &c.  Auct.  ad  Her.  In 
tho  latter  cases,  the  adverbs  are  equivalent  to  in  quo,  sc.  loco,  tempdre. 

Rem.  3.     The  nominative  is  often  wanting : — 

(1.)  Before  verbs  denoting  the  state  of  the  weather,  or  the 
operations  of  nature  ;  as,  Fulgurat,  It  lightens.  Plin.  Ningit, 
It  snows.  Virg. 

(2.)  Before  the  third  person  singular  of  the  passive  of  neuter 
verbs  ;  as, 

Favetur  tibi  a  me,  Thou  art  favored  by  me.  Ejus  orationi  vehementer 
ab  omnibus  reclamdtum  est.  Cic.     See  §  184,  2. 

A  nominative,  however,  is  expressed  before  the  passive  of  some  neuter 
verbs,  which,  in  the  active  voice,  are  followed  by  an  accusative ;  as, 
Pugna  pugndta  est.  Cic.     See  §  232,  (1.) 

(3.)  Before  the  neuter  of  the  future  passive  participle  with 
est;  as, 

Dolendum  est  primum  ipsi  tibi,  You  yourself  must  first  grieve.  Hor 
Orandum  est,  ut  sit  mens  sana  in  corpora  sano.  Juv. 


178  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE. 

(4.)  Before  the  impersonal  verbs  miseret,  poznitet,  pudet, 
tcedet,  and  pigct ;  as, 

Eos  incptidrum  panltet,  They  repent  of  their  follies.  Cic.  Misiret  te 
alio  rum,  tui  te  nee  misiret  nee  pudet.  Plaut.  Me  civitdtis  morum  piget  tcedet- 
que.  Sail.  In  such  examples,  the  sense  will  sometimes  permit  us  to  supply 
fortuna,  conditio,  memoria,  &c.  So  in  the  expression  Venit  in  mentem, 
It  came  into  mind  j  as,  In  mentem  venit  de  speculo,  sc.  cogitatio,  &c. 
Plaut. 

An  infinitive  or  clause  sometimes  forms  the  subject  of  these  verbs ;  as, 
Te  id  nullo  modo  puduit  facere,  To  do  that  by  no  means  shamed  you.  Ter. 
JYVm  panltet  me,  quantum  profecerim.  Cic. 

(5.)  When  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  an  infinitive  or  partici- 
ple (either  alone  or  with  other  words),  one  or  more  propositions, 
or  an  adverb.  (See  §  201,  IV.  1.)  The  verb  is  then  in  the 
third  person  singular ;  as, 

Vacare  culpa  magnum  est  solatium,  To  be  free  from  fault  is  a  great  con- 
solation. Meque  est  te  fallere  quidquam,  To  deceive  you  in  any  thing  is 
not  (possible.)  Virg.  Mentlri  non  est  meum.  Plaut.  Te  non  istud  audi- 
visse  mirum  est,  That  you  have  not  heard  that  is  wonderful.  Cic.  "  Sum- 
mum  jus,  suinma  injuria,"  factum  est  jam  tritum  serrnone  proverbium.  Id. 
Ni  degeneratum  in  aJiis  huic  quuque  decOri  offecisset.  Liv.  Sin  est  ut  velis 
manere  illam  apud  te.  Ter.  JVec  profuit  Hydra  crescere  per  damnum, 
geminasque  resumgre  vires.  Ovid.  Die  mild,  eras  istud,  Postume,  quando 
venit  ?  Tell  me,  Postumus,  when  does  that  to-morrow  come  ?  Mart. 
Parumne  camp-is  atquc  Neptuno  super  fusum  est  Lutlni  sanguinis?  Hor. 

This  construction  is  especially  common  with  impersonal  verbs;  as, 
Oratorem  irasci  non  decet ;  That  an  orator  should  be  angry,  is  not  be- 
coming. Cic.  Hoc  fieri  et  oportet  et  opus  est.  Id.  Me  pedlbus  delectat 
claudere  verba.  Hor.  Interest  omnium  recte  facere.  Cic.  Casu  uccidit, 
ut,  id  quod  Romae  audierat,  primus  nuntiaret.  Id.  Sometimes  a  neuter 
pronoun  is  interposed  between  a  proposition  and  its  verb  ;  as,  Facire  qua 
libet,  id  est  esse  regem.  Sail. 

(6.)  Before  potest,  ccepit  or  cceptum  est,  i?icipiti  desinit,  debet, 
sold,  and  videtur,  when  followed  by  the  infinitive  of  an  imper- 
sonal verb ;  as, 

Pigere  eum  facti  ccepit,  It  began  to  repent  him  (i.  e.  he  began  to  repent) 
of  his  conduct.  Just.  Sapientia  est  una,  qua  praceptrlce,  in  tranquillitdte 
vivi  potest.  Cic.     Tadere  solet  avdros  impendii.  Quinct. 

Rem.  4.  The  verb  is  sometimes  omitted  ;  as, 
Di  meliorapiis,  sc.  dent;  May  the  gods  grant  better  things  to  the  pious. 
Virg.  Verhm  hac  hacUnus,  sc.  diximus.  Cic.  This  omission  is  most 
common  with  the  verb  sum;  as,  Nam  Polyd-orus  ego,  sc.  sum;  For  I  am 
Polydorus.  Virg.  Omnia  pracldra  rara,  sc.  sunt.  Cic.  So  in  compound 
tenses  ;  as,  Agro  mulctdti,  sc.  sunt.  Liv. 

Rem.  5.  The  nominative  is  sometimes  found  with  the  infin- 
itive ;  as, 

Interim  quotidie  Casar  JEduos  frumentum  flagitare,  Meanwhile  Ccesar 
was  daily  demanding  corn  of  the  jEdui.  Caes.  JYos  pavldi  trepidare  mctu. 
Virg.  Id  horrendum  ferri.  Id.  In  such  cases,  ccqrit  or  cccperunt  is  gene- 
rally supposed  to  be  understood  •  sometimes  other  verbs  may  be  supplied, 


SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE.  1  79 

but  often  the  infinitive  seems  to  be  used  instead  of  the  imperfect  indic- 
ative. 

Rem.  6.  The  relative  qui  may  refer  to  an  antecedent  either 
of  the  first,  second,  or  third  person  ;  and  its  verb  takes  the  per- 
son of  the  antecedent ;  as, 

Ego  qui  lego,  I  who  read.  Tu  qui  scribis,  Thou  who  writest.  Equus  qui 
curnt,  The  horse  which  runs. 

Rem.  7.  Verbs  in  the  first  person  plural,  and  the  second 
person  singular,  are  sometimes  used  to  express  general  truths  ; 
as, 

Quhm  multa  faclmus  causd  amicorum!  How  many  things  we  do  (i.  e. 
men  do)  for  the  sake  of  friends  !  Cic.  Si  vis  me  Jlere,  dolendum  est  ipsi 
tibi,  Whoever  wishes  me,  &c.  Hor. 

Rem.  8.  The  accusative  is  sometimes  used  for  the  nominative  by  at- 
traction.    See  §  206,  (6.)  (b.) 

Rem.  9.  The  verb  sometimes  agrees  with  the  predicate-nominative, 
especially  if  it  precedes  the  verb  ;  as,  Amantium  irae  amoris  integratio  est, 
The  quarrels  of  lovers  are  a  renewal  of  love.  Ter.  Vestes,  quas  gerltis 
sordlda  lana  fuit.  Ovid. 

Rem.  10.  The  verb  sometimes  agrees,  not  with  the  principal  nomina- 
tive, but  with  one  in  apposition  with  it;  as,  Tungri,  civitas  Gallia,  fontem 
habet  insigncm;  The  Tungri,  a  state  of  Gaul,  has  a  remarkable  fountain. 
Plin. 

Rem.  11.  A  collective  noun  has  sometimes  a  plural  verb  ; 
as, 

Pars  epulis  onSrant  mensas,  Part  load  the  tables  with  food.  Virg. 
Turba  ruunt.  Ovid.  Pars  utrdque  avtdi  erant.  Li  v.  Mria  turba  tenent, 
veniunt  leve  vulgus  euntque.  Ovid. 

(1.)  A  plural  verb,  joined  to  a  collective  noun,  usually  expresses  the  ac- 
tion, &c,  of  the  individuals  which  that  noun  denotes.  In  Cicero  and 
Livy,  this  construction  scarcely  occurs  in  simple  sentences  ;  but  it  is  often 
used,  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  not  expressed  in  its  own,  but  in  a 

J  receding  clause ;  as,  Hoc  idem  generi  humdno  cvdnit,  quod  in  terrd  col- 
ocati  sint.  Cic. 

(2.)  When  two  or  more  clauses  have  the  same  collective  noun  as  their 
subject,  the  verb  is  frequently  singular  in  one,  and  plural  in  another;  as, 
Jam  ne  nocte  quidem  turba  ex  eo  loco  dilabebatur,  refracturosque  carcirem 
minabantur.  Liv.  Gens  eddem,  qua  te  crudeli  Daunia  bello  insequitur, 
nos  si  pellant,  nihil  abfore  credunt.  Virg. 

(3.)  Tantum,  followed  by  a  genitive  plural,  has  sometimes  a  plural  verb, 
like  a  collective  noun;  as,  Quid  hue  tantum  honiinum  incedunt?  Why 
are  so  many  men  coming  hither  ?  Plaut. 

(4.)  A  plural  verb  is  often  used  after  uterqm  and  quisque,  pars. ...pars, 
and  alius.... alium,  or  alter.... alter um,  on  account  of  the  idea  of  plurality 
which  they  involve ;  as,  Uterque  eorum  ex.  castris  exercitum  educunt,  Each 
of  them  leads  his  army  from  the  camp.  Cffis.  Intlmus  quisque  libertorum 
vincti  abreptl^we  (sunt.)  Tac.  Mius  alium,  ut  prozlium  incipiant,  circum- 
spectant.  Liv. 

This  construction  may  be  explained  by  the  following  passage,  where 


180  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE. 

the  plural  is  placed  first,  and  then  the  singular,  denoting  its  parts ;  Cetiri 
sua  quisque  tempore,  adgrunt.  Liv.     See  §  204,  Rem.  10. 

Rem.  12.  Two  or  more  nominatives  singular,  not  in  appo- 
sition, generally  have  a  plural  verb  ;  as, 

Furor  ir&que  mentem  prsecipitant,  Fury  and  rage  hurry  on  (my)  mind. 
Virg.    Dum  (etas,  metus,  magister,  prohibebant  Ter. 

(1.)  If  the  predicate  belongs  to  the  several  nominatives  jointly,  the  verb 
is  always  plural  j  as,  Grammatlce  quondam  ac  musice  junct®  fuerunt. 
Quinct. 

(2.)  A  singular  verb  is  often  used  after  several  nominatives 
singular,  especially  if  they  denote  things  without  life  ;  as, 

Mens  enim,  et  ratio  et  consilium  in  senibus  est.  Cic.  Beneficentia,  lib- 
eralltas,  bonltas,justitiafundUus  tollltur.  Id.  This  construction  sometimes 
occurs  with  names  of  persons ;  as,  Gorgias,  Thrasymdchus,  Protagoras, 
Prodicus,  Hippias  in  honore  fuit.  Cic.     Cur  Lysias  et  Hyperides  amatur  ? 

(3.)  When  one  of  the  nouns  is  plural,  the  verb  is  generally  so ;  but 
sometimes  it  is  singular,  when  the  plural  noun  does  not  immediately  pre- 
cede it  j  as,  Dii  te  pendtes  patriiquc,  et  patris  imago,  et  domus  regia,  et  in 
domo  regale  solium,  et  nomen  Tarquinium  creat  vocatjue  regem.  Liv. 

(4.)  When  each  of  the  nominatives  is  preceded  by  et  or  turn,  the  verb 
agrees  with  the  last ;  as,  Hoc  et  ratio  doctis,  et  necessitas  barbaris,  et  mos 
gentibus,  etferis  natura  ipsa  praescripsit;  This,  reason  has  dictated  to  the 
learned,  and  necessity  to  barbarians,  and  custom  to  nations,  and  nature 
itself  to  wild  beasts.  Cic.  Et  ego,  et  Cicgro  meus  flagitabit.  Id.  Turn 
ffitas  viresque,  turn  avlta  gloria  anlmum  stimulabat.  Liv.  So  when  the 
subject  consists  of  two  infinitives;  as,  Et  facere,  et  pati  fortia,  Romdnum 
est.  Cic. 

Unus  et  alter  usually  takes  a  singular  verb ;  as,  Dicit  unus  et  alter 
brevlte? ,  Two  in  succession  speak  briefly.  Cic.  Unus  et  alter  assuitur 
pannus.  Hor. 

(5.)  When  the  nominatives  are  connected  by  aut,  sometimes 
the  plural,  but  commonly  the  singular,  is  used ;  as, 

Si  Socrates  aut  Jlntisthenes  diceret,  If  Socrates  or  Antisthenes  should 
say.  Cic.     Ut  quosque  studium  privdtim  aut  gratia  occupaverunt.  Liv. 

The  plural  is  necessary  with  disjunctives,  if  the  subject  includes  the 
first  or  second  person ;  as,  Qudd  in  Decemvlris  ncquc  ego  neque  Casar 
hablti  essemus.  Cic.  , 

(6.)  A  nominative  singular,  joined  to  an  ablative  by  the  preposition  cum, 
sometimes  has  a  plural  verb  ;  as,  Bocchus,  cum  peditibus,  postremam 
Romanorumaciem  invadunt;  Bocchus,  with  his  foot  soldiers,  attacks  the 
rear  of  the  Roman  army.  Sail.  Ipse  dux,  cum  aliquot  principlbus,  ca- 
piuntur.  Liv. 

(7.)  If  the  nominatives  are  of  different  persons,  the  verb 
agrees  with  the  first  person  rather  than  the  second,  and  with 
the  second  rather  than  the  third  ;  as, 

Si  tu  et  Tullia  valetis,  ego  et  Cicero  valemus ;  If  you  and  Tullia  are 
well,  Cicero  and  I  are  well.  Cic.  Hoic  neque  ego  neque  tu  fecimus.  Ter. 
Ego  populusque  Romdnus  bellum  judlco  faciog^e.  Liv. 

Yet  sometimes  the  verb  agrees  in  number  and  person  with  the  nearest 


SYNTAX. PREDICATE-NOMINATIVE.  181 

nominative,  and  is  understood  with  the  other;  as,  Vos  ipsi  et  sendtus 
frequens  restitit.  This  is  always  the  case  when  the  action  of  the  verb  is 
qualified  with  reference  to  each  nominative  separately;  as,  Ego  misert, 
tu  felictter  vivis. 

Rem.  13.  The  interjections  era,  eccet  and  O,  are  sometimes 
followed  by  the  nominative  ;  as, 

En  Priamus !  Lo  Priam !  Virg.  Ecce  homo  Catiewus !  Cic.  O  vir 
fortis  atque  amicus!  Ter. 

PREDICATE-NOMINATIVE. 

§210.  A  noun  in  the  predicate,  after  a  verb  neuter 
or  passive,  is  put  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  when  it 
denotes  the  same  person  or  thing ;  as, 

Ira  furor  brevis  est,  Anger  is  a  short  madness.  Hor.  Ego  vocor  Lycon- 
Ides,  I  am  called  Lyconides.  Plaut.  Ego  incedo  reglna,  I  walk  a  queen. 
Virg. 

So  when  the  subject  is  in  the  accusative  ;  Judicem  me  esse,  non  docta- 
rem,  volo.  Cic.     Te  parentem  Asia  vis  duci  et  haberi.  Id. 

Sometimes  a  dative,  denoting  the  same  object,  both  precedes  and  fol- 
lows a  verb  neuter  or  passive.     See  §  227,  Note  1. 

Remark  1.  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles, 
standing  in  the  predicate,  after  verbs  neuter  or  passive,  and 
relating  to  the  subject,  agree  with  it  in  case. 

The  gender  and  number  of  such  adjectives,  &c.  are  determined  by  §  205. 

Rem.  2.  The  noun  in  the  predicate  is  sometimes  in  a  different  number 
from  the  subject ;  as,  Sanguis  erant  lachrtjmce,  Her  tears  were  blood.  Ovid. 
Ossa  Izpisfiunt.  Id. 

Rem.  3.  The  verbs  which  most  frequently  have  a  noun,  &c,  in  the 
predicate  agreeing  in  case  with  their  subject,  are, 

(1.)  The  substantive  verb  sum;  as,  Ego  Jovis  sum  nlius.  Plaut.  Disce 
esse  pater.  Ter. 

(2.)  Certain  neuter  verbs,  denoting  position  or  motion ;  as,  cado,  eo, 
evddo,  existo,  fugio,  incedo,  jaceo,  maneo,  scdeo,  sto,  venio,  &c.  Thus, 
Hex  circuibat  pedes,  The  king  went  round  on  foot.  Plin.  Quos  judicdbat 
non  -posse  oratores  evadere.  Cic.  Ego  huic  causa  patronus  exstlti.  Cie. 
Manet  alia  mente  repostum  judicium  Pafldis.  Virg. 

(3.)  The  passive  of  verbs  denoting  k     . 

(a.)  To  name  or  call ;  as,  appellor,  dicor,  nomlnor,  nuncupor,  perhiboor, 
salutor,  vocor.  Thus,  Cognomine  Justus  est  appelldtus,  He  was  called  by 
the  surname  Just.  Nep.  Aristceus  olxvoe  dicltur  inventor.  Cic.  Ego 
pofita  salutor.  Hor. 

(b.)  To  choose,  render,  or  constitute ;  as,  constituor,  creor,  decldror, 
designor,  ellgor,fio,  reddor,  renuncior.  Thus,  Dux  a  Romdnis  electus  est 
Q.  Fabius.     Postquam  ephebus  f actus  est.  Nep. 

(c.)  To  esteem  or  reckon ;  as,  censeor,  credor,  dcprehendor,  existimor, 
feror,habeor,judicor,  numlror,  putor,  reperior,  videor.  Thus,  Credebar 
sanguinis  auctor  ego.  Ovid.  Malim  videri  timidus  quam  pariim  prudens 
Cic. 

16 


182  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    NOUNS. 

Note  1.  With  several  passives  of  the  last  class,  when  followed  by  a 
predicate-nominative,  an  infinitive  of  sum  is  expressed  or  understood  j  as, 
Aniens  mihi  fuisse  videor.  Cic.  Atilius  prudens  esse  putabdtur.  Id.  So 
with  dicor  (to  be  said),  and  perhibeor  ;  as,  Verus  patriot  diciris  esse  pater. 
Mart  _  

Note  2.  Audio  is  sometimes  used  by  the  poets  like  appellor ;  as,  Tu 
rexque  pateryue  audisti  coram.  Hor. 

Rem.  4.  A  predicate-nominative  is  used  after  many  other  verbs,  to 
denote  a  purpose,  time,  or  circumstance  of  the  action ;  as,  Comes  additus 
JEolldes,  iEolides  was  added  as  a  companion.  Virg.  Lupus  obambulat 
nocturnus.  Id.  Appdret  liquldq  sublimis  in  tBthire  Nisus.  Id.  So  with 
an  active  verb ;  Audivi  hoc  puer.  Cic.  Sapiens  nil  facit  invitus.  Id. 
Rempubtlcain..defendi  adolescens.  Id. 

Rbm.  5.  The  noun  opus,  signifying  need,  is  often  used  as  a  predi- 
cate after  sum.  It  is,  in  such  cases,  translated  by  the  adjectivesweed/ki, 
necessary,  &c.;  as,  Dux  nobis  et  .auctor  opus*  est.  Cic.  Multi  opus  sunt 
boves.  Varr.     (Dixit)  aurum  et  uncillas  opus  esse.  Ter. 

Rem.  C.  When  the  pronoun,  which  is  the  subject  of  an  infinitive,  is 
omitted,  the  case  of  the  predicate  is  sometimes,  in  the  poets,  attracted  into 
that  of  the  subject  of  the  verb  on  which  the  infinitive  depends .;.  as,  Uxor 
invicti  Jovis  esse  nescis,  i.  e.  te  esse  uxor  em.  Hor,.  Retulit  Ajax  esse  Jovis 
prpnepos,  Ovid.  ..,,.,/  .'%.  . 


GENITIVE. 
GENITIVE    AFTER    NOUNS. 

$211.  A  noun  which  limits  the  meaning  of  another 
noun,  denoting  a  different  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  th6 
genitive;  as>..  , 

Amor  gloria,  Love  of  glory.  Vitium  ira>,  The  vice  of  an<rer. 

ArmaAchillis,  The  arms  of  Achilles.  JYemdrvm  custos,  The  guardian  of 
Pater    patriae,   The    father   of   the  the  groves. 

.,   country,.        ,  ....        ..  „  •  Amor  habendi,  Love  of  possessing. 

In  the  first  example,  amor  denotes  love  in  general;  gloria  limits  the 
affection  to  the  particular  object,  glory.  Such  universally  is  the  effecf^otf 
the  genitive,  depending  upon  a  noun.     See,  §201,  III.    '  '"    ' 

Remark  ,1.  .  The  genitive  denotes  various  relations,  the  most  common 
of  which  are  those  of  Source  ;  as,  Radii  solis.  The  rays  of  the  sun; — 
Cause  ;  as,  Dolor  podagra,  The  pain  of  the  gout ; — Effect ;  as,  Artffex 
mundi,The  Creator  of  the  world  ; — Possession  ;  as,  Domvs  Casaris,  The 
house  of  Caesar  ; — Object  ;  as,  Cogitatio  alicujus  rei,  A  thought  of  some- 
thing;— Purpose;  as,  Apparatus  trivmphi,  Preparation  for  a  triumph  ; — 
A  whole  ;  as,,  Pars  hominum,  A  part  of  men  ; — Character,;  us,  Adoles- 
cens summa  audacia,  Avouth  of  the  greatest  boldness  ;-^-Material  ox 
component  parts;  as,  Mantes  auri,  Mountains  of  gold  J  Acervus  scutorum^ 
A  heap  of  shields. 

Rem.  2. '  The  genitive  is  called  subjective,  when  it  denotes 
the[subject  of  the  action,  feeling,  &c,  implied  in  the  noun 


SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    NOUNS.  183 

which  it  limits.  It  is  called  objective,  when  it  denotes  the 
object  of  such  action,  &,c. ;  as,  fa 

Subjective.  ■  •<  *■*  "      "  Objective. 

Facta  virorum,  Deeds'  of  men.  Odium,  vitii,  Hatred  of  vice. 

Dolor  arilmi,  Grief  of  mind.  Amor  virtutis,  Love  of  virtue. 

Junonis  ira,  The  anger  of  Juno.  Desiderium  oft'i,  Desire1  of  leisure; 

'Whether  a-,  genitive  is  subjective  or  objective,  is  to  be  determined  by 
the:  meaning  of  the  words,  and  by  their  connection.  Thus,  providentia 
Dei  signifies  the  providence  of  God,  or  that  exercised  by  him ;  timor  Dei, 
fear  of  God,  or  that  exercised  towards  him.  The  same  or  similar  words, 
in  different  connections,  may  express  both  significations. '  Thus,  metus 
kdstium,  fear  of  the  enemy,  may  mean  that  felt  either  by  themselves  or  by 
their  opponents.'  So  vuthus  Ulyssis  (Virg.)  denotes  the  wound  which 
Ulysses  had  given;  vulnus  JEn&ai,  (Id.)  that  which  ./Eneas  had  received. 

When  ambiguity  would  arise,  instead  of  the  objective  genitive,  a  prep- 
osition, with  an  accusative  or  ablative,  is  commonly  used;  as,  Amor  in 
rempubllcam,  for  reipubllcce  ;  Love  to  the  state.  Gic.  Odium  erga  Rdmdnos, 
for  ■Romanorum.  Nep.  Cura  de  salute  patriae,  for  saiutis.  Cic.  Praddtor 
ex  sociis,  for  sociorum*  Sail.    *  ...>>• 

JR-em.  3.  A  substantive  pronoun,  which  limits  the  meaning 
of  a  noun,  is  put  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  •  : 

Cura  mei,  Care  for  me.  Ovid.  Pars  tui,  Part  of  thee.  Id.  Nostrinun- 
cius,  Our  messenger.  Virg.    Magna  met  imago.  Id.        ,.,        ,        .   ,: 

Instead  of  the  subjective  or  possessive  genitive  of  a  substan- 
tive pronoun,  the  corresponding  adjective  pronoun  is  commonly 
used  ;  as, 

Cura  mea,  My  care,  i.  e.  the  care  exercised  by  me.  Yet  the  genitive 
sometimes  occurs ;  as,  Tui  uhius  studio,  By  the  zeal  of  yourself  alone.  Cic. 

Sometimes,  also,  an  adjective  pronoun  occurs  instead  of  the  objective 
genitive  ;  as,  Mea  injuria,  Injury  to  me.  Sail. 

Rem.  4.  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  a  noun,  also,  a  possessive  adjective  is 
often  used  ;  as,  Causa  regia,  for  causa  regis.  Cic.  HeriliajUius,  for  heri 
jilius.  Id.  Evandrius  ensis,  for  Evandri.  Virg.  Herculeus  tabor,  for 
Herculis.  Hor.     Civllis furor,  for  cixium.  Hor.  '■  •■•    ■    •• 

Rem.  5.  The  dative  is  sometimes  used  like  the  objective 
genitive;  as, 

Exhium  jtecori,  A  destruction  to  the  flock.  Virg.  Presidium  reis ,  A 
defence  to  the  accused.  Hor '.  Deciis  amlcisl  Id.  Erit  ille  mihi  semper 
Deus.  Virg.  Dicor  tibifrater.  Mart.  Auctor  fui  senatui.  Cic.  time 
cans®  patronus  exsttti.  Id.  Quern  exiturn  tantis  malis  sperdtis  ?  Sail. 
Romanis  imperdtor.  Id.     Mureena  legdtus  Lucullo/?«£.  Cic. 

In  these  cases,  the  noun  which  is  limited  by  the  dative,  denotes  a  char- 
acter, feeling;  &c,  and  the  dative  the  object  towards  which  that  character, 
&c,  i3  exhibited  or  exercised.  This  construction  sometimes  occurs  with 
verbal  nouns,  whose  primitives  are  followed  by  the  dative  |  as,  Obtempe- 
ratio  leglbus,  Obedience  to  laws.  Cic.  Traditio  alteri.  Id.  In  some 
instances,  also,  an  accusative  follows  a  verbal  noun;  as,  Quid  tibi  banc 
curalio  est  rem  ?  Plaut. 

1 .  Pnstead  of  the  possessive  and  subjective  genitive,  also,  a  dative  is  some- 
times used,  as  the  remote  object  of  a  verb  ;  as,  Sese  omnes  jlentes  Crosari 
ad  pedes  pro jecerunt ;  They  all,  weeping,  cast  themselves  at  the  feet  of 
Co>sar.  Ca?s.  Cui  corpus  porrigltur,  For  whom  the  body  is' ' extended, 
i.  e.  whose  body  is  extended.   Virg.      Trartsjiglt.ur  scutum  Pulfioni.    Ca»* 


184  SYNTAlf. GENITIVE    AFTER    NOUNS. 

Rem.  6.  When  the  limiting  noun  denotes  a  property, 
character,  or  quality,  it  has  an  adjective  agreeing  with  it,  and 
is  put  either  in  the  genitive  or  ablative  ;  as, 

Vir  exempli  recti,  A  man  of  correct  example.  Liv.  Adolescens  summa 
audacue,  A  youth  of  the  greatest  boldness.  Sail.  Fossa  pedum  viginti,  A 
ditch  of  twenty  feet.  Ctes.  Pulchritudlne  ezimid  fernlna,  A  woman  of 
exquisite  beauty.  Cic.  Maximo  natu  filius,  The  eldest  son.  Nep.  So 
Quinquaginta  annorum  impcrium.  Id.  Iter  unius  diei.  Cic.  Galba 
tribus  et  septuaginta  annis.  Tac.     Fossam  sex  cubltis  altam.  Liv. 

Sometimes  both  constructions  occur  in  the  same  proposition ;  as,  Len- 
tulum  nostrum,  eximia  spe,  summas  virtu tis  adolescentem.  Cic.  Scrobis 
lotus  pedum  duorum,  altus  dupondio  et  dodrante.  Plin. 

(1.)  A  genitive  sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  the  adjective  ;  and  the 
noun  denoting  the  property,  &c,  is  then  always  put  in  the  ablative ;  as, 
Est  bos  cervi  figura,  ....of  the  form  of  a  stag.  Cses.  Uri  specie  et  colore 
tauri.  Id. 

(2.)  The  genitive,  in  this  sense,  sometimes  occurs  without  an  adjective ; 
as,  Homlnem  non  nauci.  Plaut.  Homo  nihili.  Varr.  So,  Frutex  palmi 
aliitudine.  Plin.  Transtra  digiti  pollicis  crassitudlne.  Cses.  In  which 
examples  unius  may  be  understood  with  the  genitives. 

Whether  the  genitive  or  ablative  is  preferable  in  particular  cases,  can 
only  be  determined  by  reference  to  classical  authority. 

Note.  Nouns  denoting  extent  of  time  or  space,  after  other  nouns, 
are  often  put  in  the  accusative.     See  §  236. 

Rem.  7.  The  noun  limited  is  sometimes  omitted  ;  as,  0  misgrce  sortis  ! 
sc.  homines;  O  (men)  of  wretched  fortune!  Lucan.  Ad  Didnce,  sc. 
tedem.  Ter.  Hect&ris  Andromache,  sc.  uxor.  Virg.  Suspicionis  vitanda, 
sc.  causd.  Tac. 

The  omitted  noun  may  sometimes  be  supplied  from  the  preceding 
words j  as,  Cujumpecus?  an  Melibcei?  Non;  veriim  JEgonis,  sc.  pecus. 
Virg.  An  adjective  is  often  expressed  referring  to  the  noun  omitted; 
as,  Nullam  virtus  aliam  mer cedent  desiderat,  prater  hanc  (sc.  mercedem) 
laudis.  Cic. 

Rem.  8.  The  noun  limited  is  often  wanting  in  the  predicate 
of  a  sentence  after  sum.  This  usually  happens, 
(1.)  When  it  has  been  previously  expressed  ;  as, 
Hcec  domus  est  Csesaris,  This  house  is  Caesar's.  Nomen  aurce  tarn  sapc 
vocdtum  esse  putans  Nymphce.  Ovid.  Naves  onerarias,  quarum  minor  nulla 
erat  duum  millium  amphorum,  i.  e.  quarum  minor  nulla  erat  quam  navis 
duum,  &c.  Cic. 

(2.)  When  it  is  a  general  word  denoting  a  person,  an  animal, 
&c. ;  as, 

Thucydides,  qui  ejusdem  atdtisfuit ^sc.  homo  ;  Thucydides,  who  was  of 
the  same  age.  Nep.  Multum  ei  detraxit,  quod  alienee  erat  civitdtis,  sc. 
homo  or  civis.  Id.  Summi  ut  sint  laboris  efficiunt,  sc.  animalia.  Ca?s. 
(Claudius)  somni  brevisslmi  erat.  Suet.  Mird  sum  alacritdte.  Cic.  Vulgus 
ingenio  mobili  erat.  Sail.  Non  est  juris  sui.  Lucan.  Potestdtis  suae  esse. 
Liv.     Suarumque  rerum  erant.  Id. 

(3.)  When  it  is  a  general  word  denoting  thing,  for  which  the 
words  part,  property,  duty,  ojjice,  characteristic,  &c,  are  com- 
monly supplied  ;  as, 

TemerUas  est  jlorentis  atdtis,  prudentia  senectutis,  Rashness  is  (the  char- 


SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    NOUNS.  185 

.1-  '  ...    ■    ■  • 

acteristic)  of  youth,  prudence  of  old  age.  Cic.  Est  hoc  Galllcm  consuetu- 
ilnis.  Caes.  Omnia  fiostium  erdnt:  ''A''  ptiucis  end,  quod  multorum  essct. 
Sail.  This  happens  especially  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  an  infinitive 
mood,  or  an  entire  clause  ;  as,  Adolescentis  est  major  es  ndtu  revereri,  It  is 
(the  duty)  of  a  youth  to  reverence  the  aged.  Ovid.  Cujusvis  homlnis  est 
err dr e,  nullius  nisi  insipientis,  in  errote  perscverdrei  Cic.  Pauperis  est 
numerdre  pecus.  Ovid.  Negdvit  moris  esse  Greecorum,  ut  in  cohvtvio  viro- 
rum  accumb&rent  muliires.  Cic.  Nihil  tarn  aquandce,  libertdtis  esse.  Li  v. 
So  when  the  vexb  is  omitted ;  Tamen  officii  duxit,  ezordre  patrem,  sc. 
tsse.  Suet.     .  ,     .  «  •■••-..    '  '  ■"■>    ' 

(4.)  The  same  construction  sometimes  occursafter/acio,  and  someother 
"erbs;  a3,  Asm  Romanorum  facta  est,  Asia  became  (a  possession)  of  the 
'tomans.  Just.  Primum  stipendium  meruit  annorum  decern  septemque. 
Mep.    Agrum  sues,  ditionis  fecisse.    Liv .  •    •  ••      • 

(5.)  The  limited  noun  is  sometimes  wanting,  when  it  is  a  general  word, 
hough  not  in  the  predicate  after  sum  ;  as,  Magni  formica  laboris,  sc.  ahi- 
nil ;  The  ant  (an  animal)  of  great  labor.  Hor.  So  Ei  venit  in  mentem 
'Otestdtis  tiue,  sc.  memoria,  or  the  like;   Cic. 

(6.)  The  limited  noun  is  wanting  als6,  when,  instead  of  the  genitive,  a 
ioaesalre  adjective  or  pronoun  is  used  ;  as,  Humdnum  est  errdre,  To  err 
is  human;  Ter.  Hie  partes  fuerunt  tuce.  Cic.  Non  est  mentlri  meum.  Ter. 
fcSee  §  211,  Rem.  3,  and  4. 

Note.  Grammarians  differ  in  regard1  t6  the  mariner  of  supplying'  the 
vord  which  is  wanting,  when  it  denotes  a  thing.  Some  suppose  that 
icgotium  is  understood ;  others  supply  officium,  munus,  opus,  res,  causa,  &c. 
It  seems,  however,  rather  to  be  an  instance  of  a  construction  common  in 
Latin,  to  omit  a  noun  when  a  getieral  or  indefinite  idea  is  intended.  See 
^  205,  Rem.  7,  (2.)  The  words  to  be  supplied  in  English  are  various, 
according  to  the  connection,.  •         ' 

Rem.  9.  The  limiting  noun  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Tria  millia, 
ac.  passuum.  In  most  cases  of  this  kind,  an  adjective,  adjective  pronoun, 
or  participle,  is  expressed  in  the  genitive;  .;  <■     • 

Rem.  10.  Two  genitives  sometimes  limit  the  same  noun,  one  of  which 
is  commonly  possessive  or  subjective,  and  the  other  objective ;  as,  Aga- 
memnonis  belli  gloria,  Agamemnon's  glory  in  war.  Nep.  Illius  adminis- 
tratio  provincial.  Cic.  Eorum  dierum  consuetudlne  itinSris  nostri  excrci- 
tus perspectd.  Cres.  ..,..,.     »  •'■  •  •  "  •■'*  '■" '  •   '' 

Rem.  11 .  Opus  and  usus,  signifying  need,  are  rarely  limited  by  a  gen- 
itive;  as,  Argenti  opus  fuit,  There  was  need  of  money.  Liv.  Ad  consi- 
lium pensandum  ternporis  opus  esse.  Id.  Prooemii  non  semper  usus  est. 
Quinct.  Si  quo  opgr®  edrum  usus  est.  Liv.  In  a  few  instances,  they  are 
limited  by  an  accusative;  SLS,Puiro  trpus est  cibum  (Plaut.)  ;  -Usus  est 
homlnem  ustutum  (Id.) ;  but  in  general  they  are  limited  by  an  ablative. 
See  §243.  .,•:.■-..,-.  ._,-.-,.. 

Rem.  12.  The  relation  denoted  by  the  genitive  in  Latin,  is,  in  English, 
generally  expressed  by  of,  or  by  thie  possessive  case.  The  objective  gen- 
itive may  often  be  rendered  by  some  other  preposition ;  as,  Remeaium 
doldris,  A  remedy  for  pain.  Injuria  patris,  Injury  to'  a  father.  Descensus 
Averni,  The  descent  to  Avernus.  Ira  belli,  Anger  on  account  of  the 
war.     Potestas  rei,  Power  in  or  over  a  thing.  ,,..-•> 

Note.     Certain -limitations' of  nouns  are  made  by  the  acbusativg  with  a 
preposition,  and  by  the  ablative,  either  with  or  without  a  preposition. 
10  • 


186  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    PARTITIVES. 


GENITIVE     AFTER    PARTITIVES. 

§  212.  Nouns,  adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  ad- 
verbs, denoting  a  part,  are  followed  by  a  genitive  denoting 
the  whole ;  as, 

Pars  civitatis,  A  part  of  the  state.  Nulla  sororum,  No  one  of  the  sis- 
ters. AUquis  philosophorum,  Some  one  of  the  philosophers.  Quis  morta- 
lium  ?  Who  of  mortals  ?  Major  juvlnum,  The  elder  of  the  youths.  Doc- 
tissimus  Romanorum,  The  most  learned  of  the  Romans.  Multum  pecuniae, 
Much  (of)  money.  Satis  eloquentice,  Enough  of  eloquence.  Ublnam 
gentium  suraus  ?  Where  on  earth  are  we  ? 

Note.  The  genitive  thus  governed  denotes  either  a  number,  of  which 
the  partitive  designates  one  or  more  individuals ;  or  a  whole,  of  which 
the  partitive  designates  a  portion.  In  the  latter  sense,  it  commonly  fol- 
lows neuter  adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  and  adverbs. 

Remark  1.  The  nouns  which  denote  a  part  are  pars,  nemo, 
nihil,  &c. ;  as, 

Nemo  nostrum,  No  one  of  us.  Omnium  rerum  nihil  est  agriculturd  me- 
lius. Cic. 

Rem.  2.  Adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  denoting  a 
part  of  a  number,  including  partitives  and  words  used  parti- 
tively,  comparatives,  superlatives,  and  numerals,  are  followed 
by  the  genitive  plural,  or  by  the  genitive  singular  of  a  collec- 
tive noun.  For  the  gender  of  the  adjectives,  See  §  205,  R.  12. 

(1.)  Partitives ;  as,  ullus,  nullus,  solus,  alius,  uter,  uterque,  utercunquc, 
utervis,  uterlibet,  neuter,  alter,  altcruter,  allquis,  quidam,  quispiam,  quisquh, 
quisque,  quisquam,  quicunque,  unusquisque,  quis  ?  qui  ?  quot  ?  quotus  ?  quo- 
tusquisque?  tot,  aliquot,  nonnulli,  plerique,  multi,  pauci,  medius.  Thus, 
Quisquis  deorum,  Whoever  of  the  gods.  Ovid.  Consilium  alter,  One  of 
the  consuls.  Liv.     Multi  hominum,  Many  men.  Flin. 

(2.)  Words  used  partitively  ;  as,  Expediti  milltum,  The  light-armed 
soldiers.  Liv.  Superi  deorum,  The  'gods  above.  Hor.  Sancte  deorum. 
Virg.     Degeneres  canum.  Plin.     Pisciumfemlnce.  Id. 

(3.)  Comparatives  and  superlatives ;  as,  Doctior  juvinum.  Oratorum 
prcBStantisslmus. 

(4.)  Numerals,  both  cardinal  and  ordinal ;  also  the  distributive  singuli, 
as,  Equitum  centum  quinquaginta  interfecti,  A  hundred  and  fifty  of  the 
horsemen  were  killed.  Curt.  Sapientum  octdvus.  Hor.  Singulos  vestrwr 
Curt. 

N«te  1.  The  comparative  with  the  genitive  denotes  one  of  two  in- 
dividuals or  classes ;  the  superlative  denotes  a  part  of  a  number  greater 
than  two  ;  as,  Major  fratrum,  The  elder  of  two  brothers;  Maxlmus  fra- 
irurn,  The  eldest  of  three  or  more. 

In  like  manner,  uter,  alter,  and  neuter,  generally  refer  to  two ;  quis,  alius, 
and  nullus,  to  more  than  two ;  as,  Uter  nostrum  ?  Which  of  us  (two  ?) 
Quis  vestrum  ?  Which  of  you  (three  or  more  ?) 

Note  2.  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  used  after  partitives,  &c.,  ia 
preference  to  nostri  and  vestri ;  yet  the  latter  sometimes  occur. 

Note  3.  The  partitive  word  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  Fies  nobilium 
tu  quoque  jontium,  sc.  unus.  Hor. 


SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    PAKTIT1VES.  187 

Note  4.  The  noun  denoting  the  whole,  after  a  partitive  word,  is  often 
put  in  the  ablative,  with  the  prepositions  de,  e,  ex,  or  in,  or  in  the  accusa- 
tive, with  apud  or  inter;  as,  Nemo  de  iis.  Alter  ex  censoribus.  Li  v.  Units 
ex  multis.  Cic.  Acerrimus  ex  sensibus.  Id.  Primus  inter  omnes.  Virg. 
Crresus  inter  reges  opulentissimus.  Sen.    Apud  Helvetios  nobilisslmos. 

Note  5.  The  whole  and  its  parts  are  frequently  placed  in  apposition, 
distributively  ;  as,  Interfectores,  pars  in  forum,  pars  Syracusas  pergunt. 
Liv.     See  §  204,  Rem.  10. 

Note  6.  Cuncti  and  omnes,  like  partitives,  are  sometimes  followed  by  a 
genitive  plural ;  as,  Attains  Macedonum  fere  omnibus  persudsit,  Attalus 
persuaded  almost  all  the  Macedonians.  Liv.  Cunctos  homlnum.  Ovid. 
Cunctas  provinciarum.  Plin. 

In  the  following  passage,  the  genitive  singular  seems  to  be  used  like  that 
of  a  collective  noun  :  Totius  autem  injustitiae  nulla  capitalior  est,  &c.  Cic. 
Off.  1,  13.  The  phrase  Rem  nullo  modo  probabilem  omnium  (Cic.  Nat. 
Deor.  1,  27,)  seems  to  be  used  for  Rem  nullo  omnium  modorum  probabilem. 

Rem.  3.  The  genitive  denoting  a  whole,  may  depend  on  a 
neuter  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun.  With  these  the  genitive 
singular  is  commonly  used  ;  as, 

Plus  eloquential,  More  (of)  eloquence.  Tantum  fidei,  So  much  fidelity. 
Id  tempdris,  That  time.  Ad  hoc  atatis.  Sometimes  the  plural ;  as,  Id 
miseridrum.  Ter. 

Note  1.  Most  neuter  adjectives,  thus  used,  denote  quantity ;  as,  tantum, 
quantum,  aliquantum,  plus,  minus,  dimidium,  multum,  nimium,  plurlmum, 
rellquum  ;  to  which  add  medium,  summum,  ultlmum,  aliud,  &c.  The  pro- 
nouns thus  used  are  hoc,  id,  illud,  istud,  quod,  and  quid,  with  its  com- 
pounds. 

Most  of  these  may  either  agree  with  their  nouns,  or  take  a  genitive  ; 
but  the  latter  is  more  common.  Tantum,  quantum,  aliquantum,  and  plus, 
when  they  denote  quantity,  are  used  with  a  genitive  only,  as  are  also  quid 
and  its  compounds,  when  they  denote  a  part,  sort,  &c,  and  quod  in  the 
sense  of  quantum.  Thus,  Quantum  crevit  Nilus,  tantum  spei  in  annum 
est.  Sen.  Quid  mulieris  uxoremhabes?  What  kind  of  a  woman....  Ter. 
Allquid  forms.  Cic.  Quid  hoc  rei  est  ?  What  does  this  mean  ?  Ter. 
Quod  auri,  quod  argenti,  quod  ornamentorum/w&,  id  Verres  abslalit. 

Note  2.  Neuter  adjectives  and  pronouns  are  scarcely  used  with  a  gen- 
itive, except  in  the  nominative  and  accusative. 

Note  3.  Sometimes  the  genitive  after  these  adjectives  and  pronouns 
is  a  neuter  adjective,  of  the  first  and  second  declension,  without  a  noun  ; 
as,  Tantum  boni,  So  much  good.  Si  quid  habes  novi,  If  you  have  any 
thing  new.  Cic.  Quid  rellqui  est  ?  Ter.  Nihil  is  also  used  with  such  a 
genitive  ;  as,  Nihil  sinceri,  No  sincerity.  Cic.  This  construction  some- 
times, though  rarely,  occurs  with  an  adjective  of  the  third  declension ;  as, 
Si  quidquam  non  dico  civllis  sed  humdni  esset.  Liv. 

Note  4.  Neuter  adjectives  in  the  plural  number  are  sometimes 
followed  by  a  genitive,  either  singular  or  plural,  with  a  partitive  significa- 
tion ;  as,  Extrema  imperii,  The  frontiers  of  the  empire.  Tac.  Pontes  et 
viarum  angusta,  The  bridges  and  the  narrow  parts  of  the  roads.  Id. 
Opaca  locorum.  Virg.  Antxqua  fcedZrum.  Liv.  Cuncta  camporum..  Tac 
Exercent  colles,  atque  horum  asperrlma  pascunt.  Virg.     See  §  205,  Rem.  9 

Rem.  4.     The  adverbs  sat,  satis,  parum,  nimis,  abunde,  largi- 


183 


SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES. 


ter,  affatim,  arid  partim,  used  partitively,  are  often  followed  by  a 
genitive;  as, 

Sat  ratidnis,  Enough  of  reason.  ,  Virg.  Satis  loquentue,parum  sapientia, , 
Enough  of  fluency,  yet  but  little  wisdom.  Sail.  Nimis  insidiarum.  Cic. 
TerrOris et fraudis \abunde  est.  Virg.  .Auri.etargentilargiter.  Plaut.  Co- 
pidrum  affdtim.  Liv.     Cum  partim  illdrummihifajnttiariisslmi.fissent.  Cic. 

Note  1.  The  above  words,  though  generally  adverbs,  seem,  in  this  use, 
rather  to  be  nouns  or  adjectives. 

Note  2.  The  genitives  gentium,  terrdrum,  loci,  and  locdrvm,  are  used 
after  adverbs  of  place ;  as,  Usquam  gentium, , Any  where.  Plaut.  .Ubi  ter^ 
rdrum  sumus?  Where  in  the  world  are  we?  Cic.  .Ablrequd  terrdrum 
possent.  Liv,  .Ubi  sit  loci.  Plin.  Eo  loci,  In  that  place.  Tac.  Eodem 
loci  res  est.  Cic.  Nesclre  quo  loci  esset.  Id.  But  the  last  three  examples 
might  perhaps  more  properly  be  referred  to  Rem.  3. 

The  adverbs  of  place  thus  used  are  ubi,  ubinam,  ubicunque,  ubiubi, 
ublvis,  usquam,  nusquam,  qud,  quovis,  quoqud,  allqudy  ed,  eodem.  Loci 
als"o  occurs  after  ibi  and  ibidem;  gentium  after  longk,  ;  aSj  Ibi  loci,  In  that 
place.  Plin.  Abes  Jonge  gentium.  ,Cie..  Vicinim  is  used, in  the  genitive 
after  h\c  and  hue  by  the  comic  writers ;  as,  H\c  proximo:  vicinue.  Plaut. 
Hue  vicinice.  Ter.  (  •»,.;... 

Note  &  Hue,  eb,  qud,  take  also  a  genitive  in  the  sense  of  degree ;  as, 
Ed  ihsolentiae  furoris^e  processit,  He  advanced  to  such  a  degree  of  insor 
lence  and  madness.  Plin.  Hue  enim  malorum  ventum  est.  Curt.  Hucclne 
reruin  venlmus?  Pers.  Ed  miseriarum.  Sail.  Qud  amentia?  progressi 
skis.  Liv. 

Note  4.  Loci,  locorum,  and  ternpdris,  are,  used  after  the  adverbs  adhuc, 
inde,  inter ea,  posted,  turn,  and  tunc,  in  expressions  denoting  time  j  as, 
Adhuc  locorum,  Till  now,.  Plaut.  Inde.  loci,  After. that.  Lucr.  Jnterea 
loci,  In  the  mean  time.  Ter.  Postea  loci,  Afterwards.  Sail.  Turn  tern- 
pdris. Just.  Tunc  ternpdris.  Id.  Locorum  also  occurs  after  id,  denoting 
time;  as,  Ad  id  locorum,  Up  to  that  time.  Sail.  (  ir        ,      , 

Note  5.  The  genitive  ejus  sometimes  occurs  after  quoad,  in  such  con- 
nections as  the  following  :  Quoad,  ejus  fieri  possit,  As  far  as,  may  be  (Cic.)  ; 
where  some  think  quod,  in  the  sense  of  quantum,  should  be  read,  instead 
of  quoad.  ,  (  ,     ;   .  ,.  , 

Note  6.  Pridie  and  postridie,  though  reckoned  adverbs,  are  followed 
by  a  genitive,  depending  on  the  noun  dies  contained  in  .them ;  as,  Pridie 
ejus  diei,  The  day  before  that  day.  Cic.  Pridie  insidiarum.  Tac.  Pos- 
tridie ejus  diei.  Cses.  When  they  are  followed  by  an  accusative,  ante  or 
post  is  understood.  ,. 

Note  7.      Adverbs,  in   the   superlative  .  degree,   like   adjectives, 

llowed  by  a  genitive  ;  as,   ** 
gentium,  By  no  means.  Ter. 


followed  by  a  genitive ;  as,  Optlme  omnium,  Best  of  all.  Cic.     Minlme* 
By 


GENITIVE     AFTER    ADJECTIVES. 

<§>  213.  A  noun,  limiting  the  meaning  of  an  adjective, 
is  put  in  the  genitive,  to  denote  the  relation  expressed  in 
English  by  of,  or  in  respect  of;  as,  ,.    . 

Avlduslaudis,  Desirous  of  praise.   .:    Plena  timoris,  Eull  of  fear.        I 
Appetens  gloria),  Desirous  of  glory.     ,  Egenus  aqua,  Destitute  of  water 
Memor  virtutis,  Mindful  of  virtue.       Doctus  fandi,  Skilful  in  speaking. 


SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES.  189 

So  JYcscia  mens  fati,  A  mind  ignorant  of  fate.  Virg.  Impdtens  irce, 
Unable  to  control  anger.  Liv.  Homines  ezpertes  veritdtis,  Men  destitute 
of  truth.  Cic.  Lactis  abundans,  Abounding  in  milk.  Virg.  Terra  ferax 
arborum,  Land  productive  of  trees.  Plin.  Tenax  propositi  vir,  A  man 
tenacious  of  his  purpose.  Hor.  JEger  anlmi,  Sick  in  mind.  Liv.  Integer 
vitce  scelerisquc  purus,  Upright  in  life,  and  free  from  wickedness.  Hor. 

From  the  above  examples,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  genitive  after  an 
adjective  is  sometimes  translated  by  other  words  besides  of,  or  in  respect 
of,  though  the  relation  which  it  denotes  remains  the  same. 

Remark  1.  The  adjectives  whose  signification  is  most 
frequently  limited  by  a  genitive,  are, 

(1.)  Verbals  in  ax;  as,  capax,  edax,  ferax,  fugax,  pervicax,  tenax,  &c. 

(2.)  Participials  in  ns,  and  a  few  in  tus  ;  as,  amans,  appUens,  cupiens, 
patiens,  impaticns,  sitiens  ; — consultus,  doctus,  expertus,  inexpcrtus,  insuetus, 
insolltus. 

(3.)  Adjectives  denoting 

Desire  and  Disgust;  a.3,avarus,avldus,cupidus,  studiosus ;  fastidiosus. 

Knowledge  and  Ignorance  ;  as,  callldus,  conscius,  gnarus,  peritus, 
prudcns;  rudis,igndrus,  inscius,  imprudens,  imperitus,  &c. 

Memory  and  Forgetfulness  ;  as,  memor  ;  immemor,  &c.         ' 

Certainty  and  Doubt;  as,  certus ;  incerlus ,  ambiguus,  dubius,  sus- 
pensus,  &c. 

Care  and  Negligence;  as,  anxius,  solicltus,  providus ;  improvidus, 
securus,  &c. 

Fear  and  Confidence;  as,  pavldus,  timldus;  trepXdus,  impavldus, 
fidens,  interrUus,  &c. 

Guilt  and  Innocence;  as,  noxius,  reus,suspectus,compertus;  innoxius 
innocens,  insons,  &c. 

Plenty  and  Want;  as,  plenus,  dives,  satur,  largus;  inops,  cgenus, 
pauper,  partus,  vacuus,  &c. 

Many  other  adjectives  are  in  like  manner  limited  by  a  genitive,  espe- 
cially by  animi,  ingenii,  mentis,  irce,  militice,  belli,  laboris,  rerum,  cevi, 
morum,  and  fidei. 

Rem.  2.  The  limiting  genitive,  by  a  Greek  construction,  sometimes 
denotes  a  cause  or  source,  especially  in  the  poets ;  as,  Lassus  laboris, 
Weary  of  labor.  Hor.     Fessus  vice.  Stat.     Fessus  maris.  Hor. 

Rem.  3.  Participles  in  ns,  when  used  as  such,  take  after  them  the  same 
case  as  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived ;  as,  Se  amans,  Loving 
himself.  Cic.     Mare  terram  appUens.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  denoting  of,  or  in  respect 
of,  a  different  construction  is  used  after  many  adjectives ;  as, 

(1.)  An  infinitive  or  clause ;  as,  Certus  ire,  Determined  to  go.  Ovid. 
Cantare  perxti.  Virg.  Felicior  ungugre  tela.  Id.  Anxius  quid  facto  opus 
sit.  Sail. 

(2.)  An  accusative  with  a  preposition ;  as,  Ad  rem  avidior.  Ter. 
Avidus  in  direptiones.  Liv.  Animus  capax  ad  prnecepta.  Ovid.'  Ad 
casum  fortunam<pe  felix.  Cic.  Ad  fraudem  callldus.  Id.  Dillgens  ad 
custodiendum.  Id.  Negligentior  in  patrem.  Just.  Vir  ad  discipllnam 
peritus.  Cic.     Ad  bella  rudis.  Liv.     Potens  in  res  bellTcas.  Id. 

(3.)  An  accusative  without  a  preposition,  chiefly  in  the  poets;  as, 
Kudus  membra,  Bare  as  to  his  limbs.  Virg.  Os,  hwxciexoaque  deo  simllis 
Id.    Cetera. fulvus.  Hor.     See  §  234,  II. 


190 


SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 


,  (4.)  An  ablative  with  a  preposition ;  as,  Avidus  in  pecuniis,  Eager  in 
regard  to  money.  Cic.  Anxius  de  fama.  Q,uinct.  Rudis  in  jure  civili. 
Cic.  Peritus  de  agricultural.  Varr.  Prudens  in  jure  civili.  Cic.  Reus 
de  vi.  Id.  Purus  ab  cultu  humdno.  Liv.  Certior  f actus  de  re.  Cic«: 
Solicltus  dere.  Id.  Super  scelere  suspectus.  Sail.  Jnops ab  amicis.  Cic. 
Pauper  in  cere.  Hor,  Modicus  in  cultu. ,  Plin.  .  Ab  aquis  sterllis.  Apul. 
Copwsus  a  frumehto.  Cic.     Ab  equitatujirmtts.  Id.  .       , 

(5.)  An  ablative  without  a  preposition;  as,  Arte  rudis,  Rude  in  art./ 
Ovid,  ifc^ni*  crimine  insons.  Liv.  Compos  mente.  Virg.  Prudens 
cqnsilio.  Just.  JEgtr  pedlbus.  Sail.  Prmstans  ingenio.  Cic!  Modicus 
seyeritate.  Tac.  Mhil  insidiis  vacuum.  Cic.  Amor  et  melle  et  felle  est 
fecundisslmus.  Plaut. 

Jri  many  instances,  the  signification  of  the>  accusative  and  ablative  after 
adjectives  differs,  in  a  greater  or  less  degree,  from  that  of  the  genitive. 

Rem.  5.  As  many  of  the  adjectives,  which  are  followed  by  a  genitive, 
admit  of  other  constructions,  the  most  common  use  of  each,  with  particu-i 
larjtiouns,  can,  in  general,  be  determined  only  by  recourse  to  the  diction- 
ary, or  to  the  classics.     Some  have, 

/l.)  The  genitive  only  ;  as,  benignus,,  cxsors,  impos,  impdtens,  irritus, 
liberdlis,  muniflcus,  prailargus,  and  many  others. 

(2.)  The  genitive  more  frequently  ;  as,  compos,  consors,  egenus,  exharcs, 
expers,fertllis,  indlgus,  parcus,  pauper,  prodlgus,  sterllis,  prosper,  insatid- 
tus,  insatiabllis. 

(3.)  The  genitive  or  ablative  indifferently ;  as,  copiosus,  dives  ifemindus^ 
ferfax,  immunis,  inanis,  inops,  largus,  modicus,  immodlcus,  nimius,  opulen- 
tus,  plenus,  potens,  purus,  refertus,  satur,  vacuus,  uber. 

(4.)  The  ablative  more  frequently;  as,  abundans,  alitnus,  cassus, 
eztorris,firmus,  foetus,  frequens,  gravis,  gr avidus,  jejunus,infirmus,.  liber, 
locfrples,  lotus,  mactus,  nudus,  onustus,  orbus,  pollens,  satidtus.  tenuis, 
truncvs,  viduus. 

(5.)  The  ablative  only ;  as,  beatus,  mutllus,  tumldus,  turgldus. 

For  the  construction  of  the  ablative  after   the   preceding   adjectives 

see  §  250. 

Rf-m.  6.     Some  adjectives  which  are  usually,  limited  by  a  dative,  some 

times  take  a  genitive  instead  of  the  dative;  as,  simllis,  dissimllis,  <fcc. 

See  §222,  Rem.  2. 


GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

-  •  i  '    i   ,. 

$  214.     Sum,  and  verbs  of  valuing,  are  followed  by  a 
genitive,  denoting  degree  of  estimation  ;  as, 

A  me  argentum,  quanti  est,  sy/mlto  ;  Take  of  me  so  much  money  as  (he) . , 
is  worth.  Ter.     Magni  astimdbat  pecuniam,  He  valued  money  greatly. 
Cic.     Ager  nunc  pluris  est,  quam  tuncfuit.   Id. 

Remark  1.     This  genitive  may  be, 

(1.)  A  neuter  adjective  of  quantity;  as,  tanti,  quanti,  pluris,  minoris, 
magni,  perrnagni,  plurlmi,  maxlmi,  minimi,  parvi,  tantldem,  quanticunque, 
quantivis,  quantillbet,  but  not  multi  and  majoris.  ,  , 

(2.)  The  nouns  assis,fiocci,  nduci,  nihlli,  pili,  teruncii,  and  also  pensi 
Kiijus: 


(2.)' 
r«vl  Kiii 


SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  19,1 

Rem.  2.  The  verbs  of  valuing  are  astlmo,  existlmo,  duco,  facio,  habeo 
pendo,  puto,  depute,  taxo,  to  which  may  be  added  refert  and  interest 
Thus,  Ut  quanti  quisque  se  ipsefaciat,  tanti  fiat  ab  amicis ;  That  as  much 
as  each  one  values  himself,  so  much  he  should  be  Valued  by  his  friends 
Cic.  Sed  quia  parvi  id  duceret.  Id.  Honor es  si  magni  non  puiemus.  Fd. 
Non  assis  jacis  ?  Catull.  Neque  quod  dixi,  flocci  existlmat.  Plaut.  Mud 
mea  magni  interest,  That  greatly  concerns  me.  Cic.  Parvi  refert  jus 
did.  Id.  •'  '  

Note  1.  JEqui  and  boni  are  put  in  the  genitive  after/aci'oand  cansijo; 
as,s  Nos  eequi  bonlque  faclmus.  Li  v.'  Boni  ronsuluit,  He  took  it  in  good 
part.  Plin. 

Note  2.  After  cestlmo,  the  ablatives  magno,  permagno,  parvo,  nihllo, 
are  sometimes  used;  as,  Data  magno  cestlmas,  accepta  parvo.'  Sen.  So 
other  ablatives,  when  definite  price  is  denoted.  Pro  nihllo,  also,  occurs 
after  duco,  habeo,  and  puto'.  So  nihil  with  cestlmo  arid  moror. 

Note  3.  With  refert  and  interest,  instead  of  the  genitive,  an  adverb  or 
neuter  accusative  is  often  used  ;  as,  Multum  refert.  Mart.  Plurlinum 
interlrit.  Juv.     Tour nihil  referebat.  'Ter.'    Quia  autemillius  interest?  Cic. 

Note  4.  The  neuter  adjectives  above  enumerated,  and  hujus,  may  be 
referred  to  a  noun  understood,  as  pret\i,  ceris,  pondiris,  momcnti ;  and 
may  be  considered  as  limiting  a  preceding  noun,  also  understood,  and 
denoting  some  person  or  thing  indefinite  ;  as,  JQstlmo  te  magni,  i.  e.  hom- 
tnem  magni  pretii.  Scio  ejus  or  dines  auctoritdtcm  semper  apud  te  magni 
fuisse,  i.  e.  rem  magni  momenti.  The  words  assis,  &c,  may  also  be  con- 
sidered as  depending  on  an  omitted  noun,  as  pretio,  rem,  &c. 
-    For  tanti,  quanti,  pluri$,  miridris,  denoting  pride,  see  §  252. 

§215.  (1.)  Miscreor,  miseresco,  and  the  impersonate? 
miseret,  pamitet,  pudet,  tadet,  and  piget,  are  followed  by  ^ 
genitive  of  the  object  in  respect  to  which  the  feeling  is 
exercised  ;  as, 

Miseremlni  sociorum,  Pity  the  allies.  Cic.  Miseresclte  regis,  Pity  the 
king.  Virg.  Tui  memisSrct,  rnei  piget,  I  pity  you,  and  am  sorry  for  my- 
self? Ace.  Eos  ineptiarum  pcenltet.  Cic.  Fratris  me  pudet  pigetque.  Ter. 
Me  civitdtis  morum  piget  tcedetque.  Sail'.  So  the '  passive  \  Nunquam  sus- 
ce'pti  negotii  eum  perttiesum  est.  Nep.  Lenitudlnis  eorum  pertaesa.  Tac. 
Miserltum  est  me  tudrum  fortunarum.  Ter.  Cave  te  fratrum  miseredtur. 
Cic.  "    '  ' 

'  Miserescit  is  sometimes  used  in  the  same  manner ;  as,  Nunc  te  miserescat 
mei.  Ter.  Misereo,  in  the  active  voice,  also  occurs  with  a  genitive ;  as, 
Ipse  sui  mis&ret.  Lucr.     Pertcesus  ignaviam  suam  occurs  in  Suetonius. 

Remark.  The  genitive  after  the  above  impersonals  seems  to  depend 
on  an  indefinite  subject  which  is  omitted.  See  §209,  Rem.  3,  (4.)  In- 
stead of  the  genitive,  an  infinitive  or  clause  is  sometimes  used  as  a  subject; 
as,  Non  me  hoc  jam  dicere  pudebit.  Cic.  Non  pcenltet  me  quantum  pro- 
fecerim.  Id.  These  verbs  have  also  sometimes  a  nominative,  especially 
a  neuter  pronoun ;  as,  Me  quidem  h&c  conditio  non  pamitet.  Plaut.  Non 
U  haec  pudent  ?  Ter.  ,   • 

'  Misiret  occurs  with  an  accusative,  instead  of  a  genitive ;  as,  Mcntdemi 
vicem  misiret  me.  Ter. 

These  verbs  also  take  an  accusative  of  the  person  exercising  the  feeling 
which  they  express.     See  §  229.  Rem.  6.  -  ''•• 


192  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

(2.)  Satago  is  followed  by  a  genitive  denoting  in  what  re- 
spect ;  as, 

Is  satdgit  rerum  sudrum,  He  is  busily  occupied  with  his  own  affairs. 
Ter.  This  compound  is  often  written  separately.  Aglto,  with  sat,  in  like 
manner,  is  followed  by  a  genitive  ;  as,  Nunc  agltas  sat  tute  tudrum  rerum. 
Plaut. 

§  216.  Recordor,  memlni,  reminiscor,  and  obliviscor, 
are  followed  by  a  genitive  or  accusative  of  the  object 
remembered  or  forgotten  ;  as, 

Unjus  meriti  recordor,  I  remember  his  merit.  Cic.  Ozjmes  gradus  cctdtis 
recordor  tuce,  I  call  to  mind  all  the  periods  of  your  life.  Id.  Memlni  vivo- 
rum,  I  am  mindful  of  the  living.  Id.  Numeros  memlni,  I  remember  the 
measure.  Virg.  Cinnam  memlni,  I  remember  Cinna.  Cic.  Reminisci 
vete'ris  famse.  Nep.  Reminisci  amlcos.  Ovid.  Injuriarum  obliviscltur. 
Nep.     Obliviscere  Graios.  Virg. 

Remark  1.  These  verbs  seem  sometimes  to  be  considered  as  active, 
and  sometimes  as  neuter.  As  active,  they  take  an  accusative  regularly; 
as  neuter,  they  take  a  genitive,  denoting  that  in  respect  to  which  mem- 
ory, &c.  are  exercised  ;  as,  Oblivisci  controversiarum,  To  be  forgetful  of 
(in  respect  of)  controversies. 

Rem.  2.  Recordor  and  memlni,  to  remember,  are  sometimes  followed 
by  an  ablative  with  de  ;  as,  Petlmus  ut  de  suis  liberis  ....  recordentur.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  Memlni,  signifying  to  make  mention  of,  has  a  genitive,  Or  an 
ablative  with  de  ;  as,  JVeque  hvjus  rei  memlnit  poeta.  Quinct.  Meministi 
de  exsullbus.  Cic.  For  the  genitive  with  venit  in  mentem,  see  §  211, 
Rem.  8,  (5.)         £$u^ ^  w  ;  J*L      Uf  CTY  Tw-  V~L  . 

$217.  Verbs  of  accusing,  convicting,  condemning, 
and  acquitting,  are  followed  by  a  genitive  denoting  the 
crime  ;  as, 

Arguit  me  furti,  He  accuses  me  of  theft.  Alterum  accusat  probri,  He 
accuses  another  of  villany      Meipsum  inertia?  condemno.  Cic. 

Remark  1 .     To  this  rule  belong  the  verbs  of 

Accusing ;  accfiso,  ago,  arcesso,  arguo,  citOj  defi.ro,  incripo,  incuso, 
insimulo,  postulo,  and  more  rarely  alUgo,  anqulro,  astringo,  capto,  increp- 
Ito,  urgeo,  interrogo. 

Convicting  ;  convinco,  coarguo,  prehendo. 

Condemning;  damno,  condemno,  infdmo,  and  more  rarely  judlco,  noto, 
plector. 

Acquitting  ;  absolvo,  libgro,  purgo,  and  rarely  solvo. 

Rkm  2.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  an  ablative  with  de  is  often  used  ;  as, 
Accusdre  de  negligentia.  Cic.  De  vi  condemndti  sunt.  Id.  De  repetun- 
dis  est.  -postuldtus.  Id.  Sometimes  with  in;  as,  In  quo  te  accfiso  (Cic); 
and  after  libero,  with  a  or  ab  ;  as,  A  scelere  liberdti  sumus.  Cic. 

With  some  of  the  above  verbs,  an  ablative  without  a  preposition  is  often 
used;  as,  Liberdrc  culpa.  Cic.  Crimen  quo  argui posset.  Nep.  Procon- 
sulem  postulaverat  repetundis.  Tac.  This  happens  especially  with  general 
words  denoting  crime;  as,  scelus,  maleficium,  pecedtum,  &c;  as,  Me 
poccato  solvo.  Liv.  The  ablatives  crimlne  and  nomine,  without  a  prepo 
6ition,  are  often  inserted  before  the  genitive  ;  as,  Arcesse're  allquem  crnnine 
-ambitus.  Liv.     Nomine  sceleris  conjurationisque  damndti.  Cic. 


SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  193 

Rem.  3.  The  punishment  is  expressed  either  by  the  genitive,  the 
ablative,  or  the  accusative  with  ad  or  in;  as,  Damnatus  longi  laboris 
(Hor.) ;  Quadrupli  condemndri  (Cie.) ;  Damndre  pecunid  (Just.),  ad 
panam  (Traj.  in  Plin.),  in  metallum  (Plin.)  ;— sometimes,  though  rarely, 
by  the  dative  ;  as,  Damnatus  morti.  Lucr.  In  like  manner,  caput  is  used 
in  the  genitive  or  ablative  ;  as,  Duces  capitis  d'amndtos.  Nep.  Nee  caplte 
damndrer.  Cic.  So  with  some  other  verbs  besides  those  of  accusing,  &c. 
Quern  ego  capitis  per  dam.  Plaut.  Me  capitis  periclitdtum  memlni.  Apul. 
With  plecto  and  plector,  caput  is  used  in  the  ablative  only. 

Rem.  4.  Accuso,  incuso,  insimulo,  instead  of  the  genitive,  sometimes 
take  the  accusative,  especially  of  a  neuter  pronoun  ;  as,  Si  id  me  nan 
accusas.  Plaut.  Qua?  me  incusaveras.  Ter.  Sic  me  insimuldre  falsum 
faclnus.   Plaut.     See  §  231,  Rem.  5. 

Rem.  5.  The  following  verbs  of  accusing,  &c.,  are  not  followed  by  a 
genitive  of  the  crime,  but,  as  active  verbs,  by  an  accusative  : — calumnior, 
carpo,  corripio,  crimlnor,  culpo,  excuso,  multo,  punio,  reprehendo,  sugillo, 
taxo,  traduco,  vitupero ;  as,  Culpdre  infecunditdtem  agrorum.  Colum. 
Excusdre  errorem  et  adolcscentiam.  Liv. 

This  construction  also  occurs  with  some  of  the  verbs  before  enumerated ; 
as,  Ejus  avaritiam  perfidiamque  accusdrat.  Nep.  Culpam  arguo.  Liv. 
With  multo,  the  punishment  is  put  in  the  ablative  only,  without  a  prepo- 
sition ;  as,  Exsiliis,  morte  multantur.  Cic. 

VN^  218.  Verbs  of  admonishing  are  followed  by  a  gen- 
itive denoting  that  in  respect  to  which  the  admonition  is 
given;  as, 

Milites  temporis  monet,  He  admonishes  the  soldiers  of  the  occasion. 
Tac.    Admonebat  alium  egestatis,  alium  cupiditatis  sua.  Sail. 

Remark  1.  The  verbs  of  admonishing  are  moneo,  admoneo,  commoneo, 
commonefacio.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  they  sometimes  have  an  ablative 
with  de ;  as,  De  tede  Telluris  me  admones  (Cic.) ; — sometimes  a  neuter 
accusative  of  an  adjective  pronoun  or  adjective ;  as,  Eos  hoc  moneo  (Cic.)  ; 
Illud  me  admoneo  (Id.) ;  Multa  admonemur  (Id.) ; — and  rarely  a  noun ; 
as,  Earn  rem  nos  locus  admonuit.  Sail. 

Rem.  2.  These  verbs,  instead  of  the  genitive,  are  often  followed  by  an 
infinitive  or  clause  ;  as,  Soror  monet  succurrere  Lauso  Turnum,  His  sister 
admonishes  Turnus  to  succor  Lausus.  Virg.  Monet,  ut  suspiciones  yitet. 
Caes.  Monet  rationem  frumenti  esse  habendam.  Hirt.  Immortalia  ne 
speres  monet  annus.  Hor. 

^219.  Refert  and  interest  are  followed  by  a  genitive  of 
the  person  or  thing  whose  concern  or  interest  they  denote ;  as, 

Humanitdtis  refert,  It  concerns  human  nature.  Plin.  Interest  omnium 
recti  faclre,  It  concerns  all  to  do  right.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  the  substantive  pro- 
nouns, the  adjective  pronouns  mea,  tua,  sua,  nostra,  and  vestra, 
are  used  ;  as, 

Mea  nihil  refert,  It  does  not  concern  me.  Ter.  Tua  et  mea  max\me 
interest,  te  valere.  Cic.     Magis  reipubllcse  interest  quam  mea.  Id. 

Refert  rarely  occurs  with  the  genitive,  but  often  with  the  adjective 
pronouns. 

Rem.  2.     In  regard  to  the  case  of  these  adjective  pronouns,  gramma 
17 


194  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    OF    PLACE. 

rians  differ.  Some  suppose  that  they  are  in  the  accusative  plural  neuter, 
agreeing  with  an  indefinite  noun  understood  ;  as,  Interest  mea,  i.  e.  est 
inter  mca  ;  It  is  among  my  concerns.  Refert  tua,  i.  e.  refert  se  ad  tua  ;  It 
refers  itself  to  your  concerns.  Others  think  that  they  are  in  the  ablative 
singular  feminine,  agreeing  with  re,  causd,  &c,  understood. 

Rem.  3.  Instead  of  a  genitive,  an  accusative  with  ad  is  sometimes 
used  ;  as,  Ad  honorem  meum  interest  quam  primiim  urbem  me  venire 
(Cic.)  ;  Quid  id  ad  me  aut  ad  meam  rem  refert  (Plaut.) ; — sometimes,  though 
rarely,  an  accusative  without  a  preposition  ;  as,  Quid  te  igltur  retulit  ? 
(Plaut.) ; — or  a  dative  ;  as,  Die  quid  reflrat  intra  natural  fines  viventi.  Hor. 

Rem.  4.  These  verbs  often  have  a  nominative,  especially  a  neuter  pro- 
noun; as,  Id  mea  minimi  refert.  Ter.  Hoc  vchementer  interest  reipubllca. 
Cic.     JYon  qud  mca  interessel  loci  natura.  Id. 

For  the  genitives  tanti,  qvanti,  &c,  after  refert  and  interest,  see  §  214. 
*§>  220.     Many  verbs  which  are  usually  otherwise  construed, 
are  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive.     This  rule  includes 

1.  Certain  verbs  denoting  an  affection  of  the  mind;  ango,  discrucior, 
excrucio,  folio,  pendco,  which  are  followed  by  anlini  ;  decipior,  desipio, 
fallor,  fastidio,  invideo,  miror,  vereor ;  as,  Msurdi  facis  qui  angas  te 
animi.  Plaut.  Me  anlmi  fallit.  Lucr.  Decipltur  laburum.  Hor.  Desip- 
iebam  mentis.  Plaut.     Justitiae  ne  prius  mirer  belline  laborum.  Virg. 

2.  The  following,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  idiom;  abstineo  (Hor.), 
deslno  (Id.),  desisto  (Virg.),  laudo  (Sil.),  levo  (Plaut.) ,  particlpo  (Id.), pro- 
hibeo  (Sil.),  pur  go  (Hor.)  Regndvit  populorum  occurs  in  Horace,  for 
which  some  manuscripts  read  regndtor. 

3.  Some  verbs  denoting  to  fill,  to  abound,  to  want,  which  are  commonly 
followed  by  an  ablative.  Such  are  abundo,  careo,  compleo,  expleo,  impleo, 
egro,  indigeo,  satvro,  scateo  ;  as,  Adolescentem  suat  temeritatis  implet,  He 
fills  the  youth  with  his  own  rashness.  Liv.  Animum  explesse  flammse. 
Vhg.  Egeo  consilii.  Cic.  JYon  tarn  artis  indigent  qudm  laboris.  Id. 
See  §  §  249  and  250,  (2.) 

4.  Potior,  which  also  is  usually  followed  by  an  ablative ;  as,  Urbis 
potlri,  To  gain  possession  of  the  city.  Sail.  Potxri  regni  (Cic),  hostium 
(Sail.),  rerum  (Cic.)  Potio  (active)  occurs  in  Plautus;  as,  Eiim  nunc 
potivit  servitutis,  He  has  made  him  partaker  of  slavery.  In  the  same 
writer,  potltus  est  hostium  signifies,  "he  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  enemy." 


GENITIVE    OF    PLACE. 

§  221.  I.  The  name  of  a  town  in  which  any  thing  is 
said  to  be,  or  to  be  done,  if  of  the  first  or  second  declen- 
sion and  singular  number,  is  put  in  the  genitive ;  as, 

Habitat  Mileti,  He  lives  at  Miletus.  Ter.  Quid  Ronwfaciam  ?  What 
can  I  do  at  Rome  ?  Juv. 

Remark  1.  Names  of  islands  and  countries  are  sometimes  put  in  the 
genitive,  like  names  of  towns ;  as,  Ithaca,  vivere,  To  live  in  Ithaca.  Cic. 
Corcyra  fulmus.  Id.  Pompeium  Cypri  visum  esse.  Coes.  Cretm  jussit 
considere  Apollo.  Virg.     JYon  Libya.  Id.     Roma  JYumidiaque.  Sail. 

Rem.  2.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  the  ablative  of  names  of  towns  of  the 
first  and  second  declension  and  singular  number,  is  sometimes,  though 


SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES.  195 

rarely,  used ;  as,  Rex  Tyro  decedit,  The  king  dies  at  Tyre.  Just.  Et 
Corintho  et  Atherus  et  Lacedtemone  nuncidta  est  victoria.  Id.  Pons  quern 
Me  Abydo  fecerat.  Id.  Hujus  exemplar  Roma  nullum  habemus.  Vitruv. 
JYon  ante  Tyro.  Virg. 

Rem.  3.  Thd  genitives  domi,  militia,  hdli,  and  humi,  are 
construed  like  names  of  towns  ;  as, 

Tenuit  se  domi,  He  staid  at  home.  Cic.  Vir  domi  clarus.  Liv.  Und, 
semper  militias  et  domi  fulmus,  We  were  always  together  both  at  home 
and  abroad.  Ter.  Belli  spectdta  domique  virtus.  Hor.  Militice  and  belli 
are  thus  used  only  when  opposed  to  domi. 

(1.)  Domi  is  thus  used  with  the  possessives  were,  tuce,  sua,  nostrce, 
vestrce)  and  alienee;  as,  Domi  nostras  vixit,  He  lived  at  my  house.  Cic. 
Apud  eum  sicfui  tanquam  meae  domi.  Id.  Sacrificium,  quod  alienae  domi 
fieret  invisere.  Id.  But  with  other  adjectives,  an  ablative,  with  or  without 
a  preposition,  is  used ;  as,  In  vidud  do-mo.  Ovid.  Paternd  domo.  Id. 
Sometimes  also  with  the  possessives ;  as,  Med  in  domo.  Hor.  In  domo 
sua.  Nep.  So,  instead  of  humi,  humo  is  sometimes  used,  with  or  without 
a  preposition ;  as,  In  humo  arendsd.  Ovid.     Sedere  humo  nudd.  Id. 

(2.)  When  a  genitive  denoting  the  possessor  follows,  either  domi  or  in 
domo  is  used  ;  as,  Deprehensus  domi  Ccesaris.  Cic.  In  domo  Ccesaris. 
Id.     In  domo  ejus.  Nep. 

(3.)  The  ablative  domo  for  domi  also  occurs  ;  as,  Ego  id  nunc  experior 
domo.  Plaut.     Bello  for  belli  is  found  in  Livy,  Lib.  9.  26 — Domi  belldque. 

(4.)  Terra:,  is  sometimes  used  like  humi  ;  as,  Sadfa  terrae  celavlmus.  Liv. 
Vicinice  occurs  in  Plautus — Proximal  viciniae  habitat. 

(5.)  The  genitive  of  names  of  towns,  domi,  militia,  &c.,  are  supposed 
by  some  to  depend  on  a  noun  understood  ;  as,  urbe,  oppldo,  cedlbus,  solo, 
loco,  tempore,  &c. 

GENITIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES. 

II.  Certain  adverbs  are  followed  by  the  genitive.     See  §  212,  Rem.  4. 

III.  The  genitive  plural  is  sometimes  used  after  the  preposition  tenus , 
as,  Cumdrum  tenus,  As  far  as  Cumaj  (Ccel.)  ;  Crurum  tenus  (Virg.) ;  Late- 
rum  tenus  (Id.)  ; — sometimes,  also,  though  rarely,  the  genitive  singular; 
as,  Corcyra  tenus.  Liv. 


± 


DATIVE. 

DATIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES. 


<§>  222.  A  noun  limiting  the  meaning  of  an  adjective, 
is  put  in  the  dative,  to  denote  the  object  or  end  to  which 
the  quality  is  directed  ;  as, 

Utllis  agris,  Useful  to  the  fields.  Juv.  Jucundus  amlcis,  Agreeable  to 
his  friends.  Mart.  Inimlcus  qukti,  Unfriendly  to  rest.  Id.  Charta  inutllis 
scribendo,  Paper  not  useful  for  writing.  Plin. 

The  dative  is  commonly  translated  by  the  prepositions  to  or  for ;  but 
sometimes  by  other  prepositions,  or  without  a  preposition. 


196  SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES. 


irien 


emark  1.  Adjectives  signifying  advantageous,  pleasant, 
riendly,  fit,  like,  inclined,  ready,  easy,  clear,  equal,  and  their 
opposites,  also  those  signifying  near,  many  compounded  with 
con,  and  verbals  in  bills,  are  followed  by  the  dative ;  as, 

Felix  tuis,  Propitious  to  your  friends.  Virg.  Oratio  ingrdta  Gallis,  A 
speech  displeasing  to  the  Gauls.  Cass.  Amicus  tyrannldi,  Friendly  to 
tyranny.  Nep.  Labori  inhabllis,  Unsuited  to  labor.  Colum.  Patri  similis, 
Like  his  father.  Cic.  Aptum  tempdrL  Id.  Malo  pronus.  Sen.  Promp- 
tus  seditioni.  Tac.  Cuivis  facile  est.  Ter.  Mihi  certum  est.  Cic.  Par 
fratri  tuo.  Id.  Falsa  veris  finiilma  sunt.  Id  Oculi  concolores  corpori. 
Colum.     Multis  bonis  flebilis.  Hor. 

Many  adjectives  of  other  significations  are  also  followed  by  a  dative  of 
the  end  or  object. 

After  verbals  in  bUis,  the  dative  is  usually  rendered  by  the  preposition 
by ;  as,  Tibi  credibilis  sermo,  A  speech  credible  to  you,  i.  e.  worthy  to  be 
believed  by  you.  Ovid. 

The  expression  dicto  audiens,  signifying  obedient,  is  followed  by  the 
dative;  as,  Syracusdni  nobis  dicto  audientes  sunt.  Cic.  Audiens  dicto  fuit 
jussis  magistratuum.  Nep.  In  this  phrase,  dicto  is  a  dative  limiting  audiens, 
and  the  words  dicto  audiens  seem  to  form  a  compound  equivalent  to  obe- 
diens,  and,  like  that,  followed  by  a  dative  ;  thus,  Nee  plebs  nobis  dicto 
audiens  atque  obediens  sit.   Liv. 

Rem.  2.  The  adjectives  cequdlis,  affinis,  alienus,  communis,  fidus,  par, 
proprius,  similis,  dissimllis,  superstes,  and  some  others,  instead  of  a  dative 
of  the  object,  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive ;  as,  Similis  tui,  Like 
you.  Plaut.  Par  hujus,  Equal  to  him.  Lucan.  Affinis  Ctesdris.  V.  Max. 
Cujusque  proprium.  Cic.    Superstes  omnium.  Suet.     Tui  jidissima.  Virg. 

But  most  of  these,  when  thus  used,  seem  rather  to  be  taken  substan- 
tively ;  as,  JEqualis  ejus,  His  equal.  Cic.  So  in  English,  "  his  like," 
"  his  survivor,    &c. 

Rem.  3.  Some  adjectives  with  the  dative  are  followed  by  another  case 
denoting  a  diiferent  relation  ;  as,  Mens  sibi  conscia  recti,  A  mind  conscious 
to  itself  of  rectitude.  Virg.     See  §213. 

Rem.  4.  Many  adjectives,  instead  of  the  dative  of  the  end 
r  object,  are  often  followed  by  an  accusative  with  a  preposition. 

(1.)  Adjectives  signifying  advantageous,  fit,  and  the  opposite,  take  an 
accusative  of  the  purpose  or  end  with  ad,  but  only  a  dative  of  the  person ; 
as,  Ad  nullam  rem  utilis.  Cic.     Locus  aptus  ad  insidias.  Id. 

(2.)  Adjectives  denoting  motion  or  tendency,  take  an  accusative  with 
ad  more  frequently  than  a  dative  ;  as,  Piger  ad  pcenas,  ad  prsemia  velox 
(Ovid.)  ;  Ad  aliquem  morbum  proclivior  (Cic.)  ;  Ad  omne  facinus pardtus 
(Id.)  ;  Pronus  ad  fidem  (Liv.)  ; — sometimes  with  in ;  as,  Celer  in  pug- 
nam.  Sil. 

(3.)  Many  adjectives,  signifying  an  affection  of  the  mind,  sometimes 
have  an  accusative  of  the  object  with  in,  erga,  or  adversiis  ;  as,  Fidelis  in 
filios.  Just.  Mater  acerba  in  suos  partus.  Ovid.  Gratus  erga  me.  Cic 
Gratum  adversus  te.  Id.     So  Dissimllis  in  dominum.  Tac. 

(4.)  Adjectives  signifying  like,  equal,  common,  &c.,  when  plural,  are 
often  followed  by  the  accusative  with  inter ;  as,  Inter  se  similes.  Cic. 
Inter  eos  communis.  Id.     Inter  se  diversi.  Id. 

Rem.  5.  Propio*  and  proxlmus,  instead  of  the  dative,  have  sometimes 
an  accusative  without  a   preposition ;  as,  Quod  vitium  propius  virtutern 


/o 


SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  197 

erat.  Sail.  JVe  propius  se  castra  moveret,  petierunt.  Cees.  Ager,  qui 
proxlmus  finem  Megalopolitdrum  est.  Liv. 

Rem.  6.  Some  adjectives,  instead  of  the  dative,  have  at  times  an  abla- 
tive with  a  preposition.  Thus,  par,  communis,  consentaneus ,  discors,  with 
cum;  as,  Quern  parem  cum  liberis  facisti.  Sail.  Consentaneum  cum  its 
Uteris.  Cic.  Civltas  secum  discors.  Liv.  So  alienus  and  diversus  with 
a  or  ab;  as,  Alienus  a  me  (Ter.);  A  ratione  diversus  (Cic.)  ;  or  without  a 
preposition ;  as,  Alienum  nostra  amicitia.  Id. 

Rem.  7.  Idem  is  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative,  chiefly  in  the  poets ; 
as,  Jupiter  omnibus  idem.  Virg.  Invltum  qui  servat  idem  facit  occidenti. 
Hor.  In  the  first  example,  omnibus  is  a  dative  of  the  object ;  in  the  second, 
the  dative  follows  idem,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  construction  with 
avroq,  and  is  equivalent  to  quod  facit  is,  qui  occldit.  Idem  is  generally 
followed  not  by  a  case,  but  by  qui,  ac,  atque,  ut,  or  quam  ;  sometimes  by 
the  preposition  cum;  as,  Eodem  mecum  patre.  Tac.  Simllis  and  par  are 
sometimes,  like  idem,  followed  by  ac  and  atque. 

Note.  Nouns  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  dative  of  the  object ;  as, 
Virtutlbus  hostis.  Cic.     Caput  Italia  omni.  Liv.     See  §  211,  Rem.  5. 


DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

§  2£3.  A  noun  limiting  the  meaning  of  a  verb,  is  put 
in  the  dative,  to  denote  the  object  or  end,  to  or  for  which 
any  thing  is,  or  is  done ;  as, 

Mea  domus  tibi  patet,  My  house  is  open  to  you.  Cic.  Parsoptare  locum 
tecto,  A  part  choose  a  site  for  a  building.  Virg.  Tibi  seris,  tibi  metis  ;  You 
sow  for  yourself,  you  reap  for  yourself.  Plaut.  Licet  nemini  contra  patriam 
ducere  exercltum,  It  is  lawful  to  no  one  to  lead  an  army  against  his  country. 
Cic.  Hoc  tibi  promitto,  I  promise  this  to  you.  Id.  Hceret  lateri  letdlis 
arundo.  Virg.  Surdof abulam  narras.  Hor.  Mihi  responsum  dedit.  Virg. 
Sic  vos  mm  vobis  fcrtis  aratra  boves.  Id  Omnibus  bonis  expidit  salvam 
esse  rempubllcam.  Cic.     Aptat  habendo  ensem.  Virg. 

The  dative  is  thus  used  after  active  and  neuter  verbs,  both  personal  and 
impersonal,  and  in  both  voices. 

Remark  1.  The  dative  after  many  verbs  is  rendered  not  by  to  or  for, 
but  by  other  prepositions,  or  without  a  preposition.  Many  neuter  verbs  are 
translated  into  English  by  an  active  verb,  and  the  dative  after  them  is 
usually  rendered  like  the  object  of  an  active  verb. 

Most  verbs  after  which  the  signs  to  and  for  are  not  used  with  the  dative, 
are  enumerated  in  this  and  the  following  sections. 

Rem.  2.  Many  verbs  signifying  to  favor,  please,  trust,  and 
their  contraries,  also  to  assist,  command,  obey,  serve,  resist, 
threaten,  and  be  angry,  govern  the  dative ;  as, 

Ilia  tibi  favet ,  She  favors  you.  Ovid.  Mihi  placebat  Pomponius,  minimi 
displlcebiit.  Cic.  Qui  sibi  fidit.  Hor.  JSron  licet  sui  comm6di  causd  no 
cere  altSri.  Cic.  JYon  iuvidetur  Mi  a)tati  sed  etiam  favttur .  Id.  Desperat 
saluti  suiB.  Jd.  Ktque  mihi  vestra  decreta  auxiliantur.  Sail.  hnpSrat  aut 
sercit  collccta  pecunia  cuique.  Hor.  Obcdlre  ct  parere  voluntati.  Cic. 
Quoniam  factioni  inimicorum  resistive  nequivSrit.  Sail.  Mihi  minabdtur 
Cic.     Irasci  inimicis.  Caus. 

n* 


198  SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

So  Adulor,  blandior,  commddo,  faveo,  gratiflcor,  grator,  gratulor  and 
its  verbal  gratulabundus,  ignosco,  indulgeo,  palpor,  parco,  plaudo,  studeo, 
subparasitor  ;  amulor,  incommddo,  invideo,  noceo. — Placeo,  libet  or  lubet ; 
displicco. — Credo,  fido,  confido  ;  despero,  diffido. — Adminicular,  auxilior, 
medeor,  medlcor,  opitulor,  patroclnor. — Impero,  mando,  moderor  (to  re- 
strain), pracipio,  tempero. — Ausculto,  moriggror,  obedio,obsecundo,obsequor, 
obtempero,  pareo. — An  cillor,f amulor,  ministro,  servio,  inservio. — Refrdgor, 
rductor,  renltor,  repugno,  resisto,  and,  chiefly  in  the  poets,  bello,  certo,  luctor, 
pugno. — Minor,  commlnor,  intermlnor. — Irascor,  succenseo,  to  which  may 
be  added  convicior,  degenero,  excello,  nubo  (to  marry),  prastdlor,  pravarlcor, 
recipio  (to  promise),  renuncio,  respondeo,  suadco,  pcrsuadeo,  dissuadeo,  sup- 
plico,  and  sometimes  lateo  and  decet. 

(1.)  Many  of  the  above  verbs,  instead  of  the  dative,  are  sometimes  fol- 
lowed by  an  accusative  ;  as,  adulor,  ausculto,  blandior,  degenero,  despero, 
indulgeo,  lateo,  medeor,  medlcor,  moderor,  prastdlor,  provideo,  &c. ;  as, 
Aduldri  aliquem.  Cic.  Tac.  Hanc  cave  degeneres.  Ovid.  Indulgeo  me. 
Ter.  Hujus  adventum  prastolans.  Caes.  Providere  rem  frumcnta- 
riam.  Id. 

Others,  as  active  verbs,  have,  with  the  dative,  an  accusative,  expressed 
or  understood ;  as,  impero,  mando,  ministro,  minor,  commlnor,  intermlnor, 
pracipio,  recipio,  renuncio,  &c. ;  as,  Equites  imperat  civitatibus.  Caes. 
Ministrdre  victum  alicui.  Varr.  Deflagrationem  urbi  et  Italia  toti  mina- 
baiur.  Cic. 

(2.)  Many  verbs  which,  from  their  significations,  might  be  included  in 
the  above  classes,  are,  as  active  verbs,  only  followed  by  an  accusative  ;  as, 
delecto,juvo,  Icedo,  offendo,  &c.  Jubco  is  followed  by  the  accusative  with 
an  infinitive,  and  sometimes,  though  rarely,  by  the  accusative  alone,  or  the 
dative  with  an  infinitive ;  as,  Jubeo  te  benh  sperare.  Cic.  Lex  jubet  ea 
qua  facienda  sunt.  Id.  Ubi  Britanmco  jussit  exsurglre.  Tac.  Fido  and 
confido  are  often  followed  by  the  ablative,  with  or  without  a  preposition  ; 
as,  Fidire  cursu.  Ovid. 

§  224.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  these  eleven  prepo- 
sitions, ad,  ante,  con,  in,  inter,  ob,post,  pr<B,pro,  sub,  and  super, 
are  followed  by  the  dative ;  as, 

^renwecoeptis,  Favor  our  undertakings.  Virg.  Romdnis  eqaitibus  litira affe- 
runtur,  Letters  are  brought  to  the  Roman  knights.  Cic.  Antecellere  omnibus, 
To  excel  all.  Id.  Antetiilit  iras  religionern.  Nep.  Audetque  viris  concurrtre 
virgo.  Virg.  Exercitum  exercitui,  duces  duclbus  compardre.  Liv.  Im- 
vilnct  his  a£r..  Ovid.  Pecori  signum  impressit.  Virg.  JVox  praalio  intcr- 
vGnit.  Liv.  Interdixit  histrionlbus  scenarn.  Suet.  Meis  commodis  offlcis 
et  obstas.  Cic.  Cum  se  kostiurn  telis  objecisscnt.  Id.  Poslhabui  mea  seria 
ludo.  Virg.  Certamlni  prasedit.  Suet.  Hibernis  Labie.num  praposuit. 
Cass.  Vobis  profuit  ingenium.  Ovid.  Miseris  succurrere  disco.  Virg. 
lis  subsidia  submittebat.  Caes.     Timldis  supervSnit  JEgle.  Virg.     So 

1.  Accedo,  accresco,  accumbo,  acquiesco,  adequlto,  adhareo,  adjaceo,  ad.no, 
adnata,  adsto,  adstipulor,  adsum,  adversor,  affulgeo,  alldbar,  annuo,  ap- 
pareo,  applaudo,  appropinquo,  arrideo,  asplro,  assentior,  assideo,  assisto, 
assvesco,  assurgo ; — addo,  affero,  affigo,  adjicio,  adjungo,  adhibeo,  admo- 
veo,  adverto,  alllgo,  appono,  appllco,  advolvo,  aspcrgo. 

2.  Antecedo,  antecello,  anteeo,  antesto,  antevenio,  anteverto , — antefero, 
antehabeo,  antepono. 

3.  Cohareo,  colludo,  concino,  congruo,  consentio,  consdno,  convlvo,  and, 
chiefly  in  the  poets,  coco,  concumbo,  concurro,  contendo  ; — compdro,  com- 
pd~no,  confero,  conjungo. 


SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  199 

4.  Incido,  incumbo,  indormio,  initio,  ingemisco,  inh&reo,  innascor,  innl- 
tor,  insideo,  insidior,  insto,  inslsto,  insudo,  insulto,  invddo,  invigllo,  illa- 
crymo,  illudo,  immineo,  immorior,  immdror,  impendeo,  insum  ; — invmisceo, 
impono,  imprlmo,  infero,  ingero,  injicio,  includo,  iiise.ro,  inspergo,  inuro. 

5.  Intercedo,  intcrcido,  interjaceo,  intermico,  intersum,  intervenio ; — in- 
terdico,  interpono. 

6.  Obambulo,  obcrro,  obcqnXto,  obluctor,  obmurmuro,obrepo,obsto,  obsisto, 
obstrepo,  obsum,  obtrecto,  obvenio,  obversor,  occumbo,  occurro,  occurso,  offi- 
cio ; — obdiico,  objicio,  offe.ro,  offundo,  oppono. 

7.  Postfero,  posthabeo,  postpono,  postputo,  postscrxbo. 

8.  Prcecedo,  pracurro,  praeo,  prcBsidco,  prteluceo,  praniteo,  prasum,  pra- 
valeo,  prcevertor  ; — prcefero,  praflcio,  prcepdno. 

9.  Procumbo,  proficio,  propugno,  prosum,  prospicio,  provideo. 

10.  Succedo,  succumbo,  succurro,  suffcio,  suffrdgor,  subcresco,  subolco, 
subjaceo,  subrepo,  subsum,  subvenio  ; — subdo,  subjugo,  submitto,  suppdno, 
substerno. 

11.  Supercurro,  super sto,  supersum,  supervenio,  supervlvo. 

Remark  1.  Some  verbs,  compounded  with  ab,  de,  ex,  circum,  and  con- 
tra, are  occasionally  followed  by  the  dative ;  as,  absvm,  desum,  deldbor, 
excldo,  circumdo,  circumfundo,  circumjaceo,  circumjicio,  contradico,  con- 
trad o  ;  as,  Serta  caplti  delapsa,  The  garlands  having  fallen  from  his  head. 
Virg.  Nunqui  nnmml  cxcide~runt  tibi  ?  Plaut.  Tigris  urbi  circumfundltur. 
Plin. 

Rem.  2.  Some  verbs  of  repelling  and  taking  away  (most  of  which  are 
compounds  of  ab,  de,  or  ex),  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative,  though 
more  commonly  by  the  ablative ;  as,  abigo,  abrogo,  abscindo,  avfe.ro,  adl- 
mo,  arceo,  defendo,  demo,  derogo,  detrdho,  eripio,  eruo,  excutio,  exlmo,  ex- 
torqueo,  extrdho,  exuo,  surripio.  Thus,  Nee  mihi  te  eripient,  Nor  shall  they 
take  you  from  me.  Ovid.  Solstitlum  pecori  defendlte.  Virg.  Hunc  arce- 
bis  pecori.  Id. 

Rem.  3.  Some  verbs  of  differing  (compounds  of  di  or  dis)  likewise 
occur  with  the  dative,  instead  of  the  ablative  with  a  preposition  ;  as, 
diffe.ro,  discrfpo,  discordo,  dissentio,  dissideo,  disto  ;  as,  Quantum  simplex 
hiiarisque  nepoti  discrepet,  et  quantum  discordet  parcus  avaro.  Hor.  So 
likewise  misceo  ;  as,  Mista  modestia?  gravitas.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions,  instead  of  the 
dative,  either  constantly  or  occasionally  take  the  case  of  the  preposition, 
which  is  sometimes  repeated.  Sometimes,  also,  one  of  similar  significa- 
tion is  used ;  as,  Ad  primam  vocem  timldas  advertitis  aures.  Ovid. 
Nemo  eum  antecessit.  Nep.  Infirunt  omnia  in  ignem.  Cres.  Silex  in- 
cumbdb.jt  ad  amnem.  Virg.     Conferte  hanc  pacem  cum  Mo  bello.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  Some  neuter  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions,  either  take 
the  dative,  or,  acquiring  an  active  signification,  are  followed  by  the  accu- 
sative ;  as,  Helvetil  reUquos  Gallos  virtute  pra.ce.dunt,  The  Helvetii  surpass 
the  other  Gauls  in  valor.  Csbs.  Uterque  Isocratem  atdte  prcecurrit.  Cic. 
So  prmeo,  pratsto,  prceverto,  prtecello. 

<§>  225.  I.  Verbs  compounded  with  satis,  bene,  and  male, 
are  followed  by  the  dative  ;  as, 

Et  natures  et  legTbus  satisficit,  He  satisfied  both  nature  and  the  laws. 
Cic.  Pulchrum  est.  bevefar.Pre  reipubllcffi,  It  is  honorable  to  benefit  the 
slate    Sail.     Maledicit  utrlque.  Hor.     So  satirAo,  benedlco,  malrfacio. 


200  SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

These  compounds  are  often  written  separately  ;  and  the  dative  always 
depends  not  on  satis,  bent,  and  male,  but  on  the  simple  verb. 

II.  Verbs  in  the  passive  voice  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  dative  of  the 
agent,  chiefly  in  the  poets  j  as,  Neque  cerriltur  ulli,  Nor  is  he  seen  by  any 
one.  Virg.  Nulla  tudrum  audita  mini  neque  visa  sororum.  Id.  But  the 
agent  after  passives  is  usually  in  the  ablative  with  a  preposition. 
See  §  248. 

III.  The  participle  in  dus  is  followed  by  a  dative  of  the 
agent;  as, 

Semel  omnibus  calcanda  est  via  led,  The  way  of  death  must  once  be 
trod  by  all.  Hor.  Adhibenda  est  nobis  diligentia,  We  must  use  diligence. 
Cic.  Vestigia  summorum  homlnum  sibi  tuenda  esse  dicit.  Id.  Dolendum 
est  tibi  ipsi.  Id.     Faciendum  mini  puldvi,  ut  responderem.  Id. 

Remark  1.  The  dative  is  sometimes  wanting  when  the  agent  is  in- 
definite ;  as,  Orandum  est,  ut  sit  mens  sana  in  corpore  sano.  Juv.  H\c 
vincendum  aut  moriendum,  milltes,  est.  Liv.  In  such  examples,  tibi,  vo- 
bis,  nobis,  hominlbus,  &c,  may  be  supplied. 

Rem.  2.  The  participle  in  dus  sometimes,  though  rarely,  has,  instead 
of  the  dative,  an  ablative  with  a  or  ab ;  as,  Deus  est  venerandus  a  nobis. 
Cic. 

IV.  Verbs  signifying  motion  or  tendency  are  followed  by  an 
accusative  with  ad  or  in  ;  as, 

Ad  templum  Pallddis  ibant.  Virg.  Ad  praetorem  hom/tnem  trazit.  Cic. 
Vergit  ad  septemtriones.  Cees.     In  conspectum  venire.  Nep. 

So  curio,  duco,  fero,festlno,fugio,  incllno,  lego,  pergo,porto,  praicipito, 
propero,  tendo,  to!lo,  vado,  verto. 

So  likewise  verbs  of  calling,  exciting,  &c. ;  as,  Eurum  ad  se  vocat. 
Virg.  Provocdsse  ad  pugnam.  Cic.  So  anlmo,  hortor,  incito,  invito,  la- 
cesso,  slimulo,  susclto  ;  to  which  may  be  added  attineo,  conformo,  pertinco, 
and  specto. 

But  the  dative  is  sometimes  used  after  these  verbs ;  as,  Clamor  it  cailo. 
Virg.  Dum  tibi  literte  mem  veniant.  Ci«c.  After  venio  both  constructions 
are  used  at  the  same  time ;  as,  Venil  mihi  in  mentem.  Cic.  Venit  mihi 
in  suspicionem.  Nep.  Eum  venisse  Germanis  in  amicitiam  cognovirat. 
Caes.     Propinquo  (to  approach)  takes  the  dative  only. 

<§>  226.  Est  is  followed  by  a  dative  denoting  a  posses- 
sor;— the  thing  possessed  being  the  subject  of  the  verb. 

Est  thus  used  may  generally  be  translated  by  the  verb  to  have  with  the 
dative  as  its  subject ;  as,  Est  mihi  dpmi  pater,  I  have  a  father  at  home. 
Virg.  Sunt  nobis  mitia  poma,~We  have  mellow  apples.  Id.  Gratid  nobis 
opus  est  tua,  We  have  need  of  your  favor.  Cic.  Innocentiae  plus  periculi 
quam  honoris  est.  Sail.  Jin  nescis  longas  re  gibus  esse  manus?  Ovid.  The 
first  and  second  persons  of  sum  are  not  thus  construed. 

Remark.     The  dative  is  used  with  a  similar  signification  after  fore,  sup- 
peto,  desum,  and  defit ;  as,  Pauper  enim  non  est,  cui  rerum  suppetit  usus.  . 
Hot.     Si  mihi  cauda  foret,  cercopithecus  eram.  Mart.     Defuit  ars  vobis. 
Ovid.     Non  defore  Arsacidis  virtutem.  Tac.     Lac  mihi  non  defit.  Virg. 

<§>  2x7.  Sum,  arid  several  other  verbs,  are  followed  by 
two  datives,  one  of  which  denotes  the  object  to  which, 
the  other  the  end  for  which,  any  thing  is,  or  is  done ;  as, 


SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES.  20i 

Milu  maxima  est  curse,  It  is  a  very  great  care  to  me.  Cic.  Spero  nobis 
nanc  conjunctionem  voluptati  fore,  I  hope  that  this  union  will  bring  pleasure 
to  us.  Id.  Matri  puellam  dono  dedit.  Ter.  Fabio  laudi  datum  est.  Cic. 
Vitio  id  tibi  vertunt.  Plaut.  Id  tibi  honori  habetur.  Cic.  Maturdvit  col- 
lege venire  auxilio.  Liv. 

Remark  1.  The  verbs  after  which  two  datives  occur,  are  sum,  fore, 
fio,  do,  duco,  habeo,  relinquo,  tribuo,  verto;  also  curro,  eo,  mitto,proficiscor, 
venio,  appdno,  assigno,  cedo}  compdro,  patco,  suppedito,  and  perhaps  some 
others. 

Rem.  2.  The  dative  of  the  end  is  often  used  after  these  verbs,  without 
the  dative  of  the  object ;  as,  Exemplo  est  formica,  The  ant  is  (serves)  for 
an  example.  Hor.  Absentium  bona  divisui  fuire.  Liv.  Reliquit  pignori 
putamlna.  Plaut. 

Rem.  3.  The  verb  sum,  with  a  dative  of  the  end,  may  be  variously 
rendered ;  as  by  the  words  brings,  affords,  serves,  &c.  The  sign  for 
is  often  omitted  with  this  dative,  especially  after  sum  ;  instead  of  it,  as, 
or  some  other  particle,  may  at  times  be  used ;  as,  Ignavia  erit  tibi  mag- 
no  dedecori,  Cowardice  will  bring  great  disgrace  to  you.  Cic.  H&c  res 
est  argumento ;  This  thing  is  an  argument,  or  serves  as  an  argument.  Id. 
Universos  curee  habuit.  Suet.  Una  res  erat  magno  usui, ....  was  of  great 
use.  Lucil.  Quod  tibi  magnopere  cordi  est ,  mihi  vekementer  displicet ; 
What  is  a  great  pleasure,  an  object  of  peculiar  interest  to  you,  &c.  Id. 

Sometimes  the  words  Jit,  able,  ready,  &c..  must  be  supplied,  especially 
before  a  gerund  or  a  gerundive ;  as,  dim  solvendo  civitdtes  non  essent, .... 
not  able  to  pay.  Cic.  Divltes,  qui  onSri  ferendo  essent.  Liv.  Qua  re- 
stinguendo  igniforent.  Liv.     Radix  ejus  est  vescendo.  Plin. 

Rem.  4.  Instead  of  the  dative  of  the  end,  a  nominative  is  sometimes 
used  ;  as,  Amor  est  exitium  pecori  (Virg.)  ;  or  an  accusative,  with  or  with- 
out a  preposition  ;  as,  Se  Achilli  comltem  esse  datum  dicit  ad  bellum.  Cic. 
Se  Remis  in  clientelam  diedbant.  Cses. 

Rem.  5.  The  dative  of  the  object  after  sum,  often  seems  rather  to 
depend  upon  the  dative  of  the  end,  than  upon  the  verb ;  as  in  the  exam- 
ple Ego  omnibus  meis  exitio  fuero  (Cic),  in  which  omnibus  meis  has  the 
same  relation  to  exitio  that  pecdri  has  to  exitium  in  the  above  example 
from  Virgil.     For  the  use  of  the  dative  after  a  noun,  see  §  211,  Rem.  5. 

Note  1.  The  dative  is  sometimes  used  after  the  infinitive,  instead  of 
the  accusative,  when  a  dative  precedes,  and  the  subject  of  the  infinitive 
is  omitted ;  as,  Vobis  necesse  est  fortibus  esse  viris.  Liv.  See  §  §  205, 
Rem.  6,  and  239,  Rem.  1. 

Note  2.  In  such  expressions  as  Est  mihi  nomen  Alexandro,  Cui  cog- 
nomen Mlo  additur,  the  proper  name  is  put  in  the  dative  in  apposition 
with  that  which  precedes,  instead  of  taking  the  case  of  nomen  or  cogno- 
men.    See  §  204,  Rem.  8. 


DATIVE     AFTER    PARTICLES. 

§  228.  Some  particles  are  followed  by  the  dative  of  the 
end  or  object ;   as, 

1.  Some  adverbs  derived  from  adjectives;  as,  Proximt  castris,  Very 
near  to  the  camp.  Ca;s.  Congruenter  naturae,  Agreeably  to  nature.  Cic. 
Propius  stabu lis  armenl a  tenerent.  Virg.  Vit&que  hominum  amicd  vivZre. 
Id.  Bene  mihi,  bene  vobis.  Plaut.  So  obviam;  as,  Mihi  obviam  venisti 
Cic. 


202        SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 

2.  Certain  prepositions,  especially  in  comic  writers ;  as,  Mihi  clam  est, 
It  is  unknown  to  me.  Plaut.  Contra  nobis.  Id.  But  in  such  instances 
they  are  rather  used  like  adjectives. 

3.  Certain  interjections;  as,  Heimihi!  Ah  me !  Virg.  Vamihi!  Wo 
is  me  !  Ter.     Va  victis!  Liv.     Va  te  !  also  occurs  in  Plautus. 

Note.  The  dative  of  the  substantive  pronouns  seems  sometimes  re- 
dundant, or  to  affect  the  meaning  but  little ;  as,  Fur  mihi  es, ....  in  my 
opinion.  Plaut.  Jin  Me  mihi  liber,  cui  mulier  imperat  ?  Cic.  Tongilhim 
mihi  eduxit.  Id.  Ubi  nunc  nobis  deus  Me  magister  ?  Virg.-  Ecce  tibi 
Sebosus !  Cic.  Hem  tibi  talentum  argenti  Philipplcum  est.  Plaut.  Sibi  is 
sometimes  subjoined  to  suus  ;  as,  Suo  sibi  gladio  kuncjugulo.  Plaut.  Sibi 
buo  tempdrc.  Cic. 


ACCUSATIVE. 

ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

<§>  229.  The  object  of  an  active  verb  is  put  in  the 
accusative;  as, 

Legdtos  mittunt,  They  send  ambassadors.  Cass.  Animus  movet  corpus. 
The  mind  moves  the  body.  Cic.  Da  veniam  hanc,  Grant  this  favor.  Ter. 
Eum  imitdti  sunt,  They  imitated  him.  <^ic. 

Remark  1.  An  active  verb,  with  the  accusative,  often  takes 
a  genitive,  dative,  or  ablative,  to  express  some  additional  rela- 
tion ;   as, 

Te  convinco  amentia?,  I  convict  you  of  madness.  Cic.  Da  locum  meli- 
orlbus,  Give  place  to  your  betters.  Ter.  Solvit  se  Teucria  luctu,  Troy 
frees  herself  from  grief.  Virg.     See  those  cases  respectively. 

Rem.  2.  Such  is  the  difference  of  idiom  between  the  Latin  and  English 
languages,  that  many  verbs  which  are  considered  active  in  one,  are  used 
as  neuter  in  the  other.  Hence,  in  translating  active  Latin  verbs,  a  prepo- 
sition must  often  be  supplied  in  English  ;  as,  Ut  me  caverct,  That  he 
Bhould  beware  of  me.  Cic.  On  the  other  hand,  many  verbs,  which  in 
Latin  are  neuter,  and  do  not  take  an  accusative,  are  rendered  into  English 
by  active  verbs. 

Rem.  3.     The  verb  is  sometimes  omitted  : — 

1.  To  avoid  its  repetition;  as,  Eventum  sendtus,  quern  (sc.  dare)  vide- 
bltur,  dabit.  Liv. 

2.  Dico,  and  verbs  of  similar  meaning,  are  often  omitted  ;  as,  Quid 
mu'ta?  quid?  Ne  multa,  sc.  dicam.  Quid  (sc.  de  co  dicam)  quod  solus 
sociorum  in  diserimen  vocdtur  ?  Cic. 

Rem.  4.     The  accusative  is  often  omitted  : — 

1.  When  it  is  a  reflexive  pronoun;  as,  Noz  pr aicipitat,  sc.  se.  Virg. 
Turn  prora  avcrtit.  Id.  Eo  lavdtum.  sc.  me.  Hor.  The  reflexives  are 
usually  wanting  after  certain  verbs ;  as,  aboleo,  abstineo,  augeo,  cele.ro, 
continuo,  decllno,  deed  quo,  jlecto,  deflecto,  incllno,  lavo,  laxo,  movco,  muto, 
vrmciplto,  remitto,  ruo,  turbo,  verto,  deverto,  reverto  ;  and  more  rarely  after 
moveo,  converto,  and  many  others. 

2.  When  it  is  something  indefinite,  or  easily  sitpplied ;  as,  Ego,  ad 


SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  203 

quos  scribam,  nescio,  sc.  litems.  Cic.  De  quo  et  tecum  egi  diligenter,  et 
scripsi  ad  te.  Id.     Bend  fecit  Silius.  Id. 

Rem.  5.  An  infinitive,  or  one  or  more  clauses  may  supply 
the  place  of  the  accusative  ;  as, 

Da  mild  failure.  Hor.  Reddes  dulce  loqui,  reddes  ridere  decorum..  Id. 
Cupio  me  esse  clementem.  Cic.  Athenienses  statuerunt  ut  naves  conscen- 
derent.  Id.  Vereor  ne  a  doctis  reprehendar.  Id.  Sometimes  both  con- 
structions are  united ;  as,  Di  iram  miserantur  indnem  amborum,  et  tantos 
mortallbus  esse  labores.  Virg. 

In  such  constructions,  the  subject  of  the  clause  is  sometimes  put  in  the 
accusative  as  the  object  of  the  verb  ;  as,  Msti  Marcellum,  quam  tardus  sit, 
for  JYdsti  quam  tardus  sit  Marcellus.  Cic.  Ilium,  ut  vivat,  optant.  Ter. 
Rem  frumentariam,  ut  satis  commode  sztpportdri  posset,  timere  diccbant. 
Cags. 

Rem.  6.  The  impersonal  verbs  miseret,  pcenitet,  pudct, 
tcedet,  and  piget,  likewise  miser escit,  miser  etur,  and  pertccsum 
est,  are  followed  by  an  accusative  of  the  person  exercising  the 
feeling  ;  as, 

Eorum  nos  mistret,  We  pity  them.  Cic.  See  §  215,  (1.)  Verltum  est 
also  occurs  with  such  an  accusative  ;  Quos  non  est  verltum.  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  Juvat,  delectat,  fallit,  fugit,  and  prccterit,  also, 
are  followed  by  an  accusative  of  the  person ;  as, 

Te  hildri  ardmo  esse  valdi.  me  juvat,  That  you  are  in  good  spirits  delights 
me.  Cic.  Fugit  me  ad  te  scribire.  Cic.  Illud  alterum  quam  sit  difficile, 
non  te  fugit,  nee  verd  Caesarem  fefellit.  Id. 

For  mea,  tua,  sua,  nostra,  vestra,  after  refcrt  and  interest,  see  §  219, 
Rem.  1. 

For  the  accusative  by  attraction,  instead  of  the  nominative,  see  §  206, 
(6,)  (b.)^ 

<§>  230.  Verbs  signifying  to  name  or  call,  to  choose,  render 
or  constitute,  to  esteem  or  reckon,  are  followed  by  two  accusa- 
tives denoting  the  same  person  or  thing  ;  as, 

Urbem  ex  Antidchi  patris  nomine  Antiochiam  vocdvit,  He  called  the  city 
Antioch,  &c.  Just.  Me  consalem  fecistis.  Cic.  Sulpicium  accusatorem 
suum  numerdbat,  non  competitorem.  Id.     Cum  vos  testes  habeam.  Nep. 

For  the  verbs  included  in  this  rule,  see  §  210,  Rem.  3,  (3.) 

Remark  1.  After  verbs  signifying  to  esteem  or  reckon,  one  of  the  ac- 
cusatives is  often  the  subject,  and  the  other  the  predicate,  of  esse  express- 
ed or  understood  ;  as,  Ne  me  ezistimdris  ad  manendum  esse  propensiorcm. 
Cic.  Eum  avarum  possumus  existimdre.  Id.  Mercurium  omnium  inven- 
torem  artium  ferunt ;  hunc  vidrum  at.que  itinerum  ducem  arbitrantur. 
Caes. 

Rem.  2.  Many  other  verbs,  besides  their  proper  accusative,  take  a 
second,  denoting  a  purpose,  time,  character,  &c;  as,  Talem  se  imperatorem 
prabuit,  He  showed  himself  such  a  commander.  Nep.  Quare  ejus  fuga\ 
comitem  me  adjungSrem.  Cic.  Homlnum  opinio  socium  me  ascrlbit  tuis 
laudlbus.  Id.  Prasta  te  eum  qui  mihi  es  cognltus.  Cic.  Filiam  tuam 
mild  uxorem  posco.  Plaut.  Petit  hanc  Saturnia  munus.  Ovid.  Such  con- 
structions  may  often  be  referred  to  apposition,  or  to  an  ellipsis  of  eut. 


204  SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

§  231.  Verbs  of  asking,  demanding,  and  teaching, 
and  celo  (to  conceal),  are  followed  by  two  accusatives,  one 
of  a  person,  the  other  of  a  thing;  as, 

Rogo  te  nummos,  I  ask  you  for  money.  Mart.  Poscc  deos  veniam, 
Ask  favor  of  the  gods.  Virg.  Quum  legent  quis  musicam  docuerit  Epa- 
minondam,  When  they  shall  read  who  taught  Epaminondas  music.  Nep. 
Jintigdnus  iter  omnes  celat,  Antigonus  conceals  his  route  from  all.  Id. 

Remark  1.  This  rule  includes  the  verbs  of  asking  and  demanding, 
JJaglto,  efflagito,  obsecro,  oro,  exoro,  percontor,  posco,  reposco,  postulo, 
precor,  d c.p re. cor,  rogo,  and  interrdgo ;  of  teaching,  doceo,  edoceo,  dedoceo, 
and  erudio,  which  last  has  two  accusatives  only  in  the  poets.  Cingo 
occurs  once  with  two  accusatives  ;  Anna  Tribunitium  cingZre  dlgna  latus. 
Mart. 

Rem.  2.  Instead  of  the  accusative  of  a  person,  veibs  of  asking  and 
demanding  often  take  the  ablative  with  ab  or  ex;  as,  Non  debebam  abs  te 
has  literas  posccre.  Cic.  Veniam  oremus  ab  ipso.  Virg.  Istud  vulebam 
ex  te  pcrcontdri.  Plaut. 

Rem.  3.  Instead  of  the  accusative  of  a  thing,  the  ablative  with  de  is 
also  used  after  many  of  the  above  verbs ;  as,  Sic  ego  te  eisdem  de  rebus 
interrogem.  Cic.  De  itinere  hostium  sendtum  cddcet.  Sail.  Eass-us  noster 
me  de  hoc  libro  celdvit.  Cic.     Sometimes  also  a  dependent  clause. 

Rem.  4.  Some  verbs  of  asking,  demanding,  and  teaching,  are  not  fol- 
lowed by  two  accusatives  ;  as,  exigo,  peto,  qutero,  scitor,  sciscltor,  which 
take  an  ablative  of  the  person  with  a  preposition  ;  imbuo,  instituo,  instruo, 
&c,  which  are  sometimes  used  with  the  ablative  of  the  thing,  generally 
without  a  preposition,  and  are  sometimes  otherwise  construed. 

Rem.  5.  Many  other  active  verbs  with  the  accusative  of  a 
person,  sometimes  take  an  accusative  of  nihil,  of  the  neuter 
pronouns  hoc,  id,  quid,  &lc,  or  of  adjectives  of  quantity  ;  as, 

Fabius  ea  me  monuit,  Fabius  reminded  me  of  those  things.  Cic.  Non 
quo  me  aliquid  juvdre  posses.  Id.  Pauca  pro  tempdre  milltes  hortdtus. 
Sail.  Id  adjuta  me.  Ter.  Nee  te  id  consulo.  Cic.  Consul o  and  moneo 
are  also  found  with  a  noun  denoting  the  thing  in  the  accusative  ;  as,  Con- 
sulam  hanc  rem  amlcos.  Plaut.     Eum  rem  nos  locus  admonuit.  Sail. 

A  preposition  may  often  be  understood  before  the  above  neuter  accu- 
satives.    See  §  235,  Rem.  5. 

By  a  similar  construction,  genus  is  sometimes  used  in  the  accusative, 
instead  of  the  genitive  ;  as,  Scis  me  orationes,  aut  aliquid  id  genus  scri- 
blre.  Cic.  Nullas  hoc  genus  vigilias  vigildrunt.  Cell.  So  Omnes  mulie- 
brc  secus.  Suet. 

<§>  232.  (1.)  Some  neuter  verbs  are  followed  by  an  accu- 
sative of  kindred  signification  to  their  own  ;  as, 

Vitam  vivere,  To  live  a  life.  Plaut.  Furcrefurorem.  Virg.  Istam  pvg- 
nam  pugnabo.  Plaut.  Pugndre  •prailia.  Hor.  Lusum  insolentem  ludere. 
Id.  Si  non  servitutem  serviat.  Plaut.  Queror  haudfaclles  questus.  Stat 
Jurdvi  verissimum  jusjurandum.  Cic.  Ignotas  jubet  ire  vias.  Val.  Flacc 
Ut  suum  gaudium  gauderemus.  Coel.  acl  Cic.  Prqficisci  magnum  iter 
Cic. 

(2.)  Verbs  commonly  neuter  are  sometimes  used  in  an  active 
sense,  and  are  therefore  followed  by  an  accusative.    Neuter  verbs 


SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  205 

are  also  sometimes  followed  by  an  accusative,  depending  on  a 
preposition  understood.  The  following  are  examples  of  both 
constructions  : — 

With  oleo  and  sapio,  and  their  compounds,  rcdolco,  resipio  ; — Olet  un- 
guenta,  He  smells  of  perfumes.  Ter.  Orationes  redolente-s  antiquitatem. 
Cic.  Mella  herbam  earn  sapiunt,  The  honey  tastes  of  that  herb.  Plin. 
Uva  picem  resipiens.  Id.  So  Sitio  honores.  Cic.  Ncc  vox  hominem 
sonat.  Virg.  SutLdre  mella.  Id.  Morientem  nomine  clamat.  Id.  Quis 
pauperiem  crepat?  Hor.  Omnes  una  manet  nox.  Id.  Ingrdti  ariimi 
crimen  horreo.  Cic.  Ego  meas  qucror  fortunas.  Plaut.  Pastorem,  saltd- 
ret  uti  Cyclopa,  rogdbat.  Hor.  So  the  passive ;  Nunc  agrestem  Cyclopa 
movetur.  Id.  JYum  id  lacrqmat  virgo  7  Does  the  maid  weep  on  that  ac- 
count ?  Ter.  Quicquid  delirant  reges,  plcctuntur  Achlvi.  Hor.  Ntc  tu  id 
indigndri  posses.  Liv.  Quod  duMtas  ne  feceris.  Piin.  Njhil  laboro.  Cic. 
Corydon  ardebat  Alexin.  Virg.  Stijgius  juravlmus  undas.  Ovid.  Xavi' 
gat  ffiquor.  Virg.  Currlmus  a?quor.  Id.  Pascuntur  sylvas.  Id.  Malta 
alia,  peccat.  Cic.     Exsequias  ite  frequenter.  Ovid.     Devenere  locos.  Virg. 

Accusatives  are  found  in  like  manner  after  ambulo,  calleo,  doleo,  equlto, 
gaudeo,  gcmo,  iateo,  latro,  nato,  palleo,  ptreo,depcreo,  procedo,  sibllo,  tremo, 
trepldo,  vado,  venio,  &c. 

In  the  above  and  similar  examples,  the  prepositions  ob,  propter,  per,  ad, 
&c.,  may  often  be  supplied.  This  construction  of  neuter  verbs  is  most 
common  with  the  neuter  accusatives  id,  quid,  allquid,  quicquid,  nihil,  idem, 
Mud,  tantum,  quantum,  multa,  pauca,  alia,  cetlra,  and  omnia. 

§  233.  Many  verbs  are  followed  by  an  accusative  depend- 
ing upon  a  preposition  with  which  they  are  compounded. 

(1.)  Active  verbs  compounded  with  trans  have  two  accusatives, 'one  de- 
pending upon  the  verb,  the  other  upon  the  preposition  ;  as,  Omnem  equi- 
tdtum  pontem  transdncit,  He  leads  all  the  cavalry  over  the  bridge.  Cobs. 
Hellespontum  copius  trajeck.  Nep. 

So  Pontus  scopulos  super  jack  undam.  Virg  So,  also,  adverto  and 
induco  with  anlmum ;  as,  Id  arilmum  advertk.  Cres.  Id  quod  animum 
induxlrat  paulisper  non  tenuit.  Cic.  So,  also,  injicio  in  Plautus — Ego  te 
manum  injiciam. 

(2.)  Some  other  active  verbs  take  an  accusative  in  the  passive  voice 
depending  upon  their  prepositions ;  as,  Maglcas  accingier  artes,  To  be 
prepared  for  magic  arts.  Virg.  Classis  circumvcltitur  arcem.  Liv.  Vee- 
tem  circumjectus  fuisset.  Cic.     Locum  prcetervectus  sum.  Cic. 

But  after  most  active  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions  which  take 
an  accusative,  the  preposition  is  repeated ;  as,  Casar  se  ad  neminem  ad- 
junxit  (Cic.) ;  or  a  dative  is  used ;  as,  Hie  dies  me  valdh  Crasso  adjunxit. 
Id.    See  §  224. 

(3.)  Many  neuter  verbs  take  an  accusative  when  compounded  with  pre- 
positions which  govern  an  accusative, but  these  sometimes  become  active; 
as,  Gentes  qua  mare  Mud  adjacent,  The  nations  which  border  upon  that 
sea.  Nep.  Obeqwtdre  agmen.  Curt.  Inceduntmcestos  locos.  Tac.  Tran- 
silui  flammas.  Ovid.  SuccedZrc  tecta.  Cic.  Ludorum  diebus,  qui  cogniti- 
onem  intervenlrant.  Tac.  Adlre  provinciam.  Suet.  Caveat  ne  premium 
ineat.  Cic.  Naves  pardtas  invenk.  Coes.  Ingrldi  iter  pedibus.  Cic. 
Epicuri  horti  quos  modd  prateribdmus.  Id.  Ledncs  subtere  jugum.  Virg 
Fama  allabltur  aures.  Id.    Mldquor  te.  id. 

18 


206  SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

Remark  1.  Some  neuter  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions  which 
take  an  ablative  after  them,  are  at  times  followed  by  an  accusative  ;  as, 
Neminem  convent,  I  met  with  no  one.  Cic.  Qui  societatem  coieris.  Id. 
livcrsdri  honores.  Ovid.  Evaditquc  celer  ripam.  Virg.  Excedere  nume- 
rum.  Tac.     Exlrc  limen.  Ter.     Tibur  prcefluunt  aqua.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  The  preposition  is  often  repeated  after  the  verb,  or  a  different 
one  is  used;  as,  In  Galliam  invdsit  Antonius.  Cic.  Ad  me  adire  quosdam 
martini.  Id.  JVe  in  senatum  accederem.  Cic.  Reglna  ad  templum  in- 
cessit.  Virg.     Juxta  genitorem  astat  Lavinia.  Id. 

Note.  Some  verbal  nouns  and  verbal  adjectives  in  bundus  are  follow- 
ed by  an  accusative  like  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived ;  as,  Quid 
tibi  hue  receptio  ad  tc  est  meum  virum  ?  Wherefore  do  you  receive  my  hus- 
band hither  to  you  ?  Plaut.  Quid  tibi  hanc  aditio  est  ?  Id.  Vitabundus 
castra.  Liv.  , 

§  234,  *I.  When  the  active  voice  takes  an  accusative  both 
of  a  person  and  thing,  the  passive  retains  the  latter  ;  as, 

Rogdtus  est  sententiam,  He  was  asked  his  opinion.  Liv.  Interrogdtus 
causam.  Tac.  Segetes  alimenta^we  dcbXta  dives  poscebdtur  humus.  Ovid. 
Motus  dmtri  gaudet  Ionicos  matura  virgo.  Hor.  Omnes  belli  artes  edoctus. 
Liv.     Nosne  hoc  ecldtos  tarn  diu  ?  Ter.     Multa  in  extis  monemur.  Cic. 

Note.  As  the  object  of  the  active  voice  becomes  the  subject  of  the 
passive,  the  passive  is  not  followed  by  an  accusative  of  the  object. 

fh  other  respects,  the  government  of  the  active  and  passive  voices  is,  in 
general,  the  same. 

Remark  1 .  Induo  and  exuo,  though  they  do  not  take  two  accusatives  in 
the  active  voice,  are  sometimes  followed  by  an  accusative  of  the  thing  in 
the  passive  ;  as,  Jnduitur  atras  vestes,  She  puts  on  sable  garments.  Ovid. 
Thoraca  indiitvs.  Virg.  Exuta  est  Roma  senectam.  Mart.  So  cingo, 
which  occurs  once  in  the  active  voice  with  two  accusatives ;  as,  Inutile 
ferrum  cingltur.  Virg.     See  §231,  Rem.  1. 

Rem.  2.  The  future  passive  participle  in  the  neuter  gender  with  est,  is 
sometimes,  though  rarely,  followed  by  an  accusative ;  as,  Multa  novis 
rebus  quum  sit  agendum.  Lucr. 

II.  An  adjective,  verb,  and  participle,  are  sometimes  followed 
by  an  accusative  denoting  the  part  to  which  their  signification 
relates  ;  as, 

Kudus  membra,  Bare  as  to  his  limbs.  Virg.  Os  humeros/^e  dcosimllis. 
Id.  Micut  aurlbns  et  tremit  artus.  Id.  Cetera  parce  puer  bello.  Id.  Sib- 
ila  colla  tumentem.  Id.  ExpUri  mentem  nequit.  Id.  Picti  scuta  Labici. 
Id.     Fractus  membra.  Hor.     Maxtmam  partem  lacte  vivunt.  Caes. 

This  construction,  which  is  probably  of  Greek  origin,  is  usually  called 
Synecdoche.  It  is  chiefly  used  by  the  poets:  the  accusative  seems  to  de- 
pend on  a  preposition  understood. 

III.  Some  neuter  verbs  which  are  followed  by  an  accusa- 
tive, are  used  in  the  passive  voice,  the  accusative  becoming  the 
subject,  according  to  the  general  rule  of  active  verbs  ;  as, 

Tertia  vivltur  atas.  Ovid.  Bcllum  militabUur.  Hor.  Dormltur  hiems. 
Mart.  Mtita  peccantur.  Cic.  Aditur  Gnossius  Minos.  Sen.  Neab  omni- 
bus circuw sisteretur.  Cses.  Hostes  invddi  posse.  Sail.  Campus  obltur 
aqua.  Ovid.     Plures  ineuntvr  gratice.  Cic. 


SYNTAX      -ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    PREPOSITIONS.  207 

*4»  ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    PREPOSITIONS. 

I 

$  235.  (1.)  Twenty-six  prepositions  are  followed  by 
the  accusative. 

These  are  ad,  adversvs  or  adversum,  ante,  apud,  circa  or 
circum,  circiter,  cis  or  extra,  contra,  erga,  extra,  infra,  inter, 
intra,  juxia,  oh,  penes,  per,  pone,  post,  prater,  prope,  propter, 
secundum,  supra,  trans,  ultra;  as, 

Ad  templum,  To  the  temple.  Virg.  Adversus  hostes,  Against  the  enemy. 
Liv.  Cis  Rkenum,  This  side  the  Rhine.  Caes.  Intra  muros.  Cic.  Penes 
reges.  Just.  Propter  aqua  rivum.  Virg.  Inter  agendum.  Id.  Ante  do- 
mandum.  Id. 

Remark  1.  Cis  is  generally  used  with  names  of  places ;  citra  also 
with  other  words;  as,  Cis  Taurum.  Cic.  CisPadum.  Liv.  Citra  Veliam. 
Cic.     Tela  hostium  citra.  Tac. 

•  Rem.  2.  Inter,  signifying  between,  applies  to  two  accusatives  jointly, 
and  sometimes  to  a  plural  accusative  alone ;  as,  Inter  me  et  Scipionem. 
Cic.     Inter  natos  et  parentes.  Id.     Inter  nos.  Id. 

(2.)  In  and  sub,  denoting  tendency,  are  followed  by  the  accu- 
sative ;  denoting  situation,  they  are  followed  by  the  ablative ;  as, 

Via  ducit  in  urbem,  The  way  conducts  into  the  city.  Virg.  Noster  in 
te  amor.  Cic.  Exercitus  sub  jugum  wiissus  est,  The  army  was  sent  under 
the  yoke.  Caes.  Magna  mei  sub  terras  ibit  imago.  Virg.  Medid  in  urbe, 
In  the  midst  of  the  city.  Ovid.  In  his  fuit^Ariomstus.  Caes.  Bella  sub 
Iliads  mcenlbus  gerire,  To  wage  war  under  the  Trojan  walls.  Ovid. 
Sub  nocte  silenli.  Virg. 

The  most  common  significations  of  in,  with  the  accusative,  are,  into, 
toioards,  until,  for,  against, — with  the  ablative,  in,  upon,  among.  In  some 
instances,  in  and  sub,  denoting  tendency,  are  followed  by  the  ablative,  and, 
denoting  situation,  by  the  accusative ;  as,  In  conspectu  meo  audet  venire. 
Phffid.  Naiidnes  quce  in  amicitiam  populi  Romdni,  ditionem^ue  essent.  Id. 
Sub  jugo  dictator  hostes  misit.  Liv.     Hostes  sub  montem  consedisse.  Cass. 

In  and  sub,  in  different  significations,  denoting  neither  tendency  nor 
situation,  are  followed  sometimes  by  the  accusative,  and  sometimes  by 
the  ablative  ;  as,  Amor  crescit  in  horas.  Ovid.  Hostllem  in  modum.  Cic. 
Quod  in  bono  servo  did  posset.  Id.  Sub  ed  conditione.  Ter.  Sub  poena 
mortis.  Suet. 

In  expressions  relating  to  time,  sub,  denoting  at  or  in,  usually  takes  the 
ablative  ;  denoting  near,  about,  either  the  accusative  or  ablative  ;  as,  Sub 
tempore,  At  the  time.  Lucan.  Sub  lucem  (Virg.),  Sub  luce  (Liv.), 
About  daybreak. 

(3.)  Super  is  commonly  followed  by  the  accusative;  but  when 
it  signifies  either  on  or  concerning,  it  takes  the  ablative ;    as, 

Super  labentem  culmina  tecti,  Gliding  over  the  top  of  the  house.  Virg. 
Super  ten&ro  prosternit  gramme  corpus,  He  stretches  his  body  on  the  ten- 
der grass.  Id.  Multa  super  Priamo  rogUans  super  Hectore  multa, ....  con- 
cerning Priam,  &c.  Id.  The  compound  desuper  is  found  with  the 
accusative,  and  insuper  with  the  accusative  and  ablative. 

(4.)  Subter  generally  takes  the  accusative,  but  sometimes 
the  ablative  ;  as, 

Subter  terras,  Under  the  earth.  Liv.     Subter  densd  testudine.  Virg. 


208    SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE  OF  TIME  AND  SPACE. 

(5.)  Clam  is  followed  either  by  the  accusative  or  ablative ; 
as, 

Clam  vos,  Without  your  knowledge.  Cic.  Clam  patre.  Ter.  Clam 
also  occurs  with  a  genitive — Clam  patris  (Ter.)  ;  and  even  with  a  dative 
— Mihi  clam  est.  Plaut. 

Rem.  3.  The  adverbs  versus  and  usque  are  sometimes  used  with  an 
accusative,  which  depends  on  a  preposition  understood;  as,  Brundusium 
versus.  Cic.  Termlnos  usque  Libya.  Just.  Usque  JEnnam  profecti.  Cic. 
Versus  is  always  placed  after  the  accusative. 

Rem.  4.  Prepositions  are  often  used  without  a  noun  depending  upon 
them,  but  such  noun  may  usually  be  supplied  by  the  mind ;  as,  Multis 
post  annis,  i.  e.  post  id  tempus.  Cic,  Circum  Concordice,  sc.  adem. 
Sail. 

Rem.  5.  The  accusative,  in  many  constructions,  is  supposed  to  depend 
on  a  preposition  understood.  The  preposition  cannot,  however,  always 
be  properly  expressed,  in  such  instances ;  nor  is  it  easy,  in  every  case,  to 
say  what  preposition  should  be  supplied.  For  the  accusative  without  a 
preposition  after  neuter  verbs,  see  §  232.  For  the  case  of  synecdoche,  see 
§  234,  II.  The  following  examples  may  here  be  added : — Homo  id  atalis. 
Cic.  Quid  tibi  atdtis  videor  ?  Plaut.  Prqfectus  est  id  tempdris.  Cic. 
Illud  horce.  Suet.  Devencre  locos.  Virg.  Propior  montem.  Sail.  Prox- 
imo Pompeium  sedebam.  Cic.  A  te  bis  terve  summum  litSras  accept.  Id. 
Idne  estis  auctores  mihi  ?  Ter.  Viz  equidem  ausim  qffirmare  quod,  quidam 
auctores  sunt.  Liv.    In  most  of  these,  ad  may  be  understood. 


ACCUSATIVE    OF    TIME    AND    SPACE. 

§  236.  Nouns  denoting  duration  of  time,  or  extent  of 
space,  are  put,  after  other  nouns  and  verbs,  in  the  accusa- 
tive, and  sometimes  after  verbs  in  the  ablative ;  as, 

Vixi  annos  triginta,  I  have  lived  thirty  years.  Decreveruhl  interca- 
larium  quinque  et  quadraginta  dies  longum,  They  decreed  an  intercalary 
month  forty-five  days  long.  Cic.  Annos  natus  viginti  septem,  Twenty- 
seven  years  old.  Id.  Dies  totos  de  virtute  disserunt.  Id.  Duces  qui  una 
cum  Sertorio  omnes  annos  fuerant.  Caes.  Biduum  Laodicean,  fui.  Cic. 
Te  jam  annum  audientem  Cratippum.  Id.  Duas  fossas  quindecim  pedes 
lotas  perduxit,  He  extended  two  ditches  fifteen  feet  broad.  Cses.  Cum 
abessem  ab  Amdno  iter  unius  diei.  Cic.  Tres  pat  eat  colli  spatium  non 
amplius  ulnas.  Virg.  A  porta  stadia  centum  et  viginti  processlnms.  Cic. 
Vixit  annis  viginti  novem,  imperdvit  triennio.  Suet.  JEsculapii  templum 
quinque  millibus  passuum  distans.  Liv.  Ventidius  bidui  spatio  abest 
ab  eo.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  Nouns  denoting  time  or  space,  used  to  limit  other  nouns, 
are  often  put  in  the  genitive  or  ablative.     See  §  211,  Rem.  6. 

Rem.  2.  A  term  of  time  not  yet  completed,  may  be  expressed  by  an 
ordinal  number ;  as,  Nos  vicesimum  jam  diem  patlmur  hebescere  aciem 
horum  auctoritdtis.  Cic.  Punlco  bello  duodecimum  annum  Italia  urebd- 
tur.  Liv. 

Rem.  3.  The  accusative  or  ablative  of  space  is  sometimes  omitted 
while  a  genitive  depending  on  it  remains ;  as,  Castra  qua  abSrant  bidui 
bc.  spatkem  or  spatio.  Cic. 


SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    ADVERBS,    &C.         209 

Rem.  4.  To  denote  a  place  by  its  distance  from  another,  the  ablative  is 
commonly  used  ;  as,  Millibus  passuum  sex  a  C&saris  castris  consedit.  Cks. 

For  abhinc,  with  the  accusative,  see  §  253,  Rem.  2.  For  the  ablative 
denoting  difference  of  time  or  space,  see  §  256,  Rem.  16. 

Rem.  5.  A  preposition  is  sometimes  expressed  before  an  accusative  of 
time  or  space,  but  it  generally  modifies  the  meaning ;  as,  Quern  per  decern 
annos  alulmus,.... during  ten  years.  Cic.  Qua  inter  decern  annos  facta 
aunt.  Id.     Sulcum  in  quatuor  pedes  longum  cumfeciris.  Colum. 

ACCUSATIVE    OF    PLACE. 

§  237.  After  verbs  expressing  or  implying  motion,  the 
name  of  the  town  in  which  the  motion  ends  is  put  in  the 
accusative  without  a  preposition ;  as, 

Regulus  Carthagmem  rediit,  Regulus  returned  to  Carthage.  Cic. 
Capuam  jlectit  iter,  He  turns  his  course  to  Capua.  Liv.  Calpurnius 
Romam  proficiscitur.  Sail.  Romam  erat  nuncidtum.  Cic.  Messanam 
littras  dedit.  Id. 

Remark  I.  The  accusative,  in  like  manner,  is  used  after  iter  with 
sum,  habeo.  &c. ;  as,  Iter  est  mihi  Lanuvium.  Cic.  Ccesarem  iter  habere 
Capuam.   Id. 

Rem.  2.  The  preposition  to  be  supplied  is  in,  denoting  into,  which  is 
sometimes  expressed ;  as,  In  Ephesum  abii.  Plaut.  Ad,  when  expressed 
before  the  name  of  a  town,  denotes  not  into,  but  to  or  near  ;  as,  Cazsar  ad 
Gene  vo.m  pervinit.  Cobs.     Cum  ego  ad  Heracleam  accedirem.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  Instead  of  the  accusative,  a  dative  is  sometimes,  though  rare- 
ly, used ;  as,  Carthaglni  nuncios  mittam.  Hor. 

Rem.  4.  Domus  in  both  numbers,  and  rus  in  the  singular, 
are  put  in  the  accusative,  like  names  of  towns ;  as, 

Jte  domum,  Go  home.  Virg.     G  alii  domos  abler  ant.  Liv.     Rus  ibo.Ter. 

When  domus  is  limited  by  a  genitive,  or  a  possessive  adjective  pronoun, 
it  sometimes  takes  a  preposition  :  with  other  adjectives,  the  preposition  is 
generally  expressed  ;  as,  JVon  introEo  in  nostram  domum.  Plaut.  Venisse 
m  domum  Leccee.  Cic.  Ad  earn  domum  profecti  sunt.  Id.  In  domos 
superas  scandere  cur  a  fait.  Ovid. 

Domus  is  sometimes  used  in  the  accusative  after  a  verbal  noun  ;  as, 
Domum  reditionis  spe  sublatd.  Cass.    So,  Reditus  iLomam.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  Before  all  other  names  of  places  in  which  the  motion  ends, 
except  those  of  towns,  and  domus  and  rus,  the  preposition  is  commonly 
used;  as,  Ex  Asia  tran&is  in  Europain.  Curt.  Te  in  Epirum  venisse 
gaudeo.  Cic.  But  it  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Inde  Sardiniam  cum 
classe  venit.  Cic.  Italiam  Lavinaque  venit  litora.  Virg.  JVavigdrt 
/Egyptum  pergit.  Liv.  Rapldum  veniemus  Oaxen.  Virg.  The  name's  of 
nations  are  used  in  the  same  manner ;  as,  JVocte  ad  Nervios  pervenerunt. 
Cces.     Nos  iblmus  Afros.  Virg.    So  insulas  rwin  maris  nailgant.  Plin. 

ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    ADVERBS    AND   INTERJEC- 
-       TIONS. 
§  238.      1.  The  adverbs  pridie   and  postridie  are   often   followed 
by  the  accusative  ;  as,  Pridie  eum  diem,  The  day  before  that  day.  Cic. 
Iridic  Idas.  Id.     Postridie  ludos.  Id.     Postridie  Calendas.  Liv. 

18* 


210  SYNTAX. VOCATIVE. 

The  accusative,  in  such  examples,  depends  on  ante  or  post  understood 
For  the  genitive  after  pridie  and  postridie,  see  §  212,  Rem.  4,  Note  6.  f 
The  adverb  bent  is  sometimes  followed  by  the  accusative  in  forms  of 

drinking  health ;  as,  Proplno,  bent  vos,  bent  nos,  bent  te,  bent  me,  bent 

nostrum  Stephanium.  Plaut.     Bent  Messalam.  Tibull. 

2.  The  interjections  tn,  tcct,  O,  heu,  and  pro,  are  sometimes 
followed  by  the  accusative ;  as, 

En  quatuor  aras !  ecce  duos  tibi  Daphni!  Behold  four  altars  !  lo,  two 
for  thee,  Daphni s  !  Virg.  Eccum  !  eccos  !  eccillum  t  for  ecce  eum!  ecce  cos  ! 
ecce  ilium  !  Plaut.  O  prceclarum  custodem  !  Cic.  Heu  me  infehcem  I.  Ter. 
Pro  Deum  hominumque  fidem  !  Cic. 

So  also  ah,  eheu,  and  hem;  as,  Ah  me  me  !  Catull.  Eheu  me  miserum  ! 
Ter.     Hem  astutias  !  Id. 

The  accusative  is  also  used  in  exclamations  without  an  interjection ; 
as,  Miser  am  me  !  Ter.     Hominem  gravem  et  civem  egregium  !   Cic. 

SUBJECT- ACCUSATIVE. 

§  239.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  mood  is  put  in 
the  accusative ;  as,  . 

Molestt  Pompeium  id  ferre  constdbut,  That  Pompey  took  that  ill,  was 
evident.  Cic.  Eos  hoc  nomine  appelldri  fas  est.  Id.  Miror  te  ad  me  nihil 
scribere,  I  wonder  that  you  do  not  write  to  me.  Cn.  Mag.  in  Cic.  Cam- 
pos jubet  esse  patentes.  Virg. 

Remark  1.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  omitted  when  it  pre- 
cedes in  the  genitive  or  dative  case  ;  as,  Est  adolescentis  majorcs  natu 
vereri,  sc.  eum.  Cic.  Doctoris  intelligentis  est  naturd  sud  duce  utentem 
sic  instituere.  Id.  Expldit  bonas  esse  vobis,  sc.  vos.  Ter.  Armdri  Vol- 
scorum  edlce  maniplis.  Virg. 

Rem.  2.  A  substantive  pronoun  is  also  sometimes  omitted  before  the 
infinitive,  when  it  is  the  subject  of  the  preceding  verb;  as,  Pollicltus  sum 
suscepturum  (esse),  sc.  me,  I  promised  (that  I)  would  undertake.  Ter. 
Sed  redder e  posse  negdbat,  sc.  se.  Virg. 

Rem.  3.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  often  omitted,  when  it  is  a 
general  indefinite  word  for  person  or  thing ;  as,  Est  alhid  iracundum  esse, 
nliud  iratum,  sc.  hominem.     Cic. 

The  subject-accusative,  like  the  nominative,  is  often  wanting.  See  §  209, 
Rem.  3.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  may  be  an  infinitive  or  a  clause. 
See  §  201,  IV. 

For  the  verbs  after  which  the  subject-accusative  with  the  infinitive  is 
used,  see  §  272.  For  the  accusative  in  the  predicate  after  infinitives  neu- 
ter and  passive,  see  §  210. 


VOCATIVE. 

$  240.  The  vocative  is  used,  either  with  or  without 
an  interjection,  in  addressing  a  person  or  thing. 

The  interjections  O,  heu^  and  pro,  also  ah,  au,  them,  eheu, 
eho,  ehodum,  eja,  hem,  heus,  hui,  io,  ohe,  and  vah,  are  often 
followed  by  the  vocative  ;  as, 

O  formSse  puer  !  O  beautiful  boy !  Virg.     Heu  virgo  !  Id.     Pro  sancte 


SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    AFTER    PREPOSITIONS.  211 

Jupiter!  Cic.  Ah  virgo  iufelix!  Virg.  Heus  Syre!  Ter.  Ohe  libelle! 
Mart 

The  vocative  is  sometimes  omitted,  while  a  genitive  depending  upon  it 
remains;  as,  O miser ce  sortis !  so.  homines.  Lucan. 

Note.  The  vocative  forms  no  part  of  a  proposition,  but  serves  to 
designate  the  person  to  whom  a  proposition  is  addressed. 


ABLATIVE. 
ABLATIVE    AFTER   PREPOSITIONS. 

§241.  Eleven  prepositions  are  followed  by  the  abla- 
tive. 

These  are  a,  ab,  or  abs ;  absque,  coram,  cum,  de,  e  or  ex, 
palam,  prce,  pro,  sine,  tenus ;  as, 

Ab  illo  tempdre,  From  that  time.  Liv.  A  scribendo,  From  writing.  Cic. 
Cum  exercitu,  With  the  army.  Sail.  Certis  de  causis,  For  certain 
reasons.  Cic.  Ex  fugd,  From  flight.  Id.  Palam  populo.  Liv.  Sine 
labore.  Cic.     Capulo  tenus.  Virg. 

For  in,  sub,  super,  suiter,  and  clam,  with  the  ablative,  see  §  235,  (2,)  &c. 

Remark  1.  Tenus  is  always  placed  after  its  case.  It  sometimes  takes 
the  genitive,  chiefly  the  genitive  plural.   See  §  221,  III. 

Rkm.  2.  The  adverbs  procul  and  simul  are  sometimes  used  with  an  ab- 
lative, which  depends  on  a  preposition  understood  ;  as,  Procul  mari,sc.a; 
Far  from  the  sea.  Liv.     Simul  nobis  habitat,  sc.  cum.  Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  Some  of  the  above  prepositions,  like  those  which  are  follow- 
ed by  the  accusative,  are  occasionally  used  without  a  noun  expressed ;  as, 
Cum  coram  sumus.  Cic.     Cum  fratre  an  sine.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  The  ablative  is  often  used  without  a  preposition,  where,  in 
English,  a  preposition  must  be  supplied.  This  occurs  especially  in  poetry. 
In  some  such  cases,  a  preposition  may  properly  be  introduced  in  Latin ; 
in  others,  the  idiom  of  that  language  does  not  permit  it. 

^L  •§>  242.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  a,  ab,  abs,  de,  e,  ex, 
and  super,  are  followed  by  an  ablative  depending  upon  the  prep- 
osition ;  as, 

Abesse  urbe,  To  be  absent  from  the  city.  Cic.  Ablre  sedibus,  To  depart 
from  their  habitations.  Tac.  Ut  se  maledictis  non  ahstineant.  Cic.  De- 
trudunt  naves  scopulo,  They  push  the  ships  from  the  rock.  Virg.  Navi 
egressus  est.  Nep.  Excedere  finibus.  Liv.  Casar  prcelio  supersedere 
statuit.  CffiS. 

Remark  1.  The  preposition  is  often  repeated,  or  a  different  one  is 
used  ;  as,  Detrahlre  de  tud  famd  nunquam  cogitdvi.  Cic.  Ex  oculis  obi- 
erunt.  Liv.     Exire  a  patrid.  Cic.     Exire  de  vitd.  Id. 

Rem.  2.  These  compound  verbs  are  often  used  without  a  noun ;  but, 
in  many  cases,  it  may  be  supplied  by  the  mind  ;  as,  Equites  degressi  ad 
pedes,  sc.  equis.  Liv.     Ablre  ad  Deos,  sc.  vitd.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  Some  verbs  compounded  with  ab,  de,  and  ex,  instead  of  the 
ablative,  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative.  See  $  224,  Rem.  1  and 
2.  Some  compounds,  also,  of  neuter  verbs,  occur  with  the  accusative 
See  §  233,  Rem.  1. 


212    SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    AFTER    CERTAIN    NOUNS,    &C. 


ABLATIVE  AFTER  CERTAIN  NOUNS,  ADJECTIVES, 
AND  VERBS. 

$  243.  Opus  and  usus,  signifying  need,  are  usually 
limited  by  the  ablative  ;  as, 

Auctoritate  tud  nobis  opus  est,  We  need  your  authority.  Cic.  Nunc 
animis  opus  nunc  pectorejirmo.  Virg.  Naves,  quibus  prownsuli  usus  non 
esset;  Ships,  for  which  the  proconsul  had  no  occasion.  Cic.  Nunc  virlbus 
usus,  nunc  manibus  rapldis.  Virg. 

Remark  1.  Opus  and  usus  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  ablative  of  a 
perfect  participle  ;  as,  Ita  facto  et  maturato  opus  esse,  That  there  was 
need  of  so  doing  and  of  hastening.  Liv.  Usus  facto  est  mild.  Ter.  After 
opus,  a  noun  is  sometimes  expressed  with  the  participle ;  as,  Opus  fuit 
Hirtio  convento  (Cic.)  ;  Opus  sibi  esse  domino  ejus  invento  (Liv.)  ; — or  a 
supine  is  used  ;  as,  Ita  dictu  opus  est.  Ter. 

For  the  genitive  and  accusative  after  opus  and  usus,  see  §  211,  Rem.  11. 

Rem.  2.  Opus  and  usus,  signifying  need,  are  only  used  with  the  verb 
sum.  Opus  is  sometimes  the  subject,  and  sometimes  the  predicate,  of  that 
verb ;  usus  the  subject  only.  Opus  is  rarely  followed  by  an  ablative,  ex- 
cept when  it  is  the  subject  of  the  verb.  The  thing  needed  may,  in  gene- 
ral, be  put  either  in  the  nominative  or  the  ablative  ;  as,  Dux  nobis  opus 
est  (Cic),  or  Duce  nobis  opus  est.  The  former  construction  is  most 
common  with  neuter  adjectives  and  pronouns,  and  is  always  used  with 
those  which  denote  quantity,  as  tantum,  quantum,  plus,  &c. ;  as,  Quod 
non  opus  est,  asse  carum  est.  Cato  apud  Sen. 

For  the  ablative  of  character,  quality,  &c,  limiting  a  noun,  see  §211, 
Rem.  6. 

<§>  244.     Dignus,  indignus,  contentus,  pf&ditus,  and  fre- 

tus,  are  followed  by  the  ablative ;  as, 

Dignus  laude,  Worthy  of  praise.  Hor.  Vox  popvli  majestate  indigna, 
A  speech  unworthy  of  the  dignity  of  the  people.  Caes.  Bestite  eo  con- 
tents non  qumrunt  amplius.  Cic.  Homo  scelere  prcedltus.  Id.  Plerique 
ingenio  freti.  Id. 

Rfmark  1.  The  adverb  dignh,  like  dignus,  takes  the  ablative  after  it ; 
as,  Peccat  uter  nostrum  cruce  digidks.  Hor.  • 

Rem.  2.  Dignus  and  indignus  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  genitive  ; 
as,  Suscipe  cogitationem  dignisslmam  tua.  virtutis.  Cic.  Indignus  avorum. 
Virg. 

Instead  of  an  ablative,  they  often  take  an  infinitive,  or  a  subjunctive 
clause,  with  qui  or  ut ;  as,  Erat  dignus  amari.  Virg.  Dignus  qui  imperet 
Cic.     Non  sum  dignus,  ut  figam  palum  in  parietem.  Flaut. 

§  245.  I.  Utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  vescor,  and  dlg- 
nor,  are  followed  by  the  ablative ;  as, 

His  voclbus  usa  est,  She  used  these  words.  Virg.  Frui  voluptate,  To 
enjoy  pleasure.  Cic.  FungUur  officio,  He  performs  his  duty.  Id.  Oppldo 
■ootid  sunt.  Liv.  Vescltur  aura.  Virg.  Me  dignor  honore.  Id.  Homines 
nonore  dignantur.  Cic. 

So  the  compounds  abator,  and  rarely  deutor,  perfruor,  defungor,  and 
perfungor. 

Remark  1.     The  above  verbs,  except  dignor,  instead   of  an  ablative 


SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  &C.        213 

sometimes  take  an  accusative ;  as,  Guam  rem  medlci  utuntur.  Varr.  In- 
genium  frui.  Ter.  Datdmes  militdre  munus  fungens.  Nep.  Gentem  ali- 
quant urbem  nostram  potituram  putem.  Cic.  Sacras  lauros  vescar.  Tibull. 
Potior  is,  also,  found  with  the  genitive.  (See  §  220,  4.)  Dignor  is  used 
both  as  active  and  passive. 

II.  Lcetor,  gaudeo,  glorior,  jacto,  nitor,  sto,Jido,  confido, 
muto,  misceo,  epulor,  vivo,  assuesco,  and  consto  (to  consist  of), 
are  often  followed  by  the  ablative  without  a  preposition  ;  as, 

Laior  tud  dignitate,  I  rejoice  in  your  dignity.  Cic.  Gaude  tuo  bono.  Id. 
Sud  victoria  gloridri.  Caes.  Jactat  supplicio  levando.  Cic.  Niti  aequitate. 
[d.  Censoris  opinione  standum  non  putdvit.  Id.  Fidere  cursu.  Ovid. 
Corporis  firmitate  confidire.  Cic.  Uvam  mutat  strigili.  Hor.  Genus 
pugna  quo  assueverant.  Li  v.     Quidquid  auro  et  argento  constdret.  Suet. 

Remark  1.  Gaudeo  is  sometimes  followed  by  the  accusative  ;  as,  Ga- 
vlsos  homines  suum  dolorem.  Cic.  See  §  232,  (2.)  Fido,  con/ido,  and 
assuesco,  often  take  the  dative.     See  §  223,  Rem.  2, 

Rem.  2.  When  a  preposition  is  expressed  after  the  above  verbs,  lcetor 
and  gaudeo  usually  take  de;  glorior  and  jacto,  de  or  in  ;  nitor,  sto,  fido 
and  confido,  in;  assuesco,  in  or  ad; misceo,  cum; and  consto,  ex. 

III.  The  ablative  without  a  preposition  is  used  after  sum,  to 
denote  the  situation  or  circumstances  of  the  subject  of  the 
verb ;  as, 

Tamen  magno  timore  sum,  Yet  I  am  in  great  fear.  Cic.  Quanto  fuirim 
dolore  meministi.  Id.  Maximo  honore  Servius  Tullius  erat.  Liv.  Ut 
meliore  simus  loco,  ne  optandum  quidem  est.  Cic. 

But  the  preposition  in  is  often  used  before  such  ablatives,  especially  if 
an  adjective  or  pronoun  is  not  joined  with  them ;  as,  Sum  in  expectatiOne 
omnium  rerum.  Cic.     Etsi  erdmus  in  magnd  spe.  Id. 

§  246.  Perfect  participles  denoting  origin  are  often 
followed  by  the  ablative  of  the  source,  without  a  prepo- 
sition. 

Such  are  natus,  progndtus,  satus,  credtus,  cretus,  edltus,  genltus,  generd 
tus,  ortus  ;  to  which  may  be  added  oriundus. 

Thus,  Kate  deal  O  son  of  a  goddess!  Virg.  Tantdlo  progndtus,  De- 
scended from  Tantalus.  Cic.  Satus  Nerelde,  Sprung  from  a  Nereid.  Ovid. 
Credtus  rcge.  Id.  Alcandre  creti.  Virg.  Edlte  regibus.  Hor.  Diis  gen- 
Ite.  Virg.  Jlrgollco  generdtus  Memdne.  Ovid.  Ortus  nullis  majorlbus. 
Hor.     Calesti  semlne  oriundi.  Lucr. 

Remark  1.  The  preposition  is  also  rarely  omitted  after  nascor;  as,  Ut 
patre  certo  nascerere.  Cic.      So,  Fortes  creantur  fortlbus.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  The  prepositions  a  or  ab,  de,  e  or  ex,  are  often  expressed  after 
these  participles,  especially  in  prose. 


ABLATIVE    OF    CAUSE,    &c. 

§  247.  Nouns  denoting  the  cause,  manner,  means, 
and  instrument,  after  adjectives  and  verbs,  are  put  in  the 
ablative  without  a  preposition  ;  as, 


214        SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  &C 

Animus  ceger  avaritia,  A  mind  diseased  through  avarice.  Sail.  Paltire 
metu,  To  be  pale  through  fear.  Ovid.      Quod  saevitia  temporis  non  capi 

poterat.  Sail. Omnibus  modis  miser  sum,  1  am  every  way  miserable.  Ter. 

Silentio  audltus  est,  Me  was  heard  in  silence.  Cic.     Lento  gradu  procedit. 

Val.  Max. Amicus  observantia,  rem  parsimonia  retinuit ;  He  retained 

his  friends  by  attention,  his  property  by  frugality.  Cic.  Auro  ostroque 
decori.  Virg.     Vi  morbi  consumptus  es.    Cic.     JEgrcscit  medendo.  Virg. 

Trabs  saucia  securi,  A  tree  cut  with  the  axe.  Ovid.     Census  est  virgis, 

He  was  beaten  with  rods.  Cic.     Lanldbant  dentibus  artus.  Virg.* 

Remark  1.  When  the  cause  is  a  voluntary  agent,  it  is  put  in  the  ac- 
cusative with  the  preposition  ob,  propter,  or  per ;  as,  Non  est  aquilm  me 
propter  vos  declpi.  Ter.  These  prepositions,  and  a  or  ab,  de,  e  or  ex,  and 
prce,  are  also  sometimes  used  when  the  cause  is  not  a  voluntary  agent ;  a3, 
Ob  adulterium  ccesi.  Virg.     Nee  loqui  prte  mojrore  potuit.    Cic. 

Rem.  2.  After  active  verbs,  the  causeis  seldom  expressed  by  the  simple 
ablative,  but  either  by  a  preposition,  or  by  the  ablatives  causd,  gratid,  &c, 
with  a  genitive ;  as,  Si  hoc  honoris  mei  causa  susceperis.  Cic.  With 
causd,  &c,  the  adjective  pronoun  is  commonly  used,  for  the  corresponding 
substantive  pronoun;  as,  Te  abesse  mea  causa,  moleste  fero.  Cic.  Some- 
times the  ablative  with  ductus,  motus,  captus,  &c,  is  used ;  as,  Miki  benev- 
olentia  ductus  tribuebat  omnia.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  manner  is  often  expressed  with  cum,  especially  when  an 
adjective  is  joined  with  it ;  as,  Quum  videret  oratores  cum  severitate 
audlri.  Cic.  Magno  cum  metu  dicere  incipio.  Id.  Sometimes  also  with 
e  or  ex;  as,  Ex  industrid,  On  purpose.  Liv.      Ex  intcgro,  Anew.  Quinct. 

Rem.  4.  The  means  is  often  expressed  by  per  with  an  accusative ;  as, 
Quod  per  scelus  adeptus  est.  Cic.  When  it  is  a  voluntary  agent,  it  can 
only  be  so  expressed,  or  by  the  ablative  operd  with  a  genitive  or  possessive 
pronoun  j  as,  Per  prreconem  vendere  allquid.  Cic.  Opera  eorum  effectum 
est.  Just.  Non  mea  opera  evenit.  Ter.  Yet  persons  are  sometimes  con- 
sidered as  involuntary  agents,  and  as  such  expressed  by  the  ablative  with- 
out a  preposition  ;  as,  Servos,  quibus  silvas  publlcas  depopuldtus  erat.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  The  instrument  is  rarely  used  with  a  preposition.  The  poets, 
however,  sometimes  prefix  to  it  a  or  ab,  and  even  sub,  and  sometimes 
other  prepositions;  as,  Trajectus  ab  ense.  Ovid.  Exercere  solum  sub 
vomgre.  Virg.  Cum,  with  the  instrument,  is  seldom  used  except  by  infe- 
rior writers ;  as,  Cum  voce  maxima  conclamdre.  Gell. 

<§>  248.  I.  The  voluntary  agent  of  a  verb  in 
the  passive  voice  is  put  in  the  ablative  with  a  or  ab ;  as, 

(In  the  active  voice,)  Clodius  me  dillgit,  Clodius  loves  me  (Cic.) ;  (in 
the  passive,)  A  Clodio  di'lgor,  I  am  loved  by  Clodius.  Lauddtur  ab  his, 
cuJpdtur  ab  illis.  Hor. 

Remark  1.  The  general  word  for  persons,  after  verbs  in  the  passive 
voice,  is  often  understood ;  as,  Probltas  lauddtur,  sc.  ab  hominlbus.  Juv. 
So  after  the  passive  of  neuter  verbs;  as,  Discurrltur.  Virg.  "Toto  certd- 
tum  est  corpore  regni.  Id. 

The  agent  is  likewise  often  understood,  when  it  is  the  same  as  the  sub- 
ject of  the  verb,  and  the  expression  is  equivalent  to  the  active  voice  with 
a  reflexive  pronoun,  or  to  the  middle  voice  in  Greek ;  as,  CUm  omnes  in 
omni  genere  scelerum  volutcntur,  sc.  a  se.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  Neuter  verbs,  also,  are  often  followed  by  an  abla- 
tive of  the  voluntary  agent  with  a  or  ab  ;  as, 


SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  &C.        215 

M.  Marcellus  pcriit  ab  Annibale,  M.  Marcellus  was  killed  by  Hannibal. 
Plin.     Ne  vir  ab  hoste  cadat.  Ovid. 

Rkm.  3.  The  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  JVecconjuge  captus, 
Ovid.     CoUtur  linigerd  turba.  Id. 

For  the  dative  of  the  agent  after  the  passive  voice,  and  participles  in 
dus,  see  §  225,  II.  and  III. 

II.  The  involuntary  agent  of  an  active  verb  in  the  passive  voice,  is  put 
in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition,  as  the  cause,  means,  or  instrument , 
as  (in  the  active  voice),  Terror  conflcit  omnia  (Lucan.)  ; — (in  the  passive), 
Maximo  dolore  conjicior.  Cic.     Frangi  cupiditate.  Id. 

But  the  involuntary  agent  is  sometimes  considered  as  voluntary,  and 
takes  a  or  ab ;  as,  A  voluptatlbus  desVri.  Cic.  A  natura  datum  homlni 
vivendi  curriculum.  Id. 

$  249.     I.    A   noun   denoting   that   with    which   the  y 
action  of  a  verb  is  performed,  though  not  the  instrument, 
is  put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition. 

Remark  1.  This  construction  is  used  with  verbs  signifying 
to  fill,  to  furnish,  to  load,  to  array,  to  adorn,  to  enrich,  and 
many  others  of  various  significations  ;  as, 

Terrore  impUtur  Africa,  Africa  is  filled  with  terror.  Sil.  Tnstruxe~re 
epulis  mcnsas,  They  furnished  the  tables  with  food.  Ovid.  Ut  ejus  arii- 
mum  his  opinionlbus  imbuas,  That  you  should  imbue  his  mind  with  these 
sentiments.  Cic.  Naves  onZrant  auro,  They  load  the  ships  with  gold. 
Virg.  Cumvlat  altaria  donis,  He  heaps  the  altars  with  gifts.  Id.  Terra 
se  gramlne  vestit,  The  earth  clothes  itself  with  grass.  Id.  Molllbus  orna- 
bat  cornua  sertis.  Id.  Me  tanto  honore  konestas.  Plaut.  Equis  Afrlcam 
locupletdvit.  Colum.  Studium  tuum  nulld  me  novd  voluptate  affecit.  Cic. 
Terram  noz  obruit  umbris.  Lucr. 

Rkm.  2.  Several  verbs,  denoting  to  fill,  instead  of  the  ablative,  some- 
times take  a  genitive.     See  §  220,  3. 

II.  A  noun  denoting  that  in  accordance  with  which  any 
thing  is,  or  is  done,  is  often  put  in  the  ablative  without  a 
preposition ;  as, 

J\"ostro  more,  According  to  our  custom.  Cic.  lnstituto  suo  Ccesar 
copias  suas  eduxit-;  Cassar,  according  to  his  practice,  led  out  his  forces. 
Cees.     Id  factum  consilio  mco.  Ter.     Pacem  fecit  Ids  conditionibus.   Nep. 

The  prepositions  de,  ex,  and  pro,  are  often  expressed  with  such  nouns. 

III.  The  ablative  denoting  accompaniment,  is  usually  joined 
with  cum;  as, 

Vagdmur  egentes  cum  conjugtbus  et  liberis ;  Needy,  we  wander  with 
our  wives  and  children.  Cic.  Sajic  admirdri  soleo  cum  hoc  C.  Laelio. 
Cic.  Julium  cum  his  ad  te  Uteris  rnisi.  Id.  Ingressus  est  cum  gladio. 
Id.  But  cum  is  sometimes  omitted,  especially  before  words  denoting 
military  forces ;  as,  Ad  castra  Casdris  omnibus  copiis  contenderunt.  Coes. 
Inde  toto  exercitu  profectus,    Li  v. 

§  250.  A  noun,  adjective,  or  verb,  may  be  followed 
by  the  ablative,  denoting  in  what  respect  their  signification 
is  taken  ;  as, 


216        SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  &C. 

Pietdte  Jilius,  consiliis  parens  ;  In  affection  a  son,  in  counsel  a  parent 
Cic.     Reges  nomine  magis  qudm  imperio,  Kings  in  name  rather  than  in 

authority.  Nep.     Oppldum  nomine  Bibrax.  Cees. Jure  peritus,  Skilled 

in  law.  Cic.  Anxius  animo,  Anxious  in  mind.  Tac.  Pedibus  eeger,  Lame 
in   his  feet.    Sail.     Crine   ruber,   niger   ore.    Mart.     Fronte   Icetus.    Tac. 

Major  natu.  Cic.     Mazlmus  natu.  Liv. Animo  angi,  To  be  troubled  in 

mind.  Cic.  Contremisco  totd  mente  et  omnibus  artuvus,  I  am  agitated  in 
my  whole  mind  and  in  every  limb.  Id.  Captvs  mente,  Affected  in  mind, 
i.  e.  deprived  of  reason.  Id.  AltSro  oculo  capitur.  Liv.  Ingenii  laude 
floruit.  Cic.     Pollere  nobilitdte.  Tac.     Animoque  et  corpdre  tarpet.  Hor. 

Remark  1.  To  this  principle  may  be  referred  the  following 
rules : — 

(1.)  Adjectives  of  plenty  or  want  are  sometimes  limited  by 
the  ablative  ;  as, 

Domus  plena  semis,  A  house  full  of  servants.  Juv.     Dives  agris,  Rich 

in    land.    Hor.       Ferax    saculum    bonis   artibus.    Plin. Jnops  verbis, 

Deficient  in  words.  Cic.  Orba  fratribus,  Destitute  of  brothers.  Ovid. 
Viduum  arboribus  solum.  Colum. 

(2.)  Verbs  signifying  to  abound,  and  to  be  destitute,  are  fol- 
lowed by  the  ablative  ;   as, 

Scatentem  belluis  pontum,  The  sea  abounding  in  monsters.  Hor.  Urbs 
redundat  militibus,   The   city  is  full   of  soldiers.    Auct.  ad  Her.     Villa 

almndat  porco,  hiedo,  agno,  gallind,  lacte,  caseo,  melle.  Cic. Virujn  qui 

vecunid  egeat,  A  man  who  is  in  want  of  money.  Id.  Carer e  culpd,  To 
be  free  from  fault.  Id.  Mea  adolescentia  indiget  illorum  bond  existima- 
tione.  Id.     Abundat  audacia,  consilio  et  ratione  deficitur.  Id. 

To  this  rule  belong  abundo,  exubero,  redundo,  scateo,  affluo,  circumfluo, 
difflvo,  superfluo  ; — carco,  cgco,  indigeo,  vaco,  deficior,  destituor,  &c. 

Rem.  2.  The  genitive  is  often  used  to  denote  in  what  respect,  after 
adjectives  and  verbs ;  (see  §  §  213  and  220 ;)  sometimes,  also,  the  accu- 
sative.    See  §  234,  II. 

Rem.  3.  The  ablative  denoting  in  respect  to,  or  concerning,  is  used 
after  facto  and  sum,  without  a  preposition  ;  as,  Quid  hoc  homlne  facidtis  7 
What  can  you  do  with  this  man  ?  Cic.  JYescit  quid  faciat  auro.  Plaut. 
Metum  ceperunt  quidnam  se  futurum  esset.  Liv.  In  this  construction,  the 
preposition  de  seems  to  be  understood,  and  is  sometimes  expressed ;  as, 
Quid  de  Tulliold  medflct.  Cic. 

$251.  A  noun  denoting  that  of  which  any  thing  is 
deprived,  or  from  which  it  is  separated,  is  often  put  in  the 
ablative  without  a  preposition. 

This  construction  occurs  after  verbs  signifying  to  deprive,  to 
free,  to  debar,  to  drive  away,  to  remove,  and  others  of  similar 
meaning.     Thus, 

JYudantur  arbdres  foliis,  The  trees  are  stripped  of  leaves.  Plin.  Hoc  me 
libera  metu,  Free  me  from  this  fear.  Ter.  Tune  earn  philosophiam 
sequere,  qua  spoliat  nos  judicio,  privat  approbatione,  orbat  sensibus?  Cic. 
Solvit  se  Teucria  luctu.  Virg.  Te  Mis  sedibus  arcebit.  Cic.  Q.  Varium 
pelUre  possessionlbus  conatus  est.  Id.  Quod  M.  Catonem  tribunatu  tuo 
remocisscs.  Id      Me  leves  chori  secemunt  poptiloi  Hor. 


SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    OF     PRICE    AND    TIME.  217 

To  this  rule  belong  fraudo,  nudo,  orbo,  privo,  spolio  ; — arceo,  ezpedio, 
intercludo,  lazo,  levo,  libero,  moveo,  removeo,  pello,  prohibeo,  &c. 

Remark  I.  Most  of  the  above  verbs  are  more  or  less  frequently  fol- 
lowed by  a,  ab,  de,  e,  or  ex  ;  as,  Jlrcem  ab  incendio  liberdvit.  Cic.  Solvere 
belluam  ex  catenis.  Auct.  ad  Her.     Remdve  te  a  suspicione.  Cic. 

For  arceo,  &c,  with  the  dative,  see  §  224,  Rem.  2. 

Rem.  2.  The  active  verbs  induo,  exuo,  dono,impertio,  adspcrgo,  insper- 
go,  intercludo,  circumdo,  prohibeo,  instead  of  an  ablative  of  the  thing  with 
an  accusative  of  the  person,  sometimes  take  an  accusative  of  the  thing, 
and  a  dative  of  the  person ;  as,  XJnam  (vcstcm)  juveni  induit,  He  puts  one 
upon  the  youth.  Virg.  Donare  munera  civtbus,  To  present  gifts  to  the 
citizens.  Cic. 

Interdico  is  sometimes  used  with  a  dative  of  the  person  and  an  ablative 
of  the  thing ;  as,  Quibus  cum  aqua  et  igni  inter dixissent.  Cses. 

Abdico  takes  sometimes  an  ablative,  and  sometimes  an  accusative  of  the 
thing  renounced ;  as,  Abdicare  se  magistrate.  Cic.  Abdicare  magistra- 
tum.  Sail. 

ABLATIVE    OF    PRICE. 

<§>  252.  The  price  of  a  thing  is  put  in  the  ablative, 
except  when  expressed  by  the  adjectives  tanti,  quanti, 
pluris,  minoris ;  as, 

Cum  te  trecentis  talentis  regi  Cotto  vendidisses,  When  you  had  sold 
yourself  to  king  Cottus  for  three  hundred  talents.  Cic.  Vendldit  hie 
auro  patriam,  This  one  sold  his  country  for  gold.  Virg.  Cibus  uno  asse 
vendlis.  Plin.  Constitit  quadringentis  milllbus.  Varr.  Denis  in  diem 
asslbus  animam  et  corpus  (milltum)  eestimdri.  Tac.  Vendo  meum  non 
pluris  quam  celiri,fortasse  etiam  minoris.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  Tantldem,  quanticunque,  quantiquanti,  and  quantlvis,  com- 
pounds of  tanti  and  quanti,  are  also  put  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Tantldem 

frumentum  emerunt  quantldem Cic.      Majoris  also  is  thus   used   in 

Phffidrus  ;  Multd  majoris  al&pa  mecum  veneunt. 

Rem.  2.  When  joined  with  a  noun,  tanti,  quanti,  &c,  are  put  in  the 
ablative  ;  as,  Quam  tanto  pretio  mercdtvs  est.  Cic.  Cum  pretio  minore 
redimendi  cantlvos  copia  figret.  Liv.  Tanto,  quanto,  and  plure,  are  some- 
times, though  rarely,  found  without  a  noun ;  as,  Plure  venit.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  ablative  of  price  is  often  an  adjective  without  a  noun ; 
as,  magno,  permagno,  parvo,  paululo,  tantiilo,  minlmo,  pluflmo,  vili,  nimio. 
These  adjectives  refer  to  some  noun  understood,  as  pretio,  aire,  and  the 
like,  which  are  sometimes  expressed  ;  as,  Parvo  pretio  ea  vendidisse.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  With  valeo  an  accusative  is  sometimes  used;  as,  Denarii 
dicti,  qudd  denos  ceris  valebant.  Varr. 


ABLATIVE    OF    TIME. 

§  253.  A  noun  denoting  the  time  at  or  within  which 
any  thing  is  said  to  be,  or  to  be  done,  is  put  in  the  abla- 
tive without  a  preposition  ;  as, 

Die  quinto  decessit,  He  died  on  the  fifth  day.  Nep.     Hoc  tempore,  At 
this  time.  Cic.     Tertid  vigilia  eruptidnem  fecerunt*  They  made  a  sallv  at 
19 


218  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  OF  PLACE. 

the  third  watch.  Cses.  Ut  hieme  navlges,  That  you  should  sail  in  the 
winter.  Cic.  His  ipsis  diebus  hostem  persSqui.  Cic.  Proximo  triennio 
omnes  gentes  subegit.  Nep.  Vel  pace  vel  bello  clarum  fieri  licet.  Sail. 
Ludis  mane  servum  quidam  eglrat,  On  the  day  of  the  games....  Liv.  So 
Latinis,  gladiatorlbus,  comitiis,  denote  the  time  of  the  Latin  festivals,  the 
gladiatorial  shows,  <&c. 

Remark  1.  When  a  precise  time  is  marked  by  its  distance  before  or 
after  another  fixed  time,  it  may  be  expressed  by  ante  or  post  with  either 
the  accusative  or  the  ablative  ;  as,  Aliquot  ante  annos.  Suet.  Paucis  ante 
diebus.  Liv.     Paucos  post  dies.  Cic.     Multis  annis  post  Decemvlros.    Id. 

Sometimes  quam  and  a  verb  are  added  to  post  and  ante  with  either  the 
accusative  or  the  ablative ;  as,  Ante  paucos  quam  periret  menses.  Suet. 
Paucis  post  diebus  quam  Luca  discessSrat.  Cic.  Post  is  sometimes  omitted 
before  quam;  as,  Die  vigeslmd  quam  credtus  erat.  Liv. 

Instead  of  postquam,  ex  quo  or  quam,  or  a  relative  agreeing  with  the  pre- 
ceding ablative,  may  be  used  ;  as,  Octo  diebus,  quibus  has  UtSras  dabam, 
Eight  days  from  the  date  of  these  letters.  Cic.  Mors  Roscii,  quatriduo 
quo  is  occlsus  est,  Ckrysogdno  nuntidtur.  Id. 

Rem.  2.  Precise  past  time  is  often  denoted  by  abhinc  with  the  accusa- 
tive or  ablative ;  as,  QtuBstor  fuisti  abhinc  annos  quatuordecim.  Cic.  Co- 
mitiis  jam  abhinc  triginta  diebus  liabltis.  Id. 

Rem.  3.  The  time  at  which  any  thing  is  done,  is  sometimes  expressed 
by  the  neuter  accusative  id,  with  a  genitive  ;  as,  Venit  id  temporis.  Cic. 
So  with  a  preposition  ;  Ad  id  dtii.  GelU    See  §  212,  Rem.  3. 

Rem.  4.  The  time  at  or  within  which  any  thing  is  done,  is  sometimes 
expressed  by  in  or  de,  with  the  ablative  ;  as,  In  his  diebus.  Plaut.  In  tali 
tempore.  Liv.  De  tertid  vigilia  ad  hostes  contendit.  Cses.  Surgunt  de 
nocte  latrdnes.  Hor.     So  with  sub  ;  Sub  ipsd  die.  Plin. 

The  time  within  which  any  thing  occurs,  is  also  sometimes  expressed 
by  intra  with  the  accusative  ;  as,  Dimidiam  partem  nationum  subegit  intra 
viginti  dies.  Plaut.  Intra  dcclmum  diem,  quam  Pheras  vencrat;  Within 
ten  days  after....  Liv. 

For  the  ablative  denoting  duration  of  time,  or  extent  of  space,  see  §  23C. 


ABLATIVE    OF    PLACE. 

$  254.  The  name  of  a  town  in  which  any  thing  is 
said  to  be,  or  to  be  done,  if  of  the  third  declension  or 
plural  number,  is  put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposi- 
tion; as, 

Alexander  Babylone  est  mortuus,  Alexander  died  at  Babylon.  Cic. 
Thebis  nutrltus  an  Argis,  Whether  brought  up  at  Thebes  or  at  Argos. 
Hor. 

Remark  1 .  The  ablative  rure,  or  more  commonly  ruri,  is  used  to  de- 
note in  the  country;  as,  Pater  filium  ruri  habitdre  jussit.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  The  preposition  in  is  sometimes  expressed  with  names  ol 
towns ;  as,  In  Philippis  quidam  nuncidvit.  Suet. 

Names  of  towns  of  the  first  and  second  declension,  and  singular  num- 
ber, and  also  domus  and  humus,  are  in  like  manner  sometimes  put  in  the 
ablative.     See  §  221.  " 

Rem.  3.  Before  the  names  of  countries  and  of  all  other  places  in  which 
iny  thing  is  said  to  be  done,  except  those  of  towns,  and  domus  and  rus, 


SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    AFTER    COMPARATIVES.  219 

the  preposition  in  with  the  ablative  is  commonly  used ;  as,  Aio  hoc  jtiri 
in  Graecia.  Plaut.     Lucus  in  nxbefuit.  Virg. 

But  the  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Millies  stativis  castris 
habebat.  Sail.  Magnis  in  laudibus  fuit  totd  Graecia.  Nep.  Insidue  terra 
marine  facta  sunt.  Cic.  JYavita  puppe  salens.  Ovid.  Ibam  forte  via 
sacrd.  Hor.     Urbe  totd.  Cic. 

For  names  of  countries  in  the  genitive,  see  §  221,  Rem.  1. 

$255.  After  verbs  expressing  or  implying  motion, 
the  name  of  a  town  whence  the  motion  proceeds,  is  put  in 
the  ablative,  without  a  preposition ;  as, 

Brundisio  profecti  sumus,  We  departed  from  Brundisium.  Cic.  Corintho 
arcesslvit  colonos,  He  sent  for  colonists  from  Corinth.  Nep. 

Remark  1.  The  ablatives  domo,  humo,  and  rure  or  ruri,  are 
used,  like  names  of  towns,  to  denote  the  place  whence  motion 
proceeds;   as, 

Domo  profectus,  Having  set  out  from  home.  Nep.  Surgit  humo  juvinis. 
The  youth  rises  from  the  ground.  Ovid.  Rure  hue  advtnit.  Ter.  Si  ruri 
veniet.  Id.  Virgil  uses  domus  with  unde ;  as,  Qui  genus?  undt  domo? 
With  an  adjective,  rure,  and  not  ruri,  must  be  used. 

Rem.  2.  With  names  of  towns,  and  domus,  and  humus,  ab  or  ex  is 
sometimes  used ;  as,  Ab  Alexandria  profectus.  Cic.  Ex  domo.  Id.  Ab 
humo.  Virg. 

Rem.  3.  With  other  names  of  places  whence  motion  proceeds,  ab  or 
ex  is  commonly  expressed  ;  as,  Ex  Asia  transis  in  Europam.  Curt.  Ex 
castris  proficiscuntur.  Cres. 

""  But  the  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted  ;  as,  Litlrct  Macedonia  alhita. 
Liv.  Classis  Cypro  advenit.  Curt.  Cessissent  loco.  Liv.  Ite  sacris, 
proper  ate  sacris,  laurumque  capillis  poritte.  Ovid.  Finlbus  omnes  prosiluire 
suis.  Virg.  Advolvunt  ingentes  montibus  ornos.  Id.  This  omission  of 
the  preposition  is  most  common  in  the  poets. 


ABLArTIVE    AFTER    COMPARATIVES. 

«§>  256*  When  two  objects  are  compared  by  means  of  the  compar- 
ative degree,  a  conjunction,  as  quam,  atque,  &c.,  is  sometimes  expressed, 
and  sometimes  omitted. 

The  comparative  degree  is  followed  by  the  ablative, 
when  quam  is  omitted ;  as, 

Nihil  est  virtute  formosius,  Nothing  is  more  beautiful  than  virtue.  Cic. 
Quis  C.  Lselio  comior  ?  Who  is  more  courteous  than  C.  Lrolius  ?  Id. 

Remark  1.  An  object  which  is  compared  with  the  subject 
of  a  proposition  by  means  of  the  comparative  degree,  is  usually 
put  in  the  ablative  without  quam  ;  as, 

SidSre  pulchrior  tile  est,  tu  levior  cortice.  Hor.  Quid  magis  est  durum 
saxo,  quid  mollius  unda  ?  Ovid.  Hoc  nemo  fuit  minus  ineptus.  Ter.  Al- 
bdnum,  Maecenas,  sive  Falernum  te  magis  appositis  delectat.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  An  object  compared  with  a  person  or  thing  addressed,  is  also 
ut  in  the  ablative  without  quhm  ;  as,  Ofons  Bandusiai  sjdendidior  vitro 


put  1 
Hor 


220     SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  AFTER  COMPARATIVES. 

Rem.  3.  Quam  is  sometimes  used  when  one  of  the  objects  compared 
is  the  subject  of  a  proposition,  and  then  both  are  in  the  same  case,  either 
nominative  or  accusative  ;  as,  Oratio  quam  habitus  fuit  miserabilior.  Cic. 
Affirvio  nullum  esse  lavdem  ampliorem  quam  earn.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  If  neither  of  the  objects  compared  is  the  subject  of  a  sentence 
or  a  person  addressed,  quam  is  commonly  used,  and  the  object  which  fol- 
lows it  is  put  in  the  nominative  with  sum,  and  sometimes  in  an  oblique 
case  to  agree  with  the  other  object  ;  as,  Non  oplnor  negaturum 
esse  te,  homlni  non  gratiosidri.qnkm  Cn.  Calidius  est,  argentum  reddidisse. 
Cic.     Ego  homlnem  callidiorem  vidi  neminem  quam  Phormionem.  Ter. 

The  following  example  illustrates  both  the  preceding  constructions  : — 
Ut  tibi  multd  majori,  quam  Africanus  fuit,  tamen  (me)  non  multb  minorem 
quam  Laelium  adjunctum  esse  patidre.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  But  when  the  former  object  of  comparison  is  in  the  accusa- 
tive, though  not  the  subject  of  the  verb,  the  latter,  if  a  relative  pronoun, 
is  put  in  the  ablative  without  quam ;  as,  Mtdlo,  quo  graviorem  inimicum 
non  habui,  sororcm  dedit ;  He  gave  his  sister  to  Attalus,  than  whom,  &c. 
Curt. 

This  construction  is  often  found  with  other  pronouns,  and  sometimes 
with  a  noun  ;  as,  Hoc  nihil  gr alius  facer -e  potes.  Cic.  Causam  enim  sus- 
cepisti  antiquiorcm  memoria  tud.  Id.  Exegi  monumentum  Ere  perennius. 
Hor.  Majora  virlbus  audes.  Virg.  Nullum  sacrd  vite  prius  severis  arbo- 
rem.  Hor. 

Rem.  G.  Plus,  minus,  and  amplius,  are  often  used  without 
quam,  and  yet  are  commonly  followed  by  the  same  case  as  if  it 
were  expressed  ;  as, 

Hoslium  plus  quinque  millia  cmsi  eo  die,  More  than  five  thousand  of  the 
enemy  were  slain  that  day.  Liv.  Ferre  plus  dimididti  mensis  cibaria. 
Cic.  Non  amplius  quingentos  cives  desiderdvit.  Caes.  Sedecim  non  am- 
plius legionlbus  defensum  imperium  est.  Liv.  Madefactum  iri  minus  tri- 
ginta  diebus  Graiciam  sanguine.  Cic.  The  ablatives  in  the  last  two  exam- 
ples do  not  depend  upon  the  comparatives,  but  may  be  referred  to  §  236. 

Before  the  dative  and  vocative,  quam  must  be  expressed  after  these 
words. 

The  ablative  is  sometimes  used  with  these  as  with  other  comparatives ; 
as,  Dies  triginta  aut  plus  eo  in  navi  fui.  Ter.     Triennio  amplius.  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  Quam  is  in  like  manner  sometimes  omitted,  without  a  change 
of  case,  after  major,  minor,  and  some  other  comparatives;  as,  Obsldes  ne 
minorcs  octonum  denum  annorum  neu  majores  quinum  quadragenurn,....  of 
not  less  than  eighteen,  nor  more  than  forty-five  years  of  age.  Liv.  Ex 
urbdno  exercitu,  qui  minores  quinque  et  triginta  annis  erant,  in  naves  impos- 
\ti  sunt.  The  genitive  and  ablative,  in  these  and  similar  examples,are  to  be 
referred  to  §  211,  Rem.  6.  Longiiis  ab  urbe  mille  passuum.  Liv.  Annos 
natus  magis  quadraginta.  Cic. 

Rem.  8.  When  the  second  member  of  a  comparison  is  an  infinitive  or 
clause,  quam  is  always  expressed  ;  as,  Nihil  est  in  dicendo  majus  quam  ut 
faveat  oratori  auditor.  Cic. 

Rem.  9.  Certain  nouns,  participles,  and  adjectives, — as  opinibne,  spe, 
expectatione,fidc, — dicto,  solito, — aquo,  crediblli,  and  justo, — are  used  in  the 
ablative  after  comparatives;  as,  Opinione  celeriiis  venturus  esse  dicltur.... 
sooner  than  is  expected.  Cres.  Dicto  citiiis  tumtda  aiquora  placat.  Virg. 
•  lnjurias  gravius  aequo  habere.  Sail. 

These  ablatives  supply  the  place  of  a  clause  :    thus,  gravius  aquo  is 


SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    AFTER    COMPARATIVES.  221 

equivalent  to  gravius  qudm  quod  aquum  est.  They  are  often  omitted ;  as, 
Liberties  vivebat,  sc.  cequo.  Nep.  In  such  cases,  the  comparative  may  be 
translated  by  the  positive  degree,  with  too  or  rather,  as  in  the  above  ex 
ample — "  He  lived  too  freely,"  or  "  rather  freely."  So  tristior,  sc.  sollto, 
rather  sad. 

Rem.  10.  With  inferior,  the  dative  is  sometimes  used,  instead  of  the 
ablative  ;  as,  Vir  nulld  arte  cuiquam  inferior.  Sail.  The  ablative  is  also 
found,  but  usually  inferior  is  followed  by  quam. 

Rem.  11.  Quam  pro  is  used  after  comparatives,  to  express  dispropor- 
tion ;  as,  Prcelium  atrocius  quam  pro  numero  pugnantium,  The  battle  was 
more  severe  than  was  to  be  expected,  considering  the  number  of  the  com- 
batants. Liv. 

Rem.  12.  When  two  different  qualities  of  the  same  object  are  compar- 
ed, both  the  adjectives  which  express  them  are  put  in  the  positive  degree 
with  magis  quam,  or  in  the  comparative  connected  by  quam  ;  as,  Perfee- 
tam  artem  juris  civilis  habebltis,  magis  magnam  atque  uberem,  quam  diffi- 
cllem  atque  obscuram.  Cic.  Triumphus  clarior  quam  gratior,  A  triumph 
more  famous  than  acceptable.  Liv. 

Rem.  13.  Magis  is  sometimes  expressed  with  a  comparative  ;  as,  Quis 
magis  queat  esse  beatior  ?  Virg. 

So  also  the  prepositions  pra,  ante,  prater,  and  supra,  are  sometimes  used 
with  a  comparative  j  as,  Unus  pr©  ceteris  fortior  ezsurgit.  Apul.  Scelgre 
ante  alios  immanior  omnes.  Virg.  They  also  occur  with  a  superlative ; 
as,  Ante  alios  carissimus.  Nep.  Yet  these  prepositions  denote  comparison 
with  a  positive,  and  therefore  seem  redundant  in  such  examples.  See 
§127. 

Rem.  14.  Alius  may  be  construed  like  comparatives,  and  is  sometimes, 
though  rarely,  followed  by  the  ablative ;  as,  Neve  putes  alium  sapiente 
bonoque  bedtum.  Hor. 

Rem.  15.  Ac  and  atque  are  sometimes  used  after  the  comparative  de- 
gree, like  qudm;  as,  Arctiiis  atque  hederd  procera  adstHngltur  ilex.  Hor. 

Rem.  16.  The  degree  of  difference  between  objects  com- 
pared is  expressed  by  the  ablative. 

(1.)  Absolute  difference  is  usually  denoted  by  nouns;  as,  Minor  uno 
mense,  Younger  by  one  month.  Hor.  Sesquipede  qudm  tu  longior.  Plaut. 
Hibernia  dimidio  minor  quam  Britannia.  Caes.  Dimidio  minoris  constdbit. 
Cic.  Qudm  molestum  est  uno  diglto  plus  habere  /....to  exceed  by  a  finger, 
to  have  six  fingers.  Cic.     Suplrat  capite  et  cervicibus  altis.  Virg. 

(2.)  Relative  difference  is  denoted  by  neuter  adjectives  of  quantity,  and 
pronouns,  in  the  singular  number.  Such  are  tanto,  quanto,  quo,  eo,  hoc, 
multo,  parvo,  paulo,  nimio,  aliquanio,  altiro  tanto  (twice  as  much) ;  as, 
Quanto  sumus  superiores,  tanto  nos  suhmissiiis  gerdmus ;  The  more  emi- 
nent we  are,  the  more  humbly  let  us  conduct  ourselves.  Cic.  Eo  gravior 
est  dolor,  quo  culpa  est  major.  Cic.  Quo  difficilius,  hoc  praclarius.  Id. 
Iter  multo  facilius.  Caes.  Parvo  brevius.  Plin.  Eo  magis-  Cic.  Eo 
minus.  Id.  Via  altero  tanto  longior.  Nep.  Multo  id  maximum  fuit.  Liv. 
Relative  difference  is  also  expressed  by  the  phrase  m^tis  partlbus;  as, 
NumZro  multis  partlbus  esset  inferior.  Csas.  / 

Note.    The  accusatives  tantum,  quantum,  and  aliquantum,  are  some- 
times used  instead  of  the  corresponding  ablatives ;  as,  Aliquantum  est  ad 
rem  avidior.  Ter.     So  the  adverb  longh  ;  as,  Longh.  nobilissHmus.  Cobs. 
19* 


222  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    ABSOLUTE. 


ABLATIVE   ABSOLUTE. 

§  257.  A  noun  and  a  participle  are  put  in  the  abla- 
tive, called  absolute,  to  denote  the  time,  cause,  or  concom- 
itant of  an  action,  or  the  condition  on  which  it  depends ; 
as, 

Pythagdras,  Tarquinio  Superbo  regnante,  in  ltaliam  venit ;  Tarquinius 
Superbus  reigning,  Pythagoras  came  into  Italy.  Cic.  Lupus,  stimulante 
fame,  capiat  ovlle;  Hunger  inciting,  the  wolf  seeks  the  fold.  Ovid.  Hac 
oratione  habita,  concilium  dimisit.  Ca>s.  Galli,  re  cognlta,  obsidionem 
relinquunt.  Id.     Virtute  excepta,  nihil  amicitid  prctstabilius putetis.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  This  construction  is  an  abridged  form  of  expression, 
equivalent  to  a  dependent  clause  introduced  by  cum,  or  some  other  con- 
junction. Thus,  for  Tarquinio  regnante,  the  expression  dum  Tarquinius 
regndbat  might  be  used ;  for  hac  oratione  habud,  cum  hanc  orationem  ha- 
huisset,  or  ciim  hac  oratio  habita  esset, — concilium  dimisit.  The  ablative 
absolute  may  always  be  resolved  into  a  proposition,  by  making  the  noun 
or  pronoun  the  subject,  and  the  participle  the  predicate. 

Rem.  2.  This  construction  is  common  only  with  present  and  perfect 
participles.  Instances  of  its  use  with  participles  in  rus  and  dus  are  com- 
paratively rare  ;  as,  Caesare  venturo,  Pltosphore,  redde  diem.  Mart.  Ir- 
rupturis  tarn  infestis  nationibus.  Liv.  Quis  est  cnim,  qui,  nullis  officii 
prseceptis  tradendis,  philosophum  se  audeat  dicerc.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  A  noun  is  put  in  the  ablative  absolute,  only  when 
it  denotes  a  different  person  or  thing  from  any  in  the  leading 
clause. 

Yet  a  few  examples  occur  of  a  deviation  from  this  principle  ;  a  substan- 
tive pronoun  being  sometimes  put  in  the  ablative  absolute,  though  refer- 
ring to  the  subject,  or  some  other  word  in  the  leading  clause  ;  as,  Se 
audiente,  scribit  Thucydides.  Cic.  Legio  ex  castris  Varronis,  adstante  ei 
inspectante  ipso,  signa  sustulit.  Cres.  Me  duce,  ad  hunc  votijinem,  me 
milite,  veni.  Ovid.     Lcetos  fecit,  se  consxAe,  fastos    Lucan. 

Rem.  4.  The  ablative  absolute  serves  to  mark  the  time  of  an  action,  by 
reference  to  that  of  another  action.  If  the  present  participle  is  used,  the 
time  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  principal  verb,  is  the  same  as  that  of 
the  participle.  If  the  perfect  is  used,  it  denotes  an  action  prior  to  that 
expressed  by  the  principal  verb. 

Thus  in  the  preceding  examples — Pythagoras,  Tarquinio  Superbo  reg- 
nante, in  ltaliam  venit ;  Pythagoras  came  into  Italy  during  the  reign  of 
Tarquinius  Superbus.  Galli,  re  cognltd,  obsidionem  relinquunt ;  The 
Gauls,  having  learned  the  fact,  abandon  the  siege. 

Rem.  &  The  construction  of  the  ablative  absolute  with  the  perfect 
passive  paruciple,  arises  frequently  from  the  want  of  a  participle  of  that 
tense  in  the  active  voice.  Thus,  for  "  Caesar,  having  sent  forward  the 
cavalry,  was  following  with  all  his  forces,"  we  find,  "  Cmsar,  equitatu 
pramiisso,  subsequeUatur  omnibus  copiis." 

As  the  perfect  participle  in  Latin  may  be  used  for  both  the  perfect  active 
and  perfect  passive  participles  in  English,  its  meaning  can,  in  many  in- 
stances, be  determined  only  by  the  connection,  the  agent  with  a  or  ah  not 
being  expressed  after  this  participle,  as  it  usually  is  after  the  passive  voice 


SYNTAX. CONNECTION    OF    TENSES.  223 

Thus,  Ccesar,  his  dictis,  concilium  dimlsit,  might  be  rendered,  "  Csesar, 
having  said  this,  or  this  having  been  said  (by  some  other  person),  dismissed 
the  assembly." 

As  the  perfect  participles  of  deponent  verbs  correspond  to  perfect 
active  participles  in  English,  no  such  necessity  exists  for  the  use  of  the 
ablative  absolute  with  them ;  as,  Ccesar,  hasc  locutus,  concilium  dimlsit. 

In  the  following  example,  both  constructions  are  united  :    ltdque agros 

Remorum  depopulati,  omnibus  vicis,  cedificiisque  incensis.  Cass. 

Rem.  6.  The  perfect  participles  of  neuter  deponent  verbs,  and  some 
also  of  active  deponents,  which  admit  of  both  an  active  and  passive  sense, 
are  used  in  the  ablative  absolute ;  as,  Ortd  luce.  Caes.  Vel  extincto  vel 
elapso  ammo,  nullum  residfre  sensum.  Cic.  Tarn  multis  gloriam  ejus 
adeptis.  Plin.     LitSras  ad  cxercltus,  tanquam  adepto  principatu,  misit.  Tac. 

Rem.  7.  As  the  verb  sum  has  no  present  participle,  two 
nouns,  or  a  noun  and  an  adjective,  which  might  be  the  subject 
and  predicate  of  a  dependent  clause,  are  put  in  the  ablative  ab- 
solute without  a  participle  ;  as, 

Quid,  adolescentulo  duce,  eficere  possent;  What  they  could  do,  a  youth 
(being)  their  leader.  Cses.  Me  suasore  atque  impulsore,  hoc  factum. 
Plaut.  Annibdlevivo.  Nep.  Invltd  Minervd.  Hor.  With  names  of  office, 
the  ablative  absolute  often  denotes  the  time  of  an  event ;  as,  Romam  venit 
Mario  consule,  He  came  to  Rome  in  the  consulship  of  Marius.  Cic. 

Rem.  8.  A  clause  sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  the  noun  ;  as,  Non- 
dum  comperto  quam  in  regionem  venisset  rex.  Liv.  Audlto  venisse  nun- 
cmm.  Tac.  Vale  dicto.  Ovid.  Haud  cuiquam  dubio  quin  hostium  essent. 
Liv.     Juxta  periculoso  vera  an  ficta  promeret.  Tac. 

Rem.  d.  The  noun  is,  in  some  instances,  wanting  ;  as,  In  amnis  trans- 
gressu,  multitm  certato,  Bardesanes  vicit.  Tac.  Dijficllis  mihi  ratio,  cut, 
errato,  nulla  venia,  recte  facto,  exigua  laus  proponltur.  Cic.  Sereno  per 
totum  diem.  Liv. 

This  use  of  certato  and  errato  corresponds  to  the  impersonal  construc- 
tion of  the  passive  voice  of  neuter  verbs,  while  facto  and  sereno  may  be 
referred  to  some  general  word  understood. 

Rem.  10.  The  ablative  is  sometimes  connected  to  the  preceding  clause 
by  a  conjunction  ;  as,  Ccesar,  quanquam  obsidione  Massilim  retardante, 
brevi  tamen  omnia  subegit.  Suet.  Decemviri  non  ante,  quam  perlatis  legl- 
bus,  deposituros  imperium  esse  aicbant.  Liv. 


CONNECTION    OF   TENSES. 

§  258.  Tenses  may  be  divided,  in  regard  to  their  con- 
nection, into  two  classes.  Those  which  belong  to  the  same 
class  are  called  similar ;  those  which  belong  to  different  classes 
are  called  dissimilar. 

Of  the  first  class  are  the  present,  the  perfect  definite,  and  the  futures, 
with  the  periphrastic  forms  in  aim  and  fu&rim.  Of  the  second  class  are 
the  imperfect,  the  perfect  indefinite,  and  the  pluperfect,  with  the  periphrastic 
forms  in  essem  and  fuissem. 

I.  Similar  tenses  only  can,  in  general,  be  made  to  depend  on 


224  SYNTAX. CONNECTION    OF    TENSES. 

each  other,  by  means  of  those  connectives  which  are  followed 
by  the  subjunctive  mood. 

1.  In  clauses  thus  connected,  the  present,  perfect,  and  the 
periphrastic  forms  with  sim  and  fuerim,  may  depend  on, 

(1.)  The  Present  ;  as,  Non  sum  ita  hebes,  ut  istuc  dicam.  Cic.  Quan- 
tum doldrem  acceperim,  tu  existimdre  potes.  Id.  Nee  dubito  quin  redttus 
ejus  reipubllcte  salutdris  futurus  sit.  Id. 

(2.)  The  Perfect  Definite  ;  as,  Satis  provlsum  est,  ut  r.e.  quid  agere 
possint.  Id.  Quis  musicis,  quis  huic  studio  literdrum  se  dedidit,  quia  om- 
nem  illdrum  artium  vim  comprehenderit.  Id.  Defectiones  solis  preedicta) 
sunt,  qua,  quanta,  quando  futures  sint.  Id. 

(3.)  The  Futures  ;  as,  Sic  facilUmk,  quanta  oratdrum  sit,  semper  que 
fuerit  paucltas,  judicabit.  Id.  Ad  quos  dies  rediturus  sim,  scribam  ad  te 
Id.  Si  scieris  aspldem  latere  uspium,  et  velle  allquem  super  earn  assidere, 
cujus  mors  tibi  emolumentum  factura  sit,  imprftbb  feceris,  nisi  monuens,  ne 
assideat.  Id. 

2.  So  the  imperfect,  pluperfect,  and  periphrastic  forms  with 
essem  and  fuissem,  may  depend  on, 

(I.)  The  Imperfect  ;  as,  Unum  illud  extimescebam,  nc  quid  turytter 
facerem,  vel  jam  effecissem.  Cic.  Non  enim  dubitabam,  quin  eas  lib  enter 
lecturus  esses.  Id. 

(2.)  The  Perfect  Indefinite  ;  as,  Veni  in  ejus  villam  ut  libros  inde 
promerem.  Id.  Hac  cum  essent  nuntiata,  Valeriis  d&ssem  extemplo  ad 
ostium  flumlnis  duxit.  Liv.  Ne  Clodius  qvidem  de  insidiis  cogitavit, 
siquidem  exiturus  ad  ccedem  e  villd  non  fuisset.  Cic. 

(3.)  The  Pluperfect;  as,  Pavor  cepgrat  milUes,  ne  mortiftrum  esset 
vulnus.  Liv.  Ego  ex  ipso  audieram,  quam  a  te  liber aUter  esset  tractatus. 
Cic.  Non  satis  mihi  constiterat,  cum  aliqudne  anlmi  mei  molestid,  an 
potius  libenter  te  Mkenis  visurus  essem.  Id. 

Remark  1.  When  the  present  is  used  in  narration  for  the  perfect  in- 
definite, it  may,  like  the  latter,  be  followed  by  the  imperfect;  as,  Legdtos 
mittunt,  ut  pacem  impetrarent.  Cees. 

Rem.  2.  The  perfect  definite  is  often  followed  by  the  imperfect,  even 
when  a  present  action  or  state  is  spoken  of,  if  it  is  not  confined  to  the 
present ;  as,  Sunt  philosophi  et  fuerunt,  qui  omnlno  nultam  habere  cense- 
rent  humandrum  rerum  procurationem  Deos.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  perfect  indefinite  is  not  regularly  followed  by  the  perfect 
subjunctive,  as  the  latter  is  not,  in  general,  used  in  reference  to  past  action 
indefinite.     See  §  260,  I.  Rem.  I. 

These  tenses  are,  however,  sometimes  used  in  connection,  in  the  narra- 
tive of  a  past  event,  especially  in  Livy  and  Cornelius  Nepos  ;  as,  In 
JEquis  varie  bellatum  est,  adeo  ut  in  inccrto  fuerit,  vicissent,  victine  essent. 
Liv.     Factum  est,  ut  plus  quam  collega  Miltiddes  valuerit.  Nep. 

The  imperfect  and  perfect  are  even  found  together  after  the  perfect  in- 
definite, when  one  action  is  represented  as  permanent  or  repeated,  and 
the  other  simply  as  a  fact ;  as,  Adeo  nihil  miserlti  sunt,  ut  incur siones  fa- 
cerent  et  Veios  in  animo  habuerint  oppugndre.  Liv. 

Rem.  4.  As  present  infinitives  and  present  participles  depend  for  their 
time  upon  the  verbs  with  which  they  are  connected,  they  are  followed  by 
such  tenses  as  those  verbs  may  require  ;  as,  Jlpelles  pictorcs  quoque  eos 
peccare  dicebat,  qui  non  sentlrent,  quid  esset  satis.  Cic.  Jld  te  scripsi,  te 
levlter  accusans  in  eo,  quod  de  me  citd  credidisses.  Id. 


SYNTAX. INDICATIVE    MOOD.  225 

Rem.  5.  The  perfect  infinitive  follows  the  general  rule,  and  takes 
after  it  a  tense  of  present  or  past  time,  according  as  it  is  used  in  a  definite 
or  indefinite  sense  ;  as,  Arbitrdmur  nos  ea  praestitisse,  qua  ratio  et  doctrwa 
praascripserit.  Cic.  Est  quod  gaudeas  te  in  ista  loca  venisse,  ubi  atlquid 
aapcrc  viderere.  Id. 

But  it  may  sometimes  take  a  different  tense,  according  to  Rem.  2 ;  as, 
ha  mihi  videor  et  esse  Deos,  et  quales  essent  satis  ostendisse.  Cic. 

II.  Dissimilar  tenses  may  be  made  dependent  on  each  other, 
in  order  to  express  actions  whose  time  is  different. 

Hence,  the  present  may  be  followed  by  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect,  to 
express  a  contingency  dependent  upon  some  condition  not  actually  exist- 
ing ;  as,  Nemo  dubitdre  debet,  quin  multos,  si  fieri  posset,  Casar  ab  ivjeris 
excitaret.  Cic.  So  the  perfect  indefinite  may  be  followed  by  the  present, 
to  express  the  present  result  of  a  past  event ;  as,  Tanti  soriltus  fuerunt,  ut 
ego  brevior  sim,  qudd  eos  usqtte  istinc  exaudltos  putem.  Cic. 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

<§>  259.  The  indicative  mood  is  used  in  independent  and 
absolute  assertions.  It  is  often  employed,  also,  in  conditional 
and  dependent  clauses,  to  denote  that  which  is  supposed  or  ad- 
mitted ;  as,  Si  vales,  bene  est.  Cic.  It  may  likewise  be  used 
in  interrogations  ;  as,  Quid  agis,  ecquid  commode  vales  ?  Plin. 

Remark  1.     The  several  tenses  have  already  been  defined,  and  their 
usual  significations  have  been  given  in  the  paradigms.     They  are,  how- 
ever, sometimes  otherwise  rendered,  one  tense  being  used  with  the  mean 
ing  of  another,  either  in  the  same  or  in  a  different  mood.     Thus, 

(1.)  The  present  is  sometimes  used  for  the  future  ;  as,  Quam  mox  nav- 
Igo  Ephlsum  ?  How  soon  do  I  sail  for  Ephesus  ?  Plaut. 

(2.)  The  perfect  for  the  pluperfect ;  as,  Sed  postquam  aspexi,  illico  cog- 
novi,  But  after  I  (had)  looked  at  it,  1  recognized  it  immediately.  Ter. 

This  is  the  usual  construction  after  postquam,  ubi,  ut,  ut  primum, 
ut  semel,  quum  primum,  simul  ac,  and  simul  atque,  in  the  sense  of  when, 
as  soon  as,  in  direct  narration. 

(3.)  The  pluperfect  for  the  perfect ;  as,  Dixerat,  et  spissis  noctis  se  con- 
didit  umbris,  She  (had)  said,  and  hid  herself  in  the  thick  shades  of  night. 
Virg. 

(4.)  The  future  for  the  imperative  mood ;  as,  Valebis,  Farewell.  Cic. 

(5.)  The  future  perfect  for  the  future  ;  as,  Alio  loco  de  oratorum  anlmo 
et  injuriis  vidgro,  I  shall  see  (have  seen)....  Cic.  This  use  seems  to  result 
from  viewing  a  future  action  as  if  already  completed. 

Rem.  2.  When  a  future  action  is  spoken  of  either  in  the  future,  or  in 
the  imperative,  or  the  subjunctive  used  imperatively,  and  another  future 
action  is  connected  with  it,  the  latter  is  expressed  by  the  future  tense,  if 
the  actions  relate  to  the  same  time,  but  by  the  future  perfect,  if  the  one 
must  be  completed  before  the  other  is  performed.  This  verb  in  English 
is  usually  put  in  the  present  tense  ;  as,  Faciam  si  potero ;  I  will  do  it,  if  J 
can,  i.  e.  if  I  shall  be  able.      So,  Ut  semenlem  feceris,  ita  metes.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.     In  expressions  denoting  the  propriety,  practicability,  or  ad- 


226  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

vantage  of  an  action  not  performed,  the  indicative  is  used,  while  in 
English  the  potential,  in  such  cases,  is  more  common  ;  as,  Possum  persl- 
qui  multa  oblectamenta  rerum  rusticdrum,  sed  &c.,  I  might  speak  of  the 
numerous  pleasures  of  husbandry,  but  &c.  Cic.  ^quius  kuic  Turnum 
fuerat  se  opponire  morti.  Virg.  This  construction  occurs  with  dcbeo, 
possum,  decet,  licet,  oportet,  necesse  est ;  aquum,  consentaneum,  longum, 
melius,  optimum,  par,  satis,  satius — est,  erat,  &c. ;  and  in  the  periphrastic 
conjugation  with  participles  in  dus. 

Rem.  4.  The  past  tenses  of  the  indicative  are  often  used  for  the  im- 
perfect or  pluperfect  subjunctive,  in  the  conclusion  of  a  conditional  clause  ; 
as,  Si  non  alium  longe  jactdret  odorem,  laurus  erat,. ...it  would  have  been  a 
laurel.  Virg.  Nee  veni,  nisi  fata  locum  sedemque  dedissent.  Id.  Pons 
sublicius  iter  pane  hosllbus  dedit,  ni  unus  virfuisset  Horatius  Codes.  Liv. 
Si  mens  non  larva  fuisset,  impulSrat.  Virg.  Sometimes  also  in  the  con- 
dition ;  as,  AtfuSrat  melius,  si  te  puer  iste  tenebat.  Ovid.     See  §  261. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

<§>  260.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  to  express  an  action 
or  state  simply^as  conceived  by  the  mind. 

It  takes  its  name  from  its  being  commonly  used  in  subjoined  or  depend- 
ent clauses.  In  some  cases,  however,  it  is  found  in  independent  clauses, 
or  at  least  in  such  as  have  no  obvious  dependence. 

I.  The  subjunctive  often  implies  the  existence  of  an  action 
or  state,  without  directly  asserting  it.  When  this  is  the  case, 
its  tenses  are  commonly  to  be  translated  in  the  same  manner  as 
the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indicative  ;  as, 

Cum  esset  Caisar  in  Gallid,  When  Cresar  was  in  Gaul,  not  might  be. 
Coes.     Rogas  me  quid  tristis  ego  sim....why  1  am  sad.  Tac. 

Remark  1.  In  this  sense,  its  tenses  have,  in  general,  the  same  limita- 
tion in  respect  to  time  as  those  of  the  indicative,  but  the  imperfect  is  com 
monly  used  rather  than  the  perfect,  to  denote  indefinite  past  action  ;  as, 
Quo  factum  est,  ut  brevi  tempdre  illustraretur ;  By  which  it  happened  that, 
in  a  short  time,  he  became  famous.  Nep. 

Rem.  2.  The  subjunctive,  in  such  cases,  depends  upon  the  particles 
and  other  words  to  which  it  is  subjoined,  and  its  meaning  must  be  care- 
fully distinguished  from  that  which  is  stated  in  the  following  rule. 

II.  The  subjunctive  is  used  to  express  what  is  contingent  or 
hypothetical,  including  possibility,  power,  liberty,  will,  duty, 
and  desire.  In  this  use,  it  does  not  imply  the  existence  of  the 
action  or  state  which  the  verb  expresses. 

Remark  1.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  thus  used,  have  the  signifi- 
cations which  have  been  given  in  the  paradigms,  and  are,  in  general,  not 
limited,  in  regard  to  time,  like  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indicative. 
Thus, 

(1.)  The  present,  in  this  sense,  may  refer  either  to  present  or  future 
time  ;  as,  Mediocrlbus  et  quis  ignoscas  vitiis  tcneor  ;  1  am  subject  to  mode- 
rate faults,  and  such  as  you  may  excuse.  Hor.  Orat  a  Ccesare  ut  det  sibi 
veniam,  He  begs  of  Caesar  that  he  would  give  him  leave.  Caes. 

(2.)  The  imperfect  may  relate  either  to  past,  present,  or  future  time,  as, 


SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  227 

Si  fata  fui?  sent  ut  cadSrem,  If  it  had  been  my  fate  that  1  should  fall.  Virg. 
Si  possem,  sanior  essem ;  If  I  could,  I  would  be  wiser.  Ovid.  Cetiros 
raperem  et  prosternerem,  The  rest  I  would  seize  and  prostrate.  Ter. 

(3.)  The  perfect  relates  either  to  past  or  future  time  ;  as,  Errarim  for- 
tasse,  Perhaps  I  may  have  erred.  Plin.  Videor  spcrdre  posse,  si  te  viderim, 
eafacilh  (me)  transiturum....  if  I  can  see  you....  Cic. 

(4.)  The  pluperfect  relates  to  past  time,  expressing  a  contingency, 
which  is  usually  future  with  respect  to  some  past  time  mentioned  in  con- 
nection with  it ;  as,  Id  responderunt  se  facturos  esse,  ciun  Me  vento  Jlqui* 
Lone  venisset  Lemnum....  when  he  should  have  come....  Nep. 

Rem.  2.  The  imperfect  subjunctive,  in  Latin,  is  sometimes  employed, 
where,  in  English,  the  pluperfect  would  be  used  ;  as,  Quod  si  quis  deus  di- 
cgret,  nunquam  putarem  me  in  academid  tanquam  philosdphum  disputatU- 
rum,  If  any  god  had  said. ...I  never  should  have  supposed....  Cic. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  pluperfect  in  Latin  is  sometimes  used,  where  the 
imperfect  is  commonly  employed  in  English  ;  as,  Promlsit  se  scripturum, 
quum  primiim  nuntium  accepisset....  as  soon  as  he  (should  have)  received 
the  news. 

Rem.  3.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  may  be  used  to  denote 
a  supposition  ;  as,  Vendat  cedes  vir  bonus,  Suppose  an  honest  man  is  sell- 
ing a  house.  Cic.     Dixerit  Epicurus,  Grant  that  Epicurus  has  said.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are. used  to  soften  an 
assertion ;  as,  Nemo  istud  tibi  concedat,  or  concesserit ;  No  one  would 
grant  you  that.  Volo  and  its  compounds  are  often  so  used  in  the  present ; 
as,  Velim  obvias  mihi  literas  crebrd  mittas,  I  could  wish  that  you  would 
frequently  send  letters  to  meet  me.  Cic.  The  perfect,  used  in  this  sense, 
has  often  the  force*>f  the  present ;  as,  Quis  enim  hoc  tibi  concesserit  ?  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  The  present  and  perfect  tenses  are  also  used  in  questions 
which  imply  a  doubt  respecting  the  probability  or  propriety  of  an  ac- 
tion ;  as,  Quis  dubitet  quin  in  virtute  divitia;  sint  ?  Who  can  doubt  that 
riches  consist  in  virtue  ?  Cic.  Quisquam  numen  Junonis  adoret  prceterea  ? 
Who  will  henceforth  adore  the  divinity  of  Juno  ?  Virg.  Quidni,  inquit 
meminerim?  Cic. 

Rem.  6.  The  present  subjunctive  is  often  used  to  express  a 
wish,  an  exhortation,  a  request,  a  command,  or  a  permission  ; 
as, 

JVe  sim  salvus,  May  I  perish.  Cic.  In  media  arma  ruamus,  Let  us  rush... 
Virg.  JVe  me  attingas,  sceleste ;  Do  not  touch  me....  Ter.  Faciat  quod 
lubct,  Let  him  do  what  he  pleases.  Id.  The  perfect  is  often  so  used,  and 
sometimes  the  pluperfect ;  as,  Ipse  viderit,  Let  him  see  to  it  himself.  Cic. 
Fuisset,  Be  it  so,  or  It  might  have  been  so.  Virg.  Vidgrint  sapientcs. 
Cic. 

JVe  is  commonly  employed  as  a  negative,  rather  than  non,  in  this  use 
of  the  subjunctive. 

Rem.  7.  In  the  regular  paradigms  of  the  verb,  no  future  subjunctive 
was  exhibited  either  in  the  active  or  passive  voice. 

(1.)  When  the  expression  of  futurity  is  contained  in  another  part  of  the 
sentence,  the  future  of  the  subjunctive  is  supplied  by  some  other  tense  of 
that  mood ;  as,  Tantum  moneo  hoc  tempus  si  amisSris,  te  esse  nullum  un. 
quam  magis  idoneum  reperturum ;  I  only  warn  you,  that,  if  you  should 
lose  this  opportunity,  you  will  never  find  one  more  convenient.  Cic. 


228         SYNTAX. PROTASIS  AND  APODOSIS 

(2.)  If  no  other  future  is  contained  in  the  sentence,  the  place  of  the 
future  subjunctive  active  is  supplied  by  the  participle  in  rus,  with  sim  or 
fuSrim,  cssem  or  fuiss em  ;  as,  JVon  dubltat  quin  brevl  Troja  sit  peritura,He 
does  not  doubt  that  Troy  would  soon  be  destroyed.  Cic.  See  Periphrastic 
Conjugations,  §  162,  14. 

(3.)  The  future  subjunctive  passive  is  supplied,  not  by  the  participle  in 
dus,  but  by  futurum  sit  or  esset,  with  ut ;  as,  JVon  dublto  quin  futurum 
sit,  ut  laudetur  ;  I  do  not  doubt  that  he  will  be  praised. 

Rem.  8.  The  imperfect,  when  relating  to  past  or  present 
time,  and  also  the  pluperfect,  both  when  they  stand  alone,  and 
in  conditional  clauses  with  si,  &c,  as  also  after  utinam  and 
O  !  si,  imply  the  non-existence  of  the  action  or  state  denoted  by 
the  verb ;  the  present  and  perfect  do  not  decide  in  regard  to 
its  existence ;   as, 

Nollem  datum  esse,  1  could  wish  it  had  not  been  paid.  Ter.  Nolim 
datum  esse,  I  hope  it  has  not  been  paid.  Utinam  jam  adesset,  I  wish 
he  were  now  present.  Cic.  Utinam  ea  res  ei  voluptdti  sit,  I  hope  that 
thing  is  a  pleasure  to  him.  Id. 


PROTASIS    AND    APODOSIS. 

<§>  26 1 .  In  a  sentence  containing  a  condition  and  a  con- 
clusion, the  former  is  called  the  protasis,  the  latter  the  apodosis. 

1.  In  conditional  clauses  with  si,  ni,  nisi,  quasi,  etsi,tametsi, 
and  ctiamsi,  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  are  used 
in  the  protasis,  when  the  action  or  state  supposed  does  not  or 
did  not  exist.  The  same  tenses  are  used  in  the  apodosis,  to 
denote  that,  if  the  action  or  state  expressed  in  the  protasis  did 
exist,  or  had  existed  (the  contrary  of  which  is  implied),  another 
action  or  state  would  exist  or  would  have  existed  ;  as, 

Nisi  te  satis  incitdtum  esse  confiderem,  scriberem  plura;  Did  1  not 
believe  that  you  had  been  sufficiently  incited,  I  would  write  more  (Cic.)  ; 
which  implies  that  he  does  believe,  and  therefore  will  not  write.  Ea  si  de 
me  uno  cogitasset,  nunquam  illius  lacrpmis  ac  prccibus  restitissem.  Id. 

2.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  used  in  the 
protasis,  when  the  action  or  state  supposed  may,  or  may  not 
exist,  or  have  existed  ;  as, 

Omnia  brevia  tolerabilia  esse  debent,  etiamsi  maxima  sint, although 

they  may  be  very  great.  Cic.     Etsi  id  fugerit  Isocrdtes,  at  non  Thucydi- 
des  ;  Although  Isocrates  may  have  avoided  that Id. 

Remark  1.  The  tenses  of  the  indicative  may  also  be  used  in  the 
yrotasis  of  a  conditional  sentence  with  si,  &c. ;  as,  Si  vales,  bene  est.  Cic. 
Si  quis  antea  mirabatur  quid  esset,  ex  hoc  tempore  miretur  potius....  Id. 

Rem.  2.  The  subjunctive  after  si,  &c.,  implies  a  greater  degree  of  con- 
tingency than  the  indicative.  When  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  is 
required  to  denote  a  past  action,  the  indicative  must  be  used,  if  its  exist 


SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES.  22$ 

ence  is  uncertain,  as  those  tenses  in  the  subjunctive  would  imply  its  non* 
existence. 

Rem.  3.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  sometimes  used,  both 
in  the  protasis  and  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence,  in  the  sense  of  the 
imperfect  and  pluperfect ;  as,  Tu,  si  hie  sis,  aliter  sentias ;  If  you  were 
here,  you  would  think  otherwise.  Ter.  Quos,  ni  mea  cura  resistat,  jam 
fiammce  tuUrint.  Virg. 

Rem.  4.  The  protasis  of  a  conditional  sentence  is  frequently  not 
expressed,  but  implied ;  as,  Magno  mercentur  Atrldoe,  i.  e.  si  possint 
Virg. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES. 

<§>  262.  A  clause  denoting  the  purpose,  object,  or 
result  of  a  preceding  proposition,  takes  the  subjunctive 
after  ut,  ne,  quo,  quin,  and  quominus ;  as, 

Ea  non,  ut  te  institugrem,  scrip  si ;  I  did  not  write  that  in  order  to 
instruct  you.  Cic.  Irritant  ad  pugnandum,  qu6  fiant  acriores ;  They 
stimulate  them  to  fight,  that  they  may  become  fiercer.  Varr. 

Remark  1.  Ut,  denoting  a  result,  often  relates  to  sic,  ita, 
adeo, tarn, talis, tantus, is  ,cjusmodi,  &c,  in  the  preceding  clause; 
as, 

Id  mihi  sic  erit  gratum,  ut  gratius  esse  nihil  possit ;  That  will  be  so 
agreeable  to  me,  that  nothing  can  be  more  so.  Cic.  Non  sum  ita  hebes, 
ut  istuc  dicam.  Id.  Neque  tarn  eramus  amentes,  ut  ezplordta  nobis  esset 
victoria.  Id.  Tantum  indulsit  dolori,  ut  turn  piUas  vinciret.  Nep.  Ita 
and  tarn  are  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Epaminondas  fuit  disertus,  ut  nemo 
ei  par  esset.  Id. 

Rem.  2.  Ut,  signifying  although,  takes  the  subjunctive ; 
as, 

Ut  desint  vires,  tamen  est  lavdanda  voluntas;  Though  strength  be 
wanting,  yet  the  will  is  to  be  praised.  Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  Ut,  with  the  subjunctive,  is  used  with  impersonal 
verbs  signifying  it  happens,  it  remains,  it  follows,  &c.  ;  as, 

Qui  fit,  ut  nemo  contentus  vivat  ?  How  does  it  happen  that  nc  one  lives 
contented  ?  Hor.  Huic  contigit,  ut  patriam  ex  servitute  in  libertdtem  vin- 
dicaret.  Nep.  Sequitur  igltur,  ut  etiam  vitia  sint  parca.  Cic.  Reliquum 
est,  ut  egdmct  mihi  consulam.  Nep.  Restat  igltur,  ut  motus  astrorum  sit 
voluntarius.  Cic.     Extremum  illud  est,  ut  te  orem  et  obsecrem.   Id. 

To  this  principle  may  be  referred  the  following  verbs  and  phrases  : — 
fit,  fiSri  non  potest,  accldit,  incldit,  occurrit,  contingit,  ev&nit,  usu  venit, 
rarum  est,  sequitur,  futurum  est,  reliquum  est,  relinquitur,  restat,  supSrest, 
caput  est,  extremum  est,  opus  est,  est. 

For  other  uses  of  ut,  with  the  subjunctive,  see  §  273. 

Rem.  4.      Ut  is  often  omitted  before  the  subjunctive,  after 
verbs  denoting  willingness,  unwillingness,  or  permission;  also 
after  verbs  of  asking,  advising,  reminding,  &c,  and  the  im- 
peratives die  andfac ;  as, 
20 


230  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES. 

Quid  visfaciam  ?  What  do  you  wish  (that)  I  should  do  ?  Ter.  Insdni 
feriant  sine  litora  fiuctus.  Virg.  Tentes  dissimuldre  rogat.  Ovid.  Id 
sinas  oro.  Id.  Se  suadere,  dixit,  Pharnabdzo  id  negotii  daret.  Nep. 
Acccdat  oportet  actio  varia.  Cic.     Fac  cogltes.  Id. 

Verbs  of  willingness,  &c.,  are  volo,  nolo,  malo,  pcrmitto,  potior,  sino, 
licet,  veto,  &c. ;  those  of  asking,  &c.,  are  rogo,  oro,  moneo,  jubeo,  man- 
do,  peto,  precor,  censeo,  suadco,  oportet,  neccsse  est,  &c. 

Rem.  5.     Ne  (lest)  expresses  a  purpose  negatively ;  as, 
Cura  ne  quid  ei  desit,  Take  care  that  nothing  be  wanting  to  him.  Cic. 
Ut  ne  are  frequently  used  for  ne;  as,  Optra  detur,  utjudicia  ne  fiant.  Id. 

Rem.  6.     Ne  is  often  omitted  after  cave ;  as, 

Cave  putes,  Take  care  that  you  do  not  suppose.  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  After  mctuo,  timeo,  vereor,  and  other  expressions 
denoting  fear,  ne  must  be  rendered  by  that  or  lest,  and  ut  by 
that  not ;  as, 

Milo  mctuebat,  ne  a  scrvis  indicaretur,  Milo  feared  that  he  should  be  be- 
trayed by  his  servants.  Cic.  Pavor  erat,  ne  castra  hostis  aggrederetur. 
Liv.  Ilia  duo  vereor,  ut  tibi  possim  conccdere,  I  fear  that  I  cannot  grant.... 
Cic. 

Rem.  8.     The  proposition  on  which  the  subjunctive  with  ut  and  ne  de- 

£ends,  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Ut  ita  dicam.  Cic.    JVc  singulos  nomlncm 
<iv. 

Rem.  9.  Quo  (that,  in  order  that),  especially  with  a  compar- 
ative ;  non  quo,  or  non  quod  (not  that,  not  as  if),  followed  by 
sed;  and  quominus  (that  not),  after  clauses  denoting  hindrance, 
take  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Adjuta  me,  quo  id  fiat  facilius ;  Aid  me,  that  that  may  be  done  more 
easily.  Tea".  Non  qu6  republlcd  sit  mihi  quicquam  carius,  sed  desperdtis 
etiam  Hippocrates  vetat  adhibere  medicinam.  Cic.  Non  quod  sola  ornent, 
sed  quod  excellant.  Id.  Neque  recusdvit,  quo  minus  legis  pcenam  sublret. 
Nep. 

Rem.  10.  Quin,  after  negative  propositions  and  questions 
implying  a  negative,  takes  the  subjunctive.      Quin  is  used, 

1.  For  a  relative  with  non,  after  nemo,  nullus,  nihil... .est,  reperltur, 
invenltur,&c. ;  viz  est,  ozgrh  reperltur,  &c. ;  as,  Messdnam  ncmovenit,  quin 
viderit,  i.  e.  qui  non  viderit;  No  one  came  to  Messana  who  did  not  see. 
Cic.  Nego  ullam  picturam  fuisse.... quin  conquisierit,  i.  e.  quam  non,  &c. 
Id.     Nihil  est,  quin  male  narrando  possit  depravdri.  Ter. 

2.  For  ut  non,  after  non  dublto,  non  est  dubium,  facere  non  possum,  fieri 
non  potest;  nihil,  haud  multum,  haud  procul,  or  minimum... abest ;  nihil 
prcetermitto,  non  recuso,  temperdre  mihi  non  possum,  viz,  02gre,  &c. ;  as, 

Facere  non  possum  quin  ad  te  mittam,  i.  e.  ut  non,  &c  Cic.  Ego  nihil 
preetermisi,  quin  Pompeium  a  Casdris  conjunctione  avocarem.  Id.  Pror- 
sus  nihil  abest  quin  sim  miserrimus.  Id.  Quis  igltur  dubltet  quin  in  vir- 
tute  divitice  posltae  sint  ?  Id.     Ego  viz  teneor  quin  accurram.  Id. 

§  263.  1.  The  subjunctive  is  used  after  particles  of  wish- 
ing, as  utlnam,  uti,  and  O  !  si  ;  as, 

Utlnam  minus  vita  cupldi  fuissemus  !  O  that  we  had  been  less  attached 


SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES.  231 

to  life  !  Cic.     0  si  sollta  quicquam  virtutis  adesset !  Virg.     The  tense  is 
determined  by  §  200,  II.  Rem.  8. 

2.  Quamvis,  however  ;  licet,  although  ;  tanquam,  quasi,  ac  si, 
ut  si,  velut  si,  vcluti,  and  ceu,  as  if;  modd,  dum,  and  dummodo, 
provided, — take  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Quamvis  i'le  felix  sit,  However  happy  he  may  be.  Cic.  Veritas  licet 
nullum  defensorem  obtineat,  Though  truth  should  obtain  no  defender.  Id. 
Me  omnibus  rebus,  juxta  ac  si  meus  frater  esset,  sustentdvit ;  He  supported 
me  in  every  thing,  just  as  though  he  were  my  brother.  Id.  Omnia  honesta 
negligunt  dummodo  potentiam  consequantur ;  They  disregard  every  hon- 
orable principle,  provided  they  can  obtain  power.  Id.  Dum  mihi  ani- 
mum  reddas.  Hor. 

Quamvis  (although)  has  commonly  the  subjunctive  ;  as,  Quamvis  non 
fueris  suasor,  approbdtor  certt  fuisti.  Cic.  Sometimes  also  the  indicative  ; 
as,  Felicem  Nidben,  quamvis  tutfunira  vidit.  Ovid. 

Quanquam  (although),  in  Tacitus,  and  in  other  later  writers,  is  sometimes 
used  with  the  subjunctive. 

3.  After  antequam  and  priusquam,  the  imperfect  and  pluper- 
fect tenses  are  usually  in  the  subjunctive  ;  the  present  and  per- 
fect may  be  either  in  the  indicative  or  subjunctive  ;  but  when 
one  thing  is  declared  to  be  necessary  or  proper  to  precede  an- 
other, the  subjunctive  is  used  ;  as, 

Ea  causa  ante  mortua  est,  quam  tu  natus  esses,  That  cause  was  dead  be- 
fore you  were  born.  Cic.  Avertit  equos,  priusquam  pabula  gustassent  Trojce, 
Xanthumque  bibissent.  Virg.  Priusquam  incipias,  consulto  opus  est ;  Be- 
fore you  begin,  there  is  need  of  counsel.  Sail. 

4.  Dum,  donee,  and  quoad,  signifying  until,  are  followed  by 
the  subjunctive,  if  they  refer  to  the  attainment  of  an  object ;  as, 

Dum  hie  venlret,  locum  relinquere  noluit ;  He  was  unwilling  to  leave 
the  place  until  he  (Milo)  should  come.  Cic.  Nihil  puto  tibi  esse  utilius, 
quam  operxri  quoad  scire  possis,  quid  tibi  agendum  sit.  Id. 

5.  Quum  or  cum,  when  it  signifies  a  relation  of  time, 
takes  the  indicative;  when  it  denotes  a  connection  of 
thought,  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Cum  est  allatum  ad  nos,  graviter  commdtus  sum  ;  When  it  was  reported 
to  us,  I  was  greatly  moved.  Cic.  Cum  tot  sustineas  et  tanta  negotia,  pec- 
cem,  si  morer  tua  tempdra,  Ccesar  ;  Since  you  are  burdened  with  so  many 
and  so  important  affairs,  I  should  do  wrong,  if  I  should  occupy  your  time, 
Cffisar.  Hor. 

Remark  1.  Cum,  relating  to  time,  is  commonly  translated  when; 
referring  to  a  train  of  thought,  it  signifies  since  or  although.  It  is  some- 
times used  as  equivalent  to  qudd  (because),  and  then  takes  the  indicative ; 
as,  Cum  te  semper  dilexi,  necesse  est  ut  sim  totus  vester.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  In  narration,  cumis  usually  joined  with  the  imper- 
fect and  pluperfect  subjunctive,  even  when  it  relates  to  time  ; 
as, 

Gracchus,  cum  rem  Warn  in  rcligionem  populo  venisse  sentlret,  ad  send- 
turn  retulit.  Cic.  Alexander,  cum  interemisset  Clitum,  vix  manus  a  se  ab- 
stinuit.  Id. 


232        SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  QUI. 

In  most  instances  of  this  construction,  the  event  denoted  by  the  sub- 
junctive seems  to  relate  to  that  expressed  in  the  clause  on  which  the 
subjunctive  depends,  not  only  in  regard  to  time,  but  also  as,  in  some 
sense,  a  cause.  In  general,  when  the  attention  is  directed  chiefly  to  the 
time  at  which  an  action  occurred,  the  indicative  in  any  tense  may  be  used; 
when  to  the  action  itself,  the  subjunctive  ;  as,  Hcec  cum  scribebam  jam  turn 
existimdbam  ad  te  orationem  esse  perldtam.  Cic.  Cum  sciret  Clodius  iter 
neccssarium  Miloni  esse  Lanuvium,  Romd  subito  ipse  prqfectus  est.  Id. 

For  the  subjunctive  after  si  and  its  compounds,  see   §  261. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    QUI. 

<§>  2G4.  1 .  When  the  relative  qui  follows  tarn,  adeo, 
tantus,  talis, — or  is,  Me,  or  hie,  in  the  sense  of  talis, — and  is 
equivalent  to  ut  with  a  personal  or  demonstrative  pro- 
noun, it  takes  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Quis  est  tarn  Lynceus  qui  in  tantis  tenebris  nihil  offendat?  i.  e.  ut  in  tan- 
tis....;  Who  is  so  quick-sighted,  that  he  would  not  stumble  in  such  dark- 
ness. Cic.  Talent  te  esse  oportet,  qui  ab  impiorum  civium  societdte  sejun- 
gas.  Id.  Jit  eafuit  legatio  Octavii,  in  qua  periculi  suspicio  nun  subesset, 
l.  e.  ut  in  ed.  Id.  Nee  tamen  ego  sum  ille  ferreus,  qui  fratris  carisslmi 
marore  nun  movear,  i.  e.  ut  ego  non  movear.  Id. 

Sometimes  the  demonstrative  word  is  only  implied ;  as, 

Res  parva  dictu,  sed  quae  studiis  in  magnum  certdmen  excesserit,  i.  e. 
talis  ut....of  such  a  kind  that  it  issued  in  a  violent  contest.  Cic.  So  quis 
sum,  for  num  talis  sum;  as,  Quia  sum,  cujus  aures  ladi  nefas  sit  ?  Sen. 

2.  When  the  relative  is  equivalent  to  quanquam  is,  etsi 
is,  or  dummodo  is,  it  takes  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Laco,  consilii  quamvis  egregii,  quod  non  ipse  afferret,  inimicus  ;  Laco,  an 
opponent  of  any  measure,  however  excellent,  provided  he  did  not  himself 
propose  it.  Tac.  Tu  aquam  a  pumice  postulas,  qui  ipsus  sitiat.  Plaut. 
Nihil  molestum  quod  non  desideres,  i.  e.  dummddo  id.  Cic. 

3.  Quod,  in  restrictive  clauses,  takes  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 
Quod  sine  molestid  tud  fiat,  So  far  as  it  can  be  done  without  troubling 

you.  Cic.     Sestius  non  venlrat  quod  sciam....so  far  as  I  know.  Id. 

4.  The  relative,  after  the  comparative  followed  by  qudm, 
takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Major  sum  qudm  cui  possit  for  tuna  nocerc,  i.e.  quam  ut  mihi,  &c. ;  I 
am  too  great  for  fortune  to  be  able  to  injure  me.  Ovid.  Audltd  voce  pra- 
conis  majus  gaudium  fuit  quam  quod  universum  humines  caperent ;  Upon 
the  herald's  voice  being  heard,  the  joy  was  too  great  for  the  people  to 
contain.  Liv. 

5.  A  relative  clause  expressing  a  purpose  or  motive,  and 
equivalent  to  ut  with  a  demonstrative,  takes  the  subjunc- 
tive ;  as, 

Lacedcemonii  legdtos  Jlthenas  miserunt,  qui  eum  absentem  accusarent 


SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  QUI.        233 

The  Lacedaemonians  sent  ambassadors  to  Athens  to  accuse  him  in  his  ab- 
sence. Nep.  Coesar  equitdtum  omnem  prcemittit,  qui  videant,  quas  in  par- 
tes iter  faciant.  Ca?s. 

So  with  relative  adverbs;  as,  Lampsacum  ei  (Themistocli)  rex  dondrat, 
unde  vinum  sumeret,  i.  e.  ex  qua  or  ut  inde,  &c.  Nep. 

6.  A  relative  clause  after  an  indefinite  general  expres- 
sion, takes  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Fuerunt  ed  tempestdte,  qui  dicgrent ;  There  were  some  at  that  time  who 
said.  Sail.  Erant,  quibus  appetcntior  farrue  videretur ;  There  were  those  to 
whom  he  appeared  too  desirous  of  fame.  Tac.  Erunt,  qui  existimari  velint. 
Cic.  Si  quis  erit,  qui  perpetuam  orationem  desideret,  altera  actione  audiet. 
Id.  Venient  legiones,  quae  neque  me  inultum,  neque  te  impunltum  patian- 
tur.  Tac.  So  after  est,  in  the  sense  of  "  there  is  reason  why  ;  •■  as,  Est 
quod  gaudeas,  You  have  cause  to  rejoice.  Plaut.  Est  quod  visam  domum. 
Id.     Si  est  quod  desit,  ne  bedtus  quidem  est.  Cic. 

The  expressions  included  in  the  rule  are  est,  sunt,  adest,  prcesto  sunt, 
existunt,  exoriuntur,  inveniuntur,  reperiuntur,  si  quis  est,  tcmpus  fuit,  tem- 
pus  veniet,  &c. 

The  same  construction  occurs  with  relative  particles  used  indefinitely ; 
as,  Est  unde  hcec  fiant,  There  are  resources  whence  this  may  be  done. 
Ter.     Est  ubi  id  isto  modo  valeat.  Cic. 

The  above  and  similar  expressions  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive  only 
when  they  are  indefinite.  Hence,  after  sunt  quidam,  sunt  nonnulli,  sunt 
multi,  <&c,  when  referring  to  definite  persons,  the  relative  takes  the  in- 
dicative ;  as,  Sunt  orationes  qucedam,  quas  Menocrlto  dabo.  Cic. 

The  indicative  is  sometimes,  though  rarely,  used  after  sunt  qui,  even 
when  taken  indefinitely,  especially  in  the  poets ;  as,  Sunt,  quos  juvat.  Hor. 

7.  A  relative  clause  after  a  general  negative,  or  an  in- 
terrogative expression  implying  a  negative,  takes  the  sub- 
junctive; as, 

Nenw  est,  qui  haud  intelligat ;  There  is  no  one  who  does  not  understand. 
Cic.  Nulla  res  est,  qua  perferre  possit  continuum  laborem  ;  There  is  nothing 
which  can  endure  perpetual  labor.  Quinct.  Nulla  pars  est  corporis,  quae 
non  sit  minor.  Id.  Nihil  est,  quod  non  alicubi  esse  cogatur.  Id.  In  foro 
vix  decimus  quisque  est,  qui  ipsus  sese  noscat.  Plaut.  Quis  est,  qui  utilia 
fugiat  ?  Who  is  there  that  shuns  what  is  useful  ?  Cic.  An  est  quisquam, 
qui  hoc  ignoret  ?  Is  there  any  one  who  is  ignorant  of  this  ?  Id.  Numquid 
est  mali,  quod  non  dixeris  ?  Ter. 

General  negatives  are  nemo,  nullus,  nihil,  unus  non,  alius  non,  non 
quigquam,  vix  ullus,  nee  ullus,  &c,  with  est ;  vix  with  an  ordinal  and 
quisque  ;  nego  esse  quenquam,  &c.  Interrogative  expressions  implying  a 
negative,  are  quis,  quantus,  uter,  ecquis,  numquis,  an  quisquam,  an  aliquis, 
quotus  quisque,  quotus,  &c,  with  est ;  quot,  quam  multi,  &c,  with  sunt. 
1.  The  same  construction  is  used  after  non  est,  nihil  est,  quid  est,  numquid 
est,  Sic,  followed  by  quod,  cur,  or  quare,  and  denoting  "  there  is  no  reason 
why,"  "  what  cause  ?  "  is  there  any  reason  ?  "  as,  Quod  timeas,  non  est ; 
There  is  no  reason  why  you  should  fear.  Ovid.  Nihil  est,  quod  adventum 
nostrum  pertimescas.  Cic.  Quid  est,  quod  de  ejus  civitdte  dubites  ?  Id. 
Quid  est,  cur  virtus  ipsa  per  se  non  efficiat  bedtos  ?  Id. 

So  after  non  habeo,  or  nihil  habeo  ;  as,  Non  habco,  quod  te  accusem.  Cic. 
Nihil  habeo,  quad  scribam.  Id. 

Note.     The  relative  clause  takes  the  subjunctive  after  the  expressions 
20* 


234         SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  QUI. 

included  in  this  and  the  last  rule,  only  when  it  expresses  what  is  intended 
to  be  affirmed  of  the  subject  of  the  antecedent  clause ;  as,  Nemo  est,  qui 
nesciat ;  There  is  no  one  who  is  ignorant,  i.  e.  no  one  is  ignorant.  Cic. 
So  Sunt,  qui  hoc  carpant;  There  are  some  who  blaine  this,  i.  e.  some  blame 
this.  Veil. 

If  the  relative  clause  is  to  be  construed  as  a  part  of  the  logical  subject,  it 
does  not  require  the  subjunctive ;  as,  Nihil  stabile  est,  quod  infidum  est; 
Nothing  which  is  faithless  is  firm.  Cic. 

8.  A  relative  clause  expressing  the  reason  of  what  goes 
before,  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Peccavisse  mihi  videor,  qui  a  te  discessSrim ;  I  think  I  have  erred  in 
having  left  you.  Cic.  Inertiam  accusas  adolescentium,  qui  istam  artem 
von  ediscant ;  You  blame  the  idleness  of  the  young  men,  because  they  do 
not  learn  that  art  thoroughly.  Id.  0  fortunate  adolescens,  qui  tuce  virtutis 
Homerum  prmconem  inveneris  !  Id. 

Sometimes,  instead  of  qui  alone,  ut,  quippe,  or  utpote — qui, 
is  used,  generally  with  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Convivia  cum  patre  non  inibat,  quippe  qui  ne  in  oppldum  quidem  nisi 
rard  venisset.  Cic.  Neque  Antonius  procul  aberat,  utpote  qui  magno 
exercltu  sequeretur.  Sail. 

9.  After  dignus,  indignus,  aptus,  and  idoneus,  a  relative 
clause  takes  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Videtur,  qui  aliquando  imperet,  dignus  esse ;  He  seems  to  be  worthy  at 
some  time  to  command.  Cic.  Pompeius  idoneus  non  est,  qui  impetret.  Id. 
Et  rem  idoneam,  de  qua  quaeratur,  et  homines  dignos,  quibuscwm  disseratur, 
putant.  Id. 

Note.  If  the  relative  clause  does  not  express  that  of  which  the  person 
or  thing  denoted  by  the  antecedent  is  worthy,  its  construction  is  not 
influenced  by  this  rule.  Thus,  Quis  servus  libertate  dignus  fuit,  cui 
nostra  solus  cara  non  esset  9  The  subjunctive  is  here  used  according  to 
No.  7  of  this  section. 

10.  A  relative  clause,  after  unus  and  solus,  restricting 
the  affirmation  to  a  particular  subject,  takes  the  subjunc- 
tive ;  as, 

Hac  est  una  contentio,  quae  adhuc  permanserit ;  This  is  the  only  dispute 
which  has  remained  till  this  time.  Cic.  Voluntas  est  sola,  quee  nos  vocet 
ad  se,  et  alliceat  suapte  naturd  ;  Pleasure  is  the  only  thing  that,  by  its  own 
nature,  invites  and  allures  us  to  itself.  Id. 

11.  When  the  relative  refers  to  a  dependent  clause,  it  often 
takes  the  subjunctive.     See  §  266. 

12.  The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  are  used  in 
narration  after  relative  pronouns  and  adverbs,  when  a  repeated 
action  is  spoken  of;  as, 

Semper  habiti  sunt  fortisslmi,  qui  summam  imperii  potirentur ;  Those 
have  always  been  considered  the  bravest,  who  obtained  the  supreme  do- 
minion. Nep.  Ut  quisque  maxlme  laboraret  locus,  aut  ipse  occurrebat,  aut 
allquos  mittebat.  So  after  si  quis  or  qui  ;  as,  Si  qui  rem  malitiosiiis  gessis 
set,  dedecus  existimabant.     Cic. 


SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    IN    INTERMEDIATE    CLAUa^a.    235 


SUBJUNCTIVE    IN    INDIRECT    QUESTIONS. 

<§>  265.      Dependent    clauses,   containing   an    indirect 
question,   take   the   subjunctive. 

A  question  is  indirect  when  its  substance  is  stated  without  the  inter- 
rogative form ;  as, 

Qualis  sit  animus,  ipse  animus  nescit;  The  mind  itself  knows  not  what 
the  mind  is.  Cic.  Crediblle  non  est,  quantum  scribam ;  It  is  incredible  how 
much  I  write.  Id.  Quis  ego  sim,  me  rogltas?  Do  you  ask  me  who  I  am  ? 
Plaut.  Nee  quid  scribam,  habeo;  Nor  have  I  any  thing  to  write.  Id. 
Doce  me,  ubi  sint  dii ;  Inform  me  where  the  gods  are.  Id.  Quam  pridem 
sibi  heredUas  venisset,  docet.  Id.  Nunc  accipe,  quare  desipiant  omnes.  Hor. 
Id  utrum  Mi  sentiant,  an  vera  simulent,  tu  intelliges.  Cic.  Qu&ro,  nuia  tu 
senatui  causam  tuarn  permittas.  Id.  Vides,  ut  altd  stet  nive  candidum 
Soracte.  Hor.     Nescit,  vitdne  fruatur,  an  sit  apud  manes.  Ovid. 

All  interrogatives  may  be  thus  used  in  indirect  questions  ;  as, 

Quantus,  qualis,  quot,  quotus,  quotuplex,  uter  ;quis,qui,  cujas;ubi,qud, 
unde,  qua,  quors'um,  quamdiu,  quamdudum,  quamprldem,  quoties,  cur,  quare, 
quamobrem,  quemadmodum,  quomddo,  ut,  quam,  quantopire,  an,  ne,  num, 
utrum,  anne,  unnon. 

Remark  1.  The  indicative  is  sometimes  used  in  such  constructions ; 
as,  Vide  avaritia  quid  facit.  Ter. 

Rem.  2.  In  double  questions,  the  first  may  be  introduced  by  utrum,  num, 
or  the  enclitic  ne;  and,  in  such  case,  the  second  is  usually  introduced  by 
an ;  as,  Multum  interest,  utrum  laus  imminuatur,  an  salus  deseratur.  Cic. 
The  first  question  is  sometimes  without  any  interrogative  particle,  and  the 
second  is  then  introduced  by  an  or  ne  ;  as,  Nunc  ha.bea.mjilium,  necne, 
incertum  est.  Ter. 

Rem.  3.  Dublto  an,  haud  scio  an,  nescio  an,  though  implying  some 
doubt,  have  generally  a  sense  almost  affirmative  ;  as,  Dublto,  an  hunc  pri- 
mum  omnium  ponam;  I  am  inclined  to  place  him  first  of  all.  Nep. 

Rem.  4.  Nescio  quis,  used  nearly  in  the  sense  of  allquis,  does  not  influ- 
ence the  mood  of  the  following  verb  ;  as,  Lucus,  nescio  quo  casu,  nocturno 
tempore  incensus  est.  Nop. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    IN    INTERMEDIATE    CLAUSES. 

§  266.  1.  When  a  proposition  containing  either  an 
accusative  with  the  infinitive,  or  a  verb  in  the  subjunc- 
tive, has  a  clause  connected  with  it,  as  an  essential  part, 
either  by  a  relative,  a  relative  adverb,  or  a  conjunction,  the 
verb  of  the  latter  clause  is  put  in  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Quid  enim  potest  esse  tarn  perspicuum,  quam  esse  aliquod  numen,  quo 
haic  regantur  ?  For  what  can  be  so  clear  as  that  there  is  some  divinity  by 
whom  these  things  are  governed  ?  Cic.  Mud  sic  fere  definxri  solet,  deco- 
rum id  esse,  quod  consentaneum  sit  homlnis  excellentice.  Id.  Audiam  quid 
sit,  qudd  Epicurum  non  probes ;  I  shall  hear  why  it  is  that  you  do  not 
approve  of  Epicurus.  Id.  Jussit  ut,  qua  venissent,  naves  Euboeam  petHrent, 
Liv. 


236    SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    IN    INTERMEDIATE    CLAUSES. 

A  clause,  thus  connected  to  a  preceding  dependent  proposition,  is  some- 
times called  an  intermediate  clause. 

To  this  rule  belongs  the  construction  of  the  oratio  obllqua,  or  indirect 
discourse,  that  is,  the  relating  the  words  or  sentiments  of  another,  not  in 
the  exact  form  in  which  they  were  expressed  or  conceived,  but  in  that  of 
narration.  Thus,  Caesar  said,  a  I  came,  I  saw,  I  conquered,"  is  direct, — 
Cffisar  said,  that  he  came,  saw,  and  conquered,  is  indirect  discourse. 

2.  In  the  oratio  obllqua,  the  main  proposition  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive;  and  depend- 
ent clauses  connected  with  it  by  relatives  and  particles, 
take  the  subjunctive. 

Thus,  Cicero  and  Quinctilian,  in  quoting  the  language  of  Marcus  An- 
tonius,  make  use,  the  former  of  the  oratio  directa,  the  latter  of  the  oratio 
obllqua  ; — Antonius  inquit,  u  Ars  edrum  rerum  est,  quae  sciuntur ;  "  Antoni- 
us  says,  "  Art  belongs  to  those  things  which  are  known."  Cic.  Antonius 
inquit,  artem  edrum  rerum  esse,  quae  sciantur;  Antonius  says,  that  art 
belongs  to  those  things  which  are  known.  Quinct. 

So,  Socrates  dicire  solebat,  omnes,  in  co  quod  scirent,  satis  esse  eloquentes; 
Socrates  was  accustomed  to  say,  that  all  are  sufficiently  eloquent  in  that 
which  they  understand.  Cic.  Cato  mirdri  se  aiebat,  quod  non  rideret 
aruspez,  arusplcem  cum  vidisset.  Id.  Negat  jus  esse,  qui  miles  non  sit, 
pugndre  cum  hoste.  Id.  Indignabantur  ibi  esse  imperium,  ubi  non  esset 
libertas.  Liv.  Itdque  Athenienscs,  quod  honestum  non  esset,  id  ne  utile  qui 
dem  (esse)  putaverunt.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  When  the  subjunctive  would  be  necessary  in  the  oratio 
directa,  to  denote  liberty,  power,  &c,  the  same  remains  in  the  oratio  obll- 
qua, and  is  not  changed  into  the  infinitive  with  an  accusative  ;  as,  Ad  hac 
Ariovistus  respondit,  quumvellet,  congrederetur ;  To  this  Ariovistus  replied, 
that  he  might  meet  him  when  he  pleased.  Caes.  In  the  oratio  directa,  this 
would  be  congredidris.  So,  Is  ita  cum  Cazsdare  agit,  nc  aut  sua  magnoplrt 
virtuti  tribugret,  aut  ipsos  despiceret.  Id.     See  §  273,  3. 

Rem.  2.  A  writer  may  state  his  own  past  words  or  thoughts  in  oratio 
obllqua,  either  preserving  the  first  person,  or  adopting  the  third. 

Rem.  3.  When  the  words  or  sentiments  of  a  third  person  are  stated  in 
oratio  obllqua,  sui  and  suus  are  commonly  used  in  references  made  to  him. 
See  §  208,  (1.) 

Rem.  4.  The  tenses  to  be  used  in  changing  the  oratio  directa  into  the 
obllqua,  depend  on  the  tense  of  the  verb  which  introduces  the  quotation, 
according  to  the  rule,  §  258.  But  when  the  future  perfect  would  be  used 
in  the  direct,  the  pluperfect  is  necessary  in  the  oblique  form. 

Rem.  5.  When  the  connected  clause  contains  merely  a  descriptive 
circumstance,  or  expresses  what  is  independent  of  the  sentiment  of  the 
preceding  clause,  it  takes  the  indicative  ;  as,  Imperdvit  Alexander  Lysippo, 
ut  edrum  equltum,  qui  apud  Granlcum  ceciderant,  factret  statuas  ;  Alexan- 
der ordered  Lysippus  to  make  statues  of  those  horsemen  who  had  fallen 
at  the  Granicus.  Sometimes,  in  other  cases,  when  it  is  evident  from  the 
sense,  that  the  connected  clause  is  an  essential  part  of  the  proposition,  the 
indicative  is  used,  to  avoid  giving  the  appearance  of  contingency  to  the 
sentence. 

3.  A  clause  connected  to  another  by  a  relative  or  causal 
conjunction,  takes  the  subjunctive,  (whatever  be  the  mood 


SYNTAX IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 


237 


of  the  preceding  verb,)  when  it  contains  not  the  senti- 
ment or  allegation  of  the  writer,  but  that  of  some  other 
person  alluded  to  ;  as, 

Socrates  accusdtus  est,  quod  corrumperet  juventutem  ;  Socrates  was  ac- 
cused, because  (as  was  alleged)  he  corrupted  the  youth.  Deum  invocd- 
bant,  cujus  ad  solenne  venissent ;  They  invoked  the  god,  to  whose  solem- 
nities they  had  come.  Li  v.  Here  the  charge  of  corrupting  the  youth  is 
not  made  by  the  writer,  but  by  the  accusers  of  Socrates.  So,  in  the  second 
example,  the  worshippers  allege  that  they  have  come  to  attend  upon  the 
solemnities  of  the  god.  The  indicative,  in  such  cases,  would  render  the 
writer  responsible  for  the  truth  of  the  allegation. 

In  the  preceding  cases,  it  is  not  directly  said  that  the  sentiments  are 
those  of  another  than  the  writer.  In  Cicero,  however,  the  words  dico, 
puto,  arbitror,  and  the  like,  are  often  construed  in  a  similar  manner  ;  as, 
Quum  enim,  Hannibdlis  permissu,  exissel  de  castris,  rediit  paulo  post,  qudd 

se  oblltum  nescio  quod  diceret, because  (as)  he  said,  he  had  forgotten 

something.  Cic. 

IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

$  267.  The  imperative  mood  is  used,  in  the  second  person, 
to  express  a  command,  an  exhortation,  or  an  entreaty  ;  as, 

Nosce  te,  Know  thyself.  Cic.  JEquatn  memento  servdre  mentem,  Re- 
member to  preserve  an  unruffled  mind.  Hor.  Hue  ades,  Come  hither. 
Virg.  Pasce  capellas,  et  potum  pastas  age,  et  inter  agendum  occursdre 
capro  caveto.  Id. 

The  plural  form  in  tote  is  rare  }  as,  Facitdte.  Ovid.  PetitOte.  Id. 

The  third  person  expresses  only  a  command,  and  is  chiefly 
used  in  enacting  laws ;  as, 

Virglnes  vestdles  in  urbe  custodiunto  ignem  foci  pubVlci  sempitemum. 
Cic. 

Remark  1.  With  the  imperative,  not  is  expressed  by  ne, 
and  nor  by  neve ;  as, 

Ne  tanta  animis  assuesclte  bella.  Virg.  Ne  crede  colori.  Id.  Hominem 
mortuum  in  urbe  ne  sepelito,  neve  unto.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  often  used  instead  of 
the  imperative,  to  express  a  command  in  a  milder  form,  an  exhortation,  or 
an  entreaty.  See  §  260,  II.,  Rem.  6.  Sometimes  also  the  future  indica- 
tive.    See  §  259,  Rem.  1,  (4.) 

Rem.  3  Sometimes,  for  the  simple  imperative,  fac  with  the  subjunc- 
tive is  used  ;  as,  Fac  erudias,  Instruct,  or  Take  care  to  instruct.  Cic.  So 
noli  with  the  infinitive,  and  cave  with  the  subjunctive,  with  or  without 
ne  ;  as,  Noli  putdre,  Do  not  suppose.  Cic.  Cave  existlmes.  Do  not  think. 
Id. 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

§  268.  The  tenses  of  the  infinitive  denote  respectively  an 
action  as  present,  past,  or  future,  in  reference  to  the  time  of 
the  verbs  with  which  they  are  connected ;  as, 


238  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Hoc  facgre  possum,  I  am  able  to  do  this.  Cic.  Vidi  nostros  inimlcos 
cupere  helium,  I  saw  that  our  enemies  were  desiring  war.  Id.  Nee  gem- 
gre  ae'rid  cessabit  turtur  ab  ulmo,  Nor  shall  the  turtle  dove  cease  to  coo 
from  the  lofty  elm.  Virg. Victor  em  victce  succubuisse  queror,  I  com- 
plain that  the  victor  has  yielded  to  the  vanquished.  Ovid.  Se  a  senibus 
audisse  dicebant,  They  said  that  they  had  heard  (it)  from  the  old  men.  Cic. 
Audiet  cives  acuisse  ferrum  juvenilis,  The  youth  will  hear  that  the  citizens 

have  whetted  the  sword.   Hor. Negat  sese  verbum  esse  facturum,  He 

declares  that  he  is  not  about  to  speak.  Cic.  Postquam  audiSrat  non  datum 
\r\filio  uxor  em  suo,  After  he  had  heard  that  a  wife  would  not  be  given  to 
his  son.  Ter.  Semper  existimabitis  nihil  horum  cos  visuros  fore,  You  will 
always  suppose  that  you  are  to  see  none  of  these  things.  Gic. 

Remark  1.  The  present  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  to  denote  a  com 
pleted  action.  This  is  the  usual  construction  with  memini ;  but  the 
expression  denotes  rather  a  recollection  of  the  progress  than  of  the  com- 
pletion of  the  action ;  as,  Hoc  me  memini  dicgre,  I  remember  my  saying 
this.  Cic.  Teucrum  memini  Sidona  venire,  I  remember  Teucer's  coming 
to  Sidon.  Virg. 

So,  also,  with  recordor; — Recordor  longb  omnibus  unum  anteferre  Be- 
mosthenem.  Cic. 

When  the  action  is  spoken  of  simply  as  a  fact,  the  perfect  infinitive  is 
used  with  memini  ;  as,  Meministi  me  ita  distribuisse  causam.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  On  the  other  hand,  the  perfect  sometimes  occurs  where,  in 
English,  the  present  would  be  used ;  as,  Fratres  tendentes  Pdion  imposu- 
isse  Olympo,.... endeavoring  to  place....  Hor.  Magnum  si  pectdre  possit 
excussisse  deum.  Virg. 

Rem.  3.  The  present  is  also  sometimes  used  for  the  future,  especially 
when  the  verb  has  no  future;  as,  Desinefata  deum  flecti  sperdre,  Cease 
to  hope  that  the  fates  of  the  gods  will  be  changed.  Virg.  Progeniem 
Trojdno  a  sanguine  duci  audierat.  Id.  Cras  mihi  argentum  dare  dixit ,  i.  e. 
se  daturum  esse.  Ter. 

Rem.  4.  Instead  of  the  future  infinitive,  in  both  voices,  futurum  esse  or 
fore,  followed  by  ut  and  the  subjunctive,  is  often  used;  the  present  and 
imperfect  subjunctive,  in  such  cases,  denoting  an  unfinished,  the  perfect 
and  pluperfect  a  finished,  future  action ;  as,  Nunquam  putdvi  fore,  ut  sup- 
plex  ad  te  venlrem ;  I  never  supposed  (that  it  would  happen)  that  I  should 
come  a  suppliant  to  you.  Cic.  Suspicor  fore,  ut  infringatur  hominum 
improbitas.  Id. 

This  construction  is  necessarily  used,  when  the  verb  has  either  no  future 
active  participle,  or  no  supine ;  as,  in  such  case,  the  regular  future  infini- 
tive cannot  be  formed. 

The  perfect  participle  with  fore  is  also  used  to  denote  a  future  action  in 
the  passive  voice ;  as,  Qudd  videret  nomine  pads  helium  involutum  fore. 
Cic. 

Rem.  5.  The  periphrastic  infinitive  formed  by  the  future  active  parti- 
ciple with  fuisse,  denotes  a  future  action  contingent  upon  a  condition 
which  was  not  fulfilled  ;  and,  in  the  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence, 
corresponds  to  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  ;  as,  An  censes  me  tantos  labores 
suscepturum  fuisse,  si  iisdem  finibus  gloriam  meam  quibus  vitam  essem 
terminatui-us?  Do  you  think  that  I  should  have  undertaken  so  great  labors 
if,  &c.  Cic.  Ut  perspicuum  sit  omnibus,  nisi  tanta  acerbitas  injuricefuisset, 
nunquam  illos  in  eum  locum  progressuros  fuisse, ....that  they  never  would 
have  come  into  that  place.  Id. 

Futurum  fuisse,  also,  with  ut  and  the  subjunctive,  is  used  in  this  sens© 


SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  239 

as,  JVisi  nuncii  essent  alldti,  cxistimdbant  plerlque  futurum  fuisse,  ut  oppl- 

dum  caperetur, that  the  town  would  have  been  taken.  Cses.     This  form 

is  necessary  in  the  passive  voice. 

Rem.  6.  The  perfect  infinitive,  like  the  past  tenses  of  the  indicative, 
sometimes  corresponds  to  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  in  the  apodosis  of  a 
conditional  clause ;  as,  (Dixit)  sibi  vitamfiliec  sud  cariorem  fuisse,  si  liberie 
ac  pudlcm  vivire  licitum  fuisset ;  (He  said)  that  the  life  of  his  daughter 
had  been  dearer  to  him  than  his  own,  if  it  had  been  permitted....  Liv. 

This  use  of  the  perfect  infinitive  is  necessary  when  the  verb  has  no 
future  participle;  as,  Si  tenuisset  Stesichdrus  modum,  videtur  proxlmus 
amuldri  Homerum  potuisse ;  He  seems  to  have  been  able,  i.  e.  it  seems 
that  he  would  have  been  able,  to  rival  Homer,  if,  &c.  Quinct. 

<§>  269.  The  infinitive  mood,  in  Latin,  is  often  used,  not  indefinite 
ly,but  with  a  subject  of  its  own  in  the  accusative  case.     See  §  239. 

The  infinitive  passive  of  a  neuter  verb,  like  the  third  person  singular  of 
that  voice,  is  sometimes  used  without  a  subject ;  as,  Vides  toto  properari 

litore,  You  see  that  haste  is  made Virg.  •  See  §§  209,  Rem.  3,  (2),  and 

239,  Rem.  3. 

The  present  infinitive  has.  sometimes,  in  narration,  a  subject  in  the 
nominative.     See  §  209,  Rem.  5. 

The  infinitive,  either  with  or  without  a  subject-accusa- 
tive, may  be  the  subject  of  a  verb ;  as, 

Ad  rempubllcam  pertlnct  me  conservari,  It  concerns  the  state  that  I 
should  be  preserved.  Cic.  Nunquam  est  utile  peccare,  To  do  wrong  is 
never  useful.  Id.  JEquum  est,peccdtis  veniam  poscentem  reddere  rursus. 
llor.     See  §201,  IV. 

Remark  I.  In  such  constructions,  when  no  subject  is  ex- 
pressed before  the  infinitive,  an  indefinite  word  for  person  or 
thing,  or  a  reflexive  pronoun,  is  commonly  implied. 

Thus,  in  the  last  two  examples,  as  the  propositions  are  true  in  their 
widest  application  to  moral  beings,  quenquam  may  be  understood  before 
peccare  and  reddere. 

Rem.  2.  The  infinitive  is  often  the  subject  of  a  proposition  when  the 
substantive  verb  with  an  adjective  forms  the  predicate,  and  also  when 
the  verb  in  the  sentence  is  impersonal,  or  is  used  impersonally,  either  in 
the  active  or  passive  voice ;  as,  Cui  verba  dare  difficile  est.  Ter.  Mcndd- 
cem  memdrem  esse  oportet.  Quinct.  Neque  est  te  fallere  cuiquarn,  sc.  fate. 
Virg.    Non  enim  me  hoc  jam  dicere  pudebit.  Cic.     See  5  209,  Rem.  3,  (5.) 

Rem.  3.  The  infinitive  may  itself  be  the  subject  of  an  infinitive ;  as, 
Audio  non  licere  cuiquarn  in  nave  capillos  deponere.  Ter. 

<§>  270.  The  infinitive,  either  with  or  without  a  subject- 
accusative,  may  depend  upon  a  verb ;  as, 

Hac  vitare  cuplmus,  We  desire  to  avoid  this.  Cic.  Poetas  omnlno  non 
conor  attingere,  I  do  not  attempt  to  read  the  poets  at  all.  Id.  Sententium 
valere  cupierunt,  They  desired  that  the  opinion  should  prevail.  Id.  Spcro 
te  valere,  I  hope  that  you  are  well.  Id. 

Remark  1.  The  infinitive  alone  may  also  depend  upon  an 
adjective,  and  sometimes  upon  a  noun  ;  as, 


240  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Digitus  amari,  Worthy  to  be  loved.  Virg.  Audax  omnia  perpgti,  Res- 
olute to  endure  every  thing.  Hor.  Sollers  ornare,  Skilful  to  adorn.  Ovid. 
Segnes  solvere  nodum.  Hor.  Jndoctlis  pauperiem  pati.  Id.  Lenis  reclu- 
dere.  Id.  See  §  213,  Rem.  4,  (1.)  Tempus  est  hujus  libri  facgre  finem, 
It  is  time  to  finish  this  book.  Nep.  Jniit  consilia  reges  tollere,  He  devised 
a  plan  to  destroy  the  kings.  Id. 

Rem.  2.  The  infinitive  with  the  accusative  sometimes  stands  uncon- 
nected, especially  in  vehement  interrogations  or  exclamations ;  as,  Mcne 
incepto  desistere  victam,  nee  posse  Italid  Teucrorum  averte're  regem  ?  That  I, 

vanquished,  should  desist  from  my  undertaking,  nor  be  able ?  Virg. 

Me  miserumJ  te  in  tantas  cerumnas  propter  me  incidisse  !  Cic. 

So,  in  the  oratio  obLiqua,  the  words  signifying  said,  saying,  &c,  are 
often  omitted  ;  as,  Id  facllk  effici  posse,  sc.  dixit.  Nep.  Quern  signum 
daturum fugientlbus?  Curt. 

Rem.  3.  The  infinitive  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Ei  provinciam  Nu- 
midiam  populus  jussit,  sc.  dari.  Sail.  In  the  compound  forms  of  the 
infinitive,  esse  and  fuisse  are  commonly  omitted  ;  as,  Sed  de  ed  re  legatos 
missiiros  dixerunt,  sc.  esse.  Nep. 

*§>  271.  The  infinitive  without  a  subject  is  only  used  after 
certain  verbs,  especially  such  as  denote  desire,  ability,  inten- 
tion, or  endeavor;  as, 

Cupio,  opto,  nolo,  and  its  compounds ;  possum,  queo,  nequeo,  valeo ; 
cogito  (to  design),  decerno  (to  determine),  juro,  conjuro,  propono,  statuo, 
and  constituo  (to  determine),  studco  (to  intend)  ;  conor,  pugno  for  conor, 
tendo,  contendo,  tento,  &c. ;  to  which  may  be  added  audeo,  consuesco, 
insuesco,  carpi,  debeo,  desino,  desisto,  disco,  doceo,  dubito,  kabeo  for  possum 
or  debeo,  incipio,  intermitto,  ncscio,  paro,  parco,  praitermitto,  recuso,  soleo, 
vereor,  and  the  passives  audior,  cogor,  credor,  dicor,  existlmor ,feror ,  negor, 
nuntior,  perhibeor,  putor,  trador,  and  videor. 

The  poets,  also,  use  the  infinitive  after  fuge  and  parce  for  noli,  and 
sometimes  after  caveo,  fugio,  gaudeo,  horreo,  metuo,  memlni,  obliviscor, 
quxBro,  reformldo,  refugio,  tempero,  timeo,  and  some  others.  It  is  also 
used,  in  a  few  instances,  after  verbs  of  motion,  to  denote  a  purpose  ;  as, 
Introiit  videre,  He  came  in  to  see.  Ter.     Non  te  frangere  persequor.  Hor. 

Remark  1.  Many  of  the  verbs  above  enumerated,  instead  of  the  infin- 
itive, may  be  followed  by  the  subjunctive  with  a  conjunction ;  and  with 
some  of  them,  this  is  the  regular  construction ;  as,  Sententiam  ne  diceret, 
recusdvit.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  The  passives  in  the  above  list  may  either  be  used  personally, 
with  the  infinitive  alone,  or  impersonally,  followed  by  the  accusative  with 
the  infinitive.  The  former  construction  is  more  common,  especially  with 
videor.  Thus  we  may  say,  Mater  Pausanue  eo  tempore  vixisse  dicitur, 
or  Dicitur  eo  tempore  matrem  Pausania  vixisse ;  The  mother  of  Pausanias 

is  said  to  have  been  living or,  It  is  said  that  the  mother  of  Pausanias 

was  living Nep. 

Rem.  3.  The  infinitive  without  a  subject  is  used  after  a  verb, 
only  when  it  denotes  an  action  or  state  of  the  subject  of  that 
verb. 

Sometimes,  even  when  the  subject  remains  the  same,  the  infinitive 
takes  a  pronoun  as  its  subject,  especially  after  cupio,  volo,  malo,  conor,  and 
studeo  ;  as,  Cupio  me  esse  clementem.  Cic.  Omnis  homines,  qui  sese  stu- 
dent praestare  ceteris  animaUbus.  Sail. 


SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD-  241 

<§>  272.  The  infinitive  with  the  accusative  depends  on 
verbs  and  phrases  which  denote  either  the  exercise  of  the 
senses  or  intellectual  powers,  or  the  communication  of  thought 
to  others ;  as, 

Videbat,  id  sine  rege  Persdrum  non  posse  fieri;  He  saw  that  that  could 
not  be  done  without  the  aid  of  the  king  of  the  Persians.  Nep.  Credunt 
se  negUgi,  They  believe  themselves  to  be  neglected.  Ter.  Ea  te  ex  Uteris 
cognoscere  arbitror,  I  suppose  that  you  know  those  things  by  means  of 
letters.  Cic.  Me  in  ejus  potestdte  dixi  fore.  Id.  Affirmant  milltum  jacere 
animos.  Liv.  Seepe  venit  ad  aures  meas,  te  istud  nimis  crebrd  dicere,  satis 
te  tibi  vixisse.  Cic.  Earn  pugnam  ad  Perusiam  pugndtam  (esse),  quidam 
auctores  sunt.  Liv. 

Remark  1.  When  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  subject  and  the 
object  of  the  verb  being  both  in  the  accusative,  the  passive  infinitive  is 
substituted  for  the  active,  by  which  means  the  subject  is  put  in  the  abla- 
tive, or  the  accusative  with  per;  as,  Ne  fando  quidem  auditum  est,  cro- 
codilum  violdtum  esse  ah  jEgyptio ;  instead  of  iEgyptium  crocodllum  vio- 
l&sse.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  After  verbs  of  the  above  significations,  the  conjunction  that ,  in 
English,  is  not  represented  in  Latin  by  a  corresponding  conjunction,  as  ut 
or  qudd  followed  by  the  indicative  or  subjunctive;  but,  instead  of  that  con- 
struction, the  subject  following  that  is  put  in  the  accusative,  and  its  verb 
in  the  infinitive. 

Rem.  3.  The  infinitive  with  the  accusative  is  sometimes 
translated  by  a  similar  form  in  English,  but  usually  either  by 
the  indicative  or  potential,  according  to  its  connection  ;  as, 

Te  tud  virtute  frui  cuplmus ;  We  wish  you  to  enjoy,  or  that  you  may 
enjoy....  Cic.  Miror  te  ad  me  nihil  scribere...that  you  do  not  write...  Id. 
Audierat  non  datum  ivifilio  uxorem  stto....that  she  would  not  be  given.... 
Ter. 

Rem.  4.  As  the  present  infinitive  denotes  unfinished  action,  and  relates 
to  the  time  of  the  verb  on  which  it  depends,  it  expresses  unfinished  past 
action,  and  corresponds  to  the  imperfect  indicative,  when  with  an  accusa- 
tive it  follows  a  past  tense ;  as,  Dixit  Caisdrem  facere,  He  said  that  Cossar 
was  doing.  Cobs.  In  like  manner  the  perfect  infinitive  with  an  accusative 
after  a  past  tense  corresponds  to  the  pluperfect  indicative ;  as,  Dixit 
Casdrem  fecisse,  He  said  that  Cffisar  had  done. 

Rem.  5.  The  present  infinitive  after  verbs  of  sense,  is  often 
equivalent  to  the  present  participle  ;  as, 

Surggre  videt  lunam,  He  sees  the  moon  (to  rise)  rising.  Virg.  Arma 
rutilare  vident.  Id.  Videbis  collucere  faces.  Id.  Nee  Zephpros  audis 
spirare  ?  Do  you  not  hear  the  zephyrs  blowing  ?  Id.  Sarpe  hoc  majdres 
natu  dicere  audivi.  Cic. 

In  the  following  example,  the  infinitive  and  present  participle  are  used 
in  the  same  construction  : — Medium  video  discedere  codum  palantesywe 
polo  stellas.  Virg. 

§  273.  When  the  particle  that,  in  English,  introduces  a 
clause  denoting  a  purpose,  object,  or  result,  it  is  a  sign  of  the 
subjunctive  in  Latin,  and  is  to  be  expressed  by  ut,  &c.  (see 
§  262) ;  but  otherwise  it  is  usually  the  sign  of  the  accusative 
with  the  infinitive. 
21 


242  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

1.  The  subjunctive  is  commonly  used  after  verbs  of  endeav- 
oring, aiming,  and  accomplishing. 

Such  are  facio,  efficio,  perficio,  studeo  ;  id,  hoc  or  Mud  ago  ;  opSram  do, 
meditor,  euro,  in  animum  induco,  consilium  capio,  nitor,  contendo,  video  (to 
take  care),  nihil  antiquius  habeo  quam,  &c. ;  as,  Eloquentid  pcrfecit,  ut 
auxilio  sociorum  Lacedcemonii  privarentur.  Nep. 

Facio  with  ut  and  the  subjunctive  is  also  used  as  a  periphrasis  for  the 
indicative ;  as,  Invltus  quidem  feci,  ut  L.  Flaminium  e  sendtv,  ejicerem,  for 
invltus  ejeci.  Cic. 

Facio,  when  used  of  a  writer,  in  the  sense  of  introduces  or  represents, 
is  sometimes  joined  with  a  participle ;  as,  Lailium  et  Scipionem  facimus 
admirantes.  Cic.  Ejjicio,  in  the  sense  of  proving,  takes  an  infinitive  ,  as, 
Dicaarchus  vult  efficere  anlmos  esse  mortdles.  Id. 

2.  Verbs  signifying  to  request,  to  demand,  to  admonish,  to 
advise,  to  commission,  to  encourage,  to  command,  and  the  like, 
when  the  purpose  of  the  request,  &,c,  is  to  be  expressed,  usu- 
ally take  after  them  the  subjunctive  with  ut  or  ne;  as, 

Te  non  hortor  solum  sed  etiam  oro,  ut  totd  mente  in  rcmpubUcam  incum- 
bas.  Cic.  Monet,  ut  suspicioncs  vitet.  Caes.  Voluseno  mandat,  ut  ad  se 
revertatur.  Id. 

Nuntio,  scribo,  and  even  dico,  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive,  when 
they  imply  an  injunction  or  intention  that  something  should  be  done  ;  as, 
Ha\c  nunc  non  ut  facias,  sed  ut  te  facer e  et  fecisse  gaudeas,  scribo.  Cic. 
Misit  qui  diceret,  ne  discederet.  Nep. 

Jubeo  commonly  takes  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  but  sometimes 
the  subjunctive,  especially  when  used  absolutely,  or  without  the  person 
being  expressed  to  whom  the  command  is  given ;  as,  Jubete  istos  exlre 
foras.  Ter.     Sivejubebat  ut  facerem  quid.  Hor. 

3.  In  the  oratio  ohllqua,  the  construction  of  the  accusative 
with  the  infinitive,  is  exchanged  for  that  of  the  subjunctive,  to 
denote  possibility,  liberty,  or  duty  ;  as, 

Virginius  unum  Ap.  Claudium  legum  expertem  esse  aiebat :  respicerent 
tribunal  homines  castellum  omnium  scelerum.  Li  v. 

On  the  contrary,  when  the  subjunctive  has  been  used,  after  a  verb  of 
asking,  commanding,  &c,  the  construction  often  passes  into  that  of  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive;  as,  Ordbat  ne  se  ut  parricldam  liberum 
aversarentur :  sibi  vitam  Jilice  sud  cariorem  fuisse  si ....  Liv.  See  §  266,  2, 
Rem.  1. 

4.  Verbs  which  denote  willingness,  unwillingness,  permission, 
and  necessity,  commonly  take  the  accusative  and  infinitive,  but 
sometimes  the  subjunctive. 

Such  are  volo,  nolo,  malo,  opto,  permitto,  potior,  sino,  licet,  oportet,  and 
ncccsse  est ;  as,  Optavit  ut  in  currum  patris  tolleretur.  Cic.  Quis  Antonio 
permlsit,  ut  partes  faceret  ?  Id. 

An  infinitive  passive  without  a  subject,  is  sometimes  used  with  oportet ; 
as,  Nan  oportuit  relictas,  sc.  esse  anciltas.  Ter.  Ut  ut  erat,  mansum  tamen 
oportuit,  sc.  esse.  Id.  Non  putabant  de  tali  viro  suspicionlbus  oportere 
judicari.  Nep. 

Some  other  verbs  which  regularly  take  tbe  accusative  with  the  infinitive 
after  them,  are  occasionally  followed  by  the  subjunctive. 


SYNTAX. PARTICIPLES.  243 

5.  After  verbs  denoting  joy  or  grief,  surprise  or  leonder,  either 
the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  or  quod  with  the  indicative  or 
subjunctive,  may  follow. 

Such  are  gaudeo,  detector,  gratum  est  wild,  doleo,  angor,  indignor,  miror; 
as,  Angor  arilmo  non  armis  egere  rempublicam.  Cic.  Gaudeo  tibi  jucun- 
das  meas  esse  litSras.  Id.     Gaudeo  quod  te  interpellavi.  Id. 

After  doleo,  gaudeo,  and  other  neuter  verbs,  the  clause  containing  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  not  the  object  of  the  verb,  but  of  some 
preposition  understood,  as  propter,  &c.     See  §  232,  (2.) 

6.  The  particle  that,  in  English,  is  represented  in  Latin  by  qudd,  when  a 
demonstrative  pronoun,  as  hoc,  illud,  istud,  &c,  precedes,  or  is  to  be  sup- 
plied. In  such  case,  qudd  is  followed  by  the  indicative  ;  as,  Illud  quoque 
nobis  accedit  incommddum,  quod  M.  Junius  hoc  tempore  abest.  Cic. 

Quod,  in  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  in  the  sense  of  as  to,  especially  in 
the  epistolary  style,  is  followed  by  an  indicative.  See  §  206,  (14.)  Qudd 
(that)  is  generally  explanatory,  or  denotes  a  cause ;  ut  (that),  a  purpose 
or  result. 

Note.  The  construction  of  the  infinitive  resembles  that  of 
a  noun  in  the  singular  number  and  neuter  gender. 

Thus,  like  a  noun,  it  may  have  an  adjective  or  pronoun  agreeing  with 
it;  as,  Totum  hoc  philosophari  displicet.  Cic.     See  §  205,  Rem.  8. 

It  may  be  followed  by  a  limiting  genitive  ;  as,  Cujus  non  dimicare  fuit 
vincere.  Val.  Max. 

It  may  be  either  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb.  See  §  §  209,  Rem.  3, 
(5,)  and  229,  Rem.  5.  It  may  also  be  used  after  neuter  verbs,  like  an  ac- 
cusative, depending  on  a  preposition  understood;  as,  Te  accepisse  meas 
literas  gaudeo.  Ter.     See  §  §  232,  (2,)  and  273,  5. 

It  is  also  used  like  a  predicate-nominative ;  as,  VidSre  est  perspicere 
aliquid.  Cic.     See  §  210. 

It  may,  like  a  genitive,  limit  the  signification  of  an  adjective  or  noun. 
See  §  270,  Rem.  1. 

It  may,  like  an  accusative,  depend  on  a  preposition ;  as,  Prater  plordre. 
Hor.     See  §235.  *\*  *    *  '  F 

It  is  used  also  like  an  ablative ;  as,  Audlto  regem  in  Siciliam  tendere. 
Sail.  * 

It  sometimes,  also,  denotes  a  purpose,  like  a  participle  in  dus;  as,  Lori 
cam  donat  habere  viro.  Virg. 


PARTICIPLES. 

§  274.  1 .  Participles  are  followed  by  the  same  cases 
as  their  verbs  ;  as, 

Quidam,  poeta  nominatus ;  A  certain  one,  called  a  poet.  Cic.  Catulo- 
rum  oblita  leaina,  The  lioness  forgetful  of  her  whelps.  Virg.  Faventes 
rebus  Carthaginiensium,  Favoring  the  interests  of  the  Carthaginians.  Liv. 
Tendens  ad  sidera  palmas.  Virg.  Accusatus  rei  capitalis.  Cic.  Omlna 
doctus.  Stat.  Casus  abies  visura  marlnos.  Id.  Carituri  arbore  montes. 
Ovid.     Parcendum  est  teneris.  Juv.     Utendum  est  ffitate.  Ovid. 

2.  The  present,  perfect,  and  future  active  participles,  denote 
respectively  an  action  which  is  present,  past,  or  future,  in  refer- 


244  SYNTAX. PARTICIPLES. 

ence  to  the  time  of  the  verb  with  which  they  are  connected ; 
as, 

Simul  hoc  dicens  attollit  se.  Virg.  Turn  ad  Thraseam  in  hortis  agentem 
missus  est.  Tac.  Turnum  fugientem  hcec  terra  videbit.  Id.  Qui  missus  ab 
Argis  ItdlA  eonsederat  urbe.  Id.  Lamia  munere  adilitdtis  perfunctus,  petit 
praturam.  Cic.  Juasas  cumjide  -poznas  luam.  Hor.  Juvenis  medius  mori- 
turus  in  hostes  irruit.  Virg.  Periturus  injecit  sese  in  agmen.  Id.  Ilia  tibi 
ventura  bella  expediet.  Id. 

Remark  1.  The  present  participle  sometimes  denotes  that  which  is 
about  to  be  done  ;  as,  Interclusit  hiems,  et  terruit  Auster  euntes, ....  as  they 
were  on  the  point  of  going.  Virg. 

Rem.  2.  The  present  participle,  also,  sometimes  denotes  a  purpose ;  as, 
Cunctis  nam  lecti  navlbus  ibant,  orantes  veniam,  et  templum  clarnorc  pet? 
bant, ....  to  sue  for  favor....  Id. 

Rem.  3.  The  perfect  participle  passive  often  denotes  the  result  of  a 
past  action,  and  thus  supplies  the  place  of  a  present  participle  passive ;  as, 
Kotus  evolat piced  tectus  caliglne  ....covered  with  pitchy  darkness.  Ovid. 

Rem.  4.  Habeo,  with  perfect  participles  denoting  knowledge  and  deter- 
mination, forms  a  periphrasis,  instead  of  the  verb  of  the  participle  ;  as, 
Clodii  animum  perspectum  habeo,  cognitum,  judicatum ;  for  perspexi.  Do, 
reddo,  euro,  and  facio,  are  sometimes  so  construed  with  participles  ;  as, 
Missam  h am  faciei,  for  mittet.  Ter. 

Rem.  5.  The  perfect  passive  participle  is  sometimes  used  to  supply  the 
place  of  a  verbal  noun  in  io  or  us  ;  as,  Ante  Romam  condltam,  Before  the 
building  of  Rome.  Cic.  Post  genus  hominum  natum.  Id.  Post  sacra 
constitute.  Id. 

Rem.  6.  The  future  active  participle  often  denotes  inten- 
tion or  purpose  ;  as, 

Ad  Jovem  Hammonem  per  git  consulturus  de  origlne  sud ;  He  goes  to 
Jupiter  Ammon,  to  consult  him  about  his  origin.  Just. 

Rem.  7.  The  participle  in  dus,  also,  denotes  a  purpose,  when 
joined  with  verbs  signifying  to  give,  to  deliver,  to  agree  for,  to 
have,  to  receive,  to  undertake,  &c. 

Such  are  do,  trado,  tribuo,  attribuo,  mando,  mitto,  conduco,  loco,  habeo, 
accipio,  suscipio,  relinquo,  euro,  deposco,  rogo  ;  as,  Testamentum  tibi  tradit 
legendum,  He  delivers  his  will  to  you  to  read.  Hor.  Attribuit  nos  truci- 
dandos  Cethego.  Cic.     Quod  utendum  acceperis,  reddlto.  Id. 

Rem.  8.  The  participle  in  dus,  when  agreeing  with  the  sub- 
ject of  a  sentence,  has  the  signification  of  necessity  or  propri- 
ety ;  sometimes,  though  rarely,  except  in  later  writers,  that  of 
possibility  ;  as, 

Is  venerandus  a  nobis  et  colendus  est,  He  should  be  worshipped  and 
honored  by  us.  Cic.  Delenda  est  Carthago,  Carthage  must  be  destroyed. 
Cato.  Hac  speranda  fuerunt.  Virg.  So  with  est  used  impersonally  ;  as, 
Utriim  pace  nobis  an  hello  esset  utendum.  Cic. 

Sometimes,  also,  when  not  agreeing  with  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  it 
has  this  signification ;  as,  Facta  narrdbas  dissimulanda  tibi,  Ybu  were 
relating  facts  which  you  should  have  concealed.  Ovid.  A.  L.  Bruto  prin- 
clpe  hujus  maxtme  conservandi  geniris  et  nomlnis.  Cic. 


SYNTAX. GERUNDS    AND    GERUNDIVES.  245 

Rem.  9.  The  participle  in  dus,  in  its  oblique  cases,  supplies  the  place 
of"  a  present  participle  of  the  passive  voice,  to  denote  a  continued  or  in- 
complete action.     See  §  275,  II. 

For  the  dative  of  the  agent  after  participles  in  dus,  see  §  225,  III. 

3.  Participles  are  often  employed  instead  of  conditional,  ex- 
planatory, adversative,  and  other  dependent  clauses  ;  as, 

Curio,  ad  focum  sedenti  (as  he  was  sitting)  magnum  auri  pohdus  Sam- 
nltes  attuUrunt.  Cic.  Tridui  viam  progressi,  rursus  revertlrunt,  for,  cum 
progressi  essent.  Cses.  Plura  locuturos  all  re  nosjussit, ....  when  we  were 
going  to  say  more. 

If  the  participle  refers  to  a  noun  not  contained  in  the  leading  proposi- 
tion, it  is  put  with  that  noun  in  the  ablative  absolute.     See  §  257. 

Note.  In  many  cases,  for  want  of  a  perfect  participie  active,  and  a 
present  participle  passive,  this  construction  cannot  be  used.  Thus,  quum 
amavisset  cannot  be  exchanged  for  a  participle  corresponding  with  the 
English  having  loved.  As  the  perfect  participles  of  deponent  verbs,  how- 
ever, have  an  active  signification,  they  admit  of  the  participial  construc- 
tion. The  want  of  a  perfect  active  participle  may  also  be  supplied  by  the 
perfect  passive  participle  in  the  ablative  absolute.     See  §  257,  Rem.  5. 


GERUNDS   AND   GERUNDIVES. 

$  275.  I.  Gerunds  are  followed  by  the  same  cases  as 
their  verbs  ;  as, 

Metus  parendi  sibi,  Fear  of  obeying  him.  Sail.  Parcendo  victis,  By 
sparing  the  vanquished.  Liv.  EffSror  studio  patres  vestros  videndi,  I  am 
transported  with  a  desire  of  seeing  your  fathers.  Cic.  Petendi  consulatum 
gratia.  Sail.     Venit  ad  recipiendum  pecunias.  Varr. 

Remark  1.  The  gerund  is  the  same  in  form  as  the  oblique  cases  of  the 
neuter  singular  of  participles  in  dus,  but  it  has  the  meaning  of  l>e  active 
voice.  It  is  sometimes  translated  by  the  present  participle  with  a  prepo- 
sition, and  sometimes  by  an  infinitive  active  ;  as,  Consilium  Lacedaimonem 
occupandi;  A  design  of  occupying,  or  to  occupy,  Lacedsemon.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  The  gerund  is  sometimes,  though  rarely,  used  in  a  passive 
sense  ;  as,  Spes  restituendi  nulla  erat, ....  of  being  restored.  Nep.  Alkenas 
erudiendi  gratia  missus, ....  for  the  purpose  of  being  instructed.  Just. 
Ante  domandum.  Virg. 

Rem.  3.  As  the  infinitive  is  used  as  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb,  so 
the  gerund  supplies  the  genitive,  dative,  ablative,  and,  after  a  preposi- 
tion, the  accusative,  of  a  verbal  noun  of  similar  meaning. 

II.  Instead  of  the  gerund  of  an  active  verb  with  its  ob- 
ject in  the  accusative,  the  participle  in  dus  is  often  used, 
the  object  taking  the  case  in  which  the  gerund  would  have 
been,  and  the  participle  agreeing  with  it ;  as, 

Consilia  urbis  delenda;  (Cic),  for  urbcm  dclendi,  Plans  for  destroying 
the  city.  Reparandarum  classium  causa  (Suet.),  for  reparandi  classes. 
Perpetiendo  labori  idoneus.  Colum.  Ad  defendendam  Romam  ab  oppug 
nanda  Capua  duces  Romanos  abstrahSre.  Liv. 

21* 


246  SYNTAX. GERUNDS    AND    GERUNDIVES. 

Remark  1.  The  same  construction  is  used  with  the  future  passive 
participles  of  utor,frnor,fungor,  and  potior,  as  these  verbs  were  originally 
followed  by  the  accusative ;  as,  JEtas  ad  hcec  utenda  idonea.  Ter.  Jus- 
titiai  fruendae  causd.  Cic.     In  omni  munire  fungendo.  Id. 

Rem.  2.  When  a  participle  is  thus  used  for  a  gerund,  it  is  called  a 
gerundive,  and  is  usually  translated  like  a  gerund.  The  gerundive  cannot 
be  substituted  for  the  gerund,  where  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  gen- 
der not  being  distinguishable.  It  should  not  be  used  when  the  object  of 
the  gerund  is  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective  ;  as,  Allquid  faciendi  ratio 
(Cic),  not  aliciiju*.  Artem  et  vera  et  falsa  dijudicandi  (Id),  not  verorum 
dijudicandorum . 

III.  Examples  of  the  construction  of  gerunds,  in  each  of  their  cases, 
have  been  already  given,  among  other  nouns,  under  the  heads  Genitive,  Da- 
tive, Accusative,  and  Ablative.  The  following  remarks  specify  in  what  con- 
nections they  are  used  : — 

Remark  1.  The  genitive  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  may 
follow  either  nouns  or  adjectives ;  as, 

Amor  habendi.  Cic.  Patriam  spes  videndi.  Virg.  Nam  habet  natura, 
ut  alidrum  omnium  rerum,  sic  vivendi  modum.  Cic.     Barbara  consuetudo 

hominum  immolandorum.    Id Venandi  studiosi.    Cic.      Certus  eundi. 

Virg.     Insuetus  navigandi.  Cres.     Peritus  civitatis  regcnda.  Nep. 

(1.)  The  nouns  after  which  these  genitives  most  frequently  occur  are, 
amor,  ars,  causa,  consilium,  consuetudo,  cupidltas,  facultas,  gratia,  locus, 
licentia,  modus,  occasio,  otium,  potestas,  spes,  studium,  tempos,  venia,  vis, 
voluntas. 

(2.)  The  adjectives  which  most  frequently  take  after  them  these  geni- 
tives, are  such  as  denote  desire,  knowledge,  remembrance,  and  their  contra- 
ries ;  as,  cupldus,  studibsus,  peritus,  irnperltus,  insuetus,  certus,  rudis,  &c. 
See  §  213,  Rem.  1,  (3.) 

(3.")  The  genitive  plural  sometimes  depends  upon  a  gerund  in  di,  instead 
of  being  joined  with  the  gerundive  ;  us,  Facultas  agrorum  condonandi.  Cic. 
Nomina.// 'It  istorum  erit  copia.  Plaut.  In  castra  veneruut  sui  purgandi 
causd.  '^ass.     This  construction  is  most  common  with  pronouns. 

(4.)  The  gerund  in  di,  for  the  gerundive,  is  sometimes  found  also  with 
pronouns  of  the  singular  number  and  feminine  gender ;  as,  Quoniam  tui 
videndi  est  copia.  Plaut.  Ego  ejus  videndi  cupldus  rectd,  consequor.  Ter. 
In  these  examples,  tui  and  ejus  are  feminine. 

(5  )  The  gerund  and  gerundive,  after  the  verb  sum,  are  sometimes 
found  in  the  genitive  denoting  a  tendency,  without  any  noun  or  adjective 
on  which  they  can  depend ;  as,  Re-glum  imperium  initio  conservandse 
libertatis  fuerat.  Sail.  Causa,  or  gratia  may  sometimes  be  supplied.  In 
some  other  cases,  the  word  on  which  the  gerund  in  di  depends  is  not  ex- 
pressed :  as,  Maneat  provinciallbus  potentiam  suam  tali  modo  ostentandi, 
sc.  facultas.  Tac.     Cum  habe rem  in  anlmo  navigandi,  sc.  proposltum.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  The  dative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  is  used 
especially  after  adjectives  signifying  usefulness  or  Jitness,  and 
also  after  verbs,  to  denote  a  purpose ;  as, 

Cliarta  emporctica  est  iiiutllis  scribendo.  Plin.  Capessendas  reipubllca 
habilis.  Tac.  Ut  nee  triumviri  accipiundo,  ncc  scribal  referundo  sujicirent. 
Liv.     Locum  oppldo  condendo  capere.  Id. 

CI.)  The  verbs  and  phrases  upon  which  this  dative  most  frequently  de- 


SYNTAX. SUPINES.  247 

pends  are,  studeo  ;  inttntus  sum  ;  impendo,  consumo  or  insUmo,  tempus  ; 
operant  do,  desum,  sum  (signifying  to  serve  for,  to  be  adequate  to),facio,  and 
sufficio. 

The  dative  after  sum  is  usually  supposed  to  depend  on  an  adjective  un- 
derstood.    See  §  227,  Rem.  3. 

(2.)  The  dative  of  the  gerundive,  denoting  a  purpose,  is  also  used  after 
names  of  office  ;  as,  Decemviri  leglbus  scribendis.  Liv.  So,  Comitia  cre- 
andis  decemvlris.  Id. 

(3.)  A  purpose  is  more  commonly  expressed  by  ad  and  the  accusative, 
than  by  the  dative  ;  as,  Pecus  ad  vescendum  hominlbus  apta.  Cic. 

(4.)  Instead  of  the  gerund  or  gerundive  after  adjectives,  the  poets  some- 
times use  the  infinitive,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  construction ;  as,  Audax 
omnia  perpeti,  i.  e.  ad  omnia  perpetienda.  Hor.     See  §  270,  Rem.  1. 

Rem.  3.  The  accusative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  follows 
the  prepositions  ad  or  inter,  and  sometimes  ante,  circa,  or  ob ; 

as, 

Ad  poenitendum  propirat,  qui  citd  judlcat.  Pub.  Syr.  Inter  bibendum, 
While  drinking.  Just.     Ad  castra  facienda.  Cic.     Ob  absolvcndum.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  The  ablative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  follows 
the  prepositions  a,  ab,  de,  e,  ex,  or  in ;  or  it  is  used  without  a 
preposition,  as  the  ablative  of  cause,  manner,  means,  or  instru- 
ment ;  as, 

Aristotelem  non  deterruit  a  scribendo.  Cic.  Ex  assentando.  Ter.  Non 
videor  a  defendendis  hominlbus  discedere.  Cic.  Crescit  eundo.  Virg.  Rem 
qumrunt  mercaturis  faciendis.  Cic.  Orationem  Latlnam  legeudis  nostris 
efficies  plenidrem.  Id. 

This  ablative  also  occurs,  though  rarely,  after  pro  and  cum ;  as,  Pro 
vapulando.  Plaut.     Cum  loquendo.  Quinct. 


SUPINES. 

§  276.  I.  Supines  in  um  are  followed  by  the  same 
cases  as  their  verbs ;  as, 

Non  Qraiis  servltum  matribus  ibo,  I  shall  not  go  to  serve  Grecian 
matrons.  Virg.  Eurypplum  citatum  oracula  Phoebi  mittimus,  We  send 
Eurypylus  to  consult  the  oracle  of  Apollo.  Id. 

II.  Supines  in  um  follow  verbs  of  motion,  and  serve 
to  denote  the  purpose  of  the  motion  ;  as, 

Te  id,  admonitum  venio.  Plaut.  Cubitum  discesslmus.  Cic.  Ire  dejec- 
tum  monumenta  regis.  Hor.  So  after  participles ;  as,  Patriam  defensum 
revocdtus.  Nep.     Spectatum  admissi.  Hor. 

Remark  1.  Supines  in  um  sometimes  follow  verbs  which  do  not  ex- 
press motion  ;  as,  Do  JUiam  nuptum.  Ter.     Vos  ultum  injurias  hortor.  Sail. 

Rem.  2.  The  supine  in  um  with  eo  often  forms  a  periphrasis  equiva- 
lent to  the  same  mood  and  tense  of  the  verb  from  which  the  supine  is 
formed  ;  as,  Ne  bonos  omnes  perditum  eant  (Sail.),  foe  perdant.  Ereptum 
eunt  (id.),  for  eripiunt.     Ultum  ivit  (Tac),  for  ultus  est 


248  SYNTAX. SUPINES. 

'Rem.  3.  The  supin/;  in  urn  most  frequently  occurs  with  the  infinitive 
iri,  with  which  it  forms  the  future  infinitive  passive ;  as,  Brutuvi  visum 
iri  a  me  puto.  Cic.  In  this  construction  the  accusative  properly  depends 
upon  the  supine,  and  iri  is  used  impersonally ;  thus,  "  1  suppose  (that  it 
is  going  by  me),  i.  e.  that  I  am  going  to  see  Brutus." 

Rem.  4.  Instead  of  the  supine  in  um  after  a  verb  of  motion,  a  gerund 
or  gerundive  in  the  accusative  with  ad,  or  in  the  genitive  with  causd  or 
gratid,  also  the  subjunctive  with  ut  or  qui,  and  a  present  or  future  partici- 
ple active,  may  be  used  to  express  a  purpose.  For  the  gerund  and  gerun- 
dive, see  §  275 ;  for  the  subjunctive  with  ut,  §  262, — with  qui,  §  264  ;  and 
for  participles,  §  274. 

The  infinitive,  also,  is  sometimes  used  by  the  poets,  instead  of  the 
supine,  to  express  a  purpose.     See  §  271. 

III.  The  supine  in  u  is  used  to  limit  the  meaning  of 
adjectives  signifying  wonderful,  agreeable,  easy  or  difficult, 
worthy  or  unworthy,  honorable  or  base,  and  a  few  others ; 
as, 

Mirablle  dictu  I  Wonderful  to  tell,  or  to  be  told  !  Virg.  Jucundum  cog- 
nltu  atque  audltu,  Pleasant  to  be  known  and  heard.  Cic.  Res  factu  facllis , 
A  thing  easy  to  be  done.  Ter.  Locus  adltu  difficllis.  Sail.  Turpia 
dictu.  Cic.     Optimum  factu.  Id. 

Remark  1.  The  principal  adjectives  after  which  the  supine  in  u  occurs, 
are  affaMlis,  arduus,  asper,  bonus,  dignus,indignus,  facllis,  difficllis, fozdus, 
gravis,  honestus,  horrendus,  incredibllis,  jucundus,  injucundus,  memorabllis, 
pulcher,  rants,  turpis,  and  utilis. 

Rem.  2.  The  supine  in  u  is  used  also  after  the  nouns  fas, 
nefas,  and  opus  ;  as, 

Hoc  fas  est  dictu.  Cic.    JYefas  dictu.  Ovid.     Dictu  opus  est.  Ter. 

Rem.  3.  As  the  supine  in  u  is  commonly  translated  by  a  passive  form, 
it  is  placed  under  the  passive  voice.  In  many  case's,  however,  it  may 
with  equal  or  greater  propriety  be  translated  actively.  It  seems  not  to 
4iffer  in  its  nature  from  other  verbal  nouns  in  us,  of  the  fourth  declension. 
In  the  expressions,  Obsondtu  redeo  (Plaut.),  Cubltu  surgat  (Cato),  ob- 
sondtu  and  cubltu,  though  following  verbs,  are  by  some  considered  as 
supines,  by  others  as  nouns  depending  on  a  preposition  understood. 

The  supine  in  u,  oven  when  it  follows  adjectives,  might,  as  a  verbal 
noun,  be  referred  to  §  250. 

Rem.  4.  Instead  of  the  supine  in  u,  an  infinitive,  a  gerund  or  gerun- 
dive with  ad,  or  a  verbal  noun  in  the  ablative,  and  sometimes  in  the 
dative  or  accusative,  may  be  used ;  as,  Ardua  imitdtu,  ceterum  cognosci 
utilia.  Val.  Max.  Rlud  autem  facile  ad  credendum  est.  Cic.  Opus  pro- 
scriptione  dignum.  Plin.  Aqua  potui  jucunda.  Id.  Facilior  ad  intellec- 
tum  atque  imitationem.  Quinct. 

The  fonstruction  with  ad  and  the  gerund,  or  with  sum  and  the  infini- 
tive, is  used  by  the  best  writers  after  facllis,  difficllis,  and  jucundus.  The 
most  common  construction  of  dignus  is  with  qui  and  the  subjunctive 
See  §  264,  9. 


SYNTAX. ADVERBS.  249 


ADVERBS. 

§  277.  Adverbs  modify  or  limit  the  meaning  of  verbs 
adjectives,  and  sometimes  of  other  adverbs ;  as, 

Bend  mones,  You  advise  well.  Ter.  Fortissimd  urgentes,  Most  vigor 
ously  pressing  on.  Plin.  Mold  narrando.  Ter.  Longd  dissimllis.  Cic. 
Valdd  bend.  Id. 

Remark  1.     Adverbs  sometimes,  also,  modify  nouns;  as, 
Homerus  plank,  orator.  Cic.     Admddum  puella.  Liv.     Nihil  admddum. 
Cic. 

Rem.  2.  Adverbs  may  also  modify  adjective  pronouns,  and 
prepositions  ;  as, 

Plane  noster.  Cic.     Pauld  ultra  eum  locum.  Cobs. 

Rkm.  3.  A  negative  adverb,  modifying  another  negative 
word,  destroys  the  negation  ;  as, 

Non  parere  noluit,  He  was  not  unwilling  to  obey.  Nep.  Maud  igndra 
mali,  Not  ignorant  of  evil.  Virg.  Nee  vero  non  omni  supplicio  digni.  Cic. 
liaud  nihil  est,  It  is  something.  Ter.  So,  nonnulli,  some  ;  nonnuhquamt 
sometimes. 

Rem.  4.  When  the  subject  and  predicate  of  a  proposition 
are  both  modified  by  negative  words,  and  also  when  the  predi- 
cate contains  two  negatives,  the  proposition  is  affirmative ;  as, 

Nemo  non  videt,  Every  one  sees.  Cic.  So,  if  both  the  antecedent  and 
the  predicate  of  a  relative  clause  are  negative,  the  proposition  is  ailirma- 
tive  ;  as,  Nemo  est,  qui  ncsciat ;  Every  body  knows.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  Two  negatives,  however,  though  connected  as  above  speci- 
fied, sometimes  strengthen  the  negation  ;  as,  Neque  ille  haud  objiciet  mild. 
Plaut.  Jura  te  non  nociiurum  homlni  nernlni.  id.  Especially  are  neque, 
nee,  and  sometimes  mm,  thus  used  alter  a  negative,  instead  oi  aut  or  vel ; 
as,  Non  me  carminlbus  vincet,  nee  Orpheus,  nee  Linus.  Virg.  Nerninem, 
non  re,  non  verbo,  nonvultu  denique  offendi.  Cic.  Nullius  ret  neque  pries, 
neque  manceps  /actus  est.  Nep. 

Rem.  6.  Non  is  sometimes  omitted  after  non  modd  or  non 
solum,  when  followed,  in  a  subsequent  clause,  by  ne  quidem;  as, 

Mihi  non  modd  irasci,  sed  ne  dolere  quidem  impune  licet, ....  not  only  not 
to  be  angry,  but....  Cic.  Cum  senatui  non  solum  jucdre  rempubllcam,  sed 
ne  lugere  quidem  liciret.  Id. 

Non  is  also  rarely  omitted  after  non  modd  when  followed  by  sed  or  veriim 
with  etiam  ;  as,  Qui  non  modd  eafutura  timet,  veriim  etiamfert,  sustinetque 
prcesentia;  Who  not  only  does  not  fear....  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  Facile,  in  the  sense  of  undoubtedly,  clearly,  is  joined  to  super- 
latives, and  words  of  similar  import ;  as,  Vir  unus  totius  Grceciai  facile 
doctissimus.  Cic.     Homo  regionis  illius  virtute  facile  princeps.  Id. 

Rem.  8.  Adverbs  are  sometimes  equivalent  to  phrases  con- 
taining an  antecedent  and  a  relative,  both  of  which  would  be 
in  an  oblique  case. 


250  SYNTAX. CONJUNCTIONS. 

When  thus  resolved,  the  antecedent  will  be  found  to  modify  some  word 
in  its  own  clause,  and  the  relative  to  serve  both  as  a  connective  for  a  sub- 
sequent clause,  and  a  modifier  of  some  word  contained  in  it.  Hence, 
such  adverb  serves  the  threefold  purpoae  of  a  connective  and  a  double 
modifier;  as, 

Ed  postquam  Coesar  pcrv&nit,  obsldes  poposcit;  After  Ccesar  came  thither, 
he  demanded  hostages  (Cass.)  ;  i.  e.  Obsldes  poposcit  post  id  tempus,  in  quo 
ed  pervenit;  He  demanded  hostages  after  the  time  at  which  he  came  thither; 
where  post  id  tempus  modifies  poposcit,  and  in  quo  serves  as  a  connective, 
and  also  modifies  pervenit. 

Frequently,  for  greater  precision,  an  additional  adverb  is  introduced, 
which,  in  the  resolution  of  the  phrase,  stands  in,  and  sometimes  supplies, 
the  antecedent  clause  ;  as,  Ed  postquam  pervenit,  turn  obsldes  poposcit, .... 
then  he  demanded  hostages;  i.  e.  Obsldes  poposcit  tempore, post  id  tempus 
in  quo  ed  pervenit;  He  demanded  hostages  at  a  time  subsequent  to  the  time 
at  which  he  came  thither.  So,  Cum  venit  calamltas,  turn  detrimentum  accip- 
\tur  (Cic),  i.  e.  Detrimentum  eo  tempore  accipltur,  in  quo  venit  calamltas. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

$  278.  Copulative  and  disjunctive  conjunctions,  and 
some  others,  connect  words  which  are  in  the  same  con- 
struction. 

Words  are  in  the  same  construction,  when  they  stand  in  the  same  rela- 
tion to  Borne  other  word  or  words  in  the  sentence.  Hence  conjunctions 
connect  the  same  cases  of  nouns,  adjectives,  and  pronouns,  the  same  moods 
of  verbs,  and  adverbs  and  prepositions  relating  to  the  same  word ;  as, 

Pulvis  et  umbra  sumus,  We  are  dust  and  shade.  Hor.  Si  tu  et  Tullia 
vale  Lis,  ego  e£  "Cicero  vale~mus.  Cic.  Aggere  jacto  turribusywe  constitutis. 
Cces.  Clarus  et  honoratus  vir,  An  illustrious  and  honorable  man.  Id. 
Casar  Remos  cohortatus,  liberaliterque  oratione  prosecutus.  Caes.  Pater 
tuus,  quern  colui  et  dilexi.  Cic.  Cum  triumphum  egeris,  censorque  fueris, 
et  obieris  legdtus.  Id.  Cum  ad  oppldum  accessisset,  castraque  ibi  poneret. 
Cffls.  Ades  anlmo,  et  omitte  timorem.  Cic.  Ea  videre  ac  perspicere 
potestis.  Id.  Graviter  et  copiose  dixisse  dicltur.  Id.  Cum  fratre  an  sine. 
Id. 

Remark  1.  This  rule  includes  the  copulative  conjunctions  ac,  atque, 
et,  etiam,  que,  nee,  neque,  the  disjunctives  aut,  seu,  sive,  ve,  vel,  neve,  neu, 
and  also  quam,  prceterquam,  nisi,  an,  nempe,  quamvis,  nedum,  sed,  autem, 
veriim,  and,  in  general,  such  as,  when  used  to  connect  clauses,  do  not  im- 
ply a  dependence  of  the  following  upon  the  preceding  clause.  To  these 
may  be  added  the  adverbs  of  likeness,  ceu,  tanquam,  quasi,  ut,  &c. ;  as, 
JVec  census,  nee  clarum  nomen  avorum,  sed  probltas  magnos  ingeniumque 
facit.  Ovid.  Philosdphi  negant  quenquam  virum  bonum  esse,  nisi  sapien- 
tem.  Cic.     Gloria  virtutem  tanquam  umbra  sequltur.  Id. 

Rem.  2.  Words  thus  connected  are  sometimes  in  different  cases, 
though  in  the  same  construction ;  as,  Mea  et  reipublicse  interest.  Cic. 
(See  §  219.)  Sive  es  Romoa,  sive  in  Eplro.  Id.  (See  §  §  221  and  254.)  In 
Mettii  descendat  judlcis  aures,  et  patris  et  nostras.  Hor.     See  §  211,  Rem.  3. 

Rem.  3.  The  above  conjunctions  connect  not  only  single 
words,  but  clauses  whose  construction  is  the  same ;    that  is, 


SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORDS.  251 

whose  subjects  are  in  the  same  case,  and  their  verbs  in  the 
same  mood ;  as, 

Concidunt  venti,fugiuntque  nubes ;  The  winds  subside,  and  the  clouds 
disperse.  Hor.  Locum,  quern  et  non  coquit  sol,  et  tangit  ros.  Varr.  Ludi 
decern  per  dies  facti  sunt,  neque  res  ulla  pratermissa  est.  Cic.  Fides,  ut 
altd  stet  nive  candidum  Soracte,  nee  jam  sustineant  onus  silvae  laborantesf 
geluque  flumina  constiterint  acuto.  Hor.  Intelligltis  et  animum  ci  prcesto 
fuisse,  nee  consilium  defuisse.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  As  the  subjunctive  is  often  used  for  the  imperative,  they  may 
be  connected  by  the  above  conjunctions ;  as,  Disce  nee  invideas.  Pers. 

Rem.  5.  The  indicative  and  subjunctive  may  also  be  thus  connected,  if 
the  clause  of  the  latter  is  not  dependent;  as,  JVec  satis  scio,  nee,  si  sciam, 
dicHre  ausim.  Liv. 

Rem.  6.  The  conjunction  is  often  omitted ;  as,  Cui  Roma  domus,uxor, 
liberi,  procurator  esset.  Cic.  Qua  vitia  sunt  non  senectutis,  sed  incrtis, 
igndva,  somniculosa  senectutis.  Id.     Abiit,  excessit,  evdsit,  erupit.  Id. 

Rem.  7  Copulative  and  disjunctive  conjunctions  are  often  used,  before 
each  of  two  or  more  connected  words  or  clauses,  in  order  to  mark  the 
connection  more  forcibly  ;  as,  Et  pecunia persuddet,  et  gratia,  et  auctorltas 
diccntis,  et  dignltas,  et  postremd  aspectus.  Quinct.  Hoc  et  turpe,  nee 
tamen  tutum.  Cic.  Neque  nata  est,  et  aterna  est.  Id.  Et  tibi  et  mihi 
voluptdti  fore.  Id.     Res  ipsa  aut  invitdbit  aut  dchortabitur.  Id. 

In  like  manner  nunc. ...nunc,  simul....simul,  partim....partim,  qud....qua, 

turn turn,  cum. ...turn,  are  used  before  words  or  clauses.     Turn. ...turn  not 

only  signify  both and,  but  also  at  one  time at  another  time.     Cum 

turn  generally  give  a  greater  emphasis  to  the  latter  word  or  clause,  which 
is  often  increased  by  the  addition  of  verb,  certb,  pracipuh,  imprimis, 
maztm&,  &c. ;  as,  Luxuria,  cum  omni  atdti  turpis,  turn  maxime  senectuti 
fozdissima  est.  Cic. 

Rem.  8.  To  connect  different  names  of  the  same  person  or  thing,  site 
or  seu,  rather  than  aut  or  vel,  is  employed ;  as,  Mars  sive  Mavors. 

Rem.  9.    Ac  and  atque  signify  as  and  than  after  adjectives  and  adverbs 

denoting  similarity  or  dissimilarity;  as,  Similiter/aasac  si  me  roges, ag 

if  you  should  ask  me.  Cic.  Me  colit  seque  atque  patrdnum  suum,....as  much 
as....  Id.  Si  aliter  scribo  ac  sentio,  If  I  write  otherwise  than  1  think.  Id. 
Mi  sunt  aliq  ingenio  atque  tu.  Plaut. 


ARRANGEMENT. 

I.    OF    WORDS. 

§  270.  1.  In  English,  after  connectives,  are  placed,  first,  the  subject, 
and  the  words  which  modify  or  limit  it ;  next,  the  verb  and  its  modifiers  ; 
then  the  object  of  the  verb ;  and  last,  prepositions,  and  the  words  depend- 
ing upon  them.     This  is  called  the  logical  or  natural  order. 

2.  In  a  Latin  sentence,  after  connectives,  are  placed, 
first,  the  subject  and  its  modifiers  ;  then  the  oblique  cases, 
and  other  words  which  depend  upon  or  modify  the  verb  ■ 
and  last  of  all,  the  verb. 


252  SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORDS. 

This  arrangement,  however,  though  common,  is  by  no  means  invariable, 
since  it  is  a  general  rule,  that  the  most  emphatic  xcord  in  a  sentence  is  to  be 
placed  first. 

3.  Connectives  generally  stand  at  the  beginning  of  a  clause. 

The  following  connectives  may  stand  either  in  the  first  or  second  place, 
and  sometimes  in  the  third  : — equldem,  ergo,  etinim,  etiam,  ideo,  igltur,  itd- 
que,  licet,  namque,  quia,  quamquam,  quippe,  quoniam,  saltern,  sed,  tamen, 
ut,  utpdte,  and  some  others. 

Autem,  enim,  and  verb  (but),  commonly  occupy  the  second  place,  some- 
times the  third ;  as,  Jlle  enim  revocdtus  resisttre  ccepit.  Cses.  Ego  vero 
vellem,  affuisses.  Cic.  The  enclitics  que,  ne,  ne,  are  usually  subjoined  to 
the  first  word  in  a  clause. 

Quidem  and  quoque  are  subjoined  to  the  emphatic  word  in  a  clause  ;  as, 
Verho  Me  reus  crat,  re  quidem  verb  Oppianlcus.  Cic.  Me  scilicet  maxlmd, 
sed  proxlmb  ilium  quoque  fefellissem.  Id. 

In  negative  sentences,  ne  precedes,  and  quidem  follows,  the  emphatic 
word  ;  as,  Ne  ad  Catoncm  quidem  provocdbo.  Cic. 

4.  When  a  word  is  repeated  in  the  same  clause,  so  that  one  is  opposed 
to,  or  distinguished  from,  the  other,  they  must  stand  together  ;  as,  Hom- 
ines hominibus  maxlmd  utiles  esse  possunt.  Cic.  Equites  alii  alio  dilapsi 
sunt.  Liv. 

5.  Words  used  antithetically  are  also  placed  near  each  other ;  as,  Dum 
tacent,  clamant.  Cic.     Fragile  corpus  animus  sempiternus  movet.  Id. 

6.  Inquam  and  usually  aio,  introducing  a  quotation,  follow  one  or  more  of 
the  words  quoted  ;  as,  "  Jfon  ndsti  quid  pater,"  inquit,  "  Chrysippus  dicat." 
Hor.     "  Qttirf,"  aio,  "  tun  crinilna  prodis  ?  "  Ovid. 

7.  Adjectives  are  commonly  placed  after  their  nouns,  especially  when  any 
tiling  is  dependent  on  them.  When  a  noun  is  limited  by  another  noun, 
as  well  as  by  an  adjective,  the  adjective  usually  precedes  both  ;  as,  Ulla 
officii  pr&cepta.  Cic.     Tuum  erga  dignitatem  meam  studium.  Id. 

Demonstratives,  and  the  adjectives  primus,  medius,  &c.  (see  §  205, 
Rem.  17),  usually  precede  their  nouns ;  as,  Ea  res.  Cres.  His  ipsis  ver- 
bis. Cic.     Media  nox.  Cses.     Rellqua  JEgyptus.  Cic. 

8.  Monosyllables  are  usually  prefixed  to  longer  words  with  which  they 
are  connected  ;  as,  Vir  clarisslmus.  Cic.     Vis  tempestatis.  Caes. 

9.  When  nouns  are  put  in  apposition,  the  one  which  explains  or  defines 
the  other  is  generally  put  last ;  as,  Marcus  Tullius  consul.  Sail.  Opes 
irritamenta  malorum.  Ovid. 

In  the  arrangement  of  names  of  persons,  the  pramomen  stands  first, 
next  the  nomen,  third  the  cognomen,  and  last  the  agnomen ;  as,  Publius 
Cornelius  Scipio  Africanus.  The  prsenomen  is  usually  denoted  by  a 
letter. 

10.  Oblique  cases  precede  the  words  upon  which  they  de- 
pend, but  they  follow  prepositions  ;  as, 

PopQli  Romdni  laus  est.  Cic.  Laudis  avidi,  pecuniro  liberales.  Sail. 
Cunctis  esto  benignus,  nulli  blandus,  paucis  familidris,  omnibus  aquus. 

Sen.     Monumentum  vsre  perennius.  Hor.     Hanc  tibi  dono  do.  Ter. Ad 

meridiem  spectans.  Cic.     Extra  periculum.  Id. 

Genitives  depending  upon  neuter  adjectives  are  commonly  placed  last  j 
as,  Incerta  for  tuna.  Liv.     JVec  tibi  plus  cordis,  sed  minus  oris  inest.  Ovid. 

When  a  noun  which  is  governed  by  a  preposition,  is  modified  by  other 
words  which  precede  it,  the  preposition  usually  stands  before  the  words  by 


SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORD*.  253 

which  the  noun  is  modified  ;  as,  A  primd  luce  ad  scxtam  horam.  Liv.  Ad 
privatum  dolorcm  fuit  luctuosum.  Cic.     Ad  arilmi  mei  Icetitiam.  Id. 

Sometimes,  however,  the  preposition  comes  between  its  noun  and  an 
adjective,  or  a  genitive  by  which  the  noun  is  modified ;  as,  Nulld  in  rt. 
Cic.     Justis  de  causis.  Id.     Suos  inter  cequdlcs.  Id. 

Per,  in  adjurations,  is  often  separated  by  other  words  ;  as,  Per  ego  te  deos 
oro.  Ter. 

Tenus  and  versus  follow  their  cases,  and  sometimes  other  preposition*, 
especially  when  joined  with  relative  pronouns. 

11.  Infinitives  precede  the  verbs  on  which  they  depend  ;  as, 

Jugurtha,  ubi  eos  Afttcd  decessisse  ratus  est,  neque  propter  loci  naturam 
Cirtam  armis  expugnare  possit,  mamia  circumdat.  Sail.  Servlre  magis 
quam  imperare  parati  estis.  Id. 

12.  A  word  which  has  the  same  relation  to  several  words,  either  pre- 
cedes or  follows  them  all ;  as,  Vir  gravis  et  sapiens.  Cic.  Clarus  et  hono- 
rdtus  vir.  Id. 

13.  Relatives  are  commonly  placed  after  their  antecedents, 
and  as  near  to  them  as  possible ;  as, 

Qui  sim,  ex  eo,  quern  ad  te  misi,  cognosces.  Sail.  Literas  ad  te  misi,per 
quas  gratias  tibi  egi.  Cic. 

14.  Quisque  is  generally  placed  after  se,  suus,  qui,  ordinals  and  superla- 
tives ;  as,  Suos  quisque  debet  tueri.  Cic.  Satis  superque  est  sibi  sudrum 
cuique  rerum  cura.  Id.  Severltas  animadversionis  infimo  cuique  gratis- 
slvia.  Id.     Quisque  very  rarely  begins  a  proposition. 

If*.  An  adverb  is  usually  placed  immediately  before  the  word  which  it 
qualifies;  but  if  the  same  word  is  modified  by  the  oblique  case  of  a  noun, 
the  latter  commonly  follows  the  adverb  ;  as,  Male  parta  male  dilabuntur. 
Cic.     Nihil  tarn  asperum  neque  tarn  difficile  esse,  quod  non  cupidissime 

facturi  essent.  Sail. Imperium  facile  Us  artibus  retinetur,  quibus  initio 

partum  est.  Id.,  Sed  max! me  adolescentium  famUiaritdtes  appetebat.  ^d. 
Non  tarn  in  bellis  et  in  prodiis,  quam  in  promissis  etf.de  firmiorem.  Cic. 

In  some  phrases,  custom  has  established  a  certain  order,  which  must  be 
observed  and  imitated  ;  as,  Ne  quid  respubUca  detrimcnti  capiat.  Cic. 

1G.  Exceptions  to  the  foregoing  principles  are  very  numerous.  These 
may  arise  from  a  regard  to  the  narmonv  of  the  sentence,  from  poetic 
license,  or  from  the  following  rule,  which  sometimes  modifies  nearly  all 
the  preceding  : — 

The  emphatic  word  is  placed  before  the  word  or  words  con' 
nected  with  it  which  are  not  emphatic. 

17.  A  sentence  should  not  close  like  a  hexameter  verse,  with  a  dactyl 
and  spondee;  as,  Esse  videtur ;  nor,  in  general,  with  a  monosyllable. 

18.  Hiatus  should  be  avoided ;  that  is,  a  word  beginning  with  a  vowel 
should  not  follow  a  word  ending  with  a  vowel. 

19.  A  concurrence  of  long  words  or  long  measures, — of  short  words  or 
short  measures, — of  words  beginning  alike  or  ending  alike, — should  be 
avoided. 

22 


254  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS. 


OF    CLAUSES. 


$  280.  A  compound  sentence,  in  which  the  leading  clause  is 
divided  by  the  insertion  of  one  or  more  subordinate  clauses,  is  called  a 
period. 

1.  In  a  regular  period,  the  leading  verb  is  placed  at  the  end, 
and  the  subordinate  clauses  between  the  parts  of  the  leading 
clause  ;  as, 

Pausanias,  ciim  semlanimis  de  templo  eldtus  esset,  confestim  anlmam 
efflavit ;  Pausanias,  when  he  had  been  carried  out  of  the  temple  but  just 
alive,  immediately  expired.  Nep.  Ego,  si  ah  improbis  et  perdltis  civlbus 
rernpublicam  tcntri  viderem,  sicul  et  mcis  temporlbus  scimus,  et  nonnidlis 
aJi.is  uccidisse  acc.eplmus,  non  modo  proemiis,  qua.  apvd  me  minimum  valent, 
sed  ne  periculis  quidem  compulsus  ullis,  quibus  tamen  moventur  etiamfor- 
tisslmi  viri,  ad  eorum  causam  me  adjungerem.  Cic. 

2.  If  the  verbs  of  the  leading  and  dependent  clauses  have  the  same  sub- 
ject, or  the  same  word  depending  on  them,  they  are  commonly  formed 
into  a  period ;  as,  Antigonus,  qiaim  adversiis  Selcucum  Lysimachumque 
dimicarct,  in  proelio  occisus  est.  Nep. 

So,  also,  when  the  word  which  depends  on  the  verb  of  the  leading 
clause  is  the  subject  of  the  dependent  clause ;  as,  Manlio,  qivum  dictator 
fuisset,  Marcus  Pomponius  tribunus  plebis  diem  dixit.  Cic. 

3.  When  obscurity  would  arise  from  separating  the  leading  subject  and 
verb  by  dependent  words  or  clauses,  they  are  often  placed  together  at  the 
beginning  or  end  of  the  sentence  ;  as,  Lata?  (sunt)  deinde  leges,  non  solum 
quae  regni  suspicione  consulem  absolverent,  sed  qua  adeo  in  contrarium 
vert&renl,  ut  popularem  etiamfaccrcnt.  Liv. 

The  position  of  the  leading  verb  is  also  often  otherwise  varied,  from 
regard  to  emphasis,  to  avoid  monotony,  or  to  prevent  its  meeting  with  the 
verb  of  the  last  dependent  clause. 

4.  When  one  clause  is  interrupted  by  the  introduction  of  another,  the 
latter  should  be  finished  before  the  first  is  resumed. 

5.  Clauses  expressing  a  cause,  a  condition,  a  time,  or  a  comparison,  usu- 
ally precede  the  clauses  to  which  they  relate. 

6.  A  short  clause  usually  stands  before,  rather  than  after  a  long  one. 


ANALYSIS. 

§  281.  The  analysis  of  a  proposition,  or  of  a  compound 
sentence,  consists  in  dividing  it  into  the  several  parts  of  which 
it  is  composed,  and  pointing  out  their  mutual  relations. 

In  analyzing  a  proposition,  it  is  first  to  be  divided  into  its  logical  subject 
and  predicate.     See  §  §  200,  201,  202. 

If  the  logical  subject  consists  of  more  than  one  word,  its  grammatical 
subject  should  be  pointed  out,  and  distinguished  as  simple  or  compound 
See  §201,1.  II. 

When  the  grammatical  subject  is  determined,  the  words  which  modify 
or  limit  it  should  next  be  specified,  and  then  the  words  which  modify 
them  and  so  on,  until  the  logical  subject  is  exhausted.     See  §  201,  III. 


SYNTAX. ANALYSIS.  255 

In  analyzing  the  logical  predicate,  the  grammatical  predicate  should 
first  be  mentioned,  then  the  words  which  modify  or  limit  it,  and  their 
modifiers,  until  the  logical  predicate  is  exhausted.     See  §  202. 

In  analyzing  a  proposition,  the  rules  for  the  agreement  and  depen  "ence 
of  words  should  be  given,  and  likewise  their  various  inflections. 

The  analysis  of  a  compound  sentence  requires,  first,  its  resolution  into  ta 
several  component  propositions;  and,  secondly,  their  analysis  in  the  man 
ner  before  mentioned.     See  §  203. 

In  resolving  a  sentence  into  its  component  clauses,  the  participial  con- 
structions equivalent  to  clauses  should  be  mentioned,  and  ellipses  supplied. 
See  §  203,  5. 

When  the  compound  sentence  is  resolved,  the  connection  of  the  clauses 
should  be  pointed  out,  and  whether  they  are  dependent  or  independent. 
See  §  203,  2.  In  either  case,  the  connective  words,  if  any,  should  be 
mentioned,  and  the  connection,  if  any  exists,  with  the  preceding  sentence. 
See  §  203,  4.  When  clauses  are  dependent,  the  relation  in  which  they 
stand  should  be  explained,  the  character  of  the  connectives  stated,  and  the 
rules  for  the  moods  of  the  verbs  given.     See  §  §  2G2 — 2GG  and  272,  273. 

The  following  are  examples  of  the  analysis  of  simple  and  compound 
sentences  : — 

1.  S.xvius  ventis  agitatur  ingens  pinus,  The  great  pine  ia 
more  violently  shaken  by  the  winds.  Hot. 

Ingens  pinus  is  the  logical  subject ;  sarcitis  ventis  agitatur  is  the  logical 
predicate. 

The  grammatical  subject  is  pinus :  this  is  modified  by  ingens.* 

The  grammatical  predicate  is  agitatur  :  this  is  modified  by  satvius*  and 
vent  is. e 

Pinus  is  a  common  noun/  of  the  second  and  fourth  declension,'  femi- 
nine gender/  and  nominative  case.' 

Ingens  is  an  adjective,  of  the  third  declension,  and  of  one  termination,* 
in  the  nominative  case,  feminine  gender,  agreeing  with  pinus.* 

Agitatur  is  an  active  *  frequentative  l  verb,  of  the  first  conj.  from  agita^ 
derived  from  ago  [Name  its  principal  parts],  formed  from  the  1st  root, 
[Give  the  formations  of  that  root.]  It  is  in  the  passive  voice,  indicative 
mood,  present  tense,  singular  number,  third  person,  agreeing  with  pintis.m 

Swvius  is  an  adverb,  in  the  comparative  degree,  from  sa:v6  or  s<evlter,H 
derived  from  the  adjective  satous,0  modifying  the  verb  agitdtur.p 

Vends  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  second  declension,7  masculine  gen- 
der/ in  the  plural  number,  ablative  case.* 

2.  Mithriddtes,  duarum  et  viginti  gentiwn  rex,  totidem  Un- 
guis jura  dixit;  Mithridates,  king  of  twenty-two  nations,  pro- 
nounced judicial  decisions  in  as  many  languages.  Plin. 

The  logical  subject  is  Mithridates  duarum  et  viginti  gentium  rex. 

The  logical  predicate  is  totXdcm  Unguis  jura  dixit. 

The  grammatical  subject  is  Mithriddtes  :  this  is  modified  by  rex.1  Rex 
is  limited  by  gentium,  which  is  itself  limited  by  duarum  and  viginti.9 
Et  connects  duarum  and  viginti." 

$201,  III.  3 
&.  Rkm.  1 

$  278. 


•  $201,  HI.  3. 
t$202,  HI.  3. 

/  $  29,  2. 

fi  201,  IV.  3. 

'$202,  III.  2. 

A.  $  HI. 

*$2G. 

i  $205. 

•  ft  w. 

*  $  141,  1. 

187,  II.  1. 

9  $38. 

209. 

••$40. 

194. 

•  $  247. 

192,  II. 

*  $201,111.  I. 

277 

"$201,111.2 

256  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS. 

The  grammatical  predicate  is  dixit,  which  is  limited  by  jura a  and  Un- 
guis* and  the  latter  by  totidem. 

Mitliriddtes  is- a  proper  noun,6  of  the  third  declension,'  masculine  gen- 
der/ and  nominative  case. 

Rex  is  a  common  noun,  3d  dec.,*  masc.  gen./  in  apposition  with  Mithri- 
datesS 

Gentium  is  a  com.  noun.,  3d  dec./  fem.  gen.,*  in  the  genitive  plural,* 
limiting  rex.k 

Duarum  is  a  numeral  adj.,  of  the  cardinal*  kind,  in  the  genitive  case, 
fem.  gen.,  agreeing  with  ge?itium.m 

Et  is  a  copulative  conjunction.*1 

Viginti  is  a  cardinal  numeral  adjective  indeclinable,1  limiting  gentium.1* 

Dixit  is  an  active  verb,0  of  the  third  conjugation/  from  dico  [Give  the 
principal  parts],9  formed  from  the  second  root  [Give  the  formations  of  that 
root],  in  the  act.  voice.,  ind.  mood,  perf.  indefinite  tense,r  sing,  num.,  3d 
pers.,  agreeing  with  Mithridates* 

Jura,  a  com.  noun,  3d  dec.,1  $eut.  gen.,u  plur.  num.,  ace.  case,  the  ob- 
ject of  dixit.'* 

Linguis,  acorn,  noun,  1st  dec,  fem.  gen.,"  plural  num.,  ablative  case.* 

Totidem,  an  adj.,  indeclinable,"  in  the  plural  number,  limiting  linguis. 

3.  Romana  pubes,  seddto  tandem  pavdrp,  postquam  ex  tarn 
turbido  die  serena  et  tranquilla  lux  rcdiit,  ubi  vacuum  sedem 
rcgiam  vidit,  etsi  satis  credebat  patrihus ,  qui  proximi  stcterant, 
sublimem  raptum  procelld ;  tamen,  velut  orbitatis  metu  icta, 
moestum   aliquamdiu  silentium  obtinuit.    Liv. 

The  preceding  compound  sentence  constitutes  a  period,*  and  it  may  be 
resolved  into  the  following  clauses  : — 

1.  Romana  pubes  tamen,  velut  orbitatis  metu  icta,  ma-stum  aliquamdiu 
silentium  obtinuit,  —which  is  the  leading  clause.00 

2.  seddto  tandem  pavore, 

3.  postquam  ex  tarn  turbido  die  serena  et  tranquilla  lux  rediit, 

4.  ubi  vidit, 

5.  vacuam  (esse)  sedem  regiam, 

6.  etsi  satis  credebat  patrlbus, 

7.  qui  proximi  stctgrant, 

8.  sublimem  raptum  procelld. 

In  the  preceding  clauses,  the  predicates  are  printed  in  Italics. 

The  grammatical  subject  of  the  leading  clause  is  pubes,  which  is  limited 
by  Romana  and  icta.  Icta  is  modified  by  velut  and  metu,  which  last  is  limit- 
ed by  orbitatis.  The  grammatical  predicate  of  that  clause  is  obtinuit  •  this 
is  limited  by  aliquamdiu  and  silentium,  which  is  itself  limited  by  mozstum. 

Pubes,  a  collective  noun,66  3ddec.,cc  fem.  gen./d  sing,  num.,  nom.  case. 

Romana,  a  patrial"  adj.,  of  the  1st  and  2d  dec.//  fem.  gen.,  sing.  num. 
nom.  case,  agreeing  with  pubes.ee 

Tamen,  an  adversative  conjunction,'**  relating  to  etsi  in  the  6th  clause, 


•  $  202,  III.  2.  r  §  77.             «  $  198,  1.  *  §  76.  y  §  116,  3.  <**  $  62. 
»§26.  *§62.             •$141.  «$66.  *  §  280.  "§104. 

•  $73.  *$83.              P§149.  "6  229.  «»  §  203,  3.  //§105. 
*$28.  *  *  211.           t$158.  "4$  38, 41.  "^e.  «&205. 
•478.  «  U  117,118.  r  A  145,1V.  *$247  «  $ 73.  ^$198,4 
'$204.  «»$205.            «$209. 


SYNTAX. ANALYSIS.  ^57 

and  denoting  that  the  predicate  of  this  clause  is  true,  notwithstanding  the 
concession  made  in  that  clause. 

Velut,  an  adverb,  modifying  icta.a 

Icta,  a  perf.  part,  pass.,  from  the  active  verb  ico,  3d  conj.1  [Principal  parts 
in  both  voices],  fern,  gen.,  sing,  num.,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  pubes.' 

Metu,  an  abstract  noun,d  4th  dec.,'  masc.  gen.,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case/ 

Orbitdtis,  an  abstract d  noun,  derived  from  orbus,  3d  dec./  fern,  gen.,* 
sing,  num.,  gen  case,  limiting  metu.* 

Obtinuit,  an  active  verb  of  the  2d  conj.,*  from  obtineo,  compounded  of 
prep,  ob  and  teneo '  [Give  the  principal  parts,  and  the  formations  of  the 
second  root],"*  in  the  active  voice,  ind.  mood.,  perf.  indef.  tense,  sing, 
num.,  3d  person,  agreeing  with  pubes." 

Miquamdiu,  an  adverb,  compounded  of  allquis  and  diu,°  and  limiting 
obtinuit.p 

Silentium,  a  com.  noun,  2d  dec,  neut.  gen.,?  sing,  num.,  ace.  case,  the 
object  of  obtinuit  r 

Mccstum,  an  adj.,  1st  and  2d  dec,  neut.  gen.,  sing  num.,  ace  case, 
agreeing  with  silentium.' 

The  2d  is  a  participial  clause,  equivalent  to  quum  pavor  tandem  seddlus 
esset.' 

Pavore,  an  abstract d  verbal"  noun,  from  paveo,  3d  dec,*  masc  gen.,** 
sing,  num.,  abl.  case,  absolute  with  seddto.* 

Seddto,  a  perf.  part,  pass.,  from  the  act.  verb  sedo,  of  the  1st  conj.,* 
[Principal  parts  in  both  voices],  mnsc  gen.,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case,*  agree- 
ing with  pavore.aa 

Tandem,  an  adverb  of  time,  modifying  seddto.bb 

Postquam,  an  adverb  of  time,  compounded  of  post  and  quam,  modifying 
obtinuit  and  rediit,  and  serving  to  connect  the  first  and  third  clauses." 

The  grammatical  subject  of  the  3d  clause  is  lux,  which  is  limited  by 
sere.na  and  tranquilla.  The  grammatical  predicate  is  rediit,  which  is  modi- 
fied by  postqvam  and  die.  Die  is  modified  by  turbXdo,  which  is  itself  modi- 
fied by  tarn. 

Lux,  a  com.  noun,  3d  dec,dd  fern,  gen.,"  sing,  num.,  nom.  case. 

Serena,  an  adj.,  1st  and  2d  dec,  fern,  gen.,  sing,  num.,  nom.  case,  agree- 
ing with  lux." 

bit,  a  copulative  conjunction,  connecting  serena  and  tranquilla/f 

Tranquilla,  like  serena. 

Rediit,  a  neuter  verb,  from  redeo,  compounded  of  insep.  prep,  red  gt  and 
eohh  [Prin.  parts],  ind.  mood.,  perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  person, 
agreeing  with  luxM 

Die,  a  com.  noun,  5th  dec,**  masc.  gen.,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case  after 
prep,  ex.11 

Turbldo,  an  adj.  agreeing  with  die.  Tarn,  an  adverb,  modifying  tur- 
hHdo.bb 

Ubi,  an  adverb  of  time,  and,  like  postquam,  a  connective,  and  a  double 
modifier.  It  connects  the  fourth  clause  to  the  first,  and  limits  the 
predicates  vidit  and  obtinuit.ec 

&277. 
158. 
,205. 
26. 
»87. 
j  247. 
*&72. 
fc&62. 


258  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS. 

The  subject  of  the  4th  clause  is  the  same  as  that  of"  the  first,  with  which 
it  is  connected  ;  it  is  therefore  omitted.* 

The  grammatical  predicate  of  the  4th  clause  is  vidit :  this  is  limited  by 
its  object,  which  is  the  5th  clause.* 

Vidit,  an  act.  verb,  2d  conj.  [Principal  parts  and  formation],  act.  voice, 
ind.  mood,  perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  pers.,  agreeing  with  pubca 
understood.' 

The  5th  clause  has  no  connective.  Its  grammatical  subject  is  sedem, 
which  is  limited  by  regiam.  Its  grammatical  predicate  is  (esse)  vacuam, 
the  former  being  understood. d 

Sedem,  a  com.  noun,  3d.  dec,  fern,  gen.,  sing,  num.,  ace.  case.* 

Regiam,  a  possessive  adj.,  derived  from  rex,  agreeing  with  sedem. 

Vacuam,  an  adj.,  agreeing  with  sedem. 

The  6th  clause  is  connected  to  the  leading  clause  by  the  concessive  / 
conjunction  etsi,  to  which  the  adversative  *  tamen  corresponds  in  the  first 
clause. 

Its  subject  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  leading  clause. 

Its  grammatical  predicate  is  credebat,  which  is  limited  by  satis  and 
patribus. 

Credebat,  a  neut.  verb,*  3d  conj.  [Principal  parts,  and  formations  of  1st 
root],  act.  voice,  ind.  mood,  imperf.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  pers.,  agreeing 
with  pubes  understood. 

Satis,  an  adverb  of  degree*  modifying  credebat.k 

Patribus,  a  com.  noun,  3d  dec./  masc.  gen.,"*  plur.  num.,  dat.  case, 
depending  upon  credebat,n  and  modified  by  the  relative  clause  following.0 

The  7th  clause,  which  is  connected  by  quip  to  the  preceding  one,  is  in- 
troduced to  show  the  situation  of  those  senators  at  the  time  of  the  removal 
of  Romulus. 

Qui  is  its  grammatical  subject,  and  is  a  relative  pronoun,5  masc.  gen., 
plur.  num.,  agreeing  with  patribus  understood/ 

StetSrant,  a  neut.  verb,*  1st  conj.,  irregular  in  its  2d  root*  [Principal 
parts,  and  formations  of  2d  root],  act.  voice,  ind.  mood,  plup.  tense,  3d  pers. 
plur.,  agreeing  with  qui.c 

Proxlmi,  an  adj.  of  the  superlative  degree'  [Compare  it],  1st  and  2d  dec, 
masc.  gen.,  plur.  num.,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  qui,  and  also  modifying 
steterant.u 

The  8th  clause  has  no  connective.  It  depends  on  the  verb  credebat. 
Its  subject  is  eum,  i.  e.  Romulum  understood.  Its  grammatical  predicate 
is  raptum  (esse)  which  is  modified  by  sublimem  and  procelld. 

Ravtum  (esse),  an  act.  verb,  3d  conj."  [Principal  parts  in  both  voices, 
and  formations  of  3d  root  in  the  passive],  pass,  voice,  infin.  mood,  perf. 
tense  with  the  meaning  of  plup.,  depending  on  credebat.10 

Sublimem,  an  adj.  of  3d  dec.  and  two  terminations,*  masc.  gen.,  sing, 
num.,  ace  case,  agreeing  with  Romulum  understood,"  and  also  modifying 
raptum  esse." 

Procelld,  a  com.  noun,  1st  dec.,*  fem.  gen.,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case.a* 

i  28.  r  «  206.  «  $  272. 

223.  «  §  165.  *  $  109. 

201,111.  4. «  $126,1.  y$205. 
203,4.         u  ft£05,  Rem.  15.    *$4l. 

136.  » ^  159.  "»$247. 


209,  Rem.  2,(1.)    g{ 

\  198,  4.             m 

229,  Rem.  5.           M 

\  142. 

209.                          i  « 

}  191,  Rem.  5.  o 

270,  Rem.  3.            * 

$  277.                 P 

239.                          J 

§71.                  1 

198,3. 

prosody. — quantity;  general  rules.    259 


PROSODY. 

$282.  Prosody  treats  of  the  quantity  of  syllables, 
and  the  laws  of  versification. 

QUANTITY. 

1.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  the  relative  time  occu- 
pied in  pronouncing  it. 

2.  A  syllable  is  either  long,  short,  or  common. 

A  long  syllable  requires  double  the  time  occupied  in  pro- 
nouncing a  short  one ;  as,  amdre. 

A  common  syllable  is  one  which,  in  poetry,  may  be  made 
either  long  or  short ;  as  the  middle  syllable  of  tenebrce. 

3.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  either  natural  or  accidental ; 
— natural,  when  it  depends  on  the  nature  of  its  vowel ;  acci- 
dental, when  it  depends  on  its  position. 

Thus  the  e  in  rtsisto  is  short  by  nature ;  while  in  rEstlti  it  is  long  by 
accident,  being  followed  by  two  consonants. 

4.  The  quantity  of  syllables  is  determined  by  certain  es- 
tablished rules,  or,  in  cases  not  included  in  the  rules,  by  the 
authority  of  the  poets. 

5.  The  rules  of  quantity  are  either  general  or  special.  The 
former  apply  alike  to  all  the  syllables  of  a  word,  the  latter  to 
particular  syllables. 

GENERAL  RULES. 

<§>  283.  I.  A  vowel  before  another  vowel,  or  a  diph- 
thong, is  short ;  as,  meus,  patrice.     Thus, 

Conscla  mens  recti  fain®  mendacla  ridet.  Ovid. 
Ipse  etiam  eximice  laudis  succensus  am&re.  Virg. 

So  also  when  h  comes  between  the  vowels,  since  h  is  ac- 
counted only  a  breathing ;   as,  nihil.     See  §  2.     Thus, 
De  rilhiLo  nihil,  in  nikllum  nil  posse  reverti.  Pers. 
Exc.  1.     Fio  has  the  i  long,  when  not  followed  by  er;   as, 
fiunttfiebam.     Thus, 

Omnia  jam  fient,  flirt  quae  posse  negabam.  Ovid. 
It  is  sometimes  found  long  even  before  er;  as,  fieret  (Ter.),  jtiri 
(Plaut.) 


260    prosody. — quantity;  general  rules. 

Exc.  2.     E  is  long  before  i  in  the  termination  of  the  geni- 
tive and  dative  of  the  fifth  declension;  us,  faciei.     Thus, 
Non  radii  solis,  neque  lucida  tela  dki.  Lucr. 
But  it  is  short  in  spti,  and  both  long  and  short  in  rei  mid/idci. 

Exc.  3.  A  is  long  in  the  penult  of  old  genitives  in  di  of 
the  first  declension ;  as,  aulai,  pictai. 

So  also  are  a  and  e  in  proper  names  in  alus  or  elus;  as,  Cuius,  Pom- 
peius.    Thus, 

/Ethereum  sensum,  atque  aurcit  simplTcis  ignem.   Virg. 
Acclpe,  Pompe~l,  deductum  carmen  ab  illo.  Ovid. 

Exc.  4.  i"  is  common  in  genitives  in  ius ;  as,  unlus,  illius. 
Thus, 

Illius  et  nitido  stillent  unguenta  capillo.  Tibull. 

Illius  puro  destillent  tempora  nardo.  Id. 
But  in  alterlus  it  is  always  short ;  in  alius  always  long. 

Exc.  5.  The  first  vowel  of  eheu  is  long ;  that  of  Diana,  Io, 
and  ohe,  is  common. 

Exc.  6.  In  many  Greek  words,  a  vowel  is  long,  though  im- 
mediately followed  by  another  ;  as, 

der,  Achdla,  Acheloiis,  dla,  eos,  Laertes,  and  other  words  compounded 
with  laos. 

(1.)  Words  which,  in  Greek,  are  written  with  ei  before  a  vowel,  and  in 
Latin  with  e  or  i,  have  the  e  or  i  long ;  as,  JEntas,  Alexandria,  Cassioj)£a} 
Clio,  Darius,  elegla,  Galatea,  Medea,  Mausoleum,  Penelopea,  Thalia. 

Hence,  most  adjectives  in  eus,  formed  from  Greek  proper  names,  have 
the  e  long;  as,  Cythereus,  Pelopeus. 

Exc.  Academia,  chorea,  Malea,  platea,  and  some  patronymics  and 
patrials  in  els,  have  the  penult  common  ;  as,  JYercls. 

(2.)  Greek  genitives  in  eos,  and  accusatives  in  ea,  from  nominatives  in 
eus,  generally  shorten  the  e;  as,  Orpheos,  Orphia ; — but  the  e  is  some- 
times lengthened  by  the  Ionic  dialect ;  as,  Cepheos,  Ilionea. 

(3.)  Greek  words  in  ais,  ois,  aius,  eius,  oius,  aon,  and  ion,  generally 
lengthen  the  first  vowel ;  as,  Ndis,  Minois,  Gralvs,  Nere~tus,  Minolus, 
Machdon,  Ixlon.  But  Thebdis,  Simois,  Phdon,  Deucalion,  Pygmalion,  and 
many  others,  shorten,  the  former  vowel. 

Note  1.  Greek  words  in  aon  and  ion,  with  o  short  in  the  genitive, 
have  the  penult  long ;  but  with  o  long  in  the  genitive,  they  have  it  short ; 
as,  Amythdon,  -donis  ;  Deucalion,  -onis. 

Note  2.  Greek  proper  names  in  eus  (gen.  eos),  as  Orpheus,  always 
have  the  eu  a  diphthong  in  the  original,  and,  with  very  few  exceptions,  in 
the  Latin  poets. 

II.   A  diphthong  is  long;    as,  aurum,  famus,    Eubma 
Thus, 

TJtesduros  ignotum  argenti  pondus  et  aliri.   Virg. 
Infernlque  lacus,  JE&aque  insula  Circro.  Id. 


PROSODY.— QUANTITY  ;  GENERAL  RULES.      261 

Exc.  1.  JPrce,  in  composition,  is  short  before  a  vowel ;  as, 
pr&ustus,  prccacutus.     Thus, 

Nee  tota  tamen  ille  prior  pr&cuntc  carina.   Virg. 
In  Statius,  and  Sidonius  Apollinaris,  it  is  found  long. 
Exc.  2.     A  diphthong,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  when  the  next  word  begins 
with  a  vowel,  is  sometimes  made  short ;  as, 

Insula  Ionio  in  magno,  quas  dira  Celreno.   Virg. 
Remark.     U,  followed  by  another  vowel,  is,  in  prosody,  not  considered 
as  a  diphthong  ;  as,  qudtio,  queror,  cequor,  lingua,  sanguis. 

III.  A  syllable  formed  by  contraction  is  long;  as, 

alius  for  aliius  ;  cogo  for  codgo  ;  nil  for  nihil ;  junior  for  juvtnior.     Thus, 
Tityre  edge  pecus,  tu  post  carecta  latebas.   Virg. 

IV.  A  vowel  naturally  short,  before  two  consonants,  a 
double  consonant,  or  the  letter  j,  is  long  by  position ;  as, 
arma,  bellum,  axis,  gaza,  major.     Thus, 

Pdsce're  opdrtet  oves  deductum  dicere  carmen.   Virg. 
JVec  mxjrtus  vinclt  corylos  ;  n£c  la  urea  Phcebi.  Id. 
At  nobis,  Pax  alma,  veni,  spicamque  teneto.   Tibull. 
Rara  juvant :  primis  sic  major  gratia  pomis.  Mart. 

Exc.  1.  The  compounds  ofjugum  have  i  short  before  j ;  as, 
bijugus,  quadrijugus.     Thus, 

Interea  bijugis  infert  se    Lucagus  albis.   Virg. 
Remark.     The  vowel  is  long  by  position  when  either  one  or 
both  of  the  consonants  is  in  the  same  word  with  it ;  but  when 
both  stand  at  the  beginning  of  the  following  word,  the  vowel  is 
either  long  or  short ;   as, 

Tolle  moras;  semper  nocuit  differre  paratis.  Lucan. 
Ferte  citi  ferrum ;  date  tela  ;  scandite  muros.   Virg. 
Ne  tamen  igndret,  quae  sit  sententid  scripto.  Ovid. 
A  short  vowel  at  the  end  of  a  word,  before  a  double  consonant  or  j,  is 
not  lengthened. 

Exc.  2.  A  vowel  naturally  short,  before  a  mute  followed  by 
a  liquid,  is  common  ;  as,  agris,  pharetra,  volucris,  poplites, 
cochlear.     Thus, 

Et  prim6  similis  volucri,  mox  vera  volucris.  Ovid. 
Natum  ante  ora  pdtris,  pdtrem  qui  obtruncat  ad  aras.  Id. 
Nox  tenlbras  profert,  Phoebus  fugat  inde  tenebras.  Id. 
Rem.  1.     If  the  vowel  is  naturally  long,  it  continues  so;  as,  salubris 
ambulacrum. 

Rem.  2.  A  mute  and  liquid  render  the  preceding  short  vowel  common 
only  when  they  are  such  as  may  begin  a  Latin  word,  or  a  word  derived 
from  the  Greek.  In  compound  words,  of  which  the  former  part  ends  with 
a  mute,  and  the  latter  begins  with  a  liquid,  a  short  vowel  before  the  mute 
is  made  long  by  position  ;  as,  abluo,  obruo,  subUvo,  quamdbrem. 

Rem.  3.  A  mute  and  liquid  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  seldom  lengthen 
the  short  vowel  ot  the  preceding  word. 


262  PROSODY. QUANTITY  J     SPECIAL    RULES. 

Rem.  4.  In  Latin  words,  a  short  vowel  is  rendered  common  only  be- 
fore a  mute  with  I  or  r;  but,  in  words  of  Greek  origin,  also  before  a  mute 
with  m  or  n;  as  in  Alias,  Tecmcssa,  Procnc. 


SPECIAL  RULES. 
FIRST   AND   MIDDLE   SYLLABLES. 

I.  DERIVATIVE  WORDS. 

§  284.  Derivative  words  retain  the  quantity  of  their 
primitives;  as, 

dnhnal,  dntmdtus,  from  arilma ;  ggmfbundus,  from  gSmSre;  fdmilia, 
from  famulus  ;  mdternus,  from  mater  ;  propinquus,  from  prope. 

Rem.  1.  Derivatives  from  increasing  nouns  of  the  third 
declension  agree  in  quantity  with  the  increment  of  their  primi- 
tives ;  as, 

funelrris,  from  funSris;  virgineus,  from  virglnis  ;  saluber,  from  salutis. 

Rem.  2.  In  verbs,  the  derived  tenses  agree  in  quantity 
with  the  special  root  from  which  they  are  formed  ;  as, 

movebam,  mdvebo,  vidveam,  mdverem,  mdve,  mdvere,  movens,  mdvendus, 
from  mdv,  the  root  of  the  present,  with  6  short ; — mdvtram,  moverhn, 
movissem,  movc.ro,  movisse,  from  mdv,  the  root  of  the  perfect,  with  6  long; 
moturvs  and  mdtus,  from  motu,  the  root  of  the  supine,  with  o  also  long. 

Solutum  and  vdlutum  have  the  first  syllable  short,  as  if  from  soluo,  voluo. 
So  gtnui, gtnXtum,  as  if  from  gcno;  and  potui,  from  pdtis  sum  (pussuvi). 

Ardtrum,  simulacrum,  have  their  penult  long,  as  derived  from  the  supines 
ardtum  and  simuldtum ;  monlmentum  and  inltium  have  their  antepenult 
short,  as  derived  from  the  supines  monltum  and  inltum. 

Exc.  1.  Perfects  and  supines  of  two  syllables  have  the 
first  syllable  long,  even  when  that  of  the  present  is  short; 
as, 

v&ni,  vidi,feci,  from  vinio,  video,  fdcio  ;  cdsum,  moium,  visum,  from  cddo, 
mdveo,  video.     Rut, 

(1.)  These  seven  perfects  have  the  first  syllable  short : — bibit 
dedi,fidi  (from  Jindo),  scidi,  steti,  stiti,  tuli. 

The  first  syllable  is  also  short  before  a  vowel  (§  283) ;  as,  rui. 

(2.)  These  ten  supines  have  the  first  syllable  short : — citum 
(from  cieo),  datum,  itum,  litum,  quitum,  ratum,  rutum,  satum, 
situm,  and  stdtum. 

So  also  the  obsolete  ftitum,  from  fuo,  whence  comes futurus. 

Exc.  2.  Reduplicated  perfects  have  the  first  two  syllables 
short ;  as, 

cZcini,  tttigi,  didici,  from  cano,  tango,  disco.  Rut  the  second  svllable 
is  sometimes  made  long  by  position  ;  as,  mdmordi,  tetendi. 


FR0S0DY. qp&KilTY  ',     COMPOUND  WORDS.     263 

CScidi  (from  cczdo)  and  pfpSdi  also  have  the  second  syllable  long. 

Exc.  3.     The  o  in  pdsui  and  positum,  is  short,  though  long  in  pono. 

Exc.  4.  The  a  in  da,  imperative  of  do,  is  long,  though  short  in  the 
other  parts  of  the  verb. 

Exc.  5.  Desiderative  verbs  in  urio  have  the  u  short,  though,  in  the 
third  special  root  from  which  they  are  formed,  it  is  long ;  as,  canaturio 
from  ccendtu,  the  third  root  of  cwno.     So  parturio,  esurio,  nupturio. 

Exc.  6.  Frequentative  verbs,  formed  from  the  third  special  root  of  the 
first  conjugation,  have  the  i  short;  as,  clamito,  vollto.     See  §  187,  II.  1. 

Exc.  7.  Many  other  derivatives  deviate  from  the  quantity 
of  their  primitives. 

1.  Some  have  a  long  vowel  from  a  short  one  in  the  primitive. 
Such  are, 

Dfini,  from  decern.  Lex  (\&gis),from  lego.       Semen,  from  sero. 

Fomes  and  )  from  M.ob\\\s,  from  moveo.  Stlpendium,/r<rm  stips 


Fomentum,  )  foveo.  Regula,         )  from  (stlpis) 

Human  us, /row  homo.  Rex  (regis),  )  r6go.  Tegula,/rom  tego. 

Laterna,/rom  lateo.  Secius,/r<///t  secus.  Vox  (vocis),  from  voco. 

Macero,  from  maceo.  Sedes,  from  sedeo. 

2.  Some  have  a  short  vowel  from  a  long  one  in  the  primitive. 
Such  are, 

Diczx,  from  dlco.  Molestus,  from  moles.        Sagax,/rom  sagio. 

Dlsertus,/rom  dlssSro.      Nato,/rom  natu.  Sopor,Jro?»   sopio. 

Dux(dQcis),/romduco.     Nvto,  from  notu.  Vadum,  from  vado. 

Fides,  from  fldo.  Quasillus,  from  quaius. 

Fragor,    )  from 
FragTlis,  )  frango. 

Some  other  words  might,  perhaps,  with  propriety  be  added  to  these  lists  ; 
but,  in  regard  to  the  derivation  of  most  of  them,  grammarians  are  not  en- 
tirely agreed. 

Remark.  Some  of  these  irregularities  have,  perhaps,  arisen  from  the 
influence  of  syncope  and  crasis.  Thus  mobllis  may  have  been  movibtlis  ; 
motum,  mftvltum,  &c. 

Sometimes  the  vowel  in  the  derived  word  becomes  short  by  dropping 
one  of  the  consonants  which,  in  the  primitive,  made  it  long  by  position ; 
as,  disertus,  from  dissero.  So,  when  the  vowel  of  the  primitive  is  short 
before  another  vowel,  it  is  sometimes  made  long  by  the  insertion  of  a  con- 
sonant ;  as,  hibemus,  from  hlems. 

The  first  syllable  in  liqu\dus  is  supposed  to  be  common,  as  coming  from 
liquor  or  llqueo  ;  as, 

Crassaque  conveniunt  llquldis,  et  liqulda  crassis.  Lucr. 


II.  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

<§>  285.     Compound  words  retain  the  quantity  of  the 
words  which  compose  them  ;  as, 

deftro,  of  de  and  fSro  ;  adoro,  of  ad  and  oro.     So  abdrior,  amdvSo,  cir- 
e&mlo,  comldo,  enitor,  prdduco,  sftborno. 


*?64     PROSODY. QUANTITY  J  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

The  change  of  a  vowel  or  diphthong  in  forming  the  com- 
pound does  not  alter  its  quantity  ;  as, 

concldj,  from  cado;  concido,  from  cctdo  ;  erlgo,  from  rlgo  ;  rccludo,  from 
cldudo  ;  iniquus,  from  cequus. 

Exc.  1.  A  long  syllable  in  the  simple  word  becomes  short  in  the  follow- 
ing compounds  : — agnltus  and  cognltus,  from  notus ;  dejSro  and  pcjero,  from 
jiiro ;  hodie,  from  noc  die  ;  nikllum  and  nihil,  from  hilum ;  scmisdpltus, 
from  sopio  ;  causidlcus,  and  other  compounds  ending  in  dlcus,  from  dlco. 

Exc.  2.  ImbScillus,  from  bdcillum,  has  the  second  syllable  long.  The 
participle  ambitus  has  the  penult  long  from  Itum,  but  the  nouns  ambitus 
and  ambltio  follow  the  rule. 

Exc.  3.  Innuba,  pronuba,  and  subnuba,  from  nubo,  have  u  short;  but  in 
connubium,  it  is  common. 

Exc.  4.  0  final,  in  the  compounds  of  do  and  sto,  is  common,  though 
long  in  the  simple  verbs. 

Note.  It  may  be  observed,  that  prepositions  of  one  syllable,  which  end 
in  a  vowel,  are  long  (§  §  294,  295,  and  297)  ;  those  which  end  in  a  single 
consonant  are  short  (§§  299  and  301). 

Exc.  5.  Pro,  in  the  following  compounds,  is  short : — procella,  prof  anus, 
profdri,  profecto,  profestus,  prdficiscor,  profiteor,  prbfugio,  profugus,  prd- 
fundus,  prdnepos,  j>roneptis,  prbplro,  and  prdtervus.  In  the  following,  it  is 
common  : — procuro,  profunda,  propdgo,  propcllo,  propino,  and  jwojmlso. 

Rem.  1.  The  Greek  preposition  pro  (before)  is  short}  as,  propheta, 
prdldgus. 

Rem.  2.     The  inseparable  prepositions  di  and  se  are  long  ;  as, 
dlduco,  sepdro.     But  di  is  short  in  dlrlmo  and  dlscrtus. 
Rem.  3.     The  inseparable  preposition  re  or  red  is  short ;  as, 
rimitto,  rlfe.ro ,r2damo.     But  in  the  impersonal  verb  refcrt,  re  is  long, 
as  coming  from  res. 

Rem.  4.  Except  in  prepositions,  a,  ending  the  first  part  of  a 
compound  word,  is  long  ;  e,  i,  o,  u,  and  y,  are  short ;  as, 

vidlo,  qudproptcr,  trddo  (trans  do) ;  nefas,  valedico,  hujuscemodi  ;  biceps, 
omnipotent,  signlflco  ;  hodie,  quanddquldcm,  philosdphus  ;  duccnti,  locuples, 
Trojugena ;  Polpdorus,  Eurypylus,  Tkraspbidus. 

Exc.  1.  A.  In  quasi,  cadem  when  not  an  ablative,  and  in  some  Greek 
compounds,  a  is  short ;  as,  catdpulta,  hexameter. 

Exc.  2.  E.  The  e  is  long  in  nemo,  nequam,  nequando,  nequdquam, 
nequidquam,  nequis,  nequitia  ;  mimet,  me  cum,  tecum,  secum,  vecors,  vesd- 
nus,  veneflcus,  and  videlicet,  (see  §  295 ;) — also  in  words  compounded  with 
se  for  sex  or  semi;  as,  sed&cim,  semestris,  semodius ;  but  in  selibra  it  is 
found  short  in  Martial. 

Note.  The  e  in  videlicet,  as  in  vide,  is  sometimes  made  short.  See 
§  295,  Exc.  3. 

E  is  common  in  some  verbs  compounded  with  facio;  as,  liquefacio,  pate* 
facio,  rarefacio,  tabefacio,  tepefacio. 

Exc.  3.  I.  (1.)  The  i  is  long  in  those  compounds  in  which  the  first 
part  is  declined,  (§  296  ;)  as,  quidam,  quxvis,  qulllbet,  quantlvis,  quantl- 
cunque,  tantldem,  unlculque,  eidem,  relpubllcce,  quallcunque,  utrique. 

(2.)  /  is  also  long  in  those  compounds  which  may  be  separated  without 


PROSODY. QTJANT1TV  J     INCREMENT    OF    NOUNS.       265 

altering  the  sense,  (§296;)  as,  ludimagister,  lucrlfacio,  slquis,  agrl- 
cultura. 

(3.)  J,  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound  word,  is  sometimes  made 
long  by  contraction ;  as,  tibicen  for  tibXUen,  from  tibia  and  cano.  See 
§  283,  III. 

(4.)  /  is  long  in  bigce.  quadriga,  llicet,  scilicet,  blmus,  trlmus,  quadrlmus. 

(5.)  In  idem,  when  masculine,  i  is  long;  but  when  neuter,  it  is  short. 
The  i  of  ublque  and  utroblque,  the  second  in  ibidem,  and  the  first  in  nlml- 
rum,  are  long.     In  ubicumque  and  ubivis,  as  in  ubi,  i  is  common. 

(6.)  Compounds  of  dies  have  the  final  i  of  the  former  part  long ;  as, 
blduum,  triduum,  merldies,  quotldie,  quotldianus,  prldie,  postrldie. 

Note.  In  Greek  words,  i,  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound,  is 
short,  unless  it  comes  from  the  diphthong  ei,  or  is  made  long  or  common 
by  position  ;  as,  Calllmachus. 

Exc.  4.  O.  (1.)  In  compounds,  the  final  o  of  contro,  intro,  retro,  and 
quando  (except  quanddquldem,)  is  long ;  as,  controversia,  introduco,  retro- 
cedo,  quandoque.     0  is  long  also  in  alioquin,  ceteroquin,  utroque,  utrdbique. 

(2.)  0  is  long  also  in  the  compounds  of  quo  ;  as,  quomddo,  quocunque% 
quominus,  quocirca,  quovis,  quoque ;  but  in  the  conjunction  qudque,  it  ia 
short. 

(3.)  Greek  words  which  are  written  with  an  omlga  have  the  o  long ; 
as,  gedmetra,  Minotaurus,  lagopus. 

Exc.  5.  U.  The  u  is  long  in  Jupiter,  judex,  and  judicium.  The  final 
u  in  the  former  part  of  usucapio  and  usuvenio  is  regularly  long.     See  §  298. 


III.    INCREMENT   OF  NOUNS. 

§  286.  1.  A  noun  is  said  to  increase,  when,  in  any  of  its 
cases,  it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  nominative  singular  ;  as, 
pax,  pads ;  sermo,  sermonis. 

The  number  of  increments  in  any  case  of  a  noun  is  equal  to 
that  of  its  additional  syllables. 

2.  Nouns  in  general  have  but  one  increment  in  the  singular. 
But  iter,  supellex,  compounds  of  caput  ending  in  ps,  and  sometimes 

jecur,  have  two ;  as, 

12.  12 

iter,  i-tin-i-ns  ;  anceps,  an-cip-i-tis  ; 

13  12 

supellex,  su-pel-lec-ti-lis  ;      jecur,  je-cin-5-ris. 
The  double  increase  of  iter,  &c,  in  the  singular  number  arises  from  their 
coming  from  obsolete  nominatives,  containing  a  syllable  more  than  those 
now  in  use ;  as,  itiner,  &c. 

3.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  of  the  third  declension 
have  one  increment  more  than  the  genitive  singular  ;  as, 

rex,  Gen.  re-gis,  D.  and  Ab.  reg-i-bus. 

sermo,       ser-mo-nis,        ser-mon-i-bus. 

iter,  i-tin-l-ris,         >—  it-i-ner-l-bus. 

4.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is  never  considered  as  the  in- 

23 


Z66       I-AOSODY. QUANTITY  ;   INCREMENT  OF  NOUNS. 

crement.  If  a  word  has  but  one  increment,  it  is  the  penult ; 
if  two,  the  antepenult  is  called  the  first,  and  the  penult  the 
second  ;  and  if  three,  the  syllable  before  the  antepenult  is  called 
the  first,  the  antepenult  the  second,  and  the  penult  the  third 
increment. 

5.  In  the  third  declension,  the  quantity  of  the  first  increment 
in  all  the  other  cases  is  the  same  as  in  the  genitive  singular;  as, 

sermonis,  sermoni,  sermonem,  scrmone,  sermones,  sermonum,  scrmonlbus. 
Dobus,  or  bubus,  from  bos,  bovis,  is  lengthened  by  contraction  from  bovlbtis. 

Note.  As  adjectives  and  participles  are  declined  like  nouns,  the  same 
rules  of  increment  apply  to  all  of  them;  and  so  also  to  pronouns. 


INCREMENTS    OF    THE    SINGULAR    NUMBER. 

OF    THE    FIRST,    FOURTH,    AND    FIFTH    DECLENSIONS. 

<§>  287 •  1.  When  nouns  of  the  first,  fourth,  and  fifth  declensions 
increase  in  the  singular  number,  the  increment  consists  of  a  vowel  before 
the  final  vowel,  and  its  quantity  is  determined  by  the  first  general  rule 
with  its  exceptions.     See  §  283. 

INCREMENTS  OF  THE  SECOND  DECLENSION. 

2.  The  increments  of  the  second  declension  are  short ; 

as, 

gencr,  gentri  ;  satur,  saifiri;  tcner,  tenlri;  vir,  vlri.     Thus, 
O  pulri  !  ne  tanta  animis  assuesclte  bella.   Virg. 
Monstra  sinunt :  genSros  externis  aflore  ab  oris.  Id. 

Exc.  The  increment  of  Iber  and  Celtiber  is  long.  For  that  of  genitives 
in  ius,  see  §  283,  Exc.  4. 

INCREMENTS    OF    THE    THIRD    DECLENSION. 

3.  The  increments  of  the  third  declension  in  a  and  o 
are  long ;  those  in  e,  i,  u,  and  y,  are  short;  as, 

animal,  animalis ;  audax,  audacis ;  sermo,  sermdnis ;  ferox,  ferdcis, 
0]ms,  opiris ;  celer,  ceteris;  miles,  milltis ;  supplez,  suppllcis ;  murmur 
viurmfiris  ;  cicur,  cicuris.     Thus, 

Pronaque  cum  spectent  animdlia  cetera  terram.  Ovid. 

Hffic  turn  multiplici  populos  sermone  replebat.   Virg. 

Incumbent  generis  Iapsi  sarclre  rulnas.  Id. 

Qualem  virgineo  demessum  polllce  florem.  Id. 

Asplce,  ventosi  ceciderunt  murmuris  aur®.  Id. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  A. 

1.  Masculines  in  al  and  ar  (except  Car  and  Nar)  increase 
short  ;  as,  Annibal,  Annibalis. 


PROSODY. QUANTITY  ;     INCREMENT    OF    NOUNS.       2t>} 

Par  and  its  compounds,  and  the  following — anas,  mas,  vas  (v&dis), 
baccar,  kepar,jubar,  lar,  nectar,  and  sal — also  increase  short. 

2.  A,  in  the  increment  of  nouns  in  s  with  a  consonant  be- 
fore it,  is  short ;  as,  Arabs,  Ardbis. 

3.  Greek  nouns  in  a  and  as  (ddis  or  dtis)  increase  short ; 
as,  poema,  po'emdtis  ;   lampas,  lampddis. 

4.  The  following  in  ax  increase  short : — abax,  anthrax,  Atax,  Atrax, 
climax,  colax,  corax,  dropax,  fax,  harpax,  panax,  phylax,  smilax,  and 
sty  rax. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  O. 

1.  O,  in  the  increment  of  neuter  nouns,  is  short ;  as, 
marmor,  marmdris ;  corpus,  corporis  ;  ebur,  ebdris.     But  os  (the  mouth), 

and  the  neuter  of  comparatives,  like  their  masculine  and  feminine,  in- 
crease long.     The  increment  of  ador  is  common. 

2.  O  is  short  in  the  increment  of  Greek  nouns  in  o  or  on, 
which,  in  the  oblique  cases,  have  omicron ;  as, 

Acdon,  Aeddnis ;  Agamemnon,  Agamemndnis.  Sidon,  Orion,  and 
JEgaon,  have  the  increment  common. 

3.  In  the  increment  of  gentile  nouns  in  o  or  on,  o  is  gene- 
rally short ;   as,  , 

Macido,  Maceddnis.     So,  Sendnes,  Teutdnes,  &c. 

But  the  following  have  o  long : — Eburones,  LacSnes,  Idnes,  Nasamdnes, 
Suessones,  Vettones,  Burgundiones.     Britones  has  the  o  common. 

4.  Greek  nouns  in  tor  increase  short ;  as,  Hector,  Hcctoris ; 
rhetor,  rhetoris. 

5.  Compounds  of  pus  (novo),  as  tripus,  Polypus,  and  also  arbor,  memor, 
bos,  compos,  i?npos,  and  lepus,  increase  short. 

6.  O,  in  the  increment  of  nouns  in  s  with  a  consonant  before 
it,  is  short ;    as, 

scrobs,  scrdbis ;  inops,  indpis.  But  it  is  Icmg  in  the  increment  of 
Cercops,  Cyclops,  and  Hydrops. 

7.  The  increment  of  Allobrox,  Cappddox,  and  pracox,  is  also  short. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  E. 

1.  Nouns  in  en,  enis  (except  Hymen),  lengthen  iheir  incre- 
ment;  as,  Siren,  Sirenis.  So,  Anienis,Nerienis,  from  Anio,&LC. 

2.  Hceres,  locuples,  mansues,  merces,  and  quies — also  Iber,  ver,  lex,  rex, 
and  vervex — plebs,  seps,  and  halec — increase  long. 

3.  Greek  nouns  in  es  and  er  (except  a'er  and  cether)  increase 
long  ;  as,  magnes,  magnetis  i  crater,  crateris. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  I. 

1.  Verbals  in  trix,  and  adjectives  in  ix,  increase  long;  as, 
victrix,  victricis  ;  felix,  frticis. 


26&   PROSODY. QUANTITY  j  INCREMENT  OF  VERBS. 

2.  The  following  nouns  in  ix  also  increase  long : — cervix,  cicatrix, 
comix,  coturnix,  lodix,  matrix,  perdix,  phanix,  and  radix.  So  also  vibez 
(vibicis) . 

3.  Greek  nouns,  whose  genitive  is  in  inis,  increase  long  ;  as, 
delphin,  delphinis ;  Salamis,  Salaminis. 

4.  The  following  nouns  in  is  increase  long : — dis,  glis,  lis,  JSfesis, 
Quiris,  and  Samnis.    The  increment  of  Psophis  is  common. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  U. 

1.  Genitives  in  udis,  uris,  and  utis,  from  nominatives  in  us, 
have  the  penult  long ;  as, 

palus,  paludis  ;  tellus,  telluris ;  virtus,  virtutis.  But  intercus,  Ligus, 
and  pecus,  increase  short. 

2.  Fur,frux  (obs.),  lux,  and  Pollux,  increase  long. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  Y. 

1.  Greek  nouns  whose  genitive  is  in  ynis,  increase  long  ;  as, 
Phorcyn,  Phorcynis  ;    Trachys,  Trachynis. 

2.  The  increment  of  bombyx,  C&yx,  and  gryps,  is  long ;  that  of  Beoryx 
and  sandyx  is  common. 

INCREMENTS  OF  THE  PLURAL  NUMBER 

<§>  288.  A  noun  in  the  plural  number  is  said  to  increase, 
when,  in  any  case,  it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  ablative  sin- 
gular. 

When  a  noun  increases  in  the  plural  number,  its  penult  is 
called  the  plural  increment ;  as,  sa  in  musdrum,  no  in  domino- 
rum,  pi  in  rupium  and  rupibus. 

In  plural  increments,  a,  e,  and  o,  are  long,  i  and  u 
are  short ;  as, 

bonarum,  animabus,  rErutn,  rebus,  gencrorum,  ambobus ;  sermonlbus 
lacxtbus.     Thus, 

Appia,  longdrum,  teritur,  reglna  vidrum.  Stat. 
Sunt  lacryniffi  rerurn,  et  mentem  mortalia  tangunt.   Virg. 
Atque  alii,  quorum  comcedia  prisca  virorum  est.  Hor. 
Portubus  egredior,  xentisque  fercnttbus  usus.  Ovid. 


IV.     INCREMENT  OF   VERBS. 

§  289.  1.  A  verb  is  said  to  increase,  when,  in  any  of  its 
parts,  it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  second  person  singular 
of  the  present  indicative  active;  as,  das,  da-tis;  doces,  do~ 
ce-mus. 


PROSODY. QUANTITY  ,    INCREMENT    OF    VERBS.  269 

2.  The  number  of  increments  in  any  part  of  a  verb  is  equal 
to  that  of  its  additional  syllables.  In  verbs,  as  in  nouns,  the 
last  syllable  is  never  considered  the  increment.  If  a  verb  has 
but  one  increment,  it  is  the  penult ;  and  this  first  increment, 
through  all  the  variations  of  the  verb,  except  in  reduplicated 
tenses,  continues  equally  distant  from  the  first  syllable.  The  re- 
maining increments  are  numbered  successively  from  the  first;  as, 

a-mas,  mo-nes,  au-dis, 

1  1  ■     1    . 

a-ma-mus,  mo-ne-tur,  au-di-tis, 

12  12  12 

am-a-ba-mus,  mon-e-re-tur,  au-di-e-bas, 

123  123  1234 

am-a-ve-ra-mus.  mon-e-bim-i-ni.  au-di-e-bam-I-ni. 

A  verb  in  the  active  voice  may  have  three  increments ;  in  the  passive, 
it  may  have  four. 

3.  In  determining  the  increments  of  deponent  verbs,  an 
active  voice  may  be  supposed,  formed  regularly  from  the  same 
root. 

I  12 

Thus  the  increments  of  ke-td-tur,  lcet-a-bd-tur,  &c,  are  reckoned  from 
the  supposed  verb  Iceto,  Icetas. 

§  290.  In  the  increments  of  verbs,  a,  e,  and  o,  are  long ; 
j  and  u  are  short ;  as, 

aindre,  monZre,facltdte}  volumus,  regebdrrilni.    Thus, 
Et  cantdre  pares,  et  respondSre  pardti.  Virg. 
Sic  equidem  ducebam  animo,  rebarque  futurum.  Id. 
Cumque  loqui  potent,  matrem  facitote  salutet.  Ovid. 
Scindltur  interea  studia  in  contraria  vulgus.   Virg. 
Nos  numeros  sumus,  et  fruges  consumSre  nati.  Id. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  A. 

The  first  increment  of  do  is  short ;  as,  damus,  dabdmus, 
circumddrc,  circumdabamus. 

Exceptions  in   Increments  in  E. 

1.  E  before  r  is  short  in  theirs*  increment  of  all  the  pres- 
ent and  imperfect  tenses  of  the  third  conjugation,  and  in  the 
second  increment  in  beris  and  bere ;  as, 

rtglrt  (infin.  and  imperat.),  reggris  or  rrgere  (pres.  ind.  pass.),  regtrcm 
and  regirer  (imp.  subj.)  ;  amabSris,  amaMre  ;  moncbgris,  moneblrt. 

Note.     Vclim,  vclis,  &c,  from vdlo,  have  the  e  short,  according  to  §  284. 

2.  E  is  short  before  ram,  rim,  ro,  and  the  persons  formed 
from  them ;  as, 

amaviram,  amavlrat,  amavirim,  monue'rimus,  rex£ro,  audivgritis. 

Note.  In  verbs  which  have  been  shortened  by  syncope  or  otherwise 
e  before  r  retains  its  original  quantity  ;  na,jleram  for  Jleviram. 

For  the  short  e  before  runt,  in  "the  perfect  indicative,  as,  sUtlrunt, 
see  Systole,  §  307 

33* 


2"i0       prosody. — quantity;  penults. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  I. 

1.  I  before  v,  in  tenses  formed  from  the  second  root,  is  long; 
as,  petiviy  audivi,  quasivit,  audivimus,  audiveram. 

2.  I  is  long  in  the  penult  of  polysyllabic  supines  from  verbs 
whose  perfects  end  in  ivi ;  as,  petition,  qucesitum.  See  §  284, 
Rem.  2. 

3.  The  first  increment  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  except  in 
imus  of  the  perfect  indicative,  is  long ;  as, 

audlre,  audlrem,  venlmus,  but  in  the  perfect  venlmus.  So  in  the 
ancient  forms  in  ibam,  ibo,  of  the  fourth  conjugation ;  as,  nutribat, 
Lenibunt;  and  also  in  ibam  and  ibo,  from  to. 

When  a  vowel  follows,  the  i  is  short,  by  §  283 ;  as,  audiunt,  audiebam. 

4.  /  is  long  in  slmus,  sltis,  velimus,  velltis,  and  their  compounds ;  as, 
possimus,  adsimus,  malimus,  nolxmus,  and  nollto,  nolite,  nolitote. 

5.  I  in  rimus  and  ritis,  in  the  future  perfect  and  perfect 
subjunctive,  is  common ;  as, 

viderltis  (Ovid),  dixerltis  (Id.) ,  fecerimus  (Catull.),  contigerltis  (Ovid)  ; 
egerlmus  (Virg.). 

Exceptions  hi  Increments  in  U. 
U  is  long  in  the  increment  of  supines,  and  of  participles 
formed  from  the  third  root  of  the  verb ;  as, 

secutus,  solutus,  secuturus,  soluturus. 

RULES  FOR  THE  QUANTITY  OF  THE  PENULTIMATE  AND 
ANTEPENULTIMATE  SYLLABLES  OF  WORDS  OF  CER- 
TAIN TERMINATIONS. 

I.    PENULTS. 

<§>  291.  1.  Words  ending  in  acus,  icust  and  icumt  shorten 
the  penult ;    as, 

amardcus,  JEgyytiaciis,  academicus,  rusticus,  tritlcum,  viaticum. 

Except  merdcus,  opdcus ;  amicus,  aprlcus,  antlcus,  flcus,  lumbricus, 
mendicus,  posticus,  pudlcus,  umbilicus,  vlcus,  picus. 

2.  Words  ending  in  abrum,  ubrum,  acrum,  ucrum,  and  atrum, 
lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

candelabrum,  ddubrum,  lavdcrum,  involucrum,  vcrdtrum,  lucrum. 

3.  Nouns  in  ca  lengthen  the  penult ;    as, 
cloaca,  apotheca,  lorlca,  phoca,  lactuca. 

Except  ullca,  brasslca,  dica,  fullca,  mantlca,  pedlca,  pcrtlca,  scutlca, 
phalarlca,  sublica,  tunica,  vomica ;  and  also  some  nouns  in  ica,  derived 
from  adjectives  in  leus  ;  as,  fabrlca,  grammatlca,  &c.     So  manlca. 

4.  Patronymics  in  ades  and  ides  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 
Atlantiades,  Priamides. 

Except  those  in  ides  which  are  formed  from  nouns  in  ens  or  Is ;  as, 
Strides,  from  Mreus  ;  jYeoclidcs,from  Ncocles  ;  except,  msc ,  Jbnphiaraidcs 
Belldes,  Japetionldes,  Lycurgldes. 


prosody. — quantity;    PENULTS.  Si7l 

5.  Patronymics  and  similar  words  in  ais,  eis,  and  ois,  lengthen 
the  penult ;   as, 

Achdis,  Chryseis,  Minois.  Except  Phocais  and  TItebdis.  The  penult 
of  Nereis  is  common. 

6.  Words  in  do  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 
vddo,cedo,formido,r6do,testudo,altitudo.    Except  sotldo,  come'do. 
unido,   cddo,  diddo,  Ida  (to  eat),  spado,  trepldo.    Rudo  is  common. 

7.  Words  in  idus  shorten  the  penult ;  those  in  udus  lengthen 
it;   as, 

callldus,  perfldus  ;  ludus,  nftdus.    Except  fidus,  infidus,  nidus,  sldus. 

8.  Nouns  in  ga  and  go  lengthen  the  penult ;   as, 

collega,  saga,  ruga,  imago,  caligo,  cerugo.  Except  caliga,  tdga,  har- 
pdgo,  ligo.  plaga,  (a  region,)  fuga. 

9.  Words  in  le,  les,  and  lis,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 
crindle,  mantcle,  ancile ;  dies,  miles,  proles;  anndlls,  crudtlis,  civilis, 

curulis. 

Except  verbals  in  His  ;  as,  a  gills,  amabllis  ; — adjectives  in  atllis  ;  as, 
aquatllis,  umbratllis ; — and  the  following ;  dapstlis,  dactylis,  gracilis, 
humllis,  parliis,  si?nllis,  sterllis,  indoles,  soboles,  mugllis,  stricrllis. 

10.  Words  in  elus,  ela,  elum,  lengthen  the  penult;  as,  pha- 
selus,  querela,  prelum.     Except  gelus,  gelum,  scelus. 

11.  Diminutives  in  olus,ola,  olum,  ulus,  ula,  ulum,  also  words 
in  ilus,  and  those  in  ulus  and  ula  of  more  than  two  syllables, 
shorten  the  penult ;   as, 

urceolus.filiola,  tuguriolum,  lectulus,  ratiuncula,,  corculum;  ruttlus,  gar- 
rulus,fabula.    Exc.  asllus. 

12.  Words  in  ma  lengthen  the  penult ;   as, 

fdnta,  poema,  rlma,  axibma,  pluma.  Exc.arilma,cdma,lacryma,victima. 

13.  A  vowel  before  final  men  or  mentum  is  long ;  as, 
levdmen,  grdmen,  crimen,  fiumen,  jumentum,  atrdmentum. 

Except  tdrnen,  columcn,  liftmen,  ellmentum,  and  certain  verbals  of 
the  second  and  third  conjugations ;  as,  documentum,  regimen,  teglmen, 
&c. 

14.  Words  ending  in  imus  or  ymus  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 
animus,  finitlmus,  fortisslmus,  maxlmus,  thymus. 

Except  blmus,  limus,  mlmus,  oplmus,  quadrimus,  simus,  trimus,  and 
two  superlatives,  imus  and  primus. 

Note.  When  an  adjective  ends  in  umus  for  imus,  the  quantity  remains 
the  same ;  as,  decumus,  optumus,  maxumus,  for  dcclmu^s,  &c. 

15.  A,  e,  o,  and  u,  before  final  mus  and  mum,  are  long ;    as, 
ramus,  remus,  extremus,  prornus,  dumus,  pomum,  voUmum. 

Except  atdmus,  balsa" mum,  cinndmum,  ddmus,gldmus,  humus,  postumusf 
thalamus,  tdmus,  calamus,  nemus. 

16.  Words  in  na,  ne,  ni,  and  nis,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 
Idna,  arena,  carina,  matrdna,  luna,  mane,  anemdne,  septe.ni,  octoni,  ind- 

nis,  finis,  immunis. 


272  PROSODY.-— QUANTITY  J      PENULTS. 

Except  gZna,  slne,cdnis,clnis,juve'nis;  and  the  following  inlna, — buc- 
clna,  domlna,  Jisclna,  femlna,  fusclna,  lamina,  macltlna,  paglna,  patina, 
sarclna,  trntlna..     So  indigSna,  bene. 

17.  Adjectives  in  inus,  derived  from  names  of  trees,  plants, 
and  stones,  and  from  adverbs  of  time,  shorten  the  penult ;   as, 

ccdrinus,  faglnus,  croclnus,  hyacinthlnus,  adamanttnus,  crystalllnus , 
crastlnus,  diutlnus  ;  also  annotlnus,  bombyclnus,  and  clcphantlnus. 

Other  adjectives  and  words  in  inus  lengthen  the  penult ;   as, 
canlnus,  blnvs,fcsttnus,  peregrinus,  marlnus,  clandcstlnus ,  suplnus. 
Except  acinus,  aslnus,  cophlnus,  dominus,  earlnus,  facinus,  fraxlnus 
pamplnus,  sinus,  terminus,  gemlnus,  circlnus. 

18.  A,  e,  o,  and  u,  before  final  nus  and  num,  are  long  ;  as, 
wrbanus,  serSnus,  prdnus,  miinus,  venSnum. 

Except  galbdnus,  mdnus,  ocednus,  platdnus,  tympanum  ;  eblnus,  gfnus, 
tenus,  Vlnus  ;  bdnus,  onus,  sdnus,  tonus,  thrdnus,  anus,  lagdnum. 

19.  Words  ending  in  pa  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

aldpa,  nipa,  crlpa,  metdpa,  lupa.    Except  ripa,  cepa,  scopa,  cupa,  pupa 

20.  Words  in  arts  and  are  lengthen  the  penult ;   as, 
alaris,  altdrc.     Except  hildris,  canthdris,  cappdris,  and  mare. 

21.  Before  final  ro  or  ror,  e  is  short ;  i,  o,  and  u,  are  long ;  as, 
tempiro,  celiro,  queror  ;  splro,  6ro,Jiguro,  mlror. 

Except  spe~ro,  fdro,  mdror,  voro,  furo,  saturo ;  and  derivatives  from 
genitives  increasing  short ;  as,  dccoro,  murmuro,  &c ;  also  pero,  sdror. 

22.  Before  final  rus,  ra,  rum,  e  is  short ;  the  other  vowels 
are  long  ;  as, 

merus,  hedira,  cctlrum;  cams,  mlrus,  mdrus,  murus  ;  hdra,  splra,  dra, 
natiira,  lotum. 

Except,  1.  auslerus,  galerus,  plerus,  serus,  severus,  verus,  pera,  cera, 
panther  a,  stater  a,  procerus. 

2.  barbdrus,  cammdrus,  camurus,  canthdrus,  chorus,  hellebdrus,  nurus, 
phosphdrus,  spdrus,  torus  ;  also  amphora,  anchora,  cithdra,  mora,  purpura, 
philyra,  and  j 'drum,  suppdrum,  gdrum,  pdrum.     So  cindra,pirus,  scdrus. 

23.  Adjectives  in  osus  lengthen  the  penult;  a.s,fumdsusfpcr- 
niciosus. 

24.  Nouns  in  etas  and  itas  shorten  the  penult ;  as,  pietas 
civitas. 

25.  Adverbs  in  tim  lengthen  the  penult,  those  in  iter  shorten 
it;  as, 

oppiddtim,  virltim,  tributim;  acrlter.    Except  stdtim,  affdtim,  perpitim. 

26.  Words  in  ates,  itis,  otis,  and  eta,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 
rates,  pendtes,  vxtis,  mltis,  carydtis,  Icaridtis,  mSta,  poeta.      Except 

sltis,  pdtis,  drapUa. 

27.  Nouns  in  atum,  etum,  itum,  utum,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

lupdtum,  arboretum,  aconltum,  verutum. 
Except  fr Stum,  defrutum,  pulpltum. 


PROSODY. QUANTITY  ;      ANTEPENUI/TS.  273 

28.  Words  ending  in  tus  lengthen  the  penult ;    as, 
barbdtus,  grdtus,    boletus,  facetus,   crinltus,  peritus,  agrotus,    tdtus, 

argutus,  Uirsutus. 

Except  cdtus,  Idtus  (-iris),  impetus,  mttus,  Vitus,  anheUtus,  servltus, 
spirltus,  antiddtus,  totus  (so  great),  qudtus,  arbutus ;  adverbs  in  itus,  and 
derivatives  from  supines  with  a  short  penult  *,  as,  habitus.    So  inclytus. 

29.  A  penultimate  vowel  before  v  is  long ;  as, 

cldva,  oliva,  dives,  ndvis,  clvis,  papdver,  pdvo,  prlvo,  ovum,  prdvus, 
atstivus,  fugitlvus. 

Except  Avis,  brcvis,  gravis,  Uvis,  dvis;  ccivo,  grdvo,  juvo,  Idvo,  Uvo, 
6vo  ;  dvus,  cdvus,favus,  novus,  favor,  pdvor,  ndvem. 

30.  Words  ending  in  dex,  dix,  mex,  nix,  lex,  rex,  lengthen 
the  penult ;  as, 

codex,  judex ;  Udix,  radix;  clmex,  pUmex;  junix;  ilex;  cdrex, 
murex.    Except  cidex,  sllex,  riimex. 

II.  ANTEPENULTS. 

$  292.  1.  Adjectives  in  aceus  and  anetts  lengthen  the 
antepenult ;  as, 

cretdceus,  testdceus,  momentdneus,  subitdneus. 

2.  Numerals  in  ginti,  ginta,  gies,  and  csimus,  lengthen  the 
antepenult;  as, 

vxginti,  quadrdginta,  quinqudgies,  trig€stmus. 

3.  O  and  u  before  final  lentus  are  short ;  as, 
vindlentus,  fraudulentus. 

4.  A  vowel  before  final  nea,  neo,  nia,  nio,  nius,  nium,  is  long ; 
as, 

ardnea,  linca,  cdneo,  munia,  punio,  FavSnius,  patrimdnium. 
Except  castdnea,  tinea,  maneo,  mXneo,  mdneo,  tineo,  ignominia,  vinia, 
linio,  lanio,  vlnio  ; — and  words  in  clnium  ;  as,  lenoelnium.    So  luscinia. 

5.  Words  ending  in  areo,  arius,  arium,  erium,  orius,  lengthen 
the  antepenult ;  as, 

areo,  cibdrius,  vlantdrium,  dicUrium,  censOrius.  Except  cdrco  and 
vdrius,  also  imperium. 

6.  Adjectives  in  aiicus,  atilis,  lengthen  the  antepenult ;  as, 
aqudtlcus,  pluvidtllis.     Except  some   Greek   words  in  inatlcus;  as, 

grammdtlcus. 

7.  J  before  final  tudo  is  short ;  as,  altitudo,  longitudo. 

III.  PENULT  OF  PROPER  NAMES. 

$  293.  1.  Proper  names  of  more  than  two  syllables, 
found  in  the  poets  with  the  following  terminations,  shorten 
the  penult  ■ — 


274 


PROSODY. QUANTITY  ;  PENULTS. 


ba, 
ca,» 
la,2 
en  a,3 
be, 
ce  ' 


che, 

de, 

le,s 

pe,6 

re, 

al. 


on,7 

0,8 

er,* 

mas, 
ras, 


les, 
anes, 
enes, 
lis  10 


OS,1' 

bus, 

CUS,'2 

chus,13 


dus,™ 

gUS,'5 
1US,16 


phus,18 
Exceptions. 


arus, 

erus,19 

yrus, 

asus, 

osus, 


USU8, 

atus,'^0 
itus,21 
otus,22 
eus,23  (monosyl.) 


J.  Marica,  Naslca,  Ustica. 

2.  Eriphy  la,  Messala,  Philomela. 

3.  Alcinena,  Amphisibena,   A  the- 

nar, Cffisena,  Camena,  Cattie- 
na,  Picenai,  Sophenae,Murena. 

4.  Berenice,  Elyce. 

5.  Eriphyle,  Neobule,  Perimele. 
0.  Europe,  Sinope. 

7.  A  lemon,  Cytheron,  Chalcedon, 

Damasiton,  Iason,  Philemon, 
Sarpedon,  Thermodon,  Poly- 
giton,  Polyphemon,  Anthedon. 

8.  Carthago,  Cupavo,  Theano. 

9.  Meleager. 

10.  Bessalis,    Eumelis,    Juvenalis, 

Martialis,  Phaselis,  Stympha- 
lis. 

11.  Cercyros,   Cotytos,   Pharsalos, 

Serlphos,  Pepargthos. 

12.  Benacus,    Caucus,     Granlcus, 

Mossyneci,        Olympionlcus, 


Stratonicus,  Trivi'cus,  Numl- 

13.  Ophiucus.  [cus. 

14.  Abydus,  Androdus. 

15.  Celhegus. 
iEtolus,    Cleobulus,    Eumelus, 

Gsetulus,  Hanalus,  lulus, 
Mnasylus,  Neobulus,  Pacto- 
lus,  Pompilus,  Sardanapalus, 
Stymphalus,  Timdlus,Thrasy- 
bulus,  Mausolus.  Pharsalus. 
Some  in  demus  and  phcmus  ;  as, 
Academus,  Charidemus,  Eu- 
phemus,  Menedemus,  Philo- 
denms,  Polyphemus. 

18.  Seryphus. 

IS).  Homerus,  Iberus. 

20.  Aratus,  Caeratus,  Torquatus. 

21.  Heraclltus,  Hermaphrodltus 

22.  Buthrotus. 

23.  Enlpeus,  Meneceus,  Olleus. 


16. 


17 


2.  Proper  names  of  more  than  two  syllables,  found  in  the 
poets  with  the  following  terminations,  lengthen  the  penult : — 


ma/ 


sa, 
ta,< 
ta3,5 
ene,6 


num, 
turn, 
or,8 


tas, 
des,9 
tes,i° 
tis.H 


nus,12 

pus,13 

irus,14         isus, 

orus,15        ysus, 


urus,  etus,17 

esus,16        utus, 
ytus,iS 


vus. 


1.  Sequana. 
.2.  AsTna,      Mutina,     Proserpina, 
Raslna,  Rusplna,  Sarslna. 

3.  Axona,  Matrona. 

4.  Dalmata,  Massageta,  Prochyta, 

Sarmata,  Sostrata. 

5.  Gala  tee,     Jaxametee,    Laplthae, 

Macetae,  Sauromatse. 

6.  Clymene,  Helene,  Melpomene, 

Nyctim6ne 

7.  Ariminum,  Drepanum,  Peuce- 

danuni. 

8.  Numltor. 

9.  Miltiades,     Pylades,     Sotades, 

ThucydTdes ;  patronymics  m 
des,  (§  291,  4,)  and  plurals  in 
ades. 


Exception 
10. 


11. 
12. 


s. 

Antiphates,  Amodytes,  Cerl- 
tes,  Charltes,  Eteretes,  Eu- 
rybates,  Harpocrates,  Ichno- 
bates,  Massagetes,  Menecrates, 
Socrates,  Anaxaretes. 

Dercetis. 

Ap6nus,Acind6nus,  Acyndinus, 
Auibenus,  Apidanus,  BatTnus, 
Cosllnus,  Chrysogonus,  Cim- 
inus.  Comagenus,  Concanus, 
Dardanus,  Diadumenus,  Du- 
ranus.  Eridanus,  Helenus, 
Fuslnus,  Fuscinus,  Illibanus, 
Libanus,  LycTnus,MessalTnus, 
Morini,  iWbrophonus,  Pericly- 
menus,  Poppeanu?,  Rhodanus, 
Sollnus,    Stephanus,   Telego- 


PROSODY. QUANTITY    OF    FINAL    SYLLABLES.  275 

nus,  Terminus,   Therinus,  Carpophorus,   Mastigophorus, 

Vertunus.  Mycdnus.  Phosphorus,  Stesichorus. 

13.  OEdlpus.  16.  Ephgsus,  Voggsus,  Volesus. 

14.  Lamlrus.  17.  Iapetus,  Taygetus,  Venetus. 

15.  Pacorus,   and   those  in   chorus  18.  iEpytus,   Anjftua,    Eurytua, 

and  phorus ;    as,    BosphSrua,  Hippoljftus. 

3.  The  penultimate  vowel  of  the  following  proper  names, 
and  adjectives  derived  from  proper  names,  though  followed 
by  a  vowel,  is  long.     See  <§>  283,  Exc.  6. 

Alexandria,  Alpheus,  Achelous,  Achilleus,  Achillea,  Amphiaraus,  Am- 
phlon,  iEneas,  Arlon,  Alcyoneus,  Aloeua,  Anchiseus,  Atlanteus,  iEthlon, 
Amineus,  Amphigenla,  Amythaon,  Antiochia,  Bioneus,  Cymodocea, 
Calliopea,  Cassiopea,  Cydoneus,  Caeaarea,  Calaurfius,  Chremetaon,  Cle- 
antheas,  Cytherea,  Deidamla,  Didymaon,  Dolicaon,  Darlua,  Elei,  Enyo, 
Eous,  Echlon,  Eleus,  Endymioneus,  Erebeus,  Erectheus,  Hyperion,  Gala- 
tea, Giganteus,  Heraclea,  Hippodamla,  Hypetaon,  lolaus,  Iphigenia, 
Ixlon,  llithyla,  Imaon,  Laodamla,  Lycaon,  Latous,  Lesbous,  Machaon, 
Mausoleum,  Medea,  Menelaus,  Mathlon,  Methlon,  Myrtous,  Orion, 
Orithyla,  Orpheus,  Ophyon,  Pallanteum,  Perieus,  Penthesilea,  Phmbeus, 
Pandfon,  Protesilaus,  Pyreneus,  Sardous,  Paphagea,  Poppga,  Thalia. 

Note.  Eus,  in  the  termination  of  Greek  proper  names,  is  commonly 
a  diphthong ;  as,  Bridrcus,  Ceneus,  Enlpeus,  Idomgneus,  Macdreus,  Mene- 
ceus,  Metereus,  Orpheus,  Pentheslleus,  Perseus,  Theseus.  See  §  283, 
Exc.  6,  Note  2.  But  in  those  which  in  Greek  are  written  ttog  (eios),  eus 
forma  two  syllablea ;  aa,  Alpheus.  So  also  in  adjectivea  in  eus,  whether  of 
Greek  or  Latin  origin ;  as,  Erebeus,  Erectheus,  Orpheus. 


QUANTITY  OF   FINAL   SYLLABLES. 

A  final. 

$  294.  1.  A  final,  in  words  declined,  is  short;  as, 
musa,  templa,  capita,  Tydea.     Thus, 

Musd  mihi  causaa  memora;  quo  numlne  lseso Virg. 

Exc  A  final  is  long  in  the  ablative  of  the  first  declension, 
and  in  the  vocative  of  Greek  nouns  in  as  ;  as, 

Musd,fundd;  0  JEned,  0  Palld.  The  vocative  Anchisd  (Mn.  3,  475), 
also,  has  the  final  a  long. 

2.  A  final,  in  words  not  declined,  is  long;  as,  ama, 
frustra,  anted,  erga,  intra.     Thus, 

Extra  fortunam  est  quidquid  donatur  amlcis.  Mart. 

Exc.  A  final  is  short  in  ejd,  itd,quid,  and  in  putd,  when  used  adverbi- 
ally. It  is  sometimes  short  in  the  prepoaition  contra,  and  in  numerals 
ending  in  ginta  ;  as,  triginta,  &c.     In  postea,  it  is  common. 

A  final  is  also  short  in  the  names  x>f  Greek  letters;  aa,  aJphA 
beta,  &c. 


276  PROSODY. QUANTITY    OF    FINAL    SYLLABLES. 

E  final. 
§  295.     E  final  is  short ;  as,  natey  patre,  ipse,  curre, 
regere,  nempc,  ante.     Thus, 

Inctpe,  -parti  puer,  risu  cognoscerS  matrem.   Virg. 

Exc.  1.  E  final  is  long  in  nouns  of  the  first  and  fifth  de- 
clensions ;  as, 

Callidpe,  Tydide,  fide.  So  also  re  and  die,  with  their  compounds 
quare,  hodie,  pridie,  postridie,  qtiotidie.  In  like  manner  Greek  vocatives 
in  e,  from  nouns  in  es,  of  the  third  declension ;  as,  Achiile,  Hippomtne. 
The  e  is  also  long  in  the  ablative  fame,  originally  of  the  fifth  declension. 

Exc.  2.  E  final  is  long  in  Greek  neuters  plural ;  as,  cete,  mele,  pelage, 
Tempe. 

Exc.  3.  In  the  second  conjugation,  e  final  is  long  in  the 
second  person  singular  of  the  imperative  active;  as,  doce, 
mone  ; — but  it  is  sometimes  short  in  cave,  vale,  and  vide. 

Exc.  4.     In  monosyllables,  e  final  is  long ;  as, 

t,  me,  te,  se,  ne  (lest  or  not) ;  but  the  enclitics  que,  ne,  ve,  ce,  &c.,  as 
they  are  not  used  alone,  have  e  short,  according  to  the  rule ;  as,  neque, 
hujusce,  suapte. 

Exc.  5.  E  final  is  long  in  adverbs  formed  from  adjectives 
of  the  first  and  second  declensions ;  as, 

placide,pulchre,  valde  for  vatlde,  maxlme  ;  but  it  is  short  in  bene,  male, 
iiiferne,  and  supernS. 

Exc.  6.     Eere,ferme}  and  ohe,  have  the  final  e  long. 

I  final. 
$296.     I  final  is  long ;  as,  domirii,  fill,  das  si,  docerl, 
si.     Thus, 

Quid  domXnl  facient,  audent  ctim  talia  fures.  Virg. 

Exc.  1.     /  final  is  common  in  mihi,  tibi,  sibi,  ibi,  and  ubi. 

In  nisi,  quasi,  and  cui,  when  a  dissyllable,  it  is  also  common,  but  usually 
short.     In  utlnam  and  utique,  it  is  snort,  and  rarely  in  uti. 

Exc.  2.  /  final  is  short  in  the  dative  singular  of  Greek  nouns  of  the 
third  declension,  which  increase  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Pallddl,  Menoldt, 
Tethyi. 

Exc.  3.  /  final  is  short  in  Greek  vocatives  singular  of  the  third  de- 
clension; as,  Alcxl;  Daphril,  Pari.  But  it  is  long  in  vocatives  from 
Greek  nouns  in  is,  -entos  ;  as,  Simoi. 

Exc.  4.  /  final  is  short  in  Greek  datives  and  ablatives  plural  in  si, 
or,  before  a  vowel,  -sin;  as,  Drydsl,  herolsi,  Trodsln 

O  final 
§  297.     O  final  is  common  ;  as,  virgo,  amo,  quando. 
Thus, 

Ergd  metu  capiti  Scylla  est  inimlca  paterno.  Virg. 
Ergo  sollicltffl  tu  causa,  pecunia,  vitae  es  !  Prop. 


PROSODY. QUANTITY    OF    FINAL    SYLLABLES.  277 

Exc.  1.     Monosyllables  in  o  are  long  ;  as,  6,  do,  pro. 

Exc.  2.  O  final  is  long  in  the  dative  and  ablative  singular ; 
as,  domino,  regno,  bono,  sud,  illo,  eb. 

It  is  also  long  in  ablatives  used  as  adverbs ;  as,  certo,  falsd,  merits,  eO, 
qud  ;  to  which  may  be  added  ergo  (for  the  sake  of). 

Rem.  1.  The  gerund  in  do,  in  the  later  poets,  has  sometimes  o 
short  j  as,  vigilandd.  Juv. 

Rem.  2.  The  final  o  in  cito  is  short:  in  modo,  it  is  common,  but  short 
in  its  compounds ;  as,  dummddd,  postmddd,  &c.  It  is  also  common  in 
adeo,  ideo,  postremo,  aero,  and  vero.  In  ilUco,  profecto,  and  sublto,  it  is 
found  short. 

Exc.  3.  O  final  is  short  in  immd,  and  common  in  idcirco,  porro,  and 
retro. 

Exc.  4.  O  final,  in  Greek  nouns  written  with  an  omgga,  is  long ;  as, 
Clio,  Didd  ;  Mho  and  Androgeo  (gen). 

Note.  The  final  o  of  verbs  is  almost  always  long  in  poets  of  or  near 
the  Augustan  age ;  they,  however,  shorten  it  in  scio,  nescio,  and  spondco. 
Later  poets  make  the  o  short  in  many  other  verbs. 

U  final. 

§298.  1.  U  final  is  long;  as,  vultu,  cornU,  Panthu, 
dictu.     Thus, 

Vultii  quo  ccelum  tempestatesque  serenat.  Virg 

Exc.  Indu  and  nenu,  ancient  forms  of  in  and  non,  have  u  short.  U  is 
also  short  in  terminations  in  us  short,  when  s  is  removed  by  elision ;  as, 
cmUeiUu1,  for  contentus.     See  §  305,  2. 

Y  final. 
2.    Y  final  is  short ;  as,  Moly,  Tiphy.     Thus, 

Molp  vocant  supen  :  nigrft  radice  tenetur.  Ovid. 
Y,  in  the  dative  Tethy,  being  formed  by  contraction,  is  long.    §  283,  III. 

B,  D,  L,  If,  R,  T,  final 

<5>  299.  1.  Final  syllables  ending  in  b,  d,  I,  n,  r,  and  t, 
are  short;  as,  ab,illud}  consul,  carmen, pater,  caput.    Thus, 

Ipse  docet  quid  agam.     Fas  est  ft  ah  hoste  doceri.  Ovid. 
Obstupuit  simul  ipse,  simul  perculsus  Achates.   Virg. 
JYome'n  Arionium  Siciilas  implevtrdt  urbes.  Ovid. 
Dum  loqudr,  horrdr  habet ;  parsque  est  meminisse  dclSris.  Id. 
Exc.  1.    L      Sal,  sol,  and  nil,  are  long. 
Exc.  2.     N.    En,  non,  quin,  and  sin,  are  long. 
Exc.  3.     In  Greek  nouns,  nominatives  in  n  (except  those 
in  on,  written  with  an  omicrori},  masculine  accusatives  in  an, 
masculine  or  feminine  accusatives  in  en,  and  genitives  plural 
in  on,  lengthen  the  final  syllable ;  as, 
24 


278  PROSODY. QUANTITY    OF    FINAL    SYLLABLES. 

Titan,  splen,  Salamtn,  Orion,  Phorcyn ;  JEnean,  Ancklsc~n,  Callidptn  , 
epigrammdton. 

Exc.  4.  R.  Air,  mther,  and  nouns  in  er  which  form  their 
genitive  in  iris,  lengthen  the  final  syllable;  ast 

crater,  vlr.  So  also  Ibe~r  ;  but  the  compound  Celtlber  has  its  last  sylla- 
ble common. 

Exc.  5.     Far,  lar,  Nar,  par,  air,  and/«r,  are  long. 

Rem.  A  final  syllable  ending  in  t,  may  be  rendered  long  by  a  diph- 
thong, by  contraction,  or  by  position:  as,  out,  abit  for  abi.it,  amdnt.     See 

§&#.  11,111,  IV. 

M  final. 

2.  Final  m,  with  the  preceding  vowel,  is  almost  always  cut  off,  when  the 
next  word  begins  with  a  vowel.     See  Ecthlipsis,  §  305,  2. 

Final  syllables  ending  in  m,  when  it  is  not  cut  off,  are  short ;  as, 
Quam  laudas,  pluma  ?  cocto  niim  adest  honor  idem.  Hor. 

Hence,  the  final  syllables  of  cum  and  circum,  in  composition,  are  short ; 
as,  comZdo,  circumago. 

C  final 

3.  Final  syllables  ending  in  c  are  long;  as,  5c,  illuc. 
Thus, 

Macte  nova  virtate,  puer ;  sic  itur  ad  astra.   Virg. 
Exc.     Nee,  donee,  fac,  are  short,  and  sometimes  the  pronouns  hie  and 
hoc  in  the  nominative  and  accusative. 

AS,  ES,  and  OS,  final. 
$  300.     Final  syllables  in  as,  cs,  and  os,  are  long ;  as, 

pietds,  amds,  quits,  mones,  honos,  viros.     Thus, 

Has  autem  terras,  Italique  banc  litturis  oram.   Virg. 
Si  modo  des  illis  cultus,  similesque  parntus.   Ovid. 
Nee  nos  ambitio,  nee  amor  nos  tangit  habendi.   Id.. 
Exc.  1.     AS.     As  is  short  in  anas,  in  Greek  nouns  whose  genitive 
ends  in  ddis  or  ados,  and  in  Greek  accusatives  plural  of  the  third  declen- 
sion ;  as,  Areas,  Pallas,  heroas,  lampddds. 

To  these  may  be  added  Latin  nouns  in  as,  ados,  formed  like  Greek 
patronymics  ;  as,  Appias. 

Exc.  2.  ES.  Final  es  is  short  in  nouns  and  adjectives  of 
the  third  declension  which  increase  short  in  the  genitive  ;  as, 
hospes,  limes,  hebes. 

But  it  is  long  in  obits,  aries,  Ceres,  paries,  and  pes. 

Es,  in  the  present  tense  of  sum,  and  in  the  preposition  penes,  is  short. 

Es  is  short  in  Greek  neuters,  and  in  Greek  nominatives  and  vocatives 
plural  from  nouns  of  the  third  declension,  which  increase  in  the  genitive 
otherwise  than  in  eos  ;  as,  cacotthfis,  Arcades,  Troes,  Amazdnes. 

Exc.  3.     OS.     Os  is  short  in  compos,  impos,  and  os  (ossis). 

In  Greek  nouns,  os  is  short  in  words  of  the  second  declension  (except 
those  whose  genitive  is  in  o),  in  neuters,  and  in  genitives  singular ;  as 
Uios    Tyros  (but  Athos)  ;  chaos,  epos,  Palladds,  Tethyos. 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  J    FEET.  279 

IS,  US,  and  YS,  final 
§  30 1 .     Final  syllables  in  is,  us,  and  ys,  are  short ;  as, 

turrls,  mllltls,  amdbls ;  pectus,  bonus,  amdmus ;  Capys,  Tetltys. 
Thus, 

Non  apis  inde  tulit  collectos  sedula  flores.  Ovid. 
Serius  aut  citius  sedem  properdmus  ad  unam.  Id. 
At  Capjjs,  et  quorum  melior  sententia  menti.   Vlrg 

Exc.  1.     IS.     Is  is  long  in  plural  cases  ;  as, 
musls,  nobis  ;  omuls,  urbis,  for  omnes,  urbes ;  quis,  for  quels  or  quibus. 
Is  is  long  in  nouns  whose  genitives  end  in  itis,  lias,  or  ends;    as, 
Samnls,  Saidmis,  Slmols. 

Is  is  long  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  present  indica- 
tive active  of  the  fourth  conjugation  ;  as, 

audls,  nescls.  So  also  in  the  second  persons,  fis,  is,  sis,  vis,  veils,  and 
their  compounds  ;  as,  possls,  quamvls,  malls,  noils,  &c. 

Ris,  in  the  future  perfect  tense,  is  common ;  as,  videris. 

In  the  nouns  glls  and  vis,  and  the  adverb  gratis,  is  is  long. 

Exc.  2.  US.  Monosyllables  in  us  are  long ;  as,  grus,  rus, 
plus. 

Us  is  long  in  nouns  of  the  third  declension  which  increase 
long,  and  in  the  genitive  singular,  and  the  nominative,  accusa- 
tive, and  vocative  plural  of  the  fourth  declension  (§§  89,  Rem., 
and  283,  III.)  ;  as, 

tcllus,  virtus,  incus  ;—fructus .  But  palus,  with  the  us  short,  occurs  in 
Horace,  Art.  Poet.  65. 

Vs  is  long  in  Greek  nouns  written  in  the  original  with  the  diphthong 
ovs  (ous),  whether  in  the  nominative  or  genitive;  as,  nom.  Amdthus, 
Opus,  GEdlpus,  tripus,  Panthus  ;  gen.  Dldus,  Sapphus.  But  compounds 
of  pus  (node),  when  of  the  second  declension,  have  us  short ;  as,  polypus. 

Note.  The  last  syllable  of  every  verse  (except  the  ana- 
paestic, and  the  Ionic  a  minore)  may  be  either  long  or  short,  at 
the  option  of  the  poet. 

By  this  is  meant,  that,  although  the  measure  require  a  long  syllable,  a 
short  one  may  be  used  in  its  stead  ;  and  a  long  syllable  may  be  used 
where  a  short  one  is  required ;  as  in  the  following  verses,  where  the  short 
syllable  ma  stands  instead  of  a  long  one,  and  the  long  syllable  cu  instead 
of  a  short  one  : — 

Sanguineaque  manu  crepitantia  concutit  arma.  Ovid. 
Non  eget  Mauri  jaculis,  nee  arcw.  Hor. 


VERSIFICATION. 
FEET. 

$  302.     A  foot  is  a  combination  of  two  or  more  sylla- 
bles of  a  certain  quantity. 


280  PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  J     MriTRE. 

Feet  are  either  simple  or  compound.     Simple  feet  consist  of 
two  or  three  syllables ;    compound  feet  of  four. 

1.  SIMPLE    FEET. 

1.  Of  two  Syllables. 

Spondee two  long ;  as, .jtindunt. 

Pyrrhic, two  short ;    as, Dcus. 

Trochee,  or  choree,. . .  .a  long  and  a  short ;  as, drmd. 

Iambus, a  short  and  a  long ;  as, Zrdnt. 

2.  Of  three  Syllables. 

Dactyl, a  long  and  two  short ;    as, corpdrd. 

Anapaest, two  short  and  a  long ;  as, domxni. 

Tribrach, three  short ;  as, fdclrl. 

Molossus, three  long  ;  as, contendunt. 

Amphibrach, a  short,  a  long,  and  a  short;  as,  ...  .dmorS. 

Amphimdcer , or  Cretic,  a  long,  a  short,  and  a  long;  as,  ...  .cdstitds. 

Bacchlus, a  short  and  two  long  ;  as, Cdt6n.es. 

Antibacchlus, two  long  and  a  short ;  as, .Romdnus. 

II.    COMPOUND     FEET. 

Dispondee, a  double  spondee  ;  as, confllxerunt. 

Proceleusmatic, a  double  Pyrrhic ;  as, homlnibus. 

Ditrockee, a  double  trochee  ;    as, comprdbdvlt. 

Diiambus, a  double  iambus  ;  as, dmdvirdnt. 

Greater  Ionic, a  spondee  and  a  Pyrrhic;  as, correximus. 

Smaller  Ionic, a  Pyrrhic  and  a  spondee  ;  as, prdperdbdnt. 

Choriambus, a  choree  and  an  iambus  ;  as, terrlf  leant. 

Antispasty an  iambus  and  a  choree  ;  as, ddhusissc. 

First  epitrit, an  iambus  and  a  spondee  ;  as, dmdverunt. 

Second  epitrit, a  trochee  and  a  spondee  ;  as, conditores. 

Third  epitrit, a  spondee  and  an  iambus  ;  as, dxscordids. 

Fourth  epitrit, a  spondee  and  a  trochee  ;  as, ddduxistls. 

First  paion, a  trochee  and  a  Pyrrhic  ;  as, temporibus. 

Second  paion, an  iambus  and  a  Pyrrhic  ;  as, pottnttd. 

Third  pa:on, a  Pyrrhic  and  a  trochee  ;  as, drilmdtus. 

Fourth  pmon, a  Pyrrhic  and  an  iambus ;  as, celeritds. 

Those  feet  are  called  isochronous,  which  consist  of  equal  times ;  as  the 
wpondee,  the  dactyl,  the  anapaest,  and  the  proceleusmatic,  one  long  time 
being  considered  equal  to  two  short. 


METRE. 

<§>  303.     Metre  is  an  arrangement  of  syllables  and  feet 

according  to  certain  rules. 

In  this  general  sense,  it  comprehends  either  an  entire  verse,  a  part 
of  a  verse,  or  any  number  of  verses. 


prosody. — versification;    verses.  281 

Metre  is  divided  into  dactylic,  anapaestic,  iambic,  trochaic, 
choriambic,  and  Ionic.  These  names  are  derived  from  the 
original  or  fundamental  foot  employed  in  each. 

A  metre,  or  measure,  in  a  specific  sense,  is  either  a  single  foot, 
or  a  combination  of  two  feet.  In  dactylic,  choriambic,  and 
Ionic  metre,  a  measure  consists  of  one  foot;  in  the  remainder, 
of  two  feet. 

V-ERSES. 

§  304.  A  verse  is  a  certain  number  of  feet,  arranged 
in  a  regular  order,  and  constituting  a  line  of  poetry. 

1.  Two  verses  are  called  a  distich;  a  half  verse,  a  hemistich. 

2.  Verses  are  of  different  kinds,  denominated  sometimes,  like 
the  different  species  of  metre,  from  the  foot  which  chiefly  pre- 
dominates in  them ;  as,  dactylic,  iambic,  &c.  ; — sometimes  from 
the  number  of  feet  or  metres  which  they  contain ;  as,  scnarius, 
consisting  of  six  feet ;  octonarius,  of  eight  feet ;  monometer, 
consisting  of  one  measure ;  dimeter,  of  two ;  trimeter,  tetram- 
eter, pentameter,  hexameter ; ;— sometimes  from  a  celebrated 
author  who  used  a  particular  species  ;  as,  Sapphic,  Anacreontic, 
Alcaic,  Asclepiadic,  &c. ;— and  sometimes  from  other  circum- 
stances. 

3.  A  verse,  with  respect  to  the  metres  which  it  contains,  may 
be  complete,  deficient,  or  redundant. 

A  verse  which  is  complete  is  called  acatalectic. 

A  verse  which  is  deficient,  if  it  wants  one  syllable  at  the  end, 
is  called  catalectic ;  if  it  wants  a  whole  foot  or  half  a  metre,  it 
is  called  br achy cat alectic. 

A  verse  which  wants  a  syllable  at  the  beginning,  is  called 
acephalous. 

A  verse  which  has  a  redundant  syllable  or  foot,  is  called 
hyper catalectic  or  hypermeter. 

4.  Hence,  the  complete  name  of  every  verse  consists  of  three 
terms — the  first  referring  to  the  species,  the  second  to  the  num- 
ber of  metres,  and  the  third  to  the  ending ;  as,  the  dactylic 
trimeter  catalectic. 

5.  A  verse  or  portion  of  a  verse  (measured  from  the  begin- 
ning of  a  line)  which  contains  three  half  feet,  or  a  foot  and  a 
half^  is  called  the  triemimeris  ;  if  it  contains  five  half  feet,  or 
two  feet  and  a  half,  it  is  called  the  penthemimeris ;  if  seven  half 
feet,  or  three  feet  and  a  half,  the  hepthemimeris ;  if  nine  half 
feet,  or  four  feet  and  a  half,  the  ennehemimeris. 

24* 


282  prosody. — versification;  figures. 

6.  Scanning  is  the  dividing  of  a  verse  into  the  feet  of  which 
it  is  composed. 

In  order  to  scan  correctly,  it  is  necessary  to  know  the  quantity  of  each 
syllable,  and  also  to  understand  the  following  poetic  usages,  which  are 
sometimes  called 

FIGURES   OF   PROSODY. 

SYNALQEPHA. 

$  305.  1.  A  final  vowel  or  diphthong  is  cut  off  in  scan- 
ning, when  the  following  word  begins  with  a  vowel.  This  is 
called  synalmpha. 

Thus,  terra  antiqua  is  read  terr1  antiqua  ;  Dardaritda  infensi,  Dardania" 
infensi;  vento  hue,  venV  uc.     So, 

Quidve  moror  ?  si  omnes  uno  ordine  habetis  Achlvos,....  Virg. 
which  is  scanned  thus — 

Quidve  moror  ?  s'  omnes  un*  ordin*  habetis  Achlvos. 
The  interjections  O,  heu,  ah,  proh,  vce,  vah,  are  not  elided ; 
as, 

O  et  de  Latia,  0  et  de  gente  Sablna.  Ovid. 
But  0,  when  not  elided,  is  sometimes  made  short ;  as, 

Te  Cory  don  6  Alexi ;  trahit  sua  quemque  voluptas.  Virg. 
Other  long  vowels  and  diphthongs  sometimes  remain  unelided,  in  which 
case  they  are  commonly  made  short ;  as, 

Victor  apud  rapidum  Simofinta  sub  Hid  alto.   Virg. 
Anni  tempore  eo  qui  Etesice  esse  feruntur.  Lucr. 
Ter  sunt  conatl  imponSre  Velio  Ossam.     Virg. 
filauco  et  Panopcik,  et  Inoo  Melicertte.  Id. 
Rarely  a  short  vowel,  also,  remains  without  elision  ;  as, 

Et  vera  incessu  patuit  ded.     Ille  ubi  matrem....   Virg. 
For  synalrepha  at  the  end  of  a  line,  see  Synapheia,  §  307,  3. 

ECTHLIPSIS. 
2.  Final  m,  with  the  preceding  vowel,  is  cut  off  when  the  fol- 
lowing  word  begins  with  a  vowel.     This  is  called  ecthlipsis. 
Thus, 

O  curas  homlnum,  O  quantum  est  in  rebus  inane  !  Pers. 
which  is  thus  scanned, 

O  curas  homin'  O  quant'  est  in  rebus  inane. 
Monstrum  horrendw?n,  informe,  ingens,  cui  lumen  ademptum.   Virg. 
This  elision  was  sometimes  omitted  by  the  early  poets ;  as, 

Corpdriim  officium  est  quoniam  premere  omnia  deorsum.  Lucr 

See  §  299,  2. 
Final  s,  also,  with  the  preceding  vowel,  is  sometimes  elided  by  the 
early  poets  before  a  vowel,  and  sometimes  s  alone  before  a  consonant ;  as 
content'  atque  (Enn.),  for  contentus  atque  ;  omrilbu'  rebus.  (Lucr.)     So, 
Turn  lateraW  dolor,  ccrtisslmu'  nunciu'  mortis    Lucil. 
For  ecthlipsis  at  the  end  of  a  line,  see  Synapheia,  §  307,  3. 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  J    FIGURES.  283 

SYNAERESIS. 

§  306.  1.  Two  vowels  which  are  usually  separated,  are 
sometimes  contracted  into  one  syllable.  This  is  called  syn&r- 
esis. 

Thus,  in  such  case, 

Phaethon  is  pronounced  Phccthon  ;  alveo,  alto ;  Orphea,  Orpha.     So, 
Aurea  percussum  virga,  versumque  venenis.   Virg. 
Eosdem  habuit  secum,  quibus  est  elata,  capillos.  Prop. 

(1.)  Synaeresis  is  frequent  in  ii,  iidem,  iisdem,  dii,  diis,  dcin,  deiuccps, 
delude,  deest,  delrat,  deiro,  delrit,  decsse  ;  as, 

Praecipitatur  aquis,  et  aquis  nox  surgit  ab  isdem.  Ovid. 
Sint  Maecenates  ;  non  deerunt,  Flacce,  Marones.  Mart. 

Cui  and  huic  are  usually  monosyllables. 

(2.)  When  two  vowels  in  compound  words  are  read  as  one  syllable,  the 
former  may  rather  be  considered  as  elided  than  as  united  with  the  latter ; 
as,  e  in  anteambulo,  antelre,  antlhac,  dehinc,  mehercule,  &c,  and  a  in  con- 
tralre. 

(3.)  The  syllable  formed  by  the  union  of  two  vowels  often  retains  the 
quantity  of  the  latter  vowel,  whether  long  or  short ;  as,  al/iite,  ariUe, 
abiegrue,  vindemidtor,  omnia  ;  genua,  tenuis,  pituita,  fiuviorum,  &c.  In 
such  examples,  the  i  and  u  are  pronounced  like  initial  y  and  w  ;  as,  abyUe, 
omn-ya,  tenwis,pitwlta,  &c;  and,  like  consonants,  they  have,  with  another 
consonant,  the  power  of  lengthening  a  preceding  short  vowel,  as  in  the 
above  examples. 

In  Statius,  the  word  tenuidre  occurs,  in  which  three  vowels  are  united 
in  pronunciation  ;  thus,  ten-wio-rc. 

(4.)  Sometimes,  after  a  synaloepha,  two  vowels  suffer  synaeresis;  as, 
sttllio  et,  pronounced  stell-yct. 

(5.)  If  only  one  of  the  vowels  is  written,  the  contraction  is  called 
erasis  ;  as,  di,  consili,  for  dii,  consilii. 

DliERESIS. 

2.  A  syllable  is  often  divided  into  two  syllables.  This  is 
called  diaresis.     Thus, 

auldl,  Trdla,  silua,  suddent ;  for  aulce,  Troia  or  Troja,  silva,  suadent. 
So, 

^thereum  sensum,  atque  aural  simplicis  ignem.   Virg. 
Et  claro  slluas  cernes  Aquilone  moveri.  Id. 
Grammatici  certant ;  et  adhuc  sub  iudlce  lis  est.  Hor. 
So  in  Greek  words  originally  written  with  a  diphthong ;  as,  clcgeia,  for 
elegia. 

SYSTOLE. 

§  307.  1.  A  syllable  which  is  long  by  nature  or  by  posi- 
tion, is  sometimes  shortened.     This  is  called  systole  ;   as, 

vidi'n,  for  videsne,  in  which  e  is  naturally  long;  satVn,  for  satisne,  in 
which  i  is  long  by  position ; — hddie,  for  hoc  die ;  mvlllmddis,  for  multls 
modis.     So, 

Duc6re  multlmddis  voces,  et  flecte're  cantus.  Lucr. 

(1.)  By  the  omission  of  j  after  ab,  ad,  ob,  sub,  and  re,  in  compound 


284      PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;    ARSIS    AND     THESIS. 

words,  those  prepositions  retain  their  short  quantity,  which  would  other- 
wise be  made  long  by  position  ;  as,  duici,  adlcit,  dblcis,  &c.     Thus, 
Si  quid  nostra  tuis  adlcit  vexatio  rebus.  Mart. 

In  like  manner,  by  rejecting  the  consonant  of  the  preposition,  aperio, 
6pcrio,  dmitto,  &c.,  are  formed  hy  systole. 

(2.)  The  third  person  plural  of  certain  perfects  is  said  by  some  to  be 
shortened  by  systole  ;  as,  stctZrunt,  tuUrunt,  «fec.  ;  but  others  believe  that 
these  irregularities  have  arisen  from  the  errors  of  transcribers,  or  the 
carelessness  of  writers. 

DIASTOLE. 

2.  A  syllable  naturally  short,  is  sometimes  lengthened.  This 
is  called  diastole. 

It  occurs  most  frequently  in  proper  names  and  in  compounds  of  re;  as, 
Prlamldcs,  rtiigio,  &c.     Thus, 

Hanc  tibi  Priamldes  mitto,  Ledaja,  salutem.   Ovid. 
RtLigione  patrum  multos  servata  per  annos.   Virg. 
Some  editors  double  the  consonant  after  re. 
Diastole  is  sometimes  called  ectdsis. 

SYNAPHEIA. 

3.  Verses  are  sometimes  connected  together  so  that  the  first 
syllable  of  a  verse  has  an  influence  on  the  final  syllable  of  that 
which  precedes,  either  by  position,  synaloepha,  or  ecthlipsis. 
See  §§  283  and  305.     This  is  called  synapheia. 

This  figure  was  most  frequent  in  anapaestic  verse,  and  in  the  Ionic  a 
minore. 

The  following  lines  will  illustrate  its  effect : — 

Praeceps  silvas  montesque fugit 
Citus  Actaeon.  Sen. 
The  i  in  the  final  syllable  of  fugit,  which  is  naturally  short,  is  made 
long  by  position  before  the  following  consonants. 

Omnia  Mercurio  similis  vocemque  coloremyue 

Et  flavos Virg. 

Dissldens  plebi  numgro  beatorwrn 
Eximit  virtus.  Hor. 
In  the  former   of  these   examples,  synapheia  and   synaloepha  are  com- 
bined; in  the  latter,  synapheia  and  ecthlipsis. 

By  synapheia,  the  parts  of  a  compound  word  were  sometimes  divided 
between  two  verses ;  as, 

si  non  offendgret  unum- 

Quemque  poetaruin  lima?  labor  et  mora....  Hor. 
Rem.     The  poets,  also,  often  make  use  of  some  other  figures,  which, 
however,  are  not  peculiar  to  them.     Such  are  prosthesis,  aphaire'sis,  synedpe, 

renthe'sis,   apocope,  paragoge,   tmesis,   antithesis,   and    metathesis.      See 
322. 

ARSIS  AND  THESIS. 

<§>  308.  In  pronouncing  the  syllables  of  verse,  the  voice 
rises  and  falls  alternately  at  regular  intervals.     This   regular 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  )    CJESURA.  285 

alternate  elevation  and  depression  of  the  voice  is  called  rhythm. 
The  elevation  of  the  voice  is  called  arsis,  its  depression  thesis. 
These  terms  sometimes,  also,  designate  the  parts  of  a  foot  on 
which  the  elevation  or  depression  falls. 

1.  The  natural  arsis  is  on  the  long  syllable  of  a  foot :  con- 
sequently, in  a  foot  composed  wholly  of  long,  or  of  short  sylla- 
bles, considered  in  itself,  the  place  of  the  arsis  is  undetermined. 
But  when  another  foot  is  substituted  for  the  fundamental  foot 
of  a  metre,  the  arsis  of  the  former  is  determined  by  that  of  the 
latter. 

Hence,  a  spondee,  in  trochaic  or  dactylic  metre,  has  the  arsis  on  the  first 
syllable;  but  in  iambic  or  anapaestic  metre,  it  has  it  on  the  last. 

2.  The  arsis  is  either  equal  in  duration  to  the  thesis,  or  twice 
as  long. 

Thus,  in  the  dactyl,  —  vy  ks,  and  anapaest,  w  v-/  — ,  they  are  equal ;  in 
the  trochee,  —  w,  and  iambus,  \s  — ,  they  are  unequal.  This  difference  in 
the  duration  of  the  arsis  and  thesis  constitutes  the  difference  of  rhythm. 

3.  The  stress  of  voice  which  falls  upon  the  arsis  of  a  foot,  is 
called  the  ictus.  When  a  long  syllable  in  the  arsis  of  a  foot  is 
resolved  into  two  short  ones,  the  ictus  falls  upon  the  former. 

Note  1.  Some  suppose  that  the  terms  arsis  and  thesis,  as  used  by  the 
ancients,  denoted  respectively  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  hand  in  "beat- 
ing time,  and  that  the  place  of  the  thesis  was  the  syllable  which  received 
the  ictus. 

Note  2.  As  the  ancient  pronunciation  of  Latin  is  not  now  understood, 
writers  differ  in  regard  to  the  mode  of  reading  verse.  According  to  some, 
the  accent  of  each  word  should  always  be  preserved ;  while  others  direct 
that  the  stress  of  voice  should  be  laid  on  the  arsis  of  the  foot,  and  that  no 
regard  should  be  paid  to  the  accent. 

It  is  generally  supposed  that  the  final  letters  elided  by  synalaepha  and 
ecthlipsis,  though  omitted  in  scanning,  were  pronounced  in  reading  verse. 


C^ISURA. 

§  309.  Casura  is  the  separation,  by  the  ending  of  a 
word,  of  syllables  rhythmically  or  metrically  connected. 

Caesura  is  of  three  kinds  : — 1,  of  the  foot;  2,  of  the  rhythm ; 
and  3,  of  the  verse. 

1.  Caesura  of  the  foot  occurs  when  a  word  ends  before  a  foot 
is  completed  ;  as, 

Silves-I  trem  tenu- 1  i  Mu- 1  sam  medi- 1  taris  a- 1  venit.   Virg. 

2.  Caesura  of  the  rhythm  is  the  separation  of  the  arsis  from 
the  thesis  by  the  ending  of  a  word,  as  in  the  second,  third,  and 
fourth  feet  of  the  preceding  line. 


236       PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;     DACTYLIC    METRE. 

Cajsura  of  the  rhythm  allows  a  final  syllable  naturally  short,  to 
stand  instead  of  a  long  one,  it  being  lengthened  by  the  ictus  ; 
as, 

Pectori- 1  bus  inhi- 1  ans  spi- 1  rantia  |  consulit  |  exta.   Virg. 

This  occurs  chiefly  in  hexameter  verse. 

Caesura  of  the  foot  and  of  the  verse  do  not  of  themselves  lengthen  a 
short  syllable,  but  they  often  coincide  with  that  of  the  rhythm. 

3.  Caesura  of  the  verse  is  such  a  division  of  a  line  into  two 
parts,  as  affords  to  the  voice  a  convenient  pause  or  rest,  without 
injury  to  the  sense  or  harmony. 

The  caesura  of  the  verse  is  often  called  the  casural  pause. 
In  several  kinds  of  verse,  its  place  is  fixed  ;  in  others,  it  may  fall 
in  more  than  one  place,  and  the  choice  is  left  to  the  poet.  Of 
the  former  kind  is  the  pentameter,  of  the  latter  the  hexameter. 

The  proper  place  of  the  cajsural  pause  will  be  treated  of,  so  far  as  shall 
be  necessary,  under  each  species  of  verse. 

Remark.  The  effect  of  the  cresura  is  to  connect  the  different  words 
harmoniously  together,  and  thus  to  give  smoothness,  grace,  and  sweetness, 
to  the  verse. 


DIFFERENT  KINDS    OF  METRE. 
DACTYLIC   METRE. 

§.310.  I.  A  hexameter,  or  heroic  verse,  consists  of  six 
feet.  Of  these  the  fifth  is  a  dactyl,  the  sixth  a  spondee, 
*nd  each  of  the  other  four  either  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee ; 
as, 

At  tuba  I  terrlbl- 1  lem  sdni- 1  turn  procul  |  aire"  c&- 1  noro.  Virg. 
Inton-j  si  crl- 1  nes  Ion- 1  ga  cer-|  vice1  flu- 1  ebant.  Tibull. 
Lodere"  |  quae  vel- 1  lem  cala- 1  mo  per- 1  mlslt  a- 1  gresti.   Virg. 

1.  The  fifth  foot  is  sometimes  a  spondee,  and  the  verse  in 
such  case  is  called  spondaic ;  as, 

Cara  d6- 1  um  sobo-  |  les  mag- 1  num  Jovis  |  mere- 1  mentum.   Virg. 
In  such  verses,  the  fourth  foot  is  commonly  a  dactyl,  and  the  fifth  should 
not  close  with  the  end  of  a  word.     Spondaic  lines  are  thought  to  be  espe- 
cially adapted  to  the  expression  of  grave  and  solemn  subjects. 

2.  A  light  and  rapid  movement  is  produced  by  the  frequent 
recurrence  of  dactyls ;  a  slow  and  heavy  one  by  that  of  spon- 
dees ;  as, 

Quadrupe- 1  dante  pu- 1  trem  son!-  |  tu  quatit  |  ungula  |  campum.  Virg 

llli  in- 1  ter  se- 1  se  mag- 1  na  vi  |  brachia  |  tollunt.  Id. 

Variety  in  the  use  of  dactyls  and  spondees  in  successive  lines,  has  an 

agreeable  effect.     Hexameter  v«»rse  commonly  ends  in  a  word  of  two  or 

three  syllables. 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;    DACTYLIC    METRE.       287 

3.  The  beauty  and  harmony  of  hexameter  verse  depend  much  on  due 
attention  to  the  ctesvra.  (See  §  309.)  A  line  in  which  it  is  neglected  is 
destitute  of  poetic  beauty,  and  can  hardly  be  distinguished  from  prose ;  as# 

Romas  |  moenia  |  terruit  |  implger  |  Hannibal  |  armis.  Enn. 

4.  The  caesural  pause  most  approved  in  heroic  poetry  is 
that  which  occurs  after  the  arsis  in  the  third  foot.  This  is  par- 
ticularly distinguished  as  the  heroic  caesura.     Thus, 

At  domus  |  interi- 1  or  1 1  re- 1  gali  |  splendida  |  luxu.   Virg. 

5.  Instead  of  the  preceding,  a  caesura  in  the  thesis  of  the 
third  foot,  or  after  the  arsis  of  the  fourth,  was  also  approved  as 
heroic  ;  as, 

Infan- 1  dum  re- 1  gina  1 1  ju- 1  bes  reno- 1  vare  do- 1  lorem.   Virg. 

Inde  to- 1  ro  pater  |  Mne- 1  as  1 1  sic  |  orsus  ab  |  alto.  Id. 
"When  the  cresural  pause  occurs,  as  in  the  latter  example,  after  the  arsis 
of  the  fourth  foot,  another  but  slighter  one  is  often  found  in  the  second 
foot;  as, 
Prima  te- 1  net,  ||  plau- 1  sQque  vo- 1  lat  ||  fremi- 1  taque  se- 1  cundo.   Virg. 

6.  The  caesura  after  the  third  foot  was  least  approved  ;  as, 
Cui  non  j  dictus  Hy- 1  las  puer  ||  et  La- 1  tonia  |  Delos.   Virg. 

The  cresural  pause  between  the  fourth  and  fifth  feet  is  termed  the 
bucolic  cresura. 

Note  1.  The  caesura  after  the  arsis  is  sometimes  called  the  masculine 
caesura ;  that  in  the  thesis,  the  feminine  or  trochaic,  as  a  trochee  immedi- 
ately precedes. 

Note  2.  In  the  principal  cresura  of  the  verse,  poets  frequently  intro- 
duce a  pause  in  the  sense,  which  must  be  attended  to,  in  order  to  deter- 
mine the  place  of  the  cresural  pause.  For  in  the  common  place  for  the 
cresura  in  the  third  foot,  there  is  often  a  cresura  of  the  foot;  while,  in  the 
fourth  foot,  a  still  more  marked  division  occurs.  In  this  case,  the  latter  is 
to  be  considered  as  the  principal  cresura,  and  distinguished  accordingly ; 
as, 

Belli  |  ferra- 1  tos  pos- 1  tes,  ||  por- 1  tasque  re- 1  fregit.  Hor. 

II.  The  Priapean  is  usually  accounted  a  species  of  hexam- 
eter. It  is  so  constructed  as  to  be  divisible  into  two  portions  of 
three  feet  each,  having  generally  a  trochee  in  the  first  and 
fourth  foot,  and  an  amphimacer  in  the  third ;  as, 

O  co- 1  Ionia  |  qure  ciipis  1 1  ponte  |  luderg  |  longo.  Catull. 

It  is,  however,  more  properly  considered  as  choriambic  metre,  consisting 
of  alternate  G-lyconics  and  Pherecratics.     See  §  316,  IV.  V. 

Note.     A  regular  hexameter  verse  is  termed  Priapean,  when  it  is  so 
constructed  as  to  be  divisible  into  two  portions  of  three  feet  each ;  as, 
Tertia  |  pars  pa- 1  tri  data  |  pars  data  |  tertia  |  patri.   Catull. 

See  above,  G. 

§  311.     III.  A  'pentameter  verse  consists  of  five  feet. 
It  is  generally,  however,  divided,  in  scanning,  into  two  hemis- 
tichs,  the  first  consisting  of  two  feet,  either  dactyls  or  spondees 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  J    ANAPiESTIC    METRE. 

followed  by  a  long  syllable ;  the  last  of  two  dactyls,  also  follow- 
ed by  a  long  syllable  ;  as, 

NatQ-|  rS  sequi-|  tar  ||  semlna  |  qaisque"  su- 1  S.  Prop. 
Carminl- 1  bQs  vl- 1  ves  1 1  temptis  in  |  omnS  m&- 1  Is.  Ovid. 

1.  According  to  the  more  ancient  and  correct  mode  of 
scanning  pentameter  verse,  it  consists  of  five  feet,  of  which 
the  first  and  second  may  each  be  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee ;  the 
third  is  always  a  spondee  ;  and  the  fourth  and  fifth  are  ana- 
paests; as, 

Nata- 1  raj  sequi- 1  tar  1 1  s6m- 1  ini  quls- 1  que-  sag. 
Carminl- 1  bas  vl- 1  v6s  ||  tern- 1  pas  In  om- 1  n6  mels. 

2.  The  caesura,  in  pentameter  verse,  always  occurs  after  the 
penthemimeris,  i.  e.  at  the  close  of  the  first  hemistich.  It  very 
rarely  lengthens  a  short  syllable. 

3.  The  pentameter  rarely  ends  with  a  word  of  three  syllables.  In 
Ovid,  it  usually  ends  with  a  dissyllable. 

This  species  of  verse  is  seldom  used,  except  in  connection  with  hexam- 
eter, a  line  of  each  recurring  alternately.  This  combination  is  called 
elegiac  verse.     Thus, 

Flebilis  indignos,  Elegeia,  solve  capillos. 

Ah  nimis  ex  vero  nunc  tibi  nomen  erit !  Ovid. 

§312.  IV.  The  tetrameter  a  priore,  or  Alcmanian  dac- 
tylic tetrameter,  consists  of  the  first  four  feet  of  a  hexameter, 
of  which  the  fourth  is  always  a  dactyl ;  as, 

Garrula  |  per  ra- 1  mos  avis  |  obstrepit.  Sen. 

V.  The  tetrameter  a  posterior e,  or  spondaic  tetrameter,  con- 
sists of  the  last  four  feet  of  a  hexameter  ;  as, 

Ibimus,  |  O  s5ci- 1  I,  comi- 1  tesque.  Hot. 

VI.  The  dactylic  trimeter  consists  of  the  last  three  feet  of  a 
hexameter;  as, 

Grato  |  Pyrrha   sub  |  antro.  Hor. 
But  this  kind  of  verse  is  more  properly  included  in  choriambic  metre. 
See  §  316,  V. 

VII.  The  trimeter  catalectic,  or  Arckilochian  penthemimeris, 
consists  of  the  first  five  half  feet  of  a  hexameter,  but  the  first 
two  feet  are  commonly  dactyls  ;  as, 

Pulvis  ei  |  umbra  su- 1  mus.  Hor. 

VIII.  The  dactylic  dimeter,  or  Adonic,  consists  of  two  feet, 
a  dactyl  and  a  spondee  ;  as, 

Rlsit  A- 1  polio.  Hor. 

ANAPiESTIC  METRE. 

•§»  313.  I.  The  anapcestic  monometer  consists  of  two  ana- 
paests ;  as, 

•DlQlas- 1  sS  .canes.  Sen. 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  J    IAMBIC    METRE.  289 

II.  The  anapcestic  dimeter  consists  of  two  measures,  or  four 
anapaests;  as, 

Pharetrse"- 1  que"  graves  |  date  see- 1  va  fgro Sen. 

The  first  foot  in  each  measure  of  anapeestic  metre  was  very  often 
changed  to  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee,  and  the  second  -foot  often  to  a  spondee, 
and,  in  a  few  instances,  to  a  dactyl. 

Anapaestic  verses  are  generally  so  constructed  that  each  measure  ends 
with  a  word,  so  that  they  may  be  written  and  read  in  lines  of  one,  two, 
or  more  measures. 


IAMBIC  METRE. 

§  314.  I.  The  iambic  trimeter,  or  senarius,  consists  of 
three  iambic  measures,  or  six  iambic  feet ;  as, 

Phase-  J  lus  il-  [  le,  ||  quem  |  vide-  j  tis,  hos- 1  pites Catull. 

The  caesura  commonly  occurs  after  the  fifth  semi-foot. 

The  pure  iambic  measure  was  seldom  used.  To  give  to  this 
metre  greater  slowness  and  dignity,  spondees  were  introduced 
into  the  first,  third,  and  fifth  places ;  and  in  every  foot  except 
the  last,  which  was  always  an  iambic,  a  long  syllable  was  often 
changed  into  two  short  ones,  so  that  an  anapaest  or  a  dactyl 
was  used  for  a  spondee,  and  a  tribrach  for  an  iambus ;  as, 
Quo,  quo  |  sceles- 1  tl  rui- 1  tis  ?  aut  |  car  dex- 1  tens....  Hor. 
Aliti- 1  bus  at- 1  que  cam- 1  btis  homi- 1  clda  Hec- 1  torem Id. 

Sometimes,  also,  a  proceleusmatic  was  used  in  the  first  place  for  a 
spondee.  The  writers  of  comedy,  satire,  and  fable,  admitted  the  spondee 
and  its  equivalents  (the  dactyl  and  anapaest)  into  the  second  and  fourth 
places,  as  well  as  the  first,  third,  and  fifth. 

II.  The  scazon,  or  choliambus  (lame  iambic),  is  the  iambic 
trimeter,  with  a  spondee  in  the  sixth  foot,  and  generally  an 
iambus  in  the  fifth  ;  as, 

Cur  In  |  thga- 1  trum,  Cats,  J  seve-  |  re"  vg- 1  nlstl  ? 
An  ids- 1  6  tan-  [  turn  ven- 1  eras  |  ut  ex- 1  Ires  ?  Mart. 
This  species* of  verse  is  also  called  Hipponactic  trimeter. 

III.  The  iambic  tetrameter,  or  octonarius,  called  also 
quadratus,  a  measure  used  by  the  comic  poets,  consists  of  four 
iambic  measures,  subject  to  the  same  variations  as  the  iambic 
trimeter  (I.) ;  as, 

None  hie  |  digs  |  allam  |  vitam  af- 1  fgrt,  all- 1  6s  mo- 1  res  pos- 1  ttilat.  Ter. 

IV.  The  iambic  tetrameter  catalectic,  or  Hipponactic,  is  the 
iambic  tetrameter,  wanting  the  last  syllable,  and  having  always 
an  iambus  in  the  seventh  place,  but  admitting  in  the  other  places 
the  same  variations  as  the  trimeter  and  tetrameter ;  as, 

Depren- 1  sa  na- 1  vis  In  |  marl  |  vesa- 1  nifin- 1  t&  ven- 1  to.  Catull 
25 


290      prosody. — versification;  trochaic  metre. 

V.  The  iambic  trimeter  catalectic,  or  Archilochian,  is  the 
iambic  trimeter  (I.),  wanting  the  final  syllable.  Like  the  com- 
mon iambic  trimeter,  it  admits  a  spondee  into  the  first  and 
third  places,  but  not  into  the  fifth ;  as, 

Voca- 1  ttis  at- 1  qu6  non  |  v5ca-  |  tUs  au- 1  dit.  Hor. 
Trihunt- 1  que  sic- 1  cas  mach- 1  Inse  |  can-  J  nas.  Id. 

VI.  The  iambic  dimeter  consists  of  two  iambic  measures, 
with  the  same  variations  as  the  iambic  trimeter  (I.) ;  as, 

FortI  |  seque-  |  mur  pec- 1  tore.  Hot. 
Canidi- 1  a  trac-  I  tavit  |  dapes.  Id. 
Vide- 1  r6  prSpe"- 1  rantes  |  domum.  Id. 
The  iambic  dimeter  is  also  called  the  Archilochian  dimeter. 

VII.  The  iambic  dimeter  hypermetcr,  called  also  Archilo- 
chian, is  the  iambic  dimeter,  with  an  additional  syllable  at  the 
end;  as, 

R6de- 1  git  ad  I  veros  |  timo- 1  res.  Hor. 
Horace  always  makes  the  third  foot  a  spondee. 

VIII.  The  iambic  dimeter  acephalous  is  the  iambic  dimeter, 
wanting  the  first  syllable  ;  as, 

Non  |  ebur  |  ngque  au-|  rgum Hor. 

This  kind  of  verse  is  sometimes  scanned  as  a  catalectic  trochaic  dimeter. 
See  §  315,  IV. 

IX.  The  iambic  dimeter  catalectic,  or  Anacreontic,  is  the 
iambic  dimeter,  wanting  the  final  syllable,  and  having  always 
an  iambus  in  the  third  foot ;  as, 

tft  tl-  j  gris  or-  |  ba  gna-|  tls.  Sen. 

X.  The  Galliambus  consists  of  two  iambic  dimeters  catalec- 
tic, the  last  of  which  wants  the  final  syllable. 

The  first  foot  is  generally  a  spondee  or  an  anapaest ;  the  catalectic  syl- 
lable at  the  end  of  the  first  dimeter  is  long,  and  the  second  foot  of  the 
second  dimeter  is  commonly  a  tribrach ;  as, 

Super  al- 1  ta  vec- 1  tus  A- 1  tya  (|  celerl  |  rate"  ma- 1  ria.  CatuU. 

The  caesura  uniformly  occurs  at  the  end  of  the  first  dimeter. 

TROCHAIC   METRE. 

V  0 15.  Trochaic  verses  bear  a  near  affinity  to  iambics.  The  addi- 
tion or  retrenchment  of  a  syllable  at  the  beginning  of  a  pure  iambic  verse, 
renders  it  pure  trochaic,  and  the  addition  or  retrenchment  of  a  syllable  at 
the  beginning  of  a  pure  trochaic  line,  renders  it  pure  iambic,  with  the 
deficiency  or  redundancy  of  a  syllable  in  each  case  at  the  ena  of  the 
verse. 

I.  The  trochaic  tetrameter  catalectic  is  the  most  common 
trochaic  metre.  It  consists  of  seven  feet,  followed  by  a  cata- 
lectic syllable.  In  the  odd  places,  it  admits  a  tribrach,  but  in 
the  seventh  a  trochee  only.     In  the  even  places,  besides  the 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  \    CHORIAMBIC    METRE.    291 

tribrach,   it  admits  also  a  spondee,  a  dactyl,  an  anapaest,  and 
sometimes  a  proceleusmatic  ;  as, 

Jussiis  I  6st  In-  |  ermls  |  Ire" :  1 1  purus  |  Irg  |  jussiis  |  est.  Catull. 

Romu-|  teas  |  Ipsa  |  fecit  ||  cum  Sa- 1  binls  |  nuptl- 1  as.  Id. 

Dan&i- 1  des,  co- 1  It6 ;  |  vestras  ||  hie  dl-  j  es  qua- 1  rlt  ma- 1  nas.  Sen. 

The  pure  trochaic  verse  was  rarely  used.  The  caesural  pause  uniformly 
occurs  after  the  fourth  foot.  The  comic  writers  introduced  the  spondee 
and  its  equivalent  feet  into  the  odd  places. 

The  complete  trochaic  tetrameter  properly  consists  of  eight  feet,  all 
trochees,  subject,  however,  to  the  same  variations  as  the  catalectic 
tetrameter;  as, 

Ipse"  |  sQmmls  |  saxls  |  f  Ixiis  |  aspS- 1  rls,  e-  |  vlsc6-  |  ratus.  Enn. 

II.  The  Sapphic  verse,  invented  by  the  poetess  Sappho,  con- 
sists of  five  feet — the  first  a  trochee,  the  second  a  spondee,  the 
third  a  dactyl,  and  the  fourth  and  fifth  trochees ;  as, 

Intg- 1  ger  vl- 1  tie,  ||  sc6l£- 1  risque*  |  purus.  Hor. 
Sappho,  and,  after  her  example,  Catullus,  sometimes  made  the  second 
foot  a  trochee. 

Those  Sapphics  are  most  harmonious  which  have  the'caesura  after  the 
fifth  semi-foot. 

Note.  In  the  composition  of  the  Sapphic  stanza,  a  word  is  sometimes 
divided  between  the  end  of  the  third  Sapphic,  and  the  beginning  of  the 
Adonic  which  follows ;  as, 

Labi- 1  tur  rl-|  pa  Jove"  |  non  pro- 1  bante  ux- 
orlus  |  amnis.  Hor. 
This  occurs  only  in  Catullus  and  Horace ;  and  it  has  been  thought  by 
some  that  such  lines  should  be  considered  as  one  verse  of  seven  feet,  the 
fifth  foot  being  either  a  spondee  or  a  trochee. 

III.  The  PhalcBcian  verse  consists  of  five  feet — the  first  a 
spondee,  the  second  a  dactyl,  and  the  three  others  trochees;  as, 

Non  est  |  vlvSre,  |  sed  va- 1  lerg  |  vita.  Mart. 

Instead  of  a  spondee  as  the  first  foot,  Catullus  sometimes  uses  a  trochee 
or  an  iambus.  This  writer  also  sometimes  uses  a  spondee  in  the  second 
place.  m    : 

The  Phalaician  verse  is  sometimes  called  hcndecasyllabic,  as  consisting 
of  eleven  syllables;  but  that  name  does  not  exclusively  belong  to  it. 

IV.  The  trochaic  dimeter  catalectic  consists  of  three  feet, 
properly  all  trochees,  but  admitting  in  the  second  place  a  spon- 
dee or  a  dactyl ;  as, 

Non  3- 1  bQr  ne- 1  que  aurg-  |  um.  Hor. 
Note.    This  measure  is  the  same  as  the  acephalous  iambic  dimeter 
(see  §  314,  VIII.),  and  it  is  not  important  whether  it  be  regarded  as 
iambic  or  trochaic. 

CHORIAMBIC   METRE. 

$316.  I.  The  choriambic  pentameter  consists  of  a  spon- 
dee, three  choriambi,  and  an  iambus  ;  as, 

Tu  nS  |  quffisISrls,  |  scIrS  nSfas  |  qu6m  mihl,  quem  |  tlbl....  Hor 


292  PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;     IONIC    METRE. 

II.  The  choriambic  tetrameter  consists  of  three  choriambi,  or 
feet  of  equal  length,  and  a  Bacchius ;  as, 

Omng  nemus  |  cum  fiuvlls,  |  omne"  c&nat  |  profundum.  Claud. 
In  this  verse  Horace  substituted  a  spondee  for  the  iambus 
contained  in  the  first  choriambus ;   as, 

Te  d66s  6- 1  ro,  Syb&rln  |  cur  propgres  |  Smando....  Hor. 

III.  The  Asclepiadic  tetrameter  (invented  by  the  poet  Ascie- 
piades)  consists  of  a  spondee,  two  choriambi,  and  an  iambus  ; 
as, 

Maece- 1  nas,  StSvis  1 1  edite  reg- 1  lbus.  Hor. 
This  form  is  invariably  observed  by  Horace ;  but  other  poets  sometimes, 
though  rarely,  make  the  first  foot  a  dactyl. 

The  caesural  pause  occurs  at  the  end  of  the  first  choriambus. 
This  measure  is  sometimes  scanned  as  a  dactylic  pentameter 
catalectic.     See  §311,  III.     Thus, 

M'ffice- 1  nas,  ata- 1  vis  1 1  edite  |  regibus. 

IV.  The  choriambic  trimeter,  or  Gty conic  (invented  by  the 
poet  Glyco),  consists  of  a  spondee,  a  choriambus,  and  an  iam- 
bus; as, 

Sic  te  |  dlvS  potens  |  Cyprl....  Hor. 
The  first  foot  is  sometimes  an  iambus  or  a  trochee. 
When  the  first  foot  is  a  spondee,  the  other  feet  are  sometimes 
scanned  as  dactyls.     Thus, 

Sic  te"  |  dlv&  p5- 1  tens  Cypri. 

V.  The  choriambic  trimeter  catalectic,  or  Pherecratic  (so 
called  from  the  poet  Pherecrates),  is  the  Gly conic  deprived  of 
its  final  syllable,  and  consists  of  a  spondee,  a  choriambus,  and 
a  catalectic  syllable ;  as, 

Grato  |  Pyrrha  sub  an- 1  tro.  Hor. 

The  first  foot  was  sometimes  a  trochee  or  an  iambus. 

When  the  first  foot  is  a  spondee,  this  measure  is  sometimes  scanned  as 
a  dactylic  trimeter.     See  §  312,  VI. 

The  Pherecratic  subjoined  to  the  Glyconic  produces  the  Priapean  verse. 
See  §  310,  II. 

VI.  The  choriambic  dimeter  consists  of  a  choriambus  and  a 
Bacchius ;  as, 

Lydia  die  |  per  omnes.  Hor. 

IONIC    METRE. 

§  317.  I.  The  Ionic  a  majore,  or  Sotadic  (from  the  poet 
Sotades),  consists  of  three  greater  Ionics  and  a  spondee. 

The  Ionic  feet,  however,  are  often  changed  into  ditrochees,  and  a  long 
syllable  into  two  short  ones ;  as, 

Has,  cum  gem?- 1  na  compgde*,  |  dedicat  c&- 1  tenas, 
Saturng,  ti-|  bl  Zoilus,  |  annulos  pri-|  ores.    Mart 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;     COMPOUND    METRES.      293 

II.  The  Ionic  a  minore  consists  generally  of  three  or  four 
feet,  which  are  all  Ionics  a  minore ;  as, 

Pfier  ales,  |  tlbl  telas,  |  6p6r6sse- 1  que  Minerva?....  Hor. 

COMPOUND    METRES. 

§  318.  Compound  metre  is  the  union  of  two  species  of 
metre  in  the  same  verse. 

I.  The  dactylico-iambic  metre  consists  of  a  dactylic  trimeter 
catalectic  (§  312,  VII.)  and  an  iambic  dimeter  (§  314,  VI.); 
as, 

Scrlbe're'  |  verslcfi- 1  los  ||  5m5- 1  re"  per- 1  culsum  |  gr&vi....  Hor. 

II.  The  iambico-dactylic  metre  consists  of  the  same  mem- 
bers as  the  preceding,  but  in  a  reversed  order  ;  as, 

Nives- 1  qu6  de- 1  ducunt  |  jQvem :  ||  nunc  rnSrg,  |  nunc  silfi- 1  83.  Hor. 
Note.     The   members  composing  this  and  the  preceding  species  of 
verse  are  often  written  in  separate  verses. 

III.  The  greater  Alcaic  consists  of  two  iambic  feet,  and  a 
long  catalectic  syllable  followed  by  a  choriambus,  and  an  iam- 
bus; as, 

Vides  |  fit  al- 1  ta  ||  stet  nive"  can- 1  didum.  Hor. 
The  first  foot  is  often  a  spondee. 

The  csesura  uniformly  occurs  after  the  catalectic  syllable. 
This  verse  is  sometimes  so  scanned  as  to  make  the  last  two  feet  dactyls. 

IV.  The  dactylico-trochaic,  or  Archilochian  heptameter,  con- 
sists of  the  dactylic  tetrameter  a  priore  (§  312),  followed  by 
three  trochees  ;  as, 

Solvitur  |  acris  hi- 1  6ms  gra- 1  ta  vic6  ||  veris  |  et  Fa- 1  vonl.  Hor. 
The  ccesura  occurs  between  the  two  members. 

V.  The  dactylico-trochaic  tetrameter,  or  lesser  Alcaic,  con- 
sists of  two  dactyls,  followed  by  two  trochees  ;  as, 

Levia  |  persSnfi- 1  ere"  I  saxa.  Hor. 


COMBINATION  OF  VERSES  IN  POEMS. 

<§>  319.     A  poem  may  consist  of  one  or  more  kinds  of  verse. 

A  poem  in  which  only  one  kind  of  verse  is  employed,  is 
called  carmen  monocblon ;  that  which  has  two  kinds,  dicolon ; 
that  which  has  three  kinds,  tricolon. 

When  the  poem  returns,  after  the  second  line,  to  the  same 
verse  with  which  it  began,  it  is  called  distrophon ;  when  after 
the  third  line,  tristrdphon  ;  and  when  after  the  fourth,  tetrastro- 
phon. 

The  several  verses  which  occur  before  the  poem  returns  to 
25» 


294     PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;     HORATIAN    METRES. 

the  kind  of  verse  with  which  it  began,  constitute  a  stanza  or 
strophe. 

A  poem  consisting  of  two  kinds  of  verse,  when  the  stanza  contains  two 
verses,  is  called  dicolon  distrdphon,  (see  §  320,  Syn.  3 ;)  when  it  contains 
three,  dicolon  tristrdphon,  (Auson.  Profess.  21 ;)  when  four,  dicolon  tetras- 
trbphon,  (Syn.  2;)  and  when  five,  dicolon  pentastrophon. 

A  poem  consisting  of  three  kinds  of  verse,  when  the  stanza  contains 
three  verses,  is  called  tricolon  tristrdphon,  (Syn.  15 ;)  when  four,  tricolon 
tetrastrdphon,  (Syn.  1.) 

HORATIAN    METRES. 

<§>  320.  The  different  species  of  metre  used  by  Horace  in 
his  lyric  compositions  are  twenty.  The  various  forms  in  which 
he  has  employed  them,  either  separate  or  in  conjunction,  are 
nineteen,  arranged,  according  to  the  order  of  preference  given 
to  them  by  the  poet,  in  the  following 

SYNOPSIS. 

1.  Two  greater  Alcaics  (§  318,  III.),  one  Archilochian  iam- 
bic dimeter  hypermeter  (§  314,  VII.),  and  one  lesser  Alcaic 
(§  318,  V.) ;  as, 

Vides,  tit  alta  stet  nivS  candldum 
Soracte,  nee  jam  sustlneant  onus 
Silvoe  laborantes,  geluque" 

Flumina  constlterlnt  acuto.  (Ju*.  1,  9.) 

This  is  called  the  Horatian  stanza,  because  it  seems  to  have  been  a 
favorite  with  Horace,  being  used  in  thirty-seven  of  his  odes. 

2.  Three  Sapphics  (§315,  II.)  and  one  Adonic  (§312, 
VIII.);  as, 

Jam  sfttis  terns  nivis  atque"  dlrae 
Grandinls  mislt  pater,  et,  rubente" 
Dextera  sacras  jaculatus  arces, 

Terruit  urbem.  {Lib.  1,  2.) 

3.  One  Glyconic  (§316,  IV.)  and  one  Asclepiadic  (§316, 
III.);  as, 

Sic  te  DlvS  pS-tens  C^pri, 

Sic  fratres  Hglense,  lucida  sldgra....      (Lib.  1,  3.) 

4.  One  iambic  trimeter  (§  314,  I.)  and  one  iambic  dimeter 
(§314,  VI.);  as, 

Ibis  Liburnis  Inter  alta  navium, 

Amlcg,  propugnacula.  (Epod.  1.) 

5.  Three  Asclepiadics  (§  316,  III.)  and  one  Glyconic  (§  316, 
IV.);  as, 

Scrtberls  Vario  fortis,  et  hostium 

Victor,  Mseonil  carmlnls  allti, 

Quam  rem  cumque  fgrox  navibus  ant  gauis 

Miles,  te  dace,  gessSrit.  *  (Lib.  1,  6,) 


prosody. — versification;  horatian  metres.     295 

6.  Two  Asclepiadics  (§316,  III.),  one  Pherecratic  (§316, 
V.),  and  one  Glyconic  (§  316,  IV.) ;  as, 

Diana  m,  tenerae,  dlcitg  vlrgmes  :  % 

Intonsiim,  pu6rl,  dlcitS  Cynthium, 
Latdnamqug  siipremo 

Dllectam  pemtus  J5vi.  (Lib.  1,  21.) 

7.  The  Asclepiadic  (§  316,  III.)  alone ;  as, 

Maecenas  atavls  edlte"  regibus.  (Lib.  1,1.) 

8.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  I.)  and  one  dactylic 
tetrameter  a  posteriore  (§  312,  V.) ;  as, 

Laudabunt  Sill  claram  Rhodon,  aut  Mitylenen, 

Aut  Ephfesum,  bimarlsve'  Corlnthi....  (Lib.  1 ,  7.) 

9.  The  choriambic  pentameter  (§  316,  I.)  alone  ;  as, 

Tu  ne  quaesierls,  sdrS  ngfas,  quern  mihi,  quem  tibi....    (Lib.  1, 11.) 

10.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  I.)  and  one  iambic 
dimeter  (§314,  VI.) ;  as, 

Nox  6rat,  et  cCelo  falgebat  luna  se*reno 

Inter  minora  sldgra.  (Epod.  15.) 

11.  The  iambic  trimeter  (§  314,  I.)  alone;  as, 

Jam,  jam  efficacl  do  mantis  scientiae.  (Epod.  17.) 

12.  One  choriambic  dimeter  (§316,  VI.)  and  one  choriambic 
tetrameter  (§  316,  II.)  with  a  variation ;  as, 

LydTa,  die,  p6r  omnes 

Te  Deos  oro,  Sybarln  cur  propSras  amando....  (Lib.  1,  8.) 

13.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  I.)  and  one  iambic  trim- 
eter (§314,1.);  as, 

Altera  jam  tSritur  bellls  clvllibus  ffitas  ; 

Suls  gt  Ipsa  Roma  vlribus  ruit.  (Epod.  16.) 

14.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§310,  I.)  and  one  dactylic 
trimeter  catalectic  (§312,  VII.);  as, 

Dlffugere'  nives  :  rgdSunt  jam  gramma  campls, 

ArboribusquS  comae.  (Lib.  4.  7.) 

15.  One  iambic  trimeter  (§314,  I.),  one  dactylic  trimeter 
catalectic  (§312,  VII.),  and  one  iambic  dimeter  (§314,  VI.) ; 
as, 

Petti,  nihil  me,  slciit  antga,  juvat 
ScrlbSrS  versiciilos, 
Amor6  perculsum  gravi.  (Epod.  11.) 

Note.  The  second  and  third  lines  are  often  written  as  one  verse. 
See  §  318, 1. 

16.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  I.),  one  iambic  dimeter 
(§  314,  VI.),  and  one  dactylic  trimeter  catalectic  (§  3121  VII  ^; 
as, 

Horridi  tempgstas  caelum  contraxit ;  6t  Imbres 
Nivesqug  dedncunt  JSvem : 
Nunc  marS,  none  siluae....  (Epod,  13 


296    prosody. — versification;    horatian  metres. 

Note.    The  second  and  third  lines  of  this  stanza,  also,  are  often  written 
as  one  verse.     See  §  318,  II. 

17.  One   Archilochian   heptameter    (§318,    IV.)    and   one 
iambic  trimeter  catalectic  (§  314,  V.) ;  as, 

SolvitQr  acris  hiems  grata  vice  verts  et  Favonf, 
Trahuntque"  slccas  machine  carinas.  (Lib.  1,  4.) 

18.  One  iambic  dimeter  acephalous  (§314,  VIII.)  and  one 
iambic  trimeter  catalectic  (§314,  V.) ;  as, 

Non  ebur  neque  aureum 
Mea  rfinldet  In  ddmo  lacunar.  (Lib.  2, 18.) 

19.  The  Ionic  a  minore  (§317,  II.)  alone;  as, 
Mlserarum  est  neque  amorl  dare  ludum,  neque  dulcl....  (Lib.  3, 12.) 


§321.    A  METRICAL  KEY  TO  THE  ODES  OF  HORACE, 

Containing,  in  alphabetic  order ,  the  first  words  of  each,  with  a 
reference  to  the  numbers  in  the  preceding  Synopsis,  where  the 
metre  is  explained. 


M\i,  vetusto No.  1 

.flCquam  memento 1 

Albi,  ne  doleas 5 

Altera  jam  terltur 13 

Angustam,  amlci 1 

At,  O  deorum 4 

Audivere,  Lyce 6 

Bacchum  in  remotis 1 

Beatus  ille 4 

Ccelo  suplnas 1 

Caelo  tonantem 1 

Cum  tu,  Lydia 3 

Cur  me  querelis 1 

Delicta  majorum 1 

Descende  caelo 1 

Dianam,  tenerae C 

Diffugere  nives 14 

Dive,  quern  proles 2 

Divis  orte  bonis 5 

Donarem  pateras 7 

Donee  gratus  eram 3 

Eheu  !  lugaces 1 

Est  mihi  nonum 2 

Et  thure  et  fidlbus 3 

Exegi  monumentum 7 

Extremum  Tanaim 5 

Faune,  nympharum 2 

Festo  quid  potius  die 3 

Herculis  ritu 2 

Horrida  tempestas 16 

Ibis  Liburnis 4 


leci,  beatis No.  1 

Ille  et  nefasto 1 

Impios  parrffi 2 

Inclusam  Danafin 5 

Intactis  opulentior 3 

Integer  vitse 2 

Intermissa,  Venus,  diu 3 

Jam  jam  efficaci 11 

Jain  pauca  aratro 1 

Jam  satis  terris 2 

Jam  veris  comites 5 

Justum  et  tenacem 1 

Laudabunt  alii 8 

Lupis  et  agnis 4 

Lydia,  die,  per  omnes 12 

Maecenas  atavis 7 

Mala  soluta 4 

Martiis  caglebs 2 

Mater  sasva  Cupidmum 3 

Mercuri,  facunde 2 

Mercuri,  nam  te 2 

Miserarum  est 19 

Mollis  inertia 10 

Montium  custos 2 

Motum  ex  Metello 1 

Musis  amicus 1 

Natis  in  usum 1 

Ne  forte  credas 1 

Ne  sit  ancillae 2 

Nolis  longa  ferae 5 

Nondum  subacta 1 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  I    HORATIAN    METRES. 


29' 


Non  ebur  neque  aureum  . . .  No.  18 

Non  semper  imbres 1 

Non  usitata 1 

Non  vides,  quanto 2 

Nox  erat  10 

Nullam,  Vare,  sacra 9 

Nullus  argento 2 

Nunc  est  bibendum 1 

O  crudelis  adhuc 9 

O  diva,  gratum 1 

O  fons  Bandusiae 6 

O  matre  pulchra   1 

O  nata  mecum   1 

O  navis,  referent 6 

O  saepe  mecum 1 

O  Venus,  regina 2 

Odi  profanum 1 

Otium  Divos 2 

Parcius  junctas 2 

Parcus  Deorum 1 

Parentis  olim 4 

Pastor  quum  trahSret 5 

Percicos  odi,  puer 2 

Petti,  nihil  me 15 

Phoebe,  silvarumque 2 

Phoebus  volentem 1 

Pindarum  quisquis 2 

Poscimur  :  siquid 2 

Quse  cura  patrum 1 

Qualem  ministrum 1 


Quando  repostum No.  4 

Quantum  distet  ab  Inacho 3 

Quern  tu,  Melpomene 3 

Quem  virum  aut  heroa 2 

Quid  bellicosus 1 

Quid  dedicatum 1 

Quid  fles,  Asterie 6 

Quid  immerentes 4 

Quid  obseratis 11 

Quid  tibi  vis 8 

Quis  desiderio 5 

Quis  multa  gracilis 6 

Quo  me,  Bacche 3 

Quo,  quo,  scelesti  rultis 4 

Rectius  vives 2 

Rogare  longo 4 

Scriberis  Vario 5 

Septimi,   Gades 2 

Sic  te  Diva  potens 3 

Solvitur  acris  hiems 17 

Te  maris  et  terras 8 

Tu  ne  quaesiens 9 

Tyrrhena  regum 1 

Ulla  si  juris 2 

Uxor  pauperis  Ibyci 3 

Velox  amcenum 1 

Vides,  ut  alta 1 

Vile  potabis 2 

Vitas  hinnuleo 6 

Vixi  puellis 1 


298 


APPENDIX. GRAMMATICAL    FIGURES. 


APPENDIX. 


GRAMMATICAL    FIGURES. 

$  322.  Certain  deviations  from  the  regular  form  and 
construction  of  words,  are  called  grammatical  figures.  These 
may  relate  either  to  Orthography  and  Etymology,  or  to  Syntax. 

I.    FIGURES    OF    ORTHOGRAPHY    AND   ETYMOLOGY. 

These  are  distinguished  by  the  general  name  of  melaplasm. 

1.  Prosthesis  is  the  prefixing  of  a  letter  or  syllable  to  a  word  ;  as,  gna- 
tus,  for  natus ;  tetuii,  for  tuli.  Yet  these  were  anciently  the  customary 
forms,  from  which  those  now  in  use  were  formed  by  apha^resis. 

2.  Aphcere'sis  is  the  taking  of  a  letter  or  syllable  from  the  beginning  of 
a  word  ;  as,  'st,  for  est ;  rhabonem,  for  arrhabdnem. 

3  Epenthfsis  is  the  insertion  of  a  letter  or  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a 
word  ;  as,  alituum,  for  alitum. 

4.  Syncdpe  is  the  omission  of  a  letter  or  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a  word, 
as,  denm,  for  deorum ;  meum  fact-Am,  for  meorum  factorum ;  Seecla,  for 
scecula  ;  fiesti,  for  flevisti ;  repostus,  for  repositus  ;  aspris,  for  aspiris. 

5.  Crasis  is  the  contraction  of  two  vowels  into  one  ;  &s,cogo,  for  coago  ; 
nil,  for  nihil. 

6.  Paragdge  is  the  addition  of  a  letter  or  syllable  to  the  end  of  a  word ; 
as,  tried,  for  me  ;  claudier,  for  claudi. 

7.  Apo?6pe  is  the  omission  of  the  final  letter  or  syllable  of  a  word  ;  as, 
men",  for  mene  ;  Antoni,  for  Antonii. 

8.  Antithesis  is  the  substitution  of  one  letter  for  another ;  as,  olli,  for 
illi  ;  optumus,  for  optlmus  ;  officio,  for  adficio.  O  is  often  thus  used  for  u, 
especially  after  v ;  as,  voltus,  for  vultus ;  scrvom,  for  sercum.  So  after 
qu  ;  as,  aquom,  for  cequum. 

9.  Metathesis  is  the  changing  of  the  order  of  letters  in  a  word ;  as, 
pistris,  for  pristis. 

II.    FIGURES    OF    SYNTAX. 

§  323.  The  figures  of  Syntax  are  ellipsis,  pleonasm, 
enallage,  and  hyperbaton. 

I.  Ellipsis  is  the  omission  of  some  word  or  words  in  a  sen- 
tence ;  as, 

Aiunt,  sc.  homines.  Darius  Hystaspis,  sc.filius.  Cano,  sc.  ego.  Quid 
multa?  sc.  dicam. 

Ellipsis  includes  asyndeton,  zeugma,  syllepsis,  prolcpsis, 
and  synecdoche. 


APPENDIX. FIGURES  OF  SYNTAX.         299 

(1.)  Asyndeton  is  the  omission  of  a  conjunction  ;  as,  abiit,  cxcessit, 
evdsit,  erupit,  sc.  et.  Cic. 

(2.)  Zeugma  is  the  uniting  of  two  nouns,  or  two  infinitives,  to  a  verb, 
which  is  applicable  only  to  one  of  them ;  as,  Pacem  an  bellum  gerens 
(Sail.),  where  gerens  is  applicable  to  bellum  only.  Semperne  in  sanguine, 
ferro,  fugd  versablmur  ?  (Id.)  where  the  verb  does  net  properly  apply  to 
ferro. 

JVego  is  often  thus  used  with  two  propositions,  one  of  which  is  affirma- 
tive ;  as,  JYegant  Casdrem  mansurum,  postulatdque  interposlta  esse,  for 
dicuntque  pastuldta....  Cic. 

When  an  adjective  or  verb,  referring  to  two  or  more  nouns,  agrees  with 
one,  and  is  understood  with  the  rest,  the  construction  is  also  sometimes 
called  zeugma ;  as,  Et  genus,  et  virtus,  nisi  cum  re,  vilior  algd  est.  Hor. 
Caper  tibi  salvus  et  heedi.  Virg.  Quamvis  Me  nigcr,  quamvis  tu  Candida 
esses.  Id. 

(3.)  Syllepsis  is  when  an  adjective  or  verb,  belonging  to  two  or  more 
nouns  of  different  genders,  persons,  or  numbers,  agrees  with  one  rather 
than  another  ;  as,  Attonlti  novitdte  parent  Baucis,  timidusque  Philemon. 
Ovid.  Procumbit  uterque  pronus  himi,  i.  e.  Deucalion  et  Pyrrha.  Id. — 
Sustullmus  manus  et  ego  et  Balbus.  Cic.  So,  Ipse  cum  fratre  adesse  jussi 
sumus.  Id. — Projectisipie  amiculo  et  Uteris.  Curt.  See  §  §  205,  Rem.  2, 
and  209,  Rem.  12,  (3,)  and  (7.) 

Zeugma,  in  the  latter  sense  above  mentioned,  is  by  some  included  under 
syllepsis. 

(4.)  Prolepsis  is  when  the  parts,  differing  in  number  or  person  from  the 
whole,  are  placed  after  it,  the  verb  or  adjective  not  being  repeated  ;  as, 
Princlpes  utrinque  pugnam  ciebant,  ab  Sab'mis  Mettius  Curtius,  ab  Romdnis 
Hostus  Hostilius.  Liv.  Boni  quantum  convenlmus  umbo,  tu  caldmos  infidre, 
ego  diclre  versus.  Virg. 

(5.)  Synecddche  is  the  use  of  an  accusative  of  the  part  affected,  instead 
of  an  ablative  ;  as,  Expleri  mentem  n"equit.  Virg.     See  §  234,  II. 

2.  Pleonasm  is  using  a  greater  number  of  words  than  is  ne- 
cessary to  express  the  meaning  ;  as, 

Sic  ore  locuta  est.  Virg.  Qui  magis  vert  vincSrc  qudm  diu  imperdre 
malit.  Liv.     Nemo  unus.  Cic. 

Under  pleonasm  are  included  parelcon,  polysyndeton,  hendi- 
ddys,  and  periphrasis. 

(1.)  Parelcon  is  the  addition  of  an  unnecessary  syllable  or  particle  to 
pronouns,  verbs,  or  adverbs ;  as,  egdmet,  agedum,  fortassean.  Such  addi- 
tions, however,  usually  modify  the  meaning  in  some  degree. 

(2.)  Polysyndeton  is  a  redundancy  of  conjunctions ;  as,  Unh  Eurusqae 
Notusqae  ruunt  creberque  procdlis  Africus.  Virg. 

(3.)  Hendiddys  is  the  expression  of  an  idea  by  two  nouns  connected  by 
i  conjunction,  instead  of  a  noun  and  a  limiting  adjective  or  genitive  ;  as, 
Patens  libdmus  et  auro,  for  aureis  patSris.  Virg.  Libro  et  silvestri  subere 
clausam,  for  libro  suberis.  Id. 

(4.)  Periphrdsis  is  a  circuitous  mode  of  expression ;  as,  Tenlri  foetus 
ovium,  i.  e.  agni.  Virg. 

3.  Enalldge  is  a  change  of  words,  or  a  substitution  of  one 
gender,  number,  case,  person,  tense,  mood,  or  voice  of  the  same 
word  for  another. 


300  APPENDIX. FIGURES    OF    SYNTAX. 

Enallage  includes  antimeria,  heterosis,  antiptosis,  synesis, 
and  anacoluthon. 

(1.)  Antimeria  is  the  use  of  one  part  of  speech  for  another;  as,  Nostrum 
istud  vivere  triste,  for  nostra  vita.  Pers.  Miud  eras.  Id.  Conjugium 
vide.bit?  for  conjUgem.  Virg.     Placltam  pad  nutrl tor  olivam,  for  nutrlto.  Id. 

(2.)  Heterosis  is  the  use  of  one  form  of  a  noun,  pronoun,  verb,  &c.,  for 
another ;  as,  Ego  quoque  una  pereo,  quod  mihi  est  carius,  for  qui  mihi  sum 
carior.  Ter.  Romanus  pralio  victor,  for  Romdni  victores.  Liv.  Many 
words  are  used  by  the  poets  in  the  plural  instead  of  the  singular ;  as,  colla, 
cor  da,  ora,  &c.  See  §  98.  Me  truncus  illapsus  cerehro  sustulerat,  for  sus- 
tulisset.  Hor. 

(3.)  Antiptosis  is  the  use  of  one  case  for  another;  as,  Cui  nunc  cogno- 
men lulo,  for  lulus.  Virg.  Uxor  invicli  Jovis  esse  nescis,  for  te  esse  uxQ- 
rem.  Hor. 

(4.)  SynSsis,  or  synthesis,  is  adapting  the  construction  to  the  sense  of  a 
word,  rather  than  to  its  gender  or  number ;  as,  Subeunt  Tegaa  juventus 
auxilio  tardi.  Stat.  Concursus  populi  mirantium  quid  rei  est.  Liv.  Pars 
in  cruccm  acti.  Sail.  Ubi  illic  est  scelus,  qui  me  perdidit  ?  Ter.  Id  mea 
■mirdme  refert,  qui  sum  natu  maximus.  Id. 

(5.)  Anacoluthon  is  when  the  latter  part  of  a  sentence  does  not  agree 
in  construction  with  the  forrner ;  as,  Nam  nos  omnes,  quibus  est  alicunde 
allquis  objectus  labos,  omne  quod  est  interea  tempus,  priusquam  id  rescitum 
est,  lucro  est.  Ter.  In  this  example,  the  writer  began  as  if  he  intended  to 
say  lucro  habemus,  and  ended  as  if  he  had  said  nobis  omnibus. 

4.  Hyperbaton  is  a  transgression  of  the  usual  order  of  words 
or  clauses. 

Hyperbaton  includes  anastrophe,  hysteron  proteron,  hypal- 
lage,  synchysis,  tmesis,  and  parenthesis. 

(1.)  Anastrdphe  is  an  inversion  of  the  order  of  two  words ;  as,  Trans- 
tra  per  et  remos,  for  per  transtra.  Virg.  Collo  dare  brachia  circum,  for  cir- 
cumddre.  Id.  Nox  erit  una  super,  for  superirit.  Ovid.  Et  facit  are,  for 
arefdeit.  Lucr. 

(2.)  Hysteron  prottron  is  reversing  the  natural  order  of  the  sense ;  as, 
Moridmur,  et  in  media  arma  rudmus.  Virg.     Valet  atque  vivit.  Ter. 

(3.)  Hypalldge  is  an  interchange  of  constructions  ;  as,  In  novafert  ani- 
mus mutdtas  dicSre  formas  corpora,  for  corpora  mutdta  in  novas  formas. 
Ovid.     Dare  classibus  Austros,  for  dare  classes  Austris.  Virg. 

(4.)  Synchysis,  is  a  confused  position  of  words ;  as,  Saxa  vocant  Itdli, 
mediis  qua  in  fluctibus,  aras,  for  qua  saxa  in  mediis  fluctibus,  Itdli  vocant 
aras.  Virg. 

(5.)  Tmesis  is  the  separation  of  the  parts  of  a  compound  word ;  as, 
Septem  subjecta  tridni  gens,  for  septentridni.  Virg.  Qua  me  cunque  vocant 
terra.  Id.     Per  mihi,  per,  inquam,  gratum  feceris.  Cic. 

(6.)  Parenthesis  is  the  insertion  of  a  word  or  words  in  a  sentence 
which  interrupt  the  natural  connection ;  as,  Titjjre  dum  redeo,  (brevis  est 
via,)  pasce  capsllas.  Virg. 

Remark.     To  the  above  may  be  added  archaism  and  Hel- 
lenism, which  belong  both  to  the  figures  of  etymology  and  to 
hose  of  syntax. 
(1.)  Archaism  is  the  use  of  ancient  forms  or  constructions ;  as,  auldl 


APPENDIX. TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OF  RHETORIC.  301 

for  aula ;  sendti,  for  sendtus;  fuat,  for  sit ;  prohibesso,  for  prohibuero ;  tm- 
petrasslre,  for  impetraturum  esse  ;  farler,  forfari  ;  nenu,  for  non  ;  endo,  for 

in; Oplram  abutltur,  for  opSrd.  Ter.     Quid  tibi  hanc  curatio  est  rem? 

Plaut. 

(2.)  Hellenism  is  the  use  of  Greek  forms  or  constructions  ;  as,  Heline, 
for  Helena;  Antiphon,  for  Antipho  ;  aurds  (gen.),  for  aura;  Palkldos, 
Palldda,  for  Pallddis,  PaUddem ;  Trodsin,  Troddas,  for  Troadibus,  Troa- 
des  ; Abstineto  irdrum.  Hor.     Tempus  desistZre  pugna.  Virg. 

y  o24.  To  the  grammatical  figures  may  not  improperly  be  sub- 
joined certain  others,  which  are  often  referred  to  in  philological  works,  and 
which  are  called 


TROPES    AND    FIGURES    OF   RHETORIC. 

A  rhetorical  figure  is  a  mode  of  expression  different  from  the  direct  and 
simple  way  of  expressing  the  same  sense.  The  turning  of  a  word  from 
its  original  and  customary  meaning,  is  called  a  trope. 

1.  A  metaphor  is  the  transferring  of  a  word  from  the  object  to  which  it 
properly  belongs,  and  applying  it  to  another,  to  which  that  object  has  some 
analogy ;  as,  Ridet  agcr,  The  field  smiles.  Virg.  JEtas  aurea,  The  golden 
age.  Ovid. 

Catachresis  is  a  bold  or  harsh  metaphor ;  as,  Vir  giegis  ipse  caper.  Virg. 
Eurus  per  Siculas  equitavit  undas.  Hor. 

2.  Metonymy  is  substituting  the  name  of  an  object  for  that  of  anothei 
to  which  it  has  a  certain  relation  >  as  the  cause  for  the  effect,  the  containei 
for  what  is  contained,  the  property  for  the  substance,  the  sign  for  the  thing 
signified,  and  their  contraries ;  the  parts  of  the  body  for  certain  affections, 
&c. ;  as,  Amor  duri  Martis,  i.  e.  belli.  Virg.  Pallida  mors.  Hor.  Hausit 
patgram,  i.  e.  vinum.  Virg.  Vina  coronant,  i.  e.  pateram.  Id.  Nccte 
ternos  colores,  i.  e.  tria  fila  diversi  coloris.  Id.  Cedant  arma  togae,  i.  e. 
bellum  paci.  Cic.  Sascula  mitescent,  i.  e.  homines  in  saculis.  Virg.  Vivat 
Pacuvius  vel  Nestora  totum.  Juv. 

3.  Synecdoche  is  putting  a  genus  for  a  species,  a  whole  for  a  part,  a  sin- 
gular for  a  plural,  and  their  contraries ;  also  the  material  for  the  thing 
made  of  it ;  as,  Mortdles,  for  homines.  Virg.  Fontem  ferebaut.  Id.  Tec- 
tum, for  domus.  Id.  Armdto  millte  complent,  for  armdtis  militlbus.  Id. 
Ferrum,  for  gladius. 

4.  Irony  is  the  intentional  use  of  words  which  express  a  sense  contrary 
to  that  which  the  writer  or  speaker  means  to  convey  ;  as,  Salve,  bone  vir, 
curdsti  probe.  Ter.  Egregiam  verb  laudem,  et  spolia  ampla  refertis,  tuque, 
puerque  tuus.  Virg. 

5.  Hyperbole  is  the  magnifying  or  diminishing  of  a  thing  beyond  the 
truth ;  as,  Ipse  arduus,  altdque  pulsat  sidira.  Virg.     Odor  Euro.  Id. 

6.  Metalepsis  is  the  including  of  several  tropes  in  one  word ;  as,  Post 
aliquot  aristas.  Virg.  Here  aristas  is  put  for  messes,  this  for  astdtes,  and 
this  for  annos. 

7.  Allegory  is  a  consistent  series  of  metaphors,  designed  to  illustrate  one 
subject  by  another;  as,  Claudite  jam  rivos,puSri:  satprata  biberunt.  Virg. 
O  navis,  referent  in  mare  te  novifiuctus.  Hor. 

An  obscure  allegory  or  riddle  is  called  an  anigma. 

8.  Antonomasia  is  using  a  proper  noun  for  a  common  one,  and  the  con- 
trary;  as,  Irus  et  est  subitb,  qui  modd  Croesus  erat,  for  pauper  and  dives. 
Ovid.    So,  by  periphrasis,  potor  Rhoddni,  for  Gallus.  Hor. 

26 


302    APPENDIX. TROPES    AND    FIGURES    OF    RHETORIC. 

9.  Litdtes  is  a  mode  of  expressing  something  by  denying  the  contrary  ; 
as,  JVon  laudo,  I  blame.  Ter.    Non  innoxia  verba.  Virg. 

10.  Antiphrdsis  is  using  a  word  in  a  sense  opposite  to  its  proper  meaning; 
as,  Auri  sacra  fames.  Virg. 

11.  Euphemism  is  the  use  of  softened  language  to  express  what  is  offen- 
«ive  or  distressing ;  as,  St  quid  accidisset  Casdri,  i.  e.  si  mortuvs  esset.  Veil. 

12.  Antanacldsis  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  in  different  senses ;  as, 
Quis  neget  JEneae,  natum  de  stirpe  Neronem  ?  Sustulit  hie  matrem,  sustulit 
Me  patrem.  Epigr.   Amari  jucundum  est,  si  curttur  ne  quid  insit  amari.  Cic. 

13.  Anaphdra,  or  epanaphdra,  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  begin- 
ning of  successive  clauses ;  as,  Nihilne  te  nocturnum  presidium  palatii, 
nihil  urbis  vigilice,  nihil  timor  populi,  &c.  Cic.  Te,  dulcis  conjux,  te,  solo 
in  litdre  secum,  te,  veniente  die,  te,  decedente,  canebat.  Virg. 

14.  Epistrdphe  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  end  of  successive 
clauses ;  as,  Pamos  populus  Romdnus  justitid  vicit,  armis  vicit,  liberalitdte 
vicit.  Cic. 

15.  Sympldce  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  beginning,  and  of  an- 
other at  the  end,  of  successive  clauses;  as,  Quis  legem  tulit?  Rullus: 
Quis  majorem  populi  partem  suffragiis  privdvit  ?  Rullus  :  Quis  comitiis 
prafuit  ?  Idem  Rullus.  Cic. 

16.  Epanalepsis  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  word  or  sentence  after  a 
parenthesis.   Virg.  Geor.  II.  4 — 7. 

17.  Anadipjosis  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  at  the  end  of  one  clause, 
and  the  beginning  of  another ;  as,  Hie  tamen  vivit :  Vivit?  imo  verb, 
etiam  in  sendtum  venit-  Cic.     This  is  sometimes  called  epanastrdphe . 

18.  Epanadiplosis  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  both  at  the  beginning 
and  end  of  a  sentence ;  as,  Crescit  arnnr  nummi,  quantum  ipsa  pecunia 
crescit.  Juv. 

19.  Epanddos  is  the  repetition  of  the  same  words  in  an  inverted  order , 
as,  Crudelis  mater  magis,  an  puer  improbus  Me  ?  Improbus  Me  puer,  era 
delis  tu  quoque,  mater.  Virg. 

20.  Epizeuxis  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  word  for  the  sake  of  emphasis ; 
as,  Excitate,  excitate  eum  ab  inferis.  Cic.  Ah  Corydon,  Corydon,  quce  te 
dementia  cepit  ?  Virg.     IbUmus,  iblmus.  Hor. 

21.  Climax  is  when  each  successive  clause  of  a  sentence  begins  with 
the  conclusion  of  the  preceding,  the  sense  being  thus  gradually  amplified  ;. 
as,  Quce  reliqua  spes  manet  libertdtis,  si  Mis  et  quod  libet,  licet ;  et  quod  licet 
possunt;  et  quod possunt, a,udent;  et  quod  audent,vobis  molestum  non  est. 
Cic. 

22.  Jncrementum  is  an  amplification  without  a  strict  climax ;  as,  Facinus 
est,  vinclri  civem  Romanum  ;  scelus,  verberdri  ;  prope  parricidium,  nccari , 
quid  dicam  in  crucem  tolli?  Cic.  When  the  sense  is  gradually  heighten- 
ed, it  is  called  anabasis,  and  when  it  falis  or  decreases,  catabdsis. 

23.  Polyptoton  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  word  in  different  cases,  gen- 
ders, numbers,  &c. ;  as,  Jam  clypeus  clypeisf  umbonerepcllUur  umbo  ;  ense 
minax  ensis,  pede  pes,  et  cusplde  cuspis.  Stat. 

24.  Paregm&non  is  the  use  of  several  words  of  the  same  origin,  in  one 
sentence ;  as,  Abesse  non  potest,  quin  ejusdem  hominis  sit,  qui  improbos 
probet,  probos  improbare.  Cic. 

25.  Paronomasia  is  the  use  of  words  which  resemble  each  other  in 
sound  ;  as,  Amor  et  melle  et  felle  est  facundisslmus.  Plaut.  Civem  bond- 
rum  artium,  bonarum  partium.  Cic.  Amantes  sunt  amentes.  Ter.  This 
figure  is  sometimes  called  agnominatio. 


APPENDIX. TROPES    AND    FIGURES    OF    RHETORIC.    307 

26.  Hommoprophe'ron,  or  alliteration,  is  when  several  words  beginning 
with  the  same  letter  occur  in  a  sentence  ;  as,  O  Tite,  tutc  Tati,  tibi  tarda, 
tyranne,  tuiisti.  Enn.     JYeu  patriae  validas  in  viscera  vertite  vires.  Virg. 

27.  Antithesis  is  the  placing  of  different  or  opposite  words  or  sentiments 
in  contrast;  as,  Hujus  orationis  difficilius  est  exitum  quam  principium 
iuvcnire.  Cic.  Caesar  beneficiis  ac  munificentia  magnus  habebdtur  ;  integ- 
rity te  vitae  Cato.  Sail. 

28.  Oxymoron  unites  words  of  contrary  significations,  thus  producing 
a  seeming  contradiction ;  as,  Concordia  discors.  Hor.  Cum  tacent,  cla- 
mant. Cic. 

29.  Synonymia  is  the  use  of  different  words  or  expressions  having  the 
same  import ;  as,  Non  feram,  non  patiar,  non  sinam.  Cic.  Promitto,  re- 
cipio,  spondeo.  Id. 

30.  Parabd!a,  or  simile,  is  the  comparison  of  one  thing  with  another ; 
as,  Repentb  te,  tanquam  serpens  e  lalibulis,  oculis  eminentwus,  inflato  collo, 
tumldis  cerviclbus,  intulisti.  Cic. 

31.  Erotesis  is  an  earnest  question,  and  often  implies  a  strong  affirma- 
tion of  the  contrary;  as,  Credltis  avectos  hostes?  Virg.  lieu!  qua  me 
(Bquora  poss-unt  acciplre  ?  Id. 

32.  Epanorthosis  is  the  recalling  of  a  word,  in  order  to  place  a  stronger 
or  more  significant  one  in  its  stead ;  as,  F ilium  unlcum  adolescentulum 
habeo :  ah !  quid  dixi  1  me  habere  ?  Imb  habui.  Ter. 

33.  AposiopEsis  is  leaving  a  sentence  unfinished  in  consequence  of  some 
emotion  of  the  mind;  as,  Quos  ego — sed  prastat  motos  componlre  fiuctus. 
Virg. 

34.  Prosopopoeia,  or  personification,  represents  inanimate  things  as  act- 
ing or  speaking,  and  persons  dead  or  absent  as  alive  and  present ;  as,  Qua 
(patria)  tecum  Catillna  sic  agit.  Cic.     Virtus  sumit  out  ponit  secures.  Hor. 

35.  Apostrophe  is  a  turning  off  from  the  regular  course  of  the  subject,  to 
address  some  person  or  thing ;  as,  Vi  potltur :  quid  non  mortalia  pectdra 
cogis,  auri  sacra  fames  !  Virg. 

§  o2o»  To  the  figures  of  rhetoric  may  be  subjoined  the  following 
terms,  used  to  designate  defects  or  blemishes  in  style  : — 

1.  Barbarism  is  either  the  use  of  a  foreign  word,  or  a  violation  of  the 
rules  of  orthography,  etymology,  or  prosody ;  as,  rigorosus,  for  rigtdus  or 
severus  ;  domnilnus,  for  domXnus ;  davi,  for  dedi  ;  alterlus,  for  alterius. 

2.  Solecism  is  a  violation  of  the  rules  of  syntax  ;  as,  Venus  pulcher  ;  vos 
invidemus. 

3.  Neoterism  is  the  use  of  words  or  phrases  introduced  by  authors  living 
subsequently  to  the  best  ages  of  Latinity ;  as,  murdrum,  a  murder ;  con- 
stabularius,  a  constable. 

4.  Tautology  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  meaning  in  different  words ;  as, 
Jam  vos  aciem,  et  proelia,  et  hostem  poscltis.  Sil. 

5.  Amphibolia  is  the  use  of  equivocal  words  or  constructions ;  as,  Gallus, 
a  Gaul,  or  a  cock.    Aio  te,  JEaclda,  Romanos  vincere  posse.  Quinct. 

6.  Jdiotism  is  a  construction  peculiar  to  one  or  more  languages  :  thus, 
the  ablative  after  comparatives  is  a  Latinism.  When  a  peculiarity  of  one 
language  is  imitated  in  another,  this  is  also  called  idiotism.  Thus,  Mittt 
mihi  verbum,  instead  of  Fac  me  certiorem,  is  an  Anglicism. 


304    APPENDIX. ROMAN    MODE    OF    RECKONING  ;     TIME. 

ROMAN    MODE    OF    RECKONING. 

I.  OF  TIME. 

$  326.  1.  The  calendar  of  the  Romans  agreed  with  our 
own  in  the  number  of  months,  and  of  the  days  in  each ;  but, 
instead  of  reckoning  in  an  uninterrupted  series  from  the  first 
to  the  last  day  of  a  month,  they  had  three  points  from  which 
their  days  were  counted — the  calends,  the  nones,  and  the  ides. 
The  calends  were  always  the  first  day  of  the  month.  The 
nones  were  the  fifth,  and  the  ides  the  thirteenth;  except  in 
March,  May,  July,  and  October,  in  which  the  nones  occurred 
on  the  seventh  day,  and  the  ides  on  the  fifteenth. 

2.  They  always  counted  forwards,  from  the  day  whose  date 
was  to  be  determined  to  the  next  calends,  nones,  or  ides,  and 
designated  the  day  by  its  distance  from  such  point.  After  the 
first  day  of  the  month,  therefore,  they  began  to  reckon  so  many 
days  before  the  nones  ;  after  the  nones,  so  many  days  before  the 
ides ;  after  the  ides,  so  many  before  the  calends,  of  the  next 
month. 

Thus,  the  second  of  January  was  denoted  by  quarto  nonas  Januarias, 
or  Januarii,  sc.  die  ante;  the  third,  tertio  nonas ;  the  fourth, pridie  nonas; 
and  the  fifth,  nonis.  The  sixth  was  denoted  by  octavo  idus  ;  the  seventh, 
septlmo  idus ;  and  so  on  to  the  thirteenth,  on  which  the  ides  fell.  The 
fourteenth  was  denoted  by  undevigeslmo  calendas  Februarias,  or  Febru- 
arii  ;  and  so  on  to  the  end  of  the  month. 

3.  The  day  preceding  the  calends,  nones,  and  ides,  was  term- 
ed pridie  calendas,  &c,  sc.  ante:  in  designating  the  other  days, 
both  the  day  of  the  calends,  &c,  and  that  whose  date  was  to 
be  determined,  were  reckoned  ;  hence  the  second  day  before  the 
calends,  &,c,  was  called  tertio,  the  third  quarto,  &,c. 

4.  To  reduce  the  Roman  calendar  to  our  own,  therefore,  it 
is  necessary  to  take  one  from  the  number  denoting  the  day,  and 
to  subtract  the  remainder  from  the  number  of  the  day  on  which 
the  nones  or  ides  fell. 

Thus,  to  determine  the  day  equivalent  to  IV.  nonas  Januarias,  we  take 
1  from  4,  and  subtract  the  remainder,  3,  from  5,  the  day  on  which  the  nones 
fell:  this  gives  2,  or  the  second  of  January,  for  the  day  in  question.  So 
VI.  idus  Aprilis :  the  ides  of  April  falling  upon  the  13th,  we  take  5  from 
13,  which  leaves  8  :  the  expression,  therefore,  denotes  the  8th  of  April. 

In  reckoning  the  days  before  the  calends,  as  they  are  not  the 
last  day  of  the  current  month,  but  the  first  of  the  following,  :t 
is  necessary  to  add  one  to  the  number  of  days  in  the  month. 

Thus,  XV.  col.  Quintiles  is  (30-fl)  31—14=17,  or  the  17th  of  June 


APPENDIX. ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING  ',    TIME.  305 

To  reduce  our  calendar  to  the  Roman,  the  same  method  is 
to  be  pursued. 

Thus,  the  22d  of  December  ia  (31-f-l)  32—21=11,  i.  e.  XI.  cal.  Jan. 

5.  In  leap-year,  both  the  24th  and  25th  of  February  were 
denoted  by  sexto  calendas  Martins  or  Martii.  The  latter  of 
these  was  called  dies  bisseztus,  and  the  year  itself  annus  bis- 
sextus. 

The  day  after  the  calends,  &c.,  was  sometimes  called  postridie  calendas, 
&c. 

The  names  of  the  months  are  properly  adjectives,  though  often  used 
as  nouns,  mensis  being  understood.  Before  the  times  of  the  emperors, 
July  was  called  Quintilis,  and  August,  Sextilis.  The  names  Julius  and 
Augustus  were  given  in  honor  of  the  Caesars. 

6.  The  correspondence  of  our  calendar  with  that  of  the 
Romans  is  exhibited  in  the  following 


TABLE. 

Days  of 

Mar.    Mai. 

Jan.      Aug. 

Apr. 

JtJN. 

Febr. 

our  months. 

Jul.      Oct. 

Dec 

Sept. 

Nov. 

1 

Calendae. 

Calends). 

Calenc 

1*. 

Calendae. 

2 

VI.      nonas. 

IV.     nonas. 

IV.      nonas. 

IV.    nonas. 

3 

V.           " 

III. 

III. 

ti 

III.       « 

4 

IV.         " 

Pridie     " 

Pridie 

It 

Pridie   " 

5 

III.      " 

Nonce. 

Nonae. 

Nonce. 

6 

Pridie     " 

VIII.    idus. 

VIII. 

idus. 

VIII.  idus. 

7 

Nonas. 

VII.        « 

VII. 

u 

VII.      " 

8 

VIII.    idus. 

VI.          " 

VI. 

a 

VI.        » 

9 

VII.        « 

V.           " 

V. 

u 

V.          « 

10 

VI. 

IV. 

IV. 

tt 

IV.        » 

11 

V.           « 

III. 

III. 

a 

III.       « 

12 

IV.          " 

Pridie     " 

Pridie 

a 

Pridie  " 

13 

TIL         " 

Idus. 

Idus. 

Idus. 

14 

Pridie     " 

XIX.     cal. 

XVIII 

.  cal. 

XVI.   cal. 

15 

Idus. 

XVIII.  " 

XVII. 

tt 

XV.      " 

16 

XVII.  cal. 

XVII.     " 

XVI. 

tt 

xrv.  " 

17 

XVI.       « 

XVI.      « 

XV. 

tt 

XIII.    " 

18 

XV.        " 

XV.        " 

XIV. 

a 

•  XII.      " 

19 

XIV.      " 

XIV.      " 

XIII. 

u 

XL       " 

20 

XIII.      " 

XIII.      « 

XII. 

tt 

X.        " 

21 

XII.        " 

XII.        " 

XL 

11 

IX.       " 

22 

XL         " 

XL 

X. 

It 

VIII.    " 

23 

X.           " 

X. 

IX. 

It 

Vll.      " 

24 

IX.         " 

IX.         " 

VIII. 

u 

VI.        " 

25 

VIII.      " 

VIII.      " 

VII. 

ti 

V.          " 

26 

VII.        " 

VII.        " 

VI. 

tl 

IV.        " 

27 

VI.         " 

VI.         « 

V. 

a 

III.     « 

28 

V.           " 

V.           » 

IV. 

tt 

Pridie  "Mar. 

29 

IV.         " 

IV.         « 

III. 

tt 

30 

III.         " 

III.      " 

Pridie 

u 

31 

Pridie     " 

Pridie     " 

26  • 

306  APPENDIX. ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING  J  MONEX". 

7.  The  Latins  not  only  said  tertio,  pridie,  &,c,  calendas, 
&,c,  but  also  ante  diem  tertium,  &c,  calendas,  &c. ;  and  the 
latter  form  in  Cicero  and  Livy  is  far  more  common  than  the 
former,  and  is  usually  written  thus,  a.  d.  III.  caL,  &,c. 

The  expression  ante  diem  was  used  as  an  indeclinable  noun, 
and  is  joined  with  in  and  ex  ;  as, 

Consul  Latinas  ferias  in  ante  diem  tertium  idus  Sextllis  edirit,  The  con- 
sul appointed  the  Latin  festival  for  the  third  day  before  the  ides  of  August. 
Li  v.  Supplicatio  indicta  est  ex  ante  diem  quintum  idus  Octdbres.  Id.  So, 
Ad  pridie  nonas  Maias.  Cic. 

II.    OF   MONEY. 

§  327.  1.  The  Romans  reckoned  their  copper  money  by 
asses,  their  silver  money  by  sestertii,  and  their  gold  money  by 
Attic  talents. 

2.  The  as  was  originally  a  pound  of  copper,  but  its  weight 
was  gradually  diminished  in  succeeding  ages,  until,  in  the  later 
days  of  the  republic,  it  amounted  to  only  ^  of  a  pound.  It  is 
divided  into  twelve  parts,  called  micice. 

The  names  of  the  several  parts  are,  uncia,  -fy ;  sextans,  -fy ;  quad- 
rans,  -fy  ;  tricns,  jfe  ;  quincunx,  -fy ;  semis,  or  semissis,  -fy ;  septunx,  <fe ; 
bes,  or  bessis,  -fa  ;  dodrans,  -f^ ;  dextans,  -££ ;  deunx,  \^. 

3.  The  denarius  was  a  silver  coin,  originally  equal  in  value 
to  ten  asses,  whence  its  name ;  but,  after  the  weight  of  the  as 
was  reduced,  the  denarius  was  equal  to  sixteen  asses.  Its  value 
is  usually  estimated  at  about  14£  cents  of  our  money. 

The  sestertius,  or  sesterce,  was  one  fourth  of  the  denarius, 
or  two  asses  and  a  half  (semistertius),  and  was  hence  denoted 
by  IIS,  or  HS.  When  the  denarius  was  worth  16  asses,  the 
sestertius  was  worth  4.  The  sestertius  was  called  emphatically 
nummus,  as  in  it  all  large  sums  were  reckoned  after  the  coining 
of  silver  money. 

Half  a  denarius  was  a  quinarius  ;  one  tenth  of  a  denarius,  a  libella. 

The  aureus  (a  gold  coin),  in  the  time  of  the  emperors,  was 
equal  to  25  denarii,  or  100  sesterces. 

The  talent  is  variously  estimated,  from  $860  to  $1020. 

4.  In  reckoning  money,  the  Romans  called  any  sum  under 
2000  sesterces  so  many  sestertii ;  as,  decern  sestertii,  ten  ses- 
terces ;  centum  sestertii,  a  hundred  sesterces. 

5.  Sums  from  2000  sesterces  (inclusive)  to  1,000,000,  they 
denoted  either  by  mille,  millia,  with  sestertium  (gen.  plur.),'"or  by 
the  plural  of  the  neuter  noun  sestertium,  which  itself  signified 
a  thousand  sesterces.       Thus   they   said   quadraginta  millia 


APPENDIX. ABBREVIATIONS. 


307 


sestertium,  or  quadraginta  sestertia,  to  denote  40,000  sesterces. 
With  the  genitive  sestertium,  millia  was  sometimes  omitted ;  as, 
sestertium  centum,  sc.  millia,  100,000  sesterces. 

6  To  denote  a  million,  or  more,  they  used  a  combination  ; 
thus,  decies  centena  millia  sestertium,  1,000,000  sesterces.  The 
words  centena  millia,  however,  were  generally  omitted  ;  thus, 
decies  sestertium,  and  sometimes  merely  decies.  See  §  US,  5. 
So,  centies,  10  millions ;  millies,  100  millions. 

Some  suppose  that  sestertium,  when  thus  joined  with  the  numeral  ad- 
verbs, is  always  the  neuter  noun  in  the  nominative  or  accusative  singular. 
The  genitive  and  ablative  of  that  noun  are  thus  used  ;  as,  Decies  sestertii 
dote,  With  a  dowry  of  1,000,000  sesterces.  Tac.  Quinquagies  sestertio, 
5,000,000  sesterces.  Id.     But  this  usage  does  not  occur  in  Cicero. 

The  different  combinations  were  thus  distinguished  : — HS.  X.  denoted 
decern  sestertii;  HS.  X,  decern  sestertia;  HS.  X,  decies  sestertium.  But 
this  distinction  was  not  always  observed. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


$  328.     The  following  are  the  most  common  abbreviations 
of  Latin  words  : — 

Q.,  or  Qu.,  Quintus. 

Ser.,  Servius. 

S.,  or  Sex.,  Sextus. 

Sp.,  Spurius. 

T.,  Titus. 

Ti.,  or  Tib.,  Tiberius 


A.,  Aldus. 

C,  Cuius. 
Cn.,  Cneus. 
D.,  Decimus. 
L.,  Lucius. 
M . ,  Marcus. 

A.  d.,  ante  diem. 

A.   U.    C,  anno  urbis 

conduce. 
Cal.,  or  kal.,  calendee. 
Cos.,  Consul. 
Coss.,  Consules. 
D.,  Divus. 

D.  D.,  dono  dedit. 

D.  D.  D.,  dot,  dicat,  de- 
dtcat,  or  dono  dicat, 
dedlcat. 

Des.,  designdtus. 

D.  M.,  diis  manlbus. 

Eq.  Rom.,  eques  Romd- 
nus. 


M.  T.  C,  Marcus  Tul- 

lius  Cic&ro. 
M\,  Manius. 
Mam.,  Mamercus. 
N.,  JYmnerius. 
P.,  Publius. 


F.,   Filius;  as,  M.  F., 

Marcifilius. 
Ictus,  jurisconsultus. 
Id.,  idus. 
Imp.,  imperdtor. 
J.  O.  M.,  Jovi,  optimo 

maximo. 
N.,  nepos. 
Non.,  nonce. 
P.     C,     patres     con- 

scripti. 
PI.,  plebis. 
Pop.,  popvlus. 
P.  R.,  populus  Romd- 

nus. 


Pont.  Max.,  pontlfex 
maxlmus. 

Pr.,  prcetor. 

Proc,  proconsul. 

Resp.,  respubVlca. 

S.,  salutem,  sacrum,  or 
sendtus. 

S.  D.  P.,  salutem  dicit 
plurlmam. 

S.  P.  Q.  R.,  Sendtus 
populusque  Romd- 
nus. 

S.  C,  sendtus  consul- 
turn. 

Tr.,  tribunus. 


To  these  may  be  added  terms  of  reference  ;  as,  c,  caput,  chapter ;  cf.t 
confer,  compare  ;  1.  c,  loco  citato;  I.  I.,  loco  laudato,  in  the  place  quoted; 
v.,  versus,  verse. 


308    APPENDIX. DIFFERENT  AGES  OF   ROMAN  LITERATURE. 


DIFFERENT  AGES  OF  ROMAN  LITERATURE. 

$  329.  1.  Of  the  Roman  literature  for  the  hrst  h\e  cen- 
turies after  the  foundation  of  the  city,  hardly  a  vestige  remains. 
The  writers  of  the  succeeding  centuries  have  been  arranged 
in  four  ages,  in  reference  to  the  purity  of  the  language  in  the 
period  in  which  they  nourished.  These  are  called  the  golden, 
silver,  brazen,  and  iron  ages. 

2.  The  golden  age  is  generally  reckoned  from  about  the 
year  514  of  the  city  to  the  death  of  Augustus,  A.  D.  14,  a 
period  of  a  little  more  than  250  years.  The  writers  of  the  early 
part  of  this  age  are  valued  rather  on  account  of  their  antiquity, 
than  as  models  of  style.  It  was  not  till  the  age  of  Cicero,  that 
Roman  literature  reached  its  highest  elevation.  The  era 
comprehending  the  generation  immediately  preceding,  and  that 
immediately  succeeding,  that  of  Cicero,  as  well  as  his  own,  is 
the  period  in  which  the  most  distinguished  writers  of  Rome 
flourished ;  and  their  works  are  the  standard  of  purity  in  the 
Latin  language. 

3.  The  silver  age  extended  from  the  death  of  Augustus  to  the 
death  of  Trajan,  A.  D.  118,  a  period  of  104  years.  The  wri- 
ters of  this  age  were  inferior  to  those  who  had  preceded  them  ; 
yet  several  of  them  are  worthy  of  commendation. 

4.  The  brazen  age  comprised  the  interval  from  the  death  of 
Trajan  to  the  time  when  Rome  was  taken  by  the  Goths,  A.  D. 
410.  From  the  latter  epoch  commenced  the  iron  age,  during 
which  the  Latin  language  was  much  adulterated  with  foreign 
words,  and  its  style  and  spirit  essentially  injured. 

LATIN  WRITERS  IN   THE   DIFFERENT  AGES. 

(From  the  Lexicon  of  Facciolatus.) 

WRITERS    OF    THE    GOLDEN    AGE. 

Livius  Andronlcus.  C.  Decius  Laberius.  Atta. 

Ltevius.  M.  Verrius  Flaccus.  Cassius  Hemlna. 

G  Naevius.                               Varro  Attaclnus.  Fenestella. 

Statius  Csecilius.               Titinius.  Claud.  Quadrigari 

Q.  Ennius.  L.  Pomponius.  us. 

M.  Pacuvius.  A.  Serenus.  Ccelius,  or  Caelius. 

L.  Accius.  C.  Sempronius  Asellio.  Fabius  Pictor. 

C.  Lucilius.  C.  Sempronius     Grac-  Cn.  Gellius. 

Sex.  Turpilius.                            chus.  L.  Piso. 

L.  Afranius.                             Santra.  Valerius  Antias. 

L.  Cornelius  Sisenna.  Cn.  Matius.  Tiro   Tullius,    and 

P.  Nigidiu9  Figulus.  Q.  Novius.  others. 

Of  the  works  of  the  preceding  writers,  only  a  few  fragments  remain. 


APPENDIX. WRITERS    IN    DIFFERENT    AGES. 


309 


M.  Torcius  Cato. 

Sex.  Aurelius  Proper- 

P. 

Ovidius  Naso. 

M.  Accius  Plautus. 

tius. 

Q. 

Horatius  Flaccus. 

M.  Terentius  Afer. 

C.  Sallustius  Crispus. 

C. 

Pedo  Albinovanus. 

T.  Lucretius  Cams. 

M.  Terentius  Varro. 

Gratius  Faliscus 

C.  Valerius  Catullus. 

Albius  Tibullus. 

Phaedrus. 

P.  Syrus. 

P.  Virgilius  Maro. 

C. 

Cornificius. 

C.  Julius  Caesar. 

T.  Livius. 

A. 

Hirtius,  or  Oppius. 

Cornelius  Nepos. 

M.  Manilius. 

P. 

Cornelius  Severus. 

M.  Tullius  Cicero. 

M.  Vitruvius. 

To  these  may  be  added  the  following  names  of  lawyers,  whose 
opinions  are  found  in  the  digests : — 

Q.  Mutius  Scaevdla.         M.  Antistius  Labeo.         Masurius  Sablnus. 

Alfenus  Varus. 

Of  the  writers  of  the  golden  age,  the  most  distinguished  are 
Terence,  Catullus,  Ccesar,  Nepos,  Cicero,  Virgil,  Horace,  Ovid,  T. 
Livy,  and  Sallust 

WRITERS    OF    THE    SILVER    AGE. 


A.  Cornelius  Celsus. 
P.  Velleius  Paterculus. 
L.   Junius    Moderatus 
Columella. 
Pomponius  Mela. 
A.  Persius  Flaccus. 
Q.  Asconius  Pedianus. 
M.  Annaeus  Seneca. 
L.  Annaeus  Seneca. 


M.  Annseus  Lucanus. 
T.  Petronius  Arbiter. 
C.  Plinius  Secundus. 
C.  Silius  ltaltcus. 
C.  Valerius  Flaccus. 

C.  Julius  Solinus. 

D.  Junius  Juvenalis. 
P.  Papinius  Statius. 
M.  Valerius  Martialis. 


M.  Fabius  Quintilia- 
nus. 

Sex.  Julius  Frontlnus. 

C.  Cornelius  Tacitus. 

C.  Plinius  Caecilius  Se- 
cundus. 

L.  Annaeus  Florus. 

C.  Suetonius  Tranquil- 
lus. 


The  age  to  which  the  following  writers  should  be  assigned  is  some- 
what uncertain: — 

Q.  Curtius  Rufus.  Scribonius  Largus.  L.  Fenestella. 

Valer.  Probus.  Sulpitia.  Atteius  Caplto. 

Of  the  writers  of  the  silver  age,  the  most  distinguished  are  Celsus, 
Velleius,  Columella,  the  Senecas,  the  Plinies,  Juvenal,  Quintihan, 
Tacitus,  Suetonius,  and  Curtius. 

WRITERS    OF    THE    BRAZEN    AGE. 


A.  Gellius. 

L.  Apuleius. 

Q.  Septirnius  Tertullianus. 

Q.  Serenus  Sammonlcus. 

Censorlnus. 

Thascius  Caecilius  Cyprianus. 
T.  Julius  Calpurnius. 
M.  Aurelius  Nemesianus. 

iElius  Spartianus. 

Julius  Capitollnus. 

iElius  Lampridius. 

Vulcatius  Gallicanus. 

Trebellius  Pollio. 

Flavius  Vopiscus. 

Coelius  Aurelianus. 

Flavius  Eutropius. 

Rhemnius  Fannius. 

Arnobius  Afer. 


L.  Coelius  Lactftitius. 
vElius  Donatus. 

C.  Vettus  Juvencus. 
Julius  Firmlcus. 

Fab.  Marius  Victorious. 
Sex.  Rufus,  or   Rufus  F»>stus 

Ammianus  Marcellinus. 

Vegetius  Renatus. 
Aurel.  Theodorus  Macrobius. 
Q.  Aurelius  Symmachus. 

D.  Magnus  Ausonius. 
Paullnus  Nolanus. 

Sex.  Aurelius  Victor. 
Aurel.  Prudentius  Clemens. 
CI.  Claudianus. 

Marcellus  Empirtcus. 

Falconia  Proba. 


310 


APPENDIX. WRITERS    IN    DIFFERENT    AGES. 


Of  an  Age  not  entirely  certain. 

Valerius  Maximus.  Minutius  Felix.  Fl.  Avienus,  or  A  via 

Justlnus.  Sosipater  Charisius.  nus. 

Terentianus  Maurus. 

The  opinions  of  the  following  lawyers  are  found  in  the  digests : — 


Salvius  Julianus. 
Caius. 
Callistratus. 
iEmilius  Papinianus. 
Julius  Paulus. 


Sex.  Pomponius. 
Venuleius  Saturnlnus. 
iElius  Marcianus. 
ifilius    Gallus,    and 
others. 


Licinius  Proctilus. 
Neratius  Priscus. 
P.  Juventius  Celsus. 
Priscus  Jabolenus. 
Domitius  Ulpianus. 
Herennius  Modestlnus. 

Of  the  writers  of  the  brazen  age,  Justin,  Terentianus,  Victor,  Lac- 
tantius,  and  Claudian,  are  most  distinguished. 

The  age  to  which  the  following  writers  belong  is  uncertain.    The 
style  of  some  of  them  would  entitle  them  to  be  ranked  with  the  writ- 
ers of  the  preceding  ages,  while  that  of  others  would  place  them  even 
below  those  of  the  iron  age. 
PalladiusRutiliusTau-      Catalecta     Virgilii    et 


rus  iEmilianus. 
iEmilius  Macer. 
Messala  Corvlnus. 
Vibius  Sequester. 
Julius  Obsequens. 
L.  Ampelius. 
Apicius  Coelius. 
Sex.  Pompeius  Festus. 
Probus   (auctor    Nota- 

rum.J 
Fulgentius  Planciades. 
Hyjrinus. 

C.  Cresar  Germanlcus. 
P.  Victor. 
P.  Vegetius. 
Auctores  Priapeiorum. 


Ovidii. 

Auctor  orationis  Sal- 
lustii  in  Cic.  et  Ci- 
ceronis  in  Sail. ; 
item  illius  AnU- 
quam  tret  in  ezsi- 
lium. 

Auctor  Epistolae  ad  Oc- 
tavium. 

Auctor  Panegyrici  ad 
Pisonem. 

Declamationes  quse 
tribuuntur  Quintili- 
ano,  Porcio  Latro- 
ni,  Calpurnio  Flac- 
co. 


Interpres  Daretis  Phry- 

gii,  et  Dictyos  Cre- 

tensis. 
Scholiastae  Veteres. 
Grammatici  Antlqui. 
Rhetores  Antlqui. 
Medici  Antlqui. 
Catalecta  Petroniana. 
Pervigilium  Veneris. 
Poematia  et  Epigram- 

m5ta    vet6ra  a   Pi- 

thaeo  collecta. 
Monumentum     Ancy- 

ranum. 
Fasti  Consulares. 
Inscriptiones  Veteres- 


WRITERS    OF    THE    IRON    AGE. 


CI.  Rutilius  Numatia- 

nus. 
Servius  Honoratufl. 
D.  Hieronymus. 
D.  Augustlnus. 
Sulpicius  Severus. 
Paulus  Orosius. 
Coelius  Sedulius. 
Codex  Theodosianus. 
Martianus  Capella. 
Claudianus  Mamertus. 
Sidonius  Apollinaris. 


Latlnus  Pacatus. 
Claudius  Mamertlnus, 

et  alii,  quorum  sunt 

Panegyrici  vetSres. 
Alcimus  Avitus. 
Manl.  Severlnus  BoC- 

thius. 
Priscianus. 
Nonius  Marcellus. 
Justiniani  Institutiones 

et  Codex. 


Arator. 

M.   Aurelius   Cassido 

rus. 
Fl.   Cresconius  Corip- 

pus. 
Venantius  Fortunatus. 
Isidorus  Hispalensis. 
Anonymus  Ravennas. 
Aldhelmus   or  Althel- 

mus. 
Paulus  Diaconus 


INDEX 


The  figures  in  the  following  Index  designate  the  sections,  and  their  divisions :  r.  standi 
for  remark,  re.  for  note,  and  e.  for  exception. 


A,  sound  of,  7  and  8— nouns  in,  of  3d 
dec,  gender  of,  66  ;  genitive  of,  68— 
increment  in,  3d  dec.,  287,3;  plural, 
288  ;  of  verbs,  290— final,  quantity  of, 
294. 

A,  ab,  abs,  how  used,  195,  R.  2. 

Abbreviations,  328. 

Abdico,  construction  of,  251,  R.  2. 

Ablative,  37— sing.,  3d  dec,  82 ;  of  ad- 
jectives, 3d  dec,  113  and  114 — plur., 
1st  dec,  43;  3d  dec,  84;  4th  dec, 
89,  5— used  adverbially,  192,  I.,  II.— 
of  character,  quality,  &c*  211,  r.  6 — 
after  prepositions,  241 — of  situation, 
&c,  after  sum,  245,  III. — after  partici- 
ples denoting  origin,  246— of  cause, 
&c,  247 — of  agent,  218— of  a  noun, 
with  which,  &c,  249;  in  accordance 
with  which,  249,  II. — of  accompani- 
ment, 249,  III.— denoting  in  what  re- 
spect, 250— after  adjectives  of  plenty 
or  want,  250 — after  verbs  of  abound- 
ing, &c,250 — withyaao  and  sum,  250, 
r.  3 — after  verbs  of  depriving,  &c, 
251— of  price,  252— of  time,  253— of 
place,  where,  254  ;  whence,  255 — after 
comparatives,  256 — after  alius,  256, 
R.  14_of  degree  of  difference,  256, 
R.  16 — absolute,  257 ;  do.,  without  a 
participle,  257,  R.  7;  do.,  with  a 
clause  instead  of  a  noun,  257,  R.  8. 

Abounding  and  wanting,  verbs  of,  with 


abl.,  250— with  gen.,  220,  (3.) 

3,  26     " 
and  102. 


Abstract  nouns,  26 — formation  of,  101 


Abus,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  in,  43. 
Ac  si  with  subj.,  263,  2. 
Acatalectic  verse,  304. 
Accents,  5. 
Accentuation,  14. 
Accompaniment,  abl.  of,  249,  III. 
Accordance,  abl.  of,  249,  II. 


Accusative,  37 — sing.,  3d  dec,  79 ;  of 
Greek  nouns,  80— plur.,  3d  dec,  85 — 
neuter,  used  adverbially,  192,  II.,  4. 
and  205,  r.  10— after  verbs,  229-234 
— omitted,  229,  R.4 — infinitive  instead 
of,  229,  r.  5— of  a  person,  after  misi- 
ret,  &c,  229,  r.  6  ;  after  juvat,  &c, 
229,  r.  7— after  neuter  verbs,  232 — 
after  compound  verbs,  233— after  ver- 
bal nouns,  233,  N. — of  part  affected, 
234,  II.— after  prepositions,  235— of 
time  and  space,  23b — of  place,  237 — 
after  adverbs  and  interjections,  238 — 
as  subject,  239. 

Accusatives,  two,  after  what  verbs,  230 
— latter  of,  after  passive  voice,  234. 

Accusing  and  acquitting,  verbs  of,  with 
gen.,  217. 

Acephalous  verse,  304. 

Active  voice,  141. 

verb,  141— object  of,  229— two 


cases  after,  229,  r.  1— omitted,  229, 
r.  3. 
Adjectives,  104-131 — classes  of,  104— 
declension  of,  105 — gen.  sing,  of,  112, 
114 — abl.  sing,  of,  113;  114— nom.  and 
gen.  plur.  of,  113,  114 — irregular,  115, 
116 — derivation  of,  128— verbal,  129 
< — participial,  130 — adverbial,  130 — 
prepositional,  130 — composition  of, 
131— how  modified,  201,  III.,  R.  2— 
agreement  of,  205— cither  modifiers 
or  predicates,  205,  n.  1 — with  two  or 
more  nouns,  205,  r.  2 — with  a  collec- 
tive noun,  205,  r.  3 — sing,  with  a  plur. 
noun,  205.  r.  4— dat.  of,  for  ace,  205, 
r.  6 — without  a  noun,  205,  r.  7 — with 
infinitives,  clauses,  &c,  205,  R.  8 — 
with  gen.  instead  of  their  own  case, 
205,  r.  9,  and  212,  r.  3— used  parti- 
tively,  gender  of,  205,  R.  12— instead 
of  adverbs,  205,  r.  15 — primus,  medi- 


312 


INDEX. 


us,  &c,  signification  of,  205,  r.  17— 
agreeing  with  relative  instead  of  ante- 
cedent, 206,  (7,)— gen.  after,  213— 
gen  or  abl.  after,  213,  R.  5— dat.  after, 
522 — gen.  or  dat.  after,  213,  R.  6,  and 
222,  R.  2— of  plenty  or  want,  with  abl., 
260— followed  by  infin.,  270,  R.  1— 
place  of,  279,  7. 

Adjective  pronouns,  134-139 — classes 
of,  134— -agreement  of,  205. 

Admonishing,  verbs  of,  with  gen.,  218. 

Adorning  and  arraying,  verbs  of,  with 
abl.,  249. 

Adonic  verse,  312. 

Adverbial  adjectives,  130. 

Adverbs,  190-194 numeral,  119— of 

place,  mutual  relation  of,  191,  R.  1 — 
derivation  of,  192 — composition  of, 
193— comparison  of,  194 — how  modi- 
fied, 201,  III.  R.  4 — used  as  adjectives, 
205,  r.  11— with  gen.,  212,  r.  4 — with 
dat.,  228,  (1 ,)— with  ace,  238— use  of, 
277 — two  negatives,  force  of,  277,  r. 
3-5— equivalent  to  phrases,  277,  r. 
8— of  likeness,  as  connectives,  278,  r. 
1— place  of,  279,  15. 

^Enigma,  324,  7. 

Affection  of  the  mind,  verbs  denoting, 
with  gen.,  220. 

Agent,  dative  of,  225,  II.,  HI.— when 
wanting,  225,  III.,  r.  1— abl.  of,  248. 

Ages  of  Roman  literature,  329. 

Agnominatio,  324,  25. 

Agreement^  defined,  203,  6 — of  adjec- 
tives, adjective  pronouns,  and  partici- 
ples, 205— of  relatives,  206. 

AY,  genitive  in,  43— quantity  of  the  a  in, 

Aio,  183,  4 — its   place   in  a  sentence, 

279,  6. 
At,  nouns  in,  abl.  of,  82 — increment  of, 

287,  E.  (A.)  1. 
Alcaic — greater,  318,  III. — lesser,  318, 

IV. 
Alcmanian  dactylic  tetrameter,  312. 
Alts,  arts,  atilix,  adj.  in,  128,  2. 
AlXquis,  declined,  138— how  used,  207, 

R.  30. 
Alius,  how  declined,  107 — how  used,  207, 

R.  32— with  abl.,  256,  r.  14. 
Allegory,  324,  7. 
Alliteration,  324,  26. 
Alter,  how  declined,  107— how  used,  207, 

R.  32,  and  212,  r.  2,  n.  1. 
Atnbo,  how  declined,  118. 
Amphibolia,  325,  5. 

Amplificatives,  nouns,    100,    4 — adjec- 
tives, 104,  and  128,  4. 
Anabasis,  324,  22. 
Anacoliithon,  323,  3,  (5.) 
Anacreontic  iambic  dimeter,  314,  IX. 


Anadiplosis,  324,  17. 

Analysis  of  sentences,  281. 

Anapaestic,  metre,313,303— monome'ter, 
313— dimeter,  313. 

Anaph6ra,  324,  13. 

Anastrbphe,  323,  4,  (1.) 

Ante  diem  cal.,  &c,  326,  7. 

Antanaclasis,  324,  12. 

Antecedent,  136— understood,  206,  (3,) 
(4,) — its  place  supplied  by  a  demon- 
strative, 206,  (3,)— in  the  case  of  the 
relative,  206,  (6.) 

Antepenult,  13— quantity  of,  292. 

Antiquam,  by  what  mood  followed, 
263,  3. 

Antimeria.  323,  3,  (1.) 

Antiphrasis,  324,  10. 

Antiptosis,  323,  3,  (3.) 

Antithesis,  322,  and  324,  27. 

Antonomasia,  324,  8. 

Apdge,  183,  10. 

Aphaeresis,  322. 

ApocOpe,  322. 

Apod&sis,  261. 

Aposiopesis,  324,  33. 

Apostrophe,  324,  35. 

Appendix,  322-329. 

Apposition,  204 — to  two  or  more  nouns, 
204,  r.5— to  nouns  connected  by  cum, 
204,  R.  5 — to  proper  names  of  differ- 
ent genders,  204,  r.  5 — gen.  instead 
of,  204,  r.  6— abl.  with  gen.,  204,  r. 
7 — of  parts  with  a  whole,  204,  r.  10, 
and  212,  r.  2,  n.  5 — nouns  in,  place 
of,  279,  9. 

Aptotes,  94. 

Ar,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66,  67 — gen.  of, 
70,  71— abl.  of,  82— increment  of,  287, 
e.  (A.)  1. 

Archaism,  323,  R.  (1.) 

Archilochian,  pentbemimens,  312 — iam- 
bic trimeter,  314,  V.— do.  dimeter, 
314,  VII.— heptamgter,  318,  IV. 

Arium,  nouns  in,  100,  8. 

Arius,  adj.  in,  128,  3. 

Arrangement,  of  words,  279 — of  clauses, 
280. 

Arsis  and  thesis,  308. 

As,  genitives  in,  43 — nouns  in,  of3d  dec., 
gender  of,  62  j  gen.  of,  72— and  anus, 
adj.  in,  128,  6— final,  quantity  of,  300. 

As,  Roman,  value  of,  327 — how  divided, 
327. 

Asclepiadic  tetrameter,  316,  III. 

Asking,  demanding,  and  teaching,  verbs 
of,  two  ace.  after,  231. 

Assuesco,  with  abl.,  245,  II.— with  dat., 
245,  II.,  R.  1. 

Asyndeton,  323,  1,  (1.) 

Attraction,  206,  (6.) 

Audeo,  how  conjugated,  142,  R.  2. 


INDEX. 


313 


Audiens,  construction  of,  222,  r.  1. 

Auretis,  falue  of,  327,  3. 

Ausim,  183,  R.  1. 

Authority,     quantity    determined     by, 

282,  4. 
Av  and  atu,  in  the  2d  and  3d  roots  of 

verbs,  164. 
Ave,  183?  8. 
Ax,  adj.  in,  129,  6— verbals  in,  with  gen., 

213,  r.  1. 


B. 


B  final,  quantity  of,  299. 

Barbarism,  325, 1. 

Belli,  construction  of,  221,  R.  3. 

Bills,  adjectives  in,  129,  3 — with  dative, 

222. 
Bos,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  of,  84,  and  286, 5. 
Brachycatalectic  verse,  304. 
Brazen  age,  329,  4. 
Bucolic  csesura,  310,  6. 
Bundus,  adjectives  in,  129, 1 — with  ace, 

233,  n. 


C. 


C,  sound  of,  10— nouns  in,  gender  of, 
66  ;  gen.  of,  70— final,  quantity  of,  299. 

Caesura,  309— different  kinds  of,  309— 
in  hexameter  verse,  310,  3-6 — in  pen- 
tameter verse,  311, 2 — in  iambic  verse, 
314, 1,  and  X.— in  trochaic  verse,  315, 
I. — in  choriambic  verse,  316,  III. 

Caesural  pause,  309,  3. 

Calends.  326. 

Cardinal  numbers,  117  and  118. 

Cases  of  nouns,  36  and  37. 

Catabasis,  324,  22. 

Catachresis,  324. 1. 

Catalectic  verse,  304. 

Cause,  abl.  of,  247 — ace.  of  with  prepo- 
sitions, 247,  R.  1. 

Ce  and  cine,  enclitic,  134,  r.  4. 

Cedo,  183,  11. 

Celo,  with  two  accusatives,  231. 

Ceu,  with  subjunctive,  263,  2. 

Ch,  sound  of,  10. 

Character  or  quality,  gen.  of,  211,  R,  6. 

Choliambus,  314,  II. 

Choriambic,  metre,  316  and  303 — pen- 
tameter, 316, 1.— tetrameter,  316,  II.— 
trimgter,  316,  IV.— trimeter  catalectic, 
316,  V.— dimeter,  316,  VI. 

Clam,  government  of,  235,  (5.J 

Clause,  as  a  logical  subject,  201,  IV. 

Clauses,  203— how  connected,  203,  4, 
and  278,  r.  3— arrangement  of,  280- 

Climax,  324, 21. 

27 


Cozpi,  183,  2. 

Collective  nouns,  26— number  of  their 

verbs,  209,  R.  11. 
Common,  nouns,  26 — gender,  30 — sylla- 
ble, 282,  2. 
Comparative  degree,  123 — formation  of, 

124. 
Comparatives,  declined,  110 — with  gen., 

212,  R.  2 — denoting  one  of  two,  212, 

r.  2,  n.  1— with  abl.  256. 
Comparison,  of  adjectives,    122-127— 

terminational,  124— of  adverbs,  194— 

irregular,  125— -defective,   126 by 

magis  and  maxime,  127. 
Composition,  of  nouns,  103 — of  adj.,  131 

—of  verbs,  188— of  adverbs,  193. 
Compound,  subject,  201 — predicate,  202, 

II.— sentence,  203— metres,  318. 
Compound  words,    how  divided,  23— 

quantity  of,  285. 
Con,  adjectives  compounded  with,  with 

gen.,  222— verbs  do.,  with  dat.,  224. 
Concretes,  101,  2. 
Condemning  and  convicting,  verbs  of, 

with  gen.,  217. 
Confido,  with  abl.,  245,  II.— with  dat., 

Confi,  183, 12,  and  180,  n. 

Conjugation,  149 — first,  155  and  156 — 
second,  157— third,  158  and  159— 
fourth,  160— of  deponent  verbs,  161— 
periphrastic,  162 — general  rules  of, 
163 — third,  list  of  verbs  in,  172— of 
irregular  verbs,  178-182— of  defective 
verbs,  183 — of  impersonal  verbs,  184. 

Conjugations,  how  characterized,  149— 
remarks  on,  162. 

Conjunctions,  198 — classes  of,  198— en- 
clitic, 198,  r.  2— copulative  and  dis- 
junctive, their  use,  278  5  may  connect 
different  moods,  278,  r.  4  and  5 }  re- 
peated, 278,  r.  7. 

Connection,  of  tenses,  258 — of  words  by 
conjunctions,  278 — of  clauses  by  do., 
278,  r.  3. 

Connecting  vowel,  150,  5— omitted  in 
2d  root,  163,  2. 

Connectives,  place  of,  279,  3. 

Consonants,  sounds  of,  10 — 12. 

Consto,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 

Contentus,  with  abl.,  244. 

Contracted  syllables,  quantity  of,  283, 

Contractions  in  2d  root  of  verbs,  162,  7. 

Copula,  140. 

Crasis,  306,  (5,)  and  322. 

Crime,  gen.  of,  after  verbs,  217. 

Cujas,  how  declined,  139. 

Cujus,  how  declined,  137,  R.  5. 

Cum  annexed  to  abl.,  133,  r.  4,  and  136» 

R.  1. 


314 


INDEX. 


Ciim,  by  what  mood  followed,  263,  5. 
Cundus,  adjectives  in,  129,  1. 
Cunque,  its  force,  191,  R.  4. 


D  final,  quantity  of,  299. 

Dactylic,  metre,  310  and  303 — trimeter, 
312— dimeter,  312. 

Dactylico-iambic  metre,  318, 1. 

Dactylico-trochaic,  heptameter,  318,  IV. 
— tetramfiter,  318,  V. 

Dative,  37— sing-.,  3d  dec,  79 — plural, 
1st  dec,  43;  3d  dec,  84;  4th  dec, 
89,  5— used  for  gen.,  211,  r.  5— after 
adjectives,  222— different  constructions 
instead  of,  222,  r.  4  and  6 — after 
idem,  222,  r.  7— after  verbs,  223-227 
— after  verbs  compounded,  with  ad, 
ante,  &e,  224 ;  with  ab,  de,  and  ex, 
224,  R.  1  and  2;  with  satis,  bene",  and 
mali,  225— of  the  agent,  225,  II.  III. 
—of  the  possessor  after  est,  226 — af- 
ter particles,  228. 

Datives,  two,  after  mm,  &c,  227. 

Declension,  of  nouns,  38-40 — rules  of, 
40 — first,  41-45  ;  exc  in,  43 — second, 
46-54 ;  exc.  in,  52— third,  55-86 ;  exc 
in,  68-85— fourth,  87-89 ;  exc  in,  89  j 
formed  by  contraction,  89 — fifth,  90  ; 
exc.  in,  90— of  adjectives,  first  and 
second,  105-107;  third,  108-111. 

Declensions,  tabular  view  of,  39. 

Degrees  of  comparison,  123. 

Defective,  nouns,  94-96— adjectives,  115 
—verbs,  183. 

DeJU,  183,  13,  and  180,  N. 

Dem,  enclitic,  134,  r.  6. 

Demonstrative  pronouns,  134— construc- 
tion of,  207 — in  apposition  with  a 
clause,  207,  R.  22,  and  206,  (13,)— used 
for  reflexives,  208,  (6,)— place  of,  279, 
7. 

Denarius,  its  value,  327— divisions  of, 
327. 

Denominatives,  adj.,  128 — verbs,  187,  I. 

Dependence  defined,  203,  8. 

Dependent  clauses,  203. 

Deponent  verbs,  l42,  R.  4— conjugated, 
161— participles  of,  162,  17— lists  of, 
lstconj.,  166;  2dconj.,170;  3dconj., 
174;  4th  com.,  177— increment  of, 
289,  3. 

Depriving,  verbs  of,  with  abl.,  251. 

Derivation,  of  nouns,  100— of  adjectives, 
128— of  verbs,  187— of  adverbs,  192. 

Derivative  words,  quantity  of,  284. 

Desiderative  verbs,  187,  II.  3,  and  176, 
N.«— quantity  of  the  u  in,  284,  E.  5. 

Deus  declined,  53. 


Diaeresis,  306,  2 — mark  of,  5. 

Diastole,  307,  2. 

Die,  imperative,  162,  4. 

Dicolon,  319. 

Dicto  audiens,  with  dat.,  222,  R.  1. 

Difference,  degree  of,  how  expressed, 

256,  r.  16.  '  V 

Dignt,  with  abl.,  244. 
Dignor,  with  abl.,  245. 
Dignus,  indignus,  &c ,  with  abl.?  244— 

with  gen.,  244,  r.  2— -with  relative  and 

subjunctive,  264,  9. 
Diminutive,  nouns,  100,  3 adjectives, 

104,  and  128,  5— verbs,  187,  II.  4. 
Diphthongs,  4 — sounds   of,  9— quantity 

of,  283,  II. 
Diptotes,  94. 
Distich,  304. 

Distributive  numbers,  119  and  120. 
Distrophon,  319. 

Do,  increment  of,  290,  e.,  and  284,  e.  4. 
Domus,   declined,   89 — construction   of, 

gen.,  221,  r.  3;  ace,  237,  r.  4  ;  abl., 

255,  r.  1. 
Donee,  with  subjunctive,  263,  4. 
Double  letters,  3. 
Doubtful  gender,  30. 
Due,  imperative,  162,  4. 
Dum,    with    subjunctive,   263,    4 — and 

dummodo  with  do.,  263,  2. 
Duo  declined,  118. 
Dus,  participle  in,  with  dat.,  225,  III. — 

with  ace,  234,  r.  2 — its  signification, 

274,  2,  R.  8— used  for  a  gerund,  275, 


E. 


E,  sound  of.  7  and  8 — nouns  m,  of  3d 
dec,  gender  of,  66 ;  gen.  of,  68 ;  abl. 
of,  82 — adverbs  in,  192,  II.— and  ex, 
how  used,  195,  r.  2 — increment  in, 
3d  dec,  287,  3  ;  plur.,  288  ;  of  verbs, 
290— final,  quantity  of,  295. 

Eapse,  &c,  135,  r.  3. 

Eccum,  eccillum,  &e,  134,  R.  2,  and 
238,2. 

Ecquis,  how  declined,  137,  R.  3. 

Ecthlipsis,  305,  2. 

Edo  and  etas,  abstracts  in,  101. 

Edo  (to  eat)  conjugated,  181. 

Ego,  declined,  133. 

Ela,  verbals  in,  102,  3. 

Elegiac  verse,  311,  3. 

Ellipsis,  323.    See  Omission. 

Emphatic  word,  place  of,  in  a  sentence, 
279,  2,  and  16. 

Enallage,  323,  3. 

Enclitics,  in  accentuation,  15— conjunc- 
tions, 198,  r.  2. 


INDEX. 


315 


Ennehemimeris,  304,  5. 

Ensis,  adjectives  in,  128,  6. 

Eo,  conjugated,  182— compounds  of, 
182,  r.  3 — witi  supine  in  um,  276,  II., 
r.  2. 

Epanadiplosis,  32  i,  18. 

Epanados,  324,  19. 

Epanalepsis,  324, 1G. 

Epanaph&ra,  324,  13. 

Epanastrdphe,  324,  17. 

Epanorthosis,  324,  32. 

Epenthesis,  322. 

Epistr&phe,  324,  14. 

Epizeuxis,  324,  20. 

Epulor,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 

Equality,  how  denoted,  122. 

Er,  nouns  in,  of  3d  dec,  gender  of,  58 
and  GO;  gen.  of,  70  and  71 — adjec- 
tives in,  superlative  of,  125 — annexed 
to  pres.  infin.pass.,  162,  6. 

Erolesis,  324,  31. 

Es,  nouns  in,  of  3d  dec,  increasing  in 

?en.,  gender  of,  58  and  61  ;  gen.  of, 
3  ;  not  increasing  in  gen.,  gender  of, 
62 ;  gen.  of,  73— final,  sound  of,  8,  E. 
2  ;  quantity  of,  300. 

Est,  with  dat.  of  a  possessor,  216. 

Etum,  nouns  in,  100,  7. 

Etymology,  24-199. 

Ev  and  etu,  in  2d  and  3d  roots  of  verbs, 
167. 

Euphemism,  324,  11. 

Ens,  adjectives  in,  128,  1 — Greek  prop- 
er names  in,  283,  N.  2. 


Fac,  162,  4 — with  subj.  for  imperat., 
267,  r.  3. 

Factte,  with  superlatives,  &c,  277,  R.  7. 

Facio,  (and  compounds,)  passive  of,  180 
— with  abl.,  250,  R.  3 — with  ut  and 
the  subj.,  273, 1— with  participle,  273, 

Fari,  183,  6. 

Faxo  and /arm,  162,  8,  and  183,  R.  1. 

Feet,  302 — isochronous,  302. 

Feminine  nouns,  of  3d  dec,  62;  exc  in, 
62-65. 

Fer,  imperative,  162,  4. 

Fero,  conjugated,  179. 

Fido,  how  conjugated,  142,  R.  2 — with 
abl.,  245,  II.— with  dat.,  245,  II.  R.  1. 

Figures,  of  prosody,  305-307— of  or- 
thography and  etymology,  322— of 
syntax,  323— of  rhetoric,  324. 

Filling,  verbs  of,  with  abl.,  249 — with 
gen.,  220,  (3.) 

Fio,  conjugated,  180 — quantity  of  its  i, 
283,  E.  f. 


Follow,  in  what  sense  used,  203,  9. 

Forem,fore,  154,  3. 

Frequentative  verbs,  187,  II.— quantity 

of  the  i  in,  284,  E.  6. 
Fretus,  with  abl.,  244. 
Fruor,  with  abl.,  245. 
Fungor,  with  abl.,  245. 
Future  tense,  145,  III. 
Future  perfect  tense,  145,  VI. 


G,  sound  of,  10. 
Galliambus,  314,  X. 
Gatideo,  how    conjugated,  142,  R.  2— 
with  abl.,  245,  II.— with  ace,  245,  II., 

R.  1. 

Gender,  general  rules  of,  27-34 — natural 
and  grammatical,  27 — masc.  from  sig- 
nification, 28 — fern,  from  do.,  29— 
common  and  doubtful,  30— epicene, 
33 — neuter,  34— of  1st  dec,  41 ;  exc 
in,  42 — of  2d  dec,  46;  exc.  in,  49— 
of  3d  dec,  58,  62,  and  66  ;  exc.  in,  59 
-67— of  4th  dec,  87 ;  exc.  in,  88— of 
5th  dec,  90;  exc.  in,  90. 

Genitive,  37 — sing.,  1st  dec,  exc.  in,  43 ; 
of  adjectives,  3d  dec,  112 — plur.,  1st 
dec,  contracted,  43 ;  2d  dec,  do.,  53  ; 
3d  dec,  83 ;  of  adjectives,  3d  dec, 
113  and  114 — after  nouns,  211 — what 
relations  it  denotes,  211,  r.  1 — sub- 
jective and  objective,  211,  r.  2 — of 
substantive  pronouns,  211,  R.  3 — pos- 
sessive adjective  used  for,  211,  R.  4 
— dative  used  for,  211,  r.  5— of 
character  or  quality,  211,  r.  6 — noun 
limited  by,  omitted,  211,  r.  7  ;  want- 
ing, in  the  predicate  after  shot,  211,  r. 
8;  in  other  cases,  211,  r.  8,  (6,)— 
omitted,211,R.9 — how  translated, 211, 
R.  12— after  partitives,  212— after  a 
neuter  adjective  or  adj.  pronoun,  212, 
r.  3 — after  adverbs,  212,  r.  4 — after 
adjectives, 213;  different  constructions 
instead  of,  213,  r.  4— after  dig-raw  and 
indignus,  244,  R.  2 — after  verbs,  214- 
220— after  sum,  and  verbs  of  valuing, 
214— of  crime,  217— after  verbs  of  ad- 
monishing, 218 — after  verbs  denoting 
an  affection  of  the  mind,  220— of  place, 
221— after  particles,  221,  II.,  Ill — 
plur.  depending  on  a  gerund,  275,  r. 
'>  (3>) — place  of,  after  neuter  adjec- 
tives, 279,  10. 

Genitives,  two,  limiting  the  same  noun, 
211,  r.  10. 

Gerundives,  how  used,  275,  II. 

Gerunds,  148,  2 — by  what  cases  follow- 
ed,   274— and    gerundives,  gen.    of, 


316 


INDEX. 


275,  R.  1 ;  dat.  of,  275,  r.  2  j  ace.  of, 

275,  r.  3  j  abl.  of,  275,  r.  4  j-  infin.  for, 

after  adj.,  275,  r.  2,  (4.) 
Glorior,  with  abl.,  245,  III. 
Glyconic  verse,  316,  IV. 
Golden  age,  329,  2. 
Government  denned,  203,  7. 
Grammatical,  subject,  201 ;    cases    of, 

201,  IV.,  3— predicate,  202— figures, 

Greek  nouns,  gender  of,  34,  r. — 1st 
dec,  44 — 2d  dec,  54 — ace  of,  in  3d 
dec,  80— declension  of,  in  do.,  86. 

H. 

H,  its  nature,  2 — in  prosody,  283. 

Habeo,  &c,  with  perfect  participles,  274, 
2   r.  4. 

Hel'lenism,  323,  R.  (2.) 

Hemistich,  304. 

Hendiadys,  323,  2,  (3.) 

Hepthemimeris,  304,  5. 

Heroic  caesura,  310,  4  and  5. 

Heteroclite  nouns,  93. 

Heterogeneous  nouns,  92. 

Heterosis,  323,  3,  (2.) 

Hexameter  verse,  310—Priapean,  310, 
II. 

Hiatus,  279, 18. 

Hie,  declined,  134— and  Hie  distinguish- 
ed, 207,  r.  23. 

Hipponactic,  trimeter,  314,  n. — tetrame- 
ter, 314,  IV. 

Homo  and  homines  omitted,  209,  R.  2. 

Homoeopropheron,  324,  26. 

Horace,  key  to  the  odes  of,  321. 

Horatian  metres,  320. 

Humi,  construction  of,  221,  R.  3. 

Hypallage,  323,  4,  (3.) 

Hyperbaton,  323,  4. 

Hyperb6le,  324,  5. 

Hypercatalectic,  or  hyperme'ter  verse, 

HysteVon  proteron,  323,  4,  (2.) 


I. 


J,  sound  of,  7  and  8 — nouns  in,  gender 
of,  66  ;  gen.  of,  68 — increment  in,  3d 
dec,  287, 3  ;  plur.,  288 ;  of  verbs,  290 
— final,  quantity  of,  296. 

Iambic,  metre,  314  and  303 — trimeter, 
314,  I.  ;  catalectic,  314,  V.— tetrame- 
ter, 314,  III. ;  catalectic,  314,  IV.— 
dimeter,  314,  VI. ;  hypermPter,  314, 
VII. ;  acephalous,  314,  VIII. :  cata- 
lectic, 314,  IX. 

Iambico-dactylic  metre,  318,  II. 


lbam,  ibar,  ibo,  ibor,  162,  2. 

Icius,  icus,  His,  and  ius,  adjectives  in. 
128,2. 

Icius  or  itius,  verbal  adjectives  in,  129, 5 

Ictus,  308,  3. 

Idem,  declined,  134,  r.  6 — how  used 
207,  r.  27— with  dative,  222,  r.  7 
how  otherwise  construed,  222,  r.  7. 

Ides,  326. 

Idiotism,  325,  6. 

Idus,  adjectives  in,  129,  2. 

Ies,  adverbs  in,  192,  II.,  3. 

Ii,  in  gen.,  contracted,  52. 

lie,  nouns  in,  100,  9. 

His,  adjectives  in,  129,  4. 

llle,  declined,  134 — how  used,  207,  R.  24 
—with  hie,  207,  r.  23. 

Illic,  how  declined,  134,  r.  3. 

Im,  in  pres.  subj.,  162,  1 — adverbs  in, 
192, 1,  and  II. 

Imonium,  nouns  in,  100,  6— >and  imoniai 
verbals  in,  102,3. 

Imperative,  143,  3— its  time,  145,  r.  3— 
how  used,  267. 

Imperfect  tense,  145,  II. 

Impersonal  verbs,  184— list  of  in  2d  conj., 
169— their  construction,  209,  R.  3. 

In,  government  of,  235,  (2.) 

Inceptive  verbs,  187,  II.,  2 — list  of,  173. 

Increment,  of  nouns,  286  ;  sing,  num., 
287  ;  plur.  num,  288— of  verbs,  289. 

Incrementum,  324,  22. 

Indeclinable,  nouns,  94 — adjectives,  115, 
3. 

Indefinite,  adjectives,  104 — pronouns, 
138— adverbs,  191,  R.  4. 

Independent  clauses,  203. 

Indicative  mood,  143,  1 — its  tenses,  145 
—how  used,  259 — its  tenses  used  one 
for  another,  259. 

Indirect  questions,  subj.  in,  265. 

Induo  and  exuo,  construction  of,  in  pass., 
234;  in  act.,  251,  r.  2. 

Inferiority,  how  denoted,  122. 

Infinitive,  143,  4— its  tenses,  145,  r.  4 
— as  a  logical  subject,  201,  IV.— how 
modified, 202,  III. — with  subject-nom., 
209,  k.  5— for  gen.,  213,  R.4— its  sub- 
ject, 239 — construction  and  meaning 
of  its  tenses,  268 — subject  of  a  verb, 
269 — depending  on  a  verb,  270 ;  on 
an  adjective  or  noun,  270,  R.  1 — omit- 
ted, 270,  r.  3 — without  a  subject,  after 
what  verbs  used,  271 — with  a  subject, 
after  what  verbs  used,  272  and  273 — 
how  translated,  272,  r.  3 — used  like  a 
noun,  273,  n.— its  place,  279, 11. 

In  fit,  183,  14,  and  180,  N. 

Inflection,  25. 

Inquam,  183,  5 — its  place  in  a  sentence 
279,  6. 


INDEX. 


317 


Instrument,  abl.  of,  247. 

Intensive,    pronouns,   135— verbs,   187, 

II.  5. 
Interdico,  construction  of,  251,  R.  2. 
Interest.     See  Refert. 
Interjections,    19$ — with   nom.,  209,  R. 

13— with  dat.,228,  (3,)— with  acc.,238, 

2 — with  voc,  240 — O,  heu,  &c,  not 

elided,  305. 
Intermediate  clauses,  subj.  in,  266. 
Interrogative,  adjectives,  104  and  121 — 

pronouns,  137  5  when  indefinite,  137,  N. 
Inus,  adjectives  in,  128,  1,  2,  and  6. 
Io,  verbals  in,  102,  7. 
Ionic,  metre,  317  and  303 — a  majore,  317, 

I.— «a  minore,  317,  II. 
Ipse,  declined,  135— how  used,  207,  R. 

28— used  reflexively,  208,  (4,)— with 

inter,  208,  (5.) 
Iri,  with  supine  in  um,  276,  II.,  R.  3. 
Iron  age.  329,  4. 
Irony,  324,  4. 
Irregular,  nouns,  92 — adjectives,  115 — 

verbs,  178-182. 
Js,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  62  and  63  j  gen. 

of,  74 — final,  quantity  of,  301. 
/*,  declined,  134 — how  used,  207,  R.  26. 
Iste,  how  declined,  134 — how  used,  207, 

r.  25. 
Istic  and  illic  declined,  134,  R.  3. 
lias,  ia,  itia,  ities,  imonia,  iiitdo,  itus, 

and  tus,  abstracts  in,  101. 
Iter,  declined,  57 — with  ace.  of  place, 

237,  R.  1— increments  of,  286,  2. 
Iter  and  er,  adverbs  in,  192,  II.  and  IV. 
Itus,  adverbs  in,  192,  I.  and  II. 
Ium,  verbals  in,  102,  2. 
— —  or  itium,  nouns  in,  100,  5. 
lus,  genitives  in,  how  pronounced,  15— 

in  what  adjectives  found,  107— quan- 
tity of  i  in,  283,  I.,  e.  4. 
Iv    and   itu,   in    2d   and    3d   roots    of 

verbs,  175. 


J. 

Jarto,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 

Jubeo,  construction  of,  223,  R.2,  (2,)  and 

273,2. 
Jurum,  quantity  of  its  compounds,  283, 

Jupiter  declined,  85. 
Jusjurandum  declined,  91. 
Juvat,  &e,  ace.  after,  229,  r.  7. 


K. 

K,  when  used,  2. 

Key  to  the  odes  of  Horace,  321. 

27  • 


L,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66  5  gen.  of,  75 

—final,  quantity  of,  299. 
Lcetor,  gaudeo,  &c,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 
Latin  grammar,  its  divisions,  1. 
Leading  clause,  subject  and  verb,  203, 3. 
Lentus,  adjectives  in,  128,  4. 
Letters,  2— -division    of,  3 — sounds  of, 

7 — numeral,  118,  7. 
Licet,  with  subjunctive,  263,  2. 
Liquids,  3. 
Lit&tes,  324,  9. 

Loading,  verbs  of,  with  abl.,  249. 
Logical,  subject,  201 — predicate,  202. 
Long  syllable,  282,  2. 


M. 


M  final,  quantity  of,  299,  2— elided,  305, 

2. 
Malo  conjugated,  178,  3. 
Manner,  adverbs  of,   191,  III. — abl.  of, 

247  ;  with  prep.  247,  r.  3. 
Masculine,  nouns  of  3d  dec,  58  j  exc. 

in,  59-61— caesura,  310,  v.  1. 
Materfamilias  declined,  91. 
Means,  abl.  of,  247 — ace.  of,  with  prep., 

247,  r.  4. 
Measure  or  metre,  a,  303. 
Memini,  183,  3— with  gen.  or  ace.  216. 
Men  or  mentum,  verbals  in,  102,  4. 
Met,  enclitic,  133,  R.  2. 
Metalepsis,  324,  6. 
Metaphor,  324,  1. 
Metathesis,  322. 


Metonymy,  324,  2. 
Metre,  303— he 


ow  divided,  303 — different 

kinds  of,  310-317. 
Metres,  compound,  318 — Horatian,  320. 
Mens,  how  declined,  139. 
Mi/itice,  construction  of,  221,  R.  2. 
Mille,  its  use,  118,  6. 
Mino  and  minor,  in  obsolete  imperatives, 

162,  5. 
Misceo,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 
Misereor,  miseresco,  &.e,  with  gen.,  215. 
Mwe~ret,  with  gen.,  215 — with  ace,  229, 

R.  6. 

Modi,  annexed  to  pronouns,  134,  R.  5. 

Modified,  subject,  201,  III. }  itself  modi- 
fied, 201,  III.,  r.  6— predicate,  202, 
III. 

Modify  or  limit,  in  what  sense  used,  201, 

II.,  R. 

Modb,  with  subjunctive,  263, 2. 

Money,  mode  of  reckoning,  327. 

Monocolon,  319. 

Monoptotes.  94. 

Monosyllables,  in  e,  quantity  of,  295,  K. 


318 


INDEX. 


4— in  o,  do.  297,  e.  1— their  place. 
279,  8. 

Moods,  143. 

Motion  or  tendency,  verbs  of,  their  con- 
struction, 225,  4,  and  237,  r.  3. 

Mutes,  3 — and  liquids  in  prosody,  283, 
IV.,  e.  2. 

Muto,  with  abl.,  2*5,  II. 


N. 


N,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66  ;  gen.  of,  70 
and  71— final,  quantity  of,  299. 

Names  of  persons,  order  of,  279,  9. 

Nascor,  with  abl.,  246,  r.  1. 

Natusl  &c,  with  abl.,  246. 

Ne,  with  subj.,  262— omitted  after  cave, 
262,  r.  6— after  metuo,  fee,  262,  r.7— 
with  subj.,  denoting  a  command,  &e, 
260,  r.  6— with  imperat.,  267,  R.  1— 
followed  by  quidem,  279,  3. 

Negatives,  two,  their  force,  277,  R.  3-5. 

Nemo,  for  nullus,  207,  R.  31. 

Neoterism,  325,  3. 

Nequeo,  how  conjugated,  182,  r.  3. 

Nequis,  how  declined,  138,  2. 

Neuter,  nouns,  34;  of  3d  dec,  66]  exc. 
in,  66  and  67 — adjectives  and  adj.  pro- 
nouns, with  gen.,  212,  R.  3  ;  ace.  of, 
with  another  ace.  after  active  verbs, 
231,  R.  5 — verbs,  with  ace,  232 ;  with 
abl.  of  agent,  248,  r.2 — passive  verbs, 
142,  r.  2 ;  participles  of,  162,  18. 

Neuter,  how  declined,  107 — use  of,  with 
gen.,  212,  r.  2,  N.  1. 

Neutral  passive  verbs,  142,  r.  3. 

Nitor,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 

Nolo  conjugated,  178,  2. 

Nominative,  37— construction  of,  209  and 
210— after  interjections,  209,  r.  13— 
plural,  3d  dec,  83;  of  adjectives,  3d 
dec,  113.  See  Subject-nominative  and 
Predicate-nominative. 

Ncm,om\ttedaSternonmodo,&,c.,277}R.6. 

Nones,  326. 

Nostras,  how  declined,  139. 

Nostrum  after  partitives,  212,  r.  2,  N.  2. 

Nouns,  26-103 — proper,  common,  ab- 
stract, and  collective,  26 — gender  of, 
27-34— number  of,  35— cases  of,  36 
and  37— declension  of,  38-40— of  3d 
dec,  mode  of  declining,  55— com- 
pound, 91 — irregular,  92— variable,  92 
—defective,  in  case,  94;  in  number,  95 
and  96 — differing  in  meaning  in  dif- 
ferent numbers,  97 — redundant,  99 — 
verbal,  102 — derivation  of,  100-102 — 
composition  of,  103— how  modified, 
201,  III.,  r.  1 — used  as  adjectives,  205, 
R.  11. 


Ns,  participials  and  participles  in,  con 
struction  of,  213,  r.  1  and  3. 

Number,  of  nouns,  35 — of  verbs,  146. 

Numbers,  cardinal,  117  and  118 — ordi- 
nal, 119  and  120— distributive,  119 
and  120. 

Numerals — adjectives,  104;  classes  of 
117  ;  with  gen.,212,  r.2— letters,  118 
7 — adverbs,  119 — multiplicative,  121 
—proportional,  121 — temporal,  121— 
interrogative,  121. 

Nunquis,  how  declined,  137,  R.  3. 


O. 

O,  sound  of,  7  and  8 — nouns  in,  gender 
of,  58  and  59 ;  gen.  of,  69 — adverbs 
in,  192— increment  in,  3d  dec,  287, 3 ; 
plur.,  288 ;  of  verbs,  290 — final,  quan- 
tity of,  297. 

O!  si,  with  subjunctive,  263. 

Oblique  cases,  what,  37 — their  place, 
279,  10  and  2. 

Obliviscor,  with  gen.  or  ace,  216. 

Object  of  an  active  verb,  229. 

Objective  genitive,  211,  r.  2 — dative 
used  instead  of,  211,  R.  5. 

Octonarius,  iambic,  314,  III. 

Odi,  183,  1. 

OUi,  iotUli,\2A>,  r.  1. 

Omission,  of  ar  in  gen.  plur.,  1st  dec, 
43— of  i  in  gen.  sing.,  2d  dec,  52— of 
e  in  voc  sing.,  2d  dec,  52— of  or  in 
gen.  plur.,  2d  dec,  53— of  e,  in  gen. 
of  nouns  in  ter  and  ber,  71 — of  con- 
necting vowel,  150,  5 — of  v,  &c,  is, 
iss,  and  sis,  in  second  root,  162,  7 — of 
reduplication  in  compound  verbs,  163, 
4,  e.  1 — of  pronoun  in  case  of  appo- 
sition, 204,  r.  4— of  a  noun  to  which 
an  adj.  belongs,  205,  r.  7,  and  252,  r. 
3— of  the  antecedent,  206,  (3)  and  (4) 
— of  meus,  &c,  used  reflexively,  207, 
R.  38— of  nominative,  209,  r.  2  and  3 
—of  verb,  209,  R.  4,  and  229,  R.  3-^ 
of  a  noun  limited  by  gen.,  211,  r.  8— 
of  gen.,  211,  r.  9— of  a  partitive,  212. 
r.  1,  n.  3 — of  subject  ace,  239  and 
269,  R.  1 — of  ace  after  an  active  verb, 
229,  r.  4— of  prep.  232,  (2,)  235,  r.5, 
241,  r.  4,  and  248,  R.  3— of  voc,  240 
—of  quhm,  256 — of  participle  in  abl. 
absolute,  257,  r.  7— of  ut  with  subj., 
262,  r.  4— of  ne  after  cave,  262,  R.  6 
—-of  non  after  non  modd,  &e,  277,  R. 
6— of  conjunctions,  278,  R.  6 — of.;  in 
composition,  307. 

Opus  and  usus,  with  gen.  and  ace,  211, 
r.  11— with  abl.,  243— how  used.  243. 

R.2. 


INDEX. 


319 


Or,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  58  and  61 ; 

genitive  of,  70  and  71 — verbals   in, 

102, 1. 
Oratio  obliqua,  266,  1  and  2,  and  273,  3 

—tenses  of,  266,  2,  r.  4. 
Order,  adverbs  of,  191,  I. 
Ordinal  numbers,  119  and  120. 
Orium,  verbals  in,  102,  8. 
Orthoepy,  6-23. 
Orthography,  2-5. 
Os,  nouns  in,  of  3d  dec.,  gender  of,  58 

and  61  ;  gen.  of,  75 — final,  sound  of, 

8,  E.  3 ;  quantity  of,  300. 
Osus,  adjectives  in,  128,  4. 
Ovat,  183,  15. 
Oxymbron,  324,  28 


P. 


Parabola,  324,  30. 

Paradigms,  of  nouns,  1st  dec.,  41  ;  2d 
dec,  46  j  3d  dec,  57;  4th  dec,  87: 
5th  dec,  90 — of  adjectives,  1st  and  2d 
dec,  105-107;  3d  dec,  108-111— of 
verbs,  sum,  153;  1st  conj.,  155  and 
156  ;  2d  conj.,  157  ;  3d  conj.,  158  and 
159;  4th  conj.,  160;  deponent,  161; 
periphrastic  conj.,  162 ;  defective,  183; 
impersonal,  184. 

Paragoge,  322. 

Paregmenon,  324,  24. 

Parelcon,  323,  2,  (1.) 

Parenthesis,  323,  4,  (6.) 

Paronomasia,  324,  25. 

Participial  adjectives,  130. 

Participles,  148,  1— in  us,  how  declined, 
105 — in  ns,  do.,  Ill — of  neuter  verbs, 
162,  16— of  deponent  verbs,  162,  17— 
of  neuter  passive  verbs,  162,  18— in 
rus,  gen.  plur.  of,  162, 19 — compound- 
ed with  in,  162,  21 — when  they  be- 
come adjectives,  162,  22 — how  modi- 
fied, 201,  HI.,  R.3— agreement  of,  205 ; 
with  predicate-nom.,  instead  of  sub- 
ject, 205,  R.  5 — perfect,  denoting  ori- 
fin,  with  abl.,  246 — their  government, 
74 — their  time,  how  determined,  274, 
2 — their  various  significations,  274,  2 
and  3— perfect,  with  habeo,  &c,  274, 
2,  r.  4— for  a  verbal  noun,  274,  2,  r. 
5— for  clauses,  274,  3. 

Particles,  190. 

Partitive  adjectives,  104. 

Partitives,  with  plural  verbs,  209,  R.  11 
—gen.  after,  212— omitted,  212,  r.  2, 
N.  3— ace  or  abl.  after,  212,  r.  2,  n. 
4. 

Parts  of  speech,  24. 

Passive  voice,  141 — with  latter  of  two 
ace,  234— construction  of,  234. 


Patrial,  nouns,  100, 2 — adjectives,  104 — 

pronouns,  139. 
Patronymics,  100— quantity  of  their  pe 

nult,  291,  4  and  5. 
Pentameter  verse,  311. 
Pentaptotes,  94. 
Penthemimeris,  304,  5. 
Penult,  13 — quantity  of,  291  j  of  proper 

names,  293. 
Perfect  tense,  145,  IV. 
Perfects  of  two  syllables,  quantity  of, 

284,  E.  1. 
Period  defined,  280. 
Periphrasis,  323?  2,  (4.) 
Periphrastic  conjugations,  162, 14  and  15. 
Personal  terminations  of  verbs,  147,  3. 
Personification,  324,  34. 
Persons  of  verbs,  147— with  nominatives 

of  different  persons,  209,  R.  12,  (7.) 
Phalaecian  verse,  315,  HI. 
Pherecratic  verse,  316,  V. 
Piget,  with  gen.,  215— with  ace,  229,  R. 

6. 
Place,  adverbs  of,  191,  I.— gen.  of,  221 

—ace  of,  237 ;  dat.  for,  237,  R.  3— 

where,  abl.  of.  254 — whence,  abl.  of, 

255. 
Plenty  or  want,  adj.  of,  with  abl.,  250. 
Pleonasm,  323,  2. 
Pluperfect  tense,  145,  V. 
Plural  nouns  used  for  singulars,  98. 
Plus  declined,  110. 
Pcenilet,  with  gen.,  215— with  ace,  229, 

R.  6. 
Polyptoton,  324,  23. 
Polysyndeton,  323,  2,  (2.) 
Position  in  prosody,  283,  IV. 
Positive  degree,  123. 
Possessive,  adjectives,  104— pronouns, 

139;   how  used,  207,   R.  36;    when 

reflexive,   omission   of,    207,   R.  36 ; 

used   for  subjective    and    possessive 

gen.,  211,  r.  3;  mea,tua,  &e,  after 

refert  and  interest,  219,  R.  1. 
Possum  conjugated,  154,  6. 
Post,  how  pronounced,  8,  E.  4. 
Potior,  with  abl.,  245— with  gen.,  220, 

(4.) 
Prce  in  composition,  its  quantity,  283, 

II.,  E.  1. 

Prceditus,  with  abl.,  244. 

Predicate  of  a  proposition,  200  and  202. 

Predicate-nominative,  210— differing  in 
number  from  the  subject-nominative, 
210,  r.  2— after  what  verbs,  210,  R.  3 
and  4. 

Predicate-accusative,  210— dative,  210. 

Prepositional  adjectives,  130. 

Prepositions,  195-197 — in  composition, 
196 ;  force  of,  197;  change  of,  103,  5 
— inseparable,  197 — with  an  ace,  195 


320 


INDEX. 


and  235— with  an  abl.,  195  and  241— 
with  an  ace.  and  abl.,  195,  and  235, 
(2)-(5)— bow  modified,  201,  III.,  r. 
5 — verbs  compounded  with,  with  da- 
tive, 224;  with  ace,  233;  with  abl.. 
242— omitted,  232,  (2,)  235,  r.  5,  and 
£41,  r.  4— their  place,  279,  10— quan- 
tity of  di,  se,  and  red,  285,  R.  2  and  3. 

Present  tense,  145, 1. 

Preteritive  verbs,  183,  1. 

Priapean  verse,  310,  II. 

Price,  ablative  of,  252— expressed  by 
tanti,  quanti,  pluris,  minoris,  252. 

Primus,  medius,  &.C.,  signification  of, 
205,  r.  17— their  place,  279,  7. 

Priusquam,  by  what  mood  followed,  263, 
3. 

Pro,  in  composition,  quantity  of,  285, 
E.  5. 

Procul,  with  abl.,  241,  R.  2. 

Prolepsis,  323,  1,  (4.) 

Pronouns,  132-139— simple,  132— neuter 
with  gen.,  212,  r.  3,  N.  1. 

Proper  nouns,  2o. 

Propior  and  proxtmus,  with  ace,  222, 
R.  5. 

Proposition,  200— analysis  of,  281. 

Prosody,  1,  and  282-321— figures  of, 
305-307. 

Prosopopoeia,  324,  34. 

Prosthesis,  322. 

Prosum,  154,  5. 

Protasis  and  apodbsis,  261. 

Pte,  enclitic,  133,  R.  2,  and  139. 

Pudet,  with  gen.,  215— with  ace,  229, 
r.  6. 

Punctuation,  5. 

Punishment,  words  denoting,  construc- 
tion of,  217,  R.  3. 

Purpose  denoted,  by  tit  with  subj.,  262 
— by  participles,  274,  2,  R.  2,  6  and  7 
—by  infin.,  271— by  gerund,  275,  R. 
2 — ov  supine  in  urn,  276,  II. 


Q. 


Qucbso,  183,  7. 

Quality,  adverbs  of,  191,  III. 

Quam,  with  the  superlative,  127 — omit- 
ted aAer  plus,  minus,  amplius,  &e, 
256,  r.  6  and  7. 

Quamvis,  with  the  subj.,  263,  2. 

Quantity,  adjectives  of,  with  gen.,  212, 
R.  3,  N.  1 ;  after  sum  and  verbs  of 
valuing,  214— adverbs  of,  with  gen., 
212,  r!  4. 

Quantity,  marks  of,  5 — in  orthoepy,  13 — 
in  prosody,  282,  1 — general  rules  of, 
283— special  rules  of,  284— of  penults, 
291— of  antepenults,  292— of  penults 


of  proper  names,  293— of  final  sylla- 
bles, 294. 
Quasi,  with  subj.,  263,  2. 
Queo,  how  conjugated,  182,  R.  3. 
Qui,  declined,   136 — interrogative,  137 

— person  of,  209,  R.  6— with  subjunc- 
tive, 264. 
Quicunque,  how  declined,  136,  r.  2 — 

how  used,  207,  R.  29. 
Quidam,    how  declined,    133,  5 — how 

used,  207,  r.  33. 
Quidem,  place  of,  279,  3. 
Quilibet,   how  declined,   133,    5 — how 

used,  207,  r.  34. 
Quin,  with  subj.,  262  and  ib.,  r.  10. 
Quis,  declined,  137 — and  qui,  for  aliquis, 

&c,  137,  R.  (c.) 
Quisnam,  quinam,  how  declined,  137,  2. 
Quispiam,   how  declined,  138,  3 — how 

used,  207,  r.  30. 
Quisquam,  how  declined,  138,  3 — how 

used,  207,  r.  31. 
Quisque,   how   declined,   138,    3 — how 

used,  207,  r.  35— its  place,  279,  14. 
Quisquis  declined,  136,  R.  2. 
Quivis,  how  declined,  133, 5— how  used, 

207,  R.  34. 
Quo  and  quomvnus,  with  subjunctive,  262 

and  ib.,  r.  9. 
Quoad,  with  subj.,  263,  4. 
Quod  referring  to  a  preceding  statement, 

206,  (14.) 
Quoqtie,  place  of,  279, 3. 


R  final,  quantity  of,  299. 

Reapse,  135,  r.  3. 

Recordor  and  reminiscor,  with  gen.  or 

ace,  216. 
Reckoning,   Roman  mode  of,  326  and 

327. 
Redundant,  nouns,  99— 'adjectives,  116 

— verbs,  185. 
Reduplication,  163,  R.— quantity  of,  284, 

Refert  and  interest,  with  gen.,  214  and 
219 — with  the  adj.  pronouns  mea,Si,c, 
219,  R.  1. 

Reflexive  pronouns,  139,  R.  2— how 
used,  208 — for  demonstratives,  208, 
(6,)— omitted,  229,  R.  3— in  oratio  ob- 
liqua,  266,  r.  3. 

Relative  pronouns,  136. 

Relatives,  agreement  of,  206— omitted, 
206,  (5,) — in  the  case  of  the  antece- 
dent, 206,  (6,) — referring,  to  nouns  of 
different  genders,  206,  (9  ;)  to  a  prop, 
osition,  206,  (13,) — agreeing  with  a 
noun  implied,  206,  (11,)— adjectives, 


INDEX. 


321 


construction  of,  206,  (16,)— with  sub- 
junctive, 264 — their  place,  279,  13. 

Responsives,  case  of,  204,  R.  11. 

RespubLica  declined,  91. 

Rhetoric,  figures  of,  324. 

Rhythm,  308. 

Rimus  and  ritis,  quantity  of,  290,  E. 
(I.)  4. 

Root  of  words  inflected,  40,  10. 

Roots  of  verbs,  150,  1— special,  150,  2 
— second  and  third,  how  formed, 
150,  3 — first,  its  derivatives,  151,  1; 
second,  do.,  151,2;  third,  do.,  151,3 
— second  and  third,  formation  of,  1st 
com.,  164-166  ;  2d  conj.,  167-170 ;  3d 
conj.,  171-174 ;  4th  com.,  175-177— 
second  and  third  irregular,  1st  conj., 
165 ;  2d  conj.,  168 ;  4th  conj.,  176. 

Rus,  how  construed,  in  ace.,  237,  r.  4— 
in  at,:.,  254  and  255. 

Rus,  participle  in,  its  signification,  162, 
14,  and  274,  2,  r.  6. 


S. 


8,  sound  of,  1 1— preceded  by  a  conso- 
nant, nouns  in,  gender  of,  62  and  64 ; 
gen.  of,  77— final,  elided,  305,  2. 

Salve,  183,  9. 

Sapphic  verse,  315,  II. 

Satago,  with  gen.,  215,  (2.) 

Satis,  bene,  and  male,  verbs  compound- 
-     ed  with,  with  dat.,  225. 

Scanning,  304,  6. 

Scazon,  314,  II. 

Se  with  inter,  208,  (5.) 

Senarius,  iambic,  314. 

Sentences,  203— analysis  of,  281. 

Sentiments  of  another  in  dependent 
clauses,  by  what  mood  expressed, 
266,  3. 

Separating,  verbs  of,  with  abl.  251. 

Sere,  future  infin.  in,  162,  10. 

Sestertius,  its  value,  327 — how  denoted, 
327 — mode  of  reckoning,  327. 

Short  syllable,  282,  2. 

Silver  age,  329,  3. 

Simile,  324,  30. 

Simple,  subject,  201,  II. — predicate, 
202,  II.— sentences,  203. 

Simul,  with  abl.,  241,  r.  2. 

^iquis,  how  declined,  138,  2. 

Sis,  for  si  vis,  183,  R.  3. 

So  and  sim,  ancient  forms  of  tenses  in, 
162,  8. 

Sodes,  for  si  audes,  183,  R.  3. 

Solecism,  325,  2. 

Soleo,  how  conjugated,  142,  R.  2. 

Solus,  how  declined,  107— with  relative 
andsubj.,264.  10. 


Sotadic  verse,  317, 1. 

Space,  ace.  of,  236. 

Spondaic,  verse,  310 — tetrameter,  312. 

Stanza,  319. 

Sto,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 

Strophe,  319. 

Sub,  in  composition,  force  of,  122 — gov 
ernment  of,  235,  (2.) 

Subject,  of  a  verb,  140— of  a  proposition, 
200  and  201;  modified,  201,  III.  j  its 
place  in  a  sentence,  279,  2. 

Subject-nominative,  209 — when  omitted, 
209,  R.  1  and  2— when  wanting,  209, 
R.  3 — with  infinitive,  209,  R.5— two 
or  more  with  plural  verb,  209,  R.  12  j 
with  sing,  verb,  209,  R.  12. 

Subject-accusative,  239 — when-  omitted, 
239. 

Subjective  genitive,  211,  r.  2 — posses- 
sive pronoun  used  for,  211,  r.  3. 

Subjunctive,  143,  2 — its  tenses,  145,  R. 
2— how  used,  259— its  tenses,  various 
uses  of,  259 — for  imperative,  260,  R. 
6 — in  conditional  clauses,  261 — after 
particles,  262  and  263—  after  qui,  264 
—in  indirect  questions,  265 — in  inter- 
mediate clauses,  266 — in  oratio  obli- 
qua,  266,  1  and  2 — after  what  verbs 
used,  273. 

Substantive  pronouns,  132,  133 — as  sub- 
ject-nom.,  omitted,  209,  R.  1— dativo 
of,  redundant,  228,  N. 

Subter,  government  of,  235,  (4.) 

Sui,  declined,  133— use  of,  208. 

Sultis,  for  si  vultis,  183,  R.  3. 

Sum,  conjugated,  153— compounds  of, 
do.,  154,  5  and  6 — with  a  gen.  in  ex- 
pressions denoting  part,  property,  du- 
ty, &c,  211,  r.  8,  (3,)  and  275,  r.  1, 
(5,)— denoting  degree  of  estimation. 
214 — with  two  datives,  227— with  abl. 
of  situation,  245,  ITT. — with  abl.  deno- 
ting in  respect  to,  250,  R.  3. 

Super,  government  of,  235,  (3.) 

Superiority,  how  denoted,  123. 

Superlative  degree,  123— formation  of, 
124— with  quisque,  207,  R.  35— with 
gen.,  212,  r.  2,  and  r.  4,  n.  7. 

Supines,  148,  3 — few  in  number,  162, 11 
— in  urn,  by  what  cases  followed,  276  , 
on  what  verbs  they  depend,  276,  II.  $ 
with  eo,  276,  II.,  R.  2  and  3— in  u, 
with  what  adjectives  used,  276,  III. ; 
after  fas,  nefas,  and  opus, ^76,  I1I.,R. 
2 — of  two  syllables,  quantity  of,  284, 

E.  1. 

Suus,  use  of,  208 — referring  to  a  word 
in  the  predicate,  208,  (7,) — for  hufus, 
when  a  noun  is  omitted.  208,  (7,)— 
denoting  fit,  &c,  208. 

Syllabication,  17-23. 


322 


INDEX. 


Syllables,  quantity  of  first  and  middle, 
284 ;  of  penult,  291 :  of  antepenult, 
292  j  of  final,  294. 

Syllepsis,  323,  1,  (3.) 

Symploce,  324,  15. 

Synaeresis,  306. 

Synaloepha,  305. 

Synapheia,  307,  2. 

Synchysis,  323,  4,  (4.) 

Syncope,  322. 

Synecdoche,  234,  II.,  323,  1,  (5,)  and 
324,  3. 

Synesis,  or  synthesis,  323,  3,  (4. ) 

Synonymia,  324,  29. 

Synopsis  of  Horatian  metres,  320. 

Syntax,  1,  and  200-281. 

Systole,  307. 


T,  sound  of,  12— nouns  in,  gender  of,  66 ; 
gen.  of,  78— -final,  quantity  of)  299. 

Tcedet,  with  gen.,  215— with  ace.,  229, 
R.  6. 

Talent,  value  of,  327. 

Tanquam,  with  subj..  263,  2. 

Tanti,  quanti,  &c,  denoting  price,  252. 

Tantum,  with  gen.  plur.  and  plural  verb, 
209,  r.  11.  *      V  V 

Tautology,  325,  4. 

7V,  enclitic,  133,  R.  2. 

Tenses,  144— connection  of,  258 — simi- 
lar and  dissimilar,  258,  I.  and  II. — of 
indicative  mood^  used  one  for  another, 
259  ;  future  for  imperative,  259  ;  used 
for  subj.  in  apodosis,  259,  R.  4— of 
subi.  mood,  their  use,  260,  I.,  R.  1, 
and  II.,  r.  1 — in  protasis  and  apodo- 
sis, 261 — of  infin.  mood,  use  of,  268. 

7'emis,  with  gen.,  221,  III. — with  abl., 
241,  r.  1— place  of,  279,  10. 

Terminations,  of  words  inflected,  40 — 
of  nouns,  1st  dec,  41 ;  2d  dec,  46  ;  3d 
dec,  55;  4th  dec,  87;  5th  dec,  90— 
personal,  of  verbs,  147, 3 — verbal,  150 
— table  of  verbal,  152. 

Tetrameter,  a  priore,  312— a  posteriore, 
312. 

Tetraptotes,  94. 

Tetrastr6phon,  319. 

That,  sign  of  what  moods,  273. 

Thesis,  308. 

Time,  adverbs  of,  191,  II.— ace  of,  236 
— abl.  of,  253— expressed  by  id,  with 
a  gen.,  253,  R.  3— mode  of  reckoning, 
326 ;  table  of,  326,  6. 

Tmesis,  323,  4,  (5.) 

Tor  and  trix,  verbals  in,  102,  6. 

Towns,  names  of,  construction  of;  see 
Flaoe. 


Tric6lon,  319. 

Triemimf  ris,  304,  5. 

Trimeter  catalectic,  312,  VII. 

Triptotes,  94. 

Tristrophon,  319. 

Trochaic  or  feminine  caesura,  310,  ».  1 

Trochaic,  metre,  315  and  303— tetrametei 

catalectic,    315 dimSter  catalectic, 

315,  IV. 
Tropes,  324. 
^declined,  133. 
Tus,  adjectives  in,  128,  7. 


U. 

U,  sound  of,  7  and  8 — in  gen.  and  voc 
of  Greek  nouns,  54 — dative  in,  89— 
increment  in,  3d  dec,  287,  3;  plur., 
288 ;  of  verbs,  290— final,  quantity  of 
.298. 

fand  itu,'m  2d  and  3d  roots  of  verbs,  167. 

Ubus,  in  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  89,  5. 

Ullus,  how  declined,  107— how  used, 
207,  r.  31. 

Ulum,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

Urn,  adverbs  in,  192,  II. 

Undus,  participles  in,  162,  20. 

Unus,  declined,  107 — et  alter,  with  verbs 
singular,  209,  R.  12 — with  relative  and 
subj.,  264,  10. 

Unusquisque,  how  declined,  133,  4. 

Ur,  nouns  in,  erender  of,  66  and  67  ;  gen. 
of,  70  and  71. 

Ura,  verbals  in,  102,  7. 

Us,  nouns  in,  of  3d  dec,  gender  of,  66 
and  67;  gen.  of,  76 — verbals  in,  102,  7 
— final  quantity  of,  301. 

Usque,  with  ace,  235,  r.  3. 

Usus ;  see  Opus. 

Ut,  with  subjunctive,  262 — its  correla- 
tives, 262,  R.  1 — omitted,  262,  r.  4 — 
after  metuo,  &e,  its  meaning,  262, 
r.  7. 

Ut  si,  with  subj.,  263,  2. 

Uter,  how  declined,  107 — use  of  with 
gen.,  212,  r.  2,  n.  1. 

Utinam  and  uti,  with  subj.,  263. 

Utor,  fruor,  ccc,  with  abl.,  245 — with 
ace,  245,  I.,  R.  1. 


V. 

V  changed  to  u,  163,2. 

Valeo,  with  ace,  252,  r.  4. 

Valuing,  verbs  of,  with  gen.,  214. 

Vapulo,  142,  R.3. 

Variable  nouns,  92. 

Velut  si,  and  veluti,  with  subj.,  263,  2 

Veneo,  142,  R.  3. 


INDEX. 


323 


Verbals,  nouns,  102 ;  with  ace,  233,  N. 
— adjectives,  129. 

Verbs,  140-189— subject  of,  140— active, 
141 — neuter,  142 — neuter  passive,  142, 
R.  2 — neutral  passive,  142,  R.  3— de- 
ponent, 142,  R.  4— transitive  and  in- 
transitive, 142,  n. — principal  parts  of, 
151,  4 — neuter,  participles  of,  162,  16 
— inceptive,  173— desiderative,  187, 
II.,  3,  and  176,  n.— irregular,  178-182 
—defective,  183 — redundant,  185  and 
186— derivation  of,  187 — composition 
of,  188— changes  of,  in  composition, 
189 — compounds  from  simples  not  in 
use,  189,  n.  4 — agreement  of,  209 — 
omitted,  209,  r.  I — with  qui,  person 
of,  209,  r.  6 — agreeing  with  predicate- 
nom.,209,  R.  9 — with  collective  nouns, 
209,  R.  11 — plural,  after  two  or  more 
nominatives,  209,  R.  12 ;  after  a  nom- 
inative, with  cum  and  abl.,209,  r.  12  ; 
after  nominatives  connected  by  aut, 
209,  R.  12 — their  place  in  a  sentence, 
279,  2 ;  in  a  period,  280. 

Verses,  304— combinations  of,  in  poems, 
319. 

Versification,  302. 

Versus,  with  ace,  235,  R.  3— place  of, 
279, 10. 

Vescor,  with  abl.,  245. 

Vestrfan,  after  partitives,  212,  r.  2,  n.  2. 

Vir,  how  declined,  48. 

Vis  declined,  85. 

Vivo,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 

Vocative,  37— of  proper  names  in  ius, 
how  pronounced,  14  j  how  formed,  52 
— sing.  3d  dec,  81 — construction  of, 
240. 


Voices,  141. 

Volo  conjugated,  178. 

Vowel,  before  a  mute  and  liquid,  its 
quantity,  13,  and  283,  iV.,  E.  2— be- 
fore another  vowel,  quantity  of,  283, 
I. ;  in  Greek  words,  283,  e.  6 — before 
two  consonants,  283,  IV.— ending  first 
part  of  a  compound,  quantity  of,  285, 
R.  4. 

Vowels,  sounds  of,  7  and  8. 


w. 

Words,  division  of,  17-23— arrangement 

of,  279. 
Writers  in  different  ages,  329. 


X. 


X,  sound  of,  12— nouns  in,  gender  of, 
62  and  65;  gen.  of,  78. 


Y. 

Y,  sound  of,  7,  R.  2 — nouns  in,  gender 
of,  62 ;  gen.  of,  77— increment  in,  3d 
dec,  287,  3— final,  quantity  of,  298. 

Ys  final,  quantity  of,  301. 


Zeugma,  323,  1,  (2.) 


THE  END. 


A  f 

4iA  lw~  (fiutsU  \h 


"    MA,  -f , 
tea  lArkttJo  wiM; 


Hy  H4^~7 


A 


y.^~~*t 


~/ypr  Ph 


. 


•M 


m 


it 


c 


$ 


1*        4      # 


*^j)*<     IttV 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 
or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 
2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 

(415)642-6233 
1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books 

to  NRLF 
Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  days 

prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

llBRARYllSFOCnl'86 

FEB  1  7  200Q 


54!;>  79 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


M 


